Press Alt + R to read the document text or Alt + P to download or print.

No preview available

The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutContract Award Date: August 13 , 2018 CAG-18-120. -- Awarded to: Road Construction NW, Inc . P.O. Box 2228 Renton, WA 98056 Award Amount: $926 , 502 .50 Bidding Requirements, City of Renton Forms, Contract Forms, Conditions of the Contract, Plans and Specifications Construction of: Falcon Ridge Lift Station Replacement and Force Main Improvements PROJECT NO. WWP-27-3939 -• Summer 2018 City of Renton RH2 1055 South Grady Way ENGINEERING Renton,t WA 98057 �� " Project Manager: Michael Benoit (425)430-7206 siNCE 1978 rr CITY OF G 4FN?O? CITY OF RENTON RENTON, WASHINGTON CONTRACT DOCUMENTS for the Falcon Ridge Lift Station Replacement and Force Main Improvements PROJECT NO. WWP-27-3939 Summer 2018 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS CONTRACT FORMS CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS PLANS THE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND PLANS WERE PREPARED UNDER THE DIRECT SUPERVISION OF THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IDENTIFIED BELOW. THE CONTENT OF THIS DOCUMENT, AS A MEANS OF PROFESSIONAL SERVICE, IS PROTECTED BY 17 U.S.C. § 101, ET SEQ. AS SUCH, IT SHALL NOT BE USED, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, FOR ANY OTHER PROJECT OR PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM RH2 ENGINEERING. © 2018 RH2 ENGINEERING, INC. Prepared by: RH2 Engineering, Inc. 22722 29th Drive SE, Suite 210 Bothell, WA 98021 (425) 951-5400 (p) (425) 951-5401 (f) Project Engineer Structural Engineer Divisions 3-7 Electrical Engineer Divisions 16 & 17 Engineer In Responsible Charge Date signed: 07/05/18 Date signed: 07/05/18 Date signed: 07/05/18 Date signed: 07/05/18 RoadConstructionNorthwest,Inc.P0Box2228Renton,Washington98056(425)254-9999(425)254-1334fax22August2018To:CityofRenton-PublicWorks1055SouthGradyWayRenton,WA98057ATTN:MichaelA.BenoitRE:Renton—FalconRidgeLiftStationReplacementandForceMainImprovementsCityofRentonProjectNo:WWP-27-03939IIRCNWProjectNo.1811SUBJ:BidAwardLetter—RequestedInformationDearMichael,Peryourrequestintheawardletterdated14August2018,pleasefindbelowalistofourResponsibleOfficer,JobForeman,andBondingAgent.I,JeffreyM.Kanyer(President),amtheofficerauthorizedtosignthecontractonbehalfofRoadConstructionNorthwest,Inc.andyouwillfindanexampleofmysignaturebelow.ResponsibleOfficer-MatthewWagester,VicePresidentP0Box2228,Renton,WA98056(425)531-0371ProjectManager-GordonLeeP0Box2228,Renton,WA98056(425)777-7323JobSuperintendent—BrianMenard,Superintendent/CompetentPersonP0Box2228,Renton,WA98056(425)531-1624JobForeman-TBDBondingAgent-EricZimmerman,PropelInsurance1201PacificAveSuite1000,Tacoma,WA98402(800)499-0933Thankyou.WearelookingforwardtoanothersuccessfulprojectwiththeCityofRenton.Sincerely,/J5ffreHv1.anyer1resident 02_CONTENTS S-3939.doc\ Falcon Ridge Lift Station Replacement and Force Main Improvements WWP-27-3939 CONTRACT DOCUMENT TABLE OF CONTENTS Summary of Fair Practices Policy Summary of Americans with Disability Act Policy Scope of Work Vicinity Map Instructions to Bidders Call for Bids * Proposal & Combined Affidavit & Certificate Form: Non-Collusion Anti-Trust Claims Minimum Wage Form * Department of Labor and Industries Certificate of Registration * Proposal Bid Bond Form * Schedule of Prices ** Certificate of Compliance with Wage Payment Statutes *** Subcontractor List  Bond to the City of Renton  Fair Practices Policy Affidavit of Compliance  Contract Agreement Prevailing Minimum Hourly Wage Rates Special Provisions Technical Specifications Standard Plans Documents marked as follows must be submitted at the time noted and must be executed by the Contractor, President and Vice President or Secretary if corporation by -laws permit. All pages must be signed. In the event another person has been duly authorized to execute contracts, a copy of the corporation minutes establishing this authority must be attached to the bid document. * Submit with Bid ** Submit with Bid or within 24 hours of bid ***Submit with Bid or within 1 hour of bid  Submit at Notice of Award CITY OF RENTON Public Works Department 1055 South Grady Way Renton, Washington 98057 04_SCOPE S-3939.doc\ CITY OF RENTON Falcon Ridge Lift Station Replacement and Force Main Improvements WWP-27-3939 SCOPE OF WORK The work involved under the terms of this contract document shall be full and complete installation of the facilities, as shown on the plans and a s described in the construction specifications, to include but not be limited to: An approximately 23-feet deep excavation to construct a below grade precast 6 -foot diameter wetwell with submersible pumps that will be located within an 8-foot diameter precast concrete structure; valve and meter vault with mechanical components, combination air valve manholes, forcemain access manholes, approximately 25 linear feet of 8” gravity sewer and approximately 25 linear feet of 4” forcemain, an oil-water separator vault, above-grade CMU motor-control building, emergency generator, electrical conduit extension and service modification, site gate and fencing, tie-ins to existing sewer system, and abandonment of the existing Falcon Ridge lift station. The project also includes private road repair as directed by the City, and seal coat the road between Falcon Ridge access gate and the lift station. Any contractor connected with this project shall comply with all Fed eral, State, County, and City codes and regulations applicable to such work and perform the work in accordance with the plans and specifications of this contract document. A total of 120 working days will be allowed for the completion of this project. S E 8 th D rS 2nd St Maple Valley HwyMain Ave SF actory Pl N N 3rd St Benson Dr SLoganAve SSunsetBlvd NEBronsonWay STalbot Rd SS W S u n se tB lvd N 4th St B ronson W ay N Rai ni er Ave SRainier Ave NN E 3 rd S tHouser W ay SS G rady W ayLogan Ave NPark Ave NI-405 FWYRentonAve ExtS 3rd St 116th Ave SEBenson Rd SAirport Way Puget Dr SESunset Blvd NRoyalHillsDr SEHouserWay NSE 8th PlCedar Ridge Dr SE SR 167FALCON RIDGE LIFT STATION REPLACEMENTAND FORCE MAIN IMPROVEMENTS q PROJECTLOCATION INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. Sealed bids for this proposal will be received by the City of Renton at the office of the Renton City Clerk, Renton City Hall, until the time and date specified in the Call for Bids. At this time the bids will be publicly opened and read, after which the bids will be considered and the award made as early as practicable. No proposal may be changed or withdrawn after the time set for receiving bids. Proposals shall be submitted on the forms attached hereto. 2 Any omissions, discrepancies or need for interpretation should be brought, in writing, to the attention of the Project Engineer. Written addenda to clarify questions that arise may then be issued. No oral statements by Owner, Engineer, or other representative of the owner shall, in any way, modify the contract documents, whether made before or after letting the contract. 3 The work to be done is shown in the plans and / or specifications. Quantities are understood to be only approximate. Final payment will be based on actual quantities and at the unit price bid. The City reserves the right to add or to eliminate portions of that work as deemed necessary. 4. Plans may be examined and copies obtained at the Public Works Department Office. Bidders shall satisfy themselves as to the local conditions by inspection of the site. 5. The bid price for any item must include the performance of all work necessary for completion of that item as described in the specifications. 6. The bid price shall be stated in terms of the units indicated and as to a total amount. In the event of errors, the unit price bid will govern. Illegible figures will invalidate the bid. 7. The right is reserved to reject any and/or all bids and to waive informalities if it is deemed advantageous to the City to do so. 8. A certified check or satisfactory bid bond made payable without reservation to the Director of Finance of the City of Renton in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid shall accompany each bid proposal. Checks will be returned to unsuccessful bidders immediately following the decision as to award of contract. The check of the successful bidder will be returned provided he enters into a contract and furnishes a satisfactory performance bond covering the full amount of the work within ten days after receipt of notice of intention to award contract. Should he fail, or refuse to do so, the check shall be forfeited to the City of Renton as liquidated damage for such failure. 9. All bids must be self-explanatory. No opportunity will be offered for oral explanation except as the City may request further information on particular points. 10. The bidder shall, upon request, furnish information to the City as to his financial and practical ability to satisfactorily perform the work. 11. Payment for this work will be made in Cash Warrants. 06_INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS - S-3939.doc 12. The contractor shall obtain such construction insurance (e.g. fire and extended coverage, worker's compensation, public liability, and property damage as identified within Special Provisions, Specification Section 1-07.18 “Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance”. 13. The contractor, prior to the start of construction, shall provide the City of Renton a detailed bar chart type construction schedule for the project. 14 Before starting work under this contract, the Contractor is required to supply information to the City of Renton on all chemical hazards Contractor is bringing into the work place and potentially exposing City of Renton Employees. 15. Payment of retainage shall be done in accordance with Section 1-09.9(1) "Retainage”. 16. Basis for Approval The construction contract will be awarded by the City of Renton to the lowest, responsible, responsive bidder. The bidder shall bid on all bid schedules items of all schedules set forth in the bid forms to be considered responsive for award. The total price of all schedules will be used to determine the successful low responsive bidder. Partial bids will not be accepted. The owner reserves the right to award any or all schedules of the Bid to meet the needs of the City. The intent is to award to only one BIDDER. 17. Trench Excavation Safety Systems As required by RCW 39.04.180, on public works projects in which trench excavation will exceed a depth of four feet, any contract therefor shall require adequate safety systems for the trench excavation that meet the requirements of the Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act, Chapter 49.17 RCW. These requirements shall be included in the Bid Schedule as a separate item. The costs of trench safety systems shall not be considered as incidental to any other contract item and any attempt to include the trench safety systems as an incidental cost is prohibited. 18. Payment of Prevailing Wages In accordance with Revised Code of Washington Chapters 39.12 and 49.28 as amended or supplemented herein, there shall be paid to all laborers, workmen or mechanics employed on this contract the prevailing rate of wage for an hour's work in the same trade or occupation in the area of work regardless of any contractual relationship which may exist, or be alleged to exist, between the CONTRACTOR and any laborers, workmen, mechanics or subconsultants. The most recent issue of the prevailing wage rates is included within these specifications under section titled “Prevailing Minimum Hourly Wage Rates”. The Contractor is Responsible for obtaining updated issues of the prevailing wage rate forms as they become available during the duration of the contract. The wage rates shall be included as part of any subcontracts the Contractor may enter into for work on this project. 19. Pollution Control Requirements Work under this contract shall meet all local, state and federal requirements for the prevention of environmental pollution and the preservation of public natural resources. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct the work in accordance with all applicable pollution control laws. The CONTRACTOR shall 06_INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS - S-3939.doc comply with and be liable for all penalties, damages, and violations under Chapter 90.48 RCW, in performance of the work. The CONTRACTOR shall also comply with Article 4 in the Puget Sound Air Pollution Control Agency Regulation III regarding removal and encapsulation of asbestos materials. 20. Standard Specifications All work under this contract shall be performed in accordance with the following standard specifications except as may be exempted or modified by the City of Renton Supplemental Specifications, Special Provisions other sections of these contract documents. These standard specifications are hereby made a part of this contract and shall control and guide all activities within this project whether referred to directly, paragraph by paragraph, or not. 1. WSDOT/APWA "2016 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction" and "Division 1 APWA Supplement" hereinafter referred to by the abbreviated title "Standard Specifications." A. Any reference to "State," "State of Washington," "Department of Transportation," "WSDOT," or any combination thereof in the WSDOT/APWA standards shall be modified to read "City of Renton," unless specifically referring to a standard specification or test method. B. All references to measurement and payment in the WSDOT/APWA standards shall be detected and the measurement and payment provisions of Section 1-09.14, Measurement and Payment (added herein) shall govern. 21. A geotechnical engineering evaluation report has been completed based on subsurface explorations at the lift station site and is available for information purposes only. A copy may be obtained on-line through Builders Echange of Washington, Inc., at http://www.bxwa.com. Click on “bxwa.com”; “Posted Projects”, “Public Works”, “City of Renton”, “Projects Bidding”. The Bidders shall familiarize themselves adequately with the project site and existing subsurface condition as needed to submit their bid. Upon approval of the City, the Bidder may make such subsurface explorations and investigations as they see fit. The Bidder shall be responsible for protection of all existing facilities, utilities and other buried or surface improvements and shall restore the site to the satisfaction of the City. 22. Bidder’s Checklist  It is the responsibility of each bidder to ascertain if all the documents listed on the attached index are included in their copy of the bid specifications. If documents are missing, it is the sole responsibility of the bidder to contact the City of Renton to obtain the missing documents prior to bid opening time.  Have you submitted, as part of your bid, all documents marked in the index as “Submit with Bid”?  Has the bid bond or certified check been enclosed?  Is the amount of the bid guaranty at least 5 percent of the total amount of bid including sales tax?  Has the proposal been signed?  Have you bid on ALL ITEMS and ALL SCHEDULES?  Have you submitted the Subcontractors List (If required)?  Have you reviewed the Prevailing Wage Requirements? (continued) 06_INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS - S-3939.doc  Have you certified receipt of addenda, if any?  Have you submitted the Department of Labor and Industries Certificate of Registration form?  Have you submitted or are prepared to submit within 24 hours of the bid the Certificate of Compliance with Wages Paid Statutes form? CAG-18-120CITYOFRENTONCALLFORBIDSFalconRidgeLiftStationReplacementandForceMainImprovementsWWP-27-3939Sealedbidswillbereceiveduntil2:30p.m.Tuesday,July31,2018attheCityClerksoffice,7thfloorandwillbeopenedandpubliclyreadinconferenceroom511Tuesday,July3;stonthe5thfloor,RentonCityHall,1055SouthGradyWay,RentonWA98057.Theworktobeperformedwithin120workingdaysfromthedateofcommencementunderthiscontractshallinclude,butnotbelimitedto:Anapproximately23-feetdeepexcavationtoconstructabelowgradeprecast6-footdiameterwetwellwithsubmersiblepumpsthatwillbelocatedwithinan8-footdiameterprecastconcretestructure;valveandmetervaultwithmechanicalcomponents,combinationairvalvemanholes,forcemainaccessmanholes,approximately25linearfeetof8”gravitysewerandapproximately25linearfeetof4”forcemain,anoil-waterseparatorvault,above-gradeCMUmotor-controlbuilding,emergencygenerator,electricalconduitextensionandservicemodification,sitegateandfencing,tie-instoexistingsewersystem,andabandonmentoftheexistingFalconRidgeliftstation.TheprojectalsoincludesprivateroadrepairasdirectedbytheCity,andsealcoattheroadbetweenFalconRidgeaccessgateandtheliftstation.TheCityreservestherighttorejectanyand/orallbidsandtowaiveanyand/orallinformalities.BiddocumentswillbeavailableMonday,July9,2012.Plans,specifications,addenda,andplanholderslistforthisprojectareavailableon-linethroughBuildersExchangeofWashington,Inc.,athttp://www/bxwa.com.Clickon“bxwa.com”;“PostedProjects”;“PublicWorks”,“CityofRenton”,“ProjectsBidding”.(Note:Biddersareencouragedto“RegisterasaBidder,”inordertoreceiveautomaticemailnotificationoffutureaddendaandtobeplacedonthe“BiddersList.”Questionsabouttheprojectshallbeaddressedto,MichaelBenoit,CityofRenton,WastewaterUtility,1055GradyWay,FifthFloor,Renton,WA,98057,phone(425)430-7206,fax(425)430-7241,mbenoit@rentonwa.gov.Therewillbeanon-mandatoryPre-BidMeetingonWednesdayJuly18,2018at9:00am.ThemajorityoftheworkwillbeperformedinsidetheFalconRidgegatedcommunity.Thepre-bidmeetingwillprovidetheopportunitytoobservesiteconditions.ThemeetingwillstartattheentrancegateonCedarRidgeDriveSE(NorthofRoyalHillsDrive).Acertifiedcheckorbidbondintheamountoffivepercent(5%)ofthetotalofeachbidmustaccompanyeachbid.TheCity’sFairPractices,Non-Discrimination,andAmerhPublished:DailyJournalofcommerceDailyJournalofcommercewithDisabilityActPoliciesshallapply.rkJuly9,2018July16,201807_CALL_S-3939 Falcon Ridge Lift Station Replacement and Force Main Improvements WWP-27-3939 Proposal & Combined Affidavit & Certificate Form TO THE CITY OF RENTON RENTON, WASHINGTON Ladies and/or Gentlemen: The undersigned hereby certify that the bidder has examined the site of the proposed work and have read and thoroughly understand the plans, specifications and contract governing the work embraced in this improvement, and the method by which payment will be made for said work, and hereby propose to undertake and complete the work embraced in this improvement, or as much thereof as can be completed with the money available, in accordance with the said plans, specifications and contract and the schedule of prices. The undersigned further certifies and agrees to the following provisions: NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT Being duly sworn, deposes and says, that he is the identical person who submitted the foregoing proposal or bid, and that such bid is genuine and not sham or collusive or made in the interest or on behalf of any person not therein named, and further, that the deponent has not directly induced or solicited any other Bidder on the foregoing work or equipment to put in a sham bid, or any other person or corporation to refrain from bidding, and that deponent has not in any manner sought by collusion to secure to himself or to any other person any advantage over other Bidder or Bidders. AND CERTIFICATION RE: ASSIGNMENT OF ANTI-TRUST CLAIMS TO PURCHASER Vendor and purchaser recognize that in actual economic practice overcharges resulting from anti-trust violations are in fact usually borne by the purchaser. Therefore, vendor hereby assigns to purchaser any and all claims for such over-charges as to goods and materials purchased in connection with this order or contract, except as to overcharges resulting from anti-trust violations commencing after the date of the bid, quotation, or other event establishing the price under this order or contract. In addition, vendor warrants and represents that such of his suppliers and subcontractors shall assign any and all such claims to purchaser, subject to the aforementioned exception. AND MINIMUMWAGEAFFIDAVITFORMI,theundersigned,havingbeendulysworn,deposed,sayandcertifythatinconnectionwiththeperformanceoftheworkofthisproject,Iwillpayeachclassificationoflaborer,workman,ormechanicemployedintheperformanceofsuchwork;notlessthantheprevailingrateofwageornotlessthantheminimumrateofwagesasspecifiedintheprincipalcontract.Ihavereadtheaboveandforegoingstatementsandcertificate,knowthecontentsthereofandthesubstanceassetforththereinistruetomyknowledgeandbelief.FOR:PROPOSAL,NONCOLLUSIONAFFIDAVIT,ASSIGNMENTOFANTI-TRUSTCLAIMSTOPURCHASERANDMINIMUMWAGEAFFIDAVITRoadConstructionNorthwest,Inc.NameofBidder’sFirmSignatureofAuthorizedRepresentativeofBidder*:_______________________________________MatthewWagesterVicePresidentPrintedName:_______________________________Title:_________________________________________PCBox2228RentonWA98056Address:MatthewWagesterContactName(pleaseprint):_______________________________________________________________________425-254-9999bids@rcnw.comPhone:_________________________________________Email:___________________________________________*Theabovesignaturemustbenotarizedusingtheapplicablenotarylanguagefoundonpages3and4.IfbusinessisaCORPORATION,pleasecompletethissection:JeffreyM.KanyerNameofPresidentofCorporation______________________________________________NameofSecretaryofCorporationMatthewWagesterCorporationOrganizedunderthelawsofWAWithMainOfficeinStateofWashingtonat5851NE4thSt,Renton,WA98059IfbusinessisaPARTNERSHIPorLIMITEDLIABILITYCOMPANY,pleasecompletethissection:Name:Title(Partner,Member,Manager):Proposal&Affidavit/Certificate-Page3of408_COMBINEDPROPandTRIPLEFORMS-3939.doc INDIVIDUALFORMSTATEOFWASHINGTONssCountyof____________Onthis_______dayof___________beforemepersonallyappeared_____________________tomeknowntobetheindividual(s)describedinandwhoexecutedtheforegoinginstrument,andacknowledgedunderoaththathe(he/she/they)signedandsealedthesameas________________________(his,her,their)freeandvoluntaryactanddeed,fortheusesandpurposesthereinmentioned.GIVENundermyhandandofficialsealthedayandyearlastabovewritten.(SEAL)_______________________________________________NotaryPublicinandfortheStateofWashington,residingat__________________PrintName:___________________________Mycommissionexpires:__________________CORPORATIONFORMSTATEOFWASHINGTONssCountyofKingOnthis31stdayofJulybeforemepersonallyappearedMatthewWagestertomeknowntobetheSecretary(President,Secretary,Treasurer)ofthecorporationthatexecutedtheforegoinginstrument,andacknowledgedsaidinstrumenttobethefreeandvoluntaryactanddeedofsaidcorporation,fortheusesandpurposesthereinmentioned,andonoathstatedthathe(he/she/they)areauthorizedtoexecutesaidinstrument.GIVENundermyhandandofficialsealthedayandyearlastabovewritten.(SEAL)7>-ii5NotarbliØndfortheStateofWashington,residingatsnoqualmie,WAPrintName:GeorgeTuckerMycommissionexpires:_________________Proposal&Affidavit/Certificate-Page4of408_COMBINEDPROPandTRIPLEFORM5-3939.doc 08_COMBINED PROP and TRIPLE FORM S-3939.doc PARTNERSHIP FORM STATE OF WASHINGTON ) : ss County of ______________ ) On this _______ day of ______________ before me personally appeared __________________ to me known to be a General Partner of the partnership known as ________________________ that executed the foregoing instrument, and acknowledged said instrument t o be the free and voluntary act and deed of said partnership, for the uses and purposes therein mentioned, and on oath stated that _________ (he/she/they) are authorized to execute said instrument. GIVEN under my hand and official seal the day and year last above written. (SEAL) ____________________________________ Notary Public in and for the State of Washington, residing at ________________ Print Name: _________________________ My commission expires: ________________ LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY (LLC) FORM STATE OF WASHINGTON ) : ss County of ______________ ) On this _______ day of ____________________, 20___, before me personally appeared _________________________ to me known to be a Managing Member of the Limited Liability Company known as _______________________________ and that he/she/they executed the foregoing instrument, and acknowledged said instrument to be the free and voluntary act and deed of said Limited Liability Company, for the uses and purposes the rein mentioned, and on oath stated that _________ (he/she/they) are authorized to execute said instrument. GIVEN under my hand and official seal the day and year last above written. (SEAL) ____________________________________ Notary Public in and for the State of Washington, residing at ________________ Print Name: _________________________ My commission expires: ________________ DepartmentofLaborandIndustriesCertificateofRegistrationRoadConstructionNorthwest,Inc.NameonRegistration:____________________________________________________5271501RegistrationNumber:____________________________________________________6/26/19ExpirationDate:____________________________________________________Note:Acopyofthecertificatewillberequestedaspartofcontractexecutionwhenprojectisawarded.09L&IREGISTRATIONS-3939doe 0ProposalBidBondKNOWALLMENBYTHESEPRESENTS,Thatwe,[Contractor]RoadConstructionNorthwest,Inc._____________of[address]P0Box2228,Renton,WA98056asPrincipal,and[Surety]EmployersMutualCasualtyCompanyacorporationdulyorganizedunderthelawsoftheStateofIowaandauthorizedtodobusinessintheStateofWashington,asSurety,areheldandfirmlybounduntotheCityofRentoninthesumoffive(5)percentofthetotalamountofthebidproposalofsaidPrincipalfortheworkhereinafterdescribed,forthepaymentofwhich,wellandtrulytobemade,webindourselves,ourheirs,executors,administratorsandassigns,andsuccessorsandassigns,jointlyandseverally,firmlybythesepresents.Theconditionofthisbondissuch,thatwhereasthePrincipalhereinisherewithsubmittinghis/heroritssealedproposalforthefollowinghighwayconstruction,towit:FalconRidgeLiftStationReplacementandForceMainImprovementsWWP-27-3939saidbidandproposal,byreferencethereto,beingmadeaparthereof.NOW,THEREFORE,ifthesaidproposalbidbysaidPrincipalbeaccepted,andthecontractbeawardedtosaidPrincipal,andifsaidPrincipalshalldulymakeandenterintoandexecutesaidcontractandshallfurnishperformancebondasrequiredbytheCityofRentonwithinaperiodoften(10)daysfromandaftersaidaward,exclusiveofthedayofsuchaward,thenthisobligationshallbenullandvoid,otherwiseitshallremainandbeinfullforceandeffect.INTHEEVENTthePrincipal,followingaward,failstoexecuteanAgreementwiththeCityofRentoninaccordancewiththetermsoftheProposalandfurnishaperformancebondwithSuretyorSuretiesapprovedbytheCityofRentonwithinten(10)daysfromandaftersaidaward,thenPrincipalshallforfeittheBidBond/BidProposalDepositorSuretyshallimmediatelypayandforfeittotheCityofRentontheamountoftheProposalBidBond,assetforthinRCW35A.40.200andRCW35.23.352.INTESTIMONYWHEREOF,thePrincipalandSuretyhavecausedthesepresentstobesignedandsealedthis31stdayofJuly,2018RoadConstructionNorthwest,Inc.[Principal]—2)[Signatureofauthorizedofficial]i.))(e?‘.1d,ii[Title]EmployersMutualCasualtyCompany[Surety].—1ii.—1[Signatureofauthorizedbificial]By:CynthiaL.Jay[Attorney-in-Fact]P0Box3199[Address]GreenwoodVillage,CO80155-3199(720)200-3700[TelephoneNumber]ApprovedbycityAttorney THEFACEANDREVERSEOFTHISDOCUMENTHAVEACOLOREDFLAGONWHITEPAPERP.O.Box712•DesMoines,1A50306-0712No.C379811.EmployersMutualCasualtyCompany,anIowaCorporation2.EMCASCOInsuranceCompany,anIowaCorporation3.UnionInsuranceCompanyofProvidence,anIowaCorporation4.IllinoisEMCASCOInsuranceCompany,anIowaCorporation5.DakotaFireInsuranceCompany,aNorthDakotaCorporation6.EMCProperty&CasualtyCompany,anIowaCorporation7.HamiltonMutualInsuranceCompany,anIowaCorporationOnthis31stdayofMAYAD2018beforemeaNotaryPublicinandfortheStateofIowa,personallyappearedBruceG.KelleyandToddStrother,who,beingbymedulysworn,didsaythattheyare,andareknowntometobetheChairman,President,ViceChairmanandCEO,and/orVicePresident,respectively,ofeachofTheCompaniesabove;thatthesealsaffixedtothisinstrumentarethesealsofsaidcorporations;thatsaidinstrumentwassignedandsealedonbehalfofeachoftheCompaniesbyauthorityoftheirrespectiveBoardsofDirectors;andthatthesaidBruceG.KelleyandToddStrother,assuchofficers,acknowledgedtheexecutionofsaidinstrumenttobethevoluntaryactanddeedofeachoftheCompanies.MyCommissionExpiresOctober10,2019.c73M/Zt’LdQNotaryPlicinandfortheStateofk?aEMCINSURANCECERTIFICATEOFAUTHORITYINDIVIDUALATTORNEY-IN-FACTKNOWALLMENBYTHESEPRESENTS,that:hereinafterreferredtoseverallyasCompany”andcollectivelyas‘Companies”,eachdoes,bythesepresents,make,constituteandappoint:ERICA.ZIMMERMAN,ALICEONA.KELTNER,CYNTHIAL.JAY,JAMESB.BINDERitstrueandlawfulattorney-in-fact,withfullpowerandauthorityconferredtosign,seal,andexecuteitsawfulbonds,undertakings,andotherobligatoryinstrumentsofasimilarnatureasfollows:ANYANDALLBONDSandtobindeachCompanytherebyasfullyandtothesameextentasifsuchinstrumentsweresignedbythedulyauthorizedofficersofeachsuchCompany,andalloftheactsofsaidattorneypursuanttotheauthorityherebygivenareherebyratifiedandconfirmed.AUTHORITYFORPOWEROFATTORNEYThisPower-of-AttorneyismadeandexecutedpursuanttoandbytheauthorityofthefollowingresolutionoftheBoardsofDirectorsofeachoftheCompaniesataregularlyscheduledmeetingofeachcompanydulycalledandheldin1999:RESOLVED:ThePresidentandChiefExecutiveOfficer,anyVicePresident,theTreasurerandIheSecretaryofEmployersMutualCasualtyCompanyshallhavepowerandauthorityto(1)appointattorneys-in-factandauthorizethemtoexecuteonbehalfofeachCompanyandattachthesealoftheCompanythereto,bondsandundertakings,recognizances,contractsofindemnityandotherwritingsobligatoryinthenaturethereof;and(2)toremoveanysuchattorney-in-factatanytimeandrevokethepowerandauthoritygiventohimorher.Attorneys-in-factshallhavepowerandauthority,subjecttothetermsandlimitationsofthepower-of-attorneyissuedtothem,toexecuteanddeliveronbehalfoftheCompany,andtoattachthesealoftheCompanythereto,bondsandundertakings,recognizances,contractsofindemnityandotherwritingsobligatoryinthenaturethereof,andanysuchinstrumentexecutedbyanysuchattorney-in-factshallbefullyandinallrespectsbindingupontheCompany.Certificationastothevalidityofanypower-of-attorneyauthorizedhereinmadebyanofficerofEmployersMutualCasualtyCompanyshallbefullyandinallrespectsbindinguponthisCompany.Thefacsimileormechanicallyreproducedsignatureofsuchofficer,whethermadeheretoforeorhereafter,whereverappearinguponacertifiedcopyofanypower-of-attorneyoftheCompany,shallbevalidandbindingupontheCompanywiththesameforceandeffectasthoughmanuallyaffixed.INWITNESSTHEREOF,theCompanieshavecausedthesepresentstobesignedforeachbytheirofficersasshown,andtheCorporatesealstobeheretoaffixedthis31stdayofMAY2018Seals..__-ruceG.Kelley,Qairman7ToddStrotherofCompanies2,3,4,5&PresidentVicePresidentofCompany1;ViceChairmanandCEOofCompany7:KAThYLOVERIDGECommissIonNumbe780769MyCommissionEjq*esOctober10,2019CERTIFICATEI,JamesD.Clough,VicePresidentoftheCompanies,doherebycertifythattheforegoingresolutionoftheBoardsofDirectorsbyeachoftheCompanies,andthisPowerofAttorneyissuedpursuanttheretoonMAY31,2018onbehalfof:ERICA.ZIMMERMAN,ALICEONA.KELTNER,CYNTHIAL.JAY,JAMESB.BINDERaretrueandcorrectandarestillinfullforceandeffect.InTestimonyWhrefIhavesubscribedynameandaffixedthefacsimilesealofeachCompanythis..1shdayof,VicePresident7832(12-16)“ForverificationoftheauthenticityofthePowerofAttorneyyoumaycall(515)345-2689.”V CITYOFRENTONPUBLICWORKSDEPARTMENTFalconRidgeLiftStationReplacementandForceMainImprovements(NoteThebidpriceshallbestatedinfigUresonlyintermsoftheunitsindicatedandastoatotalamountIntheeventoferrorsorwhereconflictoccurstheunitpricebidshallgovernIllegiblefigureswillinvalidatethebid)SEESECTION1-09.14OFTHESPECIALPROVISIONSFORINFORMATIONONBIDITEMS.TemporaryErosionandSedimentationControlSiteUtilityWorkRadioFrequencyIdentificationDevce(RFID)InstallationRadioFrequencyIdentificationDeviceDataProcessandDeliverySperLumpSum/I,c200perLumpSumSperLumpSumperCubicYardLi;S11—perTonrcSI‘l:1’perLumpSumi3i9O0perLumpSumS/t‘perLumpSumSperEachSSS,i,‘,.2q1j;4’SSa!/0,e’c!SSSperEachperLumpSumperSquareFootITEIv{APPROX.ITEMUNITPRICEAMOUNTNo.[QUANTITYDollarsCents.DollarsCents.Mobilization.DemobilizationSitePreparation,Cleanup‘0t’193456I,89101112LumpSumLumpSumLunpSum30CubicYard60TonLumpSumLumpSumLumpSumEachEachLLimpSum5,500SquareFootUnscheduledExcavationUnscheduledStructuralBackfillTrafficControlTrenchSafetyandShoringAirVacuumReleaseAssemblyForcemainAccessManholeRoadRepair CITYOFRENTONPUBLICWORKSDEPARTMENTFalconRidgeLiftStationReplacementandForceMainImprovements(NoteThebidpriceshallbestatedinfiguresonlyintermsoftheunitsindicatedandastoatotalamountIntheeventoferrorsorwhereconflictoccurs,theunitpricebidshallgovernIllegiblefigureswillinvalidatethebid)SEESECTION1-09.14OFTHESPECIALPROVISIONSFORINFORMATIONONBIDITEMS.SperLumpSumS‘711t1perLumpSumsJ4(o,5ooperLumpSumSperLumpSumSperLumpSumS2,50000perLLimpSum5500000perLumpSumSiD00000perLumpSumSlTErvAPPROX.ITEMUNITPRICEAMOUNTNO.QUANTITYDollarsCents.DollarsCents.Iiccc/1t%’i’‘::S$perLumpSum2o,eeperLumpSumperLumpSum6‘perLLimpSum131415161718192021222324LumpSumLumpSumLumpSum1LumpSumLumpSumLumpSum1LumpSumLumpSumLumpSumLumpSumLumpSLim1LumpSLimSealCoatDewateringLiftStationStructuralElectricalBuildingStructUralLiftStationPumpsandMotorsMechanicalElectricalAutomaticControlFinishesO&MManualsandOn-SiteTrainingConstructionRecordsMinorChangeSS/4(Piboo2SS$250000$5000001000000SubtotalS1flA10%SalesTax_______j/2,iTotalS________/ CityofRentonAddendumNo.1FalconRidgeLiftStationIssued:7/23/18Page1of2CityofRentonFalconRidgeLiftStationADDENDUMNO.IIssued:July23,2018ToAllContractDocument1—lolders:Youareherebynotifiedofthefollowingchanges,deletions,additions,correctionsandclarificationstotheplans,specificationsandotherdocumentscomprisingtheContractDocumentsfortheCityofRenton,FalconRidgeLiftStationproject.TechnicalProvisionsDivision11-EquipmentREPLACETHEFOLLOWING:11.12.2LiftStationPumpsandMotorsPart1-GeneralThissectioncoversworknecessarytoprovidethesubmersiblenon-clogptmpsandmotorswithrailsystem,completeattheproposedMistyCovcLiftStationandtoprovideoneubmcr3iblcnonclogpumpandmotorwithadaptcrtofitcxistmgrailsystcmatDevil’sElbowLiftStation.WITHTHEFOLLOWING:Thissectioncoversworknecessarytoprovidethesubmersiblenon—clogpumpsandmotorswithrailsystem,completeattheproposedFalconRidgeLiftStation.Wrh2.com\d1s\BottieI\Data\REN\l17-036\SDB\ACdeodumNoIdocx71231201812:55PM CityofRentonFalconRidgeLiftStationEndrevisionsforAddendumNo.IAddendumNo.1Issued:7/23/18Page2of2AddendumNo.1isherebymadeapartoftheContractDocuments,anditstennsandconditionsarefullybindingontheContractDocumentholder.He/sheshallacknowledgereceiptofAddendumNo.1bysigninginthespaceprovidedbelowandattachingittohis/herproposal.ThisAddendumNo.1mustbeacknow1eddinthebid.CITVOFRENTONEdwinHalun,RH2Engineering,Inc.IssuedJuly23,2018ReceivedandAcknowledged:RoadConstructionNorthwest,Inc.CompanyNameSignatureofpersonreceivingaddendumVicePresidentTitleDate7-31-18\h2.com\1s\Bothe1I\Data\REN117-O8\SDBMdendumNoIdocx723/2O1BI255PM -.CTVOF—‘Renton:,ThisformmustbesubmittedwiththeBidProposalorasaSupplementtotheBidnolaterthan24hoursafterthetimefordeliveryoftheBidProposal.CertificationofCompliancewithWagePaymentStatutesThebidderherebycertifiesthat,withinthethree-yearperiodimmediatelyprecedingthebidsolicitationdate,thebidderisnota“willful”violator,asdefinedinRCW49.48.082,ofanyprovisionofchapters49.46,49.48,or49.52RCW,asdeterminedbyafinalandbindingcitationandnoticeofassessmentissuedbytheDepartmentofLaborandIndustriesorthroughaciviljudgmententeredbyacourtoflimitedorgeneraljurisdiction.IcertifyunderpenaltyofperjuryunderthelawsoftheStateofWashingtonthattheforegoingistrueandcorrect.RoadConstructionNorthwest,Inc.Bidder’sBusinessNameSignatureofAuthorizedOfficial*MatthewWagesterPrintedNameVicePresidentTitle7-31-18RentonWADateCityStateCheckOne:SoleProprietorshipLIPartnershipLIJointVentureLICorporationF1StateofIncorporation,orifnotacorporation,Statewherebusinessentitywasformed:WAIfaco-partnership,givefirmnameunderwhichbusinessistransacted:*Ifacorporation,proposalmustbeexecutedinthecorporatenamebythepresidentorvice-president(oranyothercorporateofficeraccompaniedbyevidenceofauthoritytosign).Ifaco-partnership,proposalmustbeexecutedbyapartner. SUBCONTRACTORLISTRCW39.30-060requiresthatforallpublicworkscontractsexceeding$1,000,000thatthebiddersubmitthenamesofallheating,ventilationandairconditioning,andplumbingsubcontractorsasdescribedinchapter18.106RCW,andelectricalsubcontractorsasdescribedinchapter19.28RCW(thisalsoincludesthecontrolsystemintegratorsubcontractoraswellasotherelectricalsubcontractors).Ifthesubcontractorsnamesarenotsubmittedwiththebid,orwithinone(1)hourafterthepublishedbidsubmittaltimeORiftwoormoresubcontractorsarenamedtoperformthesamework,thenthebidshallbeconsiderednonresponsiveand,therefore,void.Completethefollowing:RoadConstructionNorthwest,IncIfawardedthecontract,___________________________________willcontractwiththefollowingsubcontractorsfortheperformanceofheating,ventilationandairconditioning,plumbing,andelectrical(includingautomaticcontrols)work:BidItem(s)SubcontractorNameAddressPhoneNo.StateContractor’sLicenseNo.BidItem(s)SubcontractorNameAddressPhoneNo.StateContractor’sLicenseNo.BidItem(s)SubcontractorNameAddressPhoneNo.StateContractor’sLicenseNo.BidItem(s)SubcontractorNameAddressPhoneNo.StateContractor’sLicenseNo.BidItem(s)SubcontractorNameAddressh:\Iilesys\wwp-wasewater\wwp—27-O393)falconridgeliftstationreplacement\biddocument\l2draftsubdraft.docRevisedX/2012 Page2PhoneNo.StateContractor’sLicenseNo.BidItem(s)SubcontractorNameAddressPhoneNo.StateContractor’sLicenseNo.SignatureothorizedRepresentativeofBidderSubscribedandsworntobebeforemeonthis3]stdayofJuly2O]8.inanteStateofWashingtonGeorgeTuckerNotary(Print)_______________________ResidingatSnoqualmie,WAMyappointmentexpires:i-h:\IiIesys\wwp-waswwater\wwp-27-03939falconridgeliftstationreplacenienftbiddocurnent\12_draftsubdraft.docRevised9/2(X)6 BONDTOTHECITYOFRENTONBondNo.S442742KNOWALLMENBYTHESEPRESENTS:Thatwe,theundersignedRoadConstructionNorthwest,Inc.asprincipal,andEmployersMutualCasualtyCompanycorporationorganizedandexistingunderthelawsoftheStateofIowaasasuretycorporation,andqualifiedunderthelawsoftheStateofWashingtontobecomesuretyuponbondsofcontractorswithmunicipalcorporations,assuretyarejointlyandseverallyheldandfirmlyboundtotheCityofRentoninthepenalsumof$926,502.50forthepaymentofwhichsumondemandwebindourselvesandoursuccessors,heirs,administratorsorpersonrepresentatives,asthecasemaybe.ThisobligationisenteredintoinpursuanceofthestatutesoftheStateofWashington,theOrdinanceoftheCityofRenton.Datedat-?7-.,Washington,this/7dayoft,,2018.Nevertheless,theconditionsoftheaboveobligationaresuchthat:WHEREAS,underandpursuanttoPublicWorksConstructionContractCAG-18-120providingforconstructionofFalconRidgeLiftStationReplacementandForceMainImprovements,theprincipalisrequiredtofurnishabondforthefaithfulperformanceofthecontract;andWHEREAS,theprincipalhasaccepted,orisabouttoaccept,thecontract,andundertaketoperformtheworkthereinprovidedforinthemannerandwithinthetimesetforth;NOW,THEREFORE,iftheprincipalshallfaithfullyperformalloftheprovisionsofsaidcontractinthemannerandwithinthetimethereinsetforth,orwithinsuchextensionsoftimeasmaybegrantedundersaidcontract,andshallpayalllaborers,mechanics,subcontractorsandmaterialmen,andallpersonswhoshallsupplysaidprincipalorsubcontractorswithprovisionsandsuppliesforthecarryingonofsaidwork,andshallholdsaidCityofRentonharmlessfromanylossordamageoccasionedtoanypersonorpropertybyreasonofanycarelessnessornegligenceonthepartofsaidprincipal,oranysubcontractorintheperformanceofsaidwork,andshallindemnifyandholdtheCityofRentonharmlessfromanydamageorexpensebyreasonoffailureofperformanceasspecifiedinthecontractorfromdefectsappearingordevelopinginthematerialorworkmanshipprovidedorperformedunderthecontractwithinaperiodofoneyearafteritsacceptancethereofbytheCityofRenton,thenandinthateventthisobligationshallbevoid;butotherwiseitshallbeandremaininfullforceandeffect.RoadConstructionNorthwest,Inc.EmployersMutualCasualtyCompanyPrincipalSuretySignatureTitle THEFACEANDREVERSEOFTHISDOCUMENTHAVEACOLOREDFLAGONWHITEPAPEREMCINSURANCEP.O.Box712.DesMoines,IA50306-0712No.C37124CERTIFICATEOFAUTHORITYINDIVIDUALATTORNEY-IN-FACTKNOWALLMENBYTHESEPRESENTS,that:1.EmployersMutualCasualtyCompany,anIowaCorporation5.DakotaFireInsuranceCompany,aNorthDakotaCorporation2.EMCASCOInsuranceCompany,anIowaCorporation6.EMCProperty&CasualtyCompany,anIowaCorporation3.UnionInsuranceCompanyofProvidence,anIowaCorporation7.HamiltonMutualInsuranceCompany,anIowaCorporation4.IllinoisEMCASCOInsuranceCompany,anIowaCorporationhereinafterreferredtoseverallyas“Company”andcollectivelyas“Companies”,eachdoes,bythesepresents,make,constituteandappoint:KARENC.SWANSON,JULIERTRUITT,CHRISTOPHERKINYON,CARLEYESPIRITU,ANNELIESM.RICHIE,JAMIEMARQUES,HEATHERL.ALLEN,MARYS.NORRELL,KYLEJOSEPHHOWAT,PETERJ.COMFORT,BRENTE.HEILESENitstrueandlawfulattorney-in-fact,withfullpowerandauthorityconferredtosign,seal,andexecuteitslawfulbonds,undertakings,andotherobligatoryinstrumentsofasimilarnatureasfollows:ANYANDALLBONDSandtobindeachCompanytherebyasfullyandtothesameextentasifsuchinstrumentsweresignedbythedulyauthorizedofficersofeachsuchCompany,andalloftheactsofsaidattorneypursuanttotheauthorityherebygivenareherebyratifiedandconfirmed.AUTHORITYFORPOWEROFATTORNEYThisPower-of-AttorneyismadeandexecutedpursuanttoandbytheauthorityofthefollowingresolutionoftheBoardsofDirectorsofeachoftheCompaniesatareguladyscheduledmeetingofeachcompanydulycalledandheldin1999:RESOLVED:ThePresidentandChiefExecutiveOfficer,anyVicePresident,theTreasurerandtheSecretaryofEmployersMutualCasualtyCompanyshallhavepowerandauthorityto(1)appointattorneys-in-factandauthorizethemtoexecuteonbehalfofeachCompanyandattachthesealoftheCompanythereto,bondsandundertakings,recognizances,contractsofindemnityandotherwritingsobligatoryinthenaturethereof;and(2)toremoveanysuchattorney-in-factatanytimeandrevokethepowerandauthoritygiventohimorher.Attorneys-in-factshallhavepowerandauthority,subjecttothetermsandlimitationsofthepower-of-attorneyissuedtothem,toexecuteanddeliveronbehalfoftheCompany,andtoattachthesealoftheCompanythereto,bondsandundertakings,recognizances,contractsofindemnityandotherwntingsobligatoryinthenaturethereof,andanysuchinstrumentexecutedbyanysuchattorney-in-factshallbefullyandinallrespectsbindingupontheCompany.Certificationastothevalidityofanypower-of-attorneyauthorizedhereinmadebyanofficerofEmployersMutualCasualtyCompanyshallbefullyandinallrespectsbindinguponthisCompany.Thefacsimileormechanicallyreproducedsignatureofsuchofficer,whethermadeheretoforeorhereafter,whereverappearinguponacertifiedcopyofanypower-of-attorneyoftheCompany,shallbevalidandbindingupontheCompanywiththesameforceandeffectasthoughmanuallyaffixed.INWITNESSTHEREOF,theCompanieshavecausedthesepresentstobesignedforeachbytheirofficersasshown,andtheCorporatesealstobeheretoaffixedthis15thdayofMAY2018jru’aeG.Kelley,Qfairman,/“ToddStrotherofCompanies2,3,4,5&6PresidentVicePresidentofCompany1;ViceChairmanandCEOofCompany7Onthis15thdayofMAYAD2018beforemeaNotaryPublicinandfortheStateofIowa,personallyappearedBruceG.KelleyandToddStrother,who,beingbymedulysworn,didsaythattheyare,andareknowntometobetheChairman,President,ViceChairmanandCEO,and/orVicePresident,respectively,ofeachofTheCompaniesabove;thatthesealsaffixedtothisinstrumentarethesealsofsaidcorporations;thatsaidinstrumentwassignedandsealedonbehalfofeachoftheCompaniesbyauthorityoftheirrespectiveBoardsofDirectors;andthatthesaidBruceG.KelleyandToddStrother,assuchofficers,acknowledgedtheexecutionofsaidinstrumenttobethevoluntaryactanddeedofeachoftheCompanies.MyCommissionExpiresOctober10,2019.7aM/ZAL2NotaryPlicinandfortheStateofldaCERTIFICATEI,JamesD.Clough,VicePresidentoftheCompanies,doherebycertifythattheforegoingresolutionoftheBoardsofDwectorsbyeachoftheCompanies,andthisPowerofAttorneyissuedpursuanttheretoonMAY15,2018onbehalfof:KARENC.SWANSON,JULIERTRUIYr,CHRISTOPHERKINYON,CARLEYESPIRITU,ANNELIESM.RiCHIE,JAMIEMARQUES,HEATHERL.ALLEN.MARYS.NORRELL.KYLEJOSEPHHOWAT,PETERJ.COMFORT,BRENTE.HEILESENaretrueandcorrectandarestillinfullforceandeffect.InTestimonyWhereofIesubscribedmynameandaffixedhefacsimilesealof/7’eachCompanythis/5idayof,________.__1._/SAVicePresident7832(12.16)“ForverificationoftheauthenticityofthePowerofAttorneyyoLXcalI(5’tKATHYLOVEffiDGECommissionNumber7807E9JMyCommissionExpiresOctober10,2019 CiiofiRrâi©•CITYOFRENTONFAIRPRACTICESPOLICYAFFIDAVITOFCOMPLIANCERoadConstructionNorthwest,Inc.herebyconfirmsanddeclaresthat:(Nameofcontractor/subcontractor/consultant)Itisthepolicyoftheabove-namedcontractor/subcontractor/consultant,toofferequalopportunitytoallqualifiedemployeesandapplicantsforemploymentwithoutregardtotheirrace;religion/creed;nationalorigin;ancestry;sex;thepresenceofaphysical,sensory,ormentaldisability;ageover40;sexualorientationorgenderidentity;pregnancy;HIV/AIDSandHepatitisCstatus;useofaguidedog/serviceanimal;maritalstatus;parental/familystatus;militarystatus;orveteran’sstatus.II.Theabove-namedcontractor/subcontractor/consultantcomplieswithallapplicablefederal,stateandlocallawsgoverningnon-discriminationinemployment.Ill.Whenapplicable,theabove-namedcontractor/subcontractor/consultantwillseekoutandnegotiatewithminorityandwomencontractorsfortheawardofsubcontracts.JeffreyM.KanyerPrintAgent/Representative’sNamePresidentPrintAgent/Representative’sTitleSignatureDateSignedInstructions:ThisdocumentMUSTbecompletedbyeachcontractor,subcontractor,consultantand/orsupplier.Includeorattachthisdocument(s)withthecontract. G\1 1 OA N-I-0 AGREEMENT ow CONTRACT NO. CAG-18-120 i NI THIS AGREEMENT,made and entered into this 3 '' day of hip 040'f,2018 by and between the CITY OF RENTON, Washington, a municipal corporation of the State of Washington, her4inafter referred to as "City" and Road Construction Northwest, Inc., hereinafter referred to as "Contractor." Now,therefore the parties agree as follows: • 1. Agreement. This agreement incorporates the following documents as if fully set forth herein: the 2016 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, as prepared by the Washington State Department of Transportation and the Washington State Chapter of the American Public Works Association, including all published ,,. amendments issued by those organizations ("Standard Specifications"); the City's Contract Bid Documents for the Project, including but not limited to Addenda, Proposal Form, Special Provisions, Contract Plans, and Amendments to the Standard Specifications; Contractor's Proposal and all documents submitted therewith in response to the City's Call for Bids Documents; and any additional documents referenced as comprising the Contract and Contract Documents in Section 1-04.2 of the Standard Specifications, as revised by the Amendments and Special Provisions included with the City's Call for Bids and Contract Documents. 2. Project. Contractor shall complete all work and furnish all labor, tools, materials, and equipment for the project entitled Falcon Ridge Lift Station Replacement and Force Main Improvements, WWP-27-03939, including all changes to the Work and force account work, in accordance with the Contract Documents, as described in Section 1-04.2 of the Special Provisions. ' 3. Payments. City shall pay Contractor at the unit and lump sum prices, and by force account as specified in the Proposal according to the Contract Documents as to time, manner, and condition of payment in a contract amount ' not to exceed $926,502.50 , unless modified by an approved change order or addendum. The payments to Contractor include the costs for all labor,tools, materials and equipment for the Work. ' 4. Completion Date. Contract time shall commence upon City's Notice to Proceed to Contractor. The Work under this Agreement shall be completed within the time specified in the Contract Bid Documents. If the Physical Work under this Agreement is not completed within the time specified, Contractor shall pay liquidated damages and all ' engineering inspection and supervision costs to City as specified in the Contract Bid Documents. 5. Attorney's Fees. In the event litigation is commenced to enforce this Agreement, the prevailiig party shall be entitled to recover its costs, including reasonable attorney's and expert witness fees. 6. Disclaimer. No liability of Contractor shall attach to City by reason of entering into this Agreement, except as ' expressly provided in this Agreement. 7. Counterparts. This Agreement is executed in two (2) identical counterparts, by the parties, each of which shall for all purposes be deemed an original. • • IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the City has caused these presents to be signed by its Mayor and attested by its City Clerk and the Contractor has hereunto set his hand and seal the day and year first above-written. um CONTRACTOR: CITY OF REN ON: ii. ----"-7 Jeffrey M. Kanyer ', - President ��,,,,N " 'I„'',��,� G ,� o sNr r id artner/Owner Denis Law, Mayori.t'Cj ..?•%��„ 111`'''i,,Q.L'"; SI 6 g -.? ait. ''',,.. S. ATTEST = * - SEAL = * %,flame A( gEP b -- tary Ja Seth, City CI rk ''imiilito" a• FIRM INFORMATION r. d/b/a Road Construction Northwest, Inc. CHECK ONE: ❑ Limited Liability Company ❑ Partnership ® Corporation 11111 STATE OF INCORPORATION: Washington a CONTRACTOR CONTACT INFORMATION: CITY CONTACT INFORMATION: 16 Matthew Wagester City of Renton PO Box 2228 1055 South Grady Way Renton, WA 98056 Renton, WA 98057 425-254-9999 425-430-7206 LMatt@RCNW.com mbenoit@rentonwa.gov Attention: LIf business is a CORPORATION,the name of the corporation should be listed in full and both the President and Secretary must sign the contract. OR, if one signature is permitted by corporation by-laws, a copy of the by-laws shall be furnished to the City and made a part of the contract document. IIIf the business is a PARTNERSHIP, the full name of each partner should be listed followed by d/b/a (doing business as) and firm or trade name. Any one partner may sign the contract. IIf the business is an limited Liability Company,an authorized managing member or manager must sign followed by his/her title. IN I Falcon Ridge Lift Station Replacement and CAG-18-120 0 Force Main Improvements Contract Template Updated 12/29/2017 PREVAILING MINIMUM HOURLY WAGE RATES 24A_State Prevailing Wages Reference.doc\ WASHINGTON STATE PREVAILING WAGE RATES FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTS REFERENCE The State of Washington Prevailing Wage Rates applicable for this public works contract, which is located in _King_ County, may be found at the following website address of the Department of Labor and Industries: https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/wagelookup/prvWagelookup.aspx . Check with the Department of Labor and Industries for any questions regarding Prevailing Wage Rates, and for a copy of all trade classifications. Based on the bid submittal deadline for this project, the applicable effective date for prevailing wages for this project is _July 31, 2018_. A copy of the applicable prevailing wages rates is also available for viewing at the office of the Owner, located at _Renton City Hall, 1055 South Grady Way, Renton, Washington. Upon request, the Owner will mail a hard copy of the applicable prevailing wage rates for this project. The State of Washington “Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages – Public Works Contract” may be found at the following website http://lni.wa.gov/FormPub/Detail.asp?DocID=1918 . The State of Washington “Affidavit of Wages Paid – Public Works Contract and Instructions” may be found at the following website http://lni.wa.gov/FormPub/Detail.asp?DocID=1909 . SPECIAL PROVISIONS 1 SPECIAL PROVISIONS ............................................................................................................ 14 1-01 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS ............................................................................................ 14 1-01.1 General .................................................................................................................... 14 1-01.3 Definitions ............................................................................................................... 14 1-02 BID PROCEDURES AND CONDITIONS ............................................................................ 17 1-02.1 Prequalification of bidders ....................................................................................... 17 1-02.2 Plans and Specifications ........................................................................................... 17 1-02.5 Proposal Forms ........................................................................................................ 17 1-02.6 Preparation of Proposal ........................................................................................... 18 1-02.6(1) Proprietary Information ............................................... Error! Bookmark not defined. 1-02.7 Bid Deposit .............................................................................................................. 18 1-02.9 Delivery of Proposal ................................................................................................. 18 1-02.12 Public Opening of Proposals ................................................................................... 19 1-02.13 Irregular Proposals ................................................................................................. 19 1-02.14 Disqualification of Bidders ...................................................................................... 19 1-02.15 Pre Award Information ........................................................................................... 20 1-03 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT ...................................................................... 20 1-03.1 Consideration of bids ............................................................................................... 20 1-03.2 Award of Contract .................................................................................................... 20 1-03.3 Execution of Contract ............................................................................................... 20 1-03.4 Contract Bond .......................................................................................................... 21 1-03.7 Judicial Review ........................................................................................................ 21 1-04 SCOPE OF WORK ......................................................................................................... 21 1-04.2 Coordination of Contract Documents… ..................................................................... 21 1-04.3 Contractor-Discovered Discrepancies ........................................................................ 22 1-04.4 Changes ................................................................................................................... 22 1-04.8 Progress Estimates and Payments ............................................................................. 22 1-04.11 Final Cleanup ......................................................................................................... 22 1-05 CONTROL OF WORK .................................................................................................... 23 1-05.4 Conformity With and Deviation from Plans and Stakes .............................................. 23 1-05.4(3) Contractor Supplied Surveying ............................................................................. 24 1-05.4(4) Contractor Provided As-Built Information ............................................................. 24 1-05.7 Removal of Defective and Unauthorized Work .......................................................... 25 2 1-05.10 Guarantees ............................................................................................................ 25 1-05.11 Final Inspection ...................................................................................................... 26 1-05.11(1) Substantial Completion Date .............................................................................. 26 1-05.11(2) Final Inspection and Physical Completion Date ................................................... 26 1-05.11(3) Operational Testing ............................................................................................ 27 1-05.12 Final Acceptance .................................................................................................... 27 1-05.13 Superintendents, Labor and Equipment of Contractor ............................................. 28 1-05.14 Cooperation with Other Contractors ....................................................................... 28 1-05.16 Water and Power ................................................................................................... 28 1-05.17 Oral Agreements .................................................................................................... 28 1-05.18 Contractor's Daily Diary .......................................................................................... 28 1-06 CONTROL OF MATERIAL .............................................................................................. 29 1-06.1 Approval of Materials Prior to Use ............................................................................ 29 1-06.2(1) Samples and Tests for Acceptance ........................................................................ 30 1-06.2(2) Statistical Evaluation of Materials for Acceptance ................................................. 30 1-07 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES TO THE PUBLIC ............................................ 30 1-07.1 Laws to be Observed ................................................................................................ 30 1-07.2 State Sales Tax ......................................................................................................... 31 1-07.2(1) General ............................................................................................................... 31 1-07.2(2) State Sales Tax – Rule 171 .................................................................................... 31 1-07.2(3) State Sales Tax – Rule 170 .................................................................................... 31 1-07.2(4) Services ............................................................................................................... 32 1-07.6 Permits and Licenses ................................................................................................ 32 1-07.9 Wages ..................................................................................................................... 33 1-07.9(5) Required Documents ........................................................................................... 33 1-07.11 Requirements for Non-Discrimination ..................................................................... 33 1-07.11(11) City of Renton Affidavit of Compliance.............................................................. 33 1-07.12 Federal Agency Inspection ...................................................................................... 33 1-07.13 Contractor’s Responsibility for Work ....................................................................... 33 1-07.13(1) General .............................................................................................................. 33 1-07.15 Temporary Water Pollution/Erosion Control ............................................................ 33 1-07.16 Protection and Restoration of Property ................................................................... 36 1-07.16(1) Private/Public Property ...................................................................................... 36 3 1-07.17 Utilities and Similar Facilities .................................................................................. 37 1-07.17(1) Site Specific Potholing ........................................................................................ 38 1-07.17(3) Interruption of Services ...................................................................................... 38 1-07.17(4) Resolution of Utility Conflicts ............................................................................... 39 1-07.18 Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance ...................................................... 39 1-07.18(1) General .............................................................................................................. 39 1-07.18(2) Coverages .......................................................................................................... 39 1-07.18(3) Limits ................................................................................................................ 41 1-07.18(4) Evidence of Insurance: ....................................................................................... 42 1-07.22 Use of Explosives ................................................................................................... 42 1-07.23 Public Convenience and Safety ............................................................................... 42 1-07.23(1) Construction Under Traffic ................................................................................. 42 1-07.23(2) Construction and Maintenance of Detours .......................................................... 44 1-07.24 Rights of Way ......................................................................................................... 44 1-07.28 Confined Space Entry ............................................................................................. 45 1-08 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS .................................................................................... 45 1-08.0 Preliminary Matters ................................................................................................. 45 1-08.0(1) Preconstruction Conference ................................................................................. 45 1-08.0(2) Hours of Work ..................................................................................................... 46 1-08.0(3) Reimbursement for Overtime Work of Contracting Agency Employees .................. 47 1-08.1 Subcontracting ......................................................................................................... 47 1-08.2 Assignment .............................................................................................................. 47 1-08.3 Progress Schedule .................................................................................................... 48 1-08.4 Notice to Proceed and Prosecution of the Work ........................................................ 48 1-08.5 Time For Completion ................................................................................................ 49 1-08.6 Suspension of Work ................................................................................................. 50 1-08.7 Maintenance During Suspension .............................................................................. 50 1-08.9 Liquidated Damages ................................................................................................. 51 1-08.11 Contractor's Plant and Equipment .......................................................................... 51 1-08.12 Attention to Work .................................................................................................. 51 1-09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ................................................................................... 51 1-09.1 Measurement of Quantities ..................................................................................... 51 1-09.3 Scope of Payment .................................................................................................... 52 4 1-09.6 Force Account .......................................................................................................... 53 1-09.7 Mobilization ............................................................................................................ 53 1-09.9 Payments ................................................................................................................. 53 1-09.9(1) Retainage ............................................................................................................ 54 1-09.9(2) Contracting Agency’s Right to Withhold and Disburse Certain Amounts ................. 55 1-09.9(3) Final Payment ...................................................................................................... 56 1-09.11 Disputes and Claims ................................................................................................ 56 1-09.11(2) Claims ............................................................................................................... 56 1-09.11(3) Time Limitations and Jurisdiction ....................................................................... 57 1-09.13 Claims and Resolutions ........................................................................................... 57 1-09.13(3) Claims $250,000 or Less ..................................................................................... 57 1-09.13(3)A Administration of Arbitration ........................................................................... 57 1-09.13(3)B Procedures to Pursue Arbitration ..................................................................... 57 1-09.14 Payment Schedule .................................................................................................. 58 1-09.14(1) Scope ................................................................................................................ 58 1-09.14(2) Bid Items ........................................................................................................... 58 1-10 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL .................................................................................. 58 1-10.1 General .................................................................................................................... 58 1-10.2(1)B Traffic Control Supervisor ................................................................................... 60 1-10.2(2) Traffic Control Plans ............................................................................................. 60 1-10.3 Flagging, Signs, and All Other Traffic Control Devices ................................................. 60 1-10.3(3) Construction Signs ............................................................................................... 60 1-10.4 Measurement .......................................................................................................... 60 1-10.5 Payment .................................................................................................................. 60 1-11 RENTON SURVEYING STANDARDS ................................................................................ 60 1-11.1(1) Responsibility for surveys ..................................................................................... 60 1-11.1(2) Survey Datum and Precision ................................................................................. 61 1-11.1(3) Subdivision Information ....................................................................................... 61 1-11.1(4) Field Notes .......................................................................................................... 61 1-11.1(5) Corners and Monuments ...................................................................................... 62 1-11.1(6) Control or Base Line Survey .................................................................................. 62 1-11.1(7) Precision Levels ................................................................................................... 62 1-11.1(8) Radial and Station -- Offset Topography ................................................................ 63 5 1-11.1(9) Radial Topography ............................................................................................... 63 1-11.1(10) Station--Offset Topography ................................................................................ 63 1-11.1(11) As-Built Survey .................................................................................................. 63 1-11.1(12) Monument Setting and Referencing ................................................................... 63 1-11.12 Materials .............................................................................................................. 64 1-11.12(1) Property/Lot Corners ......................................................................................... 64 1-11.12(2) Monuments ....................................................................................................... 64 1-11.12(3) Monument Case and Cover ................................................................................ 64 2-01 CLEARING, GRUBBING, AND ROADSIDE CLEANUP ........................................................ 64 2-01.1 Description .............................................................................................................. 64 2-01.2 Disposal of Usable Material and Debris ..................................................................... 64 2-01.5 Payment .................................................................................................................. 65 2-02 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURE AND OBSTRUCTIONS ........................................................... 65 2-02.3(3) Removal of Pavement, Sidewalks, and Curbs ........................................................ 65 2-02.4 Measurement .......................................................................................................... 65 2-02.5 Payment .................................................................................................................. 65 2-03 ROADWAY EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT ............................................................... 65 2-03.3 Construction Requirements ...................................................................................... 65 2-03.4 Measurement .......................................................................................................... 66 2-03.5 Payment .................................................................................................................. 67 2-04 HAUL .......................................................................................................................... 67 2-04.5 Payment .................................................................................................................. 67 2-06 SUBGRADE PREPARATION ........................................................................................... 67 2-06.5 Measurement and Payment .................................................................................... 67 2-09 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION ............................................................................................ 67 2-09.1 Description .............................................................................................................. 67 2-09.3(1)D Disposal of Excavated Material........................................................................... 67 2-09.4 Measurement .......................................................................................................... 68 2-09.5 Payment .................................................................................................................. 68 5-04 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT .................................................................................. 69 5-04.2 Materials ................................................................................................................. 69 5-04.3 Construction Requirements ...................................................................................... 69 5-04.3(5) Conditioning the Existing Surface ......................................................................... 69 6 5-04.3(5)A Preparation of Existing Surface ........................................................................... 70 5-04.3(7)A Mix Design ........................................................................................................ 70 5-04.3(8)A Acceptance Sampling and Testing—HMA Mixture ............................................... 71 5-04.3(10)B Control ............................................................................................................ 71 5-04.5 Payment .................................................................................................................. 71 5-04.5(1)A Price Adjustments for Quality of HMA Mixture ................................................... 71 5-04.5(1)B Price Adjustments for Quality of HMA Compaction ............................................. 72 5-06 TEMPORARY RESTORATION IN PAVEMENT AREAS ........................................................ 72 5-06.1 Description .............................................................................................................. 72 5-06.2 Materials ................................................................................................................. 73 5-06.3 Construction Requirements ...................................................................................... 73 7-01 DRAINS ....................................................................................................................... 73 7-01.2 Materials ................................................................................................................. 73 7-01.3 Construction Requirements ...................................................................................... 73 7-01.4 Measurement .......................................................................................................... 73 7-02 CULVERTS ................................................................................................................... 74 7-02.2 Materials ................................................................................................................. 74 7-04 STORM SEWERS .......................................................................................................... 74 7-04.2 Materials ................................................................................................................. 74 7-04.2(2) Temporary Stormwater Diversion ......................................................................... 75 7-04.3(1) Cleaning and Testing ............................................................................................ 75 7-04.3(1)G Abandon Existing Storm Sewer Pipes ................................................................. 76 7-04.3(2) CCTV Inspection ................................................................................................... 77 7-04.3(3) Direct Pipe Connections ........................................................................................ 77 7-05 MANHOLES, INLETS, AND CATCH BASINS ..................................................................... 77 7-05.3 Construction Requirements ...................................................................................... 77 7-05.3(1) Adjusting Manholes and Catch Basins to Grade ..................................................... 77 7-05.3(2) Abandon Existing Manholes ................................................................................. 78 7-05.3(3) Connections to Existing Manholes ........................................................................ 78 7-05.3(5) Manhole Coatings ................................................................................................ 79 7-06 TRENCH DRAINS (NEW SECTION)................................................................................... 79 7-06.1 Description ................................................................................................................ 79 7-06.2 Materials ................................................................................................................... 79 7 7-06.3 Construction Requirements........................................................................................ 80 7-08 GENERAL PIPE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................. 80 7-08.3 Construction Requirements ...................................................................................... 80 7-08.3(1)A Trenches ............................................................................................................ 80 7-08.3(1)C Bedding the Pipe ................................................................................................ 80 7-08.3(1)D Pipe Foundation ............................................................................................... 81 7-08.3(2)A Survey Line and Grade ....................................................................................... 81 7-08.3(2)B Pipe Laying – General ......................................................................................... 81 7-08.3(2)E Rubber Gasketed Joints ...................................................................................... 82 7-08.3(2)H Sewer Line Connections ..................................................................................... 82 7-08.3(2)J Placing PVC Pipe ................................................................................................. 83 7-08.3(3)A Backfilling Pipe Trenches .................................................................................... 83 7-09 PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR WATER MAINS ....................................................................... 84 7-09.3(15)A Ductile Iron Pipe .............................................................................................. 84 7-09.3(15)B Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (4 inches and Over) ............................................. 84 7-09.3(17) Laying Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings with Polyethylene Encasement .................... 84 7-09.3(19)A Connections to Existing Mains .......................................................................... 85 7-09.3(21) Concrete Thrust Blocking and Dead-Man Block ................................................... 86 7-09.3(23) Hydrostatic Pressure Test ................................................................................... 86 7-09.3(24)A Flushing and .................................................................................................... 88 7-09.3(24)D Dry Calcium Hypochlorite ................................................................................ 89 7-09.3(24)K Retention Period .............................................................................................. 89 7-09.3(24)N Final Flushing and Testing ................................................................................ 89 7-09.3(25) Joint Restraint Systems....................................................................................... 89 7-09.4 Measurement .......................................................................................................... 91 7-09.5 Payment .................................................................................................................. 91 7-12 VALVES FOR WATER MAINS ......................................................................................... 92 7-12.3(1) Installation of Valve Marker Post .......................................................................... 92 7-12.3(2) Adjust Existing Valve Box to Grade........................................................................ 92 7-12.4 Measurement .......................................................................................................... 92 7-12.5 Payment .................................................................................................................. 92 7-14 HYDRANTS .................................................................................................................. 93 7-14.3(1) Setting Hydrants .................................................................................................. 93 8 7-14.3(3) Resetting Existing Hydrants .................................................................................. 93 7-14.3(4) Moving Existing Hydrants ..................................................................................... 94 7-14.3(7) Remove and Salvage Hydrant ................................................................................. 94 7-14.5 Payment .................................................................................................................. 94 7-15 SERVICE CONECTIONS ................................................................................................. 95 7-15.3 Construction Details ................................................................................................. 95 7-15.5 Payment .................................................................................................................. 95 7-17 SANITARY SEWERS ...................................................................................................... 95 7-17.2 Materials ................................................................................................................. 95 7-17.3 Construction Requirements ...................................................................................... 96 7-17.3(1) Protection of Existing Sewerage Facilities .............................................................. 96 7-17.3(2)H Television Inspection ......................................................................................... 96 7-17.4 Measurement .......................................................................................................... 97 7-17.3(2)I Abandon Existing Sanitary Sewer Pipes ............................................................... 97 7-17.5 Payment .................................................................................................................. 97 7-21 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CURED IN PLACE PIPE (CIPP) ......................................... 98 7-21.1 Description .............................................................................................................. 98 7-21.1(1) Related Work Specified Elsewhere ........................................................................ 98 7-21.1(2) Licensing ............................................................................................................. 98 7-21.1(3) Contractor and Manufacturer Qualifications ......................................................... 98 7-21.1(4) Contractor Submittals .......................................................................................... 99 7-21.1(5) Quality Assurance .............................................................................................. 100 7-21.1(6) Warranty ........................................................................................................... 100 7-21.2 Materials ............................................................................................................... 101 7-21.2 Cured in Place Resin Impregnated Material in General ............................................ 101 7-21.2(2) Resin ................................................................................................................. 102 7-21.2(3) Physical Properties ............................................................................................. 102 7-21.3 Construction Requirements .................................................................................... 103 7-21.3(1) Preparation ....................................................................................................... 103 7-21.3(1)A Flow Management ........................................................................................... 103 7-21.3(1)B Cleaning .......................................................................................................... 104 7-21.3(1)C Point Repairs ................................................................................................... 104 7-21.3(1)D Manholes ........................................................................................................ 104 9 7-21.3(2) Liner Installation ................................................................................................ 105 7-21.3(2)A Inversion Method ............................................................................................ 105 7-21.3(2)B Pull/Winch Method ......................................................................................... 105 7-21.3(2)C Finished Pipe Liner ........................................................................................... 105 7-21.3(3) Service Connection Restoration .......................................................................... 106 7-21.3(4) Testing ............................................................................................................... 106 7-21.3(4)A Material Testing ............................................................................................... 106 7-21.3(4)B Field Testing..................................................................................................... 106 7-21.3(4)C Post Installation CCTV Inspection...................................................................... 106 7-21.4 Measurement ........................................................................................................ 106 7-21.5 Payment ................................................................................................................ 106 7-22 RESIN IMPREGNATED FABRIC CIPP ............................................................................. 107 7-22.1 Description ............................................................................................................ 107 7-22.1(1) Related Work Specified Elsewhere ...................................................................... 107 7-22.2 Materials ............................................................................................................... 107 7-22.2(1) Cured in Place Pipe Liner .................................................................................... 107 7-22.2(2) Resin ................................................................................................................. 107 7-22.2(3) Physical Properties ............................................................................................. 107 7-22.3 Construction Requirements .................................................................................... 107 7-22.3(1) Preparation ....................................................................................................... 107 7-22.3(1)A Cleaning .......................................................................................................... 107 7-22.3(2) Installation ........................................................................................................ 107 7-22.3(2)A Resin Impregnation ......................................................................................... 107 7-22.3(2)B Water, Air or Steam Curing ............................................................................... 108 7-22.3(2)C Cool Down ....................................................................................................... 108 7-23 RESIN IMPREGNATED FIBERGLASS CIPP ..................................................................... 109 7-23.1 Description ............................................................................................................ 109 7-23.1(1) Related Work Specified Elsewhere ...................................................................... 109 7-23.1(2) Reference Specifications, Codes, and Standards .................................................. 109 7-23.1(3) CIPP Liner Samples ............................................................................................. 109 7-23.1(4) CIPP Liner Handling ............................................................................................ 110 7-23.2 Materials ............................................................................................................... 110 7-23.2(1) General Specifications ........................................................................................ 110 10 7-23.2(2) Chemical Resistance ........................................................................................... 110 7-23.3(3) Component Properties ....................................................................................... 110 7-23.3(4) Finished and Cured CIPP Liner Properties ............................................................ 111 7-23.2(5) Dimensions ........................................................................................................ 111 7-23.3 Construction Requirements .................................................................................... 111 7-23.3(1) Installation Procedures ...................................................................................... 111 7-23.3(1)A Installation Process .......................................................................................... 111 7-23.3(1)B Curing ............................................................................................................. 111 7-23.3(2) Finished Product ................................................................................................ 112 8-02 ROADSIDE RESTORATION .......................................................................................... 112 8-02.3(4)A Topsoil Type A ................................................................................................. 112 8-02.3(16) Lawn Installation .............................................................................................. 112 8-02.3(16)A Lawn Installation ........................................................................................... 112 8-02.3(16)A1 Qualifications of Workmen ........................................................................... 112 8-02.3(16)A2 Submittals ................................................................................................... 112 8-02.3(16)A2a Certification of Material .............................................................................. 112 8-02.3(16)A2b Manufacturer’s Certificates of Conformance ............................................... 112 8-02.3(16)A2c Schedule for Installation ............................................................................. 112 8-02.3(16)A3 Product Handling ......................................................................................... 113 8-02.3(16)A4 Site Information ........................................................................................... 113 8-02.3(16)A5 Sod .............................................................................................................. 113 8-02.3(16)A5a Other Materials ......................................................................................... 113 8-02.3(16)A6 Execution ..................................................................................................... 113 8-02.3(16)A6a Installation Preparation .............................................................................. 113 8-02.3(16)A6b Sod Installation .......................................................................................... 114 8-02.3(16)B Lawn Establishment ....................................................................................... 114 8-02.3(16)B Lawn Establishment and Final Acceptance ...................................................... 114 8-02.3(16)B1 Establishment Period ................................................................................... 114 8-02.3(16)B2 Guarantee .................................................................................................... 115 8-02.3(16)B3 Final Acceptance .......................................................................................... 115 8-09 RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS .................................................................................... 115 8-09.5 Payment ................................................................................................................ 115 8-13 MONUMENT CASES .................................................................................................. 115 11 8-13.1 Description ............................................................................................................ 115 8-13.3 Construction Requirements .................................................................................... 115 8-13.4 Measurement ........................................................................................................ 116 8-13.5 Payment ................................................................................................................ 116 8-14 CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALKS ................................................................................ 116 8-14.3(4) Curing................................................................................................................ 116 8-14.4 Measurement ........................................................................................................ 116 8-14.5 Payment ................................................................................................................ 116 8-17 IMPACT ATTENUATOR SYSTEMS ................................................................................. 117 8-17.5 Payment ................................................................................................................ 117 8-20 ILLUMINATION, TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEMS, AND ELECTRICAL ...................................... 117 8-20.2(1) Equipment List and Drawings ............................................................................. 117 8-22 PAVEMENT MARKING ............................................................................................... 117 8-22.1 Description ............................................................................................................ 117 8-22.3(5) Installation Instructions ..................................................................................... 118 8-22.5 Payment ................................................................................................................ 118 8-23 TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS ......................................................................... 118 8-23.5 Payment ................................................................................................................ 118 9-03.8(7) HMA Tolerances and Adjustments ....................................................................... 119 9-05 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, CULVERTS, AND CONDUITS ................................................. 119 9-05.4 Steel Culvert Pipe and Pipe Arch (RC) ...................................................................... 119 9-05.7(2) Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe (RC) ........................................................ 120 9-05.7(2)A Basis for Acceptance (RC) ................................................................................. 120 9-05.7(3) Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe Joints (RC) ............................................................... 120 9-05.7(4) Testing Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe Joints (RC) .................................................... 120 9-05.9 Steel Spiral Rib Storm Sewer Pipe (RC) .................................................................... 120 9-05.12 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe ................................................................................ 121 9-05.12(3) CPEP Sewer Pipe .............................................................................................. 121 9-05.14 ABS Composite Sewer Pipe ................................................................................... 121 9-05.17 Aluminum Spiral Rib Storm Sewer Pipe ................................................................. 121 9-05.22 High Density Polyethylene Piping .......................................................................... 122 9-05.24 Polypropylene Culvert Pipe, Polypropylene Storm Sewer Pipe, and Polypropylene Sanitary Sewer Pipe ........................................................................................................... 123 12 9-05.24(1) Polypropylene Culvert Pipe and Storm Sewer Pipe ............................................. 124 9-05.24(2) Polypropylene Sanitary Sewer Pipe ................................................................... 124 9-08 PAINTS ..................................................................................................................... 124 9-08.8 Manhole Coating System Products.......................................................................... 124 9-08.8(1) Coating Systems Specification ............................................................................ 124 9-14 EROSION CONTROL AND ROADSIDE PLANTING .......................................................... 125 9-14.1(1) Topsoil Type A .................................................................................................... 125 9-14.6(8) Sod .................................................................................................................... 125 9-23 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS AND ADMIXTURES .................................................... 125 9-23.9 Fly Ash (RC) ............................................................................................................ 125 9-30 WATER DISTRIBUTION MATERIALS ............................................................................. 125 9-30.1 Pipe ..................................................................................................................... 125 9-30.1(1) Ductile Iron Pipe .................................................................................................. 126 9-30.1(2) Polyethylene Encasement .................................................................................. 126 9-30.2 Fittings .................................................................................................................. 126 9-30.2(1) Ductile Iron Pipe ................................................................................................ 126 9-30.2(2) Galvanized Iron Pipe .......................................................................................... 127 9-30.2(3) Steel Casing Pipe ................................................................................................ 127 9-30.2(4) Steel Pipe ........................................................................................................... 127 9-30.2(4) Spacers and Seals for Steel Casing Pipe ............................................................... 127 9-30.2(6) Restrained Joint ................................................................................................. 128 9-30.2(6) Restrained Joint Pipe and Fittings ....................................................................... 128 9-30.2(7) Bolted, Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain End Pipe ................................................ 128 9-30.3 Valves .................................................................................................................. 128 9-30.3(1) Gate Valves (3 inches to 16 inches) ..................................................................... 128 9-30.3(3) Butterfly Valves ................................................................................................. 129 9-30.3(4) Valve Boxes ....................................................................................................... 129 9-30.3(5) Valve Marker Posts ............................................................................................ 129 9-30.3(6) Valve Stem Extensions ....................................................................................... 129 9-30.3(7) Combination Air Release/Air Vacuum Valves....................................................... 130 9-30.3(8) Tapping Sleeve and Valve Assembly .................................................................... 130 9-30.3(9) Blow-Off Assembly ............................................................................................ 130 9-30.5 Hydrants ................................................................................................................ 130 13 9-30.5(1) End Connections ................................................................................................ 130 9-30.5(2) Hydrant Dimensions........................................................................................... 130 9-30.6 Water Service Connections (2 Inches and Smaller) ................................................. 131 9-30.6(3) Service Pipes ..................................................................................................... 131 9-30.6(3)B Polyethylene Pipe ............................................................................................ 131 9-30.6(4) Service Fittings .................................................................................................. 131 9-30.6(5) Meter Setters ..................................................................................................... 131 9-30.6(7) Meter Boxes ...................................................................................................... 131 10 Removal of Utility Locate Markings From Sidewalks Required ....................................... 131 07/05/2018 14 SPECIAL PROVISIONS The work on this project shall be accomplished in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, 2016 edition, as issued by the Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT) and the American Public Works Association (APWA), Washington State Chapter (hereafter “Standard Specifications”). The Standard Specifications, as modified or supplemented by the Amendments to the Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions, all of which are made a part of the Contract Documents, shall govern all of the Work. These Special Provisions are made up of both General Special Provisions (GSPs) from various sources, which may have project-specific fill-ins; and project-specific Special Provisions. Each Provision either supplements, modifies, or replaces the comparable Standard Specification, or is a new Provision. The deletion, amendment, alteration, or addition to any subsection or portion of the Standard Specifications is meant to pertain only to that particular portion of the section, and in no way should it be interpreted that the balance of the section does not apply. Also incorporated into the Contract Documents by reference are:  Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways, currently adopted edition, with Washington State modifications, if any  Standard Plans for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, WSDOT/APWA, current edition  City of Renton Standard Details, City of Renton Public Works Department, Current Edition  Public Rights-Of-Way Accessibility Guidelines (PROWAG), current edition Contractor shall obtain copies of these publications, at Contractor’s own expense. 1-01 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS 1-01.1 General Section 1-01.1 is supplemented with: (******) Whenever reference is made to the State, State of Washington, Commission, Department of Transportation, Secretary of Transportation, Owner, Contracting Agency or Engineer, such reference shall be deemed to mean the City of Renton acting through its City Council, employees, and duly authorized representatives for all contracts administered by the City of Renton. All references to “State Materials Laboratory” shall be revised to read “Contracting Agency designated location”. 1-01.3 Definitions Section 1-01.3 is revised and supplemented by the following: (******) Act of God "Act of God" means an earthquake, flood, cyclone, or other cataclysmic phenomenon of nature. A rain, windstorm, high water or other natural phenomenon of unusual intensity for the specific locality of the Work, which might reasonably have been anticipated from historical records of the general locality of the Work, shall not be construed as an act of God. Consulting Engineer The Contracting Agency's design consultant, who may or may not administer the construction program for the Contracting Agency. Contract Documents See definition for “Contract”. 07/05/2018 15 Contract Price Either the unit price, the unit prices, or lump sum price or prices named in the proposal, or in properly executed change orders. Contract Time The period of time established by the terms and conditions of the Contract within which the Work must be physically completed. Dates Bid Opening Date: The date on which the Contracting Agency publicly opens and reads the bids. Award Date: The date of the formal decision of the Contracting Agency to accept the lowest responsible and responsive Bidder for the Work. Contract Execution Date: The date the Contracting Agency officially binds the agency to the Contract. Notice to Proceed Date: The date stated in the Notice to Proceed on which the Contract Time begins. Substantial Completion Date: The day the Engineer determines the Contracting Agency has full and unrestricted use and benefit of the facilities, both from the operational and safety standpoint, and only minor incidental Work, replacement of temporary substitute facilities, or correction or repair remains for the physical completion of the total contract. Contract Completion Date: The date by which the Work is contractually required to be physically completed. The Contract Completion Date will be stated in the Notice to Proceed. Revisions of this date will be authorized in writing by the Engineer whenever there is an extension to the Contract time. Completion Date: The day all the Work specified in the Contract is completed and all the obligations of the Contractor under the Contract are fulfilled by the Contractor. Final Acceptance Date: The date the Contracting Agency accepts the Work as complete per the Contract requirements. Day Unless otherwise designated, day(s) as used in the Contract Documents, shall be understood to mean working days. Engineer The City Engineer or duly authorized representative, or an authorized member of a licensed consulting firm retained by the Owner for the construction engineering of a specific public works project. Inspector The Owner’s authorized representative assigned to make necessary observations of the Work performed or being performed, or of materials furnished or being furnished by the Contractor. Notice of Award: The written notice from the Contracting Agency to the successful bidder signifying the Contracting Agency’s acceptance of the bid. Notice to Proceed: The written notice from the Contracting Agency or the Engineer to the Contractor authorizing and directing the Contractor to proceed with Work and establishing the date on which the Contract time begins. 07/05/2018 16 Or Equal Where the term "or equal" is used herein, the Contracting Agency, or the Contracting Agency on recommendation of the Engineer, shall be the sole judge of the quality and suitability of the proposed substitution. The responsibility and cost of furnishing necessary evidence, demonstrations, or other information required to obtain the approval of alternative materials or processes by the Owner shall be entirely borne by the Contractor. Owner The City of Renton or its authorized representative also referred to as Contracting Agency. Performance and Payment Bond Same as “Contract Bond” defined in the Standard Specifications. Plans The Contract Plans and/or Standard Plans which show location, character, and dimensions of prescribed Work including layouts, profiles, cross-sections, and other details. Drawings may either be bound in the same book as the balance of the Contract Documents or bound in separate sets, and are a part of the Contract Documents, regardless of the method of binding. The terms "Standard Drawings" or "Standard Details" generally used in Specifications refers to drawings bound either with the specification documents or included with the Plans or the City of Renton Standard Plans. Points Wherever reference is made to the Engineer’s points, this shall mean all marks, bench marks, reference points, stakes, hubs, tack, etc., established by the Engineer for maintaining horizontal and vertical control of the Work. Provide Means “furnish and install” as specified and shown in the Plans. Secretary, Secretary of Transportation The chief executive officer of the Department and other authorized representatives. The chief executive officer to the Department shall also refer to the Department of Public Works Administrator. Shop Drawings Same as “Working Drawings” defined in the Standard Specifications. Special Provisions Modifications to the Standard Specifications and their amendments that apply to an individual project. The special provisions may describe Work the Specifications do not cover. Such Work shall comply first with the Special Provisions and then with any Specifications that apply. The Contractor shall include all costs of doing this Work within the bid prices. State The state of Washington acting through its representatives. The State shall also refer to The City of Renton and its authorized representatives where applicable. Supplemental Drawings and Instructions Additional instructions by the Engineer at request of the Contractor by means of drawings or documents necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, for the proper execution of the Work. Such drawings and instructions are consistent with the Contract Documents. Traffic Both vehicular and non-vehicular traffic, such as pedestrians, bicyclists, wheelchairs, and equestrian traffic. Utility Public or private fixed improvement for the transportation of fluids, gases, power, signals, or communications and shall be understood to include tracks, overhead and underground wires, 07/05/2018 17 cables, pipelines, conduits, ducts, sewers, or storm drains. 1-02 BID PROCEDURES AND CONDITIONS 1-02.1 Prequalification of Bidders Delete this Section and replace it with the following: (******) Bidders shall be qualified by experience, financing, equipment, and organization to do the Work called for in the Contract Documents. The Contracting Agency reserves the right to take whatever action it deems necessary to ascertain the ability of the bidder to perform the Work satisfactorily. 1-02.2 Plans and Specifications Delete this Section and replace it with the following: (******) Information as to where Bid Documents can be obtained or reviewed will be found in the Call for Bids (Advertisement for Bids) for the Work. After award of the Contract, Plans and Specifications will be issued to the Contractor at no cost as detailed below: To Prime Contractor No. of Sets Basis of Distribution Reduced Plans (11” x 17”) and contract provisions 4 Furnished automatically upon award Large Plans (22” x 34”) 4 Furnished only upon request 1-02.4(2) Subsurface Information Section 1-02.4(2) is supplemented with the following: (******) If a geotechnical study was prepared for the project, then the findings and recommendations are summarized in a report. The City of Renton will provide this study upon request. 1-02.5 Proposal Forms Delete this Section and replace it with the following: (******) At the request of the bidder, the Contracting Agency will provide a proposal form for any project on which the bidder is eligible to bid. The proposal form will identify the project and its location and describe the Work. It will also list estimated quantities, units of measurement, the items of Work, and the materials to be furnished at the unit bid prices. The bidder shall complete spaces on the proposal form that call for, but are not limited to, unit bid prices; extensions; summations; the total bid amount; signatures; date; and, where applicable, retail sales taxes and acknowledgement of addenda; the bidder’s name, address, telephone number, and signature; and a State of Washington Contractor’s Registration Number. Bids shall be completed by typing or shall be printed in ink by hand, preferably in black ink. The required certifications are included as part of the proposal form. The Contracting Agency reserves the right to arrange the proposal forms with alternates and additives, if such be to the advantage of the Contracting Agency. The bidder shall bid on all alternates and additives set forth in the proposal forms unless otherwise specified. Any correction to a bid made by interlineations, alteration, or erasure, shall be initialed by the signer of the bid. The bidder shall make no stipulation on the Bid Form, nor qualify the bid in any manner. A bid by a corporation shall be executed in the corporate name, by the president or a vice president (Or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign). 07/05/2018 18 A bid by a partnership shall be executed in the partnership name, and signed by a partner. A copy of the partnership agreement shall be submitted with the Bid Form if any D/M/WBE requirements are to be satisfied through such an agreement. A bid by a joint venture shall be executed in the joint venture name and signed by a member of the joint venture. A copy of the joint venture agreement shall be submitted with the Bid Form if any D/W/MBE requirements are to be satisfied through such an agreement. 1-02.6 Preparation of Proposal Section 1-02.6 is supplemented with: Supplement the second paragraph with the following: ****** 4. If a minimum bid amount has been established for any item, the unit or lump sum price must equal or exceed the minimum amount stated. 5. Any correction to a bid made by interlineation, alteration, or erasure, shall be initialed by the signer of the bid. Delete the last paragraph, and replace it with the following: The Bidder shall make no stipulation on the Bid Form, nor qualify the bid in any manner. A bid by a corporation shall be executed in the corporate name, by the president or a vice president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign). A bid by a partnership shall be executed in the partnership name, and signed by a partner. A copy of the partnership agreement shall be submitted with the Bid Form if any D/M/WBE requirements are to be satisfied through such an agreement. A bid by a joint venture shall be executed in the joint venture name and signed by a member of the joint venture. A copy of the joint venture agreement shall be submitted with the Bid Form if any D/W/MBE requirements are to be satisfied through such an agreement. 1-02.7 Bid Deposit Section 1-02.7 is supplemented with the following: (******) Bid Bonds shall contain the following: 1. Number assigned to the project by the Contracting Agency; 2. Name of the project; 3. The Contracting Agency named as obligee; 4. The amount of the bid bond stated either as a dollar figure or as a percentage which represents five percent of the maximum bid amount that could be awarded; 5. Signature of the bidder’s officer empowered to sign official statements. The signature of the person authorized to submit the bid should agree with the signature on the bond, and the title of the person must accompany said signature; 6. The signature of the surety’s officer empowered to sign the bond form included in the Contract Provision. 1-02.9 Delivery of Proposal Revise the first paragraph to read: (******) Each proposal shall be submitted in a sealed envelope, with Project Name and Project Number clearly marked on the outside of the envelope as stated in the Advertisement for Bids, or as otherwise stated in the Bid Documents. 07/05/2018 19 1-02.12 Public Opening of Proposals Section 1-02.12 is supplemented with the following: (******) The Contracting Agency reserves the right to postpone the date and time for bid opening. Notification to bidder will be by addenda. 1-02.13 Irregular Proposals Revise item I to read: (******) 1. A proposal will be considered irregular and will be rejected if: a. The bidder is not prequalified when so required; b. The authorized proposal form furnished by the Contracting Agency is not used or is altered; c. The complete proposal form contains any unauthorized additions, deletions, alternate bids, or conditions; d. The bidder adds provisions reserving the right to reject or accept the award, or enter into the Contract; e. A price per unit cannot be determined from the bid proposal; f. The proposal form is not properly executed; g. The bidder fails to submit or properly complete a subcontractor list, if applicable, as required in Section 1-2.6 h. The bidder fails to submit or properly complete a Disadvantaged, Minority or Women’s Business Enterprise Certification, if applicable, as required in Section 1-02.6; or i. The bid proposal does not constitute a definite and unqualified offer to meet the material terms of the bid invitation. j. More than one proposal is submitted for the same project from a Bidder under the same or different names. 1-02.14 Disqualification of Bidders Revise this section to read: (******) 1. A bidder will be deemed not responsible and the proposal rejected if the bidder does not meet the responsibility criteria in RCW 39.04. 2. A bidder may be deemed not responsible and the proposal rejected if: a. More than one proposal is submitted for the same project from a bidder under the same or different names; b. Evidence of collusion exists with any other bidder or potential bidder. Participants in collusion will be restricted from submitting further bids; c. The bidder, in the opinion of the Contracting Agency, is not qualified for the Work or to the full extent of the bid, or to the extent that the bid exceeds the authorized prequalification amount as may have been determined by a prequalification of the bidder; d. An unsatisfactory performance record exists based on past or current Contracting Agency Work or for Work done for others, as judged from the standpoint of conduct of the Work; workmanship; progress; affirmative action; equal employment opportunity practices; or Disadvantaged Enterprise, Minority Enterprise, or Women’s Business Enterprise utilization. e. There is uncompleted Work (Contracting Agency or otherwise) which might hinder or prevent the prompt completion of the Work bid upon; f. The bidder failed to settle bills for labor or materials on past or current contracts; g. The bidder has failed to complete a written public contract or has been convicted of a crime arising from a previous public contract; h. The bidder is unable, financially or otherwise, to perform the Work; i. A bidder is not authorized to do business in the State of Washington (not registered in accordance with RCW 18.27) 07/05/2018 20 j. The bidder does not meet the supplemental qualifications criteria as stated in Section 1- 02.1(1). k. There are any other reasons deemed proper by the Contracting Agency. 1-02.15 Pre Award Information Revise this section to read: (******) Before awarding any contract, the Contracting Agency may require one or more of these items or actions of: 1. A complete statement of the origin, composition, and manufacture of any or all materials to be used; 2. Samples of these materials for quality and fitness tests; 3. A progress schedule (in a form the Contracting Agency requires) showing the order of time required for the various phases of Work; 4. A breakdown of costs assigned to any bid item; 5. Attending at a conference with the Engineer or representatives of the Engineer; 6. Obtain, and furnish a copy of, a business license to do business in the city and/or county where the Work is located; 7. A copy of State of Washington Contractor’s Registration; or 8. Any other information or action taken that is deemed necessary to ensure that the bidder is the lowest responsible bidder. 1-03 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT 1-03.1 Consideration of bids Section 1-03.1 is supplemented with the following: (******) All bids will be based on total sum of all schedules of prices. No partial bids will be accepted unless so stated in the call for bids or special provisions. The City reserves the right however to award all or any schedule of a bid to the lowest bidder at its discretion. 1-03.2 Award of Contract Section 1-03.2 is supplemented with the following: (******) The Contract, bond form, and all other forms requiring execution, together with a list of all other forms or documents required to be submitted by the successful bidder, will be forwarded to the successful bidder within 10 days of the award. The number of copies to be executed by the Contractor shall be determined by the Contracting Agency. 1-03.3 Execution of Contract Section 1-03.3 is revised and supplemented as follows: (******) Within 10 calendar days after receipt from the City of the forms and documents required to be completed by the Contractor, the successful bidder shall return the signed Contracting Agency- prepared contract, an insurance certification as required by Section 1-07.18, and a satisfactory bond as required by law and Section 1-03.4. Before execution of the Contract by the Contracting Agency, the successful bidder shall provide any pre-award information the Contracting Agency may require under Section 1-02.15. Until the Contracting Agency executes a contract, no proposal shall bind the Contracting Agency nor shall any Work begin within the project limits or within Contracting Agency-furnished sites. The Contractor shall bear all risks for any Work begun outside such areas and for any materials ordered before the Contract is executed by the Contracting Agency. If the bidder experiences circumstances beyond their control that prevents return of the Contract documents within 10 calendar days after the award date, the Contracting Agency may grant up to a maximum of 10 additional calendar days for return of the documents, provided the Contracting 07/05/2018 21 Agency deems the circumstances warrant it. The Contracting Agency is prohibited by RCW 39.06.010 from executing a contract with a Contractor who is not registered or licensed as required by the laws of the state. In addition, the Contracting Agency requires persons doing business with the Contracting Agency to possess a valid City of Renton business license prior to award. When the Bid Form provides spaces for a business license number, a Washington State Contractors registration number, or both the Bidder shall insert such information in the spaces provided. The Contracting Agency requires legible copies of the Contractor's Registration and business license be submitted to the Engineer as part of the Contracting Agency's post-award information and evaluation activities. 1-03.4 Contract Bond Revise the first paragraph to read: (******) The successful bidder shall provide an executed contract bond for the full contract amount. This contract bond shall: 1. Be on the Contracting Agency-furnished form; 2. Be signed by an approved surety (or sureties) that: a. Is registered with the Washington State Insurance Commissioner, and b. Appears on the current Authorized Insurance List in the State of Washington published by the Office of the Insurance Commissioner; 3. Be conditioned upon the faithful performance of the Contract by the Contractor within the prescribed time; 4. Guarantee that the surety shall indemnify, defend, and protect the Contracting Agency against any claim of direct or indirect loss resulting from the failure: a. Of the Contractor (or any of the employees, subcontractors, or lower tier subcontractors of the Contractor) to faithfully perform the Contract, or b. Of the Contractor (subcontractors, or lower tier subcontractors of the Contractor) to pay all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, lower tie subcontractors, material person, or any other person who provides supplies or provisions for carrying out Work; 5. Be accompanied by a power of attorney for the Surety’s officer empowered to sign the bond; and 6. Be signed by an officer of the Contractor empowered to sign official statements (sole proprietor or partner). If the Contractor is a corporation, the bond must be signed by the president or vice-president, unless accompanied by a written proof of the authority of the individual signing the bond to bind the corporation (i.e., corporate resolution, power of attorney or a letter to such effect by the president or vice-president). 1-03.7 Judicial Review Revise the last sentence to read: The venue of all causes of action arising from the advertisement, award, execution, and performance of the Contract shall be in the Superior Court of the County where the Contracting Agency’s headquarters are located. 1-04 SCOPE OF WORK 1-04.2 Coordination of Contract Documents, Plans, Special Provisions Specifications, and Addenda Revise the second paragraph to read: (******) Any inconsistency in the parts of the Contract shall be resolved by following this order of precedence (e.g., 1 presiding over 2, 2 over 3, 3 over 4, and so forth): 1. Addenda 07/05/2018 22 2. Proposal Form 3. Technical Specifications (if any) 4. Special Provisions 5. Contract Plans 6. Contracting Agency’s Standard Plans (if any) 7. Amendments to the Standard Specifications 8. WSDOT/APWA Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction 9. WSDOT/APWA Standard Plans for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction 1-04.3 Contractor-Discovered Discrepancies Section 1-04.3 is a new section: (******) Upon receipt of award of contract, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare all the components of the Contract Documents and other instructions, and check and verify all field measurements. The Contractor shall, prior to ordering material or performing Work, report in writing to the Engineer any error, inconsistency, or omission in respect to design or mode of construction, which is discovered. If the Contractor, in the course of this study or in the accomplishment of the Work, finds any discrepancy between the Plans and the physical condition of the locality as represented in the Plans, or any such errors or omissions in respect to design or mode of construction in the Plans or in the layout as given by points and instructions, it shall be the Contractor’s duty to inform the Engineer immediately in writing, and the Engineer will promptly check the same. Any Work done after such discovery, until correction of Plans or authorization of extra Work is given, if the Engineer finds that extra Work is involved, will be done at the Contractor's risk. If extra Work is involved, the procedure shall be as provided in Section 1-04.4 of the Standard Specifications. 1-04.4 Changes The last two paragraphs are replaced with the following: (******) Renton does not have a formal policy or guidelines on cost reduction alternatives, but will evaluate such proposals by the Contractor on a case-by-case basis. 1-04.4(1) Minor Changes Section 1-04.4(1) is supplemented as follows: (******) Payments and credits will be determined in accordance with Section 1-09.4 of the Standard Specifications. For the purpose of providing a common proposal for all bidders, the Contracting Agency may have entered an amount for “Minor Change” in the Proposal to become a part of the total bid by the Contractor. 1-04.8 Progress Estimates and Payments Section 1-04.8 is supplemented as follows: (******) The Contractor is encouraged to provide to the Engineer prior to progress payments an estimate of “Lump Sum” Work accomplished to date. The Engineer's calculations and decisions shall be final in regard to the actual percentage of any lump sum pay item accomplished and eligible for payment unless another specific method of calculating lump sum payments is provided elsewhere in the Specifications. 1-04.11 Final Cleanup Section 1-04.11 is supplemented as follows: (******) All salvage material as noted on the Plans and taken from any of the discarded facilities shall, at the Engineer's discretion, be carefully salvaged and delivered to the City shops. Any cost incurred in salvaging and delivering such items shall be considered incidental to the project and no compensation will be made. 07/05/2018 23 The Contract price for "Finish and Cleanup, Lump Sum," shall be full compensation for all Work, equipment and materials required to perform final cleanup. If this pay item does not appear in the Contract Documents then final cleanup shall be considered incidental to the Contract and to other pay item and no further compensation shall be made. 1-05 CONTROL OF WORK 1-05.4 Conformity With and Deviation from Plans and Stakes Section 1-05.4 is supplemented with the following: (******) If the project calls for the Contractor supplied surveying, the Contractor shall provide all required survey Work, including such Work as mentioned in Sections 1-05, 1-11 and elsewhere in these Specifications as being provided by the Engineer. All costs for this survey Work shall be included in "Contractor Supplied Surveying," per lump sum. The Engineer or the Contractor supplied surveyor will provide construction stakes and marks establishing lines, slopes, and grades as stipulated in Sections 1-05.4 and will perform such Work per Section 1-11. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for detailed dimensions, elevations, and excavation slopes measured from the Engineer or the Contractor supplied surveyor furnished stakes and marks. The Contractor shall provide a work site, which has been prepared to permit construction staking to proceed in a safe and orderly manner. The Contractor shall keep the Engineer or the Contractor supplied surveyor informed of staking requirements and provide at least 48 hour notice to allow the Engineer or the Contractor supplied surveyor adequate time for setting stakes. The Contractor shall carefully preserve stakes, marks, and other reference points, including existing monumentation, set by Contracting Agency forces. The Contractor will be charged for the costs of replacing stakes, markers and monumentation that were not to be disturbed but were destroyed or damaged by the Contractor's operations. This charge will be deducted from monies due or to become due to the Contractor. Any claim by the Contractor for extra compensation by reason of alterations or reconstruction Work allegedly due to error in the Engineer's line and grade, will not be allowed unless the original control points set by the Engineer still exist, or unless other satisfactory substantiating evidence to prove the error was furnished by the Engineer. Three consecutive points set on line or grade shall be the minimum points used to determine any variation from a straight line or grade. Any such variation shall, upon discovery, be reported to the Engineer. In the absence of such report the Contractor shall be liable for any error in alignment or grade. The Contractor shall provide all surveys required other than those to be performed by the Engineer. All survey Work shall be done in accordance with Section 1-11 SURVEYING STANDARDS of these Specifications. The Contractor shall keep updated survey field notes in a standard field book and in a format set by the Engineer, per Section 1-11.1(4). These field notes shall include all survey Work performed by the Contractor's surveyor in establishing line, grade and slopes for the construction Work. Copies of these field notes shall be provided the Engineer upon request and upon completion of the Contract Work the field book or books shall be submitted to the Engineer and become the property of the Contracting Agency. If the survey Work provided by the Contractor does not meet the standards of the Engineer, then the Contractor shall, upon the Engineer's written request, remove the individual or individuals doing the survey Work and the survey Work will be completed by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense. Costs for completing the survey Work required by the Engineer will be deducted from monies due or to become due the Contractor. All costs for survey Work required to be performed by the Contractor shall be included in the prices 07/05/2018 24 bid for the various items which comprise the improvement or be included in the bid item for "Contractor Supplied Surveying" per lump sum if that item is included in the contracts. 1-05.4(3) Contractor Supplied Surveying Section 1-05.4(3) is a new section: (******) When the Contract provides for Contractor Supplied Surveying, the Contractor shall supply the survey Work required for the project. The Contractor shall retain as a part of the Contractor Organization an experienced team of surveyors under the direct supervision of a professional land surveyor licensed by the State of Washington. All survey Work shall be done in accordance with Sections 1-05.4 and 1- 11. The Contractor and/or the Surveyor shall inform the Engineer in writing of any errors, discrepancies, and omissions to the Plans that prevent the Contractor and/or the Surveyor from constructing the project in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. All errors, discrepancies, and omissions must be corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer before the survey Work may be continued. The Contractor shall coordinate his Work with the Surveyor and perform his operations in a manner to protect all survey stakes from harm. The Contractor shall inform the Surveyor of the Contractor's intent to remove any survey stakes and/or points before physically removing them. The Surveyor shall be responsible for maintaining As-Built records for the project. The Contractor shall coordinate his operations and assist the Surveyor in maintaining accurate As-Built records for the project. If the Contractor and the Surveyor fail to provide, as directed by the Engineer and/or these Plans and Specifications, accurate As-Built records and other Work the Engineer deems necessary, the Engineer may elect to provide at Contractor expense, a surveyor to provide all As-Built records and other Work as directed by the Engineer. The Engineer shall deduct expenses incurred by the Engineer-supplied surveying from monies owed to the Contractor. Payment per Section 1-04.1 for all Work and materials required for the full and complete survey Work required to complete the project and As-Built drawings shall be included in the lump sum price for "Construction Surveying, Staking, and As-Builts." 1-05.4(4) Contractor Provided As-Built Information Section 1-05.4(4) is a new section: (******) It shall be the Contractors responsibility to record the location prior to the backfilling of the trenches, by centerline station, offset, and depth below pavement, of all existing utilities uncovered or crossed during his Work as covered under this project. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to have his Surveyor locate by centerline station, offset and elevation each major item of Work done under this contract per the survey standard of Section 1-11. Major items of Work shall include but not be limited to: Manholes, Catch basins and Inlets, Valves, vertical and Horizontal Bends, Junction boxes, Cleanouts, Side Sewers, Street Lights & Standards, Hydrants, Major Changes in Design Grade, Vaults, Culverts, Signal Poles, and Electrical Cabinets. After the completion of the Work covered by this contract, the Contractor’s Surveyor shall provide to the City the hard covered field book(s) containing the as-built notes and one set of white prints of the project drawings upon which he has plotted the notes of the Contractor locating existing utilities, and one set of white prints of the project drawings upon which he has plotted the as-built location of the new Work as he recorded in the field book(s). This drawing shall bear the Surveyor’s seal and signature certifying its accuracy. All costs for as-built Work shall be included in the Contract item "Construction Surveying, Staking, and As-Builts", lump sum. 07/05/2018 25 1-05.7 Removal of Defective and/or Unauthorized Work Section 1-05.7 is supplemented as follows: (******) Upon written notice from the Engineer, the Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute Work by Contractor forces, in accordance with the intent of the Contract and without expense to the Owner, and shall bear the expense of making good all Work of other contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement. If the Contractor does not remove such condemned Work and materials and commence re-execution of the Work within 7 calendar days of written notice from the Engineer, or fails to perform any part of the Work required by the Contract Documents, the Owner may correct and remedy such Work as may be identified in the written notice, with Contracting Agency forces or by such other means as the Contracting Agency may deem necessary. In that case, the Owner may store removed material. Direct or indirect costs incurred by the Contracting Agency attributable to correcting and remedying defective or unauthorized Work, or Work the Contractor failed or refused to perform, shall be paid by the Contractor. Payment will be deducted by the Engineer from monies due, or to become due, the Contractor. Such direct and indirect costs shall include in particular, but without limitation, compensation for additional professional services required, and costs for repair and replacement of Work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of the Contractor’s unauthorized Work. If sufficient funds do not remain in the Contract and the Contractor does not pay the cost of such removal and storage within 10 calendar days from the date of the notice to the Contractor of the fact of such removal, the Owner may, upon an additional 10 calendar days written notice, sell such materials at public or private sale, and deduct all costs and expenses incurred from monies due to the Contractor, including costs of sale, and accounting to Contractor for the net proceeds remaining. The Owner may bid at any such sale. The Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for the amount of any deficiency from any funds otherwise due the Contractor. If the Contractor fails to comply with a written order to remedy what the Engineer determines to be an emergency situation, the Engineer may have the defective and unauthorized Work corrected immediately, have the rejected Work removed and replaced, or have Work the Contractor refuses to perform completed by using Contracting Agency or other forces. An emergency situation is any situation when, in the opinion of the Engineer, a delay in its remedy could be potentially unsafe, or might cause serious risk of loss or damage to the public, the Property Owner and the Property Owner’s property. No adjustment in contract time or compensation will be allowed because of the delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Contracting Agency’s rights provided by this section. The rights exercised under the provisions of this section shall not diminish the Contracting Agency’s right to pursue any other avenue for additional remedy or damages with respect to the Contractor’s failure to perform the Work as required. 1-05.10 Guarantees Section 1-05.10 is supplemented as follows: (******) If within one year after the Acceptance Date of the Work by the Contracting Agency, defective and/or unauthorized Work is discovered, the Contractor shall promptly, upon written order by the Contracting Agency, return and in accordance with the Engineer’s instructions, either correct such Work, or if such Work has been rejected by the Engineer, remove it from the project site and replace it with non- defective and authorized Work, all without cost to the Contracting Agency. If the Contractor does not promptly comply with the written order to correct defective and/or unauthorized Work, or if an emergency exists, the Contracting Agency reserves the right to have defective and/or unauthorized 07/05/2018 26 Work corrected or removed and replaced pursuant to Section 1-05.7 “Removal of Defective and/or Unauthorized Work.” The Contractor agrees the above one year limitation shall not exclude or diminish the Contracting Agency’s rights under any law to obtain damages and recover costs resulting from defective and/or unauthorized Work discovered after one year but prior to the expiration of the legal time period set forth in RCW 4.16.040 limiting actions upon a contract in writing, or liability expressed of implied arising out of a written agreement. The Contractor shall warrant good title to all materials, supplies, and equipment purchased for, or incorporated in the Work. Nothing contained in this paragraph, however, shall defeat or impair the right of persons furnishing materials or labor, to recover under any bond given by the Contractor for their protection, or any rights under any law permitting such persons to look to funds due the Contractor in the hands of the Contracting Agency. The provisions of this paragraph shall be inserted in all subcontracts and material contracts, and notice of its provisions shall be given to all persons furnishing materials for the Work when no formal contract is entered into for such materials. 1-05.11 Final Inspection 1-05.11(1) Substantial Completion Date Section 1-05.11(1) is a new section: (******) When the Contractor considers the Work to be substantially complete, the Contractor shall so notify the Engineer and request the Engineer establish the Substantial Completion Date. The Engineer will schedule an inspection of the Work with the Contractor to determine the status of completion. To be considered substantially complete the following conditions must be met: 1. The Contracting Agency must have full and unrestricted use and benefit of the facilities both from the operational and safety standpoint. 2. Only minor incidental Work, replacement of temporary substitute facilities, or correction of repair Work remains to reach physical completion of the Work. The Contractor’s request shall list the specific items of Work in subparagraph two above that remains to be completed in order to reach physical completion. The Engineer may also establish the Substantial Completion Date unilaterally. If after this inspection, the Engineer concurs with the Contractor that the Work is substantially complete and ready for its intended use, the Engineer, by written notice to the Contractor, will set the Substantial Completion Date. If, after this inspection the Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete and ready for its intended use, the Engineer will, by written notice, so notify the Contractor giving the reasons therefore. Upon receipt of written notice concurring in or denying substantial completion, whichever is applicable, the Contractor shall pursue vigorously, diligently and without unauthorized interruption, the Work necessary to reach Substantial and Physical Completion. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a revised schedule indicating when the Contractor expects to reach substantial and physical completion of the Work. The above process shall be repeated until the Engineer establishes the Substantial Completion Date and the Contractor considers the Work physically complete and ready for Final Inspection. 1-05.11(2) Final Inspection and Physical Completion Date Section 1-05.11(2) is a new Section: (******) When the Contractor considers the Work physically complete and ready for Final Inspection, the 07/05/2018 27 Contractor, by Written Notice, shall request the Engineer to schedule a final inspection. The Engineer will set a date for Final Inspection. The Engineer and the Contractor will then make a final inspection and the Engineer will notify the Contractor in writing of all particulars in which the Final Inspection reveals the Work incomplete or unacceptable. The Contractor shall immediately take such corrective measures as are necessary to remedy the listed deficiencies. Corrective Work shall be pursued vigorously, diligently, and without interruption until physical completion of the listed deficiencies. This process will continue until the Engineer is satisfied the listed deficiencies have been corrected. If action to correct the listed deficiencies is not initiated within 7 days after receipt of the Written Notice listing the deficiencies, the Engineer may, upon Written Notice to the Contractor, take whatever steps are necessary to correct those deficiencies pursuant to Section 1-05.8. The Contractor will not be allowed an extension of contract time because of a delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Engineer’s right hereunder. Upon correction of all deficiencies, the Engineer will notify the Contractor and the Contracting Agency, in writing, of the date upon which the Work was considered physically complete, that date shall constitute the Physical Completion Date of the Contract, but shall not imply all the obligations o f the Contractor under the Contract have been fulfilled. 1-05.11(3) Operational Testing Section 1-05.11(3) is a new section: (******) Unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall give the Engineer a minimum of 3 working days’ notice of the time for each test and inspection. If the inspection is by another authority than the Engineer, the Contractor shall give the Engineer a minimum of 3 working days’ notice of the date fixed for such inspection. Required certificates of inspection by other authority than the Engineer shall be secured by the Contractor. It is the intent of the Contracting Agency to have at the Physical Completion Date a complete and operable system. Therefore, when the Work involves the installation of machinery or other mechanical equipment; street lighting, electrical distribution or signal systems; irrigation systems; buildings; or other similar Work, it may be desirable for the Engineer to have the Contractor operate and test the Work for a period of time, after final inspection but prior to the physical completion date. Whenever items of Work are listed in the Contract Provisions for operational testing they shall be fully tested under operating conditions for the time period specified to ensure their acceptability prior to the Physical Completion Date. During and following the test period, the Contractor shall correct any items of workmanship, materials, or equipment which prove faulty, or that are not in first class operating condition. Equipment, electrical controls, meters, or other devices and equipment to be tested during this period shall be tested under the observation of the Engineer, so that the Engineer may determine their suitability for the purpose for which they were installed. The Physical Completion Date cannot be established until testing and corrections have been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The costs for power, gas, labor, material, supplies, and everything else needed to successfully complete operational testing, shall be included in the unit contract prices related to the system being tested, unless specifically set forth otherwise in the proposal. Operational and test periods, when required by the Engineer, shall not affect a manufacturer’s guaranties or warranties furnished under the terms of the Contract. 1-05.12 Final Acceptance The third and fourth sentences in paragraph 1 are deleted and replaced with: 07/05/2018 28 (******) The Final Acceptance date shall be that date in which the Renton City Council formally approves acceptance of the Contract. 1-05.13 Superintendents, Labor and Equipment of Contractor Revise the seventh paragraph to read: (******) Whenever the Contracting Agency evaluates the Contractor’s qualifications pursuant to Section 1- 02.1, the Contracting Agency will take these performance reports into account. 1-05.14 Cooperation with Other Contractors Section 1-05.14 is supplemented as follows: (******) The Contractor shall afford the Owner and other contractors working in the area reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their respective Work, and shall properly connect and coordinate the Contractor’s Work with theirs. Other utilities, districts, agencies, and contractors who may have facilities within the project area are: 1. Puget Sound Energy (gas and electric) 2. AT&T Broadband 3. CenturyLink 4. City of Renton (water, sewer, transportation) 5. Comcast 6. Seattle Public Utilities 7. King County 8. Olympic Pipeline 9. Soos Creek Sewer and Water District 10. Cedar River Sewer and Water District 11. Skyway Sewer and Water District 12. Falcon Ridge Home Owner’s Association 13. Private contractors employed by adjacent property owners The Contractor shall coordinate with City of Renton on tying into any existing electrical service cabinet. 1-05.16 Water and Power Section 1-05.16 is a new Section: (******) The Contractor shall make necessary arrangements, and shall bear the costs for power and water necessary for the performance of the Work, unless the Contract includes power and water as a pay item. 1-05.17 Oral Agreements Section 1-05.17 is a new section: (******) No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Contracting Agency, either before or after execution of the Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations contained in any of the documents comprising the Contract. Such oral agreement or conversation shall be considered as unofficial information and in no way binding upon the Contracting Agency, unless subsequently put in writing and signed by the Contracting Agency. 1-05.18 Contractor's Daily Diary Section 1-05.18 is a new section: (******) The Contractor and subcontractors shall maintain and provide to the Engineer a Daily Diary Record of this Work. This diary will be created by pen entries in a hardbound diary book of the type that is 07/05/2018 29 commonly available through commercial outlets. The diary must contain the Project and Number; if the diary is in loose-leaf form, this information must appear on every page. The diary must be kept and maintained by the Contractor's designated project superintendent(s). Entries must be made on a daily basis and must accurately represent all of the project activities on each day. At a minimum, the diary shall show on a daily basis: 1. The day and date. 2. The weather conditions, including changes throughout the day. 3. A complete description of Work accomplished during the day with adequate references to the Plans and Contract Provisions, so that the reader can easily and accurately identify said Work in the Plans. Identify location/description of photographs or videos taken that day. 4. An entry for each and every changed condition, dispute or potential dispute, incident, accident, or occurrence of any nature whatsoever which might affect the Contractor, the Owner, or any third party in any manner. 5. Listing of any materials received and stored on- or off-site by the Contractor for future installation, to include the manner of storage and protection of the same. 6. Listing of materials installed during each day. 7. List of all subcontractors working on-site during each day. 8. Listing of the number of the Contractor's employees working during each day by category of employment. 9. Listing of the Contractor's equipment working on the site during each day. Idle equipment on the site shall be listed and designated as idle. 10. Notations to explain inspections, testing, stake-out, and all other services furnished by the Owner or other party during each day. 11. Entries to verify the daily (including non-Work days) inspection and maintenance of traffic control devices and condition of the traveled roadway surfaces. The Contractor shall not allow any conditions to develop that would be hazardous to the public. 12. Any other information that serves to give an accurate and complete record of the nature, quantity, and quality of Contractor's progress on each day. 13. Plan markups showing locations and dimensions of constructed features to be used by the Engineer to produce record drawings. 14. All pages of the diary must be numbered consecutively with no omissions in page numbers. 15. Each page must be signed and dated by the Contractor's official representative on the project. The Contractor may use additional sheets separate from the diary book if necessary to provide a complete diary record, but they must be signed, dated, and labeled with project name and number. It is expressly agreed between the Contractor and the Owner that the Daily Diary maintained by the Contractor shall be the “Contractor's Book of Original Entry” for the documentation of any potential claims or disputes that might arise during this contract. Failure of the Contractor to maintain this diary in the manner described above will constitute a waiver of any such claims or disputes by the Contractor. The Engineer or other Owner’s representative on the job site will also complete a Daily Construction Report. 1-06 CONTROL OF MATERIAL 1-06.1 Approval of Materials Prior to Use Section 1-06.1 is supplemented as follows: (******) The materials and equipment lists submitted to the Engineer at the Preconstruction Conference shall include the quantity, manufacturer, and model number, if applicable, of materials and equipment to be installed under the Contract. This list will be checked by the Engineer as to conformity with the Contract Documents. The Engineer will review the lists within 10 working days, noting required corrections. The Contractor shall make required corrections and file 2 corrected copies with the 07/05/2018 30 Engineer within one week after receipt of required corrections. The Engineer's review and acceptance of the lists shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for suitability for the intended purpose, nor for deviations from the Contract Documents. 1-06.2(1) Samples and Tests for Acceptance Section 1-06.2(1) is supplemented a follows: (******) The finished Work shall be in accordance with approved samples. Approval of samples by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1-06.2(2) Statistical Evaluation of Materials for Acceptance Section 1-06.02(2) is supplemented by adding the following: (******) Unless stated otherwise in the special provisions, statistical evaluation will not be used by the City of Renton. 1-07 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES TO THE PUBLIC 1-07.1 Laws to be Observed Section 1-07.1 is supplemented as follows: (******) The Contractor shall erect and properly maintain, at all times, as required by the conditions and progress of the Work, all necessary safeguards for protection of workers and the public; shall post danger signs warning against known or unusual hazards; and shall designate as Safety Supervisor, a responsible employee on the construction site whose duty shall be the enforcement of safety. The name and position of such person so designated shall be reported in writing to the Engineer by the Contractor. The Contractor shall, at all times, enforce strict discipline and good order among all employees and shall not employ any person unfit or not skilled in the Work assigned to him/her. Necessary sanitation conveniences for the use of the workers on the job, properly secluded from public observation, shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor. In cases of conflict between different safety regulations, the more stringent regulation shall apply. The Washington State Department of Labor and Industries shall be the sole and paramount administrative agency responsible for the administration of the provisions of the Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act of 1973 (WISHA). The Contractor shall maintain at the project site office, or other well-known place at the project site, all articles necessary for providing first aid to the injured. The Contractor shall establish, publish, and make known to all employees, procedures for ensuring immediate removal to a hospital or doctor’s care, and persons, including employees, who may have been injured on the project site. Employees should not be permitted to Work on the project site before the Contractor has established and made known procedures for removal of injured persons to a hospital or a doctor’s care. The Contractor shall have sole responsibility for the safety, efficiency, and adequacy of the Contractor’s plant, appliances, and methods, and for any damage or injury resulting from their failure, or improper maintenance, use, or operation. The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for the conditions of the project site, including safety for all persons and property in the performance of the Work. This requirement shall apply continuously, and not be limited to normal 07/05/2018 31 working hours. The required or implied duty of the Engineer to conduct construction review of the Contractor’s performance does not, and shall not, be intended to include review and adequacy of the Contractor’s safety measures, in, on, or near the project site. 1-07.2 State Sales Tax Delete this section, including its sub-sections, in its entirety and replace it with the following: (******) 1-07.2(1) General The Washington State Department of Revenue has issued special rules on the state sales tax. Sections 1-07.2(1) through 1-07.2(4) are meant to clarify those rules. The Contractor should contact the Washington State Department of Revenue for answers to questions in this area. The Contracting Agency will not adjust its payment if the Contractor bases a bid on a misunderstood tax liability. The Contractor shall include all Contractor-paid taxes in the unit bid prices or other contract amounts. In some cases, however, state retail sales tax will not be included. Section 1-07.2(3) describes this exception. The Contracting Agency will pay the retained percentage only if the Contractor has obtained from the Washington State Department of Revenue a certificate showing that all contract-related taxes have been paid (RCW 60.28.050). The Contracting Agency may deduct from its payments to the Contractor any amount the Contractor may owe the Washington State Department of Revenue, whether the amount owed relates to this contract or not. Any amount so deducted will be paid into the proper state fund 1-07.2(2) State Sales Tax – Rule 171 WAC 458-20-171, and its related rules, apply to building, repairing, or improving streets, roads, etc., which are owned by a municipal corporation, or political subdivision of the state, or by the United States, and which are used primarily for foot or vehicular traffic. This includes storm or combined sewer systems within and included as part of the street or road drainage system, and power lines when such are part of the roadway lighting system. For Work performed in such cases, the Contractor shall include Washington State Retail Sales Taxes in the various unit bid item prices, or other contract amounts, including those that the Contractor pays on the purchase of the materials, equipment, or supplies used or consumed in doing the Work. 1-07.2(2) State Sales Tax – Rule 170 WAC 458-20-170, and its related rules, applies to the constructing and repairing of new or existing buildings, or other structures, upon real property. This includes, but is not limited to; the construction of streets, roads, highways, etc., owned by the state of Washington; water mains and their appurtenances; sanitary sewers and sewage disposal systems unless such sewers and disposal systems are within, and a part of, a street or road drainage system; telephone, telegraph, electrical power distribution lines, or other conduits or lines in or above streets or roads, unless such power lines become a part of a street or road lighting system; and installing or attaching of any article of tangible personal property in or to real property, whether or not such personal property becomes a part of the realty by virtue of installation. 07/05/2018 32 For Work performed in such cases, the Contractor shall collect from the Contracting Agency, retail sales tax on the full contract price. The Contracting Agency will automatically add this sales tax to each payment to the Contractor. For this reason, the Contractor shall not include the retail sales tax in the unit bid item prices, or in any other contract amount subject to Rule 170, with the following exception. Exception: The Contracting Agency will not add in sales tax for a payment the Contractor or a subcontractor makes on the purchase or rental of tools, machinery, equipment, or consumable supplies not integrated into the project. Such sales taxes shall be included in the unit bid item prices or in any other contract amount. 1-07.2(4) Services The Contractor shall not collect retail sales tax from the Contracting Agency on any contract wholly for professional or other services (as defined in Washington State Department of Revenue Rules 138 and 244). 1-07.6 Permits and Licenses Section 1-07.6 is supplemented as follows: (******) The Contractor shall ensure that all necessary permits are obtained, and is responsible for reviewing all permits to become familiar with the requirements. The Contractor and all subcontractors of any tier must obtain a City of Renton Business License (Contractor). The permits, easements, and right of entry documents that have been acquired are available for inspection and review. The Contractor shall be required to comply with all conditions of the permits, easements, and rights of entry, at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor is required to indemnify the Owner from claims on all easements and rights of entry. All other permits, licenses, etc., shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall comply with the special provisions and requirements of each. Permits, permission under franchises, licenses and bonds of a temporary nature necessary for and during the prosecution of the Work, and inspection fees in connection therewith shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor. If the Owner is required to secure such permits, permission under franchises, licenses and bonds, and pay the fees, the costs incurred by the Owner thereby shall be charged against the Contractor and deducted from any funds otherwise due the Contractor. The Contractor is cautioned to review all permits and other Contract Documents and schedule the work activities appropriately to complete the work within the number of days stated in the Contract Document. No additional compensation or extensions to time will be granted to the Contractor due to the time constraints imposed by such documents. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for meeting all requirements of all permits. Any fines or penalties incurred by Contracting Agency for not meeting state water quality standards 07/05/2018 33 and/or lack of stormwater pollution prevention on this Project shall be deducted from monies otherwise due to Contractor. Any fines assessed directly to Contractor shall be paid directly to the fining authority, at the Contractor’s own cost. 1-07.9 Wages 1-07.9(5) Required Documents Delete the first sentence of the third paragraph, and replace it with the following: (******) The Contractor must submit weekly-certified payrolls for the Contractor and all subcontractors and lower tier subcontractors, regardless of project’s funding source. 1-07.11 Requirements for Non-Discrimination 1-07.11(11) City of Renton Affidavit of Compliance Section 1-07.11(11) is new: (******) Each Contractor, Subcontractor, Consultant, and or Supplier shall complete and submit a copy of the “City of Renton Fair Practices Policy Affidavit of Compliance”. A copy of this document will be bound in the bid documents. 1-07.12 Federal Agency Inspection Section 1-07.12 is supplemented with the following: (******) Required Federal Aid Provisions The Required Contract Provisions Federal Aid Construction Contracts (FHWA 1273) and the amendments thereto supersede any conflicting provisions of the Standard Specifications and are made a part of this contract; provided, however, that if any of the provisions of FHWA 1273, as amended, are less restrictive than Washington State Law, then the Washington State Law shall prevail. The provisions of FHWA 1273, as amended, included in this contract require that the Contractor insert the FHWA 1273 and amendments thereto in each subcontract, together with the wage rates which are part of the FHWA 1273, as amended. Also, a clause shall be included in each subcontract requiring the subcontractors to insert the FHWA 1273 and amendments thereto in any lower tier subcontracts, together with the wage rates. The Contractor shall also ensure that this Section, REQUIRED FEDERAL AID PROVISIONS, is inserted in each subcontract for subcontractors and lower tier subcontractors. For this purpose, upon request to the Project Engineer, the Contractor will be provided with extra copies of the FHWA 1273, the amendments thereto, the applicable wage rates, and this Special Provision. 1-07.13 Contractor’s Responsibility for Work 1-07.13(1) General Section 1-07.13(1) is supplemented as follows: (******) During unfavorable weather and other conditions, the Contractor shall pursue only such portions of the Work as shall not be damaged thereby. No portion of the Work whose satisfactory quality or efficiency will be affected by unfavorable conditions shall be constructed while these conditions exist, unless the Contractor shall be able to overcome said unfavorable conditions by special means or precautions acceptable to the Engineer. 1-07.15 Temporary Water Pollution/Erosion Control Delete the first paragraph, and replace it with the following: (******) The Contractor shall perform all Work in strict accordance with all Federal, State, and local laws and regulations governing waters of the State, as well as permits acquired for the project. 07/05/2018 34 The Contractor shall prepare a final Temporary Water Pollution/Erosion Control Plan (TWPECP) and a final SWPPP. The TWPECP and SWPPP shall be developed in accordance with the erosion control standards contained in the 2010 City of Renton Amendments to the King County Surface Water Design Manual. The plan shall include any assumptions, detailed calculations, sketches and sequencing. The plan shall be signed and stamped by a Washington State Professional Engineer. A TESC supervisor shall be designated by the Contractor, whose name and phone number shall be given to the Engineer at the Preconstruction Conference. The TESC supervisor must be CESCL certified in accordance with NPDES permit requirements. The plan shall be submitted for approval to the City within 10 days of the Notice of Award. The TWPECP shall include the various configurations that may be necessary to adequately control erosion and sediment at the site during the various stages of construction. Design of dewatering, water control, bypass systems, and temporary erosion and sediment control during construction shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. At a minimum, the plan shall contain: 1. Manufacturer’s data and detailed plans for the erosion control products specified in the plan. 2. Plan for temporary pipe system diversions. This shall include a description of when the piping will be used, pipe material, locations, elevations, plan and profile views, inlet and outlet protection, hydraulic capacity, and details of important design features. 3. Plan for collecting, pumping and pipe surface stormwater runoff, dewatering discharge, and seepage from the source to the Baker Tank or acceptable discharge. The plan shall be shown in phases to coincide with the phases of construction. The plan shall include: a. Layout and details of system. b. Diversion systems manufacturer’s data and material submittals. c. Pump and pipe types, sizes, manufacturer’s data, and design criteria for pump sizing. d. Flow calculations for stormwater, seepage, and dewatering pump discharge. Schedule and sketch of location for dewatering systems. Pumps shall be sized to pump stormwater runoff for the tributary area plus an allowance for groundwater and surface seepage. Each pump area location shall be equipped with two pumps meeting the capacity requirement, in case one is non-operational. e. Source of power for pumps, description of schedule and fueling requirements, storage location, and methods. 4. Manufacturer’s literature and test results (certificates) on the temporary silt fence, erosion control matting, riprap gradations, and any other necessary erosion control materials. 5. Planned installation and maintenance schedule for temporary erosion and sedimentation control facilities. Indicate locations and outlets of dewatering systems. The Contractor shall also prepare a final SWPPP. The SWPPP must meet the requirements of the Department of Ecology’s NPDES and State Waste Discharge General Permit for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activity (General Permit). The SWPPP shall include and modify as necessary the Site Preparation and Erosion Control Plan drawings provided as part of the Contract Plans. The Contractor shall prepare, review, and modify the SWPPP as necessary to be consistent with the actual work schedule, sequencing, and construction methods that will be used on the project. The Contractor’s SWPPP shall meet the requirements of the general permit. 07/05/2018 35 The Contractor shall:  Furnish, install, operate, and maintain necessary machinery, appurtenances, and equipment to keep excavations free of water during construction;  Dewater and dispose of water in a manner that will not cause injury to public and private property, as well as keep sediment-laden water from entering the City surface water system or violate applicable water standards;  Keep sufficient pumping equipment and machinery on hand at all times for emergencies, including electric power failures;  Keep experienced personnel available at all times to operate pumping equipment, machinery and appliances;  Not shut down dewatering systems between shifts, on holidays and weekends, nor during work stoppages without prior authorization by the Engineer;  Control groundwater to prevent softening of bottoms of excavations, or formation of “quick” conditions or “boils”;  Design and operate dewatering system that will not remove natural soils;  Keep excavations free of water during excavation, construction of structures, installation of pipelines, placing of structures, backfill, and placing and curing of concrete; and  Control surface water runoff to prevent entry and collection in excavations. As construction progresses and unexpected or seasonal conditions dictate, the Contractor shall anticipate that more water pollution/erosion control measures will be necessary. It shall be the obligation and responsibility of the Contractor to revise or supplement the pollution/erosion control measures as may be needed to protect the work, adjacent properties, storm drains, streams, and other water bodies. At all times, there must be material on the job site to handle any spills caused by the Contractor, such as tack, oils, diesel, etc. Materials would include, but not be limited to, oil absorbent pads and “kitty litter.” The Contractor must supply said materials at his expense and, in the event of a spill, be responsible for cleanup and disposal of contaminated materials. In addition, the SWPPP shall outline the procedures to be used to prevent high pH stormwater or dewatering water from entering surface waters. The plan shall include how the pH of the water will be maintained between pH 6.5 and pH 8.5 prior to being discharged from the project or entering surface waters. Prior to beginning any concrete or grinding work, the Contractor shall submit the plan, for the Engineer’s review and approval. An Ecology template is available to the Contractor for producing the SWPPP, using project- specific information added by the Contractor. The template and instructions are available at: http://www.ecy.wa.gov/programs/wq/stormwater/construction. The Engineer’s review and any resulting approval of the Contractor’s SWPPP and TESCP will be only regarding conformance with the specification requirement that the Contractor have the plans prepared by a CPESC or professional Civil Engineer who has expertise in the type of facilities and that the SWPPP and TESCP include the items specified for such plans. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of the SWPPP and TESCP and if erosion sediment, and other pollutant control measures in deviation or addition to those described in the SWPPP become necessary to minimize erosion and prevent storm water contamination from sediment and other pollutants, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a revised SWPPPP to the Engineer for review as specified for the original plan. 07/05/2018 36 The Owner will not be liable to the Contractor for failure to accept all or any portion of an originally submitted or revised SWPPP, nor for any delays to the Work due to the Contractor’s failure to submit and implement an acceptable SWPPP. 1-07.16 Protection and Restoration of Property 1-07.16(1) Private/Public Property Section 1-07.16(1) is supplemented by adding the following: (******) The Contracting Agency will obtain all easements and franchises required for the project. The Contractor shall limit his operation to the areas obtained and shall not trespass on private property. The Contracting Agency may provide certain lands, as indicated in connection with the Work under the Contract together with the right of access to such lands. The Contractor shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with his equipment or materials. The Contractor shall provide, with no liability to the Contracting Agency, any additional land and access thereto not shown or described that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials. He shall construct all access roads, detour roads, or other temporary Work as required by his operations. The Contractor shall confine his equipment, storage of material, and operation of his workers to those areas shown and described and such additional areas as he may provide. A. General. All construction Work under this contract on easements, right-of-way, over private property or franchise, shall be confined to the limits of such easements, right-of-way or franchise. All Work shall be accomplished so as to cause the least amount of disturbance and a minimum amount of damage. The Contractor shall schedule his Work so that trenches across easements shall not be left open during weekends or holidays and trenches shall not be open for more than 48 hours. B. Structures. The Contractor shall remove such existing structures as may be necessary for the performance of the Work and, if required, shall rebuild the structures thus removed in as good a condition as found. He shall also repair all existing structures that may be damaged as a result of the Work under this contract. C. Easements, cultivated areas and other surface improvements. All cultivated areas, either agricultural or lawns, and other surface improvements which are damaged by actions of the Contractor shall be restored as nearly as possible to their original condition. Prior to excavation on an easement or private right-of-way, the Contractor shall strip topsoil from the trench or construction area and stockpile it in such a manner that it may be replaced by him, upon completion of construction. Ornamental trees and shrubbery shall be carefully removed with the earth surrounding their roots wrapped in burlap and replanted in their original positions within 48 hours. All shrubbery or trees destroyed or damaged, shall be replaced by the Contractor with material of equal quality at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency. In the event that it is necessary to trench through any lawn area, the sod shall be carefully cut and rolled and replaced after the trenches have been backfilled. The lawn area shall be cleaned by sweeping or other means, of all earth and debris. The Contractor shall use rubber wheel equipment similar to the small tractor-type backhoes used by side sewer contractors for all Work, including excavation and backfill, on easements or rights-of-way, which have lawn areas. All fences, markers, mailboxes, or other temporary obstacles shall be removed by the Contractor and immediately replace, after the trench is backfilled, in their original position. The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Agency and Property Owner at least 24 hours in advance of any Work done on easements or rights-of-way. Damage to existing structures outside of easement areas that may result from dewatering and/or other construction activity under this contract shall be restored to their original condition or better. The original condition shall be established by photographs taken and/or inspection made prior to 07/05/2018 37 construction. All such Work shall be done to the satisfaction of the Property Owners and the Contracting Agency at the expense of the Contractor. D. Streets. The Contractor will assume all responsibility of restoration of the surface of all streets (traveled ways) used by him if damaged. In the event the Contractor does not have labor or material immediately available to make necessary repairs, the Contractor shall so inform the Contracting Agency. The Contracting Agency will make the necessary repairs and the cost of such repairs shall be paid by the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for identifying and documenting any damage that is pre-existing or caused by others. Restoration of excavation in City streets shall be done in accordance with the City of Renton Trench Restoration Requirements, which is available at the Public Works Department Customer Services counter on the 6th floor, Renton City Hall, 1055 South Grady Way. 1-07.17 Utilities and Similar Facilities Section 1-07.17 is supplemented by adding: (******) Existing utilities indicated in the Plans have been plotted from the best information available to the Engineer. Information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing underground utilities or services at or contiguous to the project site are based on information and data furnished to the Owner and the Engineer by owners of such underground facilities or others, and the Owner and the Engineer do not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof. It is to be understood that other aboveground or underground facilities not shown in the Plans may be encountered during the course of the Work. All utility valves, manholes, vaults, or pull boxes which are buried shall be conspicuously marked in a fashion acceptable to the Owner and the Engineer by the Contractor to allow their location to be determined by the Engineer or utility personnel under adverse conditions, (inclement weather or darkness). Where underground main distribution conduits, such as water, gas, sewer, electric power, or telephone, are shown on the Plans, the Contractor, for the purpose of preparing his bid, shall assume that every property parcel will be served by a service connection for each type of utility. The Contractor shall check with the utility companies concerning any possible conflict prior to commencing excavation in any area. The Contractor shall resolve all crossing and clearance problems with the utility company concerned. No excavation shall begin until all known facilities, in the vicinity of the excavation area, have been located and marked. In addition to the Contractor having all utilities field marked before starting Work, the Contractor shall have all utilities field marked after they are relocated in conjunction with this project. Call Before You Dig The 48-Hour Locators 1-800-424-5555 At least 2 and not more than 10 working days prior to commencing any excavations for utility potholing or for any other purpose under this Contract, the Contractor shall notify the Underground Utilities Location Center by telephone of the planned excavation and progress schedule. The Contractor is also warned that there may be utilities on the project that are not part of the One Call system. They must be contacted directly by the Contractor for locations. The Contractor shall make arrangements 48 hours in advance with respective utility owners to have a representative present when their utility is exposed or modified, if the utility chooses to do so. Existing utilities for telephone, power, gas, water, and television cable facilities shall be adjusted or relocated by the appropriate utility company unless otherwise noted in the Plans. These adjustments 07/05/2018 38 may be completed before the Contractor begins Work, or may be performed in conjunction with the Contract Work. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for coordination with the utility companies and arranging for the movement or adjustment, either temporary or permanent, of their facilities within the project limits. See also Section 1-05.14 of these Special Provisions. If or when utility conflicts occur, the Contractor shall continue the construction process on other aspects of the project whenever possible. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for reason of delay caused by the actions of any utility company, and the Contractor shall consider such costs to be incidental to the other items of the Contract. Utility Potholing Potholing may be included as a bid item for use in determining the location of existing utilities in advance of the Contractor's operations. If potholing is not included as a bid item then it shall be considered incidental to other Work. The Contractor shall submit all potholing requests to the Engineer for approval, at least 2 working days before potholing is scheduled. Additionally, the Contractor shall provide potholing at the Engineer's request. In no way shall the Work described under Utility Potholing relieve the Contractor of any of the responsibilities described in Section 1-07.17 of the Standard Specifications and Special Provisions, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 1-07.17(1) Site Specific Potholing Section 1-07.17(1) is a new section: (******) Site Specific Potholing is intended to be additional potholing as directed by the Engineer, which is in addition to potholing included as incidental for utility installation. Where underground utilities are found to be in the way of construction, such condition shall not be deemed to be a changed or differing site condition, and if necessary, pipe alignment or grade shall be modified. No payment will be made unless potholing has been performed prior to trench excavation, and witnessed by the Engineer. Different utilities may be found to occupy a common trench. Any two or more utilities separated by 3 feet or less shall constitute one locate. Where multiple utilities exist in close proximity, the Contractor shall be paid for one locate for every 5 feet of exploration trench. The quantity for this item is included to provide a common proposal for bid purposes. The actual quantity used in construction may vary from that amount. The unit price will not be adjusted if the actual quantity used varies by more than 25 percent. The contractor shall perform for this potholing a minimum of five working days prior to crossing to allow for potential revisions. The contractor shall not have cause for claim of down-time or any other additional costs associated with ‘waiting’ if the owner provides design revisions (related to the information supplied per this section) within three working days after the contractor provides the surveyed elevations. In no way shall the Work described under Site Specific Potholing relieve the Contractor of any of the responsibilities described in Section 1-07.17 of the Standard Specifications and Special Provisions, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 1-07.17(3) Interruption of Services Section 1-07.17(3) is a new section: (******) Whenever in the course of the construction operation it becomes necessary to cause an outage of utilities, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to notify the affected users and the Engineer not less than 48 hours in advance of such outage. The Contractor shall make reasonable effort to minimize the duration of outages, and shall estimate the length of time service will be interrupted and so notify 07/05/2018 39 the users. In the case of any utility outage that has exceeded or will exceed four hours, user contact shall again be made. Temporary service, if needed, will be arranged by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. Overhead lighting outages shall not exceed 24 hours. All cost to the Contractor for providing temporary overhead lighting to meet above requirements shall be incidental to the various unit and Lump sum items of the Contract; no separate payment will be made. 1-07.17(4) Resolution of Utility Conflicts (******) Section 1-07.17(4) is a new section: In no way shall the work described under Resolution of Utility Conflicts relieve Contractor of any of the responsibilities described in Section 1-07.17 of the Standard Specifications and Special Provisions, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. If or when utility conflicts occur, Contractor shall continue the construction process on other aspects of the project whenever possible. If “Resolution of utility conflicts” is included as a bid item in Section 1-09.14, it shall be used to resolve any new identified utility conflicts not otherwise shown on the Contract Drawing or Specifications that are identified during the course of construction. 1-07.18 Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance Section 1-07.18 is deleted replaced by the following new section and subsections: (******) 1-07.18(1) General The Contractor shall obtain and maintain in full force and effect, from the Contract Execution Date to the Completion Date, public liability and property damage insurance with an insurance company(ies) or through sources approved by the State Insurance Commissioner pursuant to RCW 48. The Contractor shall not begin work under the Contract until the required insurance has been obtained and approved by the Contracting Agency. Insurance shall provide coverage to the Contractor, all subcontractors, Contracting Agency and the Contracting Agency's consultant. The coverage shall protect against claims for bodily injuries, personal injuries, including accidental death, as well as claims for property damages which may arise from any act or omission of the Contractor or the subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them. If warranted work is required the Contractor shall provide the City proof that insurance coverage and limits established under the term of the Contract for work are in full force and effect during the period of warranty work. The Contracting Agency may request a copy of the actual declaration pages(s) for each insurance policy effecting coverage(s) required on the Contract prior to the date work commences. Failure of the Contractor to fully comply during the term of the Contract with the requirements described herein will be considered a material breach of contract and shall be caused for immediate termination of the Contract at the option of the Contracting Agency. All costs for insurance shall be incidental to and included in the unit or Lump Sum prices of the contract and no additional payment will be made. 1-07.18(2) Coverages All coverage provided by the Contractor shall be in a form and underwritten by a company acceptable to the Contracting Agency. The City requires that all insurers: 07/05/2018 40 1. Be licensed to do business within the State of Washington. 2. Coverage to be on an "occurrence" basis (Professional Liability and Pollution coverage are acceptable when written on a claims-made basis). The City may also require proof of professional liability coverage be provided for up to two (2) years after the completion of the project. 3. The City may request a copy of the actual declaration page(s) for each insurance policy affecting coverage(s) required by the Contract prior to the date work commences. 4. Possess a minimum A.M. best rating of AVII (A rating of A XII or better is preferred.) If any insurance carrier possesses a rating of less than AVII, the City may make an exception. The City reserves the right to approve the security of the insurance coverage provided by the insurance company(ies), terms, conditions, and the Certificate of Insurance. Failure of the Contractor to fully comply during the term of the Contract with these requirements will be considered a material breach of contract and shall be cause for immediate termination of the contract at the option of the City. The Contractor shall obtain and maintain the minimum insurance coverage set forth below. By requiring such minimum insurance, the City of Renton shall not be deemed or construed to have assessed the risks that may be applicable to the Contractor. The Contractor shall assess its own risks and if it deems appropriate and/or prudent, maintain higher limits and/or broader coverage. Coverage shall include: A. Commercial General Liability - ISO 1993 Form or equivalent. Coverage will be written on an occurrence basis and include:  Premises and Operations (including CG2503; General Aggregate to apply per project, if applicable)  Explosion, Collapse, and Underground Hazards.  Products/Completed Operations  Contractual Liability (including Amendatory Endorsement CG 0043 or equivalent which includes defense coverage assumed under contract)  Broad Form Property Damage  Independent Contractors  Personal/Advertising Injury  Stop Gap Liability B. Automobile Liability including all  Owned Vehicles  Non-Owned Vehicles  Hired Vehicles C. Workers' Compensation  Statutory Benefits (Coverage A) - Show Washington Labor & Industries Number D. Umbrella Liability (when necessary)  Excess of Commercial General Liability and Automobile Liability. Coverage should be as broad as primary. E. Professional Liability - (whenever the work under this Contract includes Professional Liability, including Advertising activities) the (CONTRACTOR) shall maintain professional liability covering wrongful acts, errors and/or omissions of the (CONTRACTOR) for damage sustained by reason of or in the course of operations under this Contract. F. Pollution Liability - the City may require this coverage whenever work under this Contract involves pollution risk to the environment. This coverage is to include sudden and gradual coverage for third party liability including defense costs and completed operations. Contractor shall name City of Renton, and its officers, officials, agents, employees and volunteers as Additional Insured (ISO Form CG 2010 or equivalent). The Contractor shall provide City of 07/05/2018 41 Renton Certificates of Insurance prior to commencement of work. The City reserves the right to request copies of insurance policies, if at their sole discretion it is deemed appropriate. Further, all policies of insurance described above shall: A. Be on a primary basis not contributory with any other insurance coverage and/or self- insurance carried by City of Renton. B. Include a Waiver of Subrogation Clause. C. Severability of Interest Clause (Cross Liability) D. The Contractor shall provide the Contracting Agency and all Additional Insured’s with written notice of any policy cancellation, within two business days of their receipt of such notice. E. Failure on the part of the Contractor to maintain the insurance as required shall constitute a material breach of contract, upon which the Contracting Agency may, after giving five business days notice to the Contractor to correct the breach, immediately terminate the contract or, at its discretion, procure or renew such insurance and pay any and all premiums in connection therewith, with any sums so expended to be repaid to the Contracting Agency on demand, or at the sole discretion of the Contracting Agency, offset against funds due the Contractor from the Contracting Agency. 1-07.18(3) Limits LIMITS REQUIRED Providing coverage in these stated amounts shall not be construed to relieve the Contractor from liability in excess of such limits. The Contractor shall carry the following limits of liability as required below: Commercial General Liability General Aggregate* $2,000,000 ** Products/Completed Operations Aggregate $2,000,000 ** Each Occurrence Limit $1,000,000 Personal/Advertising Injury $1,000,000 Fire Damage (Any One Fire) $50,000 Medical Payments (Any One Person) $5,000 Stop Gap Liability $1,000,000 * General Aggregate to apply per project (ISO Form CG2503 or equivalent) **Amount may vary based on project risk Automobile Liability Bodily Injury/Property Damage $1,000,000 (Each Accident) Workers' Compensation Statutory Benefits - Coverage A Variable (Show Washington Labor and Industries Number) Umbrella Liability Each Occurrence Limit $1,000,000 General Aggregate Limit $1,000,000 Products/Completed Operations Aggregate $1,000,000 Professional Liability (If required) Each Occurrence/ Incident/Claim $1,000,000 Aggregate $2,000,000 Pollution Liability (If required) to apply on a per project basis Per Loss $1,000,000 Aggregate $1,000,000 The City may require the Contractor to keep professional liability coverage in effect for up to two (2) years after completion of the project. 07/05/2018 42 The Contractor shall promptly advise the CITY OF RENTON in the event any general aggregates are reduced for any reason, and shall reinstate the aggregate at the Contractor’s expense to comply with the minimum limits and requirements as stated above and shall furnish to the CITY OF RENTON a new certificate of insurance showing such coverage is in force. 1-07.18(4) Evidence of Insurance: Within 20 days of award of the Contract, the Contractor shall provide evidence of insurance by submitting to the Contracting Agency the Certificate of Insurance (ACORD Form 25s or equivalent) conforming to items as specified in Sections 1-07.18(1), 1-07.18(2), and 1-07.18(3) as revised above. Other requirements are as follows: A. Strike the following or similar wording: "This Certificate is issued as a matter of information only and confers no rights upon the Certificate Holder". B. Strike the wording regarding cancellation notification to the City: "Failure to mail such notice shall impose no obligation or liability of any kind upon the company, its agents or representatives". C. Amend the cancellation clause to state: "Should any of the above described policies be cancelled before the expiration date thereof, notice will be delivered in accordance with the policy provisions." For Professional Liability coverage only, instead of the cancellation language specified above, the City will accept a written agreement that the consultant's broker will provide the required notification. 1-07.22 Use of Explosives Section 1-07.22 is supplemented by the following: (******) Explosives shall not be used without specific authority of the Engineer, and then only under such restrictions as may be required by the proper authorities. Explosives shall be handled and used in strict compliance with WAC 296-52 and such local laws, rules and regulations that may apply. The individual in charge of the blasting shall have a current Washington State Blaster Users License. The Contractor shall obtain, comply with, and pay for such permits and costs as are necessary in conjunction with blasting operations. 1-07.23 Public Convenience and Safety 1-07.23(1) Construction Under Traffic Revise the second paragraph to read: (******) To disrupt public traffic as little as possible, the Contractor shall permit traffic to pass through the Work with the least possible inconvenience or delay. The Contractor shall maintain existing roads, streets, sidewalks, driveways, and paths within the project limits, keeping them open, and in good, clean, safe condition at all times. Deficiencies caused by the Contractor’s operations shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense. Deficiencies not caused by the Contractor’s operations shall be repaired by the Contractor when directed by the Engineer, at the Contracting Agency’s expense. The Contractor shall also maintain roads, streets, sidewalks, driveways, and paths adjacent to the project limits when affected by the Contractor’s operations. Snow and ice control will be performed by the Contracting Agency on all projects. Cleanup of snow and ice control debris will be at the Contrac ting Agency’s expense. The Contractor shall perform the following: 1. Remove or repair any condition resulting from the Work that might impede traffic or create a 07/05/2018 43 hazard. 2. Keep existing traffic signal and highway lighting systems in operation as the Work proceeds. (The Contracting Agency will continue the route maintenance on such system.) 3. Maintain the striping on the roadway at the Contracting Agency’s expense. The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling when to renew striping, subject to the approval of the Engineer. When the scope of the project does not require Work on the roadway, the Contracting Agency will be responsible for maintaining the striping. 4. Maintain existing permanent signing. Repair of signs will be at the Contracting Agency’s expense, except those damaged due to the Contractor’s operations. 5. Keep drainage structures clean to allow for free flow of water. Cleaning of existing drainage structures will be at the Contracting Agency’s expense when approved by the Engineer, except when flow is impaired due to the Contractor’s operations. Section 1-07.23(1) is supplemented by adding the following: (******) The Contractor shall be responsible for controlling dust and mud within the project limits and on any street, which is utilized by his equipment for the duration of the project. The Contractor shall be prepared to use watering trucks, power sweepers, and other pieces of equipment as deemed necessary by the Engineer, to avoid creating a nuisance. Dust and mud control shall be considered as incidental to the project and no compensation will be made for this section. Complaints of dust, mud, or unsafe practices and/or property damage to private ownership will be transmitted to the Contractor and prompt action in correcting them will be required by the Contractor. The Contractor shall maintain the roads during construction in a suitable condition to minimize affects to vehicular and pedestrian traffic. All cost to maintain the roads shall be borne by the Contractor. At least one-way traffic shall be maintained on all cross-streets within the project limits during working hours. One lane shall be provided in each direction for all streets during non-working hours. The Contractor shall provide one drivable roadway lane and maintain convenient access for local and commuter traffic to driveways, businesses, and buildings along the line of Work throughout the course of the project. Such access shall be maintained as near as possible to that which existed prior to the commencement of construction. This restriction shall not apply to the paving portion of the construction process. The Contractor shall notify and coordinate with all property owners and tenants of street closures, or other restrictions which may interfere with their access at least 24 hours in advance for single-family residential property, and at least 48 hours in advance for apartments, offices, and commercial property. The Contractor shall give a copy of all notices to the Engineer. When the abutting owners’ access across the right-of-way line is to be eliminated and replaced under the Contract by other access, the existing access shall not be closed until the replacement access facility is available. All unattended excavations shall be properly barricaded and covered at all times. The Contractor shall not open any trenches that cannot be completed and refilled that same day. Trenches shall be patched or covered by a temporary steel plate, at the Contractor’s expense, except in areas where the roadway remains closed to public traffic. Steel plates must be anchored. 07/05/2018 44 1-07.23(2) Construction and Maintenance of Detours (******) Revise the first paragraph to read: Unless otherwise approved, the Contractor shall maintain two-way traffic during construction. The Contractor shall build, maintain in a safe condition, keep open to traffic, and remove when no longer needed: 1. Detours and detour bridges that will accommodate traffic diverted from the roadway, bridge, sidewalk, driveway, or path during construction, 2. Detour crossings of intersecting highway, and 3. Temporary approaches. 1-07.24 Rights-of-Way Delete this section in its entirety, and replace it with the following: (******) Street right-of-way lines, limits of easements, and limits of construction permits are indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor’s construction activities shall be confined within these limits unless arrangements for use of private property are made. Generally, the Contracting Agency will have obtained, prior to bid opening, all rights-of-way and easements, both permanent and temporary, necessary for carrying out the completion of the Work. Exceptions to this are noted in the Contract Documents or brought to the Contractor’s attention by a duly issued addendum. Whenever any of the Work is accomplished on or through property other than public right-of-way, the Contractor shall meet and fulfill all covenants and stipulations of any easement agreement obtained by the Contracting Agency from the owner of the private property. Copies of the easement agreements are included in the Contract Provisions or made available to the Contractor as soon as practical after they have been obtained by the Engineer. Whenever easements or rights-of-entry have not been acquired prior to advertising, these areas are so noted on the Drawings. The Contractor shall not proceed with any portion of the Work in areas where right-of-way, easements, or rights-of-entry have not been acquired until the Engineer certifies to the Contractor that the right-of-way or easement is available or that the right-of-entry had been received. If the Contractor is delayed due to acts of omission on the part of the Contracting Agency in obtaining easements, rights of entry of right-of-way, the Contractor will be entitled to an extension of time. The Contractor agrees that such delay shall not be a breach of contract. Each property owner shall be given 48 hours notice prior to entry by the Contactor. This includes entry onto easements and private property where private improvements must be adjusted. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing, without expense or liability of the Contracting Agency, any additional land and access thereto that the Contractor may desire for temporary construction facilities, storage of materials, or other Contractor needs. However, before using any private property, whether adjoining the Work or not, the Contractor shall file with the Engineer a written permission of the private property owner, and, upon vacating the premises, a written release from the property owner of each property disturbed or otherwise interfered with by reasons of construction pursued under this Contract. The statement shall be signed by the private property owner, or proper authority acting for the owner of the private property affected, stating that permission has been granted to use the property and all necessary permits have been obtained or, in the case of a release, that the restoration of the property has been satisfactorily accomplished. The statement shall include the parcel number, address and date of signature. Written releases must be filed with the Engineer before the Completion Date will be established. 07/05/2018 45 1-07.28 Confined Space Entry Section 1-07.28 is new: The Contractor shall: 1. Review and be familiar with the City’s Public Works Confined Space Entry Program. 2. Review documented information about the City confined spaces in which entry is intended as listed and described in the City’s Attribute and Map Book. This information includes identified hazards for each permit-required confined space. 3. Each contractor shall have their own confined space entry program. Upon request of the City they will provide a statement confirming they are in compliance with their confined space entry program including requirements for confined space training for employees associated with the project in Renton. 4. Be responsible for following all confined space requirements established by the provisions in WAC 296-809 and its chapters. 5. Coordinate entry operations with the City of Renton when employees from the contractor will be working in or near City confined spaces. 6. Discuss entry operations with the City of Renton including the program followed during confined space entry. 7. Debrief the City on any hazards confronted or created at the completion of entry operations. 8. Place signs stating, “Danger, Follow Confined Space Entry Procedure before Entering” at each confined space to be entered. Never leave the confined space open and unattended. The contractor’s or consultant’s point of contact with the City in regard to confined space entry will be the City’s assigned construction inspector. 1-08 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 1-08.0 Preliminary Matters Section 1-08.0 is a new section with subsection: (******) 1-08.0(1) Preconstruction Conference Section 1-08.0(1) is a new subsection: (******) The Engineer will furnish the Contractor with copies of the Contract Documents per Section 1-02.2 “Plans and Specifications”. Additional documents may be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. Prior to undertaking each part of the Work the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents, and check and verify pertinent figures shown therein and all applicable field measurements. The Contractor shall promptly report in writing to the Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy, which the Contractor may discover. After the Contract has been executed, but prior to the Contractor beginning the Work, a preconstruction conference will be held between the Contractor, the Engineer and such other interested parties as may be invited. The Contractor shall prepare and submit at the preconstruction meeting:  Contractor's plan of operation and progress schedule (3+ copies)  Approval of qualified subcontractors (bring list of subcontractors if different from list submitted with bid)  List of materials fabricated or manufactured off the project  Material sources on the project  Names of principal suppliers  Detailed equipment list, including “Rental Rate Blue Book” hourly costs (both working 07/05/2018 46 and standby rates)  Weighted wage rates for all employee classifications anticipated to be used on Project  Cost percentage breakdown for lump sum bid item(s)  Shop Drawings (bring preliminary list)  Traffic Control Plans (3+ copies)  Temporary Water Pollution/Erosion Control Plan In addition, the Contractor shall be prepared to address: Bonds and insurance Project meetings – schedule and responsibilities Provision for inspection for materials from outside sources Responsibility for locating utilities Responsibility for damage Time schedule for relocations, if by other than the Contractor Compliance with Contract Documents Acceptance and approval of Work Labor compliance, payrolls, and certifications Safety regulations for the Contractors’ and the Owner's employees and representatives Suspension of Work, time extensions Change order procedures Progress estimates, procedures for payment Special requirements of funding agencies Construction engineering, advance notice of special Work Any interpretation of the Contract Documents requested by the Contractor Any conflicts or omissions in Contract Documents Any other problems or questions concerning the Work Processing and administration of public complaints Easements and rights-of-entry Other contracts The franchise utilities may be present at the preconstruction conference, and the Contractor should be prepared for their review and discussion of progress schedule and coordination. 1-08.0(2) Hours of Work Section 1-08.0(2) is a new subsection: (******) Except in the case of emergency or unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Agency, the normal straight time working hours for the Contract shall be any consecutive 8-hour period between 7:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. of a working day with a maximum 1-hour lunch break and a 5-day Work week. The normal straight time 8-hour working period for the Contract shall be established at the preconstruction conference or prior to the Contractor commencing the Work. If a Contractor desires to perform Work on holidays, Saturdays, Sundays, or before 7:00 a.m. or after 5:00 p.m. on any day, the Contractor shall apply in writing to the Engineer for permission to Work such times. Permission to Work longer than an 8-hour period between 7:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. is required. Such requests shall be submitted to the Engineer no later than noon on the working day prior to the day for which the Contractor is requesting permission to Work. Permission to Work between the hours of 10:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. during weekdays and between the hours of 10:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. on weekends or holidays may also be subject to noise control requirements. Approval to continue Work during these hours may be revoked at any time the Contractor exceeds the Contracting Agency’s noise control regulations or complaints are received from the public or adjoining property owners regarding the noise from the Contractor’s operations. The Contractor shall have no claim for damages or delays should such permission be revoked for these reasons. Permission to Work Saturdays, Sundays, holidays or other than the agreed upon normal straight time 07/05/2018 47 working hours Monday through Friday may be given subject to certain other conditions set forth by the Contracting Agency or the Engineer. These conditions may include but are not limited to: requiring the Engineer or such assistants as the Engineer may deem necessary to be present during the Work; requiring the Contractor to reimburse the Contracting Agency for the cost of engineering salaries paid Contracting Agency employees who worked during such times; considering the Work performed on Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays as working days with regards to the Contract Time; and considering multiple Work shifts as multiple working days with respect to Contract Time even though the multiple shifts occur in a single 24-hour period. Assistants may include, but are not limited to, survey crews; personnel from the material testing labs; inspectors; and other Contracting Agency employees when in the opinion of the Engineer such Work necessitates their presence. 1-08.0(3) Reimbursement for Overtime Work of Contracting Agency Employees Section 1-08.0(3) is a new subsection: (******) Where the Contractor elects to Work on a Saturday, Sunday, holiday, or longer than an 8-hour Work shift on a regular working day, as defined in the Standard Specifications, such Work shall be considered as overtime Work. On all such overtime Work an inspector will be present, and a survey crew may be required at the discretion of the Engineer. The Contractor shall reimburse the Contracting Agency for the full amount of the straight time plus overtime costs for employees and representative(s) of the Contracting Agency required to work overtime hours. The Contractor by these Specifications does hereby authorize the Engineer to deduct such costs from the amount due or to become due the Contractor. 1-08.1 Subcontracting Revise the second paragraph to read: The Contractor shall not subcontract Work unless the Engineer approves in writing. Each request to subcontract shall be on the form the Engineer provides. If the Engineer requests, the Contractor shall provide proof that subcontractor has the experience, ability, and equipment the Work requires. The Contractor shall require each subcontractor to comply with Section 1-07.9 and to furnish all certificates and statements required by the Contract. The Contractor shall require each subcontractor of every tier to meet the responsibility criteria stated in RCW 39.06, and shall include these requirements in every subcontract of every tier. Section 1-08.1 is supplemented as follows: (******) Written requests for change in subcontractors shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer at least 7 calendar days prior to start of a subcontractor's Work. The Contractor agrees that he/she is fully responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of all subcontractors and lower-tier subcontractors, and persons either directly or indirectly employed by the subcontractors, as well as for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be required to give personal attention to the Work that is sublet. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relation between any subcontractor and the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for making sure all subcontractors submit all required documentation, forms, etc. 1-08.2 Assignment The second paragraph of Section 1-08.2 is modified as follows: (******) The Contractor shall not assign any moneys due or to become due to the Contractor hereunder without the prior written consent of the Owner. The assignment, if approved, shall be subject to all setoffs, withholdings, and deductions required by law and the Contract. 07/05/2018 48 1-08.3 Progress Schedule Section 1-08.3 is supplemented as follows: (******) The progress schedule for the entire project shall be submitted 7 calendar days prior to the Preconstruction Conference. The schedule shall be prepared using the critical path method (CPM), preferably using Microsoft Project or equivalent software. The schedule shall contain this information, at a minimum: 1. Construction activities, in sufficient detail that all activities necessary to construct a complete and functional project are considered. Any activity that has a scheduled duration exceeding 30 calendar days shall be subdivided until no sub-element has a duration exceeding 30 calendar days. 2. The schedule shall clearly indicate the activities that comprise the critical path. For each activity not on the critical path, the schedule shall show the float, or slack, time. 3. Procurement of material and equipment. 4. Submittals requiring review by the Engineer. Submittal by the Contractor and review by the Engineer shall be shown as separate activities. 5. Work to be performed by a subcontractor, agent, or any third party. 6. Allowances for delays that could result from normal inclement weather (time extensions due to inclement weather will not be allowed). 7. Allowances for the time required by utilities (Owner’s and others) to locate, monitor, and adjust their facilities as required. The Engineer may request the Contractor to alter the progress schedule when deemed necessary in the opinion of the Engineer, in the interest of public safety and welfare of the Owner, or for coordination with any other activity of other contractors, the availability of all or portions of the job site, or special provisions of this Contract, or to reasonably meet the completion date of the project. The Contractor shall provide such revised schedule within 10 days of request. If, at any time, in the opinion of the Engineer, the progress of construction falls significantly behind schedule, the Contractor may be required to submit a plan for regaining progress and a revised schedule indicating how the remaining Work items will be completed within the authorized contract time. The Contractor shall promptly report to the Engineer any conditions that the Contractor feels will require revision of the schedule and shall promptly submit proposed revisions in the progress schedule for acceptance by the Engineer. When such changes are accepted by the Engineer, the revised schedule shall be followed by the Contractor. Weekly Schedule. The Contractor shall submit a weekly progress schedule to the Engineer which sets forth specific Work to be performed the following week, and a tentative schedule for the second week. Failure to Maintain Progress Schedule. The Engineer will check actual progress of the Work against the progress schedule a minimum of two times per month. Failure, without just cause, to maintain progress in accordance with the approved schedule shall constitute a breach of Contract. If, through no fault of the Contractor, the proposed construction schedule cannot be met, the Engineer will require the Contractor to submit a revised schedule to the Engineer for acceptance. The approved revisions will thereafter, in all respects, apply in lieu of the original schedule. Failure of the Contractor to follow the progress schedule submitted and accepted, including revisions thereof, shall relieve the Owner of any and all responsibility for furnishing and making available all or any portion of the job site, and will relieve the Owner of any responsibility for delays to the Contractor in the performance of the Work. The cost of preparing the progress schedule, any supplementary progress schedules, and weekly schedules shall be considered incidental to the Contract and no other compensation shall be made. 1-08.4 Notice to Proceed and Prosecution of the Work Section 1-08.4 is replaced with the following: 07/05/2018 49 (******) Notice to Proceed will be given after the Contract has been executed and the Contract bond and evidence of insurances have been approved and filed by the Owner. The Contractor shall not commence the Work until the Notice to Proceed has been given by the Engineer. The Contractor shall commence construction activities on the project site within ten days of the Notice to Proceed date. The Work thereafter shall be prosecuted diligently, vigorously, and without unauthorized interruption until physical completion of the Work. There shall be no voluntary shutdowns or slowing of operations by the Contractor without prior approval of the Engineer. Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor from the contractual obligation to complete the Work within the prescribed Contract Time. 1-08.5 Time For Completion The first five paragraphs of Section 1-08.5 are deleted and replaced with the following: (******) The Work shall be physically completed in its entirety within the time specified in the Contract Documents or as extended by the Engineer. The Contract Time will be stated in “working days”, shall begin on the Notice To Proceed date, or the date identified in the Notice to Proceed as “the first working day”, and shall end on the Contract Completion date. A non-working day is defined as a Saturday, a Sunday, a day on which the Contract specifically suspends Work, or one of these holidays: January 1, third Monday of January, Memorial Day, July 4, Labor Day, November 11, Thanksgiving Day, the day after Thanksgiving, and Christmas Day. The day before Christmas shall be a holiday when Christmas Day occurs on a Tuesday or Friday. The day after Christmas shall be a holiday when Christmas Day occurs on a Monday, Wednesday, or Thursday. When Christmas Day occurs on a Saturday, the two preceding working days shall be observed as holidays. When Christmas day occurs on a Sunday, the two working days following shall be observed as holidays. When holidays other than Christmas fall on a Saturday, the preceding Friday will be counted as a non- working day and when they fall on a Sunday the following Monday will be counted as a non-working day. The Contract Time has been established to allow for periods of normal inclement weather that, from historical records, is to be expected during the Contract Time, and during which periods, Work is anticipated to be performed. Each successive working day, beginning with the Notice to Proceed date and ending with the Physical Completion date, shall be charged to the Contract Time as it occurs except a day, or part of a day, which is designated a non-working day or an Engineer determined unworkable day. The Engineer will furnish the Contractor a weekly report showing (1) the number of working days charged against the Contract Time for the preceding week; (2) the Contract Time in working days; (3) the number of working days remaining in the Contract Time; (4) the number of non-working days; and (5) any partial or whole days the Engineer declared unworkable the previous week. This weekly report will be correlated with the Contractor’s current approved progress schedule. If the Contractor elects to work 10 hours a day and 4 days a week (a 4-10 schedule), and the fifth day of the week in which a 4-10 shift is worked would ordinarily be charged as a working day, then the fifth day of that week will be charged as a working day whether or not the Contractor works on that day. The Contractor will be allowed 10 calendar days from the date of each report in which to file a written protest of an alleged discrepancy in the Contract Time as reported. Otherwise, the report will be deemed to have been accepted by the Contractor as correct. The requirements for scheduling the Final Inspection and establishing the Substantial Completion, Physical Completion, and Completion Dates are specified in Sections 1-05.11 and 1-05.12. Revise the seventh paragraph to read: (******) The Engineer will give the Contractor written notice of the completion date of the Contract after all the Contractor’s obligations under the Contract have been performed by the Contractor. The following events must occur before the Completion Date can be established: 1. The physical Work on the project must be complete; and 07/05/2018 50 2. The Contractor must furnish all documentation required by the Contract and required by law, to allow the Contracting Agency to process final acceptance of the Contract. The following documents must be received by the Project Engineer prior to establishing a completion date: a. Certified Payrolls (Federal-aid Projects) b. Material Acceptance Certification Documents c. Annual Report of Amounts Paid as MBE/WBE Participants or Quarterly Report of Amounts Credited as DBE Participation, as required by the Contract Provisions. d. FHWA 47 (Federal-aid Projects) e. Final Contract Voucher Certification f. Property owner releases per Section 1-07.24 Section 1-08.5 is supplemented as follows: (******) Within 10 calendar days after execution of the Contract by the Contracting Agency, the Contractor shall provide the Contracting Agency with copies of purchase orders for all equipment items deemed critical by the Contracting Agency, including but not limited to signal controller materials, lighting standards, and signal standards required for the physical completion of the Contract. Such purchase orders shall disclose the estimated delivery dates for the equipment. All items of Work that can be performed without delivery of the critical items shall start and be completed as soon as possible. At that time, the Engineer may suspend the Work upon request of the Contractor until the critical items are delivered to the Contractor, if the Contracting Agency received a purchase order within 10 calendar days after execution of the Contract by the Contracting Agency. The Contractor will be entitled to only one such suspension of time during the performance of the Work and during such suspension shall not perform any additional Work on the project. Upon delivery of the critical items, contract time will resume and continue to be charged in accordance with Section 1-08. 1-08.6 Suspension of Work Section 1-08.6 is supplemented as follows: (******) Owner may at any time suspend the Work, or any part thereof, by giving notice to the Contractor in writing. The Work shall be resumed by the Contractor within 14 calendar days after the date fixed in the written notice from the Owner to the Contractor to do so. The Contractor shall not suspend Work under the Contract without the written order of the Owner. If it has been determined that the Contractor is entitled to an extension of time, the amount of such extension shall be only to compensate for direct delays, and shall be based upon the Contractor's diligently pursuing the Work at a rate not less than that which would have been necessary to complete the original Contract Work on time. 1-08.7 Maintenance During Suspension Revise the second paragraph to read: (******) At no expense to the Contracting Agency, the Contractor shall provide through the construction area a safe, smooth, and unobstructed roadway, sidewalk, driveway, and path for public use during suspension (as required in Section 1-07.23 or the Special Provisions). This may include a temporary road or detour. 07/05/2018 51 1-08.9 Liquidated Damages Section 1-08.9 is supplemented as follows: (******) In addition, the Contractor shall compensate the Owner for actual engineering inspection and supervision costs and any other expenses and legal fees incurred by the Owner as a result of such delay. Such labor costs will be billed to the Contractor at actual costs, including administrative overhead costs. In the event that the Owner is required to commence any lawsuit in order to enforce any provision of this Contract or to seek redress for any breach thereof, the Owner shall be entitled to recover its costs, including reasonable attorneys fees, from the Contractor. 1-08.11 Contractor's Plant and Equipment Section 1-08.11 is a new Section: (******) The Contractor alone shall at all times be responsible for the adequacy, efficiency, and sufficiency of his and his subcontractor's plant and equipment. The Owner shall have the right to make use of the Contractor's plant and equipment in the performance of any Work on the site of the Work. The use by the Owner of such plant and equipment shall be considered as extra Work and paid for accordingly. Neither the Owner nor the Engineer assumes any responsibility, at any time, for the security of the site from the time the Contractor's operations have commenced until final acceptance of the Work by the Engineer and the Owner. The Contractor shall employ such measures as additional fencing, barricades, and watchmen service, as he deems necessary for the public safety and for the protection of the site and his plant and equipment. The Owner will be provided keys for all fenced, secured areas. 1-08.12 Attention to Work Section 1-08.12 is a new section: (******) The Contractor shall give his personal attention to and shall supervise the Work to the end that it shall be prosecuted faithfully, and when he is not personally present on the Work site, he shall at all times be represented by a competent superintendent who shall have full authority to execute the same, and to supply materials, tools, and labor without delay, and who shall be the legal representative of the Contractor. The Contractor shall be liable for the faithful observance of any instructions delivered to him or to his authorized representative. 1-09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1-09.1 Measurement of Quantities Section 1-09.1 is supplemented by adding the following: (******) Lump Sum. The percentage of lump sum Work completed, and payment will be based on the cost percentage breakdown of the lump sum bid price(s) submitted at the preconstruction conference. The Contractor shall submit a breakdown of costs for each lump sum bid item. The breakdown shall list the items included in the lump sum together with a unit price of labor, materials, and equipment for each item. The summation of the detailed unit prices for each item shall add up to the lump sum bid. The unit price values may be used as a guideline for determining progress payments or deductions or additions in payment for ordered Work changes. Cubic Yard Quantities. The Contractor shall provide truck trip tickets for progress payments only in the following manner. Where items are specified to be paid by the cubic yard, the following tally system shall be used. All trucks to be employed on this Work will be measured to determine the volume of each truck. Each 07/05/2018 52 truck shall be clearly numbered, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and there shall be no duplication of numbers. Duplicate tally tickets shall be prepared to accompany each truckload of material delivered on the project. All tickets received that do not contain the following information will not be processed for payment: 1 Truck number 2 Quantity and type of material delivered in cubic yards 3 Drivers name, date and time of delivery 4 Location of delivery, by street and stationing on each street 5 Place for the Engineer to acknowledge receipt 6 Pay item number 7 Contract number and/or name It will be the Contractor's responsibility to see that a ticket is given to the Engineer on the project for each truckload of material delivered. Pay quantities will be prepared on the basis of said tally tickets. Loads will be checked by the Engineer to verify quantity shown on ticket. Quantities by Ton. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to see that a certified weight ticket is given to the Inspector on the project at the time of delivery of materials for each truckload delivered. Pay quantities will be prepared on the basis of said tally tickets, delivered to Inspector at time of delivery of materials. Tickets not receipted by Inspector will not be honored for payment. Each truck shall be clearly numbered to the satisfaction of the Engineer and there shall be no duplication of numbers. Duplicate tickets shall be prepared to accompany each truckload of material delivered to the project. All tickets received that do not contain the following information will not be processed for payment: 1. Truck number 2. Truck tare weight (stamped at source) 3. Gross truckload weight in tons (stamped at source) 4. Net load weight (stamped at source) 5. Driver's name, date, and time of delivery 6. Location for delivery by street and stationing on each street 7. Place for the Engineer to acknowledge receipt 8. Pay item number 9. Contract number and/or name 1-09.3 Scope of Payment Section 1-09.3 is supplemented by adding the following: (******) The bid items listed in Section 1-09.14 will be the only items for which compensation will be made for the Work described in each section of the Standard Specifications when the Contractor performs the specified Work. Should a bid item be listed in a “Payment” clause but not in the Proposal Form, and Work for that item is performed by the Contractor and the Work is not stated as included in or incidental to a pay item in the Contract and is not Work that would be required to complete the intent of the Contract per Section 1-04.1, then payment for that Work will be made as for Extra Work pursuant to a Change Order. The words “Bid Item,” “Contract Item,” and “Pay Item,” and similar terms used throughout the Contract Documents are synonymous. If the “payment ” clause in the Specifications relating to any unit bid item price in the Proposal Form requires that said unit bid item price cover and be considered compensation for certain Work or material essential to the item, then the Work or material will not be measured or paid for under any other unit bid item which may appear elsewhere in the Proposal Form or Specifications. 07/05/2018 53 Pluralized unit bid items appearing in these Specifications are changed to singular form. Payment for bid items listed or referenced in the “Payment” clause of any particular section of the Specifications shall be considered as including all of the Work required, specified, or described in that particular section. Payment items will generally be listed generically in the Specifications, and specifically in the bid form. When items are to be “furnished” under one payment item and “installed” under another payment item, such items shall be furnished FOB project site, or, if specified in the Special Provisions, delivered to a designated site. Materials to be “furnished,” or “furnished and installed” under these conditions, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor with regard to storage until such items are incorporated into the Work or, if such items are not to be incorporated into the Work, delivered to the applicable Contracting Agency storage site when provided for in the Specifications. Payment for material “furnished,” but not yet incorporated into the Work, may be made on monthly estimates to the extent allowed. 1-09.6 Force Account Section 1-09.6 is supplemented as follows: (******) Owner has estimated and included in the proposal, dollar amounts for all items to be paid per force account, only to provide a common proposal for Bidders. All such dollar amounts are to become a part of the Contractor’s total bid. However, the Owner does not warrant expressly or by im plication that the actual amount of Work will correspond with those estimates. Payment will be made on the basis of the amount of Work actually authorized by the Engineer. 1-09.7 Mobilization Section 1-09.7 is supplemented as follows: (******) Mobilization shall also include, but not be limited to, the following items: the movement of Contractor's personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to the project site; the establishment of an office, buildings, and other facilities necessary for Work on the project; providing sanitary facilities for the Contractor's personnel; and obtaining permits or licenses required to complete the project not furnished by the Owner. This item shall also include providing the Engineer and the Inspectors with access to telephone, facsimile machine, and copy machine during all hours the Contractor is working on the jobsite; and a table and chair for their use when needed. Payment will be made for the following bid item(s): “Mobilization & Demobilization,” Lump Sum. 1-09.9 Payments Delete the third paragraph and replace it with the following: (******) Progress payments for completed Work and material on hand will be based upon progress estimates prepared by the Engineer. A progress estimate cutoff date will be established at the preconstruction meeting. The initial progress estimate will be made not later than 30 days after the Contractor commences the Work, and successive progress estimates will be made every month thereafter until the Completion Date. Progress estimates made during progress of the Work are tentative, and made only for the purpose of determining progress payment. The progress estimates are subject to change at any time prior to the calculation of the final payment. The value of the progress estimate will be the sum of the following: 1. Unit Price Items in the Bid Form – the approximate quantity of acceptable units of Work 07/05/2018 54 completed multiplied by the unit price. 2. Lump Sum Items in the Bid Form – the estimated percentage complete multiplied by the Bid Forms amount for each lump sum item, or per the schedule of values for that item. 3. Materials on Hand – 100 percent of invoiced cost of material delivered to job site or other storage area approved by the Engineer. 4. Change Orders – entitlement for approved extra cost or completed extra Work as determined by the Engineer. Progress payments will be made in accordance with the progress estimate less: 1. Retainage per Section 1-09.9(1); 2. The amount of Progress Payments previously made; and 3. Funds withheld by the Contracting Agency for disbursement in accordance with the Contract Documents. Progress payments for Work performed shall not be evidence of acceptable performance or an admission by the Contracting Agency that any Work has been satisfactorily completed. Payments will be made by check or electronic transfer, issued by the Contracting Agency’s fiscal officer, against the appropriate fund source for the project. Payments received on account of Work performed by a subcontractor are subject to the provisions of RCW 39.04.250. Section 1-09.9 is supplemented as follows: (******) Applications for payment shall be itemized and supported to the extent required by the Engineer by receipts or other vouchers showing payment for materials and labor, payments to subcontractors, and other such evidence of the Contractor's right to payment as the Engineer may direct, including “red line” as-built drawings showing work installed by the contractor during the progress payment period. The Contractor shall submit a progress report with each monthly request for a progress payment. The progress report shall indicate the estimated percent complete for each activity listed on the progress schedule (see Section 1-08.3) and a revised and updated schedule to reflect the most current project completion date. 1-09.9(1) Retainage Section 1-09.9(1) is supplemented as follows: (******) The retained amount shall be released as stated in the Standard Specifications if no claims have been filed against such funds as provided by law, and if the Owner has no unsatisfied claims against the Contractor. In the event claims are filed, the Owner shall withhold, until such claims are satisfied, a sum sufficient to satisfy all claims and to pay attorney's fees. In addition, the Owner shall withhold such amount as is required to satisfy any claims by the Owner against the Contractor, until such claims have been finally settled. Neither the final payment nor any part of the retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor, if requested, delivers to the Owner a complete release of all liens arising out of this Contract, or receipts in full in lieu thereof, and, if required in either case, an affidavit that so far as the Contractor has knowledge or information, the release and receipts include all labor and materials for which a lien could be filed: but the Contractor may, if any subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or receipt in full, furnish a bond satisfactorily to the Engineer to indemnify the Owner against the lien. If any lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall reimburse to the Owner all monies that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable engineer's and attorney's fees. 07/05/2018 55 1-09.9(2) Contracting Agency’s Right to Withhold and Disburse Certain Amounts Section 1-09.9(2) is a new section: (******) In addition to monies retained pursuant to RCW 60.28 and subject to RCW 39.04.250, RCW 39.12 and RCW 39.76, the Contractor authorizes the Engineer to withhold progress payments due or deduct an amount from any payment or payments due the Contractor which, in the Engineer’s opinion, may be necessary to cover the Contracting Agency’s costs for or to remedy the following situations: 1. Damage to another contractor when there is evidence thereof and a claim has been filed. 2. Where the Contractor has not paid fees or charges to public authorities of municipalities, which the Contractor is obligated to pay. 3. Utilizing material tested and inspected by the Engineer, for purposes not connected with the Work (Section 1-05.6). 4. Landscape damage assessments per Section 1-07.16. 5. For overtime Work performed by City personnel per Section 1-08.1(4). 6. Anticipated or actual failure of the Contractor to complete the Work on time: a. Per Section 1-08.9 Liquidated Damages; or b. Lack of construction progress based upon the Engineer’s review of the Contractor’s approved progress schedule, which indicates the Work will not be complete within the contract time. When calculating an anticipated time overrun, the Engineer will make allowances for weather delays, approved unavoidable delays, and suspensions of the Work. The amount withheld under this subparagraph will be based upon the liquidated damages amount per day set forth in Contract Documents multiplied by the number of days the Contractor’s approved progress schedule, in the opinion of the Engineer, indicates the Contract may exceed the Contract Time. 7. Failure of the Contractor to perform any of the Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract, including but not limited to: a. Failure of the Contractor to provide the Engineer with a field office when required by the Contract Provisions. b. Failure of the Contractor to protect survey stakes, markers, etc., or to provide adequate survey Work as required by Section 1-05.5. c. Failure of the Contractor to correct defective or unauthorized Work (Section 1-05.8). d. Failure of the Contractor to furnish a Manufacture’s Certificate of Compliance in lieu of material testing and inspection as required by Section 1-06.3. e. Failure to submit weekly payrolls, Intent to Pay Prevailing Wage forms, or correct underpayment to employees of the Contractor or subcontractor of any tier as required by Section 1-07.9. f. Failure of the Contractor to pay worker’s benefits (Title 50 and Title 51 RCW) as required by Section 1-07.10. g. Failure of the Contractor to submit and obtain approval of a progress schedule per Section 1-08.3. The Contractor authorizes the Engineer to act as agent for the Contractor disbursing such funds as have been withheld pursuant to this Section to a party or parties who are entitled to payment. Disbursement of such funds, if the Engineer elects to do so will be made only after giving the Contractor 15 calendar days prior written notice of the Contracting Agency’s intent to do so, and if prior to the expiration of the 15-calendar day period, 1. No legal action has commenced to resolve the validity of the claims, and 2. The Contractor has not protested such disbursement. 07/05/2018 56 A proper accounting of all funds disbursed on behalf of the Contractor in accordance with this Section will be made. A payment made pursuant to this section shall be considered as payment made under the terms and conditions of the Contract. The Contracting Agency shall not be liable to the Contractor for such payment made in good faith. 1-09.9(3) Final Payment Section 1-09.9(2) is a new section: (******) Upon Acceptance of the Work by the Contracting Agency, the final amount to be paid the Contactor will be calculated based upon a Final Progress Estimate made by the Engineer. Acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be and shall operate as a release: 1. To the Contracting Agency of all claims and all liabilities of the Contractor, other than claims in stated amounts as may be specifically excepted in writing by the Contractor; 2. For all things done or furnished in connection with the Work; 3. For every act and neglect by the Contracting Agency; and 4. For all other claims and liability relating to or arising out of the Work. A payment (monthly, final, retainage, or otherwise) shall not release the Contractor or the Contractor’s Surety from any obligation required under the terms of the Contract Documents or the Contract Bond; nor shall such payment constitute a waiver of the Contracting Agency’s ability to investigate and act upon findings of non-compliance with the WMBE requirements of the Contract; nor shall such payment preclude the Contracting Agency from recovering damages, setting penalties, or obtaining such other remedies as may be permitted by law. Before the Work will be accepted by the Contracting Agency, the Contractor shall submit an affidavit, on the form provided by the Engineer, of amounts paid to certified disadvantaged (DB), minority (MBE) or women business enterprises (WBE) participating in the Work. Such affidavit shall certify the amounts paid to the DB, MBE or WBE subcontractors regardless of tier. On federally funded projects the Contractor may also be required to execute and furnish the Contracting Agency an affidavit certifying that the Contractor has not extended any loans, gratuity or gift and money pursuant to Section 1-07.19 of these Specifications. If the Contractor fails, refuses, or is unable to sign and return the Final Progress Estimate or any other documents required for the final acceptance of the Contract, the Contracting Agency reserves the right to establish a completion date and unilaterally accept the Contract. Unilateral acceptance will occur only after the Contractor has been provided the opportunity, by written request from the Engineer, to voluntarily submit such documents. If voluntary compliance is not achieved, formal notification of the impending unilateral acceptance will be provided by certified letter from the Engineer to the Contractor that will provide 30 calendar days for the Contractor to submit the necessary documents. The 30-calendar day deadline shall begin on the date of the postmark of the certified letter from the Engineer requesting the necessary documents. This reservation by the Contracting Agency to unilaterally accept the Contract will apply to contracts that are completed in accordance with Section 1-08.5 for contracts that are terminated in accordance with Section 1-08.10. Unilateral acceptance of the Contract by the Contracting Agency does not in any way relieve the Contractor of the provisions under contract or of the responsibility to comply with all laws, ordinances, and federal, state, and local regulations that affect the Contract. The date the Contracting Agency unilaterally signs the Final Progress Estimate constitutes the final acceptance date (Section 1-05.12). 1-09.11 Disputes and Claims 1-09.11(2) Claims Paragraph 5 is revised as follows: (******) Failure to submit with the Final Application for Payment such information and details as described in this section for any claim shall operate as a waiver of the claims by the Contractor as provided in Section 1-09.9. 07/05/2018 57 1-09.11(3) Time Limitations and Jurisdiction Paragraph 1, Sentence 1 is revised as follows: (******) …such claims or causes of action shall be brought in the Superior Court of the county where the Work is performed. 1-09.13 Claims and Resolutions 1-09.13(3) Claims $250,000 or Less Delete this Section and replace it with the following: (******) The Contractor and the Contracting Agency mutually agree that those claims that total $250,000 or less, submitted in accordance with Section 1-09.11 and not resolved by nonbonding ADR processes, shall be resolved through litigation, unless the parties mutually agree in writing to resolve the claim through binding arbitration. 1-09.13(3)A Administration of Arbitration Revise the third paragraph to read: (******) The Contracting Agency and the Contractor mutually agree to be bound by the decision of the arbitrator, and judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered in the Superior Court of the county in which the Contracting Agency’s headquarters are located. The decision of the arbitrator and the specific basis for the decision shall be in writing. The arbitrator shall use the Contract as a basis for decisions. 1-09.13(3)B Procedures to Pursue Arbitration Section 1-09.13(3)B is supplemented by adding: (******) The findings and decision of the board of arbitrators shall be final and binding on the parties, unless the aggrieved party, within 10 days, challenges the findings and decision by serving and filing a petition for review by the superior court of King County, Washington. The grounds for the petition for review are limited to showing that the findings and decision: 1. Are not responsive to the questions submitted; 2. Is contrary to the terms of the contract or any component thereof; 3. Is arbitrary and/or is not based upon the applicable facts and the law controlling the issues submitted to arbitration. The board of arbitrators shall support its decision by setting forth in writing their findings and conclusions based on the evidence adduced at any such hearing. The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the statutes of the State of Washington and court decisions governing such procedure. The costs of such arbitration shall be borne equally by the City and the Contractor unless it is the board's majority opinion that the Contractor's filing of the protest or action is capricious or without reasonable foundation. In the latter case, all costs shall be borne by the Contractor. 07/05/2018 58 1-09.14 Payment Schedule Measurement and Payment Schedule for Bid Items in This Project Proposal Section 1-09.14 is a new section: (******) GENERAL 1-09.14(1) Scope Section 1-09.14(1) is a new section: (******) A. Payment for the various items of the bid sheets, as further specified herein, shall include all compensation to be received by the Contractor for furnishing all tools, equipment, supplies, and manufactured articles, and for all labor, operations, and incidentals appurtenant to the items of Work being described, as necessary to complete the various items of the Work all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including all appurtenances thereto, and including all costs of compliance with the regulations of public agencies having jurisdiction, including Safety and Health Administration of the U.S. Department of Labor (OSHA). No separate payment will be made for any item that is not specifically set forth in the Bid Schedules, and all costs therefore shall be included in the prices named in the Bid Schedules for the various appurtenant items of Work. B. The Owner shall not pay for material quantities, which exceed the actual measured amount used and approved by the Engineer. C. It is the intention of these Specifications that the performance of all Work under the bid for each item shall result in the complete construction, in an accepted operating condition, of each item. Work and material not specifically listed in the proposal but required in the Plans, Specifications, and general construction practice, shall be included in the bid price. No separate payment will be made for these incidental items. 1-09.14(2) Bid Items Section 1-09.14(2) is a new section: (******) See Technical Specifications Division 18 (Measurement and Payment) for Bid Items 1-10 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL 1-10.1 General Revise the first paragraph to read: (******) The Contractor shall provide flaggers, signs, and other traffic control devices not otherwise specified as being furnished by the Contracting Agency. The Contractor shall erect and maintain all construction signs, warning signs, detour signs, and other traffic control devices necessary to warn and protect the public at all times from injury or damage as a result of the Contractor’s operations which may occur on highways, roads, streets, sidewalks, or paths. No Work shall be done on or adjacent to any traveled way until all necessary signs and traffic control devices are in place. Section 1-10.1 is supplemented by adding the following: (******) When the bid proposal includes an item for “Traffic Control,” the Work required for this item shall be all items described in Section 1-10, including, but not limited to: 07/05/2018 59 1. Furnishing and maintaining barricades, flashers, construction signing, and other channelization devices, unless a pay item is in the bid proposal for any specific device and the Special Provisions specify furnishing, maintaining, and payment in a different manner for that device; 2. Furnishing traffic control labor, equipment, and supervisory personnel for all traffic control labor; 3. Furnishing any necessary vehicle(s) to set up and remove the Class B construction signs and other traffic control devices; 4. Furnishing labor and vehicles for patrolling and maintaining in position all of the construction signs and the traffic control devices, unless a pay item is in the bid proposal to specifically pay for this Work; and 5. Furnishing labor, material, and equipment necessary for cleaning up, removing, and replacing of the construction signs and the traffic control devices destroyed or damaged during the life of the project. 6. Removing existing signs as specified or as directed by the Engineer and delivering to the City Shops, or storing and reinstalling as directed by the Engineer. 7. Preparing a traffic control plan for the project and designating the person responsible for traffic control at the Work site. The traffic control plan shall include descriptions of the traffic control methods and devices to be used by the prime Contractor, and subcontractors, shall be submitted at or before the preconstruction conference, and shall be subject to review and approval of the Engineer. 8. Contacting police, fire, 911, and ambulance services to notify them in advance of any Work that will affect and traveled portion of a roadway. 9. Assuring that all traveled portions of roadways are open to traffic during peak traffic periods, 6:30 a.m. to 8:30 a.m., and 3:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m., or as specified in the special provisions, or as directed by the Engineer. 10. Promptly removing or covering all non-applicable signs during periods when they are not needed. If no bid item “Traffic Control” appears in the proposal, then all Work required by these sections will be considered incidental and their cost shall be included in the other items of Work. If the Engineer requires the Contractor to furnish additional channelizing devices, pieces of equipment, or services, which could not be usually anticipated, by a prudent Contractor for the maintenance and protection of traffic, then a new item or items may be established to pay for such items. Further limitations for consideration of payment for these items are that they are not covered by other pay items in the bid proposal, they are not specified in the Special Provisions as incidental, and the accumulative cost for the use of each individual channelizing device, piece of equipment, or service must exceed $200 in total cost for the duration of their need. In the event of disputes, the Engineer will determine what is usually anticipated by a prudent Contractor. The cost for these items will be by agreed price, price established by the Engineer, or by force account. Additional items required as a result of the Contractor’s modification to the traffic control plan(s) appearing in the Contract shall not be covered by the provisions in this paragraph. If the total cost of all the Work under the Contract increases or decreases by more than 25 percent, an equitable adjustment will be considered for the item “Traffic Control” to address the increase or decrease. Traffic control and maintenance for the safety of the traveling public on this project shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and all methods and equipment used will be subject to the approval of the Owner. Traffic control devices and their use shall conform to City of Renton standards and the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices( MUTCD). The Contractor shall not proceed with any construction until proper traffic control has been provided to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Any days lost due to improper traffic control will be charged against the Contractor’s allowable contract time, and shall not be the cause for a claim for extra days to 07/05/2018 60 complete the Work. 1-10.2(1)B Traffic Control Supervisor Paragraphs 1 and 2 are revised as follows: (******) A Traffic Control Supervisor (TCS) shall be on the project whenever traffic control labor is required or as authorized by the Engineer. The TCS shall assure that all the duties of the TCS are performed during the duration of the Contract. During non-Work periods, the TCS shall be able to be on the job site within a 45-minute time period after notification by the Engineer. 1-10.2(2) Traffic Control Plans Section 1-10.2(2) is supplemented as follows: (******) The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that traffic control is installed and maintained in conformance to established standards. The Contractor shall continuously evaluate the operation of the traffic control plan and take prompt action to correct any problems that become evident during operation. 1-10.3 Flagging, Signs, and All Other Traffic Control Devices Section 1-10.3 is supplemented as follows: (******) At the end of each working day, provisions shall be made for the safe passage of traffic and pedestrians during non-working hours. Barricades shall be reflectorized as specified in Part VI of the MUTCD, and shall be 3M-diamond grade or equivalent approved by the Engineer. Barricades shall also be equipped with flashers. 1-10.3(3) Construction Signs Section 1-10.3(3) paragraph 4 is supplemented as follows: (******) No separate pay item will be provided in the bid proposal for Class A or Class B construction signs. All costs for the Work to provide Class A or Class B construction signs shall be included in the unit contract price for the various other items of the Work in the bid proposal. 1-10.4 Measurement Section 1-10.4 is replaced with: (******) No specific unit of measurement will apply to the lump sum item of “Traffic Control”. No adjustment in the lump sum bid amount will be made for overtime Work or for use of relief flaggers. 1-10.5 Payment Section 1-10.5 is replaced with: (******) Payment for all labor, materials, and equipment described in Section 1-10 will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid items when included in the proposal: “Traffic Control,” Lump Sum. 1-11 RENTON SURVEYING STANDARDS The following is a new section with new subsections: (******) 1-11.1(1) Responsibility for Surveys All surveys and survey reports shall be prepared under the direct supervision of a person registered to 07/05/2018 61 practice land surveying under the provisions of Chapter 18.43 RCW. All surveys and survey reports shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements established by the Board of Registration for Professional Engineers and Land Surveyors under the provisions of Chapter 18.43 RCW. 1-11.1(2) Survey Datum and Precision The horizontal component of all surveys shall have as its coordinate base: The North American Datum of 1983/91. All horizontal control for projects must be referenced to or in conjunction with a minimum of two of the City of Renton's Survey Control Network monuments. The source of the coordinate values used will be shown on the survey drawing per RCW 58.09.070. The horizontal component of all surveys shall meet or exceed the closure requirements of WAC 332 - 130-060. The control base lines for all surveys shall meet or exceed the requireme nts for a Class A survey revealed in Table 2 of the Minimum Standard Detail Requirements for ALTA/ACSM Land Title Surveys jointly established and adopted by ALTA and ACSM in 1992 or comparable classification in future editions of said document. The angular and linear closure and precision ratio of traverses used for survey control shall be revealed on the face of the survey drawing, as shall the method of adjustment. The horizontal component of the control system for surveys using global positioning system methodology shall exhibit at least 1 part in 50,000 precision in line length dependent error analysis at a 95 percent confidence level and performed pursuant to Federal Geodetic Control Subcommittee Standards for GPS control surveys as defined in Geometric Geodetic Accuracy Standards & Specifications for Using GPS Relative Positioning Techniques dated August 1, 1989, or comparable classification in future editions of said document. The vertical component of all surveys shall be based on NAVD 1988, the North American Vertical Datum of 1988, and tied to at least one of the City of Renton Survey Control Network benchmarks. If there are two such benchmarks within 3000 feet of the project site a tie to both shall be made. The benchmark(s) used will be shown on the drawing. If a City of Renton benchmark does not exist within 3000 feet of a project, one must be set on or near the project in a permanent manner that will remain intact throughout the duration of the project. Source of elevations (benchmark) will be shown on the drawing, as well as a description of any benchmarks established. 1-11.1(3) Subdivision Information Those surveys dependent on section subdivision shall reveal the controlling monuments used and the subdivision of the applicable quarter section. Those surveys dependent on retracement of a plat or short plat shall reveal the controlling monuments, measurements, and methodology used in that retracement. 1-11.1(4) Field Notes Field notes shall be kept in conventional format in a standard bound field book with waterproof pages. In cases where an electronic data collector is used field notes must also be kept with a sketch and a record of control and base line traverses describing station occupations and what measurements were made at each point. Every point located or set shall be identified by a number and a description. Point numbers shall be unique within a complete job. The preferred method of point numbering is field notebook, page and point set on that page. Example: The first point set or found on page 16 of field book 348 would be identified as Point No. 348.16.01, the second point would be 348.16.02, etc. Upon completion of a City of Renton project, either the field notebook(s) provided by the City or the original field notebook(s) used by the Surveyor will be given to the City. For all other Work, Surveyors will provide a copy of the notes to the City upon request. In those cases where an electronic data 07/05/2018 62 collector is used, a hard copy print out in ASCII text format will accompany the field notes. 1-11.1(5) Corners and Monuments Corner: A point on a land boundary, at the juncture of two or more boundary lines. A monument is usually set at such points to physically reference a corner's location on the ground. Monument: Any physical object or structure of record, which marks or accurately references:  A corner or other survey point established by or under the supervision of an individual per Section 1-11.1(1) and any corner or monument established by the General Land Office and its successor the Bureau of Land Management including section subdivision corners down to and including one-sixteenth corners; and  Any permanently monumented boundary, right-of-way alignment, or horizontal and vertical control points established by any governmental agency or private surveyor including street intersections but excluding dependent interior lot corners. 1-11.1(6) Control or Base Line Survey Control or Base Line Surveys shall be established for all construction projects that will create permanent structures such as roads, sidewalks, bridges, utility lines or appurtenances, signal or light poles, or any non-single family building. Control or Base Line Surveys shall consist of such number of permanent monuments as are required such that every structure may be observed for staking or "as- builting" while occupying one such monument and sighting another such monument. A minimum of two of these permanent monuments shall be existing monuments, recognized and on record with the City of Renton. The Control or Base Line Survey shall occupy each monument in turn, and shall satisfy all applicable requirements of Section 1-11.1 herein. The drawing depicting the survey shall be neat, legible, and drawn to an appropriate scale. North orientation should be clearly presented and the scale shown graphically as well as noted. The drawing must be of such quality that a reduction thereof to one-half original scale remains legible. If recording of the survey with the King County Recorder is required, it will be prepared on 18 inch by 24 inch mylar and will comply with all provisions of Chapter 58.09 RCW. A photographic mylar of the drawing will be submitted to the City of Renton and, upon their review and acceptance per the specific requirements of the project, the original will be recorded with the King County Recorder. If recording is not required, the survey drawing shall be prepared on 22 inch by 34 inch mylar, and the original or a photographic mylar thereof will be submitted to the City of Renton. The survey drawings shall meet or exceed the requirements of WAC 332-130-050 and shall conform to the City of Renton's Drafting Standards. American Public Works Association symbols shall be used whenever possible, and a legend shall identify all symbols used if each point marked by a symbol is not described at each use. An electronic listing of all principal points shown on the drawing shall be submitted with each drawing. The listing should include the point number designation (corresponding with that in the field notes), a brief description of the point, and northing, easting, and elevation (if applicable) values, all in ASCII format, on IBM PC compatible media. 1-11.1(7) Precision Levels Vertical Surveys for the establishment of benchmarks shall satisfy all applicable requirements of Sections 1-05 and 1-11.1. Vertical surveys for the establishment of benchmarks shall meet or exceed the standards, Specifications and procedures of third order elevation accuracy established by the Federal Geodetic Control Committee. Benchmarks must possess both permanence and vertical stability. Descriptions of benchmarks must be complete to insure both recoverability and positive identification on recovery. 07/05/2018 63 1-11.1(8) Radial and Station -- Offset Topography Topographic surveys shall satisfy all applicable requirements of Section 1-11.1 herein. All points occupied or back sighted in developing radial topography or establishing baselines for station-offset topography shall meet the requirements of Section 1-11.1 herein. The drawing and electronic listing requirements set forth in Section 1-11.1 herein shall be observed for all topographic surveys. 1-11.1(9) Radial Topography Elevations for the points occupied or back sighted in a radial topographic survey shall be determined either by, 1) spirit leveling with misclosure not to exceed 0.1 feet or Federal Geodetic Control Committee third order elevation accuracy Specifications, OR 2) trigonometric leveling with elevation differences determined in at least two directions for each point and with misclosure of the circuit not to exceed 0.1 feet. 1-11.1(10) Station--Offset Topography Elevations of the baseline and topographic points shall be determined by spirit leveling and shall satisfy Federal Geodetic Control Committee Specifications as to the turn points and shall not exceed 0.1 foot's error as to side shots. 1-11.1(11) As-Built Survey All improvements required to be "as-built" (post construction survey) per City of Renton Codes, TITLE 4 Building Regulations and TITLE 9 Public Ways and Property, must be located both horizontally and vertically by a Radial survey or by a Station offset survey. The "as-built" survey must be based on the same base line or control survey used for the construction staking survey for the improvements being "as-built". The "as-built" survey for all subsurface improvements should occur prior to backfilling. Close cooperation between the installing Contractor and the "as-builting" surveyor is therefore required. All "as-built" surveys shall satisfy the requirements of Section 1-11.1(1) herein, and shall be based upon control or base line surveys made in conformance with these Specifications. The field notes for "as-built" shall meet the requirements of Section 1-11.1(4) herein, and submitted with stamped and signed "as-built" drawings which includes a statement certifying the accuracy of the "as-built". The drawing and electronic listing requirements set forth in Section 1-11.1(6) herein shall be observed for all "as-built" surveys. 1-11.1(12) Monument Setting and Referencing All property or lot corners, as defined in 1-11.1(5), established or reestablished on a plat or other recorded survey shall be referenced by a permanent marker at the corner point per 1-11.2(1). In situations where such markers are impractical or in danger of being destroyed, e.g., the front corners of lots, a witness marker shall be set. In most cases, this will be the extension of the lot line to a tack in lead in the curb. The relationship between the witness monuments and their respective corners shall be shown or described on the face of the plat or survey of record, e.g., “Tacks in lead on the extension of the lot side lines have been set in the curbs on the extension of said line with the curb." In all other cases the corner shall meet the requirements of Section 1-11.2(1) herein. All non-corner monuments, as defined in 1-11.1(5), shall meet the requirements of Section 1-11.2(2) herein. If the monument falls within a paved portion of a right-of-way or other area, the monument shall be set below the ground surface and contained within a lidded case kept separate from the monument and flush with the pavement surface, per Section 1-11.2(3). In the case of right-of-way centerline monuments all points of curvature (PC), points of tangency (PT), street intersections, center points of cul-de-sacs shall be set. If the point of intersection (PI) for the 07/05/2018 64 tangents of a curve fall within the paved portion of the right-of-way, a monument can be set at the PI instead of the PC and PT of the curve. For all non corner monuments set while under contract to the City of Renton or as part of a City of Renton approved subdivision of property, a City of Renton Monument Card (furnished by the city) identifying the monument; point of intersection (PI), point of tangency (PT), point of curvature (PC), one-sixteenth corner, Plat monument, street intersection, etc., complete with a description of the monument, a minimum of two reference points and NAD 83/91 coordinates, and NAVD 88 elevation shall be filled out and filed with the city. 1-11.2 Materials 1-11.2(1) Property/Lot Corners Corners per 1-11.1(5) shall be marked in a permanent manner such as 1/2 inch diameter rebar 24 inches in length, durable metal plugs or caps, tack in lead, etc., and permanently marked or tagged with the surveyor's identification number. The specific nature of the marker used can be determined by the surveyor at the time of installation. 1-11.2(2) Monuments Monuments per 1-11.1(5) shall meet the requirements as set forth in City of Renton Standard Plans page H031 and permanently marked or tagged with the surveyor's identification number. 1-11.2(3) Monument Case and Cover Materials shall meet the requirements of Section 9-22 and City of Renton Standard Plans page H031. 2-01 CLEARING, GRUBBING, AND ROADSIDE CLEANUP 2-01.1 Description Section 2-01.1 is supplemented as follows: (******) The limits of clearing and grubbing (construction limits) shall be defined as being the construction limit lines as shown in the Plans. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, any trees abutting or adjacent to the limits of clearing and grubbing are damaged and require removal, the Contractor shall remove such trees. Any trees flagged by the Engineer to remain within the clearing and grubbing limits shall be left undamaged by the Contractor’s operations. Any flagged trees, which are damaged, shall be replaced in kind at the Contractor’s expense. Existing landscaping outside the construction limits, including but not limited to, sod, rockeries, beauty bark, decorative gravel or rock, bushes, and shrubbery shall be protected from damage. The property owners shall be responsible for removing and/or relocating irrigation equipment, trees, shrubs, curbing, ornamental plants, and any other decorative landscaping materials within the construction limits that they wish to save. The Contractor shall give property owners 10 days’ written notice prior to removing landscaping materials. All landscaping materials that remain in the construction limits after that time period shall be removed and disposed of, by the Contractor, in accordance with Section 2-01 of the Standard Specifications, these Special Provisions, and the Plans. The Contractor shall receive approval from the Engineer prior to removal. 2-01.2 Disposal of Usable Material and Debris Section 2-01.2 is supplemented as follows: (******) The Contractor shall dispose of all debris by Disposal Method No. 2 – Waste Site. 07/05/2018 65 2-01.5 Payment Section 2-01.5 is supplemented as follows: (******) The lump sum price for “Clearing and Grubbing” shall be full compensation for all Work described herein and shown in the Plans, including removing trees and shrubbery where shown in the Plans and directed by the Engineer. 2-02 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURE AND OBSTRUCTIONS 2-02.3(3) Removal of Pavement, Sidewalks, and Curbs Section 2-02.3(3) is revised and supplemented as follows: (******) Item “1” is revised as follows: In removing pavement, sidewalks, driveways, and curbs, the Contractor shall haul broken-up pieces to some off-project site. The section is supplemented as follows: When an area where pavement, sidewalk, or driveway has been removed is to be opened to traffic before pavement patching has been completed, temporary mix asphalt concrete patch shall be required. Temporary patching shall be placed to a minimum depth of 2 inches immediately after backfilling and compaction are complete, and before the road is opened to traffic. MC cold mix or MC hot mix shall be used at the discretion of the Engineer. 2-02.4 Measurement Section 2-02.4 replaces the existing vacant section: (******) Sawcutting existing cement and asphalt concrete pavements shall be measured by the linear foot along the sawcut, full depth. Wheel cutting of pavement will not be measured for separate payment, but shall be included in other items of Work. 2-02.5 Payment Section 2-02.5 is supplemented by adding: (******) "Saw Cutting", per lineal foot. "Remove Sidewalk", per square yard. "Remove Curb and Gutter", per lineal foot. "Cold Mix", per ton "Remove Asphalt Concrete Pavement," per square yard. "Remove Cement Concrete pavement," per square yard. "Remove existing ___________," per ___________. All costs related to the removal and disposal of structures and obstructions including saw cutting, excavation, backfilling, and temporary asphalt shall be considered incidental to and included in other items unless designated as specific bid items in the proposal. If pavements, sidewalks, or curbs lie within an excavation area and are not mentioned as separate pay items, their removal will be paid for as part of the quantity removed in excavation. If they are mentioned as a separate item in the proposal, they will be measured and paid for as provided under Section 2-02.5, and will not be included in the quantity calculated for excavation. 2-03 ROADWAY EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT 2-03.3 Construction Requirements Section 2-03.3 is supplemented by adding the following: (******) Roadway excavation shall include the removal of all materials excavated from within the limits shown on the Plans. Suitable excavated material shall be used for embankments, while surplus excavated material or unsuitable material shall be disposed of by the Contractor. 07/05/2018 66 Earthwork quantities and changes will be computed, either manually or by means of electronic data processing equipment, by use of the average end area method. Any changes to the proposed Work as directed by the Engineer that would alter these quantities shall be calculated by the Engineer and submitted to the Contractor for his review and verification. Any excavation or embankment beyond the limits indicated in the Plans, unless ordered by the Engineer, shall not be paid for. All Work and material required to return these areas to their original conditions, as directed by the Engineer, shall be provided by the Contractor at his sole expense. All areas shall be excavated, filled, and/or backfilled as necessary to comply with the grades shown on the Plans. In filled and backfilled areas, fine grading shall begin during the placement and the compaction of the final layer. In cut sections, fine grading shall begin within the final six (6) inches of cut. Final grading shall produce a surface, which is smooth and even, without abrupt changes in grade. Excavation for curbs and gutters shall be accomplished by cutting accurately to the cross sections, grades and elevations shown. Care shall be taken not to excavate below the specified grades. The Contractor shall maintain all excavations free from detrimental quantities of leaves, brush, sticks, trash, and other debris until final acceptance of the Work. Following removal of topsoil or excavation to grade, and before placement of fills or base course, the subgrade under the roadway shall be proof-rolled to identify any soft or loose areas which may warrant additional compaction or excavation and replacement. The Contractor shall provide temporary drainage or protection to keep the subgrade free from standing water. Acceptable excavated native soils shall be used for fill in the area requiring fills. Care shall be taken to place excavated material at the optimum moisture content to achieve the specified compaction. Any native material used for fill shall be free of organics and debris, and have a maximum particle size of 6 inches. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to prevent the native materials from becoming saturated with water. The measures may include sloping to drain, compacting the native materials, and diverting runoff away from the materials. If the Contractor fails to take such preventative measures, any costs or delay related to drying the materials shall be at his own expense. If the native materials become saturated, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to dry the materials, to the optimum moisture content. If sufficient acceptable native soils are not available to complete construction of the roadway embankment, Gravel Borrow shall be used. If subgrade trimmer is not required on the project, all portions of Section 2-03 shall apply as though a subgrade trimmer were specified. If sufficient acceptable native soils, as determined by the Engineer, are not available to complete construction of the roadway embankment, Gravel Borrow meeting the requirements of Section 9- 03.14 of the Standard Specifications, shall be used. 2-03.4 Measurement Section 2-03.4 is supplemented by adding the following: (******) At the discretion of the Engineer, roadway excavation, borrow excavation, and unsuitable foundation excavation - by the cubic yard (adjusted for swell) may be measured by truck in the hauling vehicle at the point of loading. The Contractor shall provide truck tickets for each load removed. Each ticket shall have the truck number, time and date, and be approved by the Engineer. 07/05/2018 67 2-03.5 Payment Section 2-03.5 is revised as follows: (******) Payment for embankment compaction will not be made as a separate item. All costs for embankment compaction shall be included in other bid items involved. Payment will be made for the following bid items when they are included in the proposal: “Roadway Excavation Including Haul,” per cubic yard “Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material,” per ton “Gravel Borrow Including Haul,” per ton “Roadway Excavation Including Haul” shall be considered incidental and part of the bid item(s) provided for the installation of the utility mains and appurtenances. When the Engineer orders excavation below subgrade, then payment will be in accordance with the item “Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material”. In this case, all items of Work other than roadway excavation shall be paid at unit contract prices. The unit contract price per cubic yard for “Roadway Excavation Including Haul” shall be full pay for excavating, loading, placing, or otherwise disposing of the material. The unit contract price per ton for “Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material” shall be full pay for excavating, loading, and disposing of the material. Payment for embankment compaction will not be made as a separate item. All costs for embankment compaction shall be included in other bid items involved. 2-04 HAUL 2-04.5 Payment Section 2-04.5 is revised and supplemented as follows: (******) All costs for the hauling of material to, from, or on the job site shall be considered incidental to and included in the unit price of other units of Work. 2-06 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 2-06.5 Measurement and Payment Section 2-06.5 is supplemented by adding the following: (******) Subgrade preparation and maintenance including watering shall be considered as incidental to the construction and all costs thereof shall be included in the appropriate unit or lump sum contract bid prices. 2-09 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION 2-09.1 Description Section 2-09.1 is supplemented by adding the following: (******) This Work also includes the excavation, haul, and disposal of all unsuitable materials such as peat, muck, swampy or unsuitable materials, including buried logs and stumps. 2-09.3(1)D Disposal of Excavated Material Section 2-09.3(1)D is revised as follows: (******) The second paragraph is replaced with: All costs for disposing of excavated material within or external to the project limits shall be included 07/05/2018 68 in the unit contract price for structure excavation, Class A or B. The third paragraph is replaced with: If the Contract includes structure excavation, Class A or B, including haul, the unit contract price shall include all costs for loading and hauling the material the full required distance, otherwise all such disposal costs shall be considered incidental to the Work. 2-09.4 Measurement Section 2-09.4 is revised and supplemented as follows: (******)… Gravel backfill. Gravel backfill, except when used as bedding for culvert, storm sewer, sanitary sewer, manholes, and catch basins, will be measured by the cubic yard in place determined by the neat lines required by the Plans or by the ton as measured in conformance with Section 1-09.2. … 2-09.5 Payment Section 2-09.5 is revised and supplemented as follows: (******) Payment will be made for the following bid items when they are included in the proposal: “Structure Excavation Class A”, per cubic yard. “Structure Excavation Class B”, per cubic yard. “Structure Excavation Class A Incl. Haul”, per cubic yard. “Structure Excavation Class B Incl. Haul”, per cubic yard. Payment for reconstruction of surfacing and paving, within the limits of structure excavation, will be at the applicable unit prices for the items involved. If the Engineer orders the Contractor to excavate below the elevations shown in the Plans, the unit contract price per cubic yard for “Structure Excavation Class A or B” will apply. But if the Contractor excavates deeper than the Plans or the Engineer requires, the Contracting Agency will not pay for material removed from below the required elevations. In this case, the Contractor, at no expense to the Contracting Agency, shall replace such material with concrete or other material the Engineer approves. The unit contract price per cubic yard for the bid items listed as 1 through 4 above shall be full pay for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and pumping, or shall be included in the unit bid price of other items of Work if "Structure Excavation" or "Structure Excavation Incl Haul" are not listed as pay items in the Contract. “Shoring or Extra Excavation Class B”, per square foot. The unit contract price per square foot shall be full pay for all excavation, backfill, compaction, and other Work required when extra excavation is used in lieu of constructing shoring. If select backfill material is required for backfilling within the limits of the structure excavation, it shall also be required as backfill material for the extra excavation at the Contractor’s expense. Any excavation or backfill material being paid by unit price shall be calculated by the Engineer only for the neat line measurement of the excavation and shall not include the extra excavation beyond the neat line. If there is no bid item for shoring or extra excavation Class B on a square foot basis and the nature of the excavation is such that shoring or extra excavation is required as determined by the Engineer, then shoring or extra excavation shall be considered incidental to the Work involved and no further compensation shall be made. “Gravel Backfill (Kind) for (Type of Excavation)”, per cubic yard or per ton. “Controlled Density Fill”, per cubic yard. When gravel backfill is paid by the ton, the Contractor shall take care to assure to the satisfaction of the Engineer that such per ton backfill is only being used for the specified purpose and not for purposes where backfill is incidental or being paid by cubic yard. Evidence that per ton gravel backfill is not being used for its designated purpose shall be grounds for the Engineer to deny payment for such load tickets. 07/05/2018 69 5-04 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 5-04.2 Materials Section 5-04.2 is revised and supplemented as follows: (******) Delete the second and fourth paragraphs of this section. The base course shall be untreated crushed surfacing. Asphalt concrete shall meet the grading requirements for the specified mix. Temporary patch shall be cold or hot mix. 5-04.3 Construction Requirements Section 5-04.3 is supplemented as follows: (******) Shoulder Restoration The existing surfacing of disturbed asphalt shoulders shall be removed to a minimum depth of 6 inches below original street grade to provide for placement of the new subgrade and paving. The subgrade shall be constructed of 1¼ inch minus crushed surfacing base course placed to a compacted thickness of 2½ inches, followed by 5/8-inch minus crushed surfacing top course placed to a compacted thickness of 1½ inches. HMA Class ½” shall then be placed and compacted in 2-inch lifts up to a maximum 4-inch thickness to match existing pavement thickness. Minimum thickness shall be 2 inches. The shoulder shall be replaced to the existing fog line in areas where the existing asphalt shoulder is seriously disturbed, or at the Engineer’s discretion. Asphalt Concrete Patching and Overlay The Contractor shall maintain temporary hot mix asphalt patches daily during construction to the satisfaction of the governing road agency and the Engineer until said patch is replaced with a permanent hot patch. The permanent hot mix asphalt patch shall be placed and sealed with paving grade asphalt within 30 calendar days. Private Driveways Where a private driveway is damaged by either construction of the project or by the Contractor’s use and activity on the road, it shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the property owner, the City, and to its original condition or better. Damaged asphalt-concrete driveways shall be replaced by saw cutting to a straight line and replacing a full width section. Damaged cement-concrete driveways shall be removed to the nearest joint (real or dummy) and replaced with a full width section. Damaged gravel driveways shall have crushed surfacing placed and compacted to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Curbs, Gutters and Sidewalks Existing curbs, gutters, and sidewalks damaged by construction of the project or the Contractor’s use and activity, shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the property owner, the City, and to its original condition or better. 5-04.3(5) Conditioning the Existing Surface Section 5-04.3(5) is supplemented as follows: (*****) The Contractor shall maintain existing surface contour during patching, unless otherwise instructed 07/05/2018 70 by the City Engineer or Inspector. 5-04.3(5)A Preparation of Existing Surface Section 5-04.3(5)A is supplemented as follows: (*****) The Contractor shall provide his own mechanical sweeping equipment. The sweeper will be on the project prior to the start of paving, to insure the streets to be paved are clean before the tack coat is applied. The sweeper will keep the streets clean ahead of the paving machine and clean the streets behind the empty trucks that have dumped their loads into the paving machine. The sweeper must sweep all streets made dirty by the Contractor’s equipment. If the paving machine is “walked” from one site to another, the sweeper must sweep up behind paving machine. The sweeper shall not leave the overlay site until given permission by the City’s inspector. All utilities shall be painted with a biodegradable “soap” to prevent the tack and ACP from sticking to the lids. Diesel will not be used. After the application of soap, catch basins must be covered to prevent tack and ACP from getting into catch basins. Preparation of existing surface shall be done as outlined in this Section and a tack coat shall be applied at the rate of 0.02 to 0.08 gallons per square yard. Payment for preparation of the surface and application of the tack coat shall be considered incidental to the paving and no separate payment shall be made. The Contractor shall locate all utilities for access immediately after any paving and mark the location by means of painting a circle around the location and scooping a portion of asphalt 4” - 6” in diameter and the depth of the overlay from the center of the utility location. The Contractor shall locate and completely expose gas and water valves for access immediately after final rolling. The day following the start of application of ACP, utility adjustments must begin. The Contractor shall have an adjustment crew adjusting utilities every workable working day until adjustments are complete. During the adjustment of any utility, existing concrete bricks or grouting material that has been broken or cracked shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. Utility adjustments must be completed within 15 working days after overlay is complete, and within the specified working days. Payment for utility adjustments includes all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary to complete the adjustments and is incidental to pay items for Asphalt Patch and Asphalt Overlay. 5-04.3(7)A Mix Design Item 2 is deleted and replaced with: (*****) 2. Nonstatistical HMA Evaluation. The Contractor shall submit a certification that the mix design submitted meets the requirements of Sections 9-03.8(2) and 9-03.8(6). The Contractor must submit the mix design using DOT Form 350-042 EF. Verification of the mix 07/05/2018 71 design by the Contracting Agency is not needed. The Project Engineer will determine anti- strip requirements for the HMA. The mix design will be the initial job mix formula (JMF) for the class of mix. Any additional adjustments to the JMF will require the approval of the Project Engineer and may be made per Section 9-03.8(7). 5-04.3(8)A Acceptance Sampling and Testing—HMA Mixture Item 1 is deleted and replaced with: (*****) 1. General. Acceptance of HMA shall be as provided under nonstatistical or commercial evaluation. Nonstatistical evaluation will be used for the acceptance of HMA. Commercial evaluation will be used for Commercial HMA, and for other classes of HMA in the following applications: sidewalks, road approaches, ditches, slopes, paths, trails, gores, prelevel, and pavement repair. Other nonstructural applications as approved by the Project Engineer. Sampling and testing of HMA accepted by commercial evaluation will be at the option of the Engineer. The proposal quantity of HMA that is accepted by commercial evaluation will be excluded from the quantities used in the determination of nonstatistical evaluation. Item 7 is deleted. 5-04.3(10)B Control Replace Section 5-04.3(10)B with the following: (*****) Sub-base shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum density by the Modified Proctor Test Method, ASTM D 1557. Compact asphalt concrete patch and paving to 95% of maximum compaction. 5-04.5 Payment 5-04.5(1)A Price Adjustments for Quality of HMA Mixture Section is deleted and replaced with: (*****) Statistical analysis of quality of gradation and asphalt content will be performed based on Section 1-06.2 using the following price adjustment factors: Table of Price Adjustment Factors Constituent Factor “f” All aggregate passing: 1 ½”, 1”, ¾”, ½”, 3/8” and No. 4 sieves 2 All aggregate passing No. 8, No 16, No. 30, No. 50, No. 100 3 All aggregate passing No. 200 sieve 20 Asphalt binder 52 A pay factor will be calculated for sieves listed in Section 9-03.8(7) for the class of HMA and for the asphalt binder. 07/05/2018 72 1. Nonstatistical Evaluation. Each lot of HMA produced under Nonstatistical Evaluation and having all constituents falling within the tolerance limits of the job mix formula shall be accepted at the unit contract price with no further evaluation. When one or more constituents fall outside the nonstatistical acceptance tolerance limits in Section 9-03.8(7), the lot shall be evaluated in accordance with Section 1-06.2 to determine the appropriate CPF. The nonstatistical tolerance limits will be used in the calculation of the CPF and the maximum CPF shall be 1.00. When less than three sublots exist, backup samples of the existing sublots or samples from the street shall be tested to provide a minimum of three sets of results for evaluation. 2. Commercial Evaluation. If sampled and tested, HMA produced under Commercial Evaluation and having all constituents falling within the tolerance limits of the job mix formula shall be accepted at the unit contract price with no further evaluation. When one or more constituents fall outside the commercial acceptance tolerance limits in Section 9-03.8(7), the lot shall be evaluated to determine the appropriate CPF. The commercial tolerance limits will be used in the calculation of the CPF and the maximum CPF shall be 1.00. When less than three sublots exist, backup samples of the existing sublots or samples from the street shall be tested to provide a minimum of three sets of results for evaluation. For each lot of HMA produced under Nonstatistical or Commercial Evaluation when the calculated CPF is less than 1.00, a Nonconforming Mix factor (NCFM) will be determined. THE NCFM equals the algebraic difference of CPF minus 1.00 multiplied by 60 percent. The Job Mix Compliance Price Adjustment will be calculated as the product of the NCMF, the quantity of HMA in the lot in tons, and the unit contract price per ton of the mix. If a constituent is not measured in accordance with these Specifications, its individual pay factor will be considered 1.00 in calculating the composite pay factor. 5-04.5(1)B Price Adjustments for Quality of HMA Compaction Section is deleted and replaced with: (*****) The maximum CPF of a compaction lot is 1.00 For each compaction lot of HMA when the CPF is less than 1.00, a Nonconforming Compaction Factor (NCCF) will be determined. THE NCCF equals the algebraic difference of CPF minus 1.00 multiplied by 40 percent. The Compaction Price Adjustment will be calculated as the product of the NCFF, the quantity of HMA in the lot in tons and the unit contract price per ton of the mix. 5-06 TEMPORARY RESTORATION IN PAVEMENT AREA Section 5-06 is new Section with subsections: (******) 5-06.1 Description Pavement areas that have been removed by construction activities must be restored by the Contractor prior to the end of each working period, prior to use by vehicular traffic. Within paved streets, the Contractor may use temporary pavement to allow vehicular traffic to travel over the construction areas. Temporary pavement shall be placed around trench plates or others devices used to cover construction activities in a manner that provides a smooth and safe transition between 07/05/2018 73 surfaces. 5-06.2 Materials The asphalt pavement for temporary patches shall be 2” of a hot mix or cold mix asphalt composition determined by the Contractor to provide a product suitable for the intended application. The Contractor shall not use materials that are a safety or health hazard. Temporary pavement material that does not form a consolidated surface after compaction shall be considered unsuitable and shall be removed from the site. Unsuitable temporary pavement shall be disposed of offsite. 5-06.3 Construction Requirements The Contractor shall maintain temporary hot mix asphalt patches daily during to the satisfaction of the governing road agency and the Engineer until said patch is replaced with permanent hot patch. The completed pavement shall be free from ridges, ruts, bumps, depressions, objectionable marks, or other irregularities. The permanent hot mix asphalt patch shall be placed and sealed with a paving asphalt within 30 calendar days. The Contractor shall immediately repair, patch, or remove any temporary pavement that does not provide a flat transition between existing pavement areas. All temporary asphalt pavement shall be removed from the site by the end of the project and shall not be used as permanent asphalt pavement or subgrade material. 7-01 DRAINS 7-01.2 Materials The second paragraph of Section 7-01.2 is revised as follows: (******) Drain pipes may be concrete, zinc coated (galvanized) corrugated iron with Asphalt Treatment I, aluminum coated (aluminized) corrugated iron with Asphalt Treatment I, zinc coated (galvanized) steel with Asphalt Treatment I, corrugated aluminum alloy, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), or corrugated polyethylene (PE) at the option of the Contractor unless the Plans specify the type to be used. 7-01.3 Construction Requirements Section 7-01.3 is revised as follows: (******) The second paragraph is revised as follows: PVC drainpipe shall be jointed with a bell and spigot joint using a flexible elastomeric seal as described in Section 9-04.8. The bell shall be laid upstream. PE or ABS drainpipe shall be jointed with snap-on, screw-on, or wraparound coupling bands as recommended by the manufacturer of the tubing. The sixth paragraph is revised as follows: PVC under drain pipe shall be jointed using either the flexible elastomeric seal as described in Section 9-04.8 or solvent cement as described in Section 9-04.9, at the option of the Contractor unless otherwise specified in the Plans. The bell shall be laid upstream. PE or ABS drainage tubing under drain pipe shall be jointed with snap-on, screw-on, or wraparound coupling bands, as recommended by the manufacturer of the tubing. 7-01.4 Measurement Section 7-01.4 is supplemented adding the following: (******) 07/05/2018 74 When the Contract does not include "Structure Excavation Class B" or "Structure Excavation Class B Including Haul" as a pay item all costs associated with these items shall be included in other contract pay items. 7-02 CULVERTS 7-02.2 Materials The second paragraph of Section 7-02.2 is revised and supplemented as follows: (******) Where steel or aluminum are referred to in this section in regard to a kind of culvert pipe, pipe arch, or end sections, it shall be understood that steel is zinc coated (galvanized) with Asphalt Treatment I or aluminum coated (aluminized) corrugated iron or steel, and aluminum is corrugated aluminum alloy as specified in Sections 9-05.4 and 9-05.5. Where plain or reinforced concrete, steel, or aluminum are referred to in Section 7-02 it shall be understood that reference is also made to PVC. 7-04 STORM SEWERS 7-04.2 Materials The first paragraph of Section 7-04.2 is revised as follows: (******) Unless a pipe material is specifically called out on the Plans, materials shall meet the following requirements. Size Pipe Material Allowed Specification 6-12” Polypropylene Storm Sewer Pipe Ductile Iron Pipe Corrugated Polyethylene Storm Sewer Pipe (CPEP) 9-05.24(2) 9-05-13 9-05.20 Where bends are specifically called out on the plans, they shall be of the same material and manufacturer as the main pipe and meet the manufacturer’s recommendations. The second paragraph of Section 7-04.2 is supplemented as follows: (******) The Contractor shall require pipe suppliers to furnish certificates signed by their authorized representative, stating the specifications to which the materials or products were manufactured. The Contractor shall provide 2 copies of these certifications to the Engineer for approval. Certificates showing nonconformance with the Contract shall be sufficient evidence for rejection. Approval of certificates shall be considered only as tentative acceptance of the materials and products, and such action by Engineer will not relieve Contractor of his/her responsibility to perform field tests and to replace or repair faulty materials, equipment, and/or workmanship and Contractor’s own expense. Section 7-04.2 is supplemented with the following: (******) Dense foam shall meet 9-05.52 of these Special Provisions. Direct Pipe Tee Connections: Direct pipe tee connections for use in gravity-flow sewer and storm drainage direct connections to pipe shall be Inserta Tee service connections, as manufactured by Inserta Tee and shall meet ASTM F2946 and consist of a PVC hub, rubber sleeve, and stainless steel band. Connection shall be a 07/05/2018 75 compression fit into the cored wall of a mainline pipe. Hub shall be made from heavy-duty PVC material. Stainless steel clamping assembly shall be of SS #301 for the band and housing and SS #305 for screws. Rubber sleeve and gasket, when applicable, shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477. Gaskets shall be installed by the manufacturer. A water-based solution provided by the manufacturer shall be used during assembly. Inserta Tee product shall provide a water connection according to the requirements of ASTM D3212. Section 7-04.2(2) Temporary Stormwater Diversion Section 7-04.2(2) is an added new section (******) It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to maintain operation of the existing storm sewer system throughout the duration of the project without any disruption of service until the new storm drain has been accepted by the City to receive stormwater flows, and connections are made between the existing and new storm based on scheduling approved by the Engineer. A temporary stormwater diversion shall be capable of bypassing at least the 2-year peak flow during construction. The 2-year peak flow at various locations in the project area is provided below:  Intersection of S 9th St and Renton Ave S: 2.1 cfs  Intersection of S 7th St and Cedar Ave S: 1.2 cfs  Renton Ave S, north of Beacon Way S: 4.4 cfs The Contractor shall submit proposed methods for providing the diversions to the Engineer for approval prior to construction. The diversions shall have the least impact on property owners and traffic flow through the site. The diversions shall be installed, operated, and maintained only when needed where the existing storm drain system must be demolished to allow construction of the new system. Where shown on the Plans, Contractor shall time work of bypasses during period of anticipated no or little rain. If bypass pumping is provided, it shall be scheduled for continuous operation with backup equipment available at all times for periods of maintenance and refueling or failure of the primary bypass pump(s) or diversion system. The Contractor’s bypass operation shall be sized to handle, at a minimum, the flow rates specified above, or can be reduced to a size determined by the Contractor if the temporary bypass can be timed to coincide with a period of little to no rain. The Contractor shall submit a Temporary Stormwater Diversion Plan in accordance with Section 1-05. The Contractor’s plan shall be reviewed by the City before the plan is implemented. The review of the flow diversion plan shall, as well as the Contractor’s proposed size of the bypass, in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to provide a bypass system that conveys encountered flows without property damage or damage to the project or construction area. As risk associated with sizing the bypass and impacts to construction is born by the Contractor. 7-04.3(1) Cleaning and Testing Section 7-04.3(1) is supplemented with the following: (******) Before testing begins and in adequate time to obtain approval through submittal process, prepare and submit test plan for approval by Engineer. Include testing procedures, methods, equipment, and 07/05/2018 76 tentative schedule. Obtain advance written approval for any deviations from Drawings and Specifications. Repair, correct, and retest sections of pipe which fail to meet specified requirements when tested. Perform testing as work progresses. Schedule testing so that no more than 1000 linear feet of installed pipeline remains untested at one time. Perform testing under observation of Engineer or Inspector. Schedule testing during no rain. Plug the lower end of the pipe if needed to test pipe. All pipe larger than 30-inch diameter shall have joints individually tested for Joint Tightness. Prior to final backfill, all joints shall be individually tested using low-pressure air per ASTM C1103. For the installation of any flexible pipe larger than 30-inches in diameter, the Contractor shall retain the services of a pipe manufacturer representative, knowledgeable in the installation methods and practices for the specific pipe product used on this project, as well as on the installation practices for flexible pipelines in general. The manufacturer’s representative shall be present full time on site during the construction of the first 300 feet of pipe installation, and part-time, as required, thereafter until the entire pipeline installation is complete. The manufacturer’s representative shall observe pipe foundation, pipe installation, placement and compaction of pipe zone bedding and backfill, and testing procedures. The manufacturer’s representative shall notify Engineer and Contractor of any non-conforming installation, identifying the manufacturer recommended corrective action(s), within 24 hours of such occurrence. All flexible pipe shall be tested for maximum pipe deflection by pulling a rigid mandrel through the entire (i.e., 100%) flexible pipe length installed. Maximum deflection shall not exceed 5%. Mandrel testing shall conform to ASTM D3034, and be performed no sooner than 30 days after backfilling and prior to final acceptance testing of the segment. Submit test results to the Engineer. 1. Rigid mandrel shall have outside diameter (O.D.) equal to 95 percent of inside diameter (I.D.) of pipe. Inside diameter of pipe, for purpose of determining outside diameter of mandrel, shall be average outside diameter minus two minimum wall thicknesses for O.D. controlled pipe and average inside diameter for I.D. controlled pipe, dimensions shall be per appropriate standard. Statistical or other "tolerance packages" shall not be considered in mandrel sizing. 2. Rigid mandrel shall be constructed of metal or rigid plastic material that can withstand 200 psi without being deformed. Mandrel shall have nine or more "runners" or "legs" as long as total number of legs is odd number. Barrel section of mandrel shall have length of at least 75 percent of inside diameter of pipe. Rigid mandrel shall not have adjustable or collapsible legs which would allow reduction in mandrel diameter during testing. Provide and use proving ring for modifying each size mandrel. 3. Furnish "proving ring" with each mandrel. Fabricate ring of 1/2-inch-thick, 3-inch-wide bar steel to diameter 0.02 inches larger than approved mandrel diameter. 4. If a rigid mandrel is not available, the Contractor may substitute a round steel bar meeting #3 above. “Testing Storm Sewer Pipe”, per linear foot shall be incidental to and included in storm sewer pipe bid items. 7-04.3(1)G Abandon Existing Storm Sewer Pipes Section 7-04.3(1)G is a new section: (******) Where it is shown on the plans that existing storm sewer pipe is to be abandoned by filling with grout, all abandonment of storm drain lines shall conform to Section 7-17.3(2)I. 07/05/2018 77 7-04.3(2) CCTV Inspection Section 7-04.3(2)is a new added section: (******) All storm drain main lines constructed as part of this project shall be inspected by the use of closed- circuit television (CCTV) before substantial completion. The costs incurred in making the inspection shall be paid for under “CCTV Inspection”. All CCTV inspections for storm drain lines shall conform to Section 7-17.3(2)H. 7-04.3(3) Direct Pipe Connections Section 7-04.3(4) is a new added section as follows: (******) Field Pipe and Joint Performance: To assure water tightness, field performance verification may be accomplished by testing in accordance with ASTM F2487, ASTM F1417 or ASTM C1103. Appropriate safety precautions must be used when field-testing any pipe material. Contact the manufacturer for recommended leakage rates. Installation: Installation shall be accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended installation guidelines. Backfill around the Inserta Tee service connection shall be, at a minimum, of the same material type and compaction level as specified for the mainline pipe installation. 7-05 MANHOLES, INLETS, AND CATCH BASINS 7-05.3 Construction Requirements Section 7-05.3 is supplemented by adding the following: (******) All manholes shall have eccentric cones and shall have ladders. Connection to manholes or catch basins for storm sewer pipe less than 24-inch shall be “Kor-n-Seal” boot or approved equal. Sanitary sewer pipe to sanitary sewer manhole connections shall be “Kor-n-Seal” boot or approved equal. 7-05.3(1) Adjusting Manholes and Catch Basins to Grade Section 7-05.3(1) is replaced with: (******) Where shown in the Plans or where directed by the Engineer, the existing manholes, catch basins, or inlets shall be adjusted to the grade as staked or otherwise designated by the Engineer. The existing cast iron ring and cover on manholes and the catch basin frame and grate shall first be removed and thoroughly cleaned for reinstalling at the new elevation. From that point, the existing structure shall be raised or lowered to the required elevation. The Contractor shall construct manholes so as to provide adjustment space for setting cover and casting to a finished grade as shown on the Construction Plans. Manhole ring and covers shall be adjusted to the finished elevations per standard detail 106 prior to final acceptance of the Work. Manholes in unimproved areas shall be adjusted to 6” above grade. In unpaved streets: manholes, catch basins, and similar structures in areas to be surfaced with crushed rock or gravel shall be constructed to a point approximately eight inches below the subgrade and covered with a temporary wood cover. Existing manholes shall be cut off and covered in a similar manner. The Contractor shall carefully reference each manhole so that they may be easily found upon completion of the street Work. After placing the gravel or crushed stone 07/05/2018 78 surfacing, the manholes and manhole castings shall be constructed to the finished grade of the roadway surface. Excavation necessary for bringing manholes to grade shall center about the manhole and be held to the minimum area necessary. At the completion of the manhole adjustment, the void around the manhole shall be backfilled with materials which result in the section required on the typical roadway section, and be thoroughly compacted. In cement concrete pavement: manholes, catch basins, and similar structures shall be constructed and adjusted in the same manner as outlined above except that the final adjustment shall be made and cast iron frame be set after forms have been placed and checked. In placing the concrete pavement, extreme care shall be taken not to alter the position of the casting in any way. In asphalt concrete pavement: manholes shall not be adjusted until the pavement is completed, at which time the center of each manhole shall be carefully relocated from references previously established by the Contractor. The manhole shall then be brought to proper grade utilizing the same methods of construction as for the manhole itself. The cast iron frame shall be placed on the concrete grade rings and mortar. The complete patch shall match the existing paved surface for texture, density, and uniformity of grade. The joint between the patch and the existing pavement shall then be carefully painted with hot asphalt cement or asphalt emulsion and shall be immediately covered with dry paving sand before the asphalt cement solidifies. Adjustment of inlets: The final alignment and grade of cast iron frames for new and old inlets to be adjusted to grade will be established from the forms or adjacent pavement surfaces. The final adjustment of the top of the inlet will be performed in similar manner to the above for manholes. On asphalt concrete paving projects using curb and gutter section, that portion of the cast iron frame not embedded in the gutter section shall be solidly embedded in asphalt also. The concrete shall extend a minimum of six inches beyond the edge of the casting and shall be left 2 inches below the top of the frame so that the wearing course of asphalt concrete pavement will butt the cast iron frame. The existing concrete pavement and edge of the casting shall be painted with hot asphalt cement. Adjustments in the inlet structure shall be constructed in the same manner and of the same material as that required for new inlets. The inside of the inlets shall be mortared. Monuments and cast iron frame and cover: monuments and monument castings shall be adjusted to grade in the same manner as for manholes. Valve box castings: adjustments of valve box castings shall be made in the same manner as for manholes. 7-05.3(2) Abandon Existing Manholes Section 7-05.3(2) is revised as follows: (******) Where it is required that an existing manhole be abandoned, the structure shall be broken down to a depth of at least 4 feet below the revised surface elevation, all connections plugged, the manhole base shall be fractured to prevent standing water, and the manhole filled with sand and compacted to 90 percent density as specified in Section 2-03.3(14)C. Debris resulting from breaking the upper part of the manhole may be mixed with the sand subject to the approval of the Engineer. The ring and cover shall be salvaged and all other surplus material disposed of. 7-05.3(3) Connections to Existing Manholes Section 7-05.3(3) is supplemented by adding the following: (******) Where shown on the Plans, new drain pipes shall be connected to existing line, catch basin, curb inlets and/or manholes. The Contractor shall be required to core drill into the structure, shape the 07/05/2018 79 new pipe to fit and re-grout the opening in a workmanlike manner. Where directed by the Engineer or where shown on the Plans, additional structure channeling will be required. Connections to existing sanitary sewer manholes shall be core drilled. Couplings shall be equal to “Kor-n-Seal” boots. Existing sanitary sewer manholes shall be cleaned, repaired, and re-channeled as necessary to match the new pipe configuration and as shown on the Construction Plans. A "connection to existing" item will be allowed at any connection of a new line to an existing structure. No "connection to existing" will be accepted at the location of new installation, relocation and adjustment of line manholes, catch basins, or curb inlets. Any damage to existing pipe or structure that is to remain in place resulting from the Contractor's operations shall be repaired or replaced at her/his own expense. The unit bid price per each shall be full compensation for all labor, materials and equipment required. 7-05.3(5) Manhole Coatings Section 7-05.3(5) is an added new section: (******) All new sanitary sewer manholes shall be coated as specified below. The following coating system Specifications shall be used for coating (sealing) all interior concrete surfaces of sanitary sewer manholes. Coating Material: High Solids Urethane Surfaces: Concrete Surface Preparation: In accordance with SSPC SP-7 (Sweep of brush off blast) Application: Shop/Field The drying time between coats shall not exceed 24 hours in any case System Thickness: 6.0 mils dry film Coatings: Primer: One coat of Wasser MC-Aroshield (2.0 mils DFT) Finish: Two or more coats of Wasser MC-Aroshield (min. 4.0 mils DFT) Color: White 7-06 TRENCH DRAINS (NEW SECTION) Section 7-06 is a new section. (******) 7-06.1 Description This Work consists of the construction of new trench drain in accordance with the plans and specifications. 7-06.2 Materials Trench drain shall be Polydrain PDX 15” wide, or acceptable equal. Trench drain and supporting concrete shall be designed for HS20 loading. Grate shall be either Model #603 or #606 as determined by the City. Submittals: A. Shop Drawings: Show a schematic plan of the total drainage system including fabrication details. Shop drawing shall indicate the number and type of each pre- sloped channels and non pre-sloped channels. 07/05/2018 80 B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog sheets, specifications, and installation instructions for each item specified. C. Samples: Section of trench drain and grate (minimum 6-inch length) D. Product Data: 1. Concrete Design Mix: Submit proposed concrete design mix together with name and location of batching plant at least 28 days prior to the start of concrete work. 2. Portland Cement: Brand and Manufacturer’s name. 3. Air-entraining Admixture: Brand and manufacturer’s name. 4. Water-reducing or High Range Water-reducing Admixture: Brand and manufacturer’s name. 5. Curing and Anti-Spalling Compound: Manufacturer’s specifications and application instructions. 7-06.3 Construction Requirements Cement concrete shall be constructed with air entrained concrete Class 4000 confirming to the requirements of Section 6-02. Applicable requirements for concrete curbs and gutters in Section 8- 4.2 shall apply. Trench drain shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations and product installation procedures. 7-08 GENERAL PIPE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 7-08.3 Construction Requirements 7-08.3(1)A Trenches Section 7-08.3(1)A is supplemented by adding the following: (******) Trench Excavation Incl. Haul includes the trench excavation for the storm sewer, sanitary sewer, and water main construction in accordance with the trench limits outlined on the plan drawings. All trench excavated materials shall be disposed of off-site at an approved Contractor-provided disposal site. Excavation outside the excavation limits shown on the plan drawings shall be at no additional expense to the City. Contaminated Trench Excavation includes the trench excavation of materials characterized as contaminated based on sampling results for the storm sewer, sanitary sewer, and water main construction and in accordance with the trench limits outlined on the plan drawings. This excavated soil shall be managed in accordance with applicable state and federal regulations outlined in the Contract Documents. Handling and disposal of materials shall adhere to all transportation requirements, receive pre-approval from a disposal facility, manifesting, and record keeping, etc., as outlined in the Contractor’s Contaminated Soil and Groundwater Handling and Management Plan . The excavations will require a shoring system to limit the volume of excavation. Excavation outside the trench limits shown on the plan drawings shall be at no additional expense to the City. 7-08.3(1)C Bedding the Pipe Section 7-08.3(1)C is supplemented by adding the following: (******) Pipe bedding for PVC sewer pipe shall consist of clean, granular pea gravel consistent with Section 9- 03.12(3). It shall be placed to a depth of 6" over and 6" under the exterior walls of the pipe. 07/05/2018 81 For all pipe bedding, hand compaction of the bedding materials under the pipe haunches will be required. Pipe bedding should provide a firm uniform cradle for support of the pipes. Prior to installation of the pipe, the pipe bedding should be shaped to fit the lower part of the pipe exterior with reasonable closeness to provide uniform support along the pipe. Hand compaction shall be accomplished by using a suitable tamping tool to firmly tamp bedding material under the haunches of the pipe. Care shall be taken to avoid displacement of the pipe during the compaction effort. Pipe bedding material should be used as pipe zone backfill and placed in layers and tamped around the pipes to obtain complete contact. Bedding material shall meet the requirements of Gravel backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding in accordance with Standard Specification Section 9-03.12(3). Pipe bedding shall be considered incidental to the pipe and no further compensation shall be made. In areas where the subgrade soils in the trench excavation consist of fine-grained soils, such as silt/clay, or organic rich soils, the Engineer may direct the Contractor to use a geotextile separator fabric be placed over the native soils prior to placement of the pipe bedding. The geotextile shall meet the requirements of Section 9-33.2(1) Table 3 for Separation. Geotextile shall be paid for by other items. 7-08.3(1)D Pipe Foundation Section 7-08.3(1)D is a new section: (******) Pipe foundation in poor soil: When soft or unstable material is encountered at the subgrade which, in the opinion of the Engineer, will not uniformly support the pipe, such material shall be excavated to an additional depth as required by the Engineer and backfilled with foundation gravel material placed in maximum 12-inch lifts. Foundation gravel shall be CSBC and conform to the requirements of Section 9-03.9(3) of the Standard Specifications. Corrections faulty grade: Excess excavation below grade shall be backfilled with foundation gravel as specified above and thoroughly compacted to the required grade line. 7-08.3(2)A Survey Line and Grade Section 7-08.3(2)A is replaced with: (******) Survey line and grade control shall be provided in accordance with Sections 1-05.4, 1-05.5 and 1-11 in a manner consistent with accepted practices. The Contractor shall transfer line and grade into the trench where they shall be carried by means of a laser beam. Any other procedure shall have the written approval of the Engineer. 7-08.3(2)B Pipe Laying – General Section 7-08.3(2)B is supplemented by adding the following: (******) Checking of the invert elevation of the pipe may be made by calculations from measurements on the top of the pipe, or by looking for ponding of 1/2" or less, which indicates a satisfactory condition. At manholes, when the downstream pipe(s) is of a larger size, pipe(s) shall be laid by matching the (eight-tenths) flow elevation, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. All pipe, fittings, etc. shall be carefully handled and protected against damage, impact shocks, and free fall. All pipe handling equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Pipe shall not be placed directly on rough ground but shall be supported in a manner, which will protect the pipe against 07/05/2018 82 injury whenever stored at the trench site or elsewhere. No pipe shall be installed where the lining or coating show defects that may be harmful as determined by the Engineer. Such damaged lining or coating shall be repaired, or a new undamaged pipe shall be furnished and installed. The Contractor shall inspect each pipe and fitting prior to installation to insure that there are not damaged portions of the pipe. Any defective, damaged, or unsound pipe shall be repaired or replaced. All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the interior of the pipe before lowering into position in the trench. Pipe shall be kept clean during and after laying. All openings in the pipeline shall be closed with watertight expandable type sewer plugs at the end of each day's operation, or whenever the pipe openings are left unattended. The use of burlap, wood, or other similar temporary plugs will not be permitted. Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstructions or other causes, the Engineer may change the alignment and/or the grades. Except for short runs, which may be permitted by the Engineer, pipes shall be laid uphill on grades that exceed 10 percent. Pipe, which is laid on a downhill grade, shall be blocked and held in place until sufficient support is furnished by the following pipe to prevent movement. Unless otherwise required, all pipe shall be laid straight between the changes in alignment, and at uniform grade between changes in grade. For concrete pipes with elliptical reinforcement, the pipe shall be placed with the minor axis of the reinforcement in a vertical position. Immediately after the pipe joints have been made, proper gasket placement shall be checked with a feeler gage as approved by the pipe manufacturer to verify proper gasket placement. 7-08.3(2)E Rubber Gasketed Joints Section 7-08.3(2)E is supplemented as follows: (******) Care shall be taken by the Contractor to avoid over pushing the pipe and damaging the pipe or joint system. Any damaged pipe shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 7-08.3(2)H Sewer Line Connections Section 7-08.3(2)H is supplemented by adding the following: (******) All connections not occurring at a manhole or catch basin shall be done utilizing pre-manufactured tee connectors or pipe sections approved by the Engineer. Any other method or materials proposed for use in making connections shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, all connections of lateral sewers to existing mains shall be as follows: A. Vitrified Clay Main Cut in new PVC “Tee” using “Strong-Back” Flexible Couplings (Fernco or approved equal). B. Concrete Main Cut in new PVC “Tee” using “Strong-Back” Flexible Couplings (Fernco or approved equal). C. PVC & C900 PVC Main Core-drilled with Romac Saddle (or approved equal) or cut in new “Tee” using “Strong-Back” Flexible Couplings (Fernco or approved equal).. D. Ductile Iron Main Core-drilled with Romac Saddle (or approved equal). Connections (unless booted connections have been provided for) to existing concrete manholes shall be per Section 7-05.3(3). 07/05/2018 83 7-08.3(2)J Placing PVC Pipe Section 7-08.3(2)J is an added new section: (******) In the trench, prepared as specified in Section 7-02.3(1) PVC pipe shall be laid beginning at the lower end, with the bell end upgrade. Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding or Pea Gravel will be used as the bedding material and extend from 6" below the bottom of the pipe to 6" above the top of the pipe. When it is necessary to connect to a structure with a mudded joint a rubber gasketed concrete adapter-collar will be used at the point of connection. 7-08.3(3)A Backfilling Pipe Trenches Section 7-08.3(3)A is a new section supplementing 7-08.3(3) (******) To the maximum extent available, suitable material obtained from trench or pond excavation shall be used for trench backfill. All material placed as trench backfill shall be free from rocks or stones larger than 6 inches in their greatest dimension, brush, stumps, logs, roots, debris, and organic or other deleterious materials. No stones or rock shall be placed in the upper three feet of trench backfill. Rock or stones within the allowable size limit incorporated in the remainder of fills shall be distributed so that they do not congregate or interfere with proper compaction. The existing soils shall not be reused as trench backfill unless otherwise required by the Engineer. Structural fill shall consist of Gravel Borrow, meeting the requirements of Section 9-03.14(1) of the Standard Specifications. It should be free of gravel, organics and other debris. The structural trench backfill should be moisture conditioned to within approximately 3 percent of optimum moisture content, placed in loose horizontal lifts less than 6 inches in thickness, and compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density (MDD) as determined by the Modified Proctor compaction test method ASTM D 1557. Trench backfill shall be densely compacted in a systematic manner using methods that consistently produce adequate compaction levels. During placement of the initial lifts, the trench backfill material shall not be bulldozed into the trench or dropped directly on the pipe. Heavy vibratory equipment shall not permitted to operate directly over the pipe until a minimum of 2 feet of backfill has been placed over the pipe bedding. Contactor shall take special care to obtain good compaction up to the edges of the excavation as the shoring is removed in accordance with the Shoring Plan. The Engineer may be on-site to collect soil samples and to test compaction. The Contractor shall provide site access at all times for compaction testing and sample collection. Areas of the trench which fail to meet the compaction requirements shall be removed and replace and re-compacted at the Contractor’s expense. The Contractor shall be responsible for any settlement of backfill, sub-base, and pavement that may occur during the period stipulated in the Contract conditions. All repairs necessary due to settlement shall be made by the Contractor at his expense. Backfill in unimproved areas shall be compacted to at least 90 percent of maximum dry density as determined by the modified proctor compaction test, ASTM D1557. 07/05/2018 84 The Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of any excess excavated material. Special care must be taken to obtain good compaction up to the edges of the excavation as the shoring is removed. Moreover, attention must be paid to ensuring good compaction around manholes. 7-09 PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR WATER MAINS 7-09.3(15)A Ductile Iron Pipe Section 7-09.3(15) is revised to read as follows: Long radius curves with radius of 400 feet or more, either horizontal or vertical, pipe may be laid with standard pipe lengths by deflecting the joints. If the pipe is shown curved on the Plans and no special fittings are shown, the Contractor can assume that the curves can be made by deflecting the joints with standard lengths of pipe. If shorter lengths are required, the Plans will indicate maximum lengths that can be used. The amount of deflection at each pipe joint when pipe is laid on a horizontal or vertical curve shall not exceed 50% of the manufacturer’s printed recommended deflections. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the pipe manufacturer's joint deflection recommendations prior to pipe installation indicating deflections are within allowable AWWA specification tolerances. Where field conditions require deflection or curves not anticipated by the Plans, the Engineer will determine the methods to be used. No additional payment will be made for laying pipe on curves as shown on the Plans, or for field changes involving standard lengths of pipe deflected at the joints. When special fittings not shown on the Plans are required to meet field conditions, additional payment will be made for special fittings as provided in Section 1-09.6. When rubber gasketed pipe is laid on a curve, the pipe shall be jointed in a straight alignment and then deflected to the curved alignment. Trenches shall be made wider on curves for this purpose. Where pipe installation on curves requires the use of special fittings, concrete blocking shall be used per Section 7-09.3(21). Where restrained joint pipe is installed on a curve, the Contractor shall submit the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations to the Engineer for approval. 7-09.3(15)B Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (4 inches and Over) Section 7-09.3(15)B is supplemented as follows: (******) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe shall not be used for water mains and appurtenances. 7-09.3(17) Laying Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings with Polyethylene Encasement The title and text of section 7-09.3(17) has been revised as follows: (******) The Contractor shall lay ductile iron pipe with a polyethylene encasement. Pipe and polyethylene encasement shall be installed in accordance with AWWA C105. The polyethylene encasement shall also be installed on all appurtenances, such as pipe laterals, couplings, fittings, and valves, with 8-mil polyethylene plastic in accordance with Section 4-5 of ANSI 21.5 or AWWA C105. The polyethylene wrap shall be tube type and black color. Any damage that occurs to the wrap shall be repaired in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5-93. Installation of the polyethylene encasement shall be considered incidental to the installation of the pipe and no additional payment shall be allowed. 07/05/2018 85 7-09.3(19)A Connections to Existing Mains Section 7-09.3(19) is revised to read as follows: The Contractor shall not operate any valve on existing Water Main. The City of Renton Water Operations and Maintenance staff will make all connections to charged water mains and will operate all valves to accomplish shutdowns and subsequent reactivation. The draining of existing water mains will be done by City water maintenance staff. The Contractor shall provide pumping and disposal of the water from the draining of the existing water mains including de- chlorination of the water prior to disposal. Connections to the existing water main shall not be made without first making the necessary scheduling arrangements with the Engineer in advance. The Contractor shall request water main shut- offs for connections of new water mains to existing water mains at least ten (10) working days in advance for each connection. Approval of connections to existing water main is contingent on the Water Main and appurtenances being completely installed, tested, cleaned with polypig, disinfected and flushed per Contract requirements. City’s water operations and maintenance staff will notify in writing all water customers affected by the shut-offs of the water mains at least 48 hours in advance (not including weekends and holidays) of any water shut-offs. The Contractor may be required to perform the connection during times other than normal working hours. Water main shut-offs shall occur during non-holiday weekdays unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. Water main shut-offs shall not occur in the five (5) weekdays preceding or the day after the major holidays listed below: New Year’s Day, Martin Luther King Jr. Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veterans Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day. Due to the needs of various water customers in the project vicinity, water shut-off periods are limited to the times set forth below: Days Hours Monday to Thursday 9:00 AM TO 3:00 PM Friday to Sunday DO NOT SCHEDULE The City of Renton’s Water Maintenance Manager, at his/her sole discretion, may adjust the above shut-off periods in order to address specific project circumstances and customer needs. No water main shutoffs affecting public schools will be allowed during scheduled school hours. The City reserves the right to re-schedule the connection if the work area is not ready at the scheduled time for the connection. Points of connection to existing water mains shall be exposed by hydro excavation or potholing prior to trenching of the new water mains. Before the installation of the new water mains, the Contractor shall field verify, in the presence of the Engineer, the actual location and depth of the existing water mains where new connections will be made to assure proper fit. Care shall be taken not to disturb existing thrust blocks and soil bearing areas. After excavation, the Contractor shall verify the dimensions, type, condition, and roundness of the exposed water main. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer if the connection cannot be made as specified by the Contract Plans in order that the connection detail may be revised. When necessary, the profile shall be adjusted as directed by the Engineer to prevent abrupt changes in grade and alignment of the water main and connection. The Contractor shall provide all saw-cutting, removal and disposal of existing surface improvements, excavation, haul and disposal of unsuitable materials, shoring, de-watering, foundation material, at the connection areas before the scheduled time for the connection by the City. The Contractor shall provide all materials necessary for the City Water Maintenance personnel to install all connections to existing water mains as indicated on the contract plans, including fittings, couplings, pipe spools, shackle materials to complete the connections. 07/05/2018 86 The City Water Operations and Maintenance staff will: a) Deactivate and dewater the existing and new water main to perform the connections. The Contractor shall provide pumping and disposal of the water from the draining of the water mains including de-chlorination. b) Cut, remove and dispose pipe sections as necessary to install the new Materials with Contractor’s assistance c) Swab all connecting pipe and fittings with 5-6%chlorine solution d) Perform the connection work e) Reactivate and flush the Water Main The Contractor shall install the polywrap on all pipe and fittings at the connection points and installed concrete thrust blocks per Contract standard plans and specifications. In addition to those connections shown on the Plans, segments of a new Water Main may be placed in service prior to completion of the new Water Main. All connection between the charged and uncharged segments of the new Water Main, including connection to a new Tapping Tee and Valve will be done by the City of Renton Water Operations and Maintenance staff. Connections to existing water mains which include the cutting of the existing water main for the installation of new in-line tee and valves shall be done in two steps: Step 1: Cut-in of existing water main for installation of in-line tee, valves and appurtenances The Contractor shall provide all materials necessary for the City Water Maintenance personnel to cut the existing water main as indicated on the contract plans for the installation of the in-line tee and valves, including but not limited to the required fittings, couplings, pipe spools, shackle materials to complete the cut-in. After the cut-in of the in-line tee and valves by City personnel, the Contractor shall provide and install concrete blocking and polyethylene encasement behind the tee and other fittings. A minimum 3-day curing period is for all concrete blockings before a connection can be made to the new water mains or new tapping valve. Step 2: Connection of new water main to the above cut-in tee and valves, or to a new tapping valve on existing water mains 7-09.3(21) Concrete Thrust Blocking and Dead-Man Block Concrete thrust blocking shall be placed at bends, tees, dead ends, crosses and on other fittings in conformance to the City of Renton Standards Plans, latest revisions and Contract Plans. Concrete thrust collar and blocking and dead-man thrust blocking shall be installed at locations shown on the plans and shall be in conformance with the Standard Plans and contract Plans. Reinforcement steel shall be Grade 40 or better. Blocking shall be poured in place Ready-Mix Concrete Class 3000 with a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 3,000 psi. Job site mixing, hand-mixed concrete and mobile concrete mixers are not allowed. All fittings to be blocked shall be wrapped with 8-mil polyethylene plastic. Concrete blocking shall bear against solid undisturbed earth at the sides and bottom of the trench excavation and shall be shaped and properly formed with plywood or other acceptable forming materials so as not to obstruct access to the joints of the pipe, bolts or fittings. The forms shall be removed prior to backfilling. Unacceptable concrete blocking shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer at least 1 Working Day advance notice before pouring concrete thrust blocking and 1 Working Day advance notice for inspection and approval of all concrete blocking prior to backfilling. 7-09.3(23) Hydrostatic Pressure Test Section 7-09.3(23) is revised to read as follows: Water main and appurtenances including service connections to the meter setter shall be tested in 07/05/2018 87 sections of convenient length under a hydrostatic pressure equal to 150 psi in excess of that under which they will operate or in no case shall the test pressure be less than 225 psi at the highest point on the water main. Pumps, gauges, plugs, saddles, corporation stops, miscellaneous hose and piping, and measuring equipment necessary for performing the test shall be furnished and operated by the Contractor. The Contractor shall obtain a hydrant meter permit from the City by completing a permit application and making the required security deposits. The Contractor shall use the City’s issued hydrant meter with an attached backflow prevention assembly to draw water from the City’ water system to fill the water mains for poly-pigging, testing, cleaning, disinfection and for subsequent flushing purposes. There will be a charge for the water used for filling, testing, cleaning and disinfection of the water mains. Sections to be tested shall normally be limited to 1,500 feet or less. The Engineer may require that the first section of pipe, not less than 1,000 feet in length, installed by each of the Contractor’s crews, be tested in order to qualify the crew and the materials. Pipe laying shall not be continued more than an additional 1,000 feet until the first section has been tested successfully. The pipeline shall be backfilled sufficiently to prevent movement of the pipe under pressure. Thrust blocks shall be in place and time allowed for the concrete to cure before testing. Where permanent blocking is not required, the Contractor shall furnish and install temporary blocking and remove it after testing. Before applying the specified test pressure, the water main shall be slowly filled and air shall be expelled completely from the pipe, valves and hydrants. If permanent air vents are not located at all high points, the contractor shall install corporation cocks at such points so that the air can be expelled as the line is filled with water. After all the air has been expelled, the corporation cocks shall be closed and the test pressure applied. At the conclusion of the pressure test, the corporation cocks shall be removed and plugged. The Contractor shall perform a leakage test concurrently with the pressure test. The pressure test shall be conducted for a 2-hour period. The test shall be accomplished by pumping the main up to the required pressure, stopping the pump for 2 hours, and then pumping the main up to the test pressure again. During the test, the section being tested shall be observed to detect any visible leakage. A clean container shall be used for holding water for pumping up pressure on the main being tested. This makeup water shall be sterilized by the addition of chlorine to a concentration of 50 mg/l. The acceptability of the pressure test and leakage test will be determined by two factors as follows: 1. The loss in pressure shall not exceed 5 psi during the 2-hour test period. 2. The quantity of water lost from the main and appurtenances shall not exceed the number of gallons during the 2-hour test period as listed in the following table. Allowable leakage in gallons per 1000 ft. of pipeline* for a 2-hour test period Nominal Pipe Diameter in inches Test Pressure in psi 4” 6" 8" 10" 12" 16" 20" 24" 400 0.60 0.90 1.20 1.50 1.80 2.40 3.00 3.60 375 0.58 0.87 1.16 1.45 1.74 2.33 2.91 3.49 350 0.56 0.84 1.12 1.40 1.69 2.25 2.81 3.37 275 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.24 1.49 1.99 2.49 2.99 250 0.47 0.71 0.95 1.19 1.42 1.90 2.37 2.85 225 0.45 0.68 0.90 1.13 1.35 1.80 2.25 2.70 200 0.42 0.64 0.85 1.06 1.28 1.70 2.12 2.55 *If the pipeline under test contains sections of various diameters, the allowable leakage will be the 07/05/2018 88 sum of the computed leakage for each size. For those diameters or pressures not listed, the formula below shall be used: The quantity of water lost from the main shall not exceed the number of gallons per hour as determined by the formula: L= SD√P__ 266,400 where: L = Allowable leakage in gallons/hour S = Gross length of pipe tested, feet D = Nominal diameter of the pipe in inches P = Test pressure during the leakage test in psi The quantity of water required to restore the pressure shall be accurately determined by either 1) pumping from an open container of suitable size such that accurate volume measurements can be made by the Engineer or, 2) by pumping through a positive displacement water meter with a sweep unit hand registering one (1) gallon per revolution. The meter shall be approved by the Engineer. Pressure gauges used in the test shall be accompanied with certifications of accuracy from a testing Laboratory approved by the Engineer. Any visible leakage detected shall be corrected by the Contractor regardless of the allowable leakage specified above. Should the tested section fail to meet the pressure test successfully as specified, the Contractor shall, at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency, locate and repair the defects and then retest the pipeline. All tests shall be made with the hydrant auxiliary gate valves open and pressure against the hydrant inlet valve. After the test is completed, each valve shall be tested by closing each in turn and relieving the pressure beyond. This test of the valve will be acceptable if there is no immediate loss of pressure on the gauge when the pressure comes against the valve being checked. The Contractor shall verify that the pressure differential across the valve does not exceed the rated working pressure of the valve. Prior to calling out the Engineer to witness the pressure test, the Contractor shall have all equipment set up completely ready for operation and shall have successfully performed the test to ensure that the pipe is in satisfactory condition. Defective materials or workmanship, discovered as a result of hydrostatic field test, shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency. Whenever it is necessary to replace defective material or correct the workmanship, the hydrostatic test shall be re-run at the Contractor’s expense until a satisfactory test is obtained. 7-09.3(24)A Flushing and "Poly-pigging" Section 7-09.3(24)A shall be revised and supplemented as follows: (******) Prior to disinfection and prior to final flushing of the Water Mains for bacteriological sampling and testing, all Water Mains shall first be poly-pigged to remove any solids or contaminated materials that may have entered or become lodged in the pipes during installation. The "Poly-pig" shall be light density foam (1-2 lbs/cubic-foot) with 90A durometer urethane rubber coating on the rear of the "Poly-pig" only. The "Poly-pig" shall be cylinder shaped with bullet nose or squared end. The “Poly-pigs” shall be inserted in the pipes and retrieved form the pipes through launching stations with vertical crosses and blow-off assemblies as shown and on the Contract Plans and Standard Plans. If the main cannot be poly-pigged, then a tap shall be provided large enough to develop a flow velocity of at least 2.5 fps in the water main. Taps required by the Contractor for temporary or permanent release of air, chlorination or flushing purposes shall be provided by the Contractor as part of the construction of water mains. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposal of treated water flushed from mains and shall 07/05/2018 89 neutralize the wastewater for protection of aquatic life in the receiving water before disposal into any natural drainage channel, i.e., receiving water, waters of the State, including wetlands. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of disinfecting solution to the satisfaction of the Contracting Agency and local authorities. At a minimum, chlorinated water shall be dechlorinated to a concentration of 0.1 parts per million (ppm) or less, and pH adjustment to within 6.5 – 8.5 standard units before discharging to surface waters of the State or to a storm sewer system that drains to surface waters of the State. If approved by the Engineer and by the local authority responsible for the sanitary sewer system, disposal of treated water from mains may be made to an available sanitary sewer, provided the rate of disposal will not overload the sewer. 7-09.3(24)D Dry Calcium Hypochlorite Section 7-09.3(24)D has been replaced with: (******) Dry calcium hypochlorite shall not be placed in the pipe as laid. 7-09.3(24)K Retention Period Section 7-09.3(24)K has been revised as follows: (******) Treated water shall be retained in the pipe at least 16 hours but no longer than 48 hours. After the retention period, the chlorine residual shall be tested at all pipe extremities and at other representative points and shall measure at least 10 mg/L. If a measurement of less than 10 mg/L is obtained repeat disinfection is required. 7-09.3(24)N Final Flushing and Testing Section 7-09.3(24)N has been revised as follows: (******) Following chlorination, treated water shall be flushed from the newly-laid pipe until the replacement water throughout its length shows, upon test, the absence of chlorine. In the event chlorine is normally used in the source of supply, then the tests shall show a residual not in excess of that carried in the water supply system. A sample tap shall be located ahead of the flushing hose for convenience and for sanitary sampling. Before placing the lines into service, two satisfactory reports taken at least 15 minutes apart from each sampling point shall be received from the local or State Health Department or from a State accredited testing laboratory on samples collected from representative points in the new system. Samples will be collected and bacteriological tests obtained by the Engineer. At a minimum, chlorinated water shall be dechlorinated to a concentration of 0.1 parts per million (ppm) or less, and pH adjustment to within 6.5 to 8.5 standard units, if necessary, before discharging to surface waters of the State or to a storm sewer system that drains to surface waters of the State. 7-09.3(25) Joint Restraint Systems Section 7-09.3(25) is a new additional section: (******) General: Where shown in the Plans, in the Specifications or required by the Engineer, joint restraint system (shackle rods) shall be used. All joint restraint materials used shall be those manufactured by Star National Products, 1323 Holly Avenue, PO Box 258, Columbus Ohio 43216, unless an equal alternate is approved in writing by the Engineer. Materials: Steel types used shall be: High strength low-alloy steel (cor-ten), ASTM A242, heat-treated, superstar "SST" series. 07/05/2018 90 High strength low-alloy steel (cor-ten), ASTM A242, superstar "SS" series. Items to be galvanized are to meet the following requirements: ASTM A153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. ASTM A123 for galvanizing rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes. Joint restrainer system components: Tiebolt: ASTM A242, type 2, zinc plated or hot-dip galvanized. SST 7:5/8" for 2" and 3" mechanical joints, 3/4" for 4" to 12" mechanical joints, ASTM A325, type 3D, except tensile strength of full-body threaded section shall be increased to 40,000 lbs. minimum for 5/8" and 60,000 lbs. minimum for 3/4" by heat treating (quenching and tempering) to manufacturer’s reheat and hardness Specifications. SST 753: 3/4" for 14" to 24" mechanical joints. Same ASTM Specification as SST 7. SST 77: 3/4" same as SST 7, except 1" eye for 7/8" rod. Same ASTM Specification as SST 7. Tienut: Heavy hex nut for each tiebolt: SS8: 5/8" and 3/4", ASTM A563, grade C3, or zinc plated. S8: 5/8" and 3/4", ASTM A563, grade A, zinc plated or hot-dip galvanized. Tiecoupling: Used to extend continuous threaded rods and are provided with a center stop to aid installation, zinc plated or hot-dip galvanized. SS10: for 5/8" and 3/4" tierods, ASTM A563, grade C3. S10: for 5/8" and 3/4" tierods, ASTM A563, grade A. Tierod: Continuous threaded rod for cutting to desired lengths, zinc plated or hot-dip galvanized. SS12: 5/8" and 3/4" diameter, ASTM A242, type 2; ANSI B1.1. S12: 5/8" and 3/4" diameter, ASTM A36, A307. Tiewasher: Round flat washers, zinc plated or hot-dip galvanized. SS17: ASTM A242, F436. S17: ANSI B18.22.1. Installation: Install the joint restraint system in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions so all joints are mechanically locked together to prevent joint separation. Tie-bolts shall be installed to pull against the mechanical joint body and not the MJ follower. Torque nuts at 75-90 foot pounds for 3/4" nuts. Install tie-couplings with both rods threaded equal distance into tie-couplings. Arrange tie-rods symmetrically around the pipe. Pipe Diameter Number of 3/4" Tie Rods Required 4” 2 6” 2 8” 2 10” 4 12” 4 14” 6 Pipe Diameter Number of 3/4" Tie Rods Required 16” 6 18” 8 20 10 24” 12 Where a manufacturer’s mechanical joint valve or fitting is supplied with slots for "T" bolts instead of holes, a flanged valve with a flange by mechanical joint adapter shall be used instead, so as to provide adequate space for locating the tie-bolts. Where a continuous run of pipe is required to be restrained, no run of restrained pipe shall be greater than 60 feet in length between fittings. Insert long body solid sleeves as required on longer runs to 07/05/2018 91 keep tie-rod lengths to the 60 foot maximum. Pipe used in continuously restrained runs shall be mechanical joint pipe and tie-bolts shall be installed as rod guides at each joint. Where poly wrapping is required all tie-bolts, tie-nuts, tie-couplings, tie-rods, and tie-washers, shall be galvanized. All disturbed sections will be painted, to the Inspector’s satisfaction, with Koppers Bitomastic No. 300-m, or approved equal. Where poly wrapping is not required all tie-bolts, tie-nuts, tie-couplings, tie-rods and tie-washers may be galvanized as specified in the preceding paragraph or plain and painted in the entirety with Koppers Bitumastic No. 800-m, or approved equal. Tie-bolts, tie-nuts, tie-couplings, tie-rods, and tie-washers shall be considered incidental to installation of the pipe and no additional payment shall be made. 7-09.4 Measurement Measurement and Payment Schedule for installation of water mains and appurtenances is shown in Section 1-09.14 Section 7-09.4 is revised as follows: (******) Measurement of bank run gravel for trench backfill will be by the cubic yard measured by the calculation of neat lines based on maximum trench width per Section 2-09.4 or by the ton, in accordance with Section 1-09. Measurement for payment of concrete thrust blocking and dead-man blocks will be per cubic-yard when these items are included as separate pay items. If not included as separate pay items in the contract, then thrust blocking and dead-man blocks shall be considered incidental to the installation of the water main and no further compensation shall be made. Measurement for payment for connections to existing water mains will be per each for each connection to existing water main(s) as shown on the Plans. 7-09.5 Payment Measurement and Payment Schedule for installation of water mains and appurtenances is shown in Section 1-09.14 Section 7-09.5 is revised and supplemented as follows: (******) "Furnish and Install ____Ductile Iron Water Main & Fittings”, per lineal foot. The unit contract price per linear foot for each size and kind of “Furnish and Install ____Ductile Iron Water Main & Fittings" shall be full pay for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14. "Concrete Thrust Blocking and Dead-Man Anchor Blocks", per cubic yard. The unit contract price per cubic yard for "Concrete Concrete Thrust Blocking and Dead-Man Anchor Blocks " shall be full pay for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14. "Connection to Existing Water Mains", per each. The unit contract price per each for “Connection to Existing Water Mains” shall be full pay for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14. “Select Imported Trench Backfill”, per cubic yard or ton. The unit contract price per cubic yard or ton for “Select Imported Trench Backfill” shall be full pay for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14. 07/05/2018 92 "Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material", per ton or cubic yard. The unit contract price per cubic yard or ton for "Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material" shall be full pay for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14. 7-12 VALVES FOR WATER MAINS 7-12.3(1) Installation of Valve Marker Post Section 7-12.3(1) has been revised as follows: (******) Where required, a valve marker post shall be furnished and installed with each valve. Valve marker posts shall be placed at the edge of the right-of-way opposite the valve and be set with 18 inches of the post exposed above grade. The rest of this section is deleted. 7-12.3(2) Adjust Existing Valve Box to Grade Section 7-12.3(2) is a new section: (******) Valve boxes shall be adjusted to grade in the same manner as for manholes, as detailed in Section 7- 05.3(1) of the City of Renton Standard Details. Valve box adjustments shall include, but not be limited to, the locations shown on the Plans. Existing roadway valve boxes shall be adjusted to conform to final finished grades. The final installation shall be made in accordance with the applicable portions of Section 7-12. In the event that the existing valve box is plugged or blocked with debris, the Contractor shall use whatever means necessary to remove such debris, leaving the valve installation in a fully operable condition. The valve box shall be set to an elevation tolerance of one-fourth inch (1/4") to one-half inch (1/2") below finished grade. 7-12.4 Measurement Measurement and Payment Schedule for installation of water mains and appurtenances is shown in Section 1-09.14 Section 7-12.4 is supplemented by adding the following: (******) Adjustment of existing valve boxes to grade shall be measured per each, if included as a separate pay item in the Contract; if not a separate pay item but required to complete the Work, then value box adjustment shall be considered incidental. Hydrant auxiliary gate valve will be included in the measurement for hydrant assembly and will not be included in this measurement item. 7-12.5 Payment Measurement and Payment Schedule for installation of water mains and appurtenances is shown in Section 1-09.14 Section 7-12.5 is replaced with the following: (******) "Furnish and Install ____-Inch Gate Valve Assembly”, per each. The unit contract price per each for "Furnish and Install ____-Inch Gate Valve Assembly" shall be full pay for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14. "Air-Release/Air-Vacuum Valve Assembly," per each. 07/05/2018 93 The unit contract price per for air-release/air-vacuum valve assembly shall be for all, labor, equipment and material to complete the installation of the assembly including but not limited to, excavating, tapping the main, laying and jointing the pipe and fittings and appurtenances, backfilling, testing, flushing, and disinfection, meter box and cover, at location shown on the plans, and per the City of Renton Standard Details, latest revision. "Adjust Existing Valve Box to Grade (RC)," per each. The contract bid price for "Adjust Existing Valve Box to Grade" above shall be full compensation for all labor, material, tools and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the Work as defined in the Contract Documents, including all incidental Work. If not included as a separate pay item in the Contract, but required to complete other Work in the Contract, then adjustment of valve boxes shall be considered incidental to other items of Work and no further compensation shall be made. 7-14 HYDRANTS 7-14.3(1) Setting Hydrants Paragraph four and five of Section 7-14.3(1) is revised and the section is supplemented as follows: (******) 7-14.3(1) Hydrant Assembly Where shown on the Plans, hydrants shall be installed in accordance with the Standard Plans and Contract specifications. A minimum 3-foot radius unobstructed working area shall be provided around all hydrants. The bottom surface of the breakaway flange shall be set 2-inches minimum and 7-inches maximum above the concrete shear block finished grade. For each hydrant requiring vertical adjustment, see Section 7-14.3(6). Fire hydrants shall be of such length as to be suitable for installation with connections to 6", 8" and 10" piping in trenches 3 - 1/2 feet deep unless otherwise specified. The hydrant shall be designed for a 4-1/2 foot burial where 12" and larger pipe is shown unless otherwise noted in the Plans. After installation hydrants shall be subjected to a hydrostatic test as specified in Section 7-09.3(23). The hydrant excavation shall be backfilled and compacted when installation and testing are complete and accepted by the Engineer. A concrete shear block as shown by the hydrant details on the Standard Plans shall be constructed for all hydrants. Construction, Materials, and finishing of the concrete shear block shall conform to Section 8-14, Cement Concrete Sidewalk. The shear block shall be set flush with the immediately surrounding finish grade. The Contractor shall flush, test and disinfect furnished hydrants and hydrant barrel extensions according to Section 7-14.3(6). Upon completion of the project, all fire hydrants shall be painted with two field coats of Kelly- Moore/Preservative paint No. 5780-563 DTM Acrylic Gloss Safety Yellow or approved equal. Any hydrants not in service shall be identified by covering with a burlap or plastic bag properly secured. Fire hydrant assembly shall include: main line cast-iron or ductile iron tee (MJ x FL), 6" gate valve (FL x MJ), 6" DI spool (PE x PE) up to 18 feet in length, 5 -1/4" MVO fire hydrant (MJ connection), 4" x 5" Storz adapter with stainless steel cable, cast iron valve box, cover, valve operating nut extension, 2- 3/4" Cor-Ten shackle rods and accessories, concrete blocks, shear block and blue pavement marker. 7-14.3(3) Resetting Existing Hydrants Section 7-14.3(3) is supplemented with the following: All existing hydrants to be reset shall be rebuilt to the approval of the Engineer. All rubber gaskets 07/05/2018 94 shall be replaced with new gaskets of the type required for a new installation of the same type. Unless a specific bid item has been included in the Proposal/Contract Document, resetting existing hydrants shall be incidental to and included in the various bid items. 7-14.3(4) Moving Existing Hydrants Section 7-14.3(4) is supplemented with the following: All existing hydrants to be moved shall be rebuilt to the approval of the Engineer. All rubber gaskets shall be replaced with new gaskets of the type required for a new installation of the same type. Unless a specific bid item has been included in the Proposal/Contract Document, resetting existing hydrants shall be incidental to and included in the various bid items. Unless a specific bid item has been included in the Proposal/Contract Document, resetting existing hydrants shall be incidental to and included in the various bid items. 7-14.3(7) Remove and Salvage Hydrant Section 7-14.3(7) is added as follows: Existing hydrants shall be removed where shown in the Plans. Removed hydrants shall be delivered to the City of Renton shops by the Contractor. The existing hydrant lateral tee shall be removed from the main. Unless a specific bid item has been included in the Proposal/Contract Document, resetting existing hydrants shall be incidental to and included in the various bid items. 7-14.5 Payment Measurement and Payment Schedule for installation of water mains and appurtenances is shown in Section 1-09.14 Section 7-14.5 is revised as follows: (******) Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for each of the following bid items that are included in the proposal: “Furnish and Install Hydrant Assembly”, per each. The unit contract price per each for " Furnish and Install Hydrant Assembly”, shall be full pay for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14. “Resetting Existing Hydrants”, per each. The unit contract price per each for “Resetting Existing Hydrant” shall be full pay for all Work to reset the existing hydrant, including rebuilding (or replacement with a new hydrant), shackling, blocking, painting, and guard posts and reconnecting to the main. The new pipe connecting the hydrant to the main shall be considered incidental and no additional payment shall be made. Guard posts, shown on the Plans shall be incidental to the contract. “Moving Existing Hydrants”, per each. The unit contract price per each for “Moving Existing Hydrant” shall be full pay for all Work to move the existing hydrant, including new tee, rebuilding (or replacement with a new hydrant), shackling, blocking, painting, and guard posts and reconnecting to the main. The new pipe connecting the hydrant to the main shall be considered incidental and no additional payment shall be made. Guard posts, shown on the Plans shall be incidental to the contract. 07/05/2018 95 7-15 SERVICE CONECTIONS 7-15.3 Construction Details Section 7-15.3 is supplemented as follows: (******) Section 7-15.3 is revised and supplemented with the following: All pipe materials for new water service lines and for extension or replacement of existing water service lines shall be copper and lead free in accordance with the Federal Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act. Pipe materials for water service line installation for size 2-inch or less and connection to ductile iron water main shall be copper type “K” annealed tubing and seamless (ANSI H33.1). Ductile iron pipe Class 52 or stronger shall be direct-tapped with 1-inch corporation stops for 1-inch service lines. All meter setters for residential domestic use shall be 1-inch by 1-inch setters unless otherwise specified on the Contract Plans. For existing 3/4-inch meters, the Contractor shall furnish and install reducing couplings to adapt the 1-inch setter to the standard 3/4-inch domestic meter. Where installation of service lines is within existing paved streets, the service lines shall be installed by a trenchless percussion and impact method (hoe-hogging). If the trenchless percussion and impact method fails, regular open trench methods may be used. Where shown in the Plans, the Contractor shall:  Furnish and install new water service lines from the new water main to the new meter setters and new meter boxes near the existing meters  Furnish and install adaptors for the relocation of the existing water meters to the new meter setters and re-install the existing meters in the new meter setters  Connect the new meter setters to the customers’ private service lines  Restore disturbed areas to their approximate original condition as directed by the Engineer. 7-15.5 Payment Measurement and Payment Schedule for installation of water mains and appurtenances is shown in Section 1-09.14 Section 7-15.5 is revised as follows: (******) Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid item when it is included in the proposal: “Furnish and Install ____ In. Water Service Connection”, per each. The unit contract price per each for " Furnish and Install ____ In. Water Service Connection”, shall be full pay for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14. 7-17 SANITARY SEWERS 7-17.2 Materials Section 7-17.2 is replaced with the following: (******) 07/05/2018 96 Pipe Gravity sewer pipe shall be as specified herein and as shown on the Plans. The Contractor shall provide two copies of the pipe manufacturer’s technical literature and tables of dimensional tolerances to the Engineer. Any pipe found to have dimensional tolerances in excess of those prescribed or having defects, which prevent adequate joint seal or any other damage, shall be rejected. If requested by the Engineer, not less than three nor more than five lengths of pipe for each size, selected from stock by the Engineer, shall be tested as specified for maximum dimensional tolerance of the respective pipe. Material for PVC sewer pipe shall meet the requirements of Section 9-05.12. All pipe shall be clearly marked with type, class, and thickness. Lettering shall be legible and permanent under normal conditions of handling and storage. 7-17.3 Construction Requirements 7-17.3(1) Protection of Existing Sewerage Facilities Section 7-17.3(1) is supplemented by adding the following: (******) When extending an existing sewer, the downstream system shall be protected from construction debris by placing a screen or trap in the first existing manhole downstream of the connection. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to maintain this screen or trap until the new system is placed in service and then to remove it. Any construction debris, which enters the existing downstream system, shall be removed by the Contractor at his expense, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. When the first manhole is set, its outlet shall be plugged until acceptance by the Engineer. 7-17.3(2)H Television Inspection Section 7-17.3(2)H is supplemented by adding the following: (******) CCTV Inspection 1. Sewer sections shall be inspected by means of remote CCTV. If a blockage hampers the inspection of the sewer in one direction, then the Contractor shall attempt to complete the section by televising from the other manhole to complete the section. The Contractor must immediately report the obstruction to the Owner or his representative (hereinafter referred to as “Owner”). All CCTV work shall conform to Current NASSCO-PACP standards. 2. CCTV inspections will be delivered entirely in a GraniteNet compatible format database using the latest software version on External HDD. 3. The Contractor shall perform all CCTV inspections in accordance with NASSCO’s Pipeline Assessment Certification Program (PACP). CCTV inspections will be delivered entirely in electronic format. The entire survey shall be recorded in an approved electronic format submitted with electronic links between the data and the video. All television inspection reports shall be with-in +/- two (2) feet of the measured linear footage between manholes along the existing sewer centerline from the start of pipe to end of pipe. All Owner and PACP required header information must be fully and accurately entered on all CCTV reports. Work not following these specifications will be rejected for payment and the Contractor shall be required to re-CCTV the work. 4. The documentation of the work shall consist of PACP CCTV Reports, PACP database, logs, electronic reports, etc. noting important features encountered during the inspection. The speed of travel shall be slow enough to inspect each pipe joint, tee connection, structural deterioration, infiltration and inflow sources, and deposits, but should not, at any time, be faster than 30 feet per minute, except as noted otherwise in this document. 5. The camera must be centered in the pipe to provide accurate distance 07/05/2018 97 measurements to provide locations of features in the sewer and these footage measurements shall be displayed and documented on the video. All PACP Observations shall be identified by audio and on a PACP log. All video must be continuously metered from manhole to manhole. The pipe should be clean enough to ensure all defects, features and observations are seen and logged. 6. All CCTV operators working on this project shall have current NASSCO PACP certification. 7-17.4 Measurement Section 7-17.4 is supplemented as follows: (******) Measurement of “Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill Sewer” will be determined by the cubic yard in place, measured by the neat line dimensions shown in the Plans, or by the ton on truck tickets. 7-17.3(2)I Abandon Existing Sanitary Sewer Pipes Section 7-17.3(2)I is a new section: (******) Where it is shown on the plans that existing sanitary sewer pipe(s) is to be abandoned by filling with grout, both ends of the abandoned pipe and all lateral connections to the pipe shall be plugged with 3,000 psi cement concrete and the pipe shall be filled with cement-based grout. The grout mix design and method of installation shall be approved by the Engineer prior to beginning the operation (See Section 9-03.22 for Grout Mix requirements). 7-17.5 Payment Measurement and Payment Schedule for installation of sanitary sewer mains and appurtenances is shown in Section 1-09.14 Section 7-17.5 is revised and supplemented as follows: (******) Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for each of the following bid items that are included in the proposal: “Furnish and Install ____ In. ____sewer pipe”, per linear foot. The unit contract price per each for " Furnish and Install ____ In. ____sewer pipe”, shall be full pay for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14. “Furnish and Install ____ In. ____side sewer pipe”, per linear foot. The unit contract price per each for " Furnish and Install ____ In. ____side sewer pipe”, shall be full pay for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14. “Testing Sewer Pipe”, per linear foot. The unit contract price per linear foot for “Testing Sewer Pipe” shall be full pay for all labor, material and equipment required to conduct the leakage tests required in Section 7-17.3(2). If no unit price for “Testing Sewer Pipe” is included it shall be considered incidental to the pipe items. “Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Material”, per cubic yard or ton. The unit contract price per cubic yard or ton for “Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Material” shall be full pay for all Work to remove unsuitable material and replace and compact suitable material as specified in Section 7-08.3(1)A. “Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill Sewer”, per cubic yard or ton. The unit contract price per cubic yard or ton for “Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill Sewer” shall be full pay for all Work to furnish, place, and compact material in the trench. 07/05/2018 98 “Television Inspection”, per linear foot. 7-21 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE (CIPP) New Section 7-21.1 Description This Section specifies rehabilitation of pipelines by the installation of resin-impregnated liner cured-in-place piping. Service connections and manholes may be rehabilitated with products specified in other Sections. Contractor shall coordinate rehabilitation of manholes, mainlines, lateral interfaces, and laterals with product installers. Contractor shall ensure that resin systems are compatible with all rehabilitation products that they will contact. A portion of the pipeline rehabilitation work is located outside of public rights-of-way behind single family homes. The Contractor shall be responsible to properly secure materials and equipment utilized to perform the work required for this project. The Contractor shall coordinate with property owner(s) to preserve access within the site and maintain the site in a safe manner. 7-21.1(1) Related Work Specified Elsewhere Resin Impregnated Fabric CIPP, Section 7-22. Resin Impregnated Fiberglass CIPP, Section 7-23. 7-21.1(2) Licensing The Contractor or sub-contractors shall be registered to work in the City of Renton. The Contractor or sub-contractor installing the CIPP shall have a current license agreement with the product Manufacturer or Assembler. Individuals installing the CIPP shall be certified by the product Manufacturer or Assembler. Lining installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of the product Manufacturer or Assembler and as directed by their Technical Representative. This includes the correction of defective work. Certification showing that the Installer is currently licensed by the appropriate licensor to perform CIPP installation shall be provided. 7-21.1(3) Contractor and Manufacturer Qualifications The Manufacturer of the CIPP liner shall have a minimum of 200,000 linear feet of CIPP successfully installed in accordance with these specifications. Manufacturer’s using standards other than those listed in these specifications shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Owner that the standards followed produce a product that is, at a minimum, equal to the quality of product developed using the listed standards. The CIPP lining Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) successfully completed projects totaling a minimum of 50,000 lineal feet using the proposed CIPP rehabilitation technology. In addition, the Contractor’s project superintendent shall have a minimum of three (3) successfully completed projects totaling a minimum of 25,000 lineal feet using the proposed CIPP rehabilitation technology. The Contractor’s identified project superintendent shall be on the project for the duration of the project and shall be available at all times during the CIPP rehabilitation. At least one person on the Contractor’s installation crew shall have a minimum of one (1) year of CIPP installation experience 07/05/2018 99 and shall be on the project site at all times. The Contractor’s identified Lateral Cutting Technician shall have minimum of one (1) year of experience reinstating laterals. Wastewater collection system rehabilitation products submitted for approval shall be provided with third party test results supporting long-term performance and structural strength of the product. Third party test result data shall be satisfactory to the Engineer. Test samples shall have been prepared so as to simulate the installation methods and trauma of project conditions. 7-21.1(4) Contractor Submittals All procedures or material descriptions requiring the Engineer's approval shall be submitted not less than 15 calendar days prior to mobilizing or commencing any CIPP activities at the site of the work and shall include the following information: 1. CIPP Lining Plan to include the following:  Work sequence organized by pipeline section with installation schedule.  Confirmation of liner length.  Locations of all service connections with disposition for each.  Anticipated cleaning and preparation requirements.  Sewer Service Interruption Notification Plan. 2. Manufacturer’s certificate(s) indicating that the supplied lining materials meet the requirements of the Specifications, ASTM standards and a certificate of compliance from an independent third party lab. 3. Details on all lining materials and resins. 4. Name of resin supplier and liner fabric supplier. 5. Manufacturer’s or Assembler’s certification that the liner materials and system are in compliance with the specifications, codes, and standards referenced in these specifications. 6. Test reports on testing of CIPP products 7. Manufacturer’s or Assembler’s recommendations for factory and field (whichever applies) wet out procedures including: volume of resin per unit of liner, mixing ratios and procedures for resin and catalyst/hardener, shelf life of resin, pot life of resin, required wet out procedure to ensure full saturation, and other criteria deemed necessary to ensure proper wet out of the liner. 8. Manufacturer’s or Assembler’s data sheets for factory wet out and/or Contractor’s data sheets for field wet out showing: quantity of resin and catalyst used for each length of liner, at or pr ior to time of installation. 9. Manufacturer’s or Assembler’s certification that all Manufacturer’s or Assembler’s wet out recommendations have been followed on all lengths of CIPP which have factory wet out, at or prior to time of installation. 10. Manufacturer’s or Assembler’s recommendations for storage procedures and temperature control, handling and inserting the liner, curing details, service connection methods, trimming and finishing, and minimum equipment requirements to allow for an adequate installation. 11. Manufacturer’s or Assembler’s recommendations and procedures for minimum and maximum pressures, temperatures, and time durations to be used. 12. Data on Contractor’s equipment to be used on site including: type and tolerance of temperature gages and thermocouples used to monitor cure temperature; type and tolerance of equipment 07/05/2018 100 used to generate liner inversion pressure; make model, and technical data of all equipment used to generate heat for the curing process; make, model and technical data of backup equipment used to maintain curing temperature; rough size of vehicle(s) which carries the CIPP pipe and installation equipment. 13. Pipe sizing certified calculations demonstrating that the liner has been properly sized to avoid the creation of wrinkles or folds. 14. Manufacturer or Assembler onsite Representative’s Certification that the Contractor’s installation meets all requirements of the Manufacturer or Assembler and will not void the Owner’s warranty. 15. CIPP field samples from previous field installations of the same resin system and tube materials as proposed for the actual installation. Field sampling procedure shall be in accordance with the latest version of ASTM F1216 or ASTM F1743 and in accordance with ASTM D5813. 16. Material Safety Data Sheets for resins, hardeners, catalysts, solvents, and all other compounds or chemicals to be used on the job site. 17. Data logger output in graphic format showing pipe section, time, pressure, and temperature during activation, heating, curing, and cool down. 18. Informational hand out that describes the materials, processes, and odors associated with the lining process. This handout shall be provided at the request of concerned residents. 19. Post-Installation CCTV inspection videos. 7-21.1(5) Quality Assurance The Manufacturer or Assembler shall provide the following: 1. List of inspection items that should be observed and recorded. Inspection items include pre- installation activities, product identification, installation procedures, equipment operations, and post-installation activities. 2. Review all post-installation CCTV tapes of the installed liner. Following this review the Manufacturer’s or Assembler’s representative shall provide certification to the Engineer ensuring that the Contractor’s installation meets the Manufacturer’s or Assembler’s requirements and will not void the warranty. The finished CIPP shall be continuous over the entire length of an insertion run between two manholes or access points and shall be free from visual defects such as foreign inclusions, dry spots, pinholes, and de-lamination. Wrinkles in the finished CIPP greater than 5 percent of the pipe diameter are unacceptable and shall be removed and repaired by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense. Methods of repair shall be proposed by Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for review and approval. 7-21.1(6) Warranty The Contractor shall warrant each mainline sewer lined with the specified product against defects in materials, surface preparation, lining application, and workmanship for a period of 12 months from the date of final acceptance of the project. The Contractor shall, within one month of written notice thereof, repair defects in materials or workmanship that may develop during said 12-month period. Defects shall be defined as: visible leakage of groundwater through the CIPP system, de-lamination of any portion of the CIPP system as visible from CCTV inspection, or separation of any part of the CIPP system from the host pipe to the extent that the CIPP system inside diameter in the separated 07/05/2018 101 area is 90 percent or less of the completed CIPP system inside diameter. The Contractor shall also repair any damage to other work; damage to sewer system components (including pump stations) damages to buildings, houses or environmental damage caused by the backup of the sewer because of the failure of the lining system or repairing of the same at the expense of Contractor, and without cost to the Owner. Repairs shall include removal of the existing liner and re-lining if possible, or excavation and replacement of the section of pipe where the defect occurs. 7-21.2 Materials 7-21.2(1) Cured in Place Resin Impregnated Material in General The liner shall be designed for a “fully deteriorated” pipe condition in accordance with the procedures of the latest edition of ASTM F1216, Appendix XI and these specifications. All material properties used in design calculations shall be long-term (time-corrected) values. The Contractor shall be familiar with the existing site conditions when preparing the liner design. The CIPP will be continuous in length and the wall thickness shall be uniform. No overlapping sections shall be allowed in the circumference or the length of the liner. The CIPP will be capable of conforming to offset joints, bells, and disfigured pipe sections. It shall be able to stretch to fit irregular pipe sections and negotiate bends. The CIPP resin shall be compatible with the liner fabric, other rehabilitation systems it may contact, and the host pipe materials. The CIPP shall be marked at a distance of regular intervals along its entire length, not to exceed 5 feet. Markings shall include Manufacturer’s or Assembler’s name or identifying symbol. The CIPP liner shall be manufactured with materials from a consistent supplier. All materials of similar type shall be from a single source for the entire project. The composite materials of the liner tube and resin shall, upon installation inside the host pipe, exceed the following minimum test standards, based on restrained sample cured in host pipe and flat plate sample: 1. Physical Properties Flexural Strength (ASTM D790) 4,500 psi Flexural Modulus (ASTM D790) Short Term 300,000 psi Flexural Modulus (ASTM D2990) Long Term 150,000 psi Tensile Strength (ASTM 1216 [pressure pipe only]) 3,000 psi The CIPP shall be fabricated to a size that, when installed, will tightly fit the internal circumference and length of the original pipe. 1. Allowance shall be made for circumferential and longitudinal stretching during the installation process. 2. Diametric shrinking during the curing process shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 5813, Section 6.3.1 or better. 07/05/2018 102 The liner thickness shall be designed based on the engineering formulas listed in ASTM D638 and F1216 for fully deteriorated pipes. The thickness shall be sufficient to prevent groundwater from entering the pipe, while maintaining the maximum cross-sectional pipe area possible. Contractor shall prepare design calculations for approval prior to performing the lining work. The submitted design calculations shall provide the following information as a minimum: 1. Manhole to Manhole designation 5321-010 to 5321-009 2. Pipe Nominal Diameter (inches) 3. Minimum Liner thickness (inches) 4. Proposed Liner Thickness (inches) The following parameters shall be assumed for the liner design: 1. Modulus of soil reaction, E’S = 1,500 psi (fully deteriorated) 2. Unit weight of soil = 140 pcf 3. The minimum ovality for straight runs shall be 2.0 percent 4. AASHTO H20 traffic loads 5. AREMA E-80 railroad loads 6. Groundwater at the surface 7. Factor of Safety, N=2.0 For liners inserted by the inversion method, the CIPP shall be coated on one side with a translucent waterproof coating of: 1. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 2. Polyurethane For liners inserted by the pull/winch method, the CIPP shall be coated on one side with a translucent waterproof coating of: 1. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 2. Polyurethane 3. Polyethylene 4. Polypropylene 7-21.2(2) Resin The resin/liner system shall meet the 10,000 hour test in accordance with Section 8.2.2 Test Methods of ASTM D 5813. Prior to construction, the Contractor shall submit an infrared spectrum chemical fingerprint of the type of resin to be used for this project. 7-21.2(3) Physical Properties The CIPP shall be corrosion resistant to withstand exposure to sewage gases containing quantities of hydrogen sulfide, carbon monoxide, diluted sulfuric acid, and other chemical reagents typical of sewage conveyance. Chemical resistance of the installed CIPP shall meet the chemical resistance requirements of ASTM D543 when subjected to the following solutions: Chemical Solution Concentration, percent Tap Water (pH 6-9) Nitric Acid Phosphoric Acid 100 5 10 07/05/2018 103 Sulfuric Acid Gasoline Vegetable Oil Detergent Soap 10 100 100 0.1 0.1 The hydraulic profile of the installed CIPP shall be maintained as large as possible. The CIPP shall have at a minimum the full flow capacity of the original pipe before rehabilitation. Calculated capacities may be derived using commonly accepted roughness coefficients for the existing pipe material taking into consideration its age and condition. Physical properties shall be subject to ASTM D 2122. 7-21.3 Construction Requirements 7-21.3(1) Preparation The Contractor shall make all necessary provisions to ensure service conditions and structural conditions of host pipe are suitable for installation and warranty of the liner. The Contractor shall verify the lengths in the field prior to ordering and prior to impregnation of the tube with resin, to ensure that the tube will have sufficient length to extend the entire length of the run. The Contractor shall also measure the inside diameter of the existing pipelines in the field prior to ordering liner so that the liner can be installed in a tight-fitted condition. 7-21.3(1)A Flow Management It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to maintain operation of the existing sewer systems throughout the duration of the project without any interruption of sewer service. The Contractor shall divert all flows around each segment of the pipe designated for rehabilitation. This diversion shall consist of redirecting flow from an upstream manhole and discharging it to a manhole downstream of the rehabilitation operation. This can be accomplished via a combination of pumping and/or gravity flow. After the work is completed, flow shall be returned to the rehabilitated sewer system. The area affected by the bypass operation shall be fully restored. Bypass pumping shall be scheduled for continuous operation. Back-up equipment shall be on-site and available for periods of maintenance, refueling or failure of the primary bypass pump(s) or diversion system. Bypass pumping shall be done in such a manner as not to damage private or public property, or create a nuisance or public menace. The bypass-pumping pipe shall not block any driveways or intersections unless approved by the Engineer. The sewage shall be pumped through a watertight hose or pipe that is adequately protected from traffic. The discharge of raw sewage to private property, city streets, sidewalks, storm sewer, or any location other than an approved sanitary sewer is prohibited. The Contractor shall be liable for all cleanup, damages, and resultant fines should the Contractor's operation cause any backups or overflows. The Contractor's bypass operation shall be sized to handle, at a minimum, the full pipe capacity in each subject line removed from service. If flow conditions are greater than full pipe, the Contractor may elect to wait for flow conditions to subside prior to removing the subject line from service. Working days will not be charged for the period of time during which the flow is greater than full pipe. No additional payment will be made for periods of high flows during which the Contractor elects to wait for lower flows. Once the Contractor removes a section of line from service he/she is responsible 07/05/2018 104 to bypass any and all flow in the system during construction, even in the event the system surcharges and exceeds the full pipe capacity, until the line is returned to service. All bypassing systems shall be approved by the Engineer. A plan for bypassing the existing sewer system shall be submitted by the Contractor for review. The Contractor's plan for bypass pumping shall be satisfactory to the Owner before the Contractor will be allowed to commence bypass pumping. The sewage bypass pumping plan shall include an emergency response plan to be followed in the event of a failure of the bypass pumping. The review of the bypassing system and equipment by the Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility and public liability. The Contractor shall coordinate activities with impacted property owners. Property Owners shall be notified that their side sewer will be out of service for a specified period of time, as approved by the Engineer. When there exist situations where impacted properties cannot be disconnected, plugged, or subjected to any other service interruption, i.e., hospitals, care facilities, restaurants, etc., bypass pumping of the side sewer to the downstream sanitary sewer system shall be required prior to insertion of the liner system. The Contractor shall verify whether a property is able to be interrupted prior to lining operations. If the subject property’s side sewer requires bypass pumping, the costs for the bypass pumping shall be covered by Force Account. 7-21.3(1)B Cleaning Clean and prepare pipe per CIPP Manufacturer’s or Assembler’s requirements. 7-21.3(1)C Point Repairs Advise the Engineer of any point requiring repairs that can only be performed by excavating the defect and removing or repairing the obstruction. Grout defects in the host pipeline including but not limited to open joints, fractures, cracks, and holes in the pipeline as follows: 1. Grout all defects as recommended by liner manufacturer or installer. 2. Grout all locations with active infiltration. The determination of an excessive leak shall be made by the Owner’s representative and shall be based on PACP leak designations. Leaks that would be categorized as a Runner(IR) – Severity 4 or Gusher(IG) – Severity 5 shall be considered as excessive. Leaks categorized as Weeper(IW) – Severity 2 or Dripper(ID) – Severity 3 shall be considered incidental to the unit price for CIPP rehabilitation. Make point repairs of any host pipe defect that can be removed by conventional sewer cleaning equipment or by remotely performed repair methods acceptable to the Engineer. Remove protruding laterals, rolled gaskets, roots, mineral deposits, and other objects protruding into the host pipe, internally with a remote controlled cutter. Pipelines that cannot be rehabilitated due to excessive leakage may be deleted from the project at the Engineers discretion. 7-21.3(1)D Manholes Protect all manholes to withstand forces generated by the equipment while installing the liner. 07/05/2018 105 7-21.3(2) Liner Installation 7-21.3(2)A Inversion Method The impregnated tube shall be inserted through an existing manhole or other access point by means of the Manufacturer’s or Assembler’s recommended installation process. The application of a hydrostatic head, compressed air, or other means shall fully extend the liner to the next designated manhole or termination point and inflate and firmly adhere the liner to the pipe wall. The liner shall be installed at a rate less than 10 feet per minute at all times. Liner shall not be installed through intermediate manholes unless specifically requested in advance in writing and approved by the Engineer. Liner installation shall be in accordance with ASTM F 1216, Section 7. When inversion is by hydrostatic head, the Contractor shall use methods that control the installation rate, accounting for the increase in hydrostatic head in pipes that have significant elevation change. 7-21.3(2)B Pull/Winch Method The impregnated tube shall be pulled into place within the host pipe with the aid of a power winch that is equipped with a device to monitor the force and prevent excessive tension and tube elongation. The maximum allowable longitudinal elongation, or stretch, of the material shall be one (1) percent. The longitudinal stretch of the tube shall be gauged by comparing marker on the fully inserted tube to the actual length of pipe being rehabilitated. The Contractor shall use a flexible and impermeable calibration hose to inflate the tube. The calibration hose may or may not remain in the complete installation. Hose materials remaining in the installation shall be compatible with the resin system used, shall bond permanently with the tube, and shall be translucent to facilitate post-installation inspection. Hose materials that are to be removed after curing shall be of non-bonding material. Liner installation shall be in accordance with ASTM 1743, Section 6. 7-21.3(2)C Finished Pipe Liner The finished lining shall be continuous over the entire length of an installation run and be free of visual defects such as foreign inclusions, dry spots, pinholes, wrinkles, and de-lamination. The lining shall be impervious and free of any leakage from the pipe to the surrounding ground or from the ground to inside the lined pipe. Any defect, which will or could affect the structural integrity, strength, capacity, or future maintenance of the installed liners, shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense, in a manner approved by the Engineer. The beginning and end of the CIPP liner shall be cut flush at the inlet and outlet points in the manhole, and the ends sealed with a resin mixture compatible with the liner/resin system and shall provide a watertight seal. Sealing material and installation method shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer prior to start of construction. Hydraulic cements and quick-set cement products are not acceptable. 07/05/2018 106 7-21.3(3) Service Connection Restoration Internally restore by using a pivot-headed CCTV camera and a remote cutting tool to locate the service connections from inside the lined pipe and cutting a hole matching the service connection diameter. Provide a hole free from burrs or projections and with a smooth and crack -free edge. The hole shall be 95 percent minimum of the original service connection interior diameter. The invert of the reinstated service opening shall match the invert of the service connection. Service connection restoration shall be recorded on DVD disc and shall include a pan and tilt view of the entire lateral circumference following cutting. Other methods may be used as approved by the Engineer. 7-21.3(4) Testing 7-21.3(4)A Material Testing Provide certified test results of the properties of the cured lining material from the actual installed CIPP at a minimum of one location per each liner insertion setup. The cured CIPP shall be sampled and tested for flexural strength and flexural modulus in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D790. Liner thickness shall be determined at a minimum of three (3) locations on a cut section of the liner using a method of measurement accurate to the nearest 0.005 inch. Wall thickness of samples shall be determined as described in ASTM F1743, Section 8.1.6. The minimum wall thickness at any point shall not be less than 87-1/2 percent of the design thickness. 7-21.3(4)B Field Testing Low Pressure Air Test: Mainlines without service connections shall be low pressure air tested in accordance with Section 7-17 of these specifications. 7-21.3(4)C Post Installation CCTV Inspection Following installation of the CIPP liner, reinstatement of the existing side sewer laterals and final trimming of the liner at the manholes/end of culverts, the new liner shall be inspected for defects using CCTV cameras. The CCTV inspection shall meet the same requirements as the Pre-Installation Inspection as specified in Section 7-20 of these special provisions. The post-installation CCTV inspection shall not be conducted until the side sewers have been reinstated and the cuttings from the reinstatement have been cleaned and removed. CCTV inspections performed by the Contractor at the time of the side sewer reinstatements will not be accepted. 7-21.4 Measurement The length of sewer pipe CIPP rehabilitation will be the number of linear feet of completed installation measured along the invert and will include the length through elbows, tees and fittings. The number of linear feet will be measured from the center of manhole to center of manhole. Measurement for “CIPP Lateral Reinstatement” will be per each. 7-21.5 Payment Measurement and Payment Schedule for X” Cured-in-Place Pipe (CIPP) and Reinstate CIPP Laterals is shown in Section 1-09.14 07/05/2018 107 7-22 RESIN IMPREGNATED FABRIC CIPP New Section 7-22.1 Description This Section specifies rehabilitation of pipelines by the installation of resin-impregnated fabric liners. 7-22.1(1) Related Work Specified Elsewhere General Specifications for Cured In Place Pipe (CIPP), Section 7-21. 7-22.2 Materials 7-22.2(1) Cured in Place Pipe Liner The CIPP shall consist of one or more layers of flexible needled felt or an equivalent non - woven material, or a combination of non-woven and woven materials capable of carrying resin, withstanding installation and curing pressures, as required in ASTM F 1216, Section 5; ASTM F 1743, Section 5; and ASTM D 5813, Sections 5, 6, and 8. Seams in the CIPP shall be stronger than the non-seamed felt. 7-22.2(2) Resin The resin shall be a chemically resistant isopthalic based polyester thermoset resin and catalyst system, or epoxy resin and hardener that is compatible with the installation process. Vinyl Esters may be used, however, they shall only be used when specifically called for by the Engineer. The resin should be able to cure both in the presence, and without the presence of water, and the initiation temperature for cure should be less that 180 degrees Fahrenheit. When properly cured the resin liner system shall meet the structural and chemical resistance requirements of ASTM F1216 and ASTM F1743. The activated resin shall contain a colorant compatible with the resin, organic peroxides and the installation and curing process, such as CreaNova® CHROMA CHEM 844 -7260 Phthalo- Blue, or equivalent, at a level of 0.01-0.035 % by the weight of the resin. The colorant shall be added concurrently with the organic peroxide activator solution, or immediately after adding it to the resin, to serve as a multi-purpose visual quality assurance indicator. 7-22.2(3) Physical Properties The wall color of the interior pipe surface of the CIPP after installation shall be a light reflective color. 7-22.3 Construction Requirements 7-22.3(1) Preparation 7-22.3(1)A Cleaning Clean and prepare pipe per CIPP Manufacturer’s or Assembler’s requirements. 7-22.3(2) Installation 7-22.3(2)A Resin Impregnation The quantity of resin used for the fabric tube impregnation shall be sufficient to fill the volume of all voids in the fabric tube material with additional allowances for polymerization shrinkage and the loss of resin through cracks and irregularities in the host pipe wal l. A vacuum impregnation process shall be used. To insure thorough resin saturation throughout the length of the felt tube the level of the vacuum and the speed of the resin advance shall be coordinated so that white spots (dry areas) at the inside surfac e of the flexible membrane shall be small, shallow, less than 10% of the fabric tube wall thickness or 3-mm, whichever is less, and be less than 1% of the volume of the resin per unit length. 07/05/2018 108 A roller system shall be used to uniformly distribute the resin throughout the fabric tube. The roller gap dimension shall be calculated by a method that determines the correct volume of resin/felt per foot contained within the confining perimeter of the flexible membrane. The "wet-out" fabric tube shall meet ASTM F 1216, 7.2 or ASTM F 1743, 6.2 as applicable, and shall have a uniform thickness and excess resin distribution that when compressed at installation pressures will meet or exceed the design thickness after cure. No dry or unsaturated layers shall be acceptable upon visual inspection as evident by color contrast between the felt fabric and the activated resin containing a colorant. The person in charge of the "wet-out" process shall complete and sign a "wet-out" sheet for each liner to be delivered to the site. The certified "wet-out" sheet shall include, but is not limited to, "wet-out" date, resin identification, fabric tube length, diameter, and thickness. The Contractor must submit to the Engineer the signed "wet -out" sheet for each liner delivered to the site. Additionally, the Contractor shall submit a sample "wet-out" sheet from a previous job for the Engineer's review prior to the start of the "wet -out" process for the current project. The Owner reserves the right to inspect all phases of production and testing of materials, from manufacturing, shipping, "wet-out", installation, and cure, to finished product Liners installed in pipe segments that contain a vertical or horizontal curve shall utilize the inversion method only. 7-22.3(2)B Water, Air or Steam Curing After placement of the liner is complete, provide a suitable heat source and distribution equipment. The equipment shall be capable of circulating hot water, air, and/or steam throughout the lined section in accordance with the Manufacturer’s or Assembler’s recommendations to raise the temperature uniformly above the temperature required to affect a resin cure. This temperature shall be determined by the Manufacturer or Assembler based on the resin/hardener system employed. The heat source shall be fitted with continuous monitoring thermocouples to measure and record the temperature of the incoming and outgoing water, steam, and/or air supply. Water, steam, or air temperature during the cure period shall meet the requirements of the resin Manufacturer or Assembler as measured and recorded at the heat source inflow and outflow return lines. Provide standby equipment to maintain the heat source supply. The temperature during the cure shall not be less than 130 degrees Fahrenheit at the boundary between the pipe wall and the liner unless otherwise directed by the Manufacturer or Assembler to meet resin system requirements. Temperature shall be maintained during the curing period as recommended by the resin Manufacturer or Assembler, and shall follow the heating schedule supplied by the Manufacturer or Assembler. A data logger shall record temperature, pressure, and time during activation, heating, and curing. 7-22.3(2)C Cool Down Cool the liner down to temperature specified by Manufacturer or Assembler following the cure period for duration specified by Manufacturer or Assembler, prior to relieving static head. 07/05/2018 109 Care shall be taken to ensure that a vacuum is not induced which could damage the new CIPP during the release of head on the new CIPP. A data logger shall record temperature, pressure, and time during cool down. 7-23 RESIN IMPREGNATED FIBERGLASS CIPP New Section 7-23.1 Description Contractor shall provide and install a resin impregnated fiberglass material tube with a plastic coated wearing surface in all sewers identified for CIPP lining in accordance with ASTM F 1216 and ASTM F 2019. 7-23.1(1) Related Work Specified Elsewhere General Specifications for Cured In Place Pipe (CIPP), Section 7-21. 7-23.1(2) Reference Specifications, Codes, and Standards The following documents form a part of this specification to the extent stated herein and shall be the latest editions thereof. Where differences exist between codes and standards, the one affording the greatest protection shall apply, as determined by the City. 7-23.1(3) CIPP Liner Samples The Contractor shall prepare samples of the installed CIPP liner for subsequent testing of its physical properties. Samples shall be prepared and tested using the flat plate sampling method in accordance with the procedures in Section 8.1 of ASTM F 1216 or ASTM F 2019, as is applicable. The sample will be constructed on the same materials (tube and resin/catalyst) as is used for that given liner installation. The flat plate sample shall be large enough to provide five sample specimens for each Short Term Flexural (Bending) properties as per ASTM D 790 and ASTM D 638 respectively. The cured sample shall be tested by an independent testing laboratory, as recommended by the CIPP liner manufacturer and approved by the Engineer, for the bending and tensile properties, as per ASTM D 790 and ASTM D 638 respectively. Final payment will not be made until test results are received. The Contractor shall be responsible for any deviation from the specified physical properties and those evaluated through testing. Failure to meet the Reference Title ASTM D 543 Test Method for Resistance of Plastics to Chemical Reagents ASTM D 578 Standard Specification Glass Fiber Strands ASTM D 638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics ASTM D 790 Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials ASTM D 883 Definitions and Terms Relating to Plastics ASTM D 1600 Abbreviations, Acronyms, and Codes for Terms Relating to Plastics ASTM F 412 Definitions of Terms relating to Plastic Piping Systems ASTM F 1216 Rehabilitation of Existing Pipelines and Conduits by Inversion and Curing of a Resin Impregnated Tube ASTM F 2019 Standard Practice for Rehabilitation of Existing Pipelines and Conduits by the Pulled in Place Installation of Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP) Cured-in-Place Thermosetting Resin Pipe (CIPP) 07/05/2018 110 specified physical properties will result in the CIPP liner being considered defective work which will be handled in accordance with Section 1-05 of the standard specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with the testing of the liner physical properties. The above-stated sampling shall be performed for each separate installation of CIPP. For example: one flat plate sample from each individual pipeline liner installed. The wall thickness of the material tube shall be ordered to the next standard 1.0 mm incremental thickness above the minimum calculated design thickness. Unless otherwise specified to provide for excess resin migration, the gap thickness of the wetting-out equipment shall be sized to allow an excess of 5 to 10 percent resin to pass during impregnation. The minimum wall thickness shall be determined at a minimum of three locations on a cut section of the CIPP flat plate sample using a method of measurement accurate to the nearest 0.005 inch. 7-23.1(4) CIPP Liner Handling Contractor shall exercise adequate care during transportation, handling, and installing to ensure the CIPP material is not torn, cut, or otherwise damaged. If any parts of the CIPP materials becomes torn, cut, or otherwise damaged before or during insertion, it shall be repaired or replaced in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and approval by the Engineer before proceeding further; and at the Contractor’s expense. 7-23.2 Materials 7-23.2(1) General Specifications All materials and installation procedures provided by the Contractor for use in the CIPP installation process shall be equal to or exceed the requirements of Sections 5 and 7 of ASTM F 1216 or ASTM F 2019 Section 5 and 6, as is applicable. Wrinkles in the finished liner pipe which cause a backwater of one (1) inch or more or reduce the hydraulic capacity of the pipe (wrinkles which exceed five (5) percent of the pipe diameter) are unacceptable and shall be removed or repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Wrinkles in the finished liner pipe that reduce the structural stability of the pipe are unacceptable. If a void between the wrinkle and the pipe exists, the Contractor shall repair or replace that section of the pipe at no additional cost to the Owner. Methods of repair shall be proposed by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for review. Contractor shall be responsible for control of all material and process variables to provide a finished CIPP possessing the minimum properties specified in ASTM F 1216 or ASTM F 2019, as is applicable and supplemented herein. 7-23.2(2) Chemical Resistance The chemical resistance tests should be completed in accordance with Test Method ASTM D 543. Exposure should be for a minimum of one month at 73.4 degrees F. During this period, the CIPP test specimens should lose no more than 20 percent of their initial flexural strength and flexural modulus when tested in accordance with Section 8 of ASTM F 1216 or ASTM F 1743, whichever is applicable. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with the chemical resistance tests. Proof of meeting these requirements shall be provided to the Engineer for approval at least ten (10) days prior to commencement of work. 7-23.2(3) Component Properties The fiberglass tubing shall be made of non-corrosion material and shall be free from tears, holes, cuts, foreign materials and other surface defects. 07/05/2018 111 The physical properties apply to CIPP manufactured polyester or vinylester resin. Resins should be appropriate for conditions encountered. 7-23.2(4) Finished and Cured CIPP Liner Properties The physical properties of the cured CIPP shall have minimum initial test values as given in Section 17-21. Properties for these or any other enhanced resins shall be substantiated with test data. 7-23.2(5) Dimensions Contractor shall make allowances in determining the in-liner tube length and circumference for stretch during installation and shrinkage during curing. The minimum length shall be that which continuously spans the distance from the center of the inlet manhole to the center of the outlet manhole. The Contractor shall verify the lengths in the field before the in -liner tube is cut and impregnated. Individual installation runs may include one or mo re manhole- to-manhole sections as approved by the Engineer. Installation of the liner shall be through existing or new manholes. Excavation for liner insertion shall not be permitted except to replace the manhole cones, if necessary and/or required. The diameter of the existing pipes may be larger than the nominal inside diameter. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to determine the required diameter of the liner. The maximum wall thickness shall be at least the calculated design thickness, or the minimum specified, to increase the diameter only as much as necessary. 7-23.3 Construction Requirements 7-23.3(1) Installation Procedures It is forbidden to “wet-out” in-liner at the construction site because of external influences such as heat, no possibilities to control vacuum and correct mixture of resin. The Contractor shall ensure that the pressure inside of the CIPP tube exceeds the outside pressure due to groundwater. 7-23.3(1)A Installation Process The liner will be installed by the pull/winch method. The Contractor has to make sure that at no time resin can come in contact to the groundwater and cause environmental issues. Preparing the old pipe or inversion of a pre-liner is part of the installation and is included without any additional costs. Before pulling the in-liner in, a protective foil has to be installed. The in-liner tube shall be impregnated with resin and lowered into the manhole. The tube shall then be pulled into position within the existing pipe with the aid of a power winch that is equipped with a device to monitor the force and prevent excessive tension and tube elongation as determined by the liner manufacturer. The pipe shall then be inflated with air. The in-liner has to be inspected immediately before starting the curing process. 7-23.3(1)B Curing Pre-curing video inspection of the inflated liner must be recorded and the entire length of the liner must be recorded including the liner section that the light chain occupies at any one time. Two cameras must be located on the light chain, one on the front and one on the rear of the light chain to insure the entire length of the liner has been properly inflated. Curing must be done under UV – Light only. The curing process shall follow a step cure or similar approach recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer, and shall be held at the top step for an adequate length of time as determined by the liner manufacturer to ensure that the design physical properties are attained. Pressure, temperature and curing process shall be monitored by both, computer and video at any time as determined by the liner manufacturer. 07/05/2018 112 7-23.3(2) Finished Product The finished CIPP shall be continuous over the entire length of an installation run. Defects such as foreign inclusions, dry spots, pinholes, de -lamination, and wrinkling beyond the specification allowances, determined by the Engineer as affecting the integrity or strength of the CIPP, or as adversely affecting the hydraulic capacity of the CIPP, shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor’s expense. 8-02 ROADSIDE RESTORATION 8-02.3(4)A Topsoil Type A Section 8-02.3(4)A is supplemented with the following: (******) The contractor shall provide a material submittal for topsoil prior to use. 8-02.3(16) Lawn Installation Section 8-02.3(16) is revised and supplemented as follows: (******) 8-02.3(16)A Lawn Installation Section 8-02.3(16)A has been deleted and superseded with the following: (******) 8-02.3(16)A1 Qualifications of Workmen Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of the Work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the best methods for their installation and who shall direct all work performed under this section. 8-02.3(16)A2 Submittals 8-02.3(16)A2a Certification of Material 1. Include seed mix percentages, purity, germination rates, weed experience, and date tested for the preceding. Include complete data on source, size and quality. 2. Supply on-site 12” x 12” sample of each sod specified for inspection and approval in advance by the City. 3. Supply Grower’s written recommendations for fertilizer type, rate of application, and frequency. 4. All certificates required by law shall accompany shipments. 5. Upon completion of the installation and prior to final inspection, deliver all certificates to the Engineer. 8-02.3(16)A2b Manufacturer’s Certificates of Conformance 1. Supply for Certificates of Conformance for fertilizer being used for the project. 8-02.3(16)A2c Schedule for Installation 1. The Contractor shall coordinate all work with the City and submit a watering plan for the Establishment Period. 07/05/2018 113 8-02.3(16)A3 Product Handling Deliver all items to the site in their original containers, with all labels intact and legible, at the time of the City’s inspection. Coordinate delivery and installation of sod to ensure sod is installed immediately upon delivery. Use all means necessary to protect new lawn areas before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. In the event of damage or rejection, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary for the approval of the Inspector and at no additional cost to the City. 8-02.3(16)A4 Site Information If sod is stored onsite, preserve and protect all sod on site prior to and during installation. Protect from wind, drought, unusual weather and vandalism. Store all sod on site within limits of work. Protect adjacent property, public walks, curbs and pavement from damage. Do not block public access routes with plant material. 8-02.3(16)A5 Sod The Contractor shall provide sod to all new lawn areas and to those lawn areas requiring restoration from the Contractor’s operations. Sod shall conform to section 9-14.6(8) as shown in the Special Provisions. 8-02.3(16)A5a Other Materials All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper planting installation, shall be selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Engineer. 8-02.3(16)A6 Execution Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. Verify that lawn installation may be completed in accordance with the original design and the referenced standards. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Engineer for specific instructions. 8-02.3(16)A6a Installation Preparation 1. Prepare subgrade in all lawn areas by scarifying to a 8” minimum depth and removing rocks and debris over 1” in diameter. Subgrade soils should be free-draining and without any impervious soils or other materials harmful to plant growth. Notify the Inspector of any subgrade conditions deleterious to plant growth. 2. Spread topsoil to a minimum depth of 6” after settlement in all lawn areas. 3. Thoroughly rototill topsoil to a minimum depth of 6 inches. 4. Fine grade per Contract Specifications in turf areas as indicated on drawings. Rake entire surface to conform to site grading. Grade edges to 1” below adjacent paved surfaces to provide a smooth transition. Roll as necessary to firm grade to satisfaction of the Inspector. 5. Apply fertilizer to the prepared lawn areas at rates recommended by sod grower and lightly rake to incorporate into the soil. 07/05/2018 114 8-02.3(16)A6b Sod Installation 1. Moisten sod bed and roll lightly for compaction. 2. Lay sod strips per supplier’s instructions. Tightly butt joints, trim edges to conform to smooth curves and straight lines of pavement. Sod is to be flush with paved surfaces after settlement. Avoid gaps and overlaps and stagger sod joints in a brick-like fashion. 3. Remove any bumps, undulations, or low-high spots with a light rolling. 4. Water daily for a minimum of two weeks to prevent dehydration. 5. Protect all turf areas by erecting temporary fences, barriers, signs, etc. as necessary to prevent trampling. 6. Do not work in, over, or adjacent to planting areas without proper protection and safeguards. 8-02.3(16)B Lawn Establishment Section 8-02.3(16)B has been deleted and superseded with the following: (******) 8-02.3(16)B Lawn Establishment and Final Acceptance The Contractor shall maintain all new lawn areas in this project; shall be responsible for the survival of turf in acceptable condition and shall maintain all new lawn areas in a neat and orderly fashion until Final Acceptance of the project by the City. The period for Final Acceptance shall be no sooner than the second mowing. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage or loss caused by his inattention or carelessness. The Contractor shall repair damage caused by traffic, vandalism, weather or other outside causes. 8-02.3(16)B1 Establishment Period The Establishment Period will commence on the date of Preliminary Acceptance and will extend to Substantial Completion or Final Acceptance by the City of landscape work, whichever is later. Maintenance during this period will include: 1. Watering: Water areas of new turf so they receive adequate water for survival of the plant in a healthy position. 2. Lawns shall be fertilized every six weeks from March through September per Grower’s written recommendations. Lawns shall be maintained weed-free. 3. Lawns are to be mowed weekly or as needed to maintain a neat appearance. All grass clippings shall be removed from the site. Maximum height of lawn shall not exceed three inches. 4. Protect all lawn areas against damage, including erosion and trespassing, by providing and maintaining proper safeguards. 5. Debris Control: Debris control shall be accomplished in all landscaped lawn areas on a regular basis, at least weekly or more often where necessary. This will include leaf fall control in Fall period. Policing for paper and litter in all areas shall be conducted at least 07/05/2018 115 weekly. During the Fall period leaves, windblown into gutters and catch basins, are considered as litter and shall be removed as debris. 8-02.3(16)B2 Guarantee All new turf areas shall be guaranteed by the Contractor to be in a healthy condition for a period of one year from the date of Final Acceptance. 8-02.3(16)B3 Final Acceptance Acceptance of lawn planting as specified shall be based on a uniform stand of grass and a uniform grade at the time of final inspection. Final inspection of the work of the Section will be made at the time of the Final Inspection of the entire project or earlier, if approved by the Engineer. A final punch list will be issued. Final Acceptance of the new turf areas which are the responsibility of the Contractor will be contingent upon Final Acceptance of the entire project or at the determination of the City if earlier than Final Acceptance of the entire project. 8-09 RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS 8-09.5 Payment Section 8-09.5 has been revised as follows: (******) Payment will be made for each of the following bid items that are included in the proposal: “Raised Pavement Marker Type 1”, per each. “Raised Pavement Marker Type 2”, per each. “Raised Pavement Marker Type 3-______ In.”, per each. “Recessed Pavement Marker”, per each. The unit contract price per each for “Raised Pavement Marker Type 1”, “Raised Pavement Marker Type 2”, and “Raised Pavement Marker Type 3-______ In.” and “Recessed Pavement Marker” shall be full pay for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for furnishing and installing the markers in accordance with these Specifications, including all cost involved with traffic control unless traffic control is listed in the Contract as a separate pay item. 8-13 MONUMENT CASES 8-13.1 Description Section 8-13.1 is revised and supplemented as follows: (******) This Work shall consist of furnishing and placing monument cases and covers, in accordance with the Standard Plans and these Specifications, in conformity with the lines and locations shown in the Plans or as staked by the Engineer or by the Contractor supplied Surveyor. 8-13.3 Construction Requirements Paragraphs 2 and 3 of Section 8-13.3 is revised and supplemented as follows: (******) The monument will be furnished and set by the Engineer or by the Contractor supplied Surveyor. When existing monuments will be impacted by a project, the Contractor shall be responsible for 07/05/2018 116 assuring that a registered surveyor references the existing monuments prior to construction. After construction is complete, the monuments shall be re-established by the Surveyor in accordance with RCW58.09.130. 8-13.4 Measurement Section 8-13.4 is supplemented by adding the following: (******) All costs for surveying and resetting existing monuments impacted by construction shall be considered incidental to the Contract unless specifically called out to be paid as a bid item. 8-13.5 Payment Section 8-13.5 is supplemented by adding the following: (******) "Reset Existing Monument" per each. Resetting an existing monument impacted by construction shall be incidental unless included as a pay item in the Schedule of Prices. 8-14 CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 8-14.3(4) Curing Section 8-14.3(4) is replaced with: (******) The curing materials and procedures outlined in Section 5-05.3(13) of the Standard Specifications shall prevail, except that white pigmented curing compound shall not be used on sidewalks. The curing agent shall be applied immediately after brushing and be maintained for a period of 5 days. The Contractor shall have readily available sufficient protective covering, such as waterproof paper or plastic membrane, to cover the pour of an entire day in the event of rain or other unsuitable weather. During the curing period, all traffic, both pedestrian and vehicular, shall be excluded. Vehicular traffic shall be excluded for such additional time as the Engineer may specify. The Contractor shall be responsible for barricading, patrolling, or otherwise protecting the newly placed concrete to prevent damage. Damaged, vandalized, discolored, stained, or unsightly concrete shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. 8-14.4 Measurement Section 8-14.4 is supplemented by adding the following: (******) When the Contract contains a pay item for "Curb Ramp, Cement Concrete," the per each measurement shall include all costs for the complete installation per the Plans and standard details including expansion joint material, curb and gutter and ramped sidewalk section. Sawcutting, removal and disposal of excavated materials including existing pavement and sidewalk, crushed surfacing base materials and all other Work, materials and equipment required per Section 8-14, shall be included in the per each price for "Curb Ramp, Cement Concrete" unless any of these other items are listed and specified to be paid as separate pay items. If the Contract does not provide a pay item for "Curb Ramp, Cement Concrete," but the Plans call for such installation, then quantities shall be measured with and paid for under the bid items for Curb and Gutter and for Cement Concrete Sidewalk. When curb ramps are to be constructed of asphalt concrete, the payment shall be included in the pay item for "Miscellaneous and/or Driveway Asphalt Concrete." 8-14.5 Payment Section 8-14.5 is supplemented by adding the following: (******) "Curb Ramp, Cement Concrete," per each. 07/05/2018 117 Payment for excavation of material not related to the construction of the sidewalk but necessary before the sidewalk can be placed, when and if shown in the Plans, will be made in accordance with the provisions of Section 2-03. Otherwise, the Contractor shall make all excavations including haul and disposal, regardless of the depth required for constructing the sidewalk to the lines and grades shown, and shall include all costs thereof in the unit contract price per square yard for “Cement Concrete Sidewalk” and the per each contract price for “Curb Ramp, Cement Concrete.” 8-17 IMPACT ATTENUATOR SYSTEMS 8-17.5 Payment Section 8-17.5 is supplemented by the following: (******) If no pay item is included for temporary impact attenuators then all costs to provide and install shall be considered a part of the pay item for "Traffic Control." 8-20 ILLUMINATION, TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEMS, AND ELECTRICAL 8-20.2(1) Equipment List and Drawings (******) Paragraph four of Section 8-20.2(1) is revised and supplemented with the following: The Contractor shall submit for approval six sets of shop drawings for each of the following types of standards called for on this project: 1. Light standards with or without pre-approved Plans. 2. Signal standards with or without pre-approved Plans. 3. Combination Signal and lighting standards. 4. Metal Strain Poles. Paragraph five of Section 8-20.2(1) is deleted. Paragraph six of Section 8-20.2(1) is deleted. Section 8-20.2(1) is supplemented as follows: The Contractor also shall submit either on the signal standard shop drawings or attached to the signal standard shop drawings all dimensions to clearly show the specific mast arm mounting height and signal tenon locations for each signal pole to be installed. 8-22 PAVEMENT MARKING 8-22.1 Description The following item in Section 8-22.1 is revised as follows: (******) Crosswalk Stripe A SOLID WHITE line, 8 inches wide and 10-feet long, installed parallel to another crosswalk stripe and parallel to the direction of traffic flow and centered in pairs on lane lines and the center of lanes. See detail sheet. Skip Center Line (Replacement) A BROKEN YELLOW line 4 inches wide. The broken or “skip” pattern shall be based on a 24-foot unit consisting of a 9-foot line and a 15-foot gap. Skip center strip is used as centerline delineation on two- lane or three-lane, two-way highways. Double Yellow Center Line (Replacement) Two SOLID YELLOW lines, each 4 inches wide, separated by a 4-inch space. Double yellow center stripe is used as centerline delineation on multilane, two-way highways and for channelization. 07/05/2018 118 Approach Line (New) A SOLID WHITE line, 8 inches wide, used to separate left and right turning movements from through movements, to separate high occupancy vehicle lanes from general-purpose lanes, for islands, hash marks, and other applications. Hash mark stripes shall be placed on 45-degree angle and 10 feet apart. Lane Line (Replacement) A BROKEN WHITE line, 4 inches wide, used to delineate adjacent lanes traveling in the same direction. The broken or “skip” pattern shall be based on a 24-foot unit consisting of a 9-foot line and a 15-foot gap. Two Way Left Turn Line (Replacement) A SOLID YELLOW line, 4 inches wide, with a BROKEN YELLOW line, 4 inches wide, separated by a 4-inch space. The broken or “skip” pattern shall be based on a 24-foot unit consisting of a 9-foot line and a 15-foot space. The solid line shall be installed to the right of the broken line in the direction of travel. Crosswalk Line (Replacement) A SOLID WHITE line, 8 inches wide and 10 feet long, installed parallel to another crosswalk stripe and parallel to the direction of traffic flow and centered in pairs on lane lines and the center of lanes. See detail sheet. Stop Line (Replacement) A SOLID WHITE line 12, 18, or 24 inches wide as noted on the Contract Plans. 8-22.3(5) Installation Instructions Section 8-22.3(5) is revised as follows: (******) A manufacturer’s technical representative need not be present at the initial material installation to approve the installation procedure. 8-22.5 Payment Section 8-22.5 is supplemented as follows: (******) “Approach Stripe,” per linear foot. "Remove Paint Line ....." wide," per linear foot.* "Remove Plastic Line ......" Wide," per linear foot.* "Remove existing traffic markings, "per Lump Sum.* *The linear foot contract price for "Remove Paint Line" and "Remove Plastic Line" and the lump sum contract price for "Remove existing traffic markings" shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, tools, material, and equipment necessary for removal of existing traffic markings as per the Plans, Specifications and detail sheets. If these pay items do not appear in the contract schedule of prices, then the removal of old or conflicting traffic markings required to complete the channelization of the project as shown on the Plans or detail sheets shall be considered incidental to other items in the Contract and no further compensation shall be made. 8-23 TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS 8-23.5 Payment Section 8-23.5 is supplemented with the following: (******) If no pay item is included in the Contract for installation, or for removal of temporary pavement markings, then all costs associated with these items are considered incidental to other items in the Contract or included under "Traffic Control," if that item is included as a bid item. 07/05/2018 119 9-03.8(7) HMA Tolerances and Adjustments Item 1 is deleted and replaced with: (******) 1. Job Mix Formula Tolerances. After the JMF is determined as required in 5-04.3(7)A, the constituents of the mixture at the time of acceptance shall conform to the following tolerances: Nonstatistical Commercial Evaluation Evaluation Aggregate, percent passing 1”, ¾”, ½”, and 3/8” sieves 6% 8% U.S. No. 4 sieve 6% 8% U.S. No. 8 sieve 6% 8% U.S. No. 16 sieve 4% 6% U.S. No. 30 sieve 4% 6% U.S. No. 50 sieve 4% 6% U.S. No. 100 sieve 3% 5% U.S. No. 200 sieve 2.0% 3.0% Asphalt Binder 0.5% 0.7% VMA 1.5% below minimum value in 9-03.8(2) VFA minimum and maximum as listed in 9-03.8(2) Va 2.5% minimum and 5.5% maximum These tolerance limits constitute the allowable limits as described in Section 1-06.2. The tolerance limit for aggregate shall not exceed the limits of the control point’s section, except the tolerance limits for sieves designated as 100% passing will be 99-100. 9-03.22 Cement-based Grout for Abandoning Existing Utilities (Additional Section) Section 9-03.22 is a new section: (******) The Contractor shall submit a mix proposal that has flow characteristics appropriate for filling a utility pipeline. The mix proposal for “Cement-base Grout for Abandoning Existing Utilities” shall be approved by the Engineer prior to commencing work on this item. Cement-based Grout for Abandoning Existing Utilities shall be equal to a 1-sack mix and the materials shall conform to the following: Cement: This material shall be Portland cement as specified in section 9-01. Aggregate: This material shall meet the requirements for fine aggregate as specified in section 9- 03.1. Water: Water shall conform to the provisions of Section 9-25.1. Minimum Strength: 100 psi 9-05 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, CULVERTS, AND CONDUITS 9-05.4 Steel Culvert Pipe and Pipe Arch (RC) Section 9-05.4 is revised as follows: (******) Steel culvert pipe and pipe arch shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 36, Type I and Type II. Welded seam aluminum coated (aluminized) corrugated steel pipe and pipe arch with metallized coating applied inside and out following welding is acceptable and shall be asphalt treatment coated. 07/05/2018 120 9-05.7(2) Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe (RC) Section 9-05.7(2) is replaced by the following: (******) Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C-76 and shall be Class IV. Cement used in the manufacture of reinforced concrete pipe shall be Type II in conformance with ASTM C150. No admixture shall be used unless otherwise specified. 9-05.7(2)A Basis for Acceptance (RC) Section 9-05.7(2)A is supplemented by the following: (******) All pipe shall be subject to (1) a three-edge-bearing strength (D-load) test in accordance with ASTM C76; and (2) a hydrostatic test of rubber gasket joints in accordance with ASTM C361 or AWWA C302 except test pressure shall be 5 psi. 9-05.7(3) Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe Joints (RC) Section 9-05.7(3) is replaced by the following: (******) Joint assembly design shall be reinforced concrete bell and spigot type incorporating a fully retained single rubber gasket in accordance with ASTM C361 or AWWA C302. Rubber gasket material shall be neoprene. 9-05.7(4) Testing Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe Joints (RC) Section 9-05.7(4) is supplemented by the following: (******) Hydrostatic testing of rubber gasket joints shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C361 or AWWA C302 except test pressure shall be 5 psi. 9-05.9 Steel Spiral Rib Storm Sewer Pipe (RC) Section 9-05.9 is replaced with: (******) The manufacturer of spiral rib storm sewer pipe shall furnish the Engineer a Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance stating that the materials furnished comply in all respects with these Specifications. The Engineer may require additional information or tests to be performed by the Contractor at no expense to the City. Unless otherwise specified, spiral rib storm sewer pipe shall be furnished with pipe ends cut perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. Pipe ends shall be cut evenly. Spiral rib pipe shall be fabricated either by using a continuous helical lock seam or a continuous helical welded seam paralleling the rib. Steel spiral rib storm sewer pipe shall be manufactured of metallic coated (aluminized or galvanized) corrugated steel and inspected in conformance with Section 9-05.4. The size, coating, and metal shall be as shown in the Plans or in the Specifications. For spiral rib storm sewer pipe, helical ribs shall project outwardly from the smooth pipe wall and shall be fabricated from a single thickness of material. The ribs shall be essentially rectangular and shall be 3/4 inch plus two times the wall thickness (2t) plus or minus 1/8 inch (measured outside to outside) and a minimum of 0.95 inch high (measured as the minimum vertical distance from the outside of pipe wall immediately adjacent to the lockseam or stiffener to the top surface of rib). The maximum spacing of the ribs shall be 11.75 inches center to center (measured normal to the direction of the ribs). The radius of bend of the metal at the corners of the ribs shall be a minimum of 0.10 inch and a maximum of 0.17 inch. If the sheet between adjacent ribs does not contain a lockseam, a stiffener shall be included midway between ribs, having a nominal radius of 0.25 inch and a minimum height of 0.20 inch toward the outside of the pipe. Pipe shall be fabricated with ends that can be effectively jointed with coupling bands. When required, spiral rib or narrow pitch spiral rib pipe shall be bituminous treated or paved. The bituminous treatment for spiral rib pipe shall conform to the requirements of Sections 9 -05.4(3) and 07/05/2018 121 9-05.4(4). For narrow pitch spiral rib sewer pipe, the helical ribs shall project outwardly from the smooth pipe wall and shall be fabricated from a single thickness of material. The ribs shall be .375 inch + 1/8 inch wide (measured outside to outside) and a minimum of .4375 inch high (measured as the minimum vertical distance of ribs shall be 4.80 inches center to center (measured normal to the direction of the ribs). The radius of bend of the metal at the corners of the ribs shall be 0.0625 inch with an allowable tolerance of + 10 percent. 9-05.12 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe Section 9-05.12(3) is a new additional section: (******) 9-05.12(3) CPEP Sewer Pipe Section 9-05.12(3) is a new additional section: (******) CPEP - Smooth interior pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from high density polyethylene resin which shall meet or exceed the requirements of Type 111, Category 4 or 5, Grade P33 or P34, Class C per ASTM D1248. In addition, the pipe shall comply with all material and stiffness requirements of AASHTO M294. 9-05.14 ABS Composite Sewer Pipe Section 9-05.14 is deleted (******) 9-05.17 Aluminum Spiral Rib Storm Sewer Pipe Section 9-05.17 is replaced with: (******) Unless otherwise specified, spiral rib storm sewer pipe shall be furnished with pipe ends cut perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. Pipe ends shall be cut evenly. Spiral rib pipe shall be fabricated by using a continuous helical lock seam with a seam gasket. For spiral rib storm sewer pipe, helical ribs shall project outwardly from the smooth pipe wall and shall be fabricated from a single thickness of material. The ribs shall be 3/4 inch wide by 3/4 inch deep with a nominal spacing of 7-1/2 inches center to center. Pipe shall be fabricated with ends that can be effectively jointed with coupling bands. For narrow pitch spiral rib storm sewer pipe, helical ribs shall project outwardly from the smooth pipe wall and shall be fabricated from a single thickness of material. The ribs shall be 0.375 inch + 1/8 inch wide (measured outside to outside) and a minimum spacing of ribs shall be 4.80 inches center to center (measured normal to the direction of the ribs). The radius of bend of the metal at the corners of the ribs shall be 0.0625 inch with an allowable tolerance of + 10 percent. For wide pitch spiral rib storm sewer pipe, helical ribs shall project outwardly from the smooth pipe wall and shall be fabricated from a single thickness of material. The ribs shall be 3/4 inch + 1/8 inch wide (measured outside to outside) and a minimum of 0.95 inch high (measured as the minimum vertical distance from the outside of pipe wall to top surface of the rib). The maximum spacing of ribs shall be 11.75 inches center to center (measured normal to the direction of the ribs). The radius of bend of the metal at the corners of the ribs shall be 0.0625 inch with an allowable tolerance of + 10 percent. 9-05.20 Corrugated Polyethylene Storm Sewer Pipe (CPEP) Section 9-05.19 is replaced with the following: (******) 07/05/2018 122 9-05.20(1) Description Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe (CPEP) shall be corrugated high-density polyethylene pipe with smooth internal wall manufactured by Advanced Drainage Systems (ADS), or approved equivalent. 9-05.20(2) Pipe Material and Fabrication CPEP shall be in conformance with the latest version of ASTM F 667 or AASHTO M 294, Type S. 9-05.20(3) Fittings and Gaskets Fittings shall be gasketed PVC fittings. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F 477. Fittings shall conform to ASTM F 1536 or ASTM D 3212. Fittings shall be manufactured by Nyloplast USA, Inc., or approved equivalent. 9-05.20(4) Installation Pipe and fittings shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendations. Lubricate gasket and fitting socket with manufacturer-approved lubricant prior to pushing pipe into fitting. 9-05.22 High Density Polyethylene Piping Section 9-05.22 is a new section: (******) DRISCOPLEX 4100 High-density Polyethylene Piping 1 General Terms and Conditions 1.1 Scope - This Specification covers requirements for DriscoPlex 4100 PE 3408 high-density polyethylene piping. All Work shall be performed in accordance with these Specifications. 1.2 Engineered and Approved Plans - Construction shall be performed in accordance with Engineered Construction Plans for the Work prepared under the direction of a Professional Engineer. 1.3 Referenced Standards - Where all or part of a federal, ASTM, ANSI, AWWA, etc., Standard Specification is incorporated by reference in these Specifications, the reference standard shall be the latest edition and revision. 1.4 Licenses and Permits – The Contractor shall be licensed and bonded. 1.5 Inspections - All Work shall be inspected by an Authorized Representative of the City who shall have the authority to halt construction if, in his opinion, these Specifications or standard construction practices are not being followed. Whenever any portion of these Specifications is violated, the Engineer shall, by written notice, order further construction to cease until all deficiencies are corrected. 2 Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings 2.1 Qualifications of Manufacturers - The manufacturer shall have manufacturing and quality assurance facilities capable of producing and assuring the quality of the pipe and fittings required by these Specifications. The manufacturer’s production facilities shall be open for inspection by the City 07/05/2018 123 or his Authorized Representative. The Project Engineer shall approve qualified manufacturers. 2.2 Materials - Black PE materials used for the manufacture of polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be PE 3408 high density polyethylene, meeting ASTM D 3350 cell classification 345464C and shall be listed in the name of the pipe and fitting manufacturer in PPI (Plastics Pipe Institute) TR-4, with a standard grade HDB rating of 1600 psi at 73F. Color material, when used, shall be the same except for meeting ASTM D 3350 cell classification 345464E. The material shall be listed and approved for potable water in accordance with NSF Standard 61. When requested on the order, the manufacturer shall certify that the materials used to manufacture pipe and fittings meet these requirements. 2.3 Interchangeability of Pipe and Fittings - The same qualified and approved manufacturer shall produce polyethylene pipe and fittings. Products such as fittings or flange adapters made by sub- contractors or distributors are prohibited. 2.4 Polyethylene Fittings & Custom Fabrications - Polyethylene fittings and custom fabrications shall be molded or fabricated by the approved pipe manufacturer. All fittings and custom fabrications shall be pressure rated for the same internal pressure rating as the mating pipe. 2.5 Molded Fittings - Molded fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with ASTM D 3261 and shall be so marked. Molded fittings shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C906. 2.6 Fabricated Fittings - Fabricated fittings shall be made by heat fusion joining specially machined shapes cut from pipe, polyethylene sheet stock or molded fittings. Fabricated fittings shall be rated for internal pressure service at least equal to the full service pressure rating of the mating pipe. Fabricated fittings shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C906. 2.7 Polyethylene Flange Adapters - Flange adapters shall be made with sufficient through-bore length to be clamped in a butt fusion-joining machine without the use of a stub-end holder. The sealing surface of the flange adapter shall be machined with a series of small v-shaped grooves (serrations) to promote gasketless sealing, or restrain the gasket against blowout. 2.8 Back-up Rings & Flange Bolts - Flange adapters shall be fitted with back-up rings that are pressure rated equal to or greater than the mating pipe. The back-up ring bore shall be chamfered or radiused to provide clearance to the flange adapter radius. Flange bolts and nuts shall be Grade 3 or higher. 9-05.24 Polypropylene Culvert Pipe, Polypropylene Storm Sewer Pipe, and Polypropylene Sanitary Sewer Pipe This sections content is deleted and replaced with the following: (******) All joints for polypropylene pipe shall be made with a bell/bell or bell and spigot coupling and shall conform to ASTM D 3212 using elastomeric gaskets conforming to ASTM F 477. All gaskets shall be factory installed on the pipe in accordance with the producer’s recommendations. Qualification for each producer of polypropylene storm sewer pipe requires joint system conformance to ASTM D 3212 using elastomeric gaskets conforming to ASTM F 477 and a formal quality control plan for each plant proposed for consideration. 07/05/2018 124 A Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance shall be required and shall accompany the materials delivered to the project. The certificate shall clearly identify production lots for all materials represented. The Contracting Agency may conduct verification tests of pipe stiffness or other properties it deems appropriate. This section is supplemented with the following new sub-sections: 9-05.24(1) Polypropylene Culvert Pipe and Storm Sewer Pipe Polypropylene culvert and storm sewer pipe shall conform to the following requirements: 1. For dual wall pipe sizes up to 30 inches: ASTM F2736. 2. For triple wall pipe sizes from 30 to 60 inches: ASTM F2764. 3. For dual wall profile pipe sizes 36 to 60 inches: AASHTO MP 21, Type S or Type D. 4. Fittings shall be factory welded, injection molded or PVC. 9-05.24(2) Polypropylene Sanitary Sewer Pipe Polypropylene sanitary sewer pipe shall conform to the following requirements: 1. For pipe sizes up to 30 inches: ASTM F2736. 2. For pipe sizes from 30 to 60 inches: ASTM F2764. 3. Fittings shall conform to ASTM F2764. Bell & spigot connections shall utilize a spun- 0n, welded or integral bell and spigot with gaskets meeting ASTM F477. Fitting joints shall be watertight joint performance requirements of ASTM D3212. 9-05.52 Dense Foam Section 9-05.52 is a New Section as follows: (******) Dense foam shall be Ethafoam HS 600 high density, polyethylene foam, as manufactured by Dow Chemical Company, or approved equivalent. 9-08 PAINTS 9-08.8 Manhole Coating System Products Section 9-08.8 is a new section and subsections: (******) 9-08.8(1) Coating Systems Specification A. High Solids Urethane Coating System: C1 Coating Material: High Solids Urethane Surfaces: Concrete Surface Preparation: In accordance with SSPC SP-7 (Sweep or brush off blast) Application: Shop/Field: The drying time between coats shall not exceed 24 hours in any case 07/05/2018 125 System Thickness: 6.0 mils dry film Coatings: Primer: One coat of Wasser MC-Aroshield high solids urethane (2.0 DFT) Finish: Two or more coats of Wasser MC- Aroshield (min. 4.0 DFT) Color: White 9-14 EROSION CONTROL AND ROADSIDE PLANTING 9-14.1(1) Topsoil Type A Section 9-14.1(1) is supplemented with the following: (******) Planting soil / topsoil shall consist of loose, moderately well-drained, friable soil of sandy loam texture, free of ice, snow and rubbish with no admixture of refuse or material toxic to plant growth. Soil shall be reasonably free of stones, lumps, roots, and weeds or similar objects. Topsoil should be fertile and free-flowing (pulverized). Topsoil shall be Mycorrhizae inoculated. Topsoil shall meet the following parameters: Parameter Range pH 6.7-7.5 Moisture Content 25%-55% Soluble Salts 2.5 mmhos/(dS) Coarse Sand 50%max (by weight) Clay 25%max (by weight) Silt 15%max (by weight) Organic matter 10%max (by weight) 9-14.6(8) Sod Section 9-14.6(8) is supplemented with the following: (******) Sod shall be nursery-grown (farm-grown) under climatic conditions similar to or hardier than those at the site. Sod shall have normal habit of growth and be healthy, vigorous and free of disease, insects, insect eggs and larvae. Sod material shall meet or exceed the specification of Federal, State and local laws requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control. Sod: Non-net “Premium Shadow Master” Sod Mixture from Emerald Turfgrass Farms, Inc., Sumner, WA, Ph: 253 838 9911 or 425 641 0608, or approved equal. Approved equal must be from a local grower and be established in growing sod in sandy loam soils. Sod grown in heavy clay soils is not acceptable. All required certifications apply for “approved equal”. Sod shall contain 65% perennial turf-type ryegrass by weight and 35% hard fescue by weight. 9-23 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS AND ADMIXTURES 9-23.9 Fly Ash (RC) Section 9-23.9 is revised as follows: (******) Fly ash shall not be used around water lines. 9-30 WATER DISTRIBUTION MATERIALS 9-30.1 Pipe Section 9-30.1 is supplemented and revised as follows: (******) All materials for water distribution and transmission shall be new and undamaged. Prior to ordering 07/05/2018 126 any pipe and fittings to be used in a potable water supply, the Contractor shall submit the material source as required by Section 1-06.1 of the Standard Specifications. All direct and indirect drinking water system components which come in contact with potable water shall have National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) certification. All pipe and fittings shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer’s name, type, class, and thickness as applicable and shall be marked on the component at the place of manufacture. Marking shall be legible and permanent under normal conditions of handling and storage. 9-30.1(1) Ductile Iron Pipe Section 9-30.1(1) is revised to read as follows: (******) 1. Ductile iron pipe shall be centrifugally cast in 18 or 20 foot nominal lengths and meet the requirements of AWWA C151. Ductile iron pipe shall have a double thick cement mortar lining and a 1-mil thick seal coat meeting the requirements of AWWA C104. Ductile iron pipe shall be minimum Standard Thickness Class 52 or the thickness class as shown in the Plans. Flanged ductile iron pipe shall be Class 53 per AWWA C115. 2. Non-restrained joint shall be rubber gasket, push-on type joint (Tyton) or mechanical joint (M.J.) conforming to AWWA C111, unless otherwise specified. 3. Restrained joints shall be as specified in Section 9-30.2(6). 4. Flanged joints shall conform to ANSI B16.1, class 125 drilling pattern, rated for 250 psi working pressure. Flanged ductile iron pipe shall be Class 53 per AWWA C 115. Thicker Classes are acceptable. The Contractor shall furnish certification from the manufacturer of the pipe and gasket being supplied that the inspection and all of the specified tests have been made and the results thereof comply with the requirements of the above referenced standards. 9-30.1(2) Polyethylene Encasement Section 9-30.1(2) is supplemented and revised as follows: (******) Polyethylene encasement (plastic film wrap) shall be eight mil polyethylene, tube type conforming to AWWA C105. All ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be installed with a polyethylene encasement, tube-type and in black color. 9-30.2 Fittings 9-30.2(1) Ductile Iron Pipe Section 9-30.2(1) is supplemented and revised as follows: (******) Fittings for ductile iron pipe shall be ductile iron conforming to AWWA C110, and AWWA C111 or AWWA C153 and shall be cement-lined conforming to AWWA C104. All water main fittings shall be ductile iron, short body, cement lined and for pressure rating of 350 psi for mechanical joint fittings and 250 psi for flange joint fittings, unless otherwise specified. Metal thickness and manufacturing process shall conform to applicable portions of ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10. Mechanical joint, ductile iron, compact fittings 24 inches and less shall conform to ANSI A21.53 (AWWA C153). Flanged fittings, cast or ductile iron, shall conform to ANSI B16.1, class 125 drilling pattern. Ductile iron fittings include: tees, crosses, wyes, bends, adapters, sleeves, plugs, caps, offsets, reducers, and ells. Rubber gaskets for push-on joints (Tyton) or mechanical joint (M.J.) shall conform to ANSI A21.11 / AWWA C111. Gasket materials for flange joints shall be neoprene, Buna N, chlorinated butyl, or cloth- inserted rubber suitable for pressurized water service purposes. Type of connections shall be specified as push-on joint (Tyton), mechanical joint (M.J.), plain end (P.E.), flanged (FL), restrained joint (RJ) and threaded. 07/05/2018 127 Sleeves less than 12 inches in diameter shall be 12 inches minimum length and shall be mechanical joint. Sleeves greater than 12 inches in diameter shall be of the long body type and shall be 15 inches minimum length and shall be mechanical joint. Where ductile iron pipe is to be joined to existing cast iron pipe of the same nominal size and the outside diameter of the existing cast iron pipe is 0.05 inches or less from the outside diameter of the ductile iron pipe being joined, the pipe shall be joined with a mechanical joint sleeve. Where ductile iron pipe is to be joined to existing cast iron pipe of the same nominal size and the outside diameter of the existing cast iron pipe conforms to AWWA 1908 classifications A, B, C, D, or F, the pipe shall be joined with a transition mechanical joint sleeve having a single-piece casting. Threaded pipe and flanges combinations shall not be used. Bolts in piping and fittings shall be malleable iron, Cor-ten or stainless steel. Bolts and nuts for flanged pipe and fittings shall conform in size and length with ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Stainless steel bolts shall meet the requirements of ASTM A-307, Grade A. Shackle rods shall be Cor-ten or stainless steel all thread 316SS. Stainless steel nuts and bolts shall be type 316SS. Contractor shall provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance in accordance with Section 1-06.3 Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance of the Standards Specifications for all fittings and bolts to be used. 9-30.2(2) Galvanized Iron Pipe Section 9-30.2(2) is a new section and shall read as follows: (******) Where galvanized iron pipe is specified, the pipe shall be standard weight, Schedule 40, steel pipe per Standard Specifications for black and hot-dipped, zinc coated (galvanized) welded and seamless steel pipe for ordinary uses (ASTM A-120). Fittings shall be screwed malleable iron galvanized per ANSI B16.3. 9-30.2(3) Steel Casing Pipe Section 9-30.2(3) is a new section and shall read as follows: (******) Steel casing shall be black steel pipe conforming to ASTM A 53. Before installation, coat casing exterior with shop-applied anticorrosive coating conforming to AWWA C210. Minimum coating thickness shall be 16 mils dry film thickness (DFT); however, thickness shall not exceed manufacturer’s recommended thickness. Coating type shall be a polyamide epoxy-coal tar equal to Tnemec Hi-Build Theme-Tar, Series 46H-413. Casing wall thickness shall be 0.250 inch for casings 24 inches or less in diameter and 0.375 inch for casings over 24 inches in diameter. Carrier pipe for water main shall be Restrained Joint Ductile Iron, Class 52. 9-30.2(4) Steel Pipe Section 9-30.2(4) including title is revised as follows: (******) 9-30.2(4) Spacers and Seals for Steel Casing Pipe Casing spacers shall be “centered positioning” type bands at least 12 inch in width, and shall be either stainless steel or heavy duty fusion bonded epoxy coated steel. Runners shall be 2 -inch wide glass reinforced plastic securely bonded to the spacer, and shall be aligned on the spacer along the axis of insertion of the water main into the casing pipe. Runner length shall approximate the width of the spacer. Securing the spacer to the water main shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction. The height of the risers and runners combined shall be sufficient to keep the carrier pipe bell, couplings or fittings at least 0.75 inch from the casing pipe wall at all times and provide at least 1-inch clearance between the runners and the top of the casing wall, to prevent jamming during installation. 07/05/2018 128 Acceptable spacers and end seals manufacturers are Pipeline Seal and Insulator model S12G-2 for stainless steel and model C12G-2, C8G-2 for fusion-bonded and coated steel, Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co., Advance Products & Systems, Inc. or approved equal. 9-30.2(6) Restrained Joint Section 9-30.2(6) including title is revised as follows: (******) 9-30.2(6) Restrained Joint Pipe and Fittings Restrained joints (RJ) ductile iron pipe and fittings, where required on the plans, shall be flexible after assembly and be able to be disassembled. Restrained joints shall meet the following criteria: 1. The restrained joint shall have a positive metal to metal contact locking system without the use of gripping teeth. Gaskets for push-on joint pipe with integrally molded steel or metal teeth or locking segments shall not be allowed as substitutes for restrained-joint pipes. 2. The joint restraint system for the pipe shall be the same as the joint restraint system for the pipe fittings, except as provided in item 4 below. 3. The joint restraint system for the pipe shall be boltless. 4. Where restrained joint fittings required on the plans cannot be furnished or where restrained jointed fittings are required in areas that are known to be subject to location adjustments, the Contractor may submit a lay plan showing mechanically jointed fittings with wedge restraint glands for approval. Mechanically jointed pipe with wedge restraint glands shall not be substituted for restrained joint pipe. Wedge Restraint Glands Wedge restraint glands shall conform to AWWA C111, ASTM A 536-80 Grade 65-42-12. All bolts and wedges shall be ductile iron. Wedge shall be heat-treated to a minimum 370 BHN. Wedge restraint glands shall be rated for 350 psi for pipe 12 inch in diameter and smaller. 9-30.2(7) Bolted, Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain End Pipe Section 9-30.2(7) is revised as follows: (******) Transition couplings, reducing couplings, transition reducing couplings, sleeves, flexible couplings for water main shall be compression type by pipe manufacturer: Romac or Ford or approved equal. Bolts and nuts shall be high strength, low alloy steel, corrosion resistant per AWWA C111. Stainless steel bolts require anti-seize compound. Heavy hex nuts shall be used. The long body pattern with a minimum center ring or center sleeve length of 12 -inches for pipe less than 12 inches in diameter and equal to or greater than the pipe diameter for pipe greater than 12 inches in diameter. Solid sleeves (greater than 12 inch diameter) shall be a 15 inch minimum length. 9-30.3 Valves Section 9-30.3 is supplemented and revised as follows: (******) The valves shall be a standard pattern of a manufacturer whose products are approved by the Engineer and shall have the name or mark of the manufacturer, year valve casting was made, size and working pressure plainly cast in raided and legible letters on the valve body. All valves shall be NSF approved and valve bodies shall be ductile iron. All valves shall be stamped with “NSF APPROVED” and “DI”. Where a valve is required to operate in a higher pressure environment than the Class of valve specified in Section 9-30.3, the class of valve shall be as specified in the Contract. 9-30.3(1) Gate Valves (3 inches to 16 inches) Section 9-30.3(1) is supplemented and revised as follows: (******) All valve material shall be new and undamaged. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the same manufacturer of each item shall be used throughout the work. 07/05/2018 129 All gate valves shall be ductile iron body, bronze mounted, resilient seat, non-rising stem and shall be equipped with a standard two (2) inch square operating nut and O-ring stem seals. Valves shall open counterclockwise when viewed from above. Valves shall be designed for a minimum water operating pressure of 200 PSI. Resilient seated gate valves shall be manufactured to meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA Standard C-509 and C-515 latest revisions. Valve ends shall be mechanical joints, flanged joints or mechanical by flanged joints as shown on the project plans. Where restrained joints are called out, valve ends shall be flanged with appropriate flange by restrained joint adapters. All gate valves shall include an 8" x 24" cast iron gate valve box and extensions, as required. A valve stem extension is required where the valve operating nut is more than 3 feet below finished grade. Valve stem extensions are to be a minimum of 1 foot with only one extension per valve in shall be installed in accordance to the City of Renton standard plans. Acceptable gate valves are Clow, M & H/Kennedy, American Flow Control (ACIPCo), Pratt/Mueller, US Metroseal or approved equal in sizes 16 inches and less. Approval of valves other than models specified shall be obtained prior to bid opening. 9-30.3(3) Butterfly Valves Section 9-30.3(3) is supplemented and revised as follows: (******) In addition to the requirements of section 9-30.3, water main butterfly valves shall conform to AWWA C504 and shall be Class 150B. The valve shall be short-body type and shall have flanged ends. Flanged ends shall be sized and drilled in conformance with ANSI B16.1 Class 125. Valve shall be suitable for direct bury and shall have a stem extension with AWWA 2-inch square operating nut and suitable valve box. All butterfly valves bodies and discs shall be ductile iron. The butterfly valves shall be manufactured by Henry Pratt Company, Mueller, DeZurick, Mosser Valve Division of Olsen Technologies, Dresser 450, Pratt Groundhog or approved equal. 9-30.3(4) Valve Boxes Section 9-30.3(4) is supplemented and revised as follows: (******) Valve boxes shall be installed on all buried valves. The box and lid shall be cast iron, 2-piece slip type with cast iron extension as necessary, conforming to the City of Renton latest standard plans. The cover shall have the word “WATER” cast in it and shall have cast-iron “ears” installed in the direction of the main. Valve box extension pieces shall be provided for valves with groundcover in excess of the depth of the standard valve box. Acceptable manufacturers of valves boxes and covers are Olympic Foundry, Inc., EJCO, Rich (Varnish Casting Corp.) 9-30.3(5) Valve Marker Posts Section 9-30.3(5) is supplemented and revised as follows: (******) Valve markers shall be Carsonite composite utility marker .375"x 6'-0" or approved equal with blue label "water”. The valve markers shall be installed in conformance with the City of Renton Standard Plans. 9-30.3(6) Valve Stem Extensions Section 9-30.3(6) is supplemented and revised as follows: (******) Valve stem extensions shall have a 2-inch square operating nut and self-centering rockplate. A valve stem extension is required where the valve operating nut is more than 3 feet below finished grade. 07/05/2018 130 Valve stem extensions are to be a minimum of 1 foot with only one extension per valve in shall be installed in accordance to the City of Renton standard plans. 9-30.3(7) Combination Air Release/Air Vacuum Valves Section 9-30.3(7) is supplemented and revised as follows: (******) Combination air release/air vacuum valves shall comply with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C512. Air and vacuum release valves shall be APCO No. 143C- Valve and Primer Corp, "Heavy-Duty," combination air release valve, Val-Matic No. 201C, Crispin UL10 or approved equal. Installation shall be per the City of Renton Standard Details, latest revision. Piping and fitting shall be copper or brass. Location of the air release valve as show on the plans is approximate. The installation shall be set at the actual high point of the line. 9-30.3(8) Tapping Sleeve and Valve Assembly Section 9-30.3(8) is supplemented and revised as follows: (******) Tapping sleeves shall be cast iron, ductile iron, or epoxy coated steel. Bolt and nuts shall be Cor-Ten or stainless steel. 9-30.3(9) Blow-Off Assembly Section 9-30.3(9) is a new section: (******) Installation of blow-off assembly shall be per City of Renton Standard Details, latest revision. Pipe and fittings shall be galvanized. Blow-off assembly shall be installed at location(s) shown on the plans. Temporary blow-off assembly on new dead-end water main shall be installed at location shown on the plans. Temporary blow-off assemblies for testing and flushing of the new water mains will not be included under this item and shall be considered incidental to the contract and no additional payment shall be made. 9-30.5 Hydrants Section 9-30.5 is supplemented and revised as follows: (******) Fire hydrants shall conform to AWWA C502 and shall be of standard manufacture and of a pattern approved by the City of Renton. The name or mark of the manufacturer, size of the valve opening and year made shall be plainly cast in raised letters on the hydrant barrel to be visible after the hydrant is installed. Hydrants of the following manufacture and pattern have been approved by the City of Renton. Clow Medallion, M&H 929, Mueller Centurion Model A-423, Waterous Pacer, American Darling Model B-62B, Kennedy K81D Guardian, East Jordan WaterMaster 5CD250. 9-30.5(1) End Connections Section 9-30.5(1) is revised as follows: (******) Hydrant end connections shall be mechanical joint connection unless otherwise specified in the description of the bid of proposal. 9-30.5(2) Hydrant Dimensions Section 9-30.5(2) is replaced with the following: (******) Fire hydrants shall have a valve opening with minimum diameter of 5-1/4 inches, “O” ring stem seal, two 2-1/2 inches National Standard Thread (N.S.T.) hose nozzle connections, one 4-inches pumper port connection with City of Seattle standard threats and with a 4.875” Seattle thread x 5” Storz adapter attached with a 1/8” stainless steel cable. The shoe connection and hydrant connection inside pipe size and auxiliary gate valve shall be 6 inches, mechanical joint with lugs. The operating nut and port cap nuts are 1-1/4-inch pentagonal. Hydrant restraint system shall be two 3/4-inch diameter Cor-Ten steel shackle rods with a poured in place concrete thrust block behind the hydrant shoe. If a wedge restraint system is used in lieu of 07/05/2018 131 shackle rods, mechanical joint pipe shall be used. Hydrants shall be provided with a breakaway flange assembly and be equipped with breaking devices at the sidewalk. The hydrant curb stand section of the hydrant that is above ground including all exposed surfaces of the breakaway flange shall be painted with 2 field coats of paint Kelly-Moore Luxlite or approved equal in Safety Yellow color. Fire hydrants shall be installed per City of Renton Standard Details for fire hydrants, latest revisions. 9-30.6 Water Service Connections (2 Inches and Smaller) 9-30.6(3) Service Pipes 9-30.6(3)B Polyethylene Pipe Section 9-30.6(3)B is revised to read as follows: (******) Polyethylene pipe shall not be used. 9-30.6(4) Service Fittings Section 9-30.6(4) has been revised as follows: (******) Fittings used for copper tubing shall be compression type with gripper ring. 9-30.6(5) Meter Setters Section 9-30.6(5) has been supplemented as follows: (******) Meter setters shall be installed per the City of Renton Standard Details for water meters, latest revision. 9-30.6(7) Meter Boxes Section 9-30.6(7) has been supplemented as follows: (******) Meter boxes shall be installed per the City of Renton Standard Details for water meters, latest revision. SECTION 10 10-01 MARKING PAINT REMOVAL The permittee will be required to remove utility locate marks on sidewalks only within the Downtown Core Area. The permittee shall remove the utility locate marks within 14 days of job completion. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Contents i 4/5/2018 3:34 PM Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\Table of Contents.docx Division 1 General ...........................................................................................................................1-1 1.10 General ........................................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.11.01 Project Description................................................................................................................ 1-1 1.11.02 Reuse of Documents ............................................................................................................. 1-1 1.11.03 Electronic Data ...................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.13 Permits and Licenses .................................................................................................................. 1-2 1.15 Warranty .................................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.16 Locks and Keys ........................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.30 Administrative ................................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.31 Responsibilities .......................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.31.1 Contractor’s Responsibility ..................................................................................................... 1-3 1.31.1.1 Construction Inspection Scheduling .................................................................................... 1-4 1.31.1.2 Contractor Conducted Progress Meetings ........................................................................... 1-4 1.31.1.3 Contractor Provided Schedule and Non-working Day Approval .......................................... 1-4 1.31.2 Owner Inspector’s Responsibility ........................................................................................... 1-4 1.33 Submittals .................................................................................................................................. 1-5 1.33.1 Submittal and Shop Drawings ................................................................................................. 1-5 1.33.2 Substitutions ........................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.33.2.1 Prior to Bid Opening ............................................................................................................. 1-6 1.33.2.2 After Contract Execution ...................................................................................................... 1-7 1.40 Quality Control ............................................................................................................................... 1-7 1.42 Reference Specifications ............................................................................................................ 1-7 1.50 Construction Support ..................................................................................................................... 1-8 1.51 Temporary Utilities .................................................................................................................... 1-8 1.52 Temporary Facilities ................................................................................................................... 1-8 1.55.26 Traffic Control ....................................................................................................................... 1-8 1.59 Site Control ................................................................................................................................ 1-8 1.59.1 Surveying and Staking ............................................................................................................. 1-9 1.70 Execution and Closeout ................................................................................................................. 1-9 1.75 Testing, Startup, and Operation ................................................................................................. 1-9 1.75.01 Schedule ................................................................................................................................ 1-9 1.75.02 Testing ................................................................................................................................. 1-10 1.75.03 Scheduling of Owner Review for Testing ............................................................................ 1-11 Table of Contents ii 4/5/2018 3:34 PM Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\Table of Contents.docx 1.75.04 Pump Testing ...................................................................................................................... 1-11 1.75.06 Electrical and Control Systems Testing ............................................................................... 1-11 1.75.30 Startup ................................................................................................................................ 1-12 1.75.40 Operational Demonstration ................................................................................................ 1-12 1.77 Cleaning .................................................................................................................................... 1-13 1.77.2 Site and Facility Cleanup ....................................................................................................... 1-13 1.79 Training and Documentation ................................................................................................... 1-13 1.79.1 Training ................................................................................................................................. 1-13 1.79.2 Operation and Maintenance Manuals .................................................................................. 1-13 1.79.3 Construction Record Drawings ............................................................................................. 1-15 1.80 Performance Requirements ......................................................................................................... 1-15 1.81 Seismic Restraint and Anchorage............................................................................................. 1-15 1.82 Pressure Ratings ....................................................................................................................... 1-16 1.88 Location Designations .............................................................................................................. 1-16 Division 2 Sitework .........................................................................................................................2-1 2.00 General ........................................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.05 Common Work for Sitework ...................................................................................................... 2-1 2.09 Special Inspections for Earth Work ............................................................................................ 2-2 2.10 Site Preparation ............................................................................................................................. 2-2 2.10.2 Clearing and Grubbing ............................................................................................................ 2-2 2.10.4 Dewatering .............................................................................................................................. 2-3 2.10.5 Construction Access ................................................................................................................ 2-3 2.11 Earthwork Materials .................................................................................................................. 2-4 2.11.1 Common Work for Earthwork Materials ................................................................................ 2-4 2.11.2 General Fill .............................................................................................................................. 2-5 2.11.3 Structural Fill ........................................................................................................................... 2-5 2.11.4 Pipe Bedding ........................................................................................................................... 2-6 2.11.5 Trench Backfill ......................................................................................................................... 2-7 2.11.6 Gravel Backfill for Drains ......................................................................................................... 2-7 2.11.7 Gravel Base Course ................................................................................................................. 2-8 2.11.8 Gravel Top Course ................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.12 Road Surfacing ........................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.12.1 Common Work for Road Surfacing ......................................................................................... 2-8 Table of Contents iii 4/5/2018 3:34 PM Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\Table of Contents.docx 2.12.2 Cement Concrete Pavement ................................................................................................... 2-8 2.12.3 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) / Asphalt Concrete Pavement (ACP) ................................................. 2-9 2.12.10 Pavement Marking/Striping .................................................................................................. 2-9 2.13 Vegetation Protection ................................................................................................................ 2-9 2.13.1 Common Work for Vegetation Protection .............................................................................. 2-9 2.13.2 Fencing .................................................................................................................................. 2-10 2.13.3 Existing Trees to Be Removed ............................................................................................... 2-10 2.13.4 Existing Trees to Remain ....................................................................................................... 2-10 2.13.5 Excavation Around Trees ...................................................................................................... 2-11 2.13.6 Pruning .................................................................................................................................. 2-11 2.13.7 Trimming of Existing Trees .................................................................................................... 2-11 2.20 Earth Moving ................................................................................................................................ 2-11 2.23 Excavation ................................................................................................................................ 2-11 2.25 Erosion and Sedimentation Control ......................................................................................... 2-12 2.25.2 Contractor Provided Certified Erosion and Sedimentation Control Lead ............................. 2-12 2.25.3 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control (SWPPP Reference) ................................... 2-13 2.25.3 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control ................................................................... 2-13 2.25.4 Stormwater Discharge .......................................................................................................... 2-14 2.30 Site Improvements ....................................................................................................................... 2-14 2.31 Fencing ..................................................................................................................................... 2-14 2.31.1 Common Work for Fencing ................................................................................................... 2-14 2.31.2 Temporary Construction Security Fence............................................................................... 2-14 2.31.3 Chainlink Fence ..................................................................................................................... 2-15 2.50 Shoring and Support .................................................................................................................... 2-18 2.51 Contractor Designed Shoring ................................................................................................... 2-18 2.60 Contaminated & Waste Materials Handling ................................................................................ 2-19 2.60.2 Waste Material Control......................................................................................................... 2-19 2.61 Contaminated Materials .......................................................................................................... 2-20 2.61.2 Toxic Spill or Release Contact Requirements ........................................................................ 2-20 2.90 Landscaping .................................................................................................................................. 2-20 2.90.1 Common Work for Landscaping............................................................................................ 2-20 2.90.3 Soil Amendments .................................................................................................................. 2-23 2.90.3.1 Commercial Fertilizer ......................................................................................................... 2-23 Table of Contents iv 4/5/2018 3:34 PM Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\Table of Contents.docx 2.90.3.2 Shredded Plant Waste ....................................................................................................... 2-24 2.90.3.3 Mulch ................................................................................................................................. 2-24 2.90.10 Topsoil ................................................................................................................................. 2-24 2.90.11 Hydroseed ........................................................................................................................... 2-25 2.90.12 Potted Plant and Trees ........................................................................................................ 2-27 2.90.20 Landscape Accessories ........................................................................................................ 2-28 2.90.21 Erosion Control Matting ...................................................................................................... 2-29 Division 3 Concrete .........................................................................................................................3-1 3.00 General ........................................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.05 Common Work for Concrete ...................................................................................................... 3-1 3.10 Forming and Accessories ............................................................................................................... 3-3 3.15 Accessory Materials ................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.15.02 Premolded Joint Filler ........................................................................................................... 3-3 3.15.04 Embedded Items ................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.15.05 Pipe Penetrations through Concrete .................................................................................... 3-4 3.20 Reinforcing ..................................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.21 Reinforcing Steel ........................................................................................................................ 3-5 3.21.13 Reinforcing Steel ................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.30 Cast-In-Place Concrete ................................................................................................................... 3-6 3.30.01 Common Work for Cast in Place Concrete............................................................................ 3-6 3.31 Concrete Materials ......................................................................................................................... 3-8 3.31.02 Structural Concrete ............................................................................................................... 3-8 3.31.03 Thrust Blocks, Driveways, Curb, Gutter, Sidewalks, Equipment Pads, and Fence Posts ...... 3-8 3.31.09 Controlled Density Fill (CDF) ................................................................................................. 3-9 3.35 Surface Finishing .......................................................................................................................... 3-10 3.35.01 Common Work for Surface Finishing .................................................................................. 3-10 3.35.03 Ordinary Wall Finish ............................................................................................................ 3-10 3.35.05 Floated Finish ...................................................................................................................... 3-10 3.35.06 Light Brush Finish ................................................................................................................ 3-11 3.40 Pre-Cast Concrete ........................................................................................................................ 3-11 3.40.10 Utility Structures ................................................................................................................. 3-11 3.60 Grouting ....................................................................................................................................... 3-12 3.62 Non-Shrink Grout ..................................................................................................................... 3-12 Table of Contents v 4/5/2018 3:34 PM Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\Table of Contents.docx Division 4 Masonry .........................................................................................................................4-1 4.00 General ........................................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.05 Common Work for Masonry ...................................................................................................... 4-1 4.05.13 Masonry Mortar .................................................................................................................... 4-2 4.05.16 Masonry Grout ...................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.05.19 Reinforcement and Accessories ............................................................................................ 4-3 4.08 CMU Inspection and Testing ...................................................................................................... 4-4 4.20 Unit Masonry ................................................................................................................................. 4-4 4.22 Concrete Unit Masonry .............................................................................................................. 4-4 Division 5 Fabricated Metalwork and Structural Plastics...................................................................5-1 5.00 General ........................................................................................................................................... 5-1 5.05 Common Work for Fabricated Metalwork and Plastics ............................................................. 5-1 5.05.23 Bolts and Other Connectors .................................................................................................. 5-5 5.60 Ladders ........................................................................................................................................... 5-6 5.60.01 Common Work for Ladders ................................................................................................... 5-6 5.60.10 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Ladders .......................................................................... 5-6 Division 6 Carpentry ........................................................................................................................6-1 6.00 General ........................................................................................................................................... 6-1 6.05 Common Work for Carpentry .................................................................................................... 6-1 6.10 Rough Carpentry ............................................................................................................................ 6-1 6.14 Pressure Treated Wood ............................................................................................................. 6-1 6.16 Wood Sheathing ......................................................................................................................... 6-2 6.17 Shop Fabricated Structures ........................................................................................................ 6-2 6.17.53 Trusses .................................................................................................................................. 6-2 Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection .................................................................................7-1 7.00 General ........................................................................................................................................... 7-1 7.05 Common Work for Thermal and Moisture Protection .............................................................. 7-1 7.20 Thermal Protection ........................................................................................................................ 7-2 7.21 Thermal Insulation ..................................................................................................................... 7-2 7.21.03 Ceiling Insulation ................................................................................................................... 7-2 7.21.04 Foundation Insulation ........................................................................................................... 7-2 7.21.05 CMU Wall Insulation ............................................................................................................. 7-3 7.21.10 Exposed Small Piping Insulation............................................................................................ 7-3 Table of Contents vi 4/5/2018 3:34 PM Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\Table of Contents.docx 7.40 Exterior Panels ............................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.46 Siding .......................................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.46.46 Mineral-Fiber Cement Materials ........................................................................................... 7-3 7.46.46.2 Mineral-Fiber Cement Soffit Panels ................................................................................... 7-3 7.60 Flashing and Sheet Metal ............................................................................................................... 7-4 7.61 Metal Roofing ............................................................................................................................. 7-4 7.61.01 Common Work for Metal Roofing ........................................................................................ 7-4 7.61.3 Preformed Metal Roofing over Wood Decking ....................................................................... 7-6 7.70 Roof and Wall Specialties ............................................................................................................... 7-7 7.72 Roof Accessories ........................................................................................................................ 7-7 7.72.01 Common Work for Roof and Wall Specialties ....................................................................... 7-7 7.72.26 Ridge Vent ............................................................................................................................. 7-7 7.90 Joint Protection .............................................................................................................................. 7-8 7.92 General Joint Sealants ................................................................................................................ 7-8 Division 8 Openings ......................................................................................................................8-1 8.00 General ........................................................................................................................................... 8-1 8.05 Common Work for Openings ..................................................................................................... 8-1 8.06 Schedule ..................................................................................................................................... 8-1 8.10 Doors and Frames .......................................................................................................................... 8-1 8.11 Metal Doors and Frames ............................................................................................................ 8-1 8.11.01 Common Work for Metal Doors and Frames ........................................................................ 8-1 8.11.13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames .......................................................................................... 8-4 8.30 Specialty Doors .............................................................................................................................. 8-4 8.31 Access Doors and Panels ............................................................................................................ 8-4 8.31.20 Vault Hatches ........................................................................................................................ 8-4 8.71 Door Hardware ........................................................................................................................... 8-6 8.71.01 Common Work for Door Hardware ...................................................................................... 8-6 8.71.02 Hardware for Man-doors ...................................................................................................... 8-6 8.90 Louvers and Vents .......................................................................................................................... 8-7 8.90.01 Common Work for Louvers and Vents .................................................................................. 8-7 8.91.13 Motor Actuated Louver/Dampers: ....................................................................................... 8-9 8.91.19 Fixed Louver .......................................................................................................................... 8-9 8.95.17 Attic Vent .............................................................................................................................. 8-9 Table of Contents vii 4/5/2018 3:34 PM Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\Table of Contents.docx Division 9 Finishes ...........................................................................................................................9-1 9.00 General ........................................................................................................................................... 9-1 9.90 Painting and Coating ...................................................................................................................... 9-1 9.90.00 Common Work for Painting and Coating .............................................................................. 9-1 9.90.01 Color Schedule ...................................................................................................................... 9-5 9.90.02 Unpainted Items ................................................................................................................... 9-5 9.91 Painting and Coating Systems .................................................................................................... 9-6 9.91.13 Exterior Painting .................................................................................................................... 9-6 9.91.13.01 - System 1: Metals – Exterior (Wet Conditions) including Doors, Windows, and Frames .... ........................................................................................................................................................... 9-6 9.91.13.10 - System 2: Wood - Exterior, Painted ............................................................................... 9-7 9.91.23.12 - System 3: Wood – Interior, Painted ............................................................................... 9-7 9.91.13.13 - System 4: Exterior of Exposed Ductile Iron Pipe ............................................................ 9-8 9.91.33 Submerged and Buried Metals Painting ............................................................................... 9-9 9.91.33.03 - System 5: Metals Submerged In Wastewater – Non NSF .............................................. 9-9 9.97.23 Concrete and Masonry Coatings ........................................................................................... 9-9 9.97.23.01 - System 6: Concrete – Immersion, Severe Conditions subject to Hydrogen Sulfide Exposure ........................................................................................................................................... 9-10 9.97.23.04 – System 7: Concrete (Exterior below Grade Damp-proofing) ...................................... 9-11 9.97.23.07 – System 8: Concrete Vault Interior ............................................................................... 9-11 9.97.23.11 System 9: Anti-Graffiti Coating and Water Repellent on CMU and Concrete Exterior . 9-11 Division 10 Specialties ................................................................................................................... 10-1 10.00 General ....................................................................................................................................... 10-1 10.05 Common Work for Specialties ............................................................................................... 10-1 10.10 Information Specialties .............................................................................................................. 10-1 10.14 Signs and Labels ..................................................................................................................... 10-1 10.14.1 Common Work for Signs and Labels ................................................................................... 10-1 10.14.2 Equipment Signs .................................................................................................................. 10-2 10.14.6 Construction Fence Perimeter Signs ................................................................................... 10-2 10.14.8 Electrical and Control Equipment ....................................................................................... 10-2 Division 11 Equipment .................................................................................................................. 11-1 11.00 General ....................................................................................................................................... 11-1 11.05 Common Work for Equipment ............................................................................................... 11-1 Table of Contents viii 4/5/2018 3:34 PM Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\Table of Contents.docx 11.10 Pumps..................................................................................................................................... 11-1 11.10.1 Common Work for Pumps .................................................................................................. 11-1 11.12 Wastewater Pumps ................................................................................................................ 11-6 11.12.2 Lift Station Pumps and Motors ........................................................................................... 11-6 11.12.3 Sump Pump ....................................................................................................................... 11-10 11.95.34 Fans ................................................................................................................................. 11-10 11.95.34.1 Wall Ventilators ........................................................................................................... 11-10 Division 12 Furnishings (Not Used) ................................................................................................ 12-1 Division 13 Special Construction (Not Used) ................................................................................... 13-1 Division 14 Conveying Systems (Not Used) ..................................................................................... 14-1 Division 15 Mechanical ............................................................................................................. 15-1 15.00 General ....................................................................................................................................... 15-1 15.05 Common Work for Mechanical .............................................................................................. 15-1 15.10 Buried Pipe Installation .............................................................................................................. 15-2 15.11 Open Trench Pipe Installation ................................................................................................ 15-3 15.11.05 Common Work for Pipe Installation ................................................................................. 15-3 15.11.13 Sewer Force Main Installation .......................................................................................... 15-3 15.11.15 Sanitary Sewer Main Installation ...................................................................................... 15-4 15.13 Above Grade Mechanical Installation .................................................................................... 15-5 15.13.02 Exposed Piping Inspection and Testing ............................................................................. 15-5 15.18 Buried Piping Inspection and Testing ..................................................................................... 15-6 15.18.03 Valve Testing ..................................................................................................................... 15-6 15.18.06 Gravity Sewer Low-Pressure Air Pressure Test Method ................................................... 15-7 15.18.07 Sewer Force Main Inspection and Testing ........................................................................ 15-7 15.20 Pipe and Fittings ......................................................................................................................... 15-8 15.21 Common Work for Pipe and Fittings ...................................................................................... 15-8 15.22 Metal Pipe and Fittings .......................................................................................................... 15-9 15.22.02 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings ............................................................................................ 15-9 15.22.04 Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings ...................................................................................... 15-10 15.22.06 Copper Pipe and Fittings ................................................................................................. 15-11 15.22.08 Brass/Bronze Pipe and Fittings ....................................................................................... 15-12 15.23 Non-Metal Pipe and Fittings ................................................................................................ 15-12 15.23.05 PVC Pipe and Fittings – Solvent Weld ............................................................................. 15-12 Table of Contents ix 4/5/2018 3:34 PM Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\Table of Contents.docx 15.23.06 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings for Sewer – Push on Joint ............................ 15-12 15.23.12 PVC Pipe for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) .................................................................. 15-13 15.30 Valves ....................................................................................................................................... 15-13 15.31 Common Work for Valves .................................................................................................... 15-13 15.32 Isolation Valves .................................................................................................................... 15-14 15.32.02 Resilient Wedge (Seat) Gate Valves ................................................................................ 15-14 15.32.05 Eccentric (Plug) Valves .................................................................................................... 15-15 15.32.07 Gate Valves – Small Diameter ......................................................................................... 15-16 15.33 Check Valves ........................................................................................................................ 15-16 15.33.2 Swing Check Valves ........................................................................................................... 15-16 15.35 Air Valves .............................................................................................................................. 15-17 15.35.05 Air Valves – Wastewater ................................................................................................. 15-17 15.35.05.01 Combination Air and Vacuum Valve - Wastewater ................................................... 15-17 15.40 Piping Specialties ..................................................................................................................... 15-17 15.40.01 Dismantling Joint ............................................................................................................. 15-17 15.40.03 Pipe, Valve and Conduit Supports ................................................................................... 15-18 15.50 Flow Meters ............................................................................................................................. 15-20 15.50.01 Common Work for Flow Meters ..................................................................................... 15-20 15.53.03 Electromagnetic Flow Meters ......................................................................................... 15-21 15.60 Pressure and Level Measurement ........................................................................................... 15-22 15.60.01 Common Work for Pressure and Level Measurement ................................................... 15-22 15.61 Pressure Gauges ................................................................................................................... 15-22 Division 16 Electrical ..................................................................................................................... 16-1 16.00 General ....................................................................................................................................... 16-1 16.05 Common Work for Electrical .................................................................................................. 16-1 16.10 Electrical Site Work .................................................................................................................... 16-7 16.10.1 Common Work for Electrical Site Work .............................................................................. 16-7 16.10.2 Underground Marking Tape (Detectable Type) .................................................................. 16-8 16.10.3 Handholes and Pull Boxes ................................................................................................... 16-9 16.15 Electrical Grounding ................................................................................................................... 16-9 16.15.1 Common Work for Electrical Grounding ............................................................................. 16-9 16.20 Utility Service ........................................................................................................................... 16-11 16.21 Electrical Service .................................................................................................................. 16-11 Table of Contents x 4/5/2018 3:34 PM Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\Table of Contents.docx 16.21.2 Electrical Utility Meter Enclosure ..................................................................................... 16-13 16.21.4 Circuit Breaker Service Disconnect Switch ........................................................................ 16-13 16.21.6 Manual Transfer Switch .................................................................................................... 16-14 16.30 Basic Panel Equipment and Devices ........................................................................................ 16-15 16.31 Operating and Indicating Devices ........................................................................................ 16-15 16.31.1 Digital Power Meter .......................................................................................................... 16-15 16.31.2 Run Time Meters ............................................................................................................... 16-16 16.31.3 Start Count Meters ........................................................................................................... 16-16 16.31.4 Indicating Lights ................................................................................................................ 16-16 16.31.5 Selector Switch .................................................................................................................. 16-16 16.31.6 Pushbuttons ...................................................................................................................... 16-17 16.32 Panel Relays ......................................................................................................................... 16-17 16.32.1 Control Relays ................................................................................................................... 16-18 16.32.3 Time Delay Relays ............................................................................................................. 16-18 16.32.5 Phase Fail Relay (PFR) ....................................................................................................... 16-18 16.35 Control Panel Accessories .................................................................................................... 16-19 16.35.1 Terminal Blocks ................................................................................................................. 16-19 16.36.1 Surge Protection Device (SPD) .......................................................................................... 16-20 16.40 Low Voltage Motor Control Equipment ................................................................................... 16-20 16.41.1 Motor Control Center ....................................................................................................... 16-20 16.45 Variable Frequency Drive ..................................................................................................... 16-25 16.55 Switches and Protective Devices ............................................................................................. 16-31 16.55.1 Common Work for Switches and Protective Devices ....................................................... 16-31 16.55.13 Fuses ............................................................................................................................... 16-32 16.55.16 Molded Case Circuit Breakers ......................................................................................... 16-32 16.55.17 Instantaneous Magnetic Trip Breakers ........................................................................... 16-33 16.55.18 Disconnect Switches ....................................................................................................... 16-33 16.60 Conductors ............................................................................................................................... 16-33 16.61 Low Voltage Wire and Cable ................................................................................................ 16-33 16.63 Signal Cable .......................................................................................................................... 16-36 16.70 Raceways, Boxes and Fittings .................................................................................................. 16-37 16.71 Raceways .............................................................................................................................. 16-37 16.72 Boxes and Enclosures ............................................................................................................... 16-41 Table of Contents xi 4/5/2018 3:34 PM Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\Table of Contents.docx 16.72.2 Outlet and Junction Boxes ................................................................................................ 16-41 16.72.3 Watertight Enclosures....................................................................................................... 16-41 16.75 Wiring Devices ......................................................................................................................... 16-42 16.75.1 Common Work for Wiring Devices ................................................................................... 16-42 16.75.2 Receptacles ....................................................................................................................... 16-43 16.75.3 Line Voltage Switches ....................................................................................................... 16-43 16.75.4 HOA (Hand-Off-Auto) Lighting Switches ........................................................................... 16-44 16.75.5 Plates ................................................................................................................................. 16-44 16.85 Lighting ..................................................................................................................................... 16-44 16.85.1 Common Work for Lighting Fixtures ................................................................................. 16-44 16.85.2 Lamps ................................................................................................................................ 16-45 16.85.3 Fixtures .............................................................................................................................. 16-45 16.90 Power Generation .................................................................................................................... 16-45 16.91 Engine Generator ................................................................................................................. 16-45 16.91.2 Diesel Engine Generator Set ............................................................................................. 16-45 16.92 Transfer Switches ................................................................................................................. 16-58 16.92.2 Automatic Transfer Switch ................................................................................................ 16-58 16.95 Testing ...................................................................................................................................... 16-60 16.95.1 Common Work for Testing ................................................................................................ 16-60 16.95.3 Conductor Test Report ...................................................................................................... 16-62 Division 17 Automatic Control ....................................................................................................... 17-1 17.00 General ....................................................................................................................................... 17-1 17.05 Common Work for Automatic Control ................................................................................... 17-1 17.06 Control System Integrator...................................................................................................... 17-6 17.07 Control System Programmer (Control System Programmer Contracted Directly by Owner) ...... ......................................................................................................................................................... 17-9 17.08 System Description .............................................................................................................. 17-10 17.10 Panels ....................................................................................................................................... 17-12 17.11 Panel Certifications .............................................................................................................. 17-12 17.12 Equipment Panels ................................................................................................................ 17-12 17.20 Panel Components ................................................................................................................... 17-13 17.20.3 Terminal Blocks ................................................................................................................. 17-13 17.21 Power Supply and Protection .............................................................................................. 17-14 Table of Contents xii 4/5/2018 3:34 PM Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\Table of Contents.docx 17.21.2 Normal Power Supply ....................................................................................................... 17-14 17.21.3 Backup Power Supply ........................................................................................................ 17-14 17.21.5 Line Protection Units – Low Current ................................................................................. 17-15 17.21.6 Line Protection Units – High Current ................................................................................ 17-15 17.22 Wire and Cable ..................................................................................................................... 17-16 17.22.2 Wiring ................................................................................................................................ 17-16 17.22.3 Cables ................................................................................................................................ 17-16 17.24 Switches and Relays ............................................................................................................. 17-17 17.24.2 Selector Switch .................................................................................................................. 17-17 17.24.3 Pushbuttons ...................................................................................................................... 17-17 17.24.4 Panel Relays ...................................................................................................................... 17-17 17.25 Indicating Lights and Readouts ............................................................................................ 17-19 17.25.2 Pilot Lights ......................................................................................................................... 17-19 17.30 Intelligent Control Units ........................................................................................................... 17-19 17.31 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) ................................................................................ 17-19 17.31.2 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) System .................................................................. 17-19 17.33 Network Equipment and Computers ................................................................................... 17-22 17.33.1 Industrial Network Equipment .......................................................................................... 17-22 17.40 Remote Communication Devices ............................................................................................. 17-23 17.41 Radio Systems ...................................................................................................................... 17-23 17.41.27 Radio-Frequency Identification ....................................................................................... 17-24 17.50 Sensors and Controls ............................................................................................................... 17-26 17.50.1 Common Work for Sensors and Controls ......................................................................... 17-26 17.51 Emergency Sensors and Controls ......................................................................................... 17-27 17.51.2 Smoke Detectors ............................................................................................................... 17-27 17.51.4 Intrusion Alarm Switch ...................................................................................................... 17-27 17.51.6 Keyed Switch Box .............................................................................................................. 17-28 17.52 Pressure and Level Sensors and Controls ............................................................................ 17-29 17.52.2 Flood Liquid Level Switches .............................................................................................. 17-29 17.52.3 Wastewater Level Float Switches ..................................................................................... 17-29 17.52.13 Submersible Level Transmitter (Wastewater) ................................................................ 17-30 17.53 Environmental Sensors and Controls ................................................................................... 17-30 17.53.2 Wall-Mounted Cooling Thermostat .................................................................................. 17-30 Table of Contents xiii 4/5/2018 3:34 PM Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\Table of Contents.docx 17.53.3 Wall-Mounted Heating Thermostat .................................................................................. 17-31 17.90 Testing, Startup, and Training .................................................................................................. 17-32 17.90.1 Common Work for Testing, Startup, and Training ............................................................ 17-32 17.91 Tests and Inspections ........................................................................................................... 17-33 17.92 Startup.................................................................................................................................. 17-36 17.93 Training ................................................................................................................................ 17-37 17.94 Documentation .................................................................................................................... 17-37 17.94.2 Operations and Maintenance Manuals ............................................................................ 17-37 Division 18 Measurement and Payment ........................................................................................ 18-1 18.0 General ......................................................................................................................................... 18-1 Bid Item 1 – Mobilization, Demobilization, Site Preparation, and Cleanup .................................... 18-1 Bid Item 2 – Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control .......................................................... 18-1 Bid Item 3 – Site and Utility Work .................................................................................................... 18-1 Bid Item 4 – Unscheduled Excavation .............................................................................................. 18-2 Bid Item 5 – Unscheduled Structural Backfill ................................................................................... 18-2 Bid Item 6 – Traffic Control .............................................................................................................. 18-2 Bid Item 7 – Trench Safety and Shoring ........................................................................................... 18-3 Bid Item 8 – Air Vacuum Release Assembly ..................................................................................... 18-3 Bid Item 9 – Forcemain Access Manhole ......................................................................................... 18-3 Bid Item 10 – Radio Frequency Identification Device (RFID) Installation ........................................ 18-3 Bid Item 11 – Radio Frequency Identification Device (RFID) Data Processing and Delivery ........... 18-4 Bid Item 12 – Road Repair................................................................................................................ 18-4 Bid Item 13 – Seal Coat .................................................................................................................... 18-4 Bid Item 14 – Dewatering ................................................................................................................ 18-4 Bid Item 15 – Lift Station Structural ................................................................................................. 18-5 Bid Item 16 – Electrical Building Structural ...................................................................................... 18-5 Bid Item 17 – Lift Station Pumps and Motors .................................................................................. 18-5 Bid Item 18 – Mechanical ................................................................................................................. 18-5 Bid Item 19 – Electrical .................................................................................................................... 18-5 Bid Item 20 – Automatic Control ..................................................................................................... 18-6 Bid Item 21 – Finishes ...................................................................................................................... 18-6 Bid Item 22 – Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals and On-site Owner Training ........... 18-6 Bid Item 23 – Construction Records ................................................................................................ 18-6 Table of Contents xiv 4/5/2018 3:34 PM Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\Table of Contents.docx Bid Item 24 – Minor Change ............................................................................................................ 18-6 APPENDICES Appendix A – City of Renton Standard Details Appendix B – Existing Station and Force Main Record Drawings 1-1 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\1 General.docx 7/5/2018 10:00 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 1 General 1.10 GENERAL Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” shall apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. Sections in these specifications titled “Related Sections” shall be read as integral to the specification as if they were fully detailed within. All work and materials described in such sections shall be provided and performed by the Contractor. 1.11.01 Project Description The City of Renton Falcon Ridge Lift Station and Force Main Improvements consists of construction of a submersible sewage lift station and abandoning an existing lift station, as well as related force main appurtenance improvements. The work includes but is not limited to: • Temporary sedimentation and erosion control systems and site restoration • Excavation and placement of underground vault and manhole • Precast concrete work • Installation of two (2) submersible pumps and other mechanical components • Installation of isolation valves, check valves, and meter inside a precast vault • Construction of a CMU building • Installation of an emergency generator • Installation of electrical and telemetry systems • Site work and site utilities • Paving and fencing • Finish grading and site cleanup • Utility relocations for construction • Installation of radio frequency identification devices on existing force main • Installation of force main access structures • Asphalt repair and seal coating 1.11.02 Reuse of Documents Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier shall not: 1. Have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media editions; or 2. Reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 1 – General FM Improvements 1-2 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\1 General.docx 7/5/2018 10:00 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 3. The prohibitions of this Paragraph will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. 1.11.03 Electronic Data 1. Unless otherwise stated in the Supplementary Conditions, the data furnished by Owner to Contractor, or by Contractor to Owner, that may be relied upon are limited to the printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of text, data, graphics, or other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any conclusion or information obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at the user’s sole risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies, the hard copies govern. 2. Because data stored in electronic media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently or otherwise without authorization of the data’s creator, the party receiving electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within 30 days, after which the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred. Any errors detected within the 30-day acceptance period will be corrected by the transferring party. 3. When transferring documents in electronic media format, the transferring party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by the data’s creator. 1.13 Permits and Licenses The Owner will secure and pay for the following permits: • Right-of Way Permit The Contractor shall acquire and pay for all other necessary permits which may include: • Electrical Permit • Disposal Permit • Plumbing Permit • Mechanical Permit A copy of the Owner acquired permits are available at the Owner’s office for examination by bidders. Conform to the requirements of these permits and all other permits issued for this project. 1.15 Warranty The Contractor shall warrant all work and products for a period of one (1) year following project acceptance except for those components and listed warrantees below. The date of project acceptance is defined as the date the final payment is sent to the Contractor from the Owner. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 1 – General FM Improvements 1-3 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\1 General.docx 7/5/2018 10:00 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Warranty does not cover damage due to misuse by the Owner or conditions outside of the Owner or Contractor’s control or exceptional events (force majeure) including war, strikes, floods (water exceeding normal high-water mark), rainfall in excess of 100-year storm event, fire, earthquakes, high winds (over 85 mph for 3 seconds peak gust), freezes below 10 degrees Fahrenheit (Western Washington), governmental restrictions, vandalism, and power failures or surges. The Contractor has control over workmanship, third party subcontractors and parts and materials used to complete the project. Warranties in addition to this warranty are listed in the following sections: • Division 2.13.1 Vegetation Protection • Division 2.90.1 Landscaping • Division 7.05 Roof systems • Division 8.34.2 Access hatches • Division 11.10.1 Pumps 1.16 Locks and Keys All devices requiring locks, including but not limited to doors, gates, access hatches, convenience hatches, electrical enclosures, etc. shall be configured to match Owner standard lock and keys. If construction cores are utilized during the project, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with construction key(s) for all temporary locks. 1.30 ADMINISTRATIVE 1.31 Responsibilities 1.31.1 Contractor’s Responsibility The work included in this contract is shown on the contract plans and described in these project specifications. All work incidental and necessary to the completion of the work described and shown shall be performed by the Contractor. In submitting a bid for this project, the Bidder warrants that they are an expert in this and related work, that they understand the process and functions shown, and that various work and processes not shown but necessary for the successful operation of this project will be provided by the Contractor. The General (or Prime) Contractor is fully responsible for providing his subcontractors and suppliers with all relevant portions of the plans and specifications necessary to bid and construct the improvements. Damage to existing utilities or property shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at the discretion of the Owner. The Contractor and each of the Subcontractors are responsible for coordinating the required inspections. There are specific requirements for inspection responsibilities and the advance notice that must be given to minimize construction delays. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to be familiar with these requirements, include the coordination necessary in this estimate of project costs and schedule, and to comply with the requirements during construction. Failure City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 1 – General FM Improvements 1-4 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\1 General.docx 7/5/2018 10:00 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. to follow proper inspection and notification procedures may result in on-site work stoppages and removal or demolition of unapproved structures or systems, all at the Contractor’s expense. See Testing, Startup, and Operation section below for details. Do not start work on this project or on any public or private right-of-way or easement until clearance is given by the Owner. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of any permit for the project. Do not hinder private property access without a 24-hour notice to the private property owner, and do not hinder access for more than an 8-hour period. Do not disrupt emergency aid access to private property. The Contractor is solely responsible for all elements of site safety. Inspections performed by the Owner are only to monitor and record that project plans and specifications are being complied with and construction is consistent with the design intent. The Contractor shall be responsible for managing, coordinating, and overseeing his subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers’ representatives, or any other persons performing Work. The Contractor shall have a competent representative, familiar with the project and work being performed, on-site at all times. 1.31.1.1 Construction Inspection Scheduling Unless otherwise noted on the plans or within these specifications, 24-hour prior notice shall be given to the Owner and appropriate reviewing agency for all inspections required for the construction of the project. 24-hour notice is defined as one complete working day notice. Time is not counted on weekends and holidays (inspections required on a Monday or the day after a holiday shall be scheduled a minimum of 24 hours in advance not including the holiday hours or weekend hours.) 1.31.1.2 Contractor Conducted Progress Meetings The Contractor shall schedule and hold regular on-site progress meetings at least bi-weekly and at other times as requested by the Owner or as required by progress of the work. The Contractor, Owner, and all Subcontractors active on the site must attend each meeting. 1.31.1.3 Contractor Provided Schedule and Non-working Day Approval Contractor is responsible for providing an up to date construction schedule with each monthly pay estimate and at other times as requested by the Owner or as required by progress of the work. If the current schedule is still in-line with the previous schedule, the Contractor shall inform the Owner with each pay estimate. Non-working day requests shall also be received by the Owner with each monthly pay estimate. Owner may delay monthly progress payments if Contractor fails to submit updated schedule and non-working day requests. 1.31.2 Owner Inspector’s Responsibility The Owner may elect to have a Consultant representative on site to inspect, monitor, observe and record construction progress. The Contractor maintains complete responsibility to verify construction is meeting the design intent and is being constructed in accordance with the plans and specifications. It is not the responsibility of the Consultant to address means and methods City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 1 – General FM Improvements 1-5 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\1 General.docx 7/5/2018 10:00 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. issues on site or to direct safety issues on site. The Consultant does not have the authority to stop the work. 1.33 Submittals 1.33.1 Submittal and Shop Drawings Submittals are required for all items installed on this contract. Submittals shall be addressed to: RH2 Engineering, Inc. 22722 29th Dr. SE, Suite 210 Bothell, WA 98021 Attn: Alex Fussell, PE Email: afussell@rh2.com Submittals may be provided in electronic format (preferred) or hard copy. Owner reserves the right to require the Contractor to provide hard-copy submittals at no additional cost to the Owner. Where hard-copy submittals are provided, Contractor shall submit three (3) copies; one set will be returned to the Contractor after review. Electronic submittal via email is acceptable, however the Contractor shall take responsibility to follow up with the Owner to verify that the submittal was received. The Owner assumes no responsibility for emails that do not make it to the recipient. In the case of electronic submittals, only one copy will be returned to the Contractor, either electronically or hard copy at the Owner’s discretion. Submittal data for each item shall contain sufficient information on each item to determine if it is in compliance with the contract requirements. Submittal cutsheets and datasheets shall be annotated by the Contractor and shall clearly indicate the equipment and materials that will be provided, including any options or additive items. No generic cutsheets or datasheets will be accepted. Items that are installed in the work that have not been approved through the submittal process shall be removed and an approved product shall be furnished, all at the Contractor’s expense. Shop drawing review will be limited to general design requirements only, and shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions, or responsibility for consequences due to deviations from the contract documents. No changes may be made in any submittal after it has been reviewed except with written notice and approval from the Owner. Shop drawings shall be submitted on 8½-inch by 11-inch, 11-inch by 17-inch, or 22-inch by 34-inch sheets and shall contain the following information: • Project Name as it appears on the Document Cover. • Prime Contractor and Applicable Subcontractor. • RH2 Engineering. • Owner’s Name. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 1 – General FM Improvements 1-6 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\1 General.docx 7/5/2018 10:00 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. • Applicable Specification and Drawings Reference. • A stamp showing that the Contractor has checked the equipment for conformance with the contract requirements, coordination with other work on the job, and dimensional suitability. • A place for the Engineer to stamp. Submittals that do not comply with these requirements may be returned to the Contractor for re-submittal. The Contractor shall revise and resubmit as necessary. Acceptable submittals will be reviewed as promptly as possible, and transmitted to the Contractor not later than 12 working days after receipt by the Engineer. Delays caused by the need for re-submittal shall not be a basis for an extension of contract time or delay damages. Shop drawings and submittals shall contain the following information for all items: A. Shop or equipment drawings, dimensions, and weights. B. Catalog information. C. Manufacturer’s specifications. D. Special handling instructions. E. Maintenance requirements. F. Wiring and control diagrams. G. List of contract exceptions. By approving and submitting shop drawings and samples, the Contractor warrants that they have determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and have checked and coordinated each shop drawing with the requirements of the work and of the contract documents. The Owner will pay the costs and provide review services for a first and second review of each submittal item. Additional reviews shall be paid by Contractor by withholding the appropriate amounts from each payment estimate. The Contractor is responsible for identifying the shop drawings and submittals required for this project. Specific submittal requirements are listed in each section of these specifications. Contractor shall keep a complete and up to date copy of all submittals and review responses at the job site readily available to the Owner for inspection. 1.33.2 Substitutions Any product or construction method that does not meet these specifications will be considered a substitution. Substitutions must be approved prior to their installation or use on this project. 1.33.2.1 Prior to Bid Opening Before opening bids, the Owner may consider written requests from product suppliers or prime bidders for substitutions. All requests for substitution must be received by Owner a City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 1 – General FM Improvements 1-7 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\1 General.docx 7/5/2018 10:00 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. minimum of 7 working days prior to bid opening. Requests shall be accompanied by drawings and specifications in sufficient detail to allow the Owner to determine whether or not the substitute proposed is equal to that specified. All requests shall include a listing of any significant variations in material or methods from those specified. If there are no variations, a statement to that fact shall be included in the request for approval. The determination as to whether or not a proposed substitute is acceptable shall rest solely with the Owner. Approval of substitutions will be only by addendum. The bidder shall include, in the proposal, all costs for any modifications required to adopt the substitute. 1.33.2.2 After Contract Execution Within 30 calendar days after the date of the contract, the Owner shall consider formal requests from the Contractor for a substitution of products in place of those specified. Submit two copies of each request for a substitution. Data shall include the necessary change in construction methods, including a detailed description of the proposed method and related drawings illustrating the methods. An itemized comparison of each proposed substitution with product or method specified shall be provided. In making a request for a substitution, the Contractor represents that they have investigated the proposed product or method and has determined that it is equal or superior to the product specified. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of accepted substitutions into the work, making changes that may be required for the work to be completed. The Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to substitutions. 1.40 QUALITY CONTROL 1.42 Reference Specifications Work under this contract shall be performed in accordance with applicable sections of the current Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, Washington State Chapter, American Public Works Association, and Washington State Department of Transportation, hereafter referred to as the Standard Specifications. Certain other referenced standards used in this specification are from the latest editions of: • City of Renton Construction Administrative Code • City of Renton Amendments, Additions and Deletions to the International Fire Code • City of Renton Amendments to the International Building Code • IBC International Building Code • UPC Uniform Plumbing Code • IMC International Mechanical Code • IFC International Fire Code • NEC National Electrical Code • AWWA American Water Works Association • ANSI American National Standards Institute City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 1 – General FM Improvements 1-8 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\1 General.docx 7/5/2018 10:00 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. • ASA American Standards Association • ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials. 1.50 CONSTRUCTION SUPPORT 1.51 Temporary Utilities The Contractor is responsible for providing all necessary water for construction-related fire protection and utilities required by this contract, or by laws and regulations. Sanitary facilities adequate for all workers shall comply with all codes and regulations. At the close of this contract, the Contractor shall pay all utility bills that are outstanding, remove all temporary electrical, sanitary, gas, telephone and water facilities, and any other temporary service equipment that may remain. In addition, the Contractor shall arrange for the transfer of electrical and water accounts to the Owner’s name. The Contractor shall be responsible for an adequate temporary electrical system. This system shall be arranged by and all costs paid by the Contractor. The Contractor shall make arrangements for and provide all necessary facilities for the necessary water supply for construction at their own expense unless otherwise provided. 1.52 Temporary Facilities The Contractor is responsible for construction and location of all field offices, all necessary gates and barricades, fences, handrails, guard rails, and securities required by this contract, or by laws and regulations. There shall be shelters and dry facilities for the workers as required. The Contractor shall provide all guards, marks, shields, protective clothing, rain gear, and other equipment required by law, ordinance, labor contracts, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) regulations, and other regulations for the maintenance of health and safety. First aid kits and equipment as required by law shall also be supplied. 1.55.26 Traffic Control Any traffic control activities required during construction shall be consistent with the Uniform Traffic Control Manual, latest edition and applicable local codes. The Contractor shall limit delay of traffic to 5 minutes. If flaggers are used, orientation meetings per WAC 296-155-305 shall be held each time a new flagger is introduced to the site or if site conditions change significantly. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling such meetings. See Section 1-10, Temporary Traffic Control, of the Special Provisions of the Contract. 1.59 Site Control The Contractor shall not perform work activities, store materials or equipment, move equipment through, or disturb in any way the areas outside the “Building Construction Limits,” “Utility Construction Limits,” and “Landscaping Construction Limits,” shown unless approved by the Owner in writing. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 1 – General FM Improvements 1-9 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\1 General.docx 7/5/2018 10:00 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 1.59.1 Surveying and Staking The Contractor is responsible for surveying and staking and shall stake out the locations of the permanent easements, temporary easements, rights-of-way, and all major facilities shown on the Plans and establish bench marks at locations designated by the Owner. The Contractor shall protect all stakes and marks in their original conditions. If stakes and markings are destroyed or defaced before their use is ended, the cost of replacing them will be at the Contractor’s expense. All stakes, points, and marks, shall be administered and approved by a registered professional land surveyor licensed in the State of Washington. Provide approved and stamped survey notes, and control points to the Owner for as-built purposes. Contractor to survey the station line(s) and install pins or offset stakes every 50 feet within areas that will not be disturbed by construction. For utility work, 5-foot and 10-foot offset stakes must be provided for major components including, but not limited to: tees, valves, manholes, catch basins, changes in angle 45-degrees or more, and vaults larger than 4-foot square. Replace all damaged survey monuments in accordance with WAC 332-120. The Contractor shall comply with Section 1-05.4, Renton Surveying Standards, of the Special Provisions of the Contract. 1.70 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 1.75 Testing, Startup, and Operation 1.75.01 Schedule The placing of all improvements in service shall consist of three parts: “testing”, “startup”, and “operation”. Not less than 20 working days before the anticipated time for beginning testing, the Contractor shall notify and submit to the Owner for approval, a complete plan for the following: 1. Schedules for tests: A. Factory Demonstration Test (at panel shop) B. Pumps and motors C. Control system D. Meter calibration E. Emergency power system 2. Detail schedule of procedures for startup. 3. Complete schedule of events to be accomplished during testing. 4. An outline of work remaining under the contract that will be carried out concurrently with the operation phases. Fai lure to provide proper notification to the Owner may lead to liquidated damages if schedule cannot be maintained . If rescheduling is required because components are not City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 1 – General FM Improvements 1-10 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\1 General.docx 7/5/2018 10:00 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. ready for testing the notification requirements are reset and shall provide for 21 calendar days advance notice in order to reserve Engineer’s and/or Owner Representatives’ time. 1.75.02 Testing The Contractor may periodically request preliminary testing for items that must be covered or tested before other work can proceed. In these cases, the work shall not be tested or covered up without timely notice to the Owner of its readiness for testing. Should any work be covered up without notice, approval, or consent, it must, if required by the Owner, be uncovered for examination at the Contractor’s expense. Where work is to be tested, all necessary equipment shall be set up and the work given a preliminary test so that any and all defects may be discovered and repaired prior to calling out the Owner for the test. Final testing shall consist of individual tests and checks made on equipment intended to provide proof of performance of unit and proper operation of unit control together with necessary tests to show system operation in the presence of the Owner. Assure proper alignment, size, condition, capability, strength, proper adjustment, lubrication, pressure, hydraulic test, leakage test, and all other tests deemed necessary by the Owner to determine that all materials and equipment are of specified quality, properly situated, anchored, and in all respects, ready for use. Any certificates required by these specifications by the manufacturer’s representatives shall be supplied to the Owner prior to startup. All piping shall be tested as required by specifications and applicable codes. Tests on individual items of equipment, such as pipelines, structures, controls, and other items shall be as necessary to show proper system operation. During testing, the Contractor shall correct any defective work discovered. Startup shall not begin until all tests required by these specifications have been completed and approved by the Owner. Not less than five working days before the anticipated time for beginning the testing, the Contractor shall provide a list of representatives that will be attending the testing. The Owner may request additional representatives at no additional cost if said representatives are identified in these specifications. Qualified product representatives to be on site for the following equipment, at a minimum: • Pumps • Generator • Motor Control Centers The Contractor shall conduct all testing and startup. Testing and startup shall not be a cause for claims for delay by the Contractor and all expenses for testing and startup shall be incidental to this contract. The Contractor shall make arrangements for all materials, supplies, and labor necessary to efficiently complete the testing, startup, and operation. At a minimum, the Contractor shall provide: • Calibrated pressure gauge • Amp meter. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 1 – General FM Improvements 1-11 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\1 General.docx 7/5/2018 10:00 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 1.75.03 Scheduling of Owner Review for Testing The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 48-hours (2 complete working days) prior notification to the Owner where witnessed testing or startup is required. The Contractor shall provide further notification within 2 working hours of the scheduled test to the Owner confirming that the Contractor has successfully completed all preliminary testing and that all equipment, tools, materials, labor, subcontractors, manufacturer’s representatives, and all other items required for witnessed testing are available and fully functional. Failure to provide advance notification and confirmation, or meet any of the testing requirements shall constitute a failed test in accordance with the section Operation Testing of the Special Provisions. A detailed testing schedule shall be provided by the Contractor and updated as needed to be at least 48 hours ahead of actual testing at the project site . If testing requires downtime in order to perform repairs due to failed test, the Contractor shall pay the Owner in the amount of $150 per hour per Owner Representative on site (minimum of $300 per scheduled visit) for downtime lasting longer than 1 hour required to complete repairs to verify the complete construction is ready for startup and operation. This amount will be deducted from the appropriate bid item that relates to the finished construction and documented by the Owner at their discretion. The Contractor is required to have all systems pre-tested to their satisfaction prior to calling the Owner for formal testing. 1.75.04 Pump Testing See Divisions 11.10.1 for pumps and 11.20.1 for motors. 1.75.06 Electrical and Control Systems Testing See Division 16.95 for electrical system testing. See Division 17.90 for automatic control system testing. The following is a list of components that shall be tested prior to project completion. This list is intended as a general guide and is not necessarily complete: • Pressure sensors and alarms • Flow sensors and alarms • Seal fail sensors and alarms • Temperature sensors and alarms • Primary level control • Secondary level control (floats) • Smoke alarms • Intrusion sensors and alarms • Motion sensors • Photovoltaic sensors • HVAC controls City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 1 – General FM Improvements 1-12 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\1 General.docx 7/5/2018 10:00 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. • Local control • Automatic control • Variable speed drives 1.75.30 Startup Startup shall consist of a simulated operation of all equipment and controls. The purpose of startup shall be to check that all equipment will function under operating conditions, that all interlocking controls and sequences are properly set, and that the facility will function as an operating unit. Technically qualified factory representatives shall be present for the startup phase. All Representatives shall be trained, qualified, and have experience in troubleshooting and fixing field issues. The startup shall continue until it is demonstrated that all functions, controls, and machinery are functioning correctly. Authorized factory representatives shall be provided for the following items: • Pumps and motors • Variable frequency drives • Motor control centers (electrician may qualify if approved by manufacturer) 1.75.40 Operational Demonstration Operation demonstration shall be conducted after successful startup has been completed as determined by the Engineer and Owner. The purpose of the operational demonstration period is to demonstrate automated operation of the equipment and system(s) using live waste water and to verify functional integrity of the system(s). This demonstration period shall occur under full operational conditions as determined by the Owner. The Owner reserves the right to simulate operations variables and equipment failures to verify the functional integrity of automatic and manual backup systems and alternate operating modes. The demonstration period shall be for 10 calendar days. The date and time that the operational period shall begin and end shall be agreed upon by the Contractor, Owner, and Engineer in advance of initiating the operational demonstration period. The Owner shall provide a certified operator during this period to provide operational support and required testing only. The Contractor shall provide personnel to respond and repair any problems or failures that occur during this period. If, during the operational demonstration period, the aggregate amount of time used for repair, alteration, or unscheduled adjustments to any equipment or systems that renders the affected equipment or system inoperative exceeds 5 percent of the demonstration period, the operation demonstration has failed. Any shut downs due to equipment or systems failures shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor. The Contractor must provide a report and status to the Owner’s operator BEFORE turning the equipment or system in auto to continue the operational demonstration period. The Owner’s operator reserves the right to decide if the issue that caused the system to fail could potentially be a safety concern to the customers if the system were to be put back into auto. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 1 – General FM Improvements 1-13 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\1 General.docx 7/5/2018 10:00 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Operation of the facility shall commence immediately after the successful completion of testing, startup, operational demonstration, and training and after satisfactory repairs and adjustments have been made. 1.77 Cleaning 1.77.2 Site and Facility Cleanup Clean up debris and unused material, and remove from the site and any buildings. If vehicle traffic causes ruts, repair asphalt (new or existing) in paved areas, in other areas back track with dozer or excavator and repair to proposed surface condition including necessary hydroseed, mulch, and landscaping as shown on the plans. Buildings shall be broom clean and all foreign damage or markings removed or repaired. Equipment shall be washed clean using appropriate methods. Unpainted exposed concrete structures shall be cleaned to a consistent bare concrete surface finish. Remove extraneous substances such as efflorescence, leakage residue and excess repair materials. 1.79 Training and Documentation The Contractor shall remove all tags and instructions that come packaged with or attached to equipment used on the project. Deliver all such documents to the Owner bound in a three-ring binder or with the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Insert documents in sleeves if they cannot be punched. Scan all such documents to Adobe PDF format and provide with the Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1.79.1 Training At the time that the facility is ready to be put into operation, the Contractor is to conduct an operation and maintenance training meeting with the owner to explain in detail the operation and maintenance requirements of each of the facility’s components. The training meeting shall not occur on the same date(s) as a startup. Operation of the facility shall commence immediately after completion of testing, startup, and owner training and after satisfactory repairs and adjustments have been made. 1.79.2 Operation and Maintenance Manuals Prior to the receipt of payment for more than 90 percent of the work, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner acceptable manufacturer’s operating and maintenance instructions covering equipment and systems installed on the Project requiring operational and/or maintenance procedures and for any additional items indicated by the Owner, including coatings furnished under this contract. The operating and maintenance instructions shall include, as a minimum, the following data for each coating and item of mechanical and electrical equipment: Products A. Equipment Identification including brand name, model number and serial numbers. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 1 – General FM Improvements 1-14 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\1 General.docx 7/5/2018 10:00 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. B. Date of manufacture and date of installation on job site. C. Complete as-built elementary wiring and one-line diagrams. D. Complete parts list, by generic title and identification number, complete with exploded views of each assembly. Maintenance A. Recommended spare parts. B. Lubrication schedule including the applicable lubricant designation available from the Standard Oil Company of California. C. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures and schedules. Schedule shall be provided for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semi-annually and annually maintenance. D. Disassembly and re-assembly instructions including parts identification and a complete parts breakdown for all equipment. E. Weights of individual components of each item of equipment weighing over 50 pounds. F. Name, location, and telephone number of the nearest suppliers and spare parts warehouses. G. All manufacturers’ warranties. Include name, address, and telephone number of the manufacturer’s representative to be contacted for warranty, parts, or service information. H. Cleaning, repair, and maintenance instructions for each coating system. I. Provide videotapes, video CDs or DVDs utilized in the manufacturer’s instruction program for the owner. Operation A. Recommended trouble-shooting and startup procedures. B. Recommended step-by-step operating procedures. C. Emergency operation modes, if applicable. D. Normal shutdown procedures. E. Long term shutdown (mothballing) procedures. F. Equipment specifications and guaranteed performance data. G. General manuals which describe several items not in the contract will not be accepted unless all references to irrelevant equipment are neatly eradicated or blocked out. All operations and maintenance manuals shall be in pdf electronic file format. The pdf files shall be based upon the following types of sources: original pdf files from the manufacturers and / or pdf files created directly from other electronic file formats such as .doc, .docx, .xls, .xlsx, or .dwg but not image formats such as .jpg or .TIF. The use of image formats may be City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 1 – General FM Improvements 1-15 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\1 General.docx 7/5/2018 10:00 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. approved, but on a case by case basis. In general, scanning hardcopies into pdf files is not acceptable. Doing so may be approved, but on a case by case basis. Use standard page sizes which are: 8½-inch by 11-inch 11-inch by 17-inch 22-inch by 34-inch Manuals shall be assembled and indexed so that information on each coating and piece of equipment can be readily found. Progress payments for the total contract work in excess of 90 percent completion may not be made until the operation and maintenance manual has been delivered and approved by the Owner, at their discretion. The Contractor shall secure and deliver to the Owner all equipment warranties and other warranties and guarantees required for all equipment and processes. Delivery shall be done at one time covering all major and minor equipment warranties. Copies of the warranties shall be included in each O & M Manual. See Division 1.15 for details regarding required warranties for specific components. 1.79.3 Construction Record Drawings Prior to receiving final payment for the work, the Contractor shall deliver a complete set of acceptable “As-Constructed” records to the Owner. Plans shall be made on clean, unmarked prints for this project in accordance with the following standards: • Yellow markings or highlights = deleted items • Red markings = new or modified items The Contractor shall provide “as-built” information on all items and work shown on the plans showing details of the finished product including dimensions, locations, outlines, changes, manufacturers, etc. The information must be in sufficient detail to allow the Owner’s personnel to locate, maintain, and operate the finished product and its various components. The Contractor shall comply with Section 1-05.4, Renton As-built Information Standards, of the Special Provisions of the Contract. See also electrical plan requirements in Division 16.05. 1.80 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1.81 Seismic Restraint and Anchorage Contractor shall furnish seismic restraint for all pumps and motors, piping, valves, and electrical panels. Seismic restraint shall be designed to meet IBC (ASCE 7 Chapter 13 – “Seismic Design Requirements for Nonstructural Components”) code requirements. The following design values shall be used in calculating seismic forces: City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 1 – General FM Improvements 1-16 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\1 General.docx 7/5/2018 10:00 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Ip = 1.5 Sds = 0.941g Sd1 =0.528g Seismic Design Category = D A complete seismic restraint system shall be provided including struts, straps, bolts, nuts, washers, etc. as required for secure attachment to foundations, pads, ceilings, floors, and/or walls. Contractor shall install seismic restraints when called for in the contract or recommended by the product manufacturer. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements as applicable. Seismic restraint systems shall be installed so as not to interfere with normal operations and maintenance of the equipment and other components as shown on the plans. Interference with normal operations and maintenance shall be as determined by the Owner. Drilled-in anchors for non-rotating equipment shall be Concrete Anchors unless otherwise specified. 1.82 Pressure Ratings Fittings, valves, pipe and fluid systems shall have pressure ratings equal to or greater than the pressures identified below, unless specifically called out otherwise in the plans or specifications: Equipment Function Working Pressure Test Pressure Pump discharge piping 20 psi 100 psi Working Pressure: Manufacturer’s rating of maximum pressure during extended operation. Test Pressure: Maximum pressure during project specific testing. 1.88 Location Designations The following location designations shall be used except where otherwise noted on the plans: Dry Locations: Indoor continually dry areas including office, laboratory, blower, and electrical rooms. Wet Locations: All locations exposed to the weather, whether under a roof or not, or within channels, basins or tanks. Damp Locations: Process areas; areas containing pumps, valves, and major piping; all spaces wholly or partially underground, or having a wall or ceiling forming part of a channel or tank, unless otherwise designated on the Plans. Any areas which do not fall within the definitions for dry, wet, or corrosive shall be considered damp. Corrosive Locations: Areas where chlorine gas under pressure, sulfuric acid, or liquid polymer are stored or processed, sewer wetwells and sewer manholes. 2-1 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 2 Sitework 2.00 GENERAL Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” shall apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. 2.05 Common Work for Sitework This division covers that work necessary for providing materials and performing all sitework as described in these specifications and as shown on the Plans. Part 1 - General Submittals Submittal information shall be provided to the Owner for the following items: • Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan • Erosion Control Fence Fabric • Erosion Control Mat • Dewatering Plan • Shoring Plan and Calculations • Dump Site Permits • General Fill • Structural Fill • Pipe Bedding • Trench Backfill • Paving • Hydroseed • Fencing Other Items listed in this section or required by the Owner. Site Conditions An exploration of subsurface soil and groundwater conditions at the project site were performed by RH2 Engineering. The results of the investigation are available for review upon request. On May 24, 2017, City staff used an excavator to excavate a test pit to a depth of 14 feet below ground surface. The City subsequently backfilled the test pit with compacted excavated soil using the excavator bucket. Groundwater seepage was observed on the south sidewall at a depth of approximately 9 feet and an estimated rate of less than 1 gallon per minute. Based on the observed soil composition and density, the very dense glacial till may support a structure. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-2 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 2.09 Special Inspections for Earth Work Part 3 – Execution Field Quality Control Special inspections including visual, probing of subgrade and compaction effort (nuclear densometer) are required for the following locations: • Trench backfill crossing roads and site access road and parking areas (visual, probe and nuclear densometer testing) • Excavation and backfill around proposed structures (visual, probe. Nuclear densometer testing if found necessary by the Owner) Areas where fill (either native or non-native) is being placed shall be tested for compaction compliance by a special inspector. The owner will pay for the initial testing. If tests indicate failure of compaction requirements, the Contractor shall pay for subsequent tests until tests indicate compliance with the specifications. Areas of native undisturbed subgrade shall be visually inspected by the Engineer prior to placement of any material overtop. Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer a minimum of 24 hours prior to inspection being needed. The Contractor shall fully cooperate with the special inspector, including providing safe access to the testing areas. No extra compensation will be provided for cooperation with and facilitation of inspections. Utility Trench Testing Testing will occur at the following locations at a minimum: • One test within 30 feet of start. • One test every 300 feet or at road intersections, whichever comes first. • One test whenever soil conditions change, per the direction of the Owner. The Contractor shall schedule with Owner for visual and probe review of earthwork activity. Contractor shall schedule with Owner and special inspection agency for nuclear densometer testing. Results of the tests shall be delivered to the Owner. If testing and review is required for roadway owned by another Jurisdiction, copies of testing results shall also be provided to that Jurisdiction. 2.10 SITE PREPARATION 2.10.2 Clearing and Grubbing Part 3- Execution Construction Clearing and grubbing shall be performed by the Contractor to remove and dispose of unwanted debris, vegetative matter, and other items noted on the Plans within the construction limits and shall conform to Section 2-01 of the Standard Specifications. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-3 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Do not remove organic material including plants, grasses, trees and native topsoil unless directed by the Plans. In instances where the Contractor is allowed to clear areas to facilitate construction but is not required to, any areas disturbed by construction shall be surface restored to existing or better condition including matching surface restoration with hydroseed or plantings as shown in adjacent areas required to be modified by the Plans. Where the Contractor is allowed to clear areas to facilitate construction, surface restoration shall be completed at no additional cost to the owner. 2.10.4 Dewatering Part 3 - Execution Installation/Construction The Contractor is to determine the scope, type, size, quantity, method of installation, operation, and removal of the dewatering system necessary to keep all excavations de-watered to an elevation below the base of the excavation sufficient to stabilize the soils in the excavation and the surrounding areas, and to prevent flotation of partially completed structures. Any dewatering systems must be positioned away from all building and utility construction so as to not become a part of the permanent facility. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and operate all necessary machinery, appliances, and equipment to meet these water control requirements, and shall dewater and dispose of the water so as not to cause injury to public or private property or to cause a nuisance to the public. The Contractor shall maintain sufficient pumping equipment and machinery in good working condition for all ordinary emergencies, including power outages, and shall have available at all times competent workmen for the operation of the pump equipment. The dewatering system shall not be shut down between shifts, on holidays or weekends, or during work stoppages. Field Quality Control The quality of all surface and ground water discharged from the site shall meet all State and local requirements. The Contractor shall employ all means necessary to remove suspended solids, oils, trash, and other deleterious materials from surface and ground water prior to discharging. Restoration Any dewatering wells installed by the Contractor shall be removed and backfilled in accordance with applicable Federal and State regulations. 2.10.5 Construction Access Part 1 - General Summary The existing lift station site is located inside a gated community. The access code for the gate will be provided during the pre-construction meeting. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-4 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. The Contractor shall provide for all temporary site access and shall maintain vehicular site access at all times. Access shall be of a quality to permit Contractor’s forces and outside inspector’s safe and convenient ingress/egress. Unless specifically provided for in other bid items, the cost of building and maintaining construction access shall be incidental and no separate payment shall be made. Any bid items for aggregate materials (e.g. crushed rock, ballast, etc.) shall not relate to construction access unless the description of that bid item specifically states inclusion of the construction access. Part 3 - Execution Repair/Restoration The Contractor is responsible for maintaining all construction accesses during construction and the cost of such maintenance shall be incidental to the bid price. Maintenance includes repairing settled and damaged areas, and providing dust control. Cost for maintenance due to rain, snow, wind, or other weather conditions shall be incidental to the bid price. Cleaning Wherever construction vehicle access routes intersect paved roads, provisions must be made by the Contractor to minimize the transport of sediment onto the paved road. The Contractor shall remove all dirt, mud, rocks, vegetation, or other deleterious material from all construction equipment prior to leaving the site. This may include spray washing, sweeping, or other physical methods as necessary to remove materials. If sediment or other debris is transported onto a paved road surface, the road shall be cleaned thoroughly by the end of the work day. Debris shall be removed from roads by shoveling or sweeping. Street washing shall be allowed only after debris has been removed in this manner. 2.11 Earthwork Materials 2.11.1 Common Work for Earthwork Materials Part 1 - General Acceptance at Site Owner shall review the site near the end of each pay period to determine the equivalent percentage of earthwork completed compared to the total earthwork lump sum price . Contractor shall be paid based on the percentage completed based on Owner’s judgment of percent complete. Part 2 - Products Source Quality Control All imported fill material shall be free of hydrocarbons (e.g. gasoline, diesel, oil, etc.), pesticides, herbicides and other hazardous volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and synthetic organic chemicals (SOCs). The Contractor shall provide certification to the owner that the fill is free of these chemicals. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-5 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 2.11.2 General Fill Part 1 – General Summary All fill required for this project that is not specifically defined as another type shall be “General Fill”. References Section 9-03.14(3) Common Borrow of the Standard Specifications. Part 2 – Products Components General fill shall be soil free of organics, debris, and other deleterious materials with no individual particles having a maximum dimension larger than 5 inches. The moisture content of the material and weather conditions at the time of placement will be used to determine the suitability of native materials for backfill as general fill. Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction All general fill shall be compacted in uniform layers not exceeding 12 inches in loose thickness and compacted to at least 90 percent maximum dry density based on the ASTM D-1557 (modified) test procedure. 2.11.3 Structural Fill Part 1 – General Summary All fill placed below, beside and against building components, building structures, vaults, manholes, handholes, slabs, sidewalks, and drives shall be “Structural Fill” unless other fill materials are specifically shown on the Plans. The structural fill material has been selected to support the weight of the structure in combination with the existing native material and to prevent adverse movement during an earthquake. The Contractor must take particular care to maintain the integrity of the design by using structural fill where shown. References Where free draining material for use as structural fill is required as indicated on the Plans or needed to maintain compaction in adverse weather conditions, it shall conform with Section 9-03.14(1), “Gravel Borrow” of the Standard Specifications. Structural fill for foundation subgrades or where free drainage is not required through the structural fill shall conform with 9-03.14(2) “Select Borrow” of the Standard Specifications. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-6 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 2 – Products Components Structural fill shall be soil free of organics, debris, and other deleterious materials. The Owner shall determine if native on-site materials are suitable for use as structural fill. Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction The moisture content of the material and weather conditions at the time of placement will be used to determine the suitability of native materials for backfill as structural fill. Structural fill shall bear on firm base and be placed in uniform layers not exceeding 8 inches in loose thickness. The backfill area must be free of standing water and the subgrade soils must be stable. Each layer of structural fill shall be compacted to at least 95 percent of its maximum dry density based on the ASTM D-1557 (modified) test procedure. 2.11.4 Pipe Bedding Part 1 – General Summary All fill placed below and around buried utilities shall be “Gravel Backfill for Pipe Bedding”. The pipe bedding material has been selected to support the weight of the utility by distributing the load so that the completed utility and backfill system does not weigh more than the native material. In addition, the grain size has been selected so that the bedding will not migrate into the bottom of the trench. The Contractor must take particular care to maintain the integrity of the utility design by using the appropriate pipe bedding material where shown. References For Ductile Iron, Steel, or Concrete Pipe larger than 4-inch diameter: Bedding material shall conform with Section 9-03.12(3) “Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding” of the Standard Specifications except all shall pass a 1-inch sieve. For PVC and HDPE water piping regardless of diameter: Bedding shall conform with Section 9-03.13 “Backfill for Sand Drains” or as approved by the Inspector. For PVC Sewer and Storm Piping, CPEP regardless of diameter and Conduit, Side Service Lines, and all other piping 4-inch in diameter or less: Bedding shall conform with Section 9-03.13 “Backfill for Sand Drains” or as approved by the Inspector. Pipe bedding used around restrained joint pipe must be a well graded cohesive material with fines. Rounded gravels and pea gravel are not acceptable. Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction Bedding material shall surround the pipe and conduits to the limits shown on the Plans and provide uniform support along the entire length without allowing concentrated loading at City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-7 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. joints or bells or that results in any bridging of the pipe. All bedding material shall bear on firm subgrade and be compacted to firm and unyielding condition. 2.11.5 Trench Backfill Part 1 – General Summary All fill placed above the pipe bedding in a trench shall be “Trench Backfill”. The trench backfill material has been selected to distribute surface loads over the utility. In addition, the grain size has been selected so that the trench backfill will not migrate into the pipe bedding or trench walls. The Contractor must take particular care to maintain the integrity of the utility design by using the appropriate trench backfill material where shown. References Trench backfill shall consist of materials conforming to Section 9-03.19 “Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill” of the Standard Specifications or as approved by the Owner. Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction Trench backfill shall be placed and compacted above the pipe bedding to finished grade elevations in unrestored areas or to subgrade elevations in restored areas. In unimproved or landscaped areas trench backfill shall be placed in uniform layers not to exceed 12 inches in loose thickness. Each lift is to be compacted to at least 95 percent of its maximum dry density based on the ASTM D-1557 (modified) test procedure. In areas where the trench will support roadways or vehicle access areas, trench backfill shall be placed in uniform layers not to exceed 8 inches in loose thickness. Each lift is to be compacted to at least 95 percent of its maximum dry density based on the ASTM D-1557 test procedure (modified proctor) from 0 to 4 feet below finished surface, 90 percent below 4 feet. 2.11.6 Gravel Backfill for Drains Part 1 – General Summary All fill placed around drain pipes in a trench shall be “Gravel Backfill for Drains”. Gravel backfill for drains shall provide drainage for stormwater runoff. References Gravel backfill for drains shall conform with Section 9-03.12(4) of the Standard Specifications. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-8 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 2.11.7 Gravel Base Course Part 1 – General Summary All fill placed under paving, foundations or structures and next to native material shall be “Gravel Base Course” unless otherwise called out on the Plans. References Aggregate for gravel base course under structures, and foundations shall conform to Section 9-03.10 Aggregate for Gravel Base of the Standard Specifications. Aggregate for gravel base course under roadways, paved areas, sidewalks and gravel areas shall conform to Section 9-03.9(3) Crushed Surfacing Base Course of the Standard Specifications. 2.11.8 Gravel Top Course Part 1 – General Summary Gravel surface paving as shown on the Plans shall be “Gravel Top Course”. References Aggregate for gravel top course shall conform to Section 9-03.9(3) Crushed Surfacing Top Course and Keystone of the Standard Specifications. 2.12 Road Surfacing 2.12.1 Common Work for Road Surfacing 2.12.2 Cement Concrete Pavement Part 1 – General References Cement concrete pavement, sidewalks, curb and gutter shall meet the requirements of Division 3. Construction shall comply with Section 5-05 of the Standard Specifications. Part 3 – Execution Examination Evidence of pavement damage such as surface cracking, ponding or other variations in surface consistency shall be investigated by the Contractor and reported to the Engineer. Construction Pavement areas damaged by construction activities shall be removed and reconstructed at the Contractor’s expense to the road agency’s standards. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-9 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Manhole covers, valve covers, survey markers, and other existing surface features shall be adjusted to the finished grade of the new pavement. Adjustment of utility features to grade shall be in conformance with the local road agency standards. Catch basin grates shall be set 0.1 feet below finish grade. 2.12.3 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) / Asphalt Concrete Pavement (ACP) Part 1 – General Definitions The Plans and specifications may call out Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) or Asphalt Concrete Pavement (ACP). The terms are synonymous. References Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) shall comply with Section 5-04 of the Standard Specifications. All HMA shown on the Plans shall be Commercial HMA unless otherwise noted. Furnish, place, spread, and compact HMA to the thickness shown on the Plans. 2.12.10 Pavement Marking/Striping Part 1 – General References Pavement marking shall be constructed in accordance with 8-22 of the Standard Specifications and any Owner standards more stringent than the Standard Specifications. Part 3 – Execution Repair/Restoration Pavement marking damaged or removed during construction shall be replaced by the Contractor. Cost for replacement of damaged or removed markings shall be incidental to the contract. Installation/Construction Provide markings on all new pavement per the local traffic agency’s requirements. Pavement marking shall match marking at the project site unless noted otherwise on the Plans or within these specifications. 2.13 Vegetation Protection 2.13.1 Common Work for Vegetation Protection Warranty Trees which are protected within fencing that become damaged or die within one year of acceptance shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at the discretion of the Owner with trees of the same species and equal size. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-10 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 2.13.2 Fencing Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction Protect trees and other existing vegetation to remain with temporary six (6) foot chain link fencing as indicated on the Plans. No work can commence until complete erosion control and temporary fencing is in place and approved by Owner’s Representative. Fencing shall be constructed and located to protect vegetation from physical or chemical damage, flame, smoke, heat, and damage to, or compaction of roots. Construction access, vehicle or equipment parking, material storage or material disposal will not be allowed within drip lines of existing trees to remain. Repair/Restoration After construction, chain link fencing shall be removed from site by Contractor. 2.13.3 Existing Trees to Be Removed Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction Trees which are to be removed as indicated on Plans shall be removed completely including roots, stumps, branches, and stems, or as directed by Owner’s Representative unless shown otherwise on the Plans. 2.13.4 Existing Trees to Remain Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction Individual trees and areas shown to remain shall be protected by six (6) foot high chain link fence. Install fencing before site preparation, grading and clearing and grubbing operations. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor, for convenience or ease of construction, remove existing trees that are not designated to be removed. Field Quality Control Protect root systems from smothering. Restrict vehicular traffic to prevent any compaction of soil over root systems. Prior to installation, stake the location of protection fencing for approval by the Owner. Location stakes or marking shall be placed not greater than 20 (twenty) feet on center. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-11 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 2.13.5 Excavation Around Trees Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction Excavate within drip line of trees only where shown. Where trenching for utilities is required within drip line, tunnel under or around roots by methods that do not tear or compromise the health of the roots. Do not cut main lateral roots or tap roots. Field Quality Control The Contractor shall notify the Owner prior to cutting roots over 4 inches in diameter. Treat cut roots over 1-inch in diameter with asphaltic pruning paint. 2.13.6 Pruning Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction Cut branches with sharp and clean pruning instruments and do not break or chop. Prune flush with trunk surface. 2.13.7 Trimming of Existing Trees Part 3 – Execution Field Quality Control Engage a National Arborist Association Certified tree surgeon to perform Class II pruning on trees as indicated on Plans and as directed in the field. Extents of pruning shall be approved by the Owner. 2.20 EARTH MOVING 2.23 Excavation Part 1 – General Summary The Contractor shall excavate as necessary to construct the improvements shown. Part 2 – Products Materials All excavated material below the organic layer can be re-used as backfill as long as it is properly protected from water saturation, meets the specification for the backfill purpose, and is approved by the Owner. Approval of material as backfill will be made the moment before placement of the material as backfill. Weather conditions may make previously approved material unsuitable for backfill requiring the material to be removed from the project site. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-12 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Excavated material that is not used as backfill shall be disposed off-site. All permits for the disposal of excavated material shall be obtained by the Contractor. A copy of all permits and the locations of each disposal site shall be submitted to the Owner. All excavated material shall be removed from the project site. Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction Excavation shall include the digging, scraping, and removing existing native material, abandoned or interfering utilities, abandoned or interfering structures and any other obstacles necessary for the construction of the improvements shown on the Plans. Excavation includes utility excavation, structural excavation, and grading excavation. Utility excavation shall be performed to the depths necessary to complete the utility construction work shown. Structural excavation shall be performed to the limits shown and established by the Owner. The base of the excavation shall extend laterally a minimum of 1 feet beyond the structure unless specified otherwise on Plans. Excavated material may be stockpiled within the construction limits with the approval by the Owner. Temporary stockpiling of excavated material will not be permitted outside the construction limits at any time. Examination The base of the excavation shall be evaluated by the Owner to determine if it is suitable for backfilling. The Owner will evaluate the stability of the base of excavation by determining if all significant organic soils or other unsuitable materials have been removed. Construction Excavation required by the Owner that is beyond the depth shown shall be performed by the Contractor per the direction of the Owner. The Contractor will be reimbursed for additional excavation as specified in Division 18, “Measurement and Payment”. 2.25 Erosion and Sedimentation Control 2.25.2 Contractor Provided Certified Erosion and Sedimentation Control Lead Part 1 – General Summary The Contractor shall provide a Certified Erosion and Sedimentation Control Lead (CESCL) as part of their regular work force for the project. This person shall be a site superintendent, project manager or site laborer regularly on the project site during earthwork operations. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-13 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Submittals Documentation of the Certification shall be provided to the Owner and reviewing authority if applicable with a copy of such certification always available in the job shack. Washington State Department of Ecology Certification shall be valid and up to date for this person throughout the duration of the earthwork operations of the project. 2.25.3 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control (SWPPP Reference) 2.25.3 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control Part 1 – General Quality Assurance The Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control (TESC) plans shown on the construction plans are the minimum requirements for the anticipated site conditions. The Contractor shall add additional TESC facilities or processes as necessary to ensure that erosion and sedimentation problems do not occur. The Contractor shall inspect the TESC facilities daily and maintain the systems as necessary to prevent off-site damage. Part 2 – Products Materials Straw or mulch shall be applied to any exposed surfaces to minimize erosion and filter surface water runoff. Where straw or mulch is required for erosion control, it shall be applied to a minimum thickness of 2-inches. Straw shall not include Reed Canary grass. Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction All erosion/sedimentation control systems including; fencing, earth berms, grasses, straw, mulch, culverts, drain pipe, outfalls and other items required by for this project, must be installed prior to any clearing, grubbing, excavation, or grading work or other work that could result in off-site stormwater or material flows. Erosion/sedimentation controls systems must remain in place throughout the duration of the construction activities. The systems may be relocated to complete utility, excavation, grading, and landscaping activities if their location impedes the associated work. If the systems are relocated to complete any work they must be reinstalled to protect the construction and surrounding areas prior to commencing work on other portions of the project. Systems such as mulch, plastic sheeting and hydroseed shall be installed as soon as clearing, grading and excavation are complete if sites are 1-acre or less. For sites larger than 1-acre, temporary and/or final surface restoration shall be completed as clearing, grading and excavation progresses so that no more than ½-acre is exposed at any one time. The Contractor shall take care and diligence to minimize erosion exposure and provide erosion and sedimentation control measures as shown on the plans and required by construction practice. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-14 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Stabilized construction entrances and wash pads shall be installed at the beginning of construction activities and shall be maintained for the duration of the project. Wash pads shall be kept clean to prevent the transport of sediment onto adjoining roads. Earth berms shall be installed as necessary to prevent the migration of surface water into excavations or off of the project site. Surface water that is intercepted by earth berms shall be routed to an approved stormwater conveyance system. The Contractor shall ensure that the concentration of surface water at the earth berm does not erode the adjoining or downstream properties. Sediment deposited against the earth berm shall be removed to ensure that surface water can flow freely. The earth berm shall not be removed before the stabilization of the surface downhill from the berm. 2.25.4 Stormwater Discharge Part 3 – Execution Field Quality Control The Contractor shall be responsible for meeting all construction stormwater discharge water quality requirements including State of Washington (WAC 173-220-020), Construction Stormwater Permit requirements and local requirements regardless of weather conditions. If the project is fined by the permitting authority, that stormwater fine shall be paid for by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.30 SITE IMPROVEMENTS 2.31 Fencing 2.31.1 Common Work for Fencing Part 1 – General Related Sections • Division 3 Concrete • Division 10.14.7 Signage • Division 11.40.2 Manual gates Part 3 – Execution Preparation Clear the area along the fence path, remove surface irregularities and grade earth smooth and continuous prior to fence installation. 2.31.2 Temporary Construction Security Fence Part 1 – General Related Sections • Division 10.14.7 Signage City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-15 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 2 – Products Materials Chain link shall be 13-gauge minimum. Top and bottom wire shall be used for fencing with posts directly driven into the ground. Top and bottom rail shall be used for modular fencing using concrete block bases. All vehicle access gates shall be locked with a padlock provided by the Contractor. Extra keys shall be provided to the Owner prior to construction. Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction The Contractor shall provide a 6-feet tall temporary construction fence surrounding the construction site. Fence posts shall be spaced at a maximum of 12 feet on center. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining fence during construction and securing fence after each workday. Posts shall be securely installed directly into the ground or set in temporary concrete base blocks. Chain link shall be securely attached to the fence posts. The construction fence may be used in combination with the permanent fence provided that the fence is continuous around the site perimeter. Clearing limit identification fencing shall not be considered a Temporary Construction Security Fence. 2.31.3 Chainlink Fence Part 1- General Summary This section describes the requirements for the chainlink fence located as shown and detailed on the Plans and these specifications. Related sections • Division 2.31.1 Common Work for Fences • Division 3.31.3 Post Footings • Division 9.06 Color Schedule References Chainlink Fence Manufacturers Institute Product Manual Specifications DOT Standard Specifications Section 8-12 ASTM F626, A392, A817, F1083, A121, F567 Submittals Galvanizing information, steel quality standards, hardware quality standards. Dimensional drawings including details, finishes, accessories and foundations. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-16 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Color coating samples if option is chosen by the Owner. Part 2 - Products Materials Obtain chain link fences and gates, including accessories, fittings, and fastenings, from a single source. Chain-Link (woven wire fabric) fencing shall be commercial grade, as detailed on the Plans and in accordance with Section 8-12 of the Standard Specifications except as modified herein. Components Fence Fabric: Galvanized wire: ASTM A392 - 1.2oz/sf. Wire Spec-A817, Type and class per use and location of the project. Size: Helically wound and woven to height of as indicated on drawings with 2-inch diamond mesh and core wire gauge of 9. PVC coating, if required, shall not be included in the wire size measurement. Selvage of fabric: twisted and barbed at top and twisted at bottom unless noted otherwise on the Plans. Steel Fence Framing: Steel pipe - Type I: ASTM F1083, standard weight schedule 40; minimum yield strength of 30,000 psi. Outside diameter (OD) sizes as shown on the Plans. Hot-dipped galvanized with minimum average 1.8 oz./ft² of coated surface area. Accessories Chain link fence accessories per ASTM F626 Provide items required to complete fence system. Galvanize each ferrous metal item and finish to match framing. Post caps: Formed steel weather tight closure cap for pipe posts. Provide one cap for each post. Cap to have provision for barbed wire when necessary. Top rail and rail ends: Pressed steel per ASTM F626, for connection of rail and brace to terminal posts. Top rail sleeves: 6-inch (178 mm) expansion sleeve with a minimum 0.137-inch wire diameter and 1.80-inch length spring, allowing for expansion and contraction of top rail. Wire ties: 9-gauge galvanized steel wire for attachment of fabric to line posts. Thirteen gauge for rails and braces. Brace and tension (stretcher bar) bands: Pressed steel, minimum 300-degree profile curvature for secure fence post attachment. Tension (stretcher) bars: One-piece lengths equal to 2 inches less than full height of fabric with a minimum cross-section of 3/16 inch by ¾-inch. Provide tension (stretcher) bars where chain link fabric meets terminal posts. Tension wire (used when top rails are not required): Galvanized coated steel wire, 6 gauge, with tensile strength of 75,000 psi. Hog ties are permissible. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-17 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Tie rod, truss rods, and tightener: Steel rods with minimum diameter of ⅜-inch. Capable of withstanding a tension of minimum 2,000 lbs. Nuts and bolts are galvanized. Fabrication Fence frames that require welding shall be hot dipped galvanized in the shop unless approved otherwise by the owner. Finishes PVC coating per Chainlink Fence Manufacturers Product Manual class 2A. Colors shall be available for owner selection including green, olive green, brown, and black. All fence components shall be coated including mesh, posts, caps, clips, and rails. Part 3 - Execution Installers Installers shall have a minimum of two years of experience. References from three previous projects shall be submitted for review during shop drawing submittal. Examination Verify areas to receive fencing are completed to final grades and elevations. Ensure property lines and legal boundaries of work are clearly established. Perform complete utility locates within the areas of fencing to verify conflicting utilities. Fence posts may require adjustment to avoid utilities by a minimum of 2-feet. Installation/Construction Chainlink Fence Framing Installation: A. Install chain link fence in accordance with ASTM F567 and manufacturer’s instructions. B. Locate terminal post at each fence termination and change in horizontal or vertical direction of 30 degrees or more. C. Space line posts uniformly at 10-feet on center maximum and to avoid utilities by 2-feet minimum. D. Concrete set terminal and gate posts: Drill holes in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. Trowel finish around post. Slope to direct water away from posts. Footings shall be sized per schedule on the Plans. E. Check each post for vertical and top alignment and maintain in position during placement and finishing operations. F. Bracing: Install horizontal pipe brace at mid-height for fences 8-feet tall and over, on each side of terminal posts. Firmly attach with fittings. Install diagonal truss rods at these points. Adjust truss rod, ensuring posts remain plumb. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-18 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. G. Tension wire: If shown on the Plans, install tension wire before stretching fabric and attach to each post with ties. Secure tension wire to fabric with 12½ gauge hog rings 24 inches O.C. H. Top rail: If shown on the Plans, install lengths, 21-feet. Connect joints with sleeves for rigid connections for expansion/contraction. I. Brace Rails for fabric height 8-feet and over. Install brace rails between terminal posts and adjacent line posts with fittings and accessories. Install brace rails at each gate post and each corner post with angle change exceeding 30 degrees. J. Bottom Rails: If shown on the Plans install bottom rails between posts with fittings and accessories. Chain Link Fabric Installation A. Fabric: Install fabric on side facing outward from site and attach so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released. Leave no more than 3-inches between finish grade and bottom selvage. Attach fabric with wire ties to line posts and tension wire at 15-inches on center and to rails and horizontal braces at 24-inches on center. B. Tension (stretcher) bars: Pull fabric taut; thread tension bar through fabric and attach to terminal posts with bands or clips spaced maximum of 15-inches on center. Hog ties are allowed. Accessories A. Tie wires: Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons and clothing. B. Fasteners: Install nuts on side of fence opposite fabric side for added security. 2.50 SHORING AND SUPPORT 2.51 Contractor Designed Shoring Part 1 - General Summary Where shoring, sheet piling, sheeting, bracing, lagging, or other supports are necessary to prevent cave-ins or damage to existing structures, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to design, furnish, place, maintain, and remove supports in accordance with applicable laws, codes, and safety requirements. References Chapter 296-155 of WAC, “Safety Standards for Construction Work, Part N, Excavation, Trenching, and Shoring”. OSHA Quality Assurance Where the Contractor is required to provide the shoring design, it shall be prepared by a competent person as defined by WAC 296-155-650. Before beginning any excavation that is City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-19 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. governed by the shoring requirements, the Contractor shall submit his stamped shoring plan and calculations to the Owner for approval. The stamp must be present on all Plans and calculations, and all submittals must be approved by the Owner prior to starting work. Part 3 - Execution Installation/Construction Design, planning, installation, and removal of sheeting, shoring, sheet piling, lagging, and bracing shall be accomplished in such a manner as to maintain the undisturbed state of soil below and adjacent to excavation. 2.60 CONTAMINATED & WASTE MATERIALS HANDLING 2.60.2 Waste Material Control Part 1 – General Quality Assurance Adhere to all requirements of federal, state, and local statutes and regulations dealing with pollution. Permit no public nuisances. Use only dump sites that are approved by the regulatory agency having jurisdiction, and present proof of approval upon request. Part 3 – Execution Installation/Construction The Contractor shall take precautions to warn, protect, and prevent the public from all hazards that exist on site due to any demolition or construction operations. Stockpiled debris shall be surrounded with yellow warning tape attached to lath, stakes, poles, or fencing to warn the public of any potential hazard. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, or other methods to limit dust and dirt from rising and scattering in the air. Surface water runoff that is contaminated with site debris, silt, or other material that adversely affects water quality shall be collected and cleaned pri or to discharge. On site collection ponds may not be used to keep silt laden water from entering the storm water collection system. Do not use water to control dust when its use may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice formation, flooding, and pollution. The Contractor shall minimize the amount of dust and other airborne particles caused by any demolition, excavation, stockpiling, or removal activities. Dust control measures shall be implemented by the Contractor prior to the beginning of work activities. Exposed soil may be wetted with water or covered to minimize dust creation. Water runoff from the wetting procedure shall be accumulated and cleaned prior to disposal. Water runoff accumulation shall be removed from the site prior to project completion. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-20 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Cleaning At all times, keep the construction area clean and orderly and upon completion of the work, leave buildings broom clean and all parts of the work clean and free of rubbish and excess material of any kind. Leave fixtures, equipment, walls, and floors clean and free of stains, paint or roofing splashes, or other marks or defects. Upon completion, restore site of all work or equipment and material storage areas to their original conditions. Remove all miscellaneous unused material resulting from work and dispose of it in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. The site, through the progress of construction, shall be kept as clean as possible and in a neat condition. 2.61 Contaminated Materials 2.61.2 Toxic Spill or Release Contact Requirements Part 3 - Execution Field Quality Control During construction, if there is any toxic substance spill or release discharged into the environment, report the location, quantity, date and time of the spill or release to Washington State Emergency Management at 1 (800) 258-5990 and the Owner’s representative. Spills shall be monitored, contained, and cleaned up to applicable codes at the Contractor’s expense. 2.90 LANDSCAPING 2.90.1 Common Work for Landscaping Part 1 – General Submittals In addition to Division 2.05, provide the following information. Samples of compost Written maintenance instructions recommending proper procedures for maintenance of plant materials. Top Soil - The Contractor shall submit the data for topsoil to be used as determined by an approved testing lab. Data shall include percentage of organic content as determined by incineration process and recommendations on type and quality of additives required to establish satisfactory pH factor, organic content, and supply of nutrients to bring the soil to a satisfactory level for planting. Nursery Material Plant Lists with quantities and sizes (pot volume and/or tree height) planting schedule, indicating approximate planting date. Delivery, Storage, and Handling Deliver fertilizers in original, unopened and undamaged containers that list weight, analysis. and name of manufacturer. Store in such a manner as to prevent wetting and deterioration. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-21 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Take all precautions customary in good trade practice in preparing plants for transplanting. Spray deciduous plants in foliage with an approved “Anti-Desiccant” immediately after digging to prevent dehydration. Dig, pack, transport, and handle plants with care to ensure protection against injury. If plants cannot be planted immediately upon delivery, properly protect them with soil, wet peat moss, or in a manner acceptable to the Owner. Water plantings as necessary to keep them alive and in healthy condition. Provide dry, loose topsoil for planting bed mixes. Project/Site Conditions Prevent damage to existing features, pavement, utility lines, areas to receive planting and other features remaining as part of final landscaping and/or site improvements. Quality Assurance The Contractor, with the approval of the Owner will select a qualified testing laboratory to test and inspect operations under this Section at the Contractor’s expense. Notify testing laboratory of times for inspections. Notify Owner if any undesirable conditions are met during construction so that supplemental recommendations can be made. Comply with all applicable federal, state and local codes and safety regulations. Comply with sizing and grading standards of the latest edition of “American Standard for Nursery Stock.” A plant shall be dimensioned as it stands in its natural position. Warranty Warrant trees, shrubs and ground cover for the period as stated in the Warranty section of Division 1 against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from negligence by Owner, abuse or damage by others or unusual phenomena or incidents beyond the Contractor’s control. Replace, in size and kind and in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, all plants that are dead or, as determined by the Owner’s Authorized Representative, in an unhealthy or unsightly condition, or have lost their natural shape due to dead branches or other causes due to the Contractor's negligence. Such replacement(s) will be at Contractor’s expense. Warranty shall not include damage or loss of trees, plants, or ground covers caused by fires, unusual floods, freezing rains, lightning storms, winds over 75 miles per hour or other catastrophic “Acts of God”. Winter kill caused by extreme cold and severe winter conditions not typical of planting area, unanticipated acts of vandalism or negligence on the part of the Owner and damage caused by wildlife, shall not be covered under this warranty. Maintenance The plant establishment period shall be 365 days in duration. Maintenance of landscaping installed as part of this contract is fully the responsibility of the Contractor during the plant establishment period. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-22 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. During the plant establishment period, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure the continued growth of all plant materials. This care shall include, but not be limited to, the following: labor and materials necessary for removal of foreign materials, weeds, dead or rejected plant materials and lawn; the replacement of all unsatisfactory plant materials planted under this Contract in kind and size; and fertilizing to maintain a healthy growing condition and visually pleasing site. Water trees, plants and groundcover within the first 24 hours of initial planting, and in sufficient amounts thereafter to keep plant materials in a healthy growing condition. Provide maintenance reports to Owner’s Authorized Representative monthly, indicating procedures, fertilizing, defective material, etc. Part 2 – Products Materials A complete list of plants, including a schedule of sizes, quantities and other requirements is shown on the Plans. In the event that quantity discrepancies or material omissions occur in the plant materials list, the planting Plans shall govern. All plants shall be nursery grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the project locale for a minimum of 2 years or transplanted from on-site. All potted plants shall be grown in the containers in which they are sold for a minimum of one year. Stock furnished shall be at least the minimum size indicated. Larger stock is acceptable, at no additional cost, providing that the larger plants will not be cut back to size indicated. Provide plants indicated by two measurements so that only a maximum of 25 percent are of the minimum size indicated and 75 percent are of the maximum size indicated. Part 3 – Execution Examination Examine proposed planting areas and conditions of installation. Do not start planting work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected and approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Notify Owner’s Authorized Representative at least 7 working days prior to installation of plant material. Final inspection to determine acceptance of planted areas will be made by the Owner’s Authorized Representative, upon Contractor’s request. Provide notification at least 10 working days before requested inspection date. Planted areas will be accepted, provided all requirements, including maintenance, have been complied with and plant materials are alive and in a healthy, vigorous condition after final acceptance of the project. Upon one year after Substantial Completion, the Owner will assume plant maintenance. Repair/Restoration All dead plant materials shall be replaced within thirty (30) days of discovery. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-23 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Re-set settled plants to proper grade and position. Restore planting saucer and adjacent material and remove dead material. Tighten and repair guy wires and stakes as required. Correct defective work as soon as possible after deficiencies become apparent and weather and season permit. Field Quality Control Provide plant material record Plans legibly recording actual construction indicating horizontal and vertical locations, referenced to permanent surface improvements. Identify field changes of dimension and detail any changes. Cleaning During landscape work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work. Remove from site all excess materials, soil, debris and equipment as instructed by Owner’s Authorized Representative. Repair damage resulting from planting operations. Remove any temporary irrigation systems once no longer needed. Remove only after approved by the Owner. 2.90.3 Soil Amendments 2.90.3.1 Commercial Fertilizer Part 2 – Products Materials Each tree and shrub shall receive “AgSafe Tabs” (or equal). Plant tablets at the time of planting at the following rate: Plant Size Tablet Size No. of Tablets Gal. 10 gram 1-2 Gal. 21 gram 2-3 Cal. Inch of tree 21 gram 2 per inch Ht. of tree 21 gram 2 per ft. of ht. For application to tree/shrub/groundcover beds three months after initial planting: Provide fertilizer with not less than 18 percent total nitrogen, 8 percent available phosphoric acid and 9 percent total potash. P and K to come from Controlled Release Polymer Coated-based nitrates. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-24 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 2.90.3.2 Shredded Plant Waste Part 2 – Products Materials Material shall consist of on-site plants removed during site clearing operations shredded by a mechanical wood chipper that produces chips no larger than 2-inches in length and ¼- inch in thickness. Part 3 – Execution Installation Shredded plant waste shall be applied to 2-inches in thickness unless otherwise shown on the Plans. 2.90.3.3 Mulch Part 2 – Products Materials Mulch for slopes less than 2Hl:1V: Shredded plant waste as described above or commercially available straw. Straw shall not include Reed Canary grass. Mulch for slopes 2H:1V or steeper: Nutramulch compost or approved equal. Mulch shall meet the minimum MUM Standards established by the State Dept. of Ecology per WAC 175-304- 300 and 400. Part 3 – Execution Installation Plant Waste or Straw: Spread to a uniform thickness of 2-inches in thickness unless otherwise shown on the Plans. Blend into the soil. Nutramulch: Premix with soil at 1/3 mulch to 2/3 soil ratio for 3-inch depth, or apply 1.5- inch depth and till into the soil. 2.90.10 Topsoil Part 2 – Products Materials Import topsoil for seeding/planting areas. Import topsoil shall be naturally occurring surface soil with a minimum sand content of 60 percent. Topsoil shall have no evident rocks or debris over ½-inch Acidity pH range shall be between 5.0 and 6.5. Organic matter content shall be 10 to 20 percent by dry weight. Add dolomite limestone, if required, to obtain pH. Limestone, if used, shall be finely ground, passing a minimum of 90 percent through the U.S. Standard No. 8 sieve and 20 percent through the U.S. Standard No. 100 sieve. Add approved nutrients, if required, to bring nutrients to a satisfactory level for planting as recommended by a qualified testing laboratory (exclude nitrogen, potassium, and phosphorus). City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-25 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 3 – Execution Installation In planter areas, soil excavated shall be mixed with organic compost in a ratio of 1/3 organic compost to 2/3 sandy loam. In seeding areas, place topsoil and rake or blade to a smooth, consistent surface. Do not compact. Install 2-inch depth topsoil unless specified otherwise on the plans or within the specific seeding/planting specification section. Excess soil shall be disposed of as per Owner’s Authorized Representative’s instructions. 2.90.11 Hydroseed Part 1 – General Related Sections • Division 2.90.21 Erosion Control Matting Scheduling The Contractor shall apply hydroseed within the optimum seeding windows whenever possible. Hydroseed may be used for temporary erosion control only with the approval of the Engineer. Construction practices shall be timed to minimize bare, cleared and excavated areas so that surfaces are hydroseeded and seed germinates and grows stabilizing surfacing as soon as possible. The optimum seeding windows are April 1 through June 30 and September 1 through October 1. Seeding that occurs between July 1 and August 30 will require irrigation until 75 percent grass cover is established. Seeding that occurs between October 1 and March 30 will require a mulch layer 2-inches thick until 75 percent grass cover is established. Maintenance The Contractor shall provide temporary irrigation, mulch or plastic sheeting (plastic sheeting for short term protection only, 7 days maximum) to hydroseeded areas as required for establishment and to protect the seed from construction activities at no additional cost to the Owner. Part 2 – Products Materials Hydroseed applications shall include a minimum of 1,500 pounds per acre of mulch with 3 percent tackifier. Mulch may be made up of 100 percent: cottonseed meal; fibers made of wood, recycled cellulose, hemp, and kenaf; compost; or blends thereof. Tackifier shall be plant-based, such as guar or alpha plantago, or chemical-based such as polyacrylamide or polymers. Any mulch or tackifier product used shall be installed per manufacturer’s instructions. Any areas that have seed applied by hand shall have a minimum 2-inch thick layer of compost- based mulch or 1-inch layer of topsoil. Slow-release fertilizers shall be used. Fertilizer shall not be agitated more than 20 minutes in the hydromulch machine before it is to be used. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-26 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. On 2:1 slopes and less, Bonded Fiber Matrix (BFM) or Mechanically Bonded Fiber Matrix (MBFM) products may be used in lieu of erosion control mat. BFM/MBFM products are applied with approximately 10 percent tackifier. BFM/MBFM shall be allowed to cure 24 -36 hours before rainfall and shall not be installed on wet or saturated soils. Western Washington Hydroseed Mix Install seed, fertilizer, and mulch for hydroseed mix at the following application rates: Seed 180 pounds per acre Fertilizer 90 pounds per acre, 10-4-6 Nitrogen-Phosphorus-Potassium (N-P-K) Mulch 1,500 pounds per acre BFM/MBFM 3,000 pounds per acre (for 2:1 slopes and steeper) Part 3 – Execution Preparation The seedbed should be firm and rough. All soil should be roughened regardless of slope. If compaction is required, slopes must be track walked before seeding. Backblading or smoothing of slopes greater than 4:1 is not permitted if they are to be seeded. Installation All disturbed surfaces within the project not otherwise covered by asphalt, gravel, quarry spalls, concrete, or other plant material/landscape items shall be hydroseeded, except ditches and swales may have seed applied by hand. Apply seed prior to installing erosion control blankets. Field Quality Control The aforementioned specifications are the minimum requirements for the anticipated conditions. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure seeded areas establish ground cover and to provide any additional measures necessary to establish ground cover in Ditch/Pond Seed Mix Name Proportion by Weight Percent Purity Percent Germination Tall or meadow fescue 75-80% 98% 90% Seaside/Creeping bentgrass 10-15% 92% 85% Redtop bentgrass 5-10% 90% 80% All Other Areas Seed Mix Name Proportion by Weight Percent Purity Percent Germination Redtop or Oregon Bentgrass 20% 92% 85% Red fescue 70% 98% 90% White Dutch Clover 10% 98% 90% City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-27 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. seeded areas. Any seeded areas that fail to establish at least 75 percent cover (100 percent cover for areas that receive sheet or concentrated flows) shall be reseeded at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor should expect to provide a temporary irrigation system for dry season work or any work in Eastern Washington. Temporary irrigation systems shall be removed by the Contractor when no longer required. 2.90.12 Potted Plant and Trees Part 1 – General Scheduling Plant evergreen material between September 1 and December 1 or in the spring before new growth begins. If project requirements require planting at other times, plants shall be sprayed with anti-desiccant prior to planting operations. Plant deciduous materials in a dormant condition. If deciduous trees are planted in-leaf, they shall be sprayed with an anti-desiccant prior to planting operations. Plant bare root material between November 1 and March 1. Planting shall be performed only by experienced workers familiar with planting procedures under the guidance of a certified landscape Contractor with a minimum of 5 years of experience. Locate plants as indicated or as approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative in the field after staking by the Contractor. If obstructions are met that are not shown on the Plans, do not proceed with planting operations until alternative plant locations have been selected or approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Part 2 – Products Materials Provide plants typical for their species or variety with normal, densely developed branches and vigorous, fibrous root systems. Provide only sound, healthy, vigorous plants free from defects, disfiguring knots, sun scald injuries, frost cracks, abrasions of the bark, plant diseases, insect eggs, borers and all forms of infestation. All plants shall have a fully developed form without voids and open spaces. Plants planted on rows shall be matched in form. Source Quality Control No pruning wounds shall be present with a diameter of more than 1 inch and such wounds must show vigorous bark on all edges. Evergreen trees shall be branched to the ground; double trunk trees are not acceptable. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-28 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 3 – Execution Installation Bare root stock shall be dug and the earth removed without injury to fibrous root system necessary for full recovery of plant. Cover roots with thick mud coating by puddling and /or wrapping in wet straw, moss or other suitable packing material immediately after digging. Keep plant protected until planted. Set plant material in the planting pit to proper grade and alignment, as shown on the planting details. Set plant material 2-3 inches above the finish grade. Filling will not be permitted around trunks. Backfill planting pit with topsoil. Form a ring of soil around the edge of each planting pit to retain water, except on slopes greater than 2 to 1. Provisions shall be made to allow drainage of excess water from ponding in planting pits to an approved source, if soil conditions are such that free drainage is not possible. Cleaning After plants are set, muddle planting soil mixture around bases of balls and fill all voids. Remove all wrapping from the tops of root balls. Remove completely all non-biodegradable wrapping from root balls. Mulch all planting beds with Nutramulch to a depth of 4 inches or approved equal in areas with slopes 2 to 1 greater and 2 inches in all other areas with stockpiled shredded plant waste. 2.90.20 Landscape Accessories Part 2 – Products Materials Stakes and guys shall be made from new hardwood, treated softwood or redwood, free of knot holes and other defects. Provide and install wire ties and guying hose as shown on Plans and as specified for evergreen trees. Provide and install guying for deciduous trees as shown on the Plans. Anti-Desiccant: Protective film emulsion providing a protective film over plant surfaces, permeable to permit transpiration; mixed and applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Weed Barrier Fabric: 5 oz. minimum (1.6 sf/oz.), woven polypropylene, needle punched fabric. DeWitt Pro-5 Weed Barrier or approved equal. Part 3 – Execution Installation Anchor weed barrier with 8-gauge (minimum), 6-inch long (minimum) steel anchor pins spaced no more than 3 feet apart. In areas without wind screening, secure prevailing wind side of fabric by burying leading edge 3-inches into the soil. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 2 – Sitework FM Improvements 2-29 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\2 Sitework.docx 7/2/2018 9:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 2.90.21 Erosion Control Matting Part 1 - General Related Sections • Division 2.90.11 Hydroseed Submittals Contractor shall submit erosion control blanket information for approval by the Owner prior to shipment of product to the job site. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Erosion control blanket shall be equal to that manufactured by American Excelsior Company, Arlington, Texas or North American Green of Evansville, Indiana. Materials Disturbed areas with slopes 3H:1V to 2H:1V shall be equal to American Excelsior Curlex I or North American Green S150. Disturbed areas with slopes 2H:1V to 1.5H:1V shall be equal to American Excelsior Curlex II or North American Green SC150. Part 3 – Execution Preparation Hydroseeding shall be applied prior to the application of the erosion control matting. Installation All areas disturbed during construction with final slopes at 3H:1V or steeper as shown on the plans including swales and storm drainage pond surfaces shall be covered with an erosion control blanket. Blanket shall be installed per the manufacturer’s written recommendations including the use of landscape nails as necessary. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 3-1 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\3 Concrete.docx 7/2/2018 9:46 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 3 Concrete 3.00 GENERAL Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” shall apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. 3.05 Common Work for Concrete Part 1 - General This division covers that work necessary for furnishing and installing all concrete as described in these specifications and as shown on the Plans. References Materials shall conform to the following standards: • Cement - ASTM C-150 • Coarse aggregate - ASTM C-33 • Fine aggregate - ASTM C-33 • Admixtures - ASTM C-494 • Air-entraining admixtures – ASTM C-260 • Fly Ash – ASTM C-618 Submittals Submittal information shall be provided to the Owner for the following items: • Concrete mix design including aggregate gradation and substantiating strength data. • Admixture Data • Special placement procedures for hot or cold weather • Rebar placement shop drawings • Precast concrete items • Grouts • Form Release agent Concrete mix designs shall be submitted to the engineer for approval a minimum of two weeks prior to placing any concrete. The mix design shall include the amounts of cement, fine and coarse aggregate, water and admixtures, as well as the water cement ratio, slum p, concrete yield, aggregate gradation, and substantiating strength data in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 5. A batch plant inspection may be required, the cost of which shall be paid by the Contractor. Review of mix submittals by the engineer of record indicates only that information presented conforms generally with contract documents. Contractor or supplier maintains full responsibility for specified performance. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 3 – Concrete FM Improvements 3-2 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\3 Concrete.docx 7/2/2018 9:46 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 2 - Products Components Nominal maximum size for aggregates is the smallest standard sieve opening through which the entire amount of aggregate is permitted to pass. Provide intermediate aggregate grades as required to achieve a well-graded mix. All concrete surfaces exposed to weather or standing water shall be air entrained . Total air content shall be in accordance with IBC requirements unless specified otherwise herein . Air shall be measured at the truck, unless otherwise agreed to. Water used in concrete shall be potable. Fly ash may be substituted for up to 15 percent of the required cement, except where noted. Mixes Concrete shall be mixed, conveyed, and proportioned in accordance with IBC section 1905. The concrete mix shall include the amount of cement, fine and coarse aggregate, including aggregate gradations, water, and admixtures as well as water cement ratio, slump, concrete yield, and sustaining strength data in accordance with these specifications, the requirements of the International Building Code Section 1905, and the requirements of ACI 318. Part 3 - Execution Inspection See Statement of Special Inspections on the Drawings for special inspection requirements. Provide 24-hour notice to Owner prior to needing the required inspections. Also comply with local building department and permit requirements for inspection and notification. The Contractor shall repair, replace or modify, as appropriate, any items noted in the Special Inspector’s inspection or the building department inspection. Testing Concrete strength tests shall be performed per section 1905.6 of the IBC and per the requirements noted herein. The Owner will provide and pay all costs of concrete testing. The Engineer shall be furnished with copies of all inspection reports and test results. Cylinders used for concrete strength tests shall be 6 by 12. Four by 8 cylinders may be used for mixes with maximum aggregates less than 1-inch, however the testing lab must apply a 0.94 multiplier to the compressive strength test results unless data acceptable to the Engineer is presented that would justify a higher multiplier. All mixes utilizing aggregates over 1 inch shall be tested using 6 by 12 cylinders. When 4 by 8 cylinders are utilized AASHTO T23 requirements shall be followed, and the retainer used with neoprene pads when testing for compressive strength shall be constructed according to ASTM C 1231. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 3 – Concrete FM Improvements 3-3 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\3 Concrete.docx 7/2/2018 9:46 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. The Contractor will coordinate all concrete testing with the testing agency. Costs will be paid by the Owner. Give the Owner and testing agency 48-hour notice prior to concrete placement. If Contractor fails to provide the required notice, the Owner may elect to cancel the affected concrete placement. Contractor shall be responsible for costs and delays due to improper notification. If the Contractor schedules a concrete placement and does not notify the Owner and testing agency of a cancellation within 24 hours of the scheduled placement, the Contractor shall pay the testing agency costs for an unnecessary trip. If the Contractor fails to provide the testing agency with adequate notification and testing agency cannot attend concrete placement, Contractor shall reschedule placement. Contractor shall be responsible for all associated delays. The Contractor shall provide all assistance and cooperation necessary to testing personnel to obtain the required concrete tests. Contractor and Owner will have access to testing results as soon as they are available. The testing agency shall take a minimum of four samples for every 50 yards of concrete placed (and a minimum of four per pour); one for a 7-day test, two for 28 day tests, and one for backup testing in case the other two samples do not meet design strength. Additional samples may be taken to verify strength prior to form removal at the Contractor’s expense. 3.10 FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 3.15 Accessory Materials 3.15.02 Premolded Joint Filler Part 1 – General References Premolded joint filler for expansion or through joint applications shall con form to the specifications for “Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction”, AASHTO M 213, except the requirement for water absorption is not applicable. Part 2 – Products Materials The thickness and width of premolded joint filler shall be as indicated on the Plans. Where no premolded filler thickness is indicated, the thickness shall be ¾-inch. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 3 – Concrete FM Improvements 3-4 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\3 Concrete.docx 7/2/2018 9:46 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 3.15.04 Embedded Items Part 3 - Execution Preparation Fill voids in sleeves, insets, anchor slots, etc., temporarily with readily removable materials to prevent entry of concrete into voids. Installation/Construction Position embedded items accurately, and support against displacement or movement during placement. Coat all aluminum embedded items as specified in Division 9. 3.15.05 Pipe Penetrations through Concrete Part 1 - General Summary Water holding structures and structures buried and subject to groundwater contact: As shown on the Plans. Structures not holding water or unburied structures: Unless identified on the Plans, all pipes larger than two inches passing through poured-in-place concrete floors and walls shall be isolated from the concrete. Part 2 - Products Materials Provide a Link-Seal system (or approved equal) where shown on plans. Provide a Kor-N- Seal boot system where shown on plans. Part 3 - Execution Examination Wrapping must be inspected and approved by Engineer prior to concrete pour. Gaps, tears, or looseness in wrapping will be cause for rejection. Installation Install both Link-Seal and Kor-N-Seal systems per manufacturers’ instruction City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 3 – Concrete FM Improvements 3-5 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\3 Concrete.docx 7/2/2018 9:46 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 3.20 REINFORCING 3.21 Reinforcing Steel 3.21.13 Reinforcing Steel Part 1 - General References ACI – American Concrete Institute- latest edition CRSI Manual of Standard Practice – latest edition Part 2 - Products Materials Grade – ASTM A706, Grade 60 ASTM A615, Grade 60 shall be permitted if: (a)The actual yield strength based on mill tests does not exceed fy by more than 18,000 psi; and, (b) The ratio of actual tensile strength to the actual yield strength is not less than 1.25. Detailing - ACI 318 and ACI 315 Lap requirements - See schedule on Plans or as required by ACI 318 Tie wire - 16 gauge minimum Bar supports shall conform to “Bar Support Specification” CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, MSP-1-80. Provide Class 1, plastic protected bar supports. Use pre-cast concrete blocks to support bars off ground. Bar supports in water holding and buried structures shall be non-metallic. Bar supports for the bottom rebar mat of suspended slabs or beams in water holding structures must be point supports (chairs or dobbies), not continuous. Part 3 - Execution Installation Reinforcing steel shall be detailed in accordance with ACI 315and 318 and as shown on the Plans. Lap all reinforcements in accordance with “the reinforcing splice and development length schedule”. Provide corner bars at all wall and footing intersections. Bend wire bar ties away from formwork to provide the same concrete clearance as shown on the Plans to the bars. Welding of reinforcing steel shall not be performed unless specifically approved by the Engineer. If approved, Contractor will arrange and pay for all required Special Inspections associated with welding of reinforcing steel. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 3 – Concrete FM Improvements 3-6 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\3 Concrete.docx 7/2/2018 9:46 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Field Quality Control Reinforcing steel shall be free of rust and loose scale at time of concrete placement. Bars with kinks, improper bends, or reduced cross-section due to any cause will not be used. Bars shall not be field bent. Bars may not be tack-welded or otherwise heated. If, within the project warranty period, rust spots appear on the concrete due to failure to achieve proper clearance on the rebar or wire ties, the Contractor shall grind out and patch the areas using a method satisfactory to the engineer. 3.30 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.30.01 Common Work for Cast in Place Concrete Part 1 - General Delivery Concrete shall be transported in a truck mixer to the jobsite and discharged within 1.5 hours after cement has been added to water or aggregates. Rejected concrete will be at Contractor’s expense. Part 2 - Products Components If allowed, curing materials shall conform to ASTM C-171 and liquid membrane-forming compounds shall conform to ASTM C-309. When concrete is to be coated or stained, use UV-dissipating form release and curing compounds. Part 3 - Execution Preparation Do not place concrete during rain, sleet, or snow until water and freezing protection is provided. Before beginning placement of concrete, remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from inner surface of mixing and conveying equipment. Before depositing concrete, remove debris from space to be occupied by the concrete. Secure reinforcement in position to prevent movement during concrete placement. At the beginning of the concrete pour for walls taller than 8 feet, place a 1½ to 2½-inch thick grout pad prior to placing the concrete for the wall. Grout mix shall consist of fine aggregates, concrete and water in the same ratios as used in the wall concrete. The placement of the concrete shall proceed immediately after the grout placement so as to prevent any cold joints. At construction joints, thoroughly clean surface of existing concrete to remove laitance. Roughen existing concrete surface to expose aggregate uniformly and apply approved bonding agent to existing concrete in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Prior to placing fresh concrete, dampen joint and coat with grout mixture in accordance with ACI 301, Section 8.5. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 3 – Concrete FM Improvements 3-7 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\3 Concrete.docx 7/2/2018 9:46 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Installation Placement shall be in accordance with IBC, Section 1905. Place no concrete when air temperature is below or expected to be below 40 degrees during the 28-day curing period unless a low temperature concrete mix has been approved by the Owner. Provide adequate equipment for heating materials and protecting concrete during freezing or near freezing weather. Keep materials, reinforcement, forms, and ground in contact with concrete free from frost at time of placement. Heat mixing water as required. Use no materials containing ice. Place no concrete when air temperature exceeds or is expected to exceed 85 degrees during the 28-day curing period unless a high temperature placement plan has been approved, and unless adequate precautions are taken to protect work. Cool ingredients prior to mixing. Flake ice or crushed ice of a size that will melt completely during mixing may be substituted for all or part of water. Cool forms and reinforcing prior to placing concrete. Handle concrete from mixer, ready-mixed truck, or from transporting vehicle to place of final deposit by methods which prevent separation or loss of ingredients. Under no circumstances shall concrete that has partially hardened be deposited. Place concrete in maximum lifts of 3 feet. Deposit concrete continuously so that no concrete will be deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams and planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, locate and reinforce construction joints at points as provided for in the Plans or as approved by the Owner. Maximum concrete drop shall be 5 feet. Consolidate concrete by vibration, supplemented by hand spading, rodding, forking, or tamping. Thoroughly work concrete around reinforcement, around embedded items, and into corners of forms to eliminate air or rock pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness. Insert and withdraw internal vibrators at points approximately 18 inches in each direction and extend into the lower concrete lifts. At each insertion, the duration shall be sufficient to consolidate the concrete; but not sufficient to cause segregation. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. Consolidate slabs by utilizing vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, internal vibrators, or other approved methods. Have a spare vibrator available at jobsite during concrete placing operations. After removal of forms, cut out and patch defects in concrete surfaces. Remove form tie cones. Cut or snap off form ties to a depth of ¾-inch. Chip out rock pockets, holes from form tie removal, and other defects to solid concrete. Repair defects in accordance with 3.01.30.71. Curing All concrete shall be water-cured in accordance with ACI 308.1 unless approved in advance by the Owner. If allowed, curing compound shall be applied immediately after finishing or form removal. When plastic or burlap covers are used to augment or protect curing, extend sheeting beyond the edges of the concrete and secure against wind lift. Inspect and adjust curing systems daily, including over weekends and holidays. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 3 – Concrete FM Improvements 3-8 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\3 Concrete.docx 7/2/2018 9:46 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Concrete structures that require differential backfill as shown on the Plans or as required for construction shall cure for a minimum of the following prior to placing backfill: • Backfill equal or greater than 24 inches: 7 days AND 28-day strength requirements. • Backfill between 6 and 24 inches: 3 days AND 80-percent of the 28-day strength requirements. 3.31 CONCRETE MATERIALS 3.31.02 Structural Concrete Part 1 - General Summary All concrete as shown on the and not called out otherwise. Use water reducers as required to achieve slump. Performance Requirements 28-day compressive strength - 4500 psi minimum Slump - Without plasticizers; 4 inches for floor and roof slabs, 7 inches for walls. With plasticizers, maximum 9 inches or as desired for placement. Part 2 - Products Mixes Water/cement ratio - 0.40 Nominal maximum aggregate size – ¾-inch (AASHTO Grading No. 67) Entrained air ratio – 4.5 percent minimum to 7.5 percent maximum 3.31.03 Thrust Blocks, Driveways, Curb, Gutter, Sidewalks, Equipment Pads, and Fence Posts Part 1 - General Summary All concrete for non-structural applications including thrust blocks, driveways, sidewalks, equipment pads, and fence post foundations. Hydraulic or Structural Concrete may be substituted. Performance Requirements 28-day compressive strength – 4500 psi minimum Part 2 - Products Mixes Water/cement ratio - 0.45 maximum City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 3 – Concrete FM Improvements 3-9 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\3 Concrete.docx 7/2/2018 9:46 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Nominal maximum aggregate size – ¾-inch (AASHTO Grading No. 67) Entrained air ratio – 4.5 percent minimum to 7.5 percent maximum 3.31.09 Controlled Density Fill (CDF) Part 1 - General Submittals Revisions to the mix design shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Performance Requirements CDF as shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer shall be proportioned to be flowable, non-segregating, and excavatable, and shall conform to the following requirements: • Maximum Compressive Strength 300 (psi). • Minimum 28-day compressive strength 100 (psi). Part 2 - Products Mixes • Pounds of cement per cubic yard (approx.) 50. • Pounds of fly ash per cubic yard (approx.) 250. • Pounds of dry aggregate per cubic yard (approx.) 3,200. If air containing or water reducing admixture is used for flowability, total water and aggregates may be adjusted for yield. Weights may be adjusted for flowability and pumpability. Part 3 - Execution Field Quality Control The Contractor shall protect CDF for at least 24 hours after placement or for a duration as necessary to prevent displacement by construction equipment or traffic. CDF placing may be started if weather conditions are favorable, when the temperature is a minimum of 34 degrees Fahrenheit and rising. At the time of placement, CDF must have a temperature of at least 40 degrees Fahrenheit. Placing shall stop when the temperature is 38 degrees Fahrenheit or less and falling. CDF shall not be placed on frozen ground. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 3 – Concrete FM Improvements 3-10 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\3 Concrete.docx 7/2/2018 9:46 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 3.35 SURFACE FINISHING 3.35.01 Common Work for Surface Finishing Part 2 - Products Finishes Each concrete area that requires finishing shall conform to one of the following requirements: • Foundation (exterior) - Ordinary Wall • Interior Floors - Floated • Sidewalks – Light Brushed • Exterior Slab – Light Brushed Part 3 - Execution Preparation Do not place concrete which requires finishing until the materials, tools, and labor necessary for finishing the wet concrete are on the job and acceptable to the Owner. If rainfall is possible, tent the work area prior to the pour and maintain protection until the concrete is cured sufficiently to resist damage. 3.35.03 Ordinary Wall Finish Part 2 Products Materials Ordinary Wall Finish requires the use of like-new forms and linings that will produce a uniform surface. Part 3 - Execution Construction After points have set sufficiently, grind or fill form marks and pointings to give a smooth surface even with flat wall surface. Fill all holes greater than ¼-inch with 1:2 mortar floated to an even, uniform finish. 3.35.05 Floated Finish Part 3 - Execution Construction Consolidate, strike off, and level concrete; but do not work further until ready for floating. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared and surface has stiffened sufficiently to City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 3 – Concrete FM Improvements 3-11 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\3 Concrete.docx 7/2/2018 9:46 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. permit floating operations. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats. Hand floating may be used if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Field Quality Control Check surface planeness during or after first floating. Cut down high spots and fill low spots to produce surface with tolerance of ¼-inch in 10 feet in any direction. Refloat to a uniform, smooth, sandy texture immediately after leveling. 3.35.06 Light Brush Finish Part 2 – Products Finish When concrete has appropriately set, finish with light soft broom finish. Brush perpendicular to slab slope. Part 3 - Execution Construction Consolidate, strike off, and level concrete; but do not work further until ready for floating. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared and surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit floating operations. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats. Hand floating may be used if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Field Quality Control Check surface planeness during or after first floating. Cut down high spots and fill low spots to produce surface with tolerance of ¼-inch in 10 feet in any direction. Re-float to a uniform, smooth, sweat finish concrete. 3.40 PRE-CAST CONCRETE 3.40.10 Utility Structures Part 1 - General Related Divisions • 13.39.13 Sanitary Sewer Manholes, Frames, and Covers Performance Requirements Pre-cast structures shall be constructed to withstand anticipated construction loads that occur during transport, handling, and placement as well as the anticipated design loads. Design loads shall include the anticipated soil pressures, hydrostatic loads, and HL-93 traffic loading. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 3 – Concrete FM Improvements 3-12 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\3 Concrete.docx 7/2/2018 9:46 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 2 - Products Materials All concrete structures identified on the Plans as being pre-cast, prefabricated, or not specifically detailed with reinforcing steel shall be pre-cast concrete. Additional reinforcement shall be provided within the pre-cast concrete structure at all penetrations, openings, joints, and connections. The additional reinforcement shall be provided to prevent damage during shipping, handling and installation. All damaged units shall be rejected. Pre-cast vaults shall conform to ACI 318 and be constructed to the equivalent dimensions and functional characteristics of the specific product identified on the Plans. All precast structures that consist of sections (base, riser, lid, etc) shall have the joints sealed with rubber gaskets, of a material appropriate for the installation. Part 3 - Execution Cleaning Fill picking holes with grout flush to the structure surface, including those in vault lids. Cut, remove, and grind smooth shipping lifting hooks on the vault interior, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. 3.60 GROUTING 3.62 Non-Shrink Grout Part 1 - General Summary Use Precision Non-Shrink Grout for grouting all equipment base plates, pipe supports, and base plates for metalwork. Precision Non-Shrink grout may also be used for all other non- shrink grouting operations. General Purpose Non-Shrink grout may be used for any applications other than those noted for Precision Non-shrink Grout. Non-shrink grout shall be used to seal all new pipe and conduit penetrations (watertight) into and out of all concrete and CMU block walled structures. Storage and Handling Stockpile grout to prevent contamination from foreign materials and store admixtures to prevent contamination or damage from excess temperature change Part 2 - Products Materials Precision Non-Shrink Grout: Provide a high-precision, fluid, non-shrink, quartz or non-catalyzed metallic aggregate grouting material. Provide a ready-to-use grout that hardens free from bleeding, settlement, City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 3 – Concrete FM Improvements 3-13 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\3 Concrete.docx 7/2/2018 9:46 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. or drying shrinkage when mixed, placed and cured at any consistency – fluid, flowable, plastic or damp-pack. Provide precision, non-shrink natural aggregate grout that when cured produces the following properties: a. Compressive Strength at fluid consistency (ASTM C 109-90-Modified): 3500 psi (24 MPa) at 1 day, 7500 psi (52 MPa) at 28 days. b. Passes ASTM C 1107 as a grade B grout when tested as temperature minimum and maximums of 45 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit (8 degrees Celsius to 32 degrees Celsius) at a working time of 30 minutes. Grout must be tested at a fluid consistency per ASTM C 939 and remain fluid at temperature range minimum and maximums for the 30-minute working time. All materials including water must be mixed and tested at temperature minimum/maximums. c. Modulus of Elasticity at 28 days at fluid consistency (ASTM C 469): 3.00 by 106 psi (27.0 GPa) minimum, 3.9 by 106 (27.0 GPa) maximum. d. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion for fluid consistency (ASTM C 531): 7.5 by 10-6/ degrees Fahrenheit maximum (13.5 by 10-6/ degrees Celsius). e. Flexural strength at 28 days for fluid consistency (ASTM C 78): 1300 psi (7.9 MPa). f. Resistance to rapid freezing – thawing (ASTM C 666, Procedure A): 300 cycles- min RDF 90 percent. g. Split tensile strength at 28 days at fluid consistency (ASTM C 496): 450 psi (3.1 MPa). h. Pass 24-hour grout test under stated temperature, time and fluidity constraints. See MBT Protection and Repair 24-hour Grout Form. Precision non-shrink grout shall be Masterbuilders 928 or Embeco 885 Grout or approved equal. General Purpose Non-Shrink Grout: General Purpose Non-shrink grout shall meet the compressive strength and nonshrink requirements of CRD-C 621, Grades B and C; Corp or Engineers Specification for Non-shrink grout; and ASTM C 1107, Grades B and C. General Purpose Non-shrink grout shall be Masterflow 713 Plus or Embeco 636 Plus or approved equal. Provide curing compounds as recommended by the grout manufacturer. Water to be used in mixing the grout shall be potable. Mixes Comply with grout manufacturer’s recommendations for mixing procedures. Adjust water temperature to keep mixed grout temperature in the range of 45 degrees Fahrenheit (7 degrees Celsius) and 90 degrees Fahrenheit (32 degrees Celsius) minimum/maximum. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 3 – Concrete FM Improvements 3-14 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\3 Concrete.docx 7/2/2018 9:46 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Use cold or iced water to extend working time in hot weather or in large placements. Use warm water in cold conditions to achieve minimum as mixed temperatures. Part 3 - Installation Preparation Mechanically remove unsound concrete within the limits of the grout placement. Remove at least ¼-inch (6mm) of existing concrete facing and continue removal as required to expose sound aggregate. Thoroughly clean the roughened surface of dirt, loose chips, and dust. Maintain substrate in a saturated condition for 24 hours prior to grouting. Surface should be saturated surface dry at time of grouting. Clean baseplates and other metal surfaces to be grouted to obtain maximum adhesion . Remove loose rust and scale by grinding or sanding. Comply with grout manufacturer’s recommendations for form construction. Construct forms to be liquid tight. Installation Place grout mixture into prepared areas from one side to the other. Avoid placing grout from opposite sides in order to prevent voids. Work material firmly into the bottom and sides to assure good bond and to eliminate voids. Ensure that foundation and baseplate are within maximum/minimum placement temperatures. Shade foundation from summer sunlight under hot conditions. Warm foundation when foundation temperature is below 45 degrees Fahrenheit (7 degrees Celsius). Wet cure exposed shoulders for 48 hours followed by two coats of curing compound for best results. The minimal requirement is to wet cure until grout has reached final set, followed by two coats of curing compounds. 4-1 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\4 Masonry.docx 7/2/2018 9:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 4 Masonry 4.00 GENERAL This division covers that work necessary for furnishing and installing masonry as described in these specifications and as shown on the Plans. Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” shall apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. 4.05 Common Work for Masonry This division covers that work necessary for providing materials and performing all masonry as described in these specifications and as shown on the Plans. Part 1 - General Submittals Submittal information shall be provided to the Owner for the following items: • Masonry Mortar • Masonry Grout • Reinforcing Steel Shop Drawings – Include plan view showing blocks and exact location of all vertical reinforcing. • Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) – Provide certification for all units. Provide samples for all colored and/or faced units. • Color Scheme • Waterproofing materials • Masonry Insulation • Masonry Accessories • Letter of Certification for Masonry Prism Testing as noted in the IBC Related Sections Division 9.05.00 Common Work for Finishes; 9.06 Color Schedule; 9.97.23 Concrete and Masonry. Inspection See Statement of Special Inspections on the Drawings for special inspection requirements. Provide 48-hour notice to Owner prior to needing the required inspections. Also comply with local building department and permit requirements for inspection and notification. The Contractor shall repair, replace or modify, as appropriate, any items noted in the Special Inspector’s inspection or the building department inspection. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 4 – Masonry FM Improvements 4-2 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\4 Masonry.docx 7/2/2018 9:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Storage, Delivery and Handling Stockpile and handle grout and mortar to prevent contamination from foreign materials; store admixtures to prevent contamination or damage from excessive temperature changes. Water to be used in mixing the grout shall be free from foreign materials. Part 2 - Products Finishes/Colors The Owner shall develop a color schedule of colored CMU and grout after award of the contract unless already shown on the plans. Block colors shall be limited to 2 in a pattern decided by the Owner unless otherwise shown on the plans. Mortar color shall match one of the adjacent block course colors unless shown otherwise on the plans. Part 3 - Execution Field Quality Control Variations from plumb, specified grade, conspicuous lines, and walls shall be plus or minus ¼ inch in any 10-foot length, not to exceed plus or minus 1 inch overall. Variations from dimension shall not exceed plus or minus ½ inch. Compressive strength shall be determined using the unit strength method or the prism test method in accordance with IBC Section 2105.2.2. Net Area compressive strength shall be a minimum of 1500 psi. 4.05.13 Masonry Mortar Part 1 - General General Masonry mortar shall be used to properly level, position, bond together, seal irregularities, and provide a weather-tight joint between the concrete masonry units (CMU). Performance Requirements Mortar shall conform to section 2103.8 of the IBC for type "S" mortar with a minimum compressive strength of 1800 psi at 28 days. Cement shall be ASTM C-150 and lime shall be ASTM C-207. Mortar shall conform to the minimum property requirements given in Table II of ASTM C270, based on 28-day laboratory testing. Part 2 - Products Mixes Proportion mortar by volume and mix in a standard mortar mixer operated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Mix ingredients thoroughly in dry form and add water to bring the mixture to the proper consistency for use. Do not hand-mix mortar. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 4 – Masonry FM Improvements 4-3 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\4 Masonry.docx 7/2/2018 9:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Finishes Provide mortar pigment to match owner-selected color of concrete masonry units. Part 3 - Execution Installation All joints shall be tooled and concave unless otherwise specified. Masonry mortar testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C270. 4.05.16 Masonry Grout Part 1 - General General Masonry grout shall be used to fill all CMU cells that contain reinforcing steel. References Masonry grout components shall comply with the following specifications: ASTM C-150, Portland Cement ASTM C-404, Aggregate for Masonry Grout. Compressive strength determined in accordance with ASTM C1019. Performance Requirements Masonry grout shall conform to Table 2103.12 or to ASTM C476 for Fine Grout. Per ASTM C-476 Fine Grout Standards, masonry grout shall consist of one-part Portland Cement to three parts masonry sand and one-tenth part lime and shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2000 psi. 4.05.19 Reinforcement and Accessories Part 1 - General References Joint reinforcing shall comply with ASTM A951 and with section 2103.13 of the IBC. Part 2 - Products Materials Reinforcing steel bars to be used for masonry work shall be ASTM A-615, Grade 60. Provide bar lengths and sizes as shown on the plans. Anchors shall be dovetail anchor slots and anchors. Anchor slots shall be equal to Burke “Fleming” masonry anchor slot and anchors shall be equal to “AA Wire Products Dovetail Flex-O-Look Channel and Ties”, or equal. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 4 – Masonry FM Improvements 4-4 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\4 Masonry.docx 7/2/2018 9:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 3 - Execution Installation All masonry accessories shall be installed as shown on the plans and submitted details. The Contractor shall not splice reinforcing except as shown on the plans. The minimum splice, where not indicated, shall be 32 bar diameters or 24 inches, whichever is greater. All accessories shall be cleaned of all dirt, grease, oil, loose mill scale, excessive rust, or other foreign matter which may reduce bond with grout or mortar. 4.08 CMU Inspection and Testing Compressive strength shall be determined using the unit strength method or the prism test method in accordance with IBC Section 2105. Net Area compressive strength shall be a minimum of 1,500 psi. Special Inspection shall be in accordance with IBC Table 1704.5.3, Level 2 Special Inspection. 4.20 UNIT MASONRY 4.22 Concrete Unit Masonry Part 1 - General Summary This division covers that work necessary for furnishing and installing all Concrete Unit Masonry as described in these specifications and as shown on the Plans. Masonry mortar shall be used to properly level, position, bond together, seal irregularities, and provide a weather-tight joint between the concrete masonry units (CMU). Masonry grout shall be used to fill all CMU cells that contain reinforcing steel. Related Divisions • Division 7.21.5 Insulation • Division 9.05.00 Common Work for Finishes • Division 9.06 Color Schedule • Division 9.97.23.11 Anti-graffiti References • 2012 International Building Code • TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 Specifications for Masonry Structures • TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5 • ASTM A-615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 4 – Masonry FM Improvements 4-5 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\4 Masonry.docx 7/2/2018 9:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. • ASTM C-33, Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates • ASTM C-67, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile • ASTM C-90, Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units • ASTM C-144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. • ASTM C-150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement • ASTM C-207, Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes • ASTM C-270, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unity Masonry • ASTM C-404, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Grout. • ASTM C-476, Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry • ASTM C-744, Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units • ASTM C1019, Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout Design Requirements Compressive strength shall be determined using the unit strength method or the prism test method in accordance with IBC Section 2105.2.2. Net Area compressive strength shall be a minimum of 1500 psi. Mortar shall conform to section 2103.9 of the IBC for type “S” mortar with a minimum compressive strength of 1800 psi at 28 days. Masonry grout shall comply with Article 2.2 of TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. Quality Assurance A minimum 4-foot by 4-foot mock up panel will be provided in the field prior to starting the work using all block types and colors and associated mortar colors. Owner will review and approve mock-up panel prior to starting construction. The mock up panel may be incorporated into the work if agreeable to the Owner. Storage, Delivery and Handling All blocks shall be covered and protected against wetting prior to use. Stockpile and handle grout and mortar to prevent contamination from foreign materials; store admixtures to prevent contamination or damage from excessive temperature changes. Water to be used in mixing the grout shall be free from foreign materials. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 4 – Masonry FM Improvements 4-6 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\4 Masonry.docx 7/2/2018 9:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Par t 2 - Products Materials Concrete Masonry Units Concrete Masonry Units shall be hollow load-bearing type, conforming to ASTM C-90, Grade N, Type 1, 1900psi minimum. Provide aggregates meeting ASTM C33. All units, unless otherwise noted, shall have normal weight aggregate having a uniform quality, texture, and color. Unit sizes and shapes shall be 8 inches high by 16 inches long by 8 inches wide (nominal). Masonry shall be split face as shown on the drawings. All concrete masonry units exposed to weather shall have an integral water repellant added to the block and mortar. Repellant admixture equal to Dry-Block as manufactured by W.R. Grace and Co. Masonry Mortar Cement shall meet ASTM C-150, lime shall meet ASTM C-207 and aggregates shall meet ASTM C-144. Proportion mortar by volume and mix in a standard mortar mixer operated in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Mix ingredients thoroughly in dry form and add water to bring the mixture to the proper consistency for use. Do not hand-mix mortar. Mortar proportioned in accordance with ASTM C270, Table 1 need not be tested. Where testing is required, mortar shall be laboratory tested prior to use in accordance with ASTM C270. Provide mortar pigment to match owner-selected color of concrete masonry units. Masonry Grout Masonry grout components shall comply with ASTM C-150 for Portland cement and ASTM C-404 for aggregates. Per ASTM C-476 Fine Grout Standards, masonry grout shall consist of one-part Portland cement to three parts masonry sand and one-tenth part lime and shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2000 psi. Compressive strength of masonry grout shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C1019. Reinforcement Joint reinforcing shall conform to Article 2.4 of TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. Reinforcing steel bars shall be ASTM A-615, Grade 60. Provide bar lengths and sizes as shown on the Plans. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 4 – Masonry FM Improvements 4-7 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\4 Masonry.docx 7/2/2018 9:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Components Provide vertical reinforcement at all corners, on each side of openings 24 inches and larger than and at the intervals shown. Provide horizontal reinforcing at bond beams as shown on the Plans, and above and below all openings larger than 24-inches. Accessories Where called out, anchors shall be dovetail anchor slots and anchors. Anchor slots shall be equal to Burke “Fleming” masonry anchor slot and anchors shall be equal to “AA Wire Products Dovetail Flex-O-Look Channel and Ties”, or equal. Finishes/Colors The Owner shall develop a color schedule of colored CMU and grout after award of the contract unless already shown on the Plans. Block colors shall be limited to two in a pattern decided by the Owner unless otherwise shown on the Plans. Mortar color shall match one of the adjacent block course colors unless shown otherwise on the Plans. Coat the following surfaces with the products identified under “Related Divisions” above. • Exterior walls Part 3 - Execution Preparation When joining fresh masonry to set or partially set masonry construction, the Contractor shall clean the exposed surface of set masonry and remove loose mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. The Contractor shall protect sills, ledges, and offsets from mortar drippings or other damage during construction. The Contractor shall protect the adjoining work from mortar droppings, and newly-laid masonry from damage and from rain until the mortar has set. Installation Masonry construction shall comply with the requirements of IBC 2104 and with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. The cold weather construction provisions of TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, Article 1.8 C, shall be implemented when the ambient temperature falls below 40 degrees Fahrenheit (4 degrees Celsius). The hot weather construction provisions of TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, Article 1.8 D, shall be implemented when the ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees Fahrenheit (37.8 degrees Celsius), or 90 degrees Fahrenheit (32.2 degrees Celsius) with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph (12.9 km/hr). The Contractor shall lay only dry masonry units. When masonry needs to be sawed, only masonry saws shall be used to cut and fit masonry units. All units shall be set plumb, true to line, and with level courses accurately spaced. The masonry unit shall be adjusted to final City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 4 – Masonry FM Improvements 4-8 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\4 Masonry.docx 7/2/2018 9:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. position while the mortar is soft and plastic. If the units are displaced after the mortar has stiffened, the Contractor shall remove the units, clean the joints or mortar, and relay with fresh and clean units. All joints shall be tooled and concave unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall remove mortar protruding into cells of cavities to be reinforced. All ungrouted concrete masonry units with an exterior face shall be insulated as shown on the Plans and detailed in Division 7. All masonry reinforcement and accessories shall be installed as shown on the Plans and submitted details. The Contractor shall not splice reinforcing except as shown on the Plans. The minimum splice, where not indicated, shall be 32 bar diameters or 24 inches, whichever is greater. All accessories shall be cleaned of all dirt, grease, oil, loose mill scale, excessive rust, or other foreign matter which may reduce bond with grout or mortar. Fill all vertical and horizontal cells that contain reinforcing and as detailed on the Plans with grout. Cells shall have an unobstructed vertical alignment. The Contractor shall provide grouted bond beams where required. Provide lintels made up of reinforced, grouted lintel sections over all wall openings as shown on the Plans. The Contractor shall install horizontal and vertical reinforcing and hold in position as the work progresses to maintain the following clearance between the reinforcing and the block surface: 1½ exterior, ¾-inch interior. The maximum lift for grout pours shall be 4 feet. The Contractor shall make sure that the grout is consolidated with a vibrator immediately after pouring and re-consolidate after excess moisture has been absorbed; but before plasticity is lost. Provide clean -outs at the bottom of all grouted courses. Contractor may eliminate clean-outs at the Owner’s discretion, if the bottoms of all cells are free of knocked-off mortar fins and dirt. The Contractor shall hold grout 1½ inches below the top of the upper most units when work stops for over one hour, and thoroughly clean and roughen the joint before proceeding with the work. The Contractor shall grout full-space-around door frames and other built-in items. Build in all work with the masonry including anchor bolts. Build in wall plugs, doors, windows, and accessories and plumbing appurtenances as erection progresses. At the stoppage of work at any time, the work shall be covered with tarpaulins or boards to prevent rain or snow from entering the cores of the block. The walls shall be adequately braced to support masonry. If mortar or grout has been misplaced, the Contractor shall have it immediately removed. Shore reinforced lintels a minimum of 14 days after grout placement or until a 28-day strength is achieved. Prior to completion, fill all holes in joints. All defective joints shall be cut out and repointed. At the end of each day's work and after final pointing, dry-brush the masonry surface. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 4 – Masonry FM Improvements 4-9 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\4 Masonry.docx 7/2/2018 9:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Field Quality Control Variations from plumb, specified grade, conspicuous lines, and walls shall be plus or minus ¼ inch in any 10-foot length, not to exceed plus or minus 1 inch overall. Variations from dimension shall not exceed plus or minus ½ inch. Special Inspection shall be in accordance with Table 1.18.3 (Level C Quality Assurance) of TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5. Also see Statement of Special Inspections on the Drawings. Provide 24-hour notice to Owner prior to needing the required inspections. Comply with local building department and permit requirements for inspection and notification. The Contractor shall repair, replace or modify, as appropriate, any items noted in the Special Inspector’s inspection or the building department inspection. The Contractor shall provide verification to the Engineer that site-produced mortar meets the required proportions using visual observations. Engineer reserves the right to require additional testing in accordance with ASTM C 270. Field testing of grout shall be meet the requirements of ASTM C1019. The testing agency shall take a minimum of three grout samples for every 5,000 square feet of wall placed (and a minimum of four per week); two for 28-day tests, and one for backup testing in case the other two samples do not meet design strength. Additional samples may be taken to verify strength at the Contractor’s expense. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 5-1 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\5 Fabricated Metal Work and Structural Plastics.docx 7/2/2018 9:48 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 5 Fabricated Metalwork and Structural Plastics 5.00 GENERAL This division covers that work necessary for furnishing and installing all fabricated metalwork as described in these specifications and as shown on the plans. Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . . shall apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. 5.05 Common Work for Fabricated Metalwork and Plastics Part 1 - General Related Sections • Division 1.88 Location Designations • Division 9.90.00 Common Work for Painting and Coating • Division 9.91.13.12 Metals in contact with Concrete • Division 9.91.13.01 Exterior metals • Division 9.91.23.01 Metals interior • Division 9.91.33 Submerged metals • Division 1.81 Seismic Restraint Submittals Submittal information shall be provided to the Owner for the following items: • Shop Drawings showing details of Fabricated Metalwork including connections and welding • FRP Data Sheets verifying specification requirements • Calculations and plans stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Washington for all Contractor- or Manufacturer-designed components or assemblies. Inspections Unless otherwise noted on the plans, specifications, or building department requirements, special inspections related to metal fabrications, placement and welding shall be subject to 48-hour notice to the Engineer prior to the inspection time. 48-hour notice is defined in Division 1, Contractor Responsibility. Any Field welding shown on the plans will require special inspections in accordance with section 1704.3 of the IBC and AISC 360. Quality Assurance Only prequalified welds (as defined by AWS) shall be used. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 5 – Metalwork and Plastics FM Improvements 5-2 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\5 Fabricated Metal Work and Structural Plastics.docx 7/2/2018 9:48 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Fabricator shall be registered and approved by American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) to perform shop fabrication without special inspection. Submit certificate of compliance to the Owner at the completion of fabrication. Owner will forward this to the Building Official. If fabricator is not registered and approved, or the certificate of compliance is not received, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all Special Inspections required by the IBC on shop fabricated items. The Contractor shall also reimburse the Owner for all Special Inspections required by the IBC for field welding not specifically shown on the plans. Contractor shall alert Owner at least 30 calendar days in advance if such Special Inspections will be required in order to procure the services of a testing lab. Special Inspection by the Owner does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility of performing his own inspections and testing to ensure that all items are properly constructed. Part 2 - Products Materials Structural Steel Structural steel shall conform to the following requirements: Plates, shapes, angles, rods - ASTM A36, Fy  36 ksi Special Shapes, Plates - ASTM A572, Fy  50 ksi Stainless Steel Stainless steel shall be type 316 (non-welded) or type 316L (welded) or as called out. Plates - ASTM A240 Fasteners - ASTM F593 See Section 15.22.4 for information on pipe used for mechanical applications. All stainless steel shall have a standard mill finish where concealed or No. 4 finish where exposed and shall be cleaned of all foreign matter before delivery to the job site. Aluminum Plates - ASTM B209, Type 6061-T6 Pipe - ASTM B210 Type 6061 Aluminum materials in contact with concrete or other metals or other masonry materials shall have surfaces coated per Division 9. Galvanized Steel Base metal shall be as specified for Mild Steel. Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 924/A 924M. Finishes: For pieces that will NOT be painted, galvanize with zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M For pieces that WILL be painted, galvanneal with zinc/10 percent iron coating in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 5 – Metalwork and Plastics FM Improvements 5-3 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\5 Fabricated Metal Work and Structural Plastics.docx 7/2/2018 9:48 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Structural Shapes All FRP components shall be equal to that manufactured by Strongwell. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) structural shapes shall be produced using the pultrusion process. Mechanical and physical properties (from ASTM coupon specimens) must be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Pultruded structural shapes are to have the minimum longitudinal mechanical properties listed below: Property ASTM Method Value Units Tensile Strength D-638 30,000 (206) psi (MPa) Tensile Modulus D-638 2.5 x 106 (17.2) psi (GPa) Flexural Strength D-790 30,000 (206) psi (MPa) Flexural Modulus D-790 1.8 x 106 (12.4) psi (GPa) Flexural Modulus (Full Section) N/A 2.8 x 106 (19.3) psi (GPa) Short Beam Shear (Transverse) D-2344 4,500 (31) psi (MPa) Shear Modulus (Transverse) N/A 4.5 x 105 (3.1) psi (GPa) Coefficient of Thermal Expansion D-696 8.0 x 10-6 in/in/°F (1.4 x 10 -6) (cm/cm/°C) Flame Spread E-84 25 or less N/A Seal cut edges and holes according to manufacturer’s instructions with a polyester resin compatible with resin matrix of structural shape and corrosion resistance equal or superior to the grating. Glass fibers shall be well covered with resin to protect against their exposure due to wear or weathering. All finished surfaces of FRP items and fabrications shall be resin-rich, free of voids and without dry spots, cracks, crazes or unreinforced areas. All glass fibers shall be well covered with resin to protect against their exposure due to wear or weathering. Manufactured Units Design of Contractor- or Manufacturer-designed components or assemblies shall meet the specific component requirements as provided here-in, as well as all applicable state and federal codes. Design shall include gravity loads and seismic loads in accordance with ASCE 7-10 Chapter 13 “Seismic Design Requirements for Nonstructural Components”. Design criteria shall be as provided herein for components, and as provided on the plans. Contractor-designed components and assemblies shall be shop welded and field bolted if possible. Field welding will NOT be allowed unless specifically shown, or there is no reasonable alternative. Finishes Isolate and coat dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic corrosion. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 5 – Metalwork and Plastics FM Improvements 5-4 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\5 Fabricated Metal Work and Structural Plastics.docx 7/2/2018 9:48 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Non-exposed structural steel: Mill finish or as shown on plans Exposed structural steel (damp or wet locations): Division 9 Aluminum: Division 9 Galvanized steel: Division 9 Stainless steel: Uncoated or Division 9 Fiberglass: Uncoated Part 3 - Execution Fabrication All welding shall be in accordance with AISC and American Welding Society (AWS) standards and shall be performed by AISC and/or AWS certified welders using electrodes to match base material. Only prequalified welds (as defined by AWS) shall be used. Welding inspection shall be performed in accordance with the applicable AWS provisions and Chapter 17 of the IBC. Shop welding requiring inspection or testing per IBC Chapter 17 must be tested by an independent testing laboratory certified by AWS and approved by the owner at the Contractor’s expense. Field welding, where required or allowed, will be inspected by a representative of the owner at the owner’s expense. This does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility of performing his own inspections and testing to ensure that all items are properly constructed. All shop welds shall be ground smooth. Any shop paint on metal surfaces adjacent to joints to be field welded shall be wire brushed to remove the paint film prior to welding. Where steel items to be welded are galvanized, galvanizing must first be removed by grinding with a silicon carbide wheel, by grit blasting or by sand blasting. Any cutting or grinding equipment used on stainless steel must be new or only previously used on other stainless steel material. Coating All steel fabrications shall be surface prepped, shop primed and field coated in accordance with Division 9. Shop priming shall be protected as required to prevent damage to the coating during shipping. Hold back shop priming from areas to be field welded. Installation Fabrications shall be installed as shown on the approved shop drawings. All members shall be accurately located and erected plumb and level. Metal fabrications shall be installed or erected as based on the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) “Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings”, latest edition, plus all referenced code requirements. Temporary bracing, such as temporary guys, braces, false-work, cribbing, or other elements, shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the “Code of Standard Practice”, wherever necessary to accommodate all loads to which the structure may City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 5 – Metalwork and Plastics FM Improvements 5-5 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\5 Fabricated Metal Work and Structural Plastics.docx 7/2/2018 9:48 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. be subjected, including construction loads. Such bracing shall be left in place as long as may be required for safety. As erection progresses, the work shall be securely bolted or welded to compensate for all loads during construction. No permanent bolting or welding shall be performed until the structure has been properly aligned. 5.05.23 Bolts and Other Connectors Part 2 - Products Materials Bolts and other connectors not specifically called out otherwise shall be in accordance with the following. Under no circumstances shall the fasteners be of lesser strength or higher corrosion potential than the materials being connected. Connection bolts, nuts and washers for all materials in wet, damp or corrosive locations shall be Stainless Steel, alloy 304 in raw domestic or treated domestic water, alloy 316 in treatment process and sewage applications, and alloy 317 for acidic transport. Bolts and nuts shall meet ASTM F593B (bolts ¼-inch to 1½-inch in diameter with 30 ksi yield) and F594B (nuts). Use Nitronic 60 bolts and nuts for strong chlorine environments. Steel and castiron fabrications: Connection bolts for dry locations shall be ASTM A307 galvanized or zinc plated bolts. Structural Plastic Fabrications: Connection bolts shall be ASTM A307 galvanized in dry applications and Stainless Steel in wet, damp or corrosive locations. Aluminum Fabrications: Connection bolts shall be ASTM A307 galvanized. Aluminum fasteners may be allowed where high strength is not needed (e.g. mounting expanded metal screens, or louver fins), confirm with Engineer prior to use. Steel screws must be galvanized or zinc plated. 300 Series stainless steel fasteners allowed only with the use of isolating washers. Stainless steel fabrications: Fasteners to match same stainless series as structure (e.g 300 series fasteners with 300 series structure) Bolts installed into hardened concrete and CMU shall be Concrete Anchors as specified herein. Bolts and studs shall be long enough that at least two threads extend beyond the face of the tightened nut. For pump anchor bolts, see Division 11.19. For mechanical pipe (non-structural) connections, see Division 15, “Common Work for Pipe and Fittings”. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 5 – Metalwork and Plastics FM Improvements 5-6 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\5 Fabricated Metal Work and Structural Plastics.docx 7/2/2018 9:48 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 3 - Execution Installation All materials to be joined together shall be connected as shown on the plans, specifications, as recommended by the manufacturer, or as required by standard industry practices if not otherwise specified. Dissimilar metals: In damp locations, isolate dissimilar metals using nylon isolation sleeves and washers, Cooper B-Line Nylon Headed Sleeve Kit or equal. For wet locations: avoid dissimilar metals unless specifically approved or shown. Use similar metals with welded connections. If approved or shown, use galvanized mild steel bolts installed into prepped and coated holes with additional field coating over the top of bolt. 5.60 LADDERS 5.60.01 Common Work for Ladders Part 1 - General Design Requirements Ladders shall meet the requirements set forth in the IBC, ASCE 7, OSHA 1910.27 and WAC (Washington Administrative Code) 296-876. Safety cages, platforms, and fall prevention devices shall be provided as shown on the plans. They shall comply with WAC Section 296-876-60065 through 296-876-60080. Ladders shall extend the full distance from base landing to top access plus extension. Ladders that are short shall be field extended by method approved by the Engineer or replaced with proper length ladder. Part 2 - Products Materials All ladders and ladder accessories shall be aluminum, or fiberglass as indicated on the plans. Fabrication Ladders shall be shop assembled, pre-drilled and prepared for field attachment of standoff clips, or as otherwise shown. 5.60.10 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Ladders Part 2 - Products Materials FRP ladders shall be made from FRP structural shapes as specified. Ladder side rails shall be produced by the pultrusion process. The side rails shall be 2-inch square tube with a wall thickness of 0.25-inch. The rungs shall be 1-inch minimum diameter City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 5 – Metalwork and Plastics FM Improvements 5-7 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\5 Fabricated Metal Work and Structural Plastics.docx 7/2/2018 9:48 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. thermal cure clear solid rod with a nonslip footing surface. All joints and rungs shall be epoxied and riveted. Fabrication Ladders shall be shop assembled, pre-drilled and prepared for field attachment of standoff clips. All cut or machined edges shall be sealed with a resin compatible with the resin matrix used in the structural shape. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 6-1 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\6 Carpentry.docx 7/2/2018 9:50 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 6 Carpentry 6.00 GENERAL This division covers that work necessary for furnishing and installing all carpentry as described in these specifications and as shown on the plans. Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” shall apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. 6.05 Common Work for Carpentry Submittals Submittal information shall be provided to the Owner for the following items: • Trusses: Submit registration and approval to perform truss fabrication without special inspection and provide certificate of compliance or submit detailed fabrication and quality control procedures as specified. • Structural Lumber • Preservative Wood Treatment • Wood Trim 6.10 ROUGH CARPENTRY 6.14 Pressure Treated Wood Part 1 - General Submittals Submit pressure treatment type and application rate for each of the following applications: CMU Wall Top Plate – Use Category UC2 Applicable AWPA Standards shall be supplied to the Engineer with submittal. Part 2 - Products Components Pressure treatment type and application rate shall be appropriate for the Use Category as determined by the American Wood Preserves Association (AWPA). Chemical content shall be 0.40 lb/cf Finishes Coat cut ends of pressure treated wood with copper naphthenate based wood preservative. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 6 – Carpentry FM Improvements 6-2 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\6 Carpentry.docx 7/2/2018 9:50 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 6.16 Wood Sheathing Part 2 - Products Materials Wood sheathing shall be C-D exposure 1 or better Engineered Wood Association (APA) rated plywood or Oriented Strand Board (OSB). Thickness shall be as shown on the plans. Part 3 - Execution Construction Provide blocking at unframed panel edges where noted on the plans. Nail sheathing as shown on the plans. If not shown, provide nailing as follows, at a minimum: 8d nails at 6 inches on center at framed panel edges, trusses and diaphragm boundaries and 12 -inches on center elsewhere. 6.17 Shop Fabricated Structures 6.17.53 Trusses Part 1 - General References Wood trusses shall comply with IBC Section 2303.4. Trusses shall be metal-plate-connected meeting the design, manufacture and quality assurance requirements of ANSI/ TPI 1 as published by the Truss Plate Institute. Quality Assurance Prefabricated wood trusses and cross-bracing and blocking shall be designed and certified by the truss manufacturer to meet the loads shown on the plans and the above requirements. Each individual truss design drawing shall bear the Professional Engineering seal and signature of the truss designer. Fabricator shall provide detailed fabrication and quality control procedures that provide a basis for inspection control of the workmanship and the fabricator’s ability to conform to approved construction documents and referenced standards. In lieu of procedures noted, fabricator may provide documentation that they are registered and approved to perform such work without special inspection. At completion of fabrication, the approved fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance to the building official stating that the work was performed in accordance with the approved construction documents. 7-1 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\7 Thermal and Moisture Protection.docx 7/2/2018 9:51 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection 7.00 GENERAL This division covers furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment for providing a structure which is completely weather-tight. Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” shall apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. 7.05 Common Work for Thermal and Moisture Protection Part 1 - General Submittals Submittal information shall be provided to the Owner for the following items: • Roofing System • Insulation Systems and Installation Verifications • Caulk Warranty – Roofing System The roofing Contractor shall warrant the roof system provided under this contract against leakage, and defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two years after date of project acceptance. The roofing system manufacturer shall provide a warranty for the roof system against leakage and defects in materials for a period of eighteen years after the roofing Contractor warranty expires. Following roof installation, supplier shall furnish services of a qualified manufacturer’s representative to inspect the roof and inform Owner of any defects or concerns regarding condition of roofing system at the job site. Contractor shall provide repair as necessary to the satisfaction of the manufacturer representative at Contractor’s expense. Upon resolution of any defects or concerns (if any), manufacturer’s warranty shall then be in full effect. The finished roofing system shall be free from leaks, warps, permanent discoloration, and coating degradation for the warranty period. The roofing system manufacturer’s warranty shall be non-prorated and in full effect (100 percent covered) for the full 2 years following project acceptance. The manufacturer’s warranty shall be prorated from 100 percent covered from year 2 to year 5 and linearly decreasing to 10 percent at year 20. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection FM Improvements 7-2 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\7 Thermal and Moisture Protection.docx 7/2/20189:51 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 7.20 THERMAL PROTECTION 7.21 Thermal Insulation 7.21.03 Ceiling Insulation Part 1 – General Performance Requirements Insulation shall be craft-paper-faced batt with a minimum R value of 38. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Ceiling insulation shall be equal to Owens Corning. Part 3 – Execution Installation Provide and install ceiling insulation as shown on the project Plans. Place insulation with craft paper face down and as recommended by the manufacturer. Insulation shall be placed to the extents possible to cover the attic. Place baffles above the insulation as the slope of the roof meets the building edge. 7.21.04 Foundation Insulation Part 1 – General Performance Requirements Provide a minimum R value of 10. Insulation shall be suitable for direct bury application. Storage and Handling Protect insulation stored on the jobsite from physical damage and direct sunlight. Insulation should be stored off the ground and covered with a light color polyethylene film. Make sure the covered insulation is well ventilated to prevent excessive temperature build-up. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Insulation shall be Foamular 150 as manufactured by Owens Corning or equal. Part 3 – Execution Installation Extruded polystyrene insulation shall be placed as shown on the Plans. Contractor shall not damage insulation during installation and take adequate care to backfill soils to meet compaction standards while not damaging insulation. Finish top edge of insulation 1-inch to 2-inches below finished ground elevation. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection FM Improvements 7-3 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\7 Thermal and Moisture Protection.docx 7/2/20189:51 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Install only as much insulation as can be covered, at least temporarily, during the same day. 7.21.05 CMU Wall Insulation Part 1 – General Performance Requirements All non-grouted exterior exposed CMU walls meet be filled with perlite, or equivalent fill. Part 2 – Products Materials All concrete masonry units with an exterior face shall be insulated with Perlite block insulation or equal. Part 3 – Execution Installation Insulation shall be installed by methods and personnel approved by the block manufacturer. 7.21.10 Exposed Small Piping Insulation Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Insulation shall be equal to S and S Industries. Part 3 – Execution Installation All exposed piping 1-inch and less used to distribute hot, tepid, cold, potable, and non-potable water shall be insulated with closed-cell polystyrene insulation pre-slit and installed per manufacturer’s written information. Insulation shall be sized to match the diameter of the piping. 7.40 EXTERIOR PANELS 7.46 Siding 7.46.46 Mineral-Fiber Cement Materials 7.46.46.2 Mineral-Fiber Cement Soffit Panels Part 1 – General Design Requirements The panels shall be able to withstand the wind loading identified in the Plans. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection FM Improvements 7-4 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\7 Thermal and Moisture Protection.docx 7/2/20189:51 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Finishes Finish all panels as recommended by the manufacturer. Color shall be chosen by the owner from a minimum of 15 colors. Part 2 – Products Materials Soffit panels shall be James Hardie Hardiesoffit or of equal. Install and finish all panels as recommended by the manufacturer. The panels shall be able to withstand the wind loading identified in the Plans. Provide venting per local building code requirements. All vents shall include aluminum or galvanized bird screens. Part 3 – Execution Installation Panels shall run perpendicular to rafters. Install panels next to transition between wall and eve as recommended by the manufacturer. 7.60 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 7.61 Metal Roofing 7.61.01 Common Work for Metal Roofing Part 1 – General General Work covered in this section consists of furnishing all labor, material, and equipment for preformed metal roofing as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. Submittals Submit shop drawings detailing all edges, hips, valleys, eaves, rakes, other flashing and include fastener schedule and in accordance with Division 1.33. Prior to Engineer review, Contractor shall have the shop drawings reviewed and approved by the system manufacturer. The Roofer shall submit a list of a minimum of five (5) successfully completed projects with owner references, total roofing system square footage and roofing cost. The Roofer shall be regularly engaged in construction of metal roofing systems and approved to install metal roofing by the accepted system manufacturer. Such approval shall be submitted in writing along with the shop drawings as specified below. Storage and Handling The Contractor is responsible for continuously maintaining materials subject to precipitation or weather damage in new condition. Replace warped or weathered plywood, insulation, or other materials damaged by climatic conditions. Follow all manufacturer’s recommendations regarding product delivery, storage, and handling of materials. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection FM Improvements 7-5 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\7 Thermal and Moisture Protection.docx 7/2/20189:51 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 2 – Products Materials Materials shall be purchased directly from the manufacturer’s commercial department to verify that the Contractor is approved by the system manufacturer to install the roofing system specified. All materials shall be provided by one manufacturer and conform to the current IBC. Roofing felt shall be 30-pound asphalt-saturated felt, conforming to ASTM D-250, Type I, plain, unperforated. Fasteners shall be as recommended by the roofing manufacturer; lengths as required . Other miscellaneous exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel or ZAC (exposed head of zinc/aluminum alloy). Fasteners shall be of the length to penetrate the top ridges of the steel decking only. Fasteners shall be inserted to penetrate only the top ridges of the steel roof support decking. Finishes The Owner shall select the roofing color from manufacturer’s standard offering of not less than 15 colors. Color options shall be provided with the submitted shop drawings. Part 3 – Execution Examination Verify that work of other trades which penetrates the roof deck, or requires workers and equipment to traverse roof deck, has been completed. Examine surfaces for inadequate anchorage, foreign material, moisture, and unevenness which will prevent the execution and quality of application of roofing system as specified. Do not proceed with application of roofing until these defects are corrected. Preparation Provide temporary roof during inclement weather. Requests for use of alternate structural and/or base materials with superior weathering resistance, if approved by the Engineer, may be made in lieu of temporary roof replacement. Submit a description of each tempor ary roof system or alternate material schedule proposed. Provide special protection from heavy traffic on completed work. Restore to original condition, or replace work or materials damaged during handling of roofing materials. Installation Apply roofing felt below waterproof roof paneling, single-ply, lapped shingle fashion, 3-inch head laps and 6-inch side laps. Install no more roofing felt than can be covered by metal roofing in the same day. Roof underlayment shall be dry and free of defects prior to the installation of metal roofing. Apply roofing only in dry weather and when the ambient temperature is above 40 degrees Fahrenheit. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection FM Improvements 7-6 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\7 Thermal and Moisture Protection.docx 7/2/20189:51 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply with recommendations and instructions of metal roofing manufacturer. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, clips, hips, ridges, edge treatments, integral flashings, and other components of specified metal roofing to profiles, patterns, and drainage arrangement shown, and as required for permanent leak-proof construction. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction of work caused by ambient air temperature difference of 100 degrees Fahrenheit. All openings shall be sealed from weather and to prevent recessed areas that may attract nesting animals. Panel corrugations shall be sealed with the manufacturer’s standard closed cell neoprene blocks conforming to the panel corrugation. Gaps created between corrugations and flashings shall be avoided whenever possible. Where such gaps occur, they shall be sealed with manufacturer’s low pitch closures, or equal. All closures shall be installed as close to the face of the opening as possible to minimize any recessed areas. Provide uniform, neat seams with no exposure of sealant to ultraviolet light. Flashing with a drip edge shall be installed on all edges, corners and angle points. Unless otherwise noted on the Plans extend roofing and flashing below fascia with drip edge hanging below wood supports and fascia. Valley gutters shall be provided at all valleys. Field Quality Control Metal roofing and its flashing shall be weather-tight. Exposed surfaces shall be free of dents, scratches, abrasions, or other visible defects. Construction and fabrication of metal roofing shall comply with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) recommendations for fabrication and construction of details, expansion joints, and installation procedures, except as shown or specified. Fabricate and install work true and accurate with lines and corners of exposed metal units. Form exposed faces and starter sections of seams flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool marks considering temper and finish of metal. Hold-down attachments for roof shall be designed and spaced to resist uplift pressure due to Basic Wind Speed and Exposure as identified in the General Notes. Provide uniform, neat seams without tool marks or irregularities. 7.61.3 Preformed Metal Roofing over Wood Decking Part 2 – Products Materials Preformed metal roof paneling shall be equal to the Custom Bilt Metals, SLZ 1750 Titan® Snap- Lock Roof Panel. The metal roofing system shall consist of 24-gauge, factory-formed, pre- finished panels with major ribs not less than 1-3/8" in height. Panels shall be held down to the structure with concealed clips and fasteners. The fastening schedule shall be designed by the manufacturer to resist the loads identified in the General Notes. Edges, hips, valleys, eaves, City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection FM Improvements 7-7 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\7 Thermal and Moisture Protection.docx 7/2/20189:51 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. rakes, and miscellaneous flashing shall be finished with matching pre-finished pieces of 24- gauge minimum, to form a weather-tight roofing system. Exposed sheet metal (including flashing used in this system): minimum 24-gauge thickness. Roofing panels shall be factory-prefabricated in accordance with manufacturer's standard pattern and design. Extend panels from eaves to ridge in one piece. Shop-fabricate metal in conformance with manufacturer's pattern specifications to result in a minimum 1-inch effective water dam height on both edges. Standing seam interval shall not exceed 16 inches. All final hand turning of seams at joints and junctions is to be of the same quality as the machine-produced seams. Practices and techniques described in the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual are to be used as the standard of practice unless otherwise speci fied or shown on the Plans. Finishes Exposed sheet metal treated with a protective coating of Zincalume conforming to ASTM 792, AZ50, with factory-applied paint finish of full-strength Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 with a total dry film thickness of one mil. Reverse face shall be protected by a wash coat or primer. 7.70 ROOF AND WALL SPECIALTIES 7.72 Roof Accessories 7.72.01 Common Work for Roof and Wall Specialties Part 1 – General Design Criteria Attic ventilation shall be installed in accordance with IBC 1203. Contractor shall certify in writing that attic ventilation meets the IBC specification during the submittal process. Part 3 – Execution Installation Blocking shall be installed on all exterior eaves. Ventilation baffles shall be provided at all eave vents that provide a 1-inch minimum air gap between the attic insulation and the roof sheathing. Gable end vents or roof vents shall be provided. 7.72.26 Ridge Vent Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Roof vents shall be equal to Cor-A-Vent model V-600 ridge vents or approved equal. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection FM Improvements 7-8 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\7 Thermal and Moisture Protection.docx 7/2/20189:51 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 3 – Execution Installation Roof vents shall be applied to both the hip ridges as well as the roof peak unless otherwise noted on the roof plan. 7.90 JOINT PROTECTION 7.92 General Joint Sealants Part 1 – General Submittals Submit schedule for caulk used on the project for approval prior to application. Part 2 – Products Materials Concrete and Masonry DAP® Premium Polyurethane Concrete & Masonry Sealant or equal. Doors and Windows DAP® DYNAFLEX 230® Premium Elastomeric Sealant or equal. Where necessary to provide a suitable backstop and bond breaker, tightly pack with polyethylene foam. Rope the back of grooves, leaving a minimum depth of ¼-inch for sealant. Prime surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. Other Surfaces Contractor shall provide caulk appropriate to surface and reason for caulk application. Caulk shall be the most durable available (longest warranty) by DAP®, or equal. Part 3 – Execution Installation Caulk all joints and spaces necessary to provide a completely weather-tight product. Apply caulking in strict accordance with manufacturer’s directions with regard to temperature at application and curing times, surface condition, moisture, and cleanliness. Apply after surfacing prime and prior to final coatings if surface is to be coated. If surface will not be coated, provide color choices to the Owner for approval prior to application. Clean all adjoining surfaces of excess sealant, smears, or marking due to application and leave joints with neat, uniformly-filled surfaces. 8-1 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\8 Openings.docx 7/2/2018 9:53 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 8 Openings 8.00 GENERAL Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” shall apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. 8.05 Common Work for Openings Part 1 - General Summary This division covers furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for providing all interior and exterior doors, frames, and windows. Related Sections • Division 5.05.23 Bolts and Other Connectors Submittals Submittal information shall be provided to the Owner for the following items: • Doors • Hatches • Hardware • Locks • Keys 8.06 Schedule See the contract Plans for schedule of doors and windows. 8.10 DOORS AND FRAMES 8.11 Metal Doors and Frames 8.11.01 Common Work for Metal Doors and Frames Part 1 - General Summary This specification covers the doors, frames, accessories, and hardware for both interior and exterior man doors. Related Sections • Division 1.16 Owner Standard Locks and Keys City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 8 – Openings FM Improvements 8-2 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\8 Openings.docx 7/2/2018 9:53 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Submittals Submittal information shall include the following: Manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions for each type of door, frame, accessory, or hardware. Include both published data and any specific data prepared for this project. Door and frame shop drawing for approval prior to fabrication. Include detailed plans, elevations, details of framing members, required clearances, anchors, and accessories. Include relationship with adjacent materials. As requested by the Engineer, provide sample color chips representing specified colors and finishes. Performance Requirements Doors between rooms requiring a fire separation shall have a listed fire rating equal to or greater than the required room fire rating. See Plans for which rooms are required to be separated with a fire door. Doors and frames shall be listed and labeled for a minimum of 45 minutes. Doors between rooms requiring an acoustical separation (soundproof or sound rated door) shall have a minimum STC rating of 45. All exterior doors and frames shall be insulated for a maximum U-value of 0.60. Quality Assurance The manufacturer(s) shall be a minimum of ten (10) continuous years documented experience specializing in the manufacturing of doors, frames, accessories, and/or hardware of the type required for this project. At the request of the Engineer, the manufacturer shall provide testing and/or certification information demonstrating that the manufacturer shall design and construct all equipment to the latest applicable codes and standards. The manufacturer or their representative shall be available for consultation to all parties engaged in the project, including instruction to installation personnel. Scheduling The Contractor shall ensure that all approvals and/or shop drawings are supplied or returned to the manufacturer in time for fabrication without affecting construction progress schedule. In addition, they shall ensure that templates and/or actual hardware requested by manufacturer are available in time for fabrication without affecting construction progress schedule. Warranty The Manufacturer shall provide a one (1) year warranty against defects in workmanship and materials, including warping, rotting, decaying or bowing. The Installer shall warrant installation procedures and performance for a minimum of two (2) years from the point of substantial completion against defects due to workmanship and materials handling. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 8 – Openings FM Improvements 8-3 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\8 Openings.docx 7/2/2018 9:53 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 2 - Products Components Provide doors, frames, and accessories as noted on the Door Schedule. Provide door hardware as specified, as noted on the Door Schedule, and as required by the local building code. Contractor shall provide weather tight trim around all doors whether shown on the plans or not. The frames shall be furnished with sufficient wall and head anchors to secure the jamb and door against all operating, wind, and seismic loads. Exterior door frames shall have an integral weather-strip at head and jambs. Frames shall be trimmed in the field to form a weather tight seal if shown on the plans or not. Accessories Provide door accessories as noted on the Door Schedule. Hinges shall provide 180-degree rotation of the door. Hinges which are exposed at building exterior shall be equipped with tamper-proof pins that cannot be removed. Hinges exposed at the interior of the building shall be removable. The manufacturer shall provide door stops; no screw-on stops will be accepted. Finishes Prime doors and frames at the factory according to requirements for metals in Division 9. Finishes shall be per the appropriate metal finishes in Division 9. Part 3 - Execution Installation Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved shop drawings; set frames plumb, square, level, and aligned to receive doors. Anchor frames to adjacent construction in strict accordance with recommendations and approved shop drawings and within tolerances specified in manufacturer’s instructions. Seal metal-to-metal joints between framing members using good quality elastomeric sealant, and all doorjambs with caulking as specified. Reinforce hinge and lock areas. Mount door using minimum of three (3) hinges. Hang door in the frames and apply hardware in a neat, secure manner so that the doors will operate without dragging or binding. Cleaning/Repair Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean door and frame surfaces in accordance with AAMA 609. Do not use abrasive, caustic, or acid cleaning agents. Protect products of this section from damage caused by subsequent construction until substantial completion. If damage does occur, Contractor shall repair damaged or defective products to original specified condition in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Replace damaged or defective products that cannot be repaired to Owner’s acceptance. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 8 – Openings FM Improvements 8-4 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\8 Openings.docx 7/2/2018 9:53 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 8.11.13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Part 2 - Products Components Doors and frames shall comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and A250.4 for physical performance level. All doors shall be 1¾-inch thick and insulated with a solid polyurethane or urethane foam core. Exterior doors shall be Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless) and fabricated from 16 gauge steel minimum. Interior doors shall be Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush) and fabricated from 18 gauge steel minimum. Door frames shall be 14-gauge galvanized steel, as manufactured or recommended by the door supplier specifically for the door installed. Frames shall be furnished with sufficient wall and head anchors to secure the jamb and door against all operating, wind, and seismic loads. Alternatively, door frames installed within CMU walls can be 16-gauge galvanized steel, tied to the CMU with masonry wire clips. Fully grout CMU block within one length of a full-sized block measured from door frame. 8.30 SPECIALTY DOORS 8.31 Access Doors and Panels 8.31.20 Vault Hatches Part 1 - General Summary Access hatches shall be of the dimensions and type shown on the project plans. Related Sections • Division 1.16 Locks and Keys Performance Requirements Access doors located in sidewalks or off regularly traveled path areas shall be rated for H-20 (AASHTO) loading. Access openings shall not have any obstructions such as intermediate hatch support beams. Submittals Provide manufacturer’s statement of load rating. For aluminum frames to be cast in concrete, provide submittal for frame coating. Finishes Aluminum hatch frames shall be protectively coated prior to casting in concrete to prevent the accelerated corrosion that occurs when aluminum is in contact with concrete. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 8 – Openings FM Improvements 8-5 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\8 Openings.docx 7/2/2018 9:53 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Warranty Manufacturer shall guarantee against defects in material or workmanship for a period of five years. Part 2 - Products Manufacturers Hatches shall be equal to East Jordan Ironworks, LW Products, or approved equal. Components Access hatches shall have aluminum diamond plate door leaf (or leaves), stainless steel spring lift, neoprene weather seal, stainless steel hardware, self-latching stainless steel slam lock, and recessed padlock hasp with cover. An unkeyed internal lever shall open the latch to prevent accidental entrapment. Any drainage provision provided by the hatch or frame shall be routed to the vault or building sump or drain system using Sch 40 PVC anchored to the walls and ceiling unless shown otherwise on the plans. Frame shall be channel style with a full anchor flange around the perimeter and shall allow for controlled water drainage away from the opening. Compression spring operator lift system enclosed in telescopic tubes, expansion spring, or torsion springs shall be provided for smooth, easy and controlled door operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing. Operation shall not be affected by temperature. The door shall automatically lock in the vertical position by means of a heavy steel hold-open arm with release handle. Access doors that are indicated as odor-tight on the plans shall have a continuous EPDM gasket affixed to the frame to form an odor-resistant barrier around the entire perimeter of the cover. Part 3 - Execution Installation Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Field Quality Control Frame shall be installed square and true without binding of door throughout the full arc of travel. Mis-operation of door shall be corrected by the Contractor. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 8 – Openings FM Improvements 8-6 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\8 Openings.docx 7/2/2018 9:53 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 8.71 Door Hardware 8.71.01 Common Work for Door Hardware Part 1 - General Summary This specification covers door hardware for interior and exterior doors. The Contractor shall provide all hardware necessary to install doors in a secure, weather-tight manner. Unless otherwise specified, all door hardware shall be according to this section. Related Sections • Division 1.16 Locks and Keys Submittals Door hardware submittal information shall indicate that hardware is suitable for fire- and sound-rated applications, where applicable. Performance Requirements All door hardware shall be selected to meet local building and fire codes. Part 2 – Products Components Key cylinders shall utilize the Owner’s standard core and key. The key cylinder shall fit all exterior locking hardware. A vandal-resistant cover plate shall be provided at exterior surface of doors to prevent exterior access to deadbolts or slam latches at gap between door and frame. All exterior, and fire- and sound- rated doors and frames shall have perimeter gasketing. Weather stripping shall consist of a vinyl, neoprene, or sponge neoprene strip mounted on an aluminum or stainless steel bracket which is fastened to the door or frame. Gasketing shall be Pemko or equal. 8.71.02 Hardware for Man-doors Part 2 - Products Exterior Door Lockset Entrance Lock (Non-Emergency Exit): Non-emergency, exterior doors shall have an entrance lock (ANSI F20) with 3-inch-wide by 16-inch-high raised plate and rectangular pull with thumbpiece and deadbolt key cylinder hole on the exterior, and a lever and deadbolt thumbturn on the inside. The latchbolt shall be retracted by the thumbpiece/lever from either side. When locked, the outside key or inside knob/lever shall retract the deadbolt and latchbolt simultaneously. The outside knob/lever remains locked until the thumbturn is restored to vertical position. Throwing the deadbolt shall automatically lock outside knob/lever. The inside lever shall always be free for immediate egress. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 8 – Openings FM Improvements 8-7 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\8 Openings.docx 7/2/2018 9:53 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Closers: Door closers shall be provided for exterior doors, fire-rated doors, restroom, and locker room doors, and elsewhere as shown in the Door Schedule on the Plans. Door closers shall be surface mounted, parallel-arm type with an aluminum or stainless steel finish. Door closers shall be Dorma 8600 or equal. Closer shall be UL-listed for fire door rating. Push/Pull Plates: The inactive door on a double door shall be equipped with push/pull hardware. The pull hardware shall be the rectangular pull style mounted on a 3-inch-wide by 16-inch-high plate. The push plate shall be 3-inches wide by 16-inches high. Push/pull hardware shall be fabricated from stainless steel. Doors with push/pull hardware shall be equipped with closer. Door Hinges: Door hinges shall be fabricated using polished and stainless steel and shall be equipped with permanently lubricated ball bearings. Hinges shall provide 180-degree rotation of the door. Hinges which are exposed at building exterior shall be equipped with tamper-proof pins that cannot be removed. Hinges exposed at the interior of the building shall be removable. Thresholds: All interior and exterior doors shall have an extruded aluminum threshold. Thresholds shall be Pemko or equal. Door Bottoms: All sound rated doors shall have a non-handed full-mortise automatic door bottom with neoprene seal that is fire and sound rated. Automatic door bottom shall be Pemko 434ANBL or equal. All exterior and fire rated doors shall have vinyl or neoprene door-shoe or door-bottom sweep, Pemko or equal. Astragals: Provide flush extension bolts at the top and bottom of inactive double doors. Equip inactive doors with an overlapping astragal constructed of similar material to door. Astragals shall be Pemko or equal. Door Stops: All doors shall have a doorstop and holder fabricated from aluminum or stainless steel. Strike shall be wall- or floor-mounted and provide automatic doorstop and hold with quick release. Doorstop for interior doors shall be a wall-mounted concave rubber bumper with a stainless steel or aluminum mounting plate. Coordinator: All double doors shall have a coordinator to restrict the closing of one door before the other so that they close and lock properly. If not shown on the plans, Owner shall select which double door will be the primary and secondary door during the submittal stage of the project. Finishes All hardware shall have the same finish and shall be satin nickel. 8.90 LOUVERS AND VENTS 8.90.01 Common Work for Louvers and Vents Part 1 – General Related Sections • Division 17.08 - HVAC Functional Control City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 8 – Openings FM Improvements 8-8 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\8 Openings.docx 7/2/2018 9:53 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. System Description Ventilator shall be provided with explosion proof motors if noted in the Plans. Design and Performance Requirements See Louver and Damper Schedule on Plans and Functional Control description for design and performance requirements. Submittals Submit detailed product information including specifications, sizing information, dimensional drawings, coating systems, and available colors, and other information relevant to this project. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers The following manufacturers are considered to be acceptable “or equals” unless otherwise noted on the Plans or elsewhere herein. • Pottorff • Cesco • Louvers & Dampers, Inc. Accessories Provide all accessories needed for a complete installation including wall and roof thimbles, backguards, and mounting sleeves. Components A filter frame and an insect screen shall be provided on the interior side of all intake louvers. The filter frame shall allow for easy installation and removal of standard size filters. Provide one set of filters. A rodent/bird mesh shall be provided on the interior side of all louvers. Mesh shall not impede rotation of dampers, if any. Mesh shall be factory coated to match louver/damper color. The screen shall be corrosion resistant with maximum ¼-inch openings. In chemical rooms or other corrosive environments, all materials in contact with the room air shall be fully resistant to corrosion attack from the atmosphere. Finishes All louvers shall be coated with factory Kynar, or powder coat finish, color to match exterior color scheme. In chemical rooms or other corrosive environments, all materials in contact with room air shall be fully resistant to attack from the interior environment. Part 3 – Execution Install per manufacturer’s recommendations. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 8 – Openings FM Improvements 8-9 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\8 Openings.docx 7/2/2018 9:53 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Louver assembly shall be set flush with the wall exterior Operate all moving parts prior to installation. Any non-functional or binding parts shall be repaired or replaced prior to installation. Install so that blade linkages are accessible after installation to permit service and lubrication without requiring removal of wallboard or other structures. 8.91.13 Motor Actuated Louver/Dampers: Part 2 – Products Components If automatic controlled operation, blades shall be adjustable from fully open to fully closed via a 120VAC motor actuator sized appropriately to operate the damper fully. Blades shall seal with neoprene or vinyl seals. Blades shall pivot on bronze or nylon bushings, or steel bearings. Contractor shall verify compatibility of damper to actuator. Motor actuator if any, shall be side mounted, out of the air stream. Provide disconnect switch for each unit (where applicable). 8.91.19 Fixed Louver Part 1 – General Provide fixed louver(s) as shown on the Plans. Part 2 – Products Components Louver shall include channel frame mounted to the inside face of the wall. Height and width of louver and damper shall be as shown on the plans. Depth of louver, filter, and screen assembly shall be set flush with the wall exterior and any intrusion into the interior wall supported by the frame. 8.95.17 Attic Vent Part 2 – Products Components Provide attic vent on gables ends, sized per IBC or as shown on plans. Finishes Finish shall match roof color. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 9-1 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\9 Finishes.docx 7/2/2018 9:54 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 9 Finishes 9.00 GENERAL This division covers work necessary for providing all materials, equipment, and labor to coat all items in accordance with these specifications. Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” shall apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. 9.90 PAINTING AND COATING 9.90.00 Common Work for Painting and Coating Part 1 – General Scope The work specified in this Section covers the furnishing and installation of protective coating, complete in place. Shop coating and/or factory applied finishes on manufactured or fabricated items may be specified elsewhere. Regardless of the number of coats previously applied, at least two coats of paint shall be applied in the field to all coated surfaces unless otherwise specified herein. Submittals Before beginning any painting or coating, submit a list of coatings and manufacturers intended for use for review by the Owner. Include the application each coating is intended for, any surface preparation, number of coats, method of application, and coating thickness. Provide Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for all materials to be used including solvents. Provide NSF certification for all finishes in potential contact with potable water. Submit this information in accordance with the requirements regarding shop drawings included herein. Provide owner with schedule of coating operations and inspection timing. Coating inspections will be scheduled based upon Contractor-provided schedule, update schedule weekly or as necessary. Provide manufacturer’s approval of coating system applicator. If product being used are manufactured by a company other than the specified reference standard, provide complete comparison of proposed products with specified projects including application procedures, coverage rates, and verification that product is designed for intended use. Information must also be provided that demonstrates that the manufacturer’s products are equal to the performance standards of products manufactured by Tnemec Corporation, which is the reference standard. Performance Requirements All finishes potentially in contact with potable water shall be National Sanitation Found ation (NSF) certified for contact with potable water. Certification from the NSF or UL shall be supplied in writing at the time of the submittal process for Finishes. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying all finishes used on the project are compliant with primary and City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 9 – Finishes FM Improvements 9-2 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\9 Finishes.docx 7/2/2018 9:54 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. secondary standards of the Safe Drinking Water Act. Any violation shall be remedied at the Contractor’s expense. The completed coating shall produce a minimum dry film thickness in accordance with the specifications as determined by the microtest thickness gauge or comparable instrument. In areas where this thickness is not developed, sufficient additional coats shall be applied to produce it. Quality Assurance The Contractor shall be responsible for compatibility of all shop and field applied paint products including the use of primer, intermediate and top coats by different manufacturers if applicable. For any Contractor initiated substitutions, the Contractor shall verify complete compatibility between coatings provided for the project. If coatings are not compatible per manufacturer’s review it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to remove incompatible coatings fully and replace with compatible coating systems. Paint used in the first field coat over shop painted or previously painted surfaces shall cause no wrinkling, lifting, or other damage to the underlying paint. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining written documentation from equipment/material manufacturers regarding the date at which shop prime coatings are applied and shall strictly adhere to the coating manufacturer’s recommendations for recoat time intervals. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer such documentation upon request. Storage and Handling Bring all materials to the job site in the original sealed and labeled containers of the paint manufacturer. Materials shall be subject to inspection by the Owner. Store paint supplies as recommended by the manufacturer and as approved by the Owner. Extra Materials For any products that have a shelf life longer than one year, provide one unbroken gallon container of each type and color of paint and each type of solvent and thinner used, as requested by the Owner. Dispose of all extra materials not desired by the Owner. Waste Products The Contractor shall be responsible for the collection, containment, transportation, and disposal of all waste products generated for this project. Cleaning and disposal shall comply with all federal, state, and local pollution control laws. Provide acceptable containers for collection and disposal of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Cleaning and disposal shall comply with all federal, state, and local pollution control laws . Provide acceptable containers for collection and disposal of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Site Conditions Contractor shall take any and all measures necessary to prevent over-spray of structures and/or components in the field from both preparation and coating work. Should over-spray City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 9 – Finishes FM Improvements 9-3 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\9 Finishes.docx 7/2/2018 9:54 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. occur, the Contractor is responsible for all costs associated w ith any damage that occurs as a result of over-spray. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers The following coating system manufacturers are approved subject to compliance with the Specifications contained herein: 1. Tnemec Company 2. Sherwin Williams 3. Or Equal The specified coating shall be understood as establishing the type and quality of the coating desired. Other manufacturers’ products will be accepted provided sufficient information is submitted to allow the Engineer to determine that the coatings proposed are equivalent to those named. Proposed coating shall be submitted for review in accordance with Division 1. Requests for review of equivalency will not be accepted from anyone except the Contractor, and such requests shall not be considered until after the Contract has been awarded. Substitutions of the coatings of other manufacturers shall be considered only if equivalent systems of coatings can be provided and only if a record of satisfactory experience with the system in equivalent applications is available. Offers for substitutions will not be considered which decrease film thickness, solids by volume or the number of coats to be applied or which propose a change from the generic type of coating specified herein. All substitutions shall include complete test reports to prove compliance with specified performance criteria. Part 3 – Execution Installers Contractor shall be responsible for quality assurance including the retention of a coating applicator with experience necessary to complete the work as specified w ithin this Division. Applicator’s personnel shall be adequately trained for application of specified coatings. Applicator must prove adequate experience with the coatings specified for this project. At the discretion of the Owner, the applicator shall be approved to complete the coatings portion of the work. Submit list of a minimum of five completed projects of similar size and complexity to this project during the submittal process. Include for each project: 1. Project name and location. 2. Name and phone number of owner. 3. Name and phone number of Contractor. 4. Name and phone number of engineer. 5. Name and phone number of coating manufacturer. 6. Approximate area of coatings applied. 7. Date of completion. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 9 – Finishes FM Improvements 9-4 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\9 Finishes.docx 7/2/2018 9:54 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Examination The Owner shall inspect and approve all surface preparations prior to application of any coating. Provide 24-hour notice prior to surface inspection needs. Preparation Prepare surfaces in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the coating to be applied to the surface, or the surface preparation requirements of these specifications, whichever are stricter. In general, all surface preparation shall meet Structural Steel Painting Council (SSPC) Surfacing Preparation (SP) guidelines, the National Association of Pipe Fitters (NAPF), American Water Works Association (AWWA) and/or the National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) as noted herein unless more strictly described by coating manufacturer. Coatings shall only be applied during weather meeting the recommendations of the coating manufacturer. Air and surface temperatures, humidity, and all other environmental conditions shall be within limits prescribed by the manufacturer for the coating being applied, and work areas shall be reasonably free of airborne dust at the time of application and while coating is drying. Materials shall be mixed, thinned, and applied according to the manufacturer’s printed instructions. Dry Film Thickness (DFT) shall be as stated here in or applied based on coverage rates of square feet per gallon (sq. ft./gal). Installation/Construction Paint application shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions except that coating thickness specified herein shall govern. Finished coating on all items shall be clean, undamaged, and of uniform thickness and color. Coating shall be done in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. The dry film thickness listed in the “Materials” section of this Division must be met, regardless of the applied film thickness or number of coats. Carefully observe all safety precautions stated in the manufacturer’s printed instructions. Provide adequate ventilation and lighting at all times. The manufacturer’s recommended drying time shall be construed to mean “under normal conditions”. Where conditions are other than normal because of weather, confined spaces, or other reason, longer drying times may be necessary. The manufacturer’s recommendation for recoating time intervals shall be strictly adhered to. Pipe shall be emptied of water for a minimum of 24 hours prior to surface preparation and painting. Pipe shall not be filled with water until coating is dry. If, in the Engineer’s opinion it is not practical to drain the pipes, the water must stand for at least 48 hours to reach ambient temperature prior to coating the pipe. Do not allow water to flow for at least 24 hours after final coating. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 9 – Finishes FM Improvements 9-5 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\9 Finishes.docx 7/2/2018 9:54 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Field Quality Control The prime Contractor shall be completely responsible for coating quality. The Contractor shall provide both wet and dry film gauges, and make such available to the Engineer when requested. If coating inspector finds anomalies and/or defects, the Contractor shall re-prep and recoat those areas per the coating manufacturer’s instructions. Acceptance of the completed coatings shall be based on the proper application and proper preparation of the coated surfaces, and a finished product that does not contain runs, drips, surface irregularities, overspray, color variations, scratches, pinholes, holidays, and other surface signs that detract from the overall performance and/or appearance of the finished project. Repair/Restoration The Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with any damage that occurs as a result of over-spray. Scratched, chipped, or otherwise damaged coatings, including factory coatings, shall be repaired before final acceptance will be given. Cleaning If any cleaning of equipment at the site is performed with solvents, such work shall be done over leak-proof linings. Preparation or coating materials may not be disposed of on site. 9.90.01 Color Schedule Colors used for finish coatings on process equipment, piping, and building surfaces shall conform to the following schedule. All finishes shall be glossy unless otherwise specified. Finish coatings, which are applied in the shop by the manufacturer, shall conform to this section. Factory coatings which are damaged during shipment or installation shall be recoated in the field in accordance with these specifications. Items of similar purpose shall be painted the same color. If items come from the factory with a shop applied coating that does not match said color, they shall be field coated to match. The contractor shall allow no less than 15 working days from the time the Owner is provided with color selections for the Owner to make color choices. The Owner will finalize the color schedule for painted items after award of the contract. The schedule outlined below shall be used for bidding purposes. Contractor shall provide a pallet of colors from the manufacturer of not less than 15 color choices. 9.90.02 Unpainted Items Do not coat aluminum or stainless steel items unless specifically directed otherwise below or as shown on the plans. Field painting is not required for factory prefinished equipment items (e.g. pumps, motors, blowers, etc.) unless otherwise specified. Do not coat shop epoxied meters or control valves unless noted otherwise on the plans or herein. Do not coat small diameter pilot systems such as galvanized iron, copper, or brass pipe and fittings associated City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 9 – Finishes FM Improvements 9-6 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\9 Finishes.docx 7/2/2018 9:54 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. with control valves unless noted otherwise on the plans or herein. Do not coat flange bolts inside vault and wetwell. 9.91 Painting and Coating Systems Refer to 9.90.00 for coating application requirements. 9.91.13 Exterior Painting 9.91.13.01 - System 1: Metals – Exterior (Wet Conditions) including Doors, Windows, and Frames Part 1 - General Typical Application This Section applies to all interior and exterior hollow metal doors, windows, and frames. All hollow metal doors, windows, and frames shall be bonderized, pickled or phosphatized, which will serve as a primer for and shall be compatible with the finish coat to be applied in the field. Location: building door Part 2 - Products 1. Tnemec a. Prime Coat: Series 161 Fast Cure Epoxy (3 to 5 Mil DFT) b. Finish Coat: Series 73 EnduraShield (3 to 5 Mil DFT) 2. Sherwin Williams For products that are supplied in bare (unprimed) metal: a. Primer: Corothane 1 Galvapac Zinc Primer B65G11 (2.5 to 3.5 Mil DFT) b. Finish Coat: Acrolon 218HS B65-650 Series (3 to 5 Mil DFT) For products that are supplied with a shop prime coat: a. Primer: Shop b. Intermediate: Macropoxy 646FC B58-600 Series (5 to 8 Mil DFT) c. Finish Coat: Acrolon 218HS B65-650 Series (3 to 5 Mil DFT) Part 3 - Execution Surface Preparation 1. Clean, dry, and free of all dirt, oil, grease and other contaminants. 2. For new work: SSPC-SP1 Solvent cleaned 3. For coating over existing painted surfaces: Remove all loose and damaged coatings. Prepare with SSPC-SP2 hand tool or SP3 power tool cleaning. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 9 – Finishes FM Improvements 9-7 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\9 Finishes.docx 7/2/2018 9:54 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 9.91.13.10 - System 2: Wood - Exterior, Painted Part 1 - General Exterior wood surfaces, including, but not limited to trim, soffit, siding, and other similar surfaces. Part 2 - Products 1. Tnemec a. Prime Coat: Series 151-1051 Elasto-Grip (250 to 300 square feet per gallon) b. Intermediate Coat: Series 1029 EnviroCrete (4 to 6 Mil DFT) c. Finish Coat: Series 156 EnviroCrete (4 to 6 Mil DFT) 2. Sherwin Williams a. Primer: Exterior Latex Wood Primer (250 to 300 square feet per gallon) b. Intermediate Coat: Loxon XP (4.0 to 6.0 Mil DFT) c. Finish Coat: Loxon XP (4.0 to 6.0 Mil DFT) Part 3 - Execution Surface Preparation 1. Surface clean, dry, and free of contaminates. 9.91.23.12 - System 3: Wood – Interior, Painted Part 1 - General Interior painted wood surfaces, including, but not limited to trim and other similar surfaces. Part 2 - Products 1. Tnemec a. Primer: Series 151-1051 Elasto-Grip (1.0 to 1.5 Mil DFT) b. Intermediate Coat: Series 1029 EnduraTone (2 to 4 Mil DFT) c. Finish Coat: Series 1029 EnduraTone (2 to 4 Mil DFT) 2. Sherwin Williams a. Primer: PrepRite ProBlock Int/Ext Latex Primer Sealer B51 Series (1.0 to 1.5 Mil DFT) b. Intermediate Coat: Sher-Cryl HPA B66-350 Series (2 to 4 Mil DFT) c. Finish Coat: Sher-Cryl HPA B66-350 Series (2 to 4 Mil DFT) City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 9 – Finishes FM Improvements 9-8 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\9 Finishes.docx 7/2/2018 9:54 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 3 - Execution Surface Preparation Surface clean, dry and free of contaminates. 9.91.13.13 - System 4: Exterior of Exposed Ductile Iron Pipe Part 1 - General This Section applies to all ductile/cast iron and ferrous metals, including bituminous coated pipe and materials unless specified otherwise. Do not coat stainless steel materials unless specified otherwise. This Section applies to all pipe materials and equipment, including manufacturer applied coating systems. For the purposes of this coating system, metals which are located below the top of the exterior wall within a water bearing structure or are located within a vault or manhole shall be considered as under immersion service conditions. Location: all ductile iron pipe exterior inside the vault. Pipe color shall be light green. Part 2 - Products 1. Tnemec a. Primer option 1: Series 1 Omnithane (2.5 to 3.5 Mil DFT). b. Primer option 2: Series N69 or N140 (2.5 to 3.5 Mil DFT) may be used if the time between prime coat and intermediate coat is less than 60 days. If more than 60 days occurs, surface will need re-preparation per the manufacturer’s instructions. c. Intermediate Coat: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II (6 to 8 Mil DFT) d. Finish Coat: Series 73 Endura-Shield (3 to 5 Mil DFT) 2. Sherwin Williams a. Primer: Corothane 1 Mio-Zinc Primer (2.5 to 3.5 Mil DFT) b. Intermediate: Macropoxy 646FC B58-600 Series (6 to 8 Mil DFT) c. Finish: Macropoxy 646FC B58-600 Series (6 to 8 Mil DFT) Part 3 - Execution Surface Preparation 1. Ferrous Metals a. SSPC-SP10 Near white blast cleaning 2. Ductile and Cast Iron Materials a. It is strongly recommended that any ductile iron or cast iron pipe or materials to have a special exterior coating should be purchased factory primed without the standard asphalt coating. No field removal of asphalt coatings is allowed. b. All oils, grease, and other contaminants shall be removed using solvent cleaning prior to abrasive blasting or power tool cleaning. Blemishes or staining on the City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 9 – Finishes FM Improvements 9-9 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\9 Finishes.docx 7/2/2018 9:54 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. prepared surface are acceptable if such items cannot be removed by light scraping with a knife. SSPC-SP10 blue-gray with surface profile of 2.0 Mil, minimum. Do not burnish the surface. Clean all surfaces of dust and loose residue immediately prior to coating. See NAPF 500-03-04/05. 9.91.33 Submerged and Buried Metals Painting 9.91.33.03 - System 5: Metals Submerged In Wastewater – Non NSF Part 1 – General This section applies to all metals submerged and/or regularly in contact with wastewater. Location: ductile iron pipe exterior inside the wetwell. Pipe color shall be light green. Part 2 – Products Materials 1. Tnemec (Epoxy) a. Primer: Series 435 PermaShield (12 to 15 Mil DFT) b. Finish Coat: Series 435 PermaShield (12 to 15 Mil DFT) 2. Sherwin Williams a. Primer (blast hold primer): Copoxy Primer (3 to 5 Mil DFT) b. Intermediate Coat: Macropoxy 80 (5 to 7 Mil DFT) c. Finish Coat: Macropoxy 80 (5 to 7 Mil DFT) Part 3 – Execution Preparation Surface preparation SSPC SP1 followed by SP10 Near White Blast. Surface profile shall be 2.0 Mils, minimum. 9.97.23 Concrete and Masonry Coatings Part 1 - General Scheduling Most coatings on concrete will require a 28-day concrete curing period prior to coating. Schedule the work accordingly. No additional monetary or time compensation will be given for failure to plan for the required curing duration. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 9 – Finishes FM Improvements 9-10 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\9 Finishes.docx 7/2/2018 9:54 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 9.97.23.01 - System 6: Concrete – Immersion, Severe Conditions subject to Hydrogen Sulfide Exposure Part 1 - General This Section shall apply to the proposed wet well. This coating system is intended to protect the concrete from attack due to hydrogen sulfides within the sewage. This Section shall apply to all concrete surfaces within the wet well. Part 2 - Products 1. Wasser a. MC-Arosheild High-Solids Urethane Coating; color of coating shall be white. Part 3 - Execution Surface Preparation 1. Verify state of cured concrete. No concrete surface shall be coated without a minimum 28-day cure or verify the concrete emits less than 3 lb. per 1,000 sq./ft. in a 24-hour period via a Calcium Chloride test or ASTM D4263 Plastic Mat Test. This applies to patched areas, new pour areas, or newly formed walls and containment dikes. 2. Roughen concrete surface for improved adhesion. Concrete shall be abraded by an approved method from SP13 such as abrasive blasting, high pressure water blast, water jetting with abrasive injection, or similar to achieve a ICRI standard CSP3-5 profile over the entire substrate to be coated. 3. Remove surface contaminants. Remove all oils, grease, dirt, efflorescence, laitance or other foreign contaminants. The concrete surface will also need to be free of moisture or standing water. Wash down with clean water and vacuum the surface subsequent to the above procedures. 4. Repair substrate defects. After the concrete is clean and dried, all surface irregularities are to be repaired with the specified surface filler. This includes form voids, honeycombs, fins, cracks, spalled areas, and control joints. All metallic protrusions shall be ground below the surface and then patched or filled with an approved material. Fill any discontinuities, such as picking holes, flush with the adjoining concrete surface. Installation Coat all surfaces unless some are specifically identified to not be coated. Stripe coat all concrete joints to obtain full coverage within the joint. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 9 – Finishes FM Improvements 9-11 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\9 Finishes.docx 7/2/2018 9:54 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 9.97.23.04 – System 7: Concrete (Exterior below Grade Damp- proofing) Part 2 – Products Materials 1. Tnemec a. One coat: Series 46-465. (8 to 10 Mil DFT) 2. Sherwin Williams a. One coat: Hi-Mil Sher-Tar Epoxy. (8 to 10 Mil DFT) Part 3 – Execution Preparation Surface Preparation Clean and dry. Rock pockets ¼-inch diameter and larger filled. 9.97.23.07 – System 8: Concrete Vault Interior Do not coat interior walls unless noted otherwise on the plans or stated herein. 9.97.23.11 System 9: Anti-Graffiti Coating and Water Repellent on CMU and Concrete Exterior Part 2 – Products Materials 1. Tnemec a. First Coat: Chemprobe Dur A Pell GS (6-9 Mil DFT) b. Second Coat: Chemprobe Dur A Pell GS (6-9 Mil DFT) 2. Sherwin Williams a. First Coat: Anti-Graffiti Coating (6-9 Mil DFT) b. Second Coat: Anti-Graffiti Coating (6-9 Mil DFT) Part 3 – Execution Preparation Surface must be clean, dry, and in sound condition. Remove all oil, dust, grease, dirt, loose rust, and other foreign material to ensure adequate adhesion. Refer to SSPC-SP13/NACE 6, or ICRI 03732, CSP 1-3. Surfaces should be thoroughly clean and dry. Concrete and mortar must be cured at least 28 days at 75 degrees Fahrenheit (24 degrees Celsius). Remove all loose mortar and foreign material. Surface must be free of laitance, concrete dust, dirt, form release agents, moisture curing membranes, loose cement and hardeners. Fill bug holes, air pockets City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 9 – Finishes FM Improvements 9-12 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\9 Finishes.docx 7/2/2018 9:54 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. and other voids with Cement-Plex 875 or equal. Weathered masonry and soft or porous cement board must be brush blasted or power tool cleaned to remove loosely adhering contamination and to get to a hard, firm surface. Laitance must be removed. 10-1 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\10 Specialties.docx 7/2/2018 10:02 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 10 Specialties 10.00 GENERAL This division covers that work necessary for fabricating and installing all furnishings and accessories as described in these specifications and as shown on the Plans. Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” shall apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. 10.05 Common Work for Specialties Part 1 - General Submittals Submittal information shall be provided to the Owner for the following items: • Equipment Signs • Pipe Markings 10.10 INFORMATION SPECIALTIES 10.14 Signs and Labels 10.14.1 Common Work for Signs and Labels Part 2 - Products Materials Unless otherwise specified, text shall be white on a background color shown below. Part 3 - Execution Installation Install signs/markers directly on the devices in a location that does not interfere with the device operation or maintenance. If the device is too small or otherwise impractical to mount marker, locate marker as close as possible to the device on an adjacent surface. Purpose Plate Color General Black Warning Red Electrical Black Domestic Water Blue Raw Water Purple Waste Water Green Chemical Orange or Brown City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 10 – Specialties FM Improvements 10-2 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\10 Specialties.docx 7/2/2018 10:02 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 10.14.2 Equipment Signs Part 2 - Products Materials Equipment signs shall be plastic-laminated 1-inch high, by required length, by ⅛-inch thick, with ½-inch high letters in N-2 Standard Gothic characters. 10.14.6 Construction Fence Perimeter Signs Part 2 - Products Materials Signs shall be made of polyethylene and be ⅛-inch thick minimum. Sign shall have a white background with construction orange print. Font shall be readable from 100 feet. Part 3 - Execution Installation During construction, if construction site is to be partially or completely enclosed, signs stating “Construction Area, Keep Out” shall be placed so that at any location around t he construction site within 100 feet of a sign can be read from that distance. Upon removal of temporary construction fencing, remove signs from fencing and deliver to Owner. 10.14.8 Electrical and Control Equipment Part 2 - Products Materials Name plates and service legends shall be phenolic-engraved, rigid, laminated plastic type with adhesive back. Letter height shall be 5/16-inch unless specified otherwise on the Plans. Labeling shall clearly identify the associate component. Color shall be black background with white letters. Tags shall be securely attached. Adhesive backed tags shall also have at least two brass screws for positive fastening. Part 3 – Execution Installation Provide engraved nameplates indicating load served, voltage, and phase for every circuit breaker, panel board, switchboard, motor control center, motor starter, disconnect switc h, and fused switch. All components provided under this specification, both field- and panel-mounted, shall be provided with permanently-mounted nametags. The Engineer shall have complete control over the hardware to be labeled and the labeling provided. Provide labels as directed. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 10 – Specialties FM Improvements 10-3 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\10 Specialties.docx 7/2/2018 10:02 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Provide a name tag for each piece of equipment and for each circuit and/or control device associated with the equipment. Provide a nameplate for each control center unit door. Warning nameplates shall be provided on all panels and equipment which contain multiple power sources which may have energized circuits with the main disconnecting means in the off position. Lettering shall be white on red background. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11-1 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\11 Equipment.docx 7/2/2018 10:04 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 11 Equipment 11.00 GENERAL This division covers that work necessary for providing and installing all equipment as described in these specifications and as shown on the plans. Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” shall apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. 11.05 Common Work for Equipment Part 1 - General Related Sections • Division 1.81 Seismic Restraint Requirements Submittals Submittal information shall be provided to the Owner for the following items: • Pumps and Motors • Temporary Pumps and Motors • Pump Installation Mechanisms • Pump Removal Mechanisms 11.10 Pumps 11.10.1 Common Work for Pumps Part 1 - General Summary This section covers work necessary to provide the pumps, complete with motors and accessories, described herein and as shown on the Plans Related Sections • 1.82 Pressure Ratings • 10.14.9 Pump signs • 11.19 Pump Anchor Bolts • 11.20.1 Common Work for Pump Motors • 9.91.33.3 Coatings – Metals Submerged in Wastewater Non NSF References • HI - Hydraulic Institute. • ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 11 – Equipment FM Improvements 11-2 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\11 Equipment.docx 7/2/2018 10:04 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. • AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute. • ANSI - American National Standards Institute. Definitions Pumps are classified by the following terms: Submersible – Refers generally to single stage centrifugal pumps such as Submersible Sewage or Sump Pumps. Performance Requirements The design and performance requirements listed for each pump must be met, with no exceptions. Pumps that do not meet all of the conditions will be rejected. Submittals Submittal information shall be provided for each individual pump. Product Data: • A minimum of 5 installations with similarly sized and configured pumps in equivalent fluid applications. Include location, contact name, and number. • Specifications and data describing all pump parts, pieces, and components. Include information on materials of construction and proposed coating systems. • Performance curves showing total dynamic head (TDH) in feet, efficiency and net-positive-suction head required (NPSHR) versus output in gallons per minute (GPM). All losses from the drive shaft, seal, coupling and other mechanical losses shall be included in the pump efficiency data presented. Catalog or software generated curves may be submitted for preliminary approval and ordering. • Complete list of all pump system components and accessories to be provided. • Calculations showing compliance with bearing life and shaft deflection. Shop Drawings: • Provide detailed dimensional drawings showing outline dimensions, lengths, overall sizes, materials and weights for each pump unit and associated accessories. Closeout Submittals: Provide the following submittals prior to project closeout: • Operations and Maintenance Manual • Manufacturer Signed Warranties with pump serial numbers. Schedule Provide delivery time in time from approval of shop drawings/submittal. All equipment shall be delivered within 14 weeks or less from approval of complete submittal information. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 11 – Equipment FM Improvements 11-3 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\11 Equipment.docx 7/2/2018 10:04 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Quality Assurance The pump manufacturer shall accept unit responsibility for the motor/pump assembly. Ensure that pumps selected are locally serviceable and replacement parts are readily available. Delivery, Storage, and Handling Pumps shall be delivered, stored, and handled in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. Warranty All pumping equipment described in this section and provided under this contract shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two years after date of project acceptance. “Original operation” shall be defined as the date that the manufacturer’s representative approves field testing of each unit, and Owner accepts unit and its installation following completion of 10-day start up period. Following pump and motor installation, supplier shall furnish services of a qualified manufacturer's representative to inspect pump units and inform Owner, prior to field testing, of any defects or concerns regarding condition of each unit and its installation at the job site. Upon resolution of any defects or concerns (if any) and work performed by the Contractor at their expense, manufacturer's warranty shall then be in full effect with no reservation or qualifications other than those stated in the manufacturer's warranty. Upon completion of pump installation, manufacturer shall provide written certification that equipment is fully warranted as installed. Extra Materials Provide any special tools required for pump or motor maintenance. Part 2 - Products Manufacturers Flygt is the only manufacturer approved on this project. Components All pump system components are to come from the pump manufacturer and shall include: • Motor • Shaft assembly • Impeller assembly • Volute assembly • Discharge head or pump casing • Couplings City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 11 – Equipment FM Improvements 11-4 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\11 Equipment.docx 7/2/2018 10:04 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. • Power cable • All other necessary appurtenances for complete unit assembly • Removal mechanisms • Basins where applicable Accessories All pumps are to include an engraved non-corrosive metal nameplate on the exterior of the pump head or body (duplicate attached to pump support flange or shipped loose if submersible), readily accessible without requiring any disassembly. The nameplate shall include, at a minimum, the following information: • Pump Manufacturer • Pump Model Number • Pump Serial Number • Impeller Number • Impeller Trim • Design TDH (feet) • Design Flow (gpm) • Supplier Name and Phone Number • Date of Manufacture Source Quality Control Field Pump Performance Testing Pump manufacturer shall have a representative that will oversee the pump vibration and performance during testing and startup. Part 3 - Execution Installation/Construction Install pump units in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and direction. Installation shall be supervised and approved by manufacturer’s representative prior to operating or field testing units. Adjust pump assemblies so that driving units are properly aligned, plumb, and level with the driven units and all interconnecting shafts and couplings. Flexible couplings shall not be used to compensate for any misalignment. Connect suction and discharge piping to the pump in a manner which prevents strain on pump flanges. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 11 – Equipment FM Improvements 11-5 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\11 Equipment.docx 7/2/2018 10:04 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Field Quality Control Contractor shall be responsible for calibration, startup, and initial performance to meet specifications herein. A field test shall be made to give an indication of the performance of the new pump when it is operating under actual field conditions and to establish the acceptance of the pump furnished and installed. The field test shall be conducted and/or supervised by the pump manufacturer’s authorized representative, and observed by the Engineer after the piping and controls have been installed. Upon co mpletion of pump installation and testing, manufacturer shall provide written certification that equipment is installed correctly and fully warranted. A performance test as described in the latest edition of Hydraulic Institute’s (HI) Pump Tests (ANSI/HI 1.6 Centrifugal, or ANSI/HI 2.6 Vertical, ANSI/HI 11.6 Submersible) shall be performed, submitted to the Engineer and approved for each pump. The field test shall be performed to the accuracy obtainable with the testing equipment installed as a part of the piping and instrumentation. If sufficient field devices are not available, the Contractor shall provide testing gauges and meters as needed. Prior to acceptance of installed pumps, manufacturer's representative shall demonstrate proper operation of pumps at capacities stated. Testing shall be completed under the observation of the Owner and Engineer. At that time, the following data shall be collected for each pump: • TDH vs. Flow at a minimum of three points which include: Shutoff head, Open to system, and approx. 50% design flow with throttled discharge valve. Additional points may be required by Engineer. • Overall Efficiency • Vibration readings shall be taken at the locations described in Hydraulics Institute standard 9.6.4.3.2. Vibrations shall be read in the three orthogonal planes, with the maximum reading governing the results. If the vibration tests fail, the manufacturer and/or Contractor shall modify the equipment and/or installation and retest until the standards are met. Submit three copies of the vibration test results to the Engineer. The manufacturer’s representative shall provide proper, calibrated instrumentation to verify maximum completed unit vibration amplitude. Maximum allowable completed unit vibration amplitude (pump and motor installed) shall be as shown below. (Velocity measurements are in/sec RMS). Submersible Sewage Power Vibration (hp) (in/sec) 0-10 0.25 Upon completion of pump installation and testing, manufacturer shall provide written certification that equipment is fully warranted installed. Certification shall be provided that City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 11 – Equipment FM Improvements 11-6 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\11 Equipment.docx 7/2/2018 10:04 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. pumps meet all requirements set forth in these specifications and submitta l literature. The pump installer shall also provide a written report of all test conditions and results. See Division 1.75 Testing, Startup and Operation for additional requirements. Repair Repair and retest units failing any field test. If unit fails second field test, unit will be rejected and supplier shall furnish a unit that will perform as specified. 11.12 Wastewater Pumps 11.12.2 Lift Station Pumps and Motors Part 1 – General This section covers work necessary to provide the submersible non-clog pumps and motors with rail system, complete at the proposed Misty Cove Lift Station and to provide one submersible non-clog pump and motor with adapter to fit existing rail system at Devil’s Elbow Lift Station. The pumps shall be capable of passing a 3.0” spherical solid without degradation to the pump or motor. Each pump unit provided for this project shall be Flygt, no substitutions. See lower sections for specific pump model numbers and operational requirements. Part 2 – Products Operational Requirements Pump No. 1 Pump No. 2 Design Head (TDH) (Feet) 82.7 82.7 Design Flow (gpm) 230 230 Minimum Shutoff Head (feet) 134 134 Flygt Model Number/Impeller No. NP 3127 SH 3~ Adaptive 249 NP 3127 SH 3~ Adaptive 249 Maximum Motor Horse Power 11 11 Pump Design The pump(s) shall be automatically and firmly connected to the discharge connection, guided by no less than two guide bars extending from the top of the station to the discharge connection. There shall be no need for personnel to enter the wet well. A machined metal to metal watertight contact shall accomplish sealing of the pumping unit to the discharge connection. Each pump shall be fitted with sufficient length of stainless steel cable to reach from bottom to top of wet well plus five feet of slack. The working load of the lifting system shall be 50 percent greater than the pump unit weight. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 11 – Equipment FM Improvements 11-7 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\11 Equipment.docx 7/2/2018 10:04 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Pump Construction Major pump components shall be of gray cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 35B, with smooth surfaces devoid of blow-holes or other irregularities. All exposed nuts or bolts shall be AISI type 304 stainless steel construction. All metal surfaces coming into contact with the sewage, other than stainless steel or brass, shall be protected by a factory applied spray coating of acrylic dispersion zinc phosphate primer with a polyester resin paint finish on the exterior of the pump. Sealing design shall incorporate metal-to-metal contact between machined surfaces. Critical mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined and fitted with Nitrile or Viton rubber O-rings. Fittings will be the result of controlled compression of O-rings in two planes and O-ring contact of four sides without the requirement of a specific torque limit. Impeller (Adaptive) The impeller(s) shall be cast of ASTM A-48, Class 35B gray iron, dynamically balanced, semi-open, multi-vane, back-swept, non-clog design. The impeller vane leading edges shall be mechanically self-cleaned upon each rotation as they pass across a spiral groove located on a replaceable insert ring. The impeller shall have vanes hardened to Rc 45 and shall be capable of handling solids, fibrous materials, heavy sludge and other matter found in waste water. The screw shape of the impeller inlet shall provide an inducing effect for the handling of sludge and rag-laden wastewater. The impeller shall be capable of momentarily moving axially upwards a distance of 15mm/0.6-in. to allow larger debris to pass through and immediately return to normal operating position. Mechanical Seal Each pump shall be provided with a tandem mechanical shaft seal system consisting of two totally independent seal assemblies. The seals shall operate in a lubricant reservoir that hydro-dynamically lubricates the lapped seal faces at a constant rate. The lower, primary se al unit, located between the pump and the lubricant chamber, shall contain one stationary corrosion resistant tungsten carbide and one positively driven rotating corrosion resistant tungsten carbide ring. The upper secondary seal, located between the seal chamber and the seal inspection chamber shall be a leakage-free seal. The upper seal shall contain one stationary and one positively driven rotating corrosion resistant tungsten-carbide seal ring. The rotating seal ring shall have small back-swept grooves laser inscribed upon its face to act as a pump as it rotates, returning any fluid that should enter the dry motor chamber back into the lubricant chamber Each seal interface shall be held in contact by its own spring system. The seals shall require neither maintenance nor adjustment nor depend on direction of rotation for sealing. The position of both mechanical seals shall depend on the shaft. Mounting of the lower mechanical seal on the impeller hub will not be acceptable. Each pump shall be provided with a lubricant chamber for the shaft sealing system. The lubricant chamber shall be designed to prevent overfilling and to provide lubricant expansion capacity. The drain and inspection plugs, with positive anti-leak seals, shall be easily accessible from the outside. The seal system shall not rely upon the pumped media for City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 11 – Equipment FM Improvements 11-8 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\11 Equipment.docx 7/2/2018 10:04 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. lubrication. The motor shall be able to operate dry without damage while pumping under load. Seal lubricant shall be FDA Approved, non-toxic. Suction Cover The volute shall have a replaceable suction cover insert ring in which are cast spiral -shaped, sharp-edged groove(s). The spiral groove(s) shall provide trash release pathways and sharp edge(s) across which each impeller vane leading edge shall cross during rotation so to remain unobstructed. The insert ring shall be cast of (ASTM A-48, Class 35B gray iron or ASTM A- 532 (Alloy III A) 25% chrome cast iron) and provide effective sealing be tween the multi- vane semi-open impeller and the volute housing. Volute The pump volute shall be of A48 Class 35B gray cast iron and shall have an integral spiral shaped cast groove(s) at the suction of the volute. Pump Shaft Pump and motor shaft shall be the same unit. The pump shaft is an extension of the motor shaft. Couplings shall not be acceptable. The pump shaft shall be AISI type 431 stainless steel. Bearings The integral pump/motor shaft shall rotate on two bearings. The motor bearings shall be sealed and permanently grease lubricated with high temperature grease. The upper motor bearing shall be a two row angular contact ball bearing. The lower bearing shall be a two row angular contact ball bearing to handle the thrust and radial forces. The m inimum L10 bearing life shall be 50,000 hours at any usable portion of the pump curve. Electrical Pump Cord Each pump shall be provided with submersible cable (SUBCAB) suitable for submersible pump applications. The power cable shall be of sufficient length to reach from the bottom of the wet well to the splice box shown on the Plans plus five feet of slack. The power cable shall be sized according to NEC and OCEA standards and also meet with PMSHA approval. Electric Motors The pump motor shall be UL approved as explosion-proof for continuous operation in a Class I, Division I, Group D hazardous location when not submerged. The pump motor shall be induction type with a squirrel cage rotor, shell type design, housed in an air filled, watertight chamber, NEMA B type. The stator windings and stator leads shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class H insulation rated for 180 C (356F) and capable of up to 15 evenly spaced starts per hour. The rotor bars and short circuit rings shall be made of cast aluminum. Thermal switches set to open at 125C (257F) shall be embedded in the stator lead coils to monitor the temperature of each phase winding. These thermal switches shall be used in conjunction with and supplemental to external motor City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 11 – Equipment FM Improvements 11-9 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\11 Equipment.docx 7/2/2018 10:04 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. overload protection and shall be connected to the control panel. The motor and pump shall be designed and assembled by the same manufacturer. The combined service factor (combined effect of voltage, frequency and specific gravity) shall be a minimum of 1.15. The motor shall have a voltage tolerance of plus or minus 10 percent. The motor shall be designed for operation up to 40C (104F) ambient and with a temperature rise not to exceed 80C (176F). A performance chart shall be provided showing curves for torque, current, power factor, input/output kW and efficiency. This chart shall also include data on starting and no-load characteristics. The power cable shall be sized according to the NEC and ICEA standards and shall be of sufficient length to reach the junction box without the need of any splices. The outer jacket of the cable shall be oil resistant chloroprene rubber. The motor and cable shall be capable of continuous submergence underwater without loss of watertight integrity to a depth of 65 feet. The motor horsepower shall be adequate so that the pump is non-overloading throughout the entire pump performance curve from shut-off through run-out. Motor Sensors The motor stator temperature shall be continuously monitored by three (3) low resistant, bi- metallic, (N.C.) normally closed thermal switches embedded in the stator windings. These thermal sensor switches shall be used as additional supplemental motor protection and shall be wired in series with external third leg overload protection provided by the motor stator in the control panel. A float switch shall be installed in the seal leakage chamber and will activate if leakage into the chamber reaches 50 percent chamber capacity, signaling the need to schedule an inspection. Upon detection, the sensors shall actuate a panel mounted relay which will provide the operator with a visual indication of impending seal failure. Seal lubricant shall be FDA Approved, non-toxic. Pump Removal Rail System The pump removal rail system shall provide smooth, easy, removal and installation of the specified pumps from the lift station. The system shall include for each pump unit a hydraulic sealing flange, discharge base elbow, guide rails, carrier guide bracket, ITT Flygt Grip-Eye System, nylon line, and lifting chain. The guide rails, carrier guide bracket, and lifting chain shall be constructed of stainless steel materials. Mix Flush System Provide one of the specified pumps in the primary pumping chamber with a Flygt 4901 Flush Valve for flushing the wet well during initial operation of the pump. The flush valve shall depend only on the pump flow and pressure to operate and no electrical components shall be allowed. Install per manufacturer’s recommendation. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 11 – Equipment FM Improvements 11-10 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\11 Equipment.docx 7/2/2018 10:04 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 3 - Execution Installation of the pump units shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and direction. The installation shall be supervised and approved by the manufacturer's representative prior to operating or field testing the units. Upon completion of the pump installation, the manufacturer shall provide written certification that the equipment is fully warranted as installed. 11.12.3 Sump Pump Part 2 - Products Manufacturers Sump pump: equal to Hydromatic V-A1. Materials Provide a sump pump with cast iron and engineered thermoplastic body, thermoplastic vortex impeller, carbon / ceramic mechanical seal, oil-filled motor with reset thermal overload, single-row ball bearing construction, and piggyback plug. 11.95.34 Fans 11.95.34.1 Wall Ventilators Part 1 – General Design and Performance Requirements See Ventilator Schedule on Plans and Functional Control description for design and performance requirements. Submittals Submit detailed product information including specifications, sizing information, performance curves, dimensional drawings, accessories, and other information relevant to this project. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers The following manufacturers are considered to be acceptable “or equals” unless otherwise noted on the Plans or herein. • ACME • Fantech • Penn Ventilation City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 11 – Equipment FM Improvements 11-11 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\11 Equipment.docx 7/2/2018 10:04 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Accessories Provide all accessories needed for a complete installation including wall and roof thimbles, backguards, and mounting sleeves. Finishes In chemical rooms or other corrosive environments, all materials in contact with room air shall be fully resistant to corrosion from atmospheric conditions. Part 3 – Execution Install per manufacturer recommendations. Provide a disconnect switch for each unit. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 12-1 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\12 Furnishings.docx 7/2/2018 10:44 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 12 Furnishings (Not Used) THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 13-1 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\13 Special Construction.docx 7/2/2018 10:45 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 13 Special Construction (Not Used) THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 14-1 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\14 Conveying Systems.docx 7/2/2018 10:45 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 14 Conveying Systems (Not Used) THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 15-1 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 15 Mechanical 15.00 GENERAL This division covers the work necessary for furnishing and installing mechanical appurtenances and accessories as described in these Specifications and shown on the Plans. Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” shall apply to all following subsections whether directly referenced or not. 15.05 Common Work for Mechanical Part 1 - General Summary Provide the necessary piping, plumbing, fittings, and appurtenances to make all piping systems complete, tested, and ready for operation as specified herein and as shown on the Plans. Some fittings that are necessary for the complete piping system installation and operation may not have been shown. Provide fittings, pipe, and appurtenances necessary, whether shown on the Plans or not, to make all piping systems complete, tested and ready for operation. Some pipe supports, thrust blocking, and tie rods are not shown on the Plans. Provide pipe supports, thrust blocking, and tie rods for pipes as required by accepted design criteria to support and restrain the loads encountered. Related Sections • Division 1.81 Seismic Restraint and Anchorage • Division 1.82 Pressure Ratings • Division 10.14.3 Pipe Markers Submittals Submittal information shall be provided to the Owner for the following items: • Ductile iron pipe • Ductile iron fittings • Copper pipe and fittings • PVC pipe and fittings • Isolation valves • Swing check valves • Floor drains and cleanouts • Flow meters • Level sensors • Pressure gauges • Other mechanical components listed in this division or required by the Engineer City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-2 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 2 – Products Materials All valves, meters, hydrants, specialties, appurtenances, and other such mechanical and plumbing components that are of similar purpose shall be of a single manufacturer and model line. Do not “mix and match” unless specifically stated otherwise or allowed by the Engineer. The intention of this requirement is to maintain consistency across all components installed on the project for function, maintenance, aesthetics, and details of installation. 15.10 BURIED PIPE INSTALLATION Part 1 – General Site Conditions Existing soils are unclassified except where specifically identified on the plans or specification. Part 3 - Execution Preparation Stringing of pipes in advance of pipelaying may occur, but may not create a traffic hazard or block access to roads, driveways, or private property without approval from the local traffic authority and affected property owners. Pipe shall not be strung out more than two weeks in advance of installation. Any pipe or materials that will not be installed for two weeks must be stockpiled at a site procured by the Contractor or as provided in this contract. Contractor shall pothole ahead of pipe-laying a sufficient distance at known utility crossings and where noted on the plans to allow room to make vertical adjustments as necessary to avoid existing utilities. Should the Contractor fail to pothole identified utility crossings, any subsequent adjustments necessary shall not be cause for cost or time claim. If the area potholed is in a travelled area and will be reopened to traffic more than one day in advance of pipelaying through the zone, the hole shall be patched with hot or cold mix, the cost of which shall be incidental. Provide the results of potholing to the Owner no less than two working days in advance of utility installation. Contractor shall provide a written record of size, materials, and locations for found utilities to an accuracy of 0.5 foot horizontal and 0.1 foot vertical. Failure to record locations clearly and legibly will result in non-payment. Installation Install pipes to the depth shown on the trench detail, unless superseded by depth shown on the profile. All non-metallic pipe, including service and air valve lines, shall include a tracer wire taped every 5 feet to the pipe. Wrap wire around pipe 3-inch diameter and smaller. Loop tracer wire to the surface in accessible locations such as valve boxes, meter vaults, or other surface access. If no access is available for a distance of more than 1,500 feet, provide a valve box specifically for the tracer wire. Wire shall be solid UF, 12AWG minimum for 2,000 foot runs and less, or 10AWG for runs longer than 2,000 feet. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-3 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Keep openings in pipe closed during the progress of work. Install plugs to prevent water and debris from entering pipe. No payment will be made to clean pipes. 15.11 Open Trench Pipe Installation 15.11.05 Common Work for Pipe Installation Part 3 - Execution Installation For push-on joint PVC pipe, joints shall not be pushed home. Stop the assembly when the marked insertion line is at the face of the bell. This is to allow for thermal expansion if the pipe is installed in cold weather. If the pipe has been pushed home, pull back to expose the insertion line. 15.11.13 Sewer Force Main Installation Part 1 - General References A. Use materials and installation methods in accordance with the latest edition of the Uniform Plumbing Code and local codes and regulations that are applicable. Install force mains in accordance with all applicable sections of AWWA including C600, C604, and C605. Part 3 - Execution Installation A. Install pipes in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Use types and sizes of pipes as specified herein and/or as shown on the Plans. Where small pipe sizes are omitted from the Plans and not mentioned in the Specifications, use sizes corresponding to code requirements and as required by equipment and plumbing fixtures and appurtenances. Properly size any undesignated pipe sizes for the functions to be performed. B. Carefully lay pipe and supports at proper lines and grades. Follow the piping runs shown on the Plans as closely as possible, except for minor adjustments to avoid architectural and structural features. Make major relocations, if required, in a manner accep table to the Engineer. C. Keep openings in pipes closed during progress of work. D. Form thrust blocking so that bolts, joints, gaskets and flanges of adjacent joints are clear of concrete allowing bolts and joints to be dismantled without removing concrete. All concrete blocking shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi unless identified otherwise in Division 3.31.3 or on the Plans. E. Pipe passing through concrete walls or slabs shall be made watertight. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-4 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Field Quality Control A. No permanent connections to the existing sewer system shall be made until the new sewer main has been tested and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall verify the size, material and location of the existing sewer main at the connection point prior to installing the new main. B. Provide connections to existing force mains, as indicated on the Plans and specified in Section 7-17.3(1) of the Standard Specifications. Connections to existing mains shall be made only after contacting the Engineer or agency inspector 48 hours prior. Flushing and Testing A. Sewer force mains shall be hydrostatically pressure tested in accordance with Section 15.18.2. Prior to testing, the force main, valves and other components not already flushed by polypig shall be flushed or swept clean. Flushing shall allow 4 complete exchanges of water and remove any obvious debris. 15.11.15 Sanitary Sewer Main Installation Part 1 - General References A. Use materials and installation methods in accordance with the latest edition of the Uniform Plumbing Code and local codes and regulations that are applicable. Sewer mains shall be installed in accordance with City standards and the Standard Specifications. Part 3 - Execution Testing/Inspection A. Alignment and Grade 1. Alignment and grade will be inspected by lamping each completed section. Any section that appears to exceed the allowance for variance in line or grade shall be further inspected by TV inspection per 7-17.3(2)H of the Standard Specifications. Initial costs for this inspection will be borne by the Owner. If this inspection confirms that the section does not meet the specified requirements for the line and grade, the section or portion not in compliance shall be re-excavated and re-laid at no additional cost to the Owner. If corrections are required based on the results of the initial TV inspection, subsequent TV inspections will be paid for by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Deflection Test of PVC Pipe 1. All PVC gravity sewer pipe shall be tested for deflection at least 30 days after completion of trench backfill and compaction in accordance with the requirements of Section 7-17.3(2)G of the Standard Specifications. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-5 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. C. Leakage (Pressure) Testing 1. All gravity sewers, including all connected side sewers, shall be tested for water tightness in accordance with Section 15.18.4 Gravity Pressure Test Method of these Specifications. D. Infiltration Testing 1. Tests shall be completed per Section 7-17.3(2)C of the Standard Specifications. Cleaning A. All gravity sewer pipe shall be cleaned and flushed after backfilling and compaction. The pipe shall be cleaned and flushed by passing an inflatable rubber ball through the completed section or using a flush truck. Any obstruction, such as cemented grout or debris, found in the completed section shall be removed. 15.13 Above Grade Mechanical Installation 15.13.02 Exposed Piping Inspection and Testing Part 1 – General Summary This section is for exposed major pressure pipe systems such as booster and lift stations, treatment facilities, control valve vaults, etc. Testing of minor service plumbing systems to follow the IPC/UPC. Part 3 - Execution Preparation The Contractor shall provide all required personnel and equipment and complete all tests required to demonstrate the integrity of the finished installation for the approval of the Owner and all agencies having jurisdiction. The pipeline shall be secured to prevent movement under pressure. The Contractor shall furnish and install temporary blocking where permanent blocking is not required and remove it after testing. All pumps, gauges, plugs, saddles, corporation stops, miscellaneous hose and piping, and other equipment necessary for performing the test shall be furnished and operated by the Contractor. Gauges used in the test may be required to be certified for accuracy at a laboratory by the Owner. Tests/Inspection Hydrostatic Pressure Testing All forcemains and appurtenances shall be tested under a hydrostatic test pressure equal to that specified under Division 1.82 of these Specifications. If not stated, the hydrostatic testing pressure shall be 150 psi over working pressure or 250 psi, whichever is greater. The Owner City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-6 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. has the right to require more stringent test criteria than stated in this Specification or in the pressure rating section if it is determined that field conditions warrant such measures. The mains shall be filled with water and allowed to stand under pressure for a minimum of 24 hours to allow air to escape and/or allow the lining of the pipe to absorb water. The Owner will furnish the water necessary to fill the pipelines for testing purposes at a time of day when sufficient quantities of water are available for normal system operation. The Contractor is responsible for the proper disposal of any waste, including water. Visible leakage is unacceptable and shall be corrected. Should the test section fail to meet the specified pressure test successfully, the Contractor shall locate and repair the defects and then retest the pipeline at his own expense. Prior to calling out the Owner or Engineer to witness the pressure test, the Contractor shall have all equipment completely set up and ready for operation, and shall have successfully performed the test to assure that the pipe is in a satisfactory condition. The Owner shall witness the test; if the test does not pass inspection for any reason, additional trips required to witness another test shall be done at the Contractor’s expense. Before applying the specified test pressure, air shall be expelled completely from the system. The test shall be accomplished by pumping the main up to the required pressure; stop the pump for a minimum of 15 minutes up to a maximum of 60 minutes as directed by the engineer, and then pump the main up to the test pressure again. During the test, the section being tested shall be observed to detect any visible leakage. A clean container shall be used for holding water for pumping pressure on the system being tested. This makeup water shall be sterilized by the addition of chlorine to a concentration of 50 mg/l (ppm). Sections to be tested shall be isolated and pumped to test pressure. Test pressure shall be sustained for a minimum of 30 minutes with no loss in pressure throughout the test duration with Engineer present and on site throughout test duration. If test results show drop of pressure, Contractor shall repair leaks and retest until testing is passed in presence of Engineer. Engineer shall bleed off pressure from pump to piping connection once test is passed to verify system piping was tested. 15.18 Buried Piping Inspection and Testing 15.18.03 Valve Testing Part 3 - Execution Testing Test all valve bonnets for tightness. Test operation of all valves at least once from closed-to- open-to-closed positions while valve is under pressure. Test all valves for water tightness under differential working pressure. To perform this test, pressurize pipe section with valve in place, close valve and relieve pressure on seat side of the valve. The valve shall not pass water during a 5-minute test period. The Contractor shall verify that the pressure differential across the valve during operation does not exceed the rated working pressure of the valve. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-7 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 15.18.06 Gravity Sewer Low-Pressure Air Pressure Test Method Part 3 - Execution Testing Where specified, pipeline and appurtenances shall be leak tested using low pressure compressed air to a pressure equal to the Owner’s standard details in the appendix. 15.18.07 Sewer Force Main Inspection and Testing Part 3 - Execution Preparation All pumps, gauges, plugs, saddles, corporation stops, miscellaneous hose and piping, and other equipment necessary for performing the test shall be furnished and operated by the Contractor. The pipeline trench shall be backfilled sufficiently to prevent movement of the pipe under pressure. All thrust blocks shall be in place and sufficiently cured to reach design strength before testing. Where permanent blocking is not required, the Contractor shall furnish and install temporary blocking and remove it after testing. The mains shall be filled with water and allowed to stand under pressure for a minimum of 24 hours to allow air to escape and/or allow the lining of the pipe to absorb water. The Contractor will furnish the water necessary to fill the pipelines for testing purposes. Gauges used in the test may be required to be certified for accuracy at a laboratory by the Owner. Testing All new force mains and appurtenances shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure equal to 100 psi. The Contractor is responsible for the proper disposal of any waste, including water. An acceptable test of pipe and fittings buried under or adjacent to proposed concrete slabs or other structures must be performed prior to construction of the structure. Whenever possible, have pipe joints, fittings and valves exposed for inspection. Any visible leakage detected shall be corrected by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Owner regardless of the allowable leakage specified above. Should the test section fail to meet the specified pressure test successfully, the Contractor shall locate and repair the defects and retest the pipeline at his own expense. Prior to calling out the Owner to witness the pressure test, the Contractor shall have all equipment set up completely ready for operation and successfully performed the test to assure that the pipe is in a satisfactory condition. Owner shall witness the test. Contractor shall pressure test the proposed forcemain prior to connecting to the existing forcemain. Before applying the specified test pressure, air shall be expelled completely from the pipe, valves and appurtenances. The test shall be accomplished by pumping the main up to the required pressure. Stop the pump for a minimum of 15 minutes up to a maximum of 60 minutes as directed by the City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-8 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Engineer, and then pump the main up to the test pressure again. During the test, the section being tested shall be observed to detect any visible leakage. The quantity of water required to restore the initial hydrostatic pressure shall be accurately determined by either: 1) pumping from an open container of suitable size such that accurate volume measurement can be made by the Owner; or 2) by pumping through a positive displacement water meter with a sweep unit hand registering 1 gallon per revolution. The meter shall be approved by the Owner. For the test to be considered acceptable, the quantity of water lost from the main shall not exceed the number of gallons per hour as determined by the formula. in which L = allowable leakage, gallons/hour N = number of joints in the length of pipeline tested D = nominal diameter of the pipe in inches P = average test pressure during the leakage test, psi. There shall not be an appreciable or abrupt loss of pressure during the 15-minute test period. Connections to Existing Mains Provide connections to existing force mains, as indicated on the Plans and specified in Section 7-17.3(1) of the Standard Specifications. 15.20 PIPE AND FITTINGS 15.21 Common Work for Pipe and Fittings Part 2 - Products Components Under no circumstance shall the fasteners be of lesser strength or higher corrosive potential than the materials being connected. In the event that dissimilar metals are adjacent (for example: stainless steel flange connecting to ductile iron flange) a dielectric insulation kit shall be used. Fasteners for pipe and fittings: Per AWWA standards unless otherwise specified . All relevant subsections of AWWA C100, C200, and C500. All bolts and studs shall be long enough so that no less than two threads extend beyond the face of the nut. Non-submerged flange bolts to be ASTM A307 Grade A, zinc plated. For submerged conditions, connection bolts shall be Nitronic 60 steel. Nuts and washers shall be Stainless Steel, minimum grade 316 in treatment processes and sewage applications. Minimum grade 317 for acidic transport. Bolts and nuts shall meet ASTM F593 and F594. Stainless steel shall not be used where in contact with chlorine or chlorine solutions. Stainless City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-9 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. steel bolts may be used in lieu of Nitronic but must be assembled using appropriate lubricant or tape. For installations in domestic water, lubricant, or tape must be approved for domestic water service. Cobas Stainless Steel Thread Sealing Tape or approved equal. All shackled thrust restraint systems shall be of stainless steel or Cor-Ten (ASTM 242) construction and manufactured by Star National Products (Ohio) or approved equal. All components of any stainless steel or Cor-Ten system shall include all stainless steel or Cor-Ten components. Bolts, nuts, washers, tie rods, and other components shall be one material and not intermixed. Finishes For conditions other than submerged, all nuts and bolts shall be zinc plated, and suitable for above and below grade locations as required. Where above grade/exposed piping is specially coated, the connecting nuts and bolts shall be coated using the same system. Part 3 - Execution Construction All piping and related equipment to be joined together shall be connected as shown on the Plans, Specifications, as recommended by the manufacturer or as required by standard industry practices if not otherwise specified. 15.22 Metal Pipe and Fittings 15.22.02 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Part 1 - General Design Requirements Ductile iron pipe shall have thickness designed in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 and shall be based on laying conditions and internal pressures to meet the requirements of Division 1.82. The pipe thickness shall not be less than that of Class 52 pipe. The pipe thickness for fire hydrant runs shall not be less than Class 52. Part 2 - Products Manufactured Units Pipe shall be cement-lined and asphaltic coated in accordance with ANSI Standard A21.4 (AWWA C104) unless otherwise specified, and shall conform to ANSI Standard A21.51 (AWWA C151). Rubber gasket pipe joints are to be push-on-joint (Tyton) or mechanical joint (MJ) in accordance with ANSI Standard A21.11 (AWWA C-111), unless otherwise specified. Flanged joints shall conform to ANSI Standard B16.1. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-10 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. When requested, furnish certification from the manufacturer of the pipe and gasket being supplied that inspection and all of the specified tests have been made, and the results comply with requirements of this standard. Ductile Iron Fittings All fittings shall be ductile iron where possible. Steel fittings will not be accepted. Ductile iron fittings shall be short-body, cement-lined, and for the pressure rating noted in Division 1.82. Metal thickness and manufacturing processes shall conform to applicable portions of ANSI Standards A21.20, A21.11, B16.2, and B16.4. Standard cement lining shall be in accordance with ANSI Standard A21.4 (AWWA C104). Mechanical joint (MJ), ductile iron, compact fittings 3-inches through 24-inches, and 54- inches through 64-inches shall be in accordance with AWWA C153. Flanged pipe spools shall be fabricated from minimum Class 53 wall thickness pipe and conform to ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15 with the exception that flanges shall be fabricated from ductile iron unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. Interior shall be cement lined. Ductile iron flange (FL) fittings shall be in accordance with AWWA C110 and fabricated from ductile iron unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents with a bolt pattern to match adjacent pipe. Gasket material for flanges shall be neoprene, buna-n, chlorinated butyl, or cloth-inserted rubber. Gaskets shall be full-face. Gaskets shall be a minimum ⅛-inch thick. Type of ends shall be specified as mechanical joint (MJ), restrained joint (RJ), true restrained joint (TRJ), plain end (PE), or flanged (FL). Finishes For above grade and exposed pipes, including those inside structures, prepare surfaces and coat the exterior per specification division 9.91.13.13. Part 3 - Execution Installation The Contractor shall provide tools and equipment, including any special tools required for installing each particular type of pipe used. The amount of deflection at each pipe joint shall not exceed 3 -degrees per joint (11 inches over 18 feet), or the manufacturer’s printed recommended deflections, whichever is less. 15.22.04 Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings Part 1 - General Related Sections • Division 5.13 Stainless Steel Design Requirements The pipe wall thickness shall be as required by Division 1.82 and the following table. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-11 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Pipe Wall Thickness in inches. Nominal Pipe Diameter Working Pressure 1″ 2″ 3″ 4″ 6″ 8″ 10″ 12″ 14″ 16″ 18″ 24″ 30″ 100 psi 0.109* 0.109* 0.120* 0.120* 0.134* 0.148* 0.165* 0.180* 0.188* 0.188* 0.188* 0.250 0.312* 200 psi 0.133  0.154  0.216  0.237  0.280  0.322  0.365  0.375  0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 400 psi 0.179  0.218  0.300  0.337  0.432  0.500  0.500  0.500  0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.625 *Per Schedule 10s; Per Schedule 40s; Per Schedule 80s Part 2 - Products Materials All stainless steel pipe and fittings shown on the Plans in direct bury applications shall meet ASTM A312, Type 304L, Welded. All heat tints and chromium depleted layers caused by welding shall be removed prior to on-site delivery. Welding of pipe shall be per ASME Welding Code. Welding shall be capable of withstanding the hydrostatic testing pressure as stated in Division 1.82 without leakage. 15.22.06 Copper Pipe and Fittings Part 2 - Products Materials Copper piping and tubing shall be drawn and meet the requirements of ASTM B-88. Use Type L hard temper for exposed areas and through concrete. Use Type K hard temper for buried services. Use Type L soft under concrete floor. Fittings for exposed pipe shall be flared or soldered meeting the requirements of ANSI B16.22. Lead content of solder shall be no more than 0.2 percent. Compression type fittings (Swagelok, Gyrolok, Parker CPL, or equal) are also acceptable when thrust restraint is not needed. Fittings for buried, concealed, and encased pipe shall be soldered. Part 3 - Execution Installation For exposed pipe, straighten any curved, or bent pipe. Runs shall be parallel and perpendicular with floors and walls unless positive drainage is required. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-12 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 15.22.08 Brass/Bronze Pipe and Fittings Part 1 - General References Brass to be low-lead content in compliance with NSF/ANSI 372 to have no more than 0.25 percent lead content. Brass nipples: ASTM B687 Brass fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.15 (threaded) Class 125 lb. (up to 200 psi water), 250 lb. (up to 400 psi water); B16.18 (soldered). Part 2 - Products Materials Brass pipe, nipples, and fittings to have threaded ends. 15.23 Non-Metal Pipe and Fittings 15.23.05 PVC Pipe and Fittings – Solvent Weld Part 2 - Products Materials Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material for pipe fittings and couplings shall conform to ASTM D-1784, Type 1, Grade 1, with 2,000 psi design stress. Pipe shall be Schedule 40 or 80 in accordance with ASTM D-1785, as shown on the Plans. • Sanitary sewer pipe color shall be green. There is no pipe color preference or requirement. Part 3 - Execution Installation For exposed locations that will not be painted, primer and glue must be applied carefully and not allowed to run. Areas where primer/glue has run more than ¼-inch past the joint will be cleaned, painted, or replaced by the Contractor at the discretion of the Owner. 15.23.06 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings for Sewer – Push on Joint Part 1 - General Design Requirements Pipe and fittings shall meet the requirements of ASTM Specification D3034 for 4-inch to 15-inch Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR) 35 and F679 for 18-inch to 27-inch. Pipe shall be suitable for use as a gravity sewer conduit. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-13 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 2 - Products Materials Provisions must be made for contraction and expansion at each joint with a rubber ring. The bell shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross-section rubber ring, factory assembled, securely locked in place to prevent displacement during assembly. Standard laying lengths shall be 20 feet and 12.5 feet plus or minus 1-inch. At manufacturer’s option, random lengths of not more than 15 percent of total footage of each size may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths. All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured by the pipe supplier or approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe. 15.23.12 PVC Pipe for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Part 2 – Products Design Requirements Polyvinyl chloride for drain waste and vent (PVC-DWV) material for pipe fittings and couplings shall conform to ASTM D-1784, Type 1, Grade 1, with 2,000 psi design stress. Pipe shall be Schedule 40 or 80 in accordance with ASTM D-1785 and D2665 as shown on the Plans. Pipe shall be dual labeled. Part 3 - Execution Installation Pipe bedding shall be clean granular material with no organics and no rocks larger than ½-inch for angular rock or ¾-inch for round-rock. Any cellular core pipe that is damaged in any way shall be removed and replaced with sound pipe. 15.30 VALVES 15.31 Common Work for Valves Part 1 – General Design and Performance Requirements Valves noted on the Plans or in other parts of the Specifications shall meet the requirements herein. Valves shall be designed for the intended service. Valve suppliers shall review the design and certify that the valve provided in the submittal is appropriate for the application and will operate as shown and described. Any discrepancies from the design and the valves shall be brought to the Engineer’s attention during the bidding process. Valves that do not operate as specified and per normal industry standards shall be replaced or modified so that they operate within the design parameters at the Contractor’s expense. Pressure rating shall be per Division 1.82 unless shown otherwise. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-14 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 2 – Products Components If shear pins are installed with any valve, the manufacturer shall certify the shear pin(s) to fail between 95 to 99 percent of the operator shaft failure torque. Provide concrete supports for operators where required, as shown on the Plans. Buried valves shall be equipped with an AWWA 2-inch wrench nut with a minimum of 12 turns required to close the valve, unless otherwise noted on the Plans. Exposed valves shall be equipped with lever actuator for valves 4 inches and smaller, or handwheel actuator for valves 4 inches and larger, unless otherwise noted on Plans. Valves located at elevations higher than 6 feet above the finished floor shall be equipped with chainwheel operator. Buried valves where the operator nut is more than 3 feet below the valve box lid shall be provided with a solid shaft valve nut extension to reach between 18-inch and 36-inch of the ground surface. Extension shall attach to the nut with a set screw. Diameter of extension shall be appropriate for the valve size and length of extension, but under no circumstances shall be less than 1 inch for 4-foot-long extension rods, or 1.25 inch for rods longer than 4 feet. Extension shall function without excessive twisting. Part 3 - Execution Installation Install valves in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and as shown on the Plans. Verify alignment and adjustments after installation. Provide buried valves with all operators or valves boxes installed so that wrenches or operators perform freely and without binding or other interference. Bed and backfill buried valves according to the requirements of the pipe to which they are attached. 15.32 Isolation Valves 15.32.02 Resilient Wedge (Seat) Gate Valves Part 1 – General Design Requirements All gate valves for water lines 2 inches and larger shall be of the resilient, wedge-type, non-rising stem and shall meet or exceed the performance requirements of AWWA C509 or AWWA C515-Reduced-Wall, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service, unless shown otherwise. Valves shall be suitable for installation with the type and class of pipe being installed. The wedge shall be fully encapsulated with vulcanized SBR rubber. Ends to be as specified. Valve opening direction shall be counter-clockwise. Part 3 - Execution Field Quality Control Where valves will be installed in a horizontal orientation and for valves 16-inch and larger in any orientation, operate the valve over the full range of travel in both directions prior to City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-15 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. installation in the presence of the Owner to verify gate travels smoothly and without binding. Service or replace valves that do not travel smoothly. Installation Install valves in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as shown on the Plans. Verify alignment and adjustments after installation. Provide buried valves with all operators or valve boxes installed so that wrenches and operators perform freely and without binding or other interference. Bed and backfill buried valves according to requirements of the pipe to which they are attached. 15.32.05 Eccentric (Plug) Valves Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Valves shall be equal to M&H/Kennedy Valve Company Eccentric Plug valves, Pratt eccentric valves, or Dezurik eccentric valves. Manufactured Units Plug valves shall be eccentric plug valves unless otherwise specified. Valves shall be of the non-lubricated eccentric type with resilient faced plugs and furnished with end connections as shown on the Plans. Valve bodies shall be ASTM A126 Class B cast iron. The valve seat shall meet one of the following two requirements: 1) seat shall have a ⅛-inch welded overlay of not less than 90 percent pure nickel, with a raised seat area, so that the plug face contacts only nickel; or 2) seat shall be factory-coated with heat-fused thermoset epoxy or thermoplastic nylon in accordance with AWWA C550. The valve plug shall be ASTM A536 ductile iron, faced with neoprene with a cylindrical seating surface eccentrically offset from the center of the plug shaft. Interference between the plug face and the body seat shall be externally adjustable in the field with the valve under pressure and the plug in the closed position. Valves shall have sleeve-type metal bearings and shall be of sintered, oil impregnated, permanently lubricated type 316 ASTM A743 Grade CF-8M. Valve shaft seals shall be of the single or multiple V-ring type, externally adjustable and re-packable under pressure without removing bonnet or actuator. Valves utilizing O-ring seals or non-adjustable packing shall not be acceptable. Valves shall be equipped with gear actuators oriented as shown on the Plans. Gearing shall be enclosed in steel housing and suitable for running in a lubricant with seals provided on all shafts to prevent entry of dirt and water into actuator. Actuator shaft shall be supported on permanently lubricated bronze bearings and indicate valve position. An adjustable stop shall be provided to set closing torque and provide seat adjustment. Valve surfaces shall be coated internally and externally with a heat-fused thermoset epoxy or thermoplastic nylon. Exposed nuts, bolts, springs, and washers for buried service valves shall be stainless steel. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-16 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 15.32.07 Gate Valves – Small Diameter Part 2 – Products Manufactured Units Gate valves 2 inches and smaller for steel or brass pipe shall be Crane No. 438 or equal with non-rising stem, screwed bonnet, solid wedge disc, bronze construction and threaded ends. Gate valves 2 inches and smaller for copper piping shall be Crane No. 1320 or equal with stem, screwed bonnet, solid wedge disc, bronze construction and solder or screw ends. 15.33 Check Valves 15.33.2 Swing Check Valves Part 1 – General Design Requirements The swing check valve shall function to permit flow in only one direction. The valve shall close tightly, without slamming, when the pressure on the discharge side exceeds the pressure on the inlet side. All swing check valves shall conform with AWWA C508 and the following specifications. The valve shall be constructed to withstand the pressures stated in Division 1.82. Flanges shall be drilled to ANSI B16.1, Class 125# or as specified in the Plans. Operating pressure range is 0 psi (low) to 60 psi (high). The manufacturer shall certify that the check valve will seal completely within the operational range. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers The valve shall be equal to M&H Model 159 Swing Check Valve. Manufactured Units The swing check valve body shall be constructed with heavy cast iron or cast steel and have a bronze or stainless steel seat ring, rubber clapper facing, a non-corrosive shaft and external counterweight attachment. See plans for which side of the valve to locate the counterweight. The valve disc shall be constructed of cast iron or cast steel and shall be suspended from a non-corrosive shaft. The valve shall allow the equivalent flow area of the adjoining pipe. The shaft shall pass through a stiffing box and be connected to the swing arm in the outside of the valve. Swing arm shall be oriented as shown on the plans. Finishes The interior and exterior of the valve body, bonnet and seal plate shall be coated with fusion- bonded epoxy meeting AWWA C-550 (latest revision). Interior coating shall be a minimum dry film thickness of 7 mils, not including primer. Exterior coating shall be a minimum dry City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-17 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. film thickness of 5 mils, not including primer. Alternatively, exterior may be coated per Division 9.91.23.1. 15.35 Air Valves 15.35.05 Air Valves – Wastewater 15.35.05.01 Combination Air and Vacuum Valve - Wastewater Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Combination air and vacuum valves for sewer forcemains shall be equal to A.R.I. model D - 025. Manufactured Units Provide air valve’s body and cover fabricated from polyethylene. Provide all necessary parts, small piping, fittings valves and securement as shown on the plans and Owner standard plans for a fully functioning unit. Part 3 – Execution Installation If not detailed on the plans, valves shall be attached to sewer force ma in via tap, brass pipe and an isolation ball valve and fittings as necessary. Outlet shall be provided with a brass male x female threaded return bend to direct air away from any mechanical or electrical components and sewage back to wetwell or gravity sewer manhole. 15.40 PIPING SPECIALTIES 15.40.01 Dismantling Joint Part 1 – General Design Criteria Dismantling joint shall be accessible and capable of repeated installations and removals and capable of the testing and working pressures as specified in Division 1.82. Joint adjustment range of no less than 2-inches for 12-inch diameter and smaller pipe, and 3-inches for 14-inch diameter and larger pipe. Joint assembly to include limiting rods to prevent pull-out. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Dismantling joint shall be Romac DJ400 with limit rods or equal. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-18 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 3 – Execution Installation Install per the manufacturer’s instructions. Set the assembly at the midpoint of the adjustment range unless specifically called out otherwise on the plans. 15.40.03 Pipe, Valve and Conduit Supports Part 1 - General Summary This section includes providing pipe supports, hangers, guides and anchors. Related Sections • Division 1.81 Seismic Restraint • Division 05.05.23 Bolts and other Connectors References Pipe supports furnished under this section shall comply in all respects with the requirements of the following standards. • ANSI/ASME B31.1 Power Piping • ANSI/MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers & Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture • ANSI/MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application Performance Standards Piping systems, including connections to equipment, shall be properly supported to prevent deflection and stresses. Supports shall comply with ANSI/ASME B31.1, except as otherwise indicated. Size hanger rods, supports, clamps, anchors, brackets and guides in accordance with ANSI/MSS SP 58 and SP 69. Support plumbing drainage and vents in accordance with the Uniform Plumbing Code. Submittals Pipe hanger/support design calculations Shop drawings of engineered pipe hangers/supports, including details of concrete inserts. Drawings shall include location plan showing location of the hanger/support in relation to the structure and/or equipment. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Pipe supports, hangers, guides and anchors shall be Anvil, Unistrut, Tolco, Standon or equal. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-19 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Flange supports shall be equal to Standon Adjustable Model S89 Flange Support. Pipe supports shall be equal to Standon Adjustable Model S92 Pipe Support. Both flange and pipe supports shall be equal to those manufactured by Material Resources, Hillsboro, Oregon. Components Provide and install all equipment necessary for compete support systems including, but not limited to, base, riser pipe, anchor bolts, hanger rod, support cradle or clamp, and fasteners. Except as otherwise noted, pipe support components shall comply with the types in ANSI/MSS SP-58. Point Loads: Any meters, valves, heavy equipment and other point loads on PVC, fiberglass and other plastic pipes shall be supported on both sides according to the manufacturer’s recommendations to avoid pipe stresses. Supports on plastic and fiberglass piping shall be equipped with extra wide pipe saddles or stainless steel shields. No support shall have metal pieces in contact with plastic process piping. Finishes Unless otherwise noted, all fabricated pipe supports, other than stainless steel or non-ferrous supports, shall be blast-cleaned after fabrication and hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM 123. Other than stainless steel and non-ferrous supports, supports shall be coated in accordance with Division 9.91.13.1. Part 3 - Execution Installation Piping shall be rigidly anchored to walls, slabs and ceilings by means of suitable pipe supports, wall brackets or pipe hangers. Pipe supports, hangers, brackets, anchors, guides and inserts shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions and ANSI/ASME B31.1. All concrete inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be coordinated with the formwork. Stand-on Pipe Support: Adjust support, secure to pipe and secure to floor as recommended by the manufacturer. Riser Supports: Risers shall be supported on each floor with riser clamps and lugs, independent of the connected horizontal piping. Support Spacing: Pipe supports shall be placed to meet the following maximum spacing, unless otherwise noted or shown on the Plans: maximum vertical support spacing of 5 feet; and maximum horizontal support spacing of 10 feet. Support shall be provided at horizontal bends, base of risers (vertical bends), floor penetrations, connections to pumps, blowers, and other equipment, valves and appurtenances. Support spacing shall meet the local plumbing code where applicable. Support spacing may be increased from that noted above provided adequate calculations are provided supporting the change. Support Anchorage: Concrete anchors shall be as specified in Division 3, Concrete Anchors. All channel strut type supports shall have a minimum of 2 anchors per support. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-20 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Suspend pipe hangers from hanger rods, secure with double nuts. Securely anchor plastic pipe, valves and headers to prevent movement during operation of valves. Anchor plastic pipe between expansion loops and direction changes to prevent axial movement through anchors. Provide ductile iron elbows or tees supported from floors with base fittings. Support base fittings with metal supports, or when indicated on the Plans, concrete piers. Do not use chains, plumbers’ straps, wire or similar devices for suspending, supporting or restraining pipes. Install riser clamps at floor penetrations and where indicated on the Plans. Field Quality Control Pipe supports and hangers shall be positioned in such a way as to produce an orderly, neat piping system. All hanger rods shall be vertical, without offsets. Hangers shall be adjusted to line up groups of pipes at the proper grade for drainage and venting, as close to ceilings or roofs as possible, without interference with other work. Properly support, suspend or anchor exposed pipe, fittings, valves and appurtenances to prevent sagging, overstressing or movement of piping and to prevent thrusts or loads on or against connected pumps, blowers or other equipment. 15.50 FLOW METERS 15.50.01 Common Work for Flow Meters Part 1 - General Design Criteria Meter body and register shall have a pressure rating in accordance with Division 1.82. Materials, coatings and components shall be appropriate for the fluid being measured. Meters will be installed inside a vault with an anticipated ambient temperature range between 40 and 100 degrees Fahrenheit. Submittals Meter shall fit in the space provided on the Plans. Meters that do not fit in the spacing provided must be approved by the Engineer for acceptance. Provide information on meter assembly, available and selected options, direct read head, remote transmitter, coatings and dimensions of all equipment. Part 3 - Execution Installation Install the meter in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-21 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Field Quality Control Testing Meter shall be rated for working pressure and testing pressure as required in Division 1.82. If the meter assembly cannot take the test pressure, a temporary spool or cap(s) must be installed in place of the meter. A visual leak test will then be performed under working pressure with the meter in place. The Contractor shall prove correct meter and transmitter performance to the Engineer. Should performance not be acceptable, adjust or replace the unit at the Contractor’s expense. 15.53.03 Electromagnetic Flow Meters Part 1 - General Design Criteria Provide an electromagnetic flow metering system suitable for measuring and transmitting flow rate in a full-flowing pipe. The meter shall be suitable for either horizontal or vertical mounting. The system shall operate within the accuracy required over an ambient temperature range of -10 to +120° F and a process temperature range of +15 to +120° F. Meter and electronics shall be rated for Class 1 Division 2 service. Part 2 - Products Manufacturers The flow meter shall be Siemens Sitrans F M model MAG 5100 W or approved equal. Manufactured Units The flow meter system shall be microprocessor based, utilizing a DC bipolar pulsed coil that automatically rezeroes after each pulse cycle. System accuracy shall be  1% of actual flow rate over a fluid velocity range of 1 to 30 feet per second (fps), and within 0.01 fps for velocities less than 1 fps. Repeatability shall be 0.1% of full scale or better. System accuracy shall be traceable to NIST using prototype meters of the same configuration. The meter tube and coil shall be mounted on the pipe between ANSI B16 pipe flanges and rated for working and test pressures as indicated in Division 1.82. The meter tube shall be 304 stainless steel. The meter and cable connection(s) shall be capable of complete submergence without damage. The meter shall include integral grounding electrodes or 316 stainless steel or Hastelloy C grounding rings for installation at the inlet. The manufacturer shall verify that the grounding system is appropriate for the proposed use. All wetted parts shall be 316 stainless steel. Finishes The meter liner shall completely encapsulate all wetted areas except for electrodes. The liner shall be certified by the manufacturer as appropriate for the proposed use. The liner shall be Ebonite for model 5100. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-22 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 15.60 PRESSURE AND LEVEL MEASUREMENT 15.60.01 Common Work for Pressure and Level Measurement Part 1 – General Related Sections • Division 17 - Electronic Pressure and Level Devices Design Requirements Pressure and level measurement devices shall be scaled and rated for the application. Part 3 – Execution Installation All devices shall be installed to be field serviceable without taking the facility out of service. Readouts shall be positioned to be easily read from a standing position and central to the room, unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer. 15.61 Pressure Gauges Part 1 – General References • ASTM B40.1 Grade 2A Performance Requirements Gauge accuracy shall be ± 0.5 percent of full scale. Submittals Provide catalog sheets showing dimensions, pressure range, accuracy and optional accessories. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Marsh, 3D Instruments or approved equal. Materials Gauges shall be analog, stem mount type with 4½-inch scale face, glycerin filled and completely suitable for measuring potable water. Connection shall be ½-inch threaded. Wetted parts shall be brass, bronze or stainless steel. The full scale pressure range for each gauge location shall be as follows. Location Full Scale Normal Operation Range Pump discharge 0-50 psi 18-22 psi City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 15 – Mechanical FM Improvements 15-23 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\15 Mechanical.docx 7/2/2018 10:47 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. For pressure gauges used in applications other than clean water, provide a diaphragm protector suitable for the contact fluid. Diaphragm equal to Marsh 13040, stainless steel with flushing port. Part 3 - Execution Installation Install gauges as shown on the Plans. Support gauges adequately. Field Quality Control Provide calibrated test gauges for each scaled range. Build a temporary, common testing manifold that can hold all similarly scaled gauges plus the test gauge at one time. Pressurize the manifold to the pressure specified by the Engineer. Gauges that do not meet the accuracy requirements shown under the Performance Requirements shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 16-1 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 16 Electrical 16.00 GENERAL The Contractor shall provide all labor, material, tools, equipment and services required to complete the furnishing, installation, wiring, connection, calibration, adjustment, testing and operation of all electrical equipment, devices and components as indicated and implied by the plans and specifications. Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” shall apply to all following sections whether directly referenced or not. The Contractor shall reference Section 1.33.2 regarding substitutes and “or-equals. 16.05 Common Work for Electrical Part 1 - General Summary Plans are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangements of systems and equipment, except when specifically dimensioned or detailed. The intention of the plans is to show size, capacity, approximated location, direction and general relationship of one work phase to another, but not exact detail or arrangement. Permits and Fees The Contractor shall coordinate and provide all permits, licenses, approvals, inspections by the authority having jurisdiction and other arrangements for work on this project and all fees shall be paid for by the Contractor. The Contractor shall include these fees in the bid price. Related Sections See the following sections for items that may be provided and/or installed with other electrical equipment. 1. 8.90 Motorized louvers/dampers 2. 10.14.8 Signs for electrical equipment 3. 11.12 Pump motors 4. 11.12.3 Sump Pump 5. 11.95.34 Fans 6. 15.30 Valves 7. 15.50 Flow Meters 8. 17.50 Sensors and controls Codes and Standards Provide all electrical work in accordance with latest edition of National Electrical Code, National Electrical Safety Code, Washington State Electrical Code, and local ordinances. If any conflict occurs between government adopted code rules and these spec ifications, the City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-2 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. codes are to govern. All electrical products shall bear a label from a certified testing laboratory recognized by the State of Washington. Recognized labels in the State of Washington are UL, ETL, and CSA-US. Definitions Dry Locations: All those indoor areas which do not fall within the definitions below for wet, damp, or corrosive locations and which are not otherwise designated on the Plans. Wet Locations: All locations exposed to the weather, whether under a roof or not, unless otherwise designated on the Plans. Damp Locations: All spaces wholly or partially underground, or having a wall or ceiling forming part of a channel or tank unless otherwise designated on the Plans. The words “plans” and “drawings” are used interchangeably in this specification and in all cases shall be interpreted to mean “Plans”. The word “provide” shall be interpreted to mean furnish and install. Submittals Provide submittals of each item specified in this division to engineer for approval in accordance with the submittals’ sections of these specifications. Submittals for motor control centers, motor control panels, control panels, instrumentation panels, and pump control panels shall include as a minimum a wiring diagram or connection schematic and an interconnection diagram. Wiring Diagram or Connection Schematic 1. This plan or plans shall include all of the devices in a system and show their physical relationship to each other including terminals and interconnecting wiring in assembly. This diagram shall be in a form showing interconnecting wiring only by terminal designations (wireless diagram). Interconnection Diagram 1. This diagram shall show all external connections between terminals of equipment and outside points, such as motors and auxiliary devices. References shall be shown to all connection diagrams which interface to the interconnection diagrams. Interconnection diagrams shall be of the continuous line type. Bundled wires shall be shown on a single line with the direction of entry/exit of the individual wires clearly shown. All devices and equipment shall be identified. Terminal blocks shall be shown as actually installed and identified in the equipment complete with individual terminal identification. All jumpers, shielding and grounding termination details not shown on the equipment connection diagrams shall be shown on the interconnection diagrams. Spare wires and cables shall be shown. Submittal information shall be provided to the Owner for the following items: 1. Utility Meter Enclosure 2. Service Disconnect City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-3 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 3. Surge Protection Device (SPD) 4. Underground Marking Tape 5. Electrical Grounding Components 6. Motor Control Center 7. Variable Frequency Drives 8. Transformers 9. Branch Circuit Panelboard 10. Circuit Breakers 11. Conduit and Fittings 12. Outlet and Junction Boxes 13. Electrical Handholes and Vaults 14. Wire and Cables 15. Switches and Receptacles 16. Light Fixtures 17. Automatic Transfer Switch 18. Manual Transfer Switch 19. Engine Generator Set 20. Other Electrical Components listed in this division and/or required by the Engineer. Project Conditions Contractor shall keep all power shutdown periods to a minimum. Carry out shutdowns only after a shutdown schedule has been submitted and approved by both the Owner and the Engineer. Construction Power: See Division 1.51 Part 2 - Products Source Quality Control Provide adequate space and fit for the electrical installation, including, but not limited to, determination of access-ways and doorways, shipping sections, wall and floor space, and space occupied by mechanical equipment. Provide electrical equipment that fits in the areas shown on the plans. All equipment shall be readily accessible for maintenance, shall have electrical clearances in accordance with NEC and shall be installed in locations which will provide adequate cooling. Do not use equipment exceeding dimensions indicated or equipment or arrangements that reduce required clearances or exceed specified maximum dimensions unless approved by the Engineer. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-4 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Identification of Listed Products Electrical equipment and materials shall be listed for the purpose for which they are to be used, by an independent testing laboratory. When a product is not available with a testing laboratory listing for the purpose for which it is to serve, the inspection authority may require the product to undergo a special inspection at the manufacturer’s place of assembly. All costs and expenses incurred for such inspections shall be included in the original contract price. Materials Use equipment, materials and wiring methods suitable for the types of locations in which they will be located, as defined in Definitions above. All materials and equipment specified herein shall, within the scope of UL Examination Services, be approved by the Underwriter’s Laboratories for the purpose for which they are used and shall bear the UL label. Components Fasteners for securing to walls, floors, and the like shall meet the requirements of Division 05.05.23. NEMA Rating Unless otherwise noted, provide enclosures as follows: 1. Class 1, Division 1 & 2 Locations: NEMA Type 7 2. Indoors unclassified Locations: NEMA Type 12 3. Corrosive Locations: NEMA Type 4X 4. Outdoors and/or Wet Locations: NEMA Type 4X SS 5. Electrical rooms: NEMA Type 1 Accessories Wire Identification 1. Identify each wire or cable at each termination and in each pull box using numbered and lettered wire markers. All electrically common conductors shall have the same number. Each electrically different conductor shall be uniquely numbered. Identify panelboard circuits using the panelboard identification and circuit number. Identify motor control circuits using the equipment identification number assigned to the control unit by the motor control center manufacturer and the motor control unit terminal number. Identify other circuits as approved by the Engineer. Identify each wire or cable in each pull box with plastic sleeves having permanent markings. Conductors between terminals of different numbers shall have both terminal numbers shown at each conductor end. The terminal number closest to the end of the wire shall be the same as the terminal number. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-5 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Finishes Refer to each electrical equipment section of these Specifications for painting requirements of equipment enclosures. Part 3 - Execution Installation General 1. Complete the wiring, connection, adjustment, calibration, testing and operation of mechanical equipment having electrical motors and/or built-in or furnished electrical components in accordance with electrical code, UL listing requirements and manufacturer’s instructions. Install electrical components that are furnished with mechanical equipment. 2. Provide the size, type and rating of motor control devices, equipment and wiring necessary to match the ratings of motors furnished with mechanical equipment. 3. Complete the procurement, installation, wiring, connection, calibration, adjustment, testing and operation of all electrical devices, components accessories and equipment which is not shown or specified but which is nonetheless required to make the systems shown and specified properly functional. Workmanship 1. Assign a qualified representative who shall supervise the electrical construction work from beginning to completion and final acceptance. 2. Provide all labor using qualified craftsmen, who have had experience on similar projects. 3. Ensure that all equipment and materials fit properly in their installations. Field Services 1. Provide field services of qualified technicians to supervise and check out the installation of the equipment, to supervise and check out interconnecting wiring, to conduct start-up and operation of the equipment, and to correct any problems which occur during testing and start-up. Installing Equipment 1. Provide the required inserts, bolts and anchors, and securely attach all equipment and materials to their supports. 2. Install all floor-mounted equipment on 3½-inch high reinforced concrete pads. 3. Install all equipment and junction boxes to permit easy access for normal maintenance. Cutting, Drilling and Welding 1. Provide any cutting, drilling, and welding that is required for the electrical construction work. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-6 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 2. Structural members shall not be cut or drilled, except when approved by the Engineer. Use a core drill wherever it is necessary to drill through concrete or masonry. Perform patch work with the same materials as the surrounding area and finish to match. Metal Panels 1. Mount all metal panels, which are mounted on, or abutting concrete walls in damp locations or any outside walls ¼-inch from the wall, and paint the back side of the panels with a high build epoxy primer with the exception of stainless steel panels. Film thickness shall be 10 Mils minimum. Seismic Requirements 1. See Division 1.81 Load Balance 1. Balance electrical load between phases as nearly as possible on panelboards, motor control centers, and other equipment where balancing is required. 2. When loads must be reconnected to different circuits to balance phase loads, maintain accurate record of changes made, and provide circuit directory that lists final circuit arrangement. Field Quality Control Minor Deviations 1. The electrical plans are diagrammatic in nature and the location of devices, fixtures and equipment is approximate unless dimensioned. On the basis of this, the right is reserved by the owner to provide for minor adjustments and deviations from the locations shown on the Plans without any extra cost. Deviations from the Plans and/or specifications required by code shall also be done, subsequent to Owner’s approval, without extra cost. 2. Plans indicate the general location and number of the electrical equipment items. When raceway, boxes, and ground connections are shown, they are shown diagrammatically only and indicate the general character and approximate location. Layout does not necessarily show the total number of raceways or boxes for the circuits required. Furnish, install, and place in satisfactory condition all raceways, boxes, conductors and connections, and all of the materials required for the electrical systems shown or noted in the contract documents complete, fully operational, and fully tested upon the completion of the project. Project Record Plans 1. A set of Plans shall be maintained at the job site showing any deviations in the electrical systems from the original design. A set of electrical Plans, marked in red to indicate the routing of concealed conduit runs and any deviations from the original design, shall be submitted to the Engineer for review at the completion of the project prior to final acceptance. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-7 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 2. After testing and acceptance of the project the Contractor shall furnish in the O&M manuals an accurate connection schematic and interconnection diagram for every service entrance panel, pump control panel, motor control center, and instrumentation panel provided this project. Cleanup and Equipment Protection Equipment Protection 1. Exercise care at all times after installation of equipment, motor control centers, control panels, etc., to keep out foreign matter, dust debris, and moisture. Use protective sheet metal covers, canvas, heat lamps, etc., as needed to ensure equipment protection. Cleaning Equipment 1. Thoroughly clean all soiled surfaces of installed equipment and materials upon completion of the project. Clean out and vacuum all construction debris from the bottom of all equipment enclosures. Painting 1. Repaint any electrical equipment or materials scratched or marred in shipment or installation, using paint furnished by the equipment manufacturer. Final Cleanup 1. Upon completion of the electrical work, remove all surplus materials, rubbish, and debris that accumulated during the construction work. Leave the entire area neat, clean and acceptable to the Owner. 2. Lamps and fluorescent tubes shall be cleaned and defective units replaced at the time of final acceptance. 16.10 ELECTRICAL SITE WORK 16.10.1 Common Work for Electrical Site Work Part 1 – General Description of Work The work included in this section consists of furnishing and installing conduit, fittings, handholes, pull vaults, warning tape, cables, wires, and related items, complete as specified herein and as indicated on the plans for a complete and functional underground electrical system. Special vaults, grounding, trench backfill requirements may be specified with the particular equipment or electrical system involved. Part 2 – Products General Materials and equipment shall conform to the respective specifications and standards; and to be the specifications herein. Electrical rating shall be as indicated on plans. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-8 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Raceways and conduit shall be provided per Section 16.70. Wire and cable shall be provided per Section 16.60. Part 3 – Execution Construction Provide all excavation, trenching, backfill and surface restoration required for the electrical work. Trenching shall be to depths as required by Code, particular installation, or as shown on the Plans. Trench width and length as required by the installation or as shown. Trench bottom shall be free of debris and graded smooth. Where trench bottom is rock or rocky, or contains debris larger than 1 inch or material with sharp edges, over excavate 3 inches and fill with 3 inches of sand. Separation between new electrical utilities and other utilities shall be 12 inches minimum, except gas line separation shall be 12 inches both vertical and horizontal. Perform crossing of concrete or asphalt only after surface material has been saw cut to required width and removed. Backfill around raceways shall be 3-inches of pea gravel or sand for systems of 600 volt or less. Provide red marker tape over raceways below grade. Place backfill material to obtain a minimum degree of compaction of 95 percent of maximum density at optimum moisture content. Moisten backfill material as required to obtain proper compaction. Do not use broken pavement, concrete, sod, roots or debris for backfill. 16.10.2 Underground Marking Tape (Detectable Type) Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Tape shall be Brady “Detectable Identoline – Buried Underground Tape”, or equal. Materials Underground marking tape shall be for location and early warning protection of buried power and communication lines. Tape shall be detectable by a pipe/cable locator or metal detector from above the undisturbed ground. Tape shall be nominally 2 inches wide with a type B721 aluminum foil core laminated between two layers of 5 Mil thickness polyester plastic. The plastic color shall be red for electrical lines and orange for telephone lines. Part 3 – Execution Installation Unless noted otherwise on plans, approved underground marking tape shall be installed in the trench twelve inches above and directly over the conduit or raceway. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-9 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 16.10.3 Handholes and Pull Boxes Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Handholes and Pull boxes shall be Utility Vault Co., or approved equal unless specified otherwise on the Plans. Materials Provide handholes of reinforced precast concrete, or injection molded composite plastic material. Handholes shall include a base, a body, extensions and a cover. Handholes with a perimeter of 10 feet or more (e.g., 3 feet by 2 feet) shall have both pulling irons and cable racks. All hardware shall be stainless steel, or hot-dip galvanized after fabrication; cable racking and hardware, however, shall be non-metallic and corrosion resistant. If no handhole size is shown on the Plans, size units per NEC or provide 12 inches by 24 inches by 18 inches deep, whichever is larger. All handholes located in areas subject to vehicular traffic or where identified on Plans shall be ASSHTO, H-20 rated in accordance with ASTM C857. The lids to all pull boxes and vaults shall be permanently marked for its intended use, “signal” for all signal and instrumentation handholes and “electrical” for all power handholes. Letter shall be a minimum of 3-inches high. Part 3 – Execution Installation Conduits entering handholes shall have grounding bushings installed and the conduit ends shall be sealed with Permagum sealing compound. Where conduits enter through sides of handholes, the penetration shall be made watertight. Use a core drill wherever it is necessary to drill through concrete. Perform patch work with the same materials as the surrounding area and finish to match. Pull boxes shall be provided at least every 150 feet on long straight runs. Spacing shall be reduced by 50 feet for each 90 degree bend. Install handholes flush with finished grade in all paved areas, roadways and walkways. All handhole edges shall be flush with final surface. 16.15 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING 16.15.1 Common Work for Electrical Grounding Part 1 - General References Service and equipment grounding shall be per Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC). City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-10 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Performance Requirements Verify that a low-resistance ground path is provided for all circuits so an accidental contact to ground of any live conductor will instantly trip the circuit. Part 2 - Products Components The grounding systems shall consist of the ground rods, grounding conductors, ground bus, ground fittings and clamps, and bonding conductors to water piping and structural steel as shown on the Plans. System components shall be as allowed in the N.E.C. unless specified otherwise below. 1. Ground Rods: Ground rods shall be cone pointed copper clad Grade 40 HS steel rods conforming to ASTM B228. The welded copper encased steel rod shall have a conductivity of not less than 27% of pure copper. 2. Ground Conductors: Buried conductors shall be medium-hard drawn bare copper; other conductors shall be soft drawn copper. Sizes over No. 6 AWG shall be stranded. Coat all ground connections except the exothermic welds with electrical joint compound, non-petroleum type, UL listed for copper and aluminum applications. 3. Ground Rod Boxes: Boxes shall be a 9-inch diameter precast concrete unit with hot- dip galvanized traffic cover. Boxes shall be 12-inches deep minimum. Covers shall be embossed with the wording “Ground Rod”. Part 3 - Execution General Grounding Installation When available a UFER ground per latest edition of NEC shall be provided as the primary means to ground the electrical system. Ground electrical service neutral at service entrance equipment to supplementary grounding electrodes. Ground each separately derived system neutral to nearest effectively grounded building structural steel member or separate grounding electrode. Provide a ground rod box for each ground rod so as to permit ready access to facilitate testing. Provide a ground wire in every conduit carrying a circuit of over 110 volts to ground. Make embedded or buried ground connections, taps and splices with exothermic welds. Coat ground connections. Bond metallic water piping at its entrance into each building. Motor Grounding Installation Extend equipment ground bus via grounding conductor installed in motor feeder raceway. Connect to motor frame. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-11 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. When using nonmetallic flexible tubing install an equipment grounding conductor connected at both ends to noncurrent-carrying grounding bus. Vault and Handhole Grounding Exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of equipment, conductor supports or racks, conduits and other metal appurtenances, including any metal cover and its supporting ring, shall be bonded together and connected to a common ground. The size of the grounding means shall be as prescribed in the National Electric Code. Where the grounding means is exposed, the grounding conductor shall be not smaller than #8 AWG copper. Ground Connections Above grade ground connections shall be exothermic weld, mechanical, or compression-type connectors; or brazing. Below grade ground connections shall be exothermic weld. Install all ground connections is strict accordance with connector manufacturer’s recommendations and methods. Testing Following completion of the grounding electrode system, if installed, measure ground resistance at each ground rod using the three rod method. Submit results to engineer prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Perform testing per NETA Standard ATS paragraph 7.13. Testing methods shall conform to NETA Standard ATS using the three electrode method for large systems. Conduct tests only after a period of not less than 48 hours of dry weather. Furnish to the Engineer a test report with recorded data of each ground rod location. See Division 16.95.4 16.20 UTILITY SERVICE 16.21 Electrical Service Part 1 – General Description of Work Work consists of installation of a new 100 amp, 480-volt, 3 phase underground service and service entrance equipment. Scheduling Work with the Utility Company The Contractor shall be fully and completely responsible for all scheduling and coordination with the utility company. The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule power outages, power service for operation and construction, and power service as may be required prior to Certification of Occupancy. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-12 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. The Contractor shall make all necessary applications for service with the utility, and shall notify the Owner in writing of any obligations that the Owner must fulfill for service to be started, installed, or modified. Contractor/Utility Interface Responsibilities The electrical utility providing service to these facilities is Puget Sound Energy. During design, contact was made with Customer Service Representative, Marcus Bayley, who can be contacted by telephoning 253-259-4494. The division of responsibilities stated below has been determined by coordination with the serving utility. The Contractor shall comply with all utility company standards and requirements. All utility charges for and related to the final permanent service to the facility will be paid by the Owner, directly to the utility company and shall not be included in the Contractors bid price. Contractor shall notify the Engineer/Owner of any changes to the responsibilities between the electrical utility and the Contractor as outlined in these specifications prior to submitting a bid. Any change(s) in responsibilities not brought to the attention of the Engineer prior to bidding will not be cause for additional payment. The Contractor shall notify the Owner (in writing) of any obligations or forms that the Owner is responsible to provide for service. The Contractor shall: Install new raceway and conductors for secondary service from the existing pad-mount transformer location to the proposed service entrance panel including trenching, backfill and restoration. Terminate service conductors at the service entrance. Install utility meter enclosure, raceway, and conductors for utility revenue metering as shown on the Plans. Provide excavation, backfill, and restoration required for installment of the electrical handholes and vaults. The Contractor shall meet all the standard requirements for working in the right-of-way which includes a utility representative on site during work within the right-of-way. The Contractor shall be responsible for paying all cost for the representative to be on site. The Utility Company will: Terminate conductors on the secondary side of the transformer. Install a utility revenue meter in the proposed main revenue metering enclosure installed by the Contractor. Project Conditions Before submitting a bid, the Contractor shall become familiar with all the electrical service requirements that may affect the execution of their work. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-13 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Standards and Codes Work involving service installation shall be done in accordance with the service utilities standards and the National Electric Code. Service equipment shall be listed and labeled by UL as “suitable for use as service equipment”. Part 2 - Products 16.21.2 Electrical Utility Meter Enclosure Manufacturers Meter enclosure shall be a Circle AW or equal and as required to meet the requirement of the serving utility. Installation shall be in vandal proof NEMA 3R enclosure with a lockable hinged door. Meter shall include a metal vandal screen that can be purchased from serving utility. Materials Contractor shall coordinate with Puget Sound Energy on the type of metering required and shall provide all labor and material necessary to meet Puget Sound Energy requirements. 16.21.4 Circuit Breaker Service Disconnect Switch Design The switch shall be heavy duty type, shall be quick-make, quick break, and shall be horsepower rated. The switch shall have blades as required to open all ungrounded conductors. The disconnect shall have a minimum available fault current withstand rating of 18,000 amperes unless noted otherwise on the plans. Service equipment shall meet the requirements of the serving utility and shall be suitable for use as service equipment. Service entrance disconnect shall be furnished with a UL service entrance label. Manufacturers A. Materials, equipment and accessories specified in this section for the service disconnect switch shall be products of: 1. Eaton 2. General Electric 3. Schneider Electric 4. Siemens 5. Or approved equal Materials The switch shall be pad-lockable in both the OFF or ON position. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-14 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. The enclosure shall be NEMA 4X Stainless Steel rated unless noted otherwise on the plans. The enclosure shall have interlocking cover to prevent opening door when switch is closed. The interlock shall include a defeating scheme. The enclosure shall be padlockable. Circuit breakers shall be molded case thermal-magnetic type and meet molded case circuit breaker specifications covered in Division 16.55.16 16.21.6 Manual Transfer Switch Part 1 - General Design Switch shall be heavy duty safety switch, double throw type, non-fused manually operated, NEMA 1 enclosure, 600 volt, 3 phase, 100 ampere rated. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Materials, equipment and accessories specified in this section for the manual transfer switch shall be products of: 1. Eaton 2. General Electric 3. Schneider Electric 4. Siemens 5. Or approved equal Part 3 - Execution Ground Electrode System The grounded conductor and ground bus shall be connected to the grounding electrode system, via the grounding electrode conductor as indicated on system one-line diagram. The system shall be as indicated in Article 250-66 of the National Electrical Code. See Division 16.15 for additional grounding requirements and specifications. Underground Secondary Service Install in accordance with Plans and Division 16.10. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-15 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 16.30 BASIC PANEL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES 16.31 Operating and Indicating Devices Part 1 - General Operating and indicating devices minimum rating shall be NEMA 13. Operator devices mounted in outdoor panels, corrosive areas or where exposed to moisture shall be NEMA 4X. Part 2 – Products 16.31.1 Digital Power Meter Manufacturers The digital power meter shall be an Allen-Bradley, Powermonitor 5000, or equal. Minimum Features A digital 3-phase power monitor with remote capabilities and associated sensors shall be provided as indicated on the plans. The digital power meter shall be capable of measuring at a minimum the following parameters: 1. Voltage (line-neutral) 2. Voltage (line-line) 3. Voltage unbalance 4. Current 5. Current unbalance 6. Neutral amps 7. Real power 8. Reverse and single phase detection 9. Reactive power 10. Apparent power 11. Power factor 12. Frequency 13. Auxiliary voltage Power meter shall have an RJ-45 Ethernet port for communicating with the facility control system. Power meter shall communicate with the control system via EtherNet/IP communications protocol. EtherNet/IP communication protocol shall be native to the powermonitor without having to use a protocol converter. Powermonitors that require a Modbus TCP/IP to EtherNet/IP protocol converter to achieve EtherNet/IP communications if EtherNet/IP is not native to the power meter will not be accepted. An City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-16 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. industrial Ethernet switch and 24 VDC power supply shall be installed in the MCC power meter section for connecting the power meter display and control system communications network to the power meter. 16.31.2 Run Time Meters Manufacturers HECON GO series or equal. Manufactured Units Hour meter (elapsed time meters) shall be 2 inch x 1 inch nominal size, rectangular case type for flush panel mounting. The meter face shall be of the style that most closely resembles the panel indicating instruments if provided and shall have black trim with white or aluminized face. The meters shall have a 6-digit non-resettable register with the last digit indicating tenths of an hour. 16.31.3 Start Count Meters Manufacturers HECON GO series, Redington Model 3400-2010 or equal. Manufactured Units Start counters shall be 2 inch x 1 inch nominal size, rectangular case type for flush panel mounting. The meter face shall be of the style that most closely resembles the panel indicating instruments if provided and shall have black trim with white or aluminized face. The meters shall have a 6-digit resettable register. 16.31.4 Indicating Lights Manufacturers Heavy-Duty, Watertight, and Corrosion-Resistant Type: Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, Type E34; Square D Co., Type SK; Allen Bradley, Type 800H; General Electric Co., Type CR 104P. Manufactured Units Indicating lights shall be NEMA type 4/4X/13, corrosion resistant, water-tight, oil-tight, full voltage, push-to-test, high visibility 28 chips LED type. Pilot lights shall be rated for the proper operating voltage. Appropriate lens caps shall be provided as shown on plans. Size of indicating lights shall be 30mm. 16.31.5 Selector Switch Manufacturers Heavy-Duty, Watertight, and Corrosion-Resistant Type: Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, Type E34; Square D Co., Type SK; Allen Bradley, Type 800H; General Electric Co., Type CR 104P. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-17 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Manufactured Units Selector switches shall be NEMA type 4/4X/13, corrosion-resistant/watertight/oil-tight, type selector switches with contacts rated for 10 amperes continuous at proper operating voltage. Operators shall be black knob type. Units shall have the number of positions and contact arrangements and spring return function (if any) as shown on Plans. Units shall be single-hole mounting, accommodating panel thicknesses from 1/16-inch minimums to 1/4-inch maximum. Size of selector switch shall be 30mm. 16.31.6 Pushbuttons Manufacturers Heavy-Duty, Watertight, and Corrosion-Resistant Type: Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, Type E34; Square D Co., Type SK; Allen Bradley, Type 800H; General Electric Co., Type CR 104P. Manufactured Units Pushbuttons shall be NEMA type 4/4X/13, corrosion-resistant/watertight/oil-tight, type push buttons with momentary contacts rated for 10-ampere continuous at proper operating voltage. Button color shall be as specified in control panels and shall have a full guard. Pushbutton contact arrangements shall be as shown on Plans. Size of pushbuttons shall be 30mm. Special Functions Pushbutton for “emergency help” applications shall have maintained contacts and red mushroom head operators. 16.32 Panel Relays Part 1 – General General Relays shall be provided as necessary to perform switching functions required of control panels and other control circuits as shown on the Plans and described in the technical specifications. Appropriate relay type and associated contacts shall be selected based on the application from the control wiring diagrams or the functional description. Where timing relays and control relays require additional contacts, provide auxiliary control relays properly sized for the application. All contacts and relays shall be NEMA rated and UL recognized. The electrical life expectancy for the relay shall be over 500,000 operations at 120V AC, 10 amp; (over 200,000 operations at 120V AC, 10 amp for SPDT, 3PDT, and 4PDT). The mechanical life expectancy for the relay shall be over 50,000,000 operations. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-18 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 2 – Products 16.32.1 Control Relays Manufacturers Square D Class 8501, Type K or R; Allen Bradley 700 Type HA or HB; IDEC RH Series; or equal. Manufactured Units Relays for general purpose use shall be DPDT or 3PDT, 10 amp contacts with the appropriate coil voltage for the application. Relays shall be plug-in type with matching socket. All relays shall have LED indicators to signal when the coil is energized. Relay coils shall be rated for continuous duty. 16.32.3 Time Delay Relays Manufacturers Allen Bradley 700 Type HR; IDEC GE1, RTE or GT3 Series; or equal Manufactured Units Time delay relays shall be multi-function, multi-range with plug-in base, pin style terminations timing and timed out LED indicators, and calibrated scales. Relays shall have minimum 0.5 seconds to 60 minutes, 8 selectable timing ranges, 5 amp contacts. Select coil voltage for the application. Units shall be sealed to prevent entry of contamination in the form of dust, dirt or moisture. Appropriate relay shall be selected based on application from the control wiring diagrams. Minimum accuracy (plus or minus) shall be as follows: 1. Repeat accuracy – ½ percent. 2. Timing change over full voltage range – ½ percent change over full temperature range. 3. Scale tolerance – 5-percent. 16.32.5 Phase Fail Relay (PFR) General Motor Control Centers (MCC) and Motor Control Panels shall be provided with phase fail relays wired as indicated on the Plans for shutdown of three-phase motors and/or remote indication of incorrect voltage conditions. Manufacturers Units shall be Square D 8501 or Allen Bradley 700-N or equal. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-19 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Manufactured Units A UL listed 3-phase power fail relay shall interrupt the control power in the event of phase loss, phase reversal, undervoltage and phase unbalance. It shall have primary fuse protection. Contacts shall be rated for 15A resistive at 120 VAC. The 3-phase power fail relay shall automatically reset when proper power is re-applied. Phase Fail Relays shall be Square D Class 8430 type MPD or equal. Installation Provide an interposing relay to provide a N.O. contact for each motor control circuit to serve as a shutdown contact, one (1) spare N.O. contact, and one (1) spare N.C. contact. Control relays for use with phase fail relays shall be heavy duty, industrial type with field convertible contacts. Unit shall be able to operate up to eight (8) contacts per relay. Part 3 – Execution Installation Provide adjustable time relays on all alarm and shut down circuits to prevent nuisance tripping of other alarm points. Time delay relays for these functions may not be shown on the plans; however, provide as required on all circuits. Provide additional form C contacts over and above the number indicated on the Plans for all relays provided. 120 VAC relays shall not be interchangeable with other voltages to prevent a hazardous interchange of relay voltages. Provide DIN mounted or panel mounted type depending on application. 16.35 Control Panel Accessories 16.35.1 Terminal Blocks Part 2 – Products Manufactured Units Terminal blocks shall be one-piece, molded, plastic blocks with screw-type terminals and barriers rated for 600 volts. Terminals shall be double-sided and supplied with removable covers to prevent accidental contact with live circuits. Terminals shall have permanent, legible identification, clearly visible with the protection cover removed. Part 3 – Execution Installation All wires between panel-mounted equipment and other equipment shall be terminated at terminal blocks. Switches shall be terminated at the terminal blocks with crimp -type, pre- insulated, ring-tongue lugs. Lugs shall be of the appropriate size for their terminal block screws and for the number and size of the wires terminated. All wires shall be labeled with the circuit number and common function. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-20 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 16.36.1 Surge Protection Device (SPD) Part 2 – Products General The SPD shall be compatible with the electrical system voltage, current, system configuration and intended applications. Manufacturers The SPD shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer as the Motor Control Center. Manufactured Units Protect the electrical service with a SPD device as shown on the Plans. The SPD shall be mounted in the pump station motor control center and connected with the shortest conductors possible. The SPD shall meet the following: 1. Provide surge current withstand up to 160 kA per phase. 2. Short circuit current rating of 200 kAIC. 3. A ten-year free replacement warranty. 4. Enhanced UL 1283 Transient Tracking Filter. 5. Status indicator lights for each phase and one service LED. 16.40 LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT 16.41.1 Motor Control Center Part 1 - General Description of Work The control system integrator shall furnish and the contractor shall install the motor control center including all related equipment as shown on the Plans and specified herein. Related Sections Signage Division 10.14.8 Basic Panel Equipment and Devices 16.30 Standard Motor Starter Division 16.41.2 Variable Frequency Drive 16.45 References The equipment shall be constructed to meet or exceed the requirements within NEMA ICS3- 322 and UL845 for motor control centers. Each MCC section shall bear the UL label. The MCC section containing the main circuit breaker shall bear a UL service entrance label. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-21 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Coordination The supplier of the motor control center shall equip the assembly with all appurtenances and accessories (including but not limited to control relays, control contacts, control wiring and terminal strips) as required for interface with the mechanical equipment and motor to provide a totally integrated and operable system. Design Requirements This equipment shall consist of a line-up of standard design, free-standing sheet metal sections, assembled and pre-wired for motor control and power distribution as shown on the Plans. This equipment shall be designed as to permit future additions of vertical sections and interchanging of units by users. Include provisions for supervisory control equipment as specified elsewhere. Each unit shall be completely prewired with all control wiring numbered and terminated on terminal strips. No terminal strips are required for the load wiring. Auxiliary components such as HOA selector switches, indicating lights and other indicating and/or recording devices shall be mounted on the compartment door or cover. All control power leads into and out of each unit shall pass through a ganged knife blade control power disconnect switch. The control power disconnect shall be identified as such. The equipment enclosure shall be NEMA Type 1A with gasketing unless noted otherwise on the Plans. Gasketing shall be closed cell neoprene material. The MCC shall be NEMA Class II, Type B construction. The MCC shall be rated as shown on the Plans with a minimum available fault current withstand rating of 42,000 amperes without a neutral conductor in the MCC. Provisions for terminating a neutral wire at the MCC shall be provided. Submittals Provide submittals for all components. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers During design, Allen-Bradley MCC equipment was used for sizing. The MCC shall not exceed the dimensions shown on the plans. MCC manufacturer shall be one of the following manufacturers: 1. Allen Bradley Centerline 2100 2. Schneider Electric Model 6 Motor Control Center 3. Eaton Freedom Series Motor Control Center Finishes Surfaces shall be painted according to the manufacturer’s standard color scheme. All unpainted parts shall be plated for resistance to corrosion. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-22 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Components Communications 1. All power monitoring equipment and motor operating equipment including overload units, VFD’s shall communicate with the telemetry system via an EtherNet/IP networking system. All Ethernet/IP connected devices shall have an add-on profile available for integration into SCADA software. Vertical Sections 1. Each vertical section shall be approximately 90 inches high and 20 inches deep. Vertical sections shall have internal base mounting angles at the bottom and external lifting angles at the top running continuously within each shipping block. 2. To minimize the chance of fault propagation to adjacent sections, each vertical section shall have side sheets extending the full height and depth of the section. Incoming Line Compartments 1. Incoming line/lug compartment shall be bottom entry unless noted otherwise on the Plans. The size and quantity of incoming cables shall be as shown on the Plans. Bus 1. The main horizontal bus shall be as indicated on the Plans. Horizontal bus bars shall be located at the top of the MCC. All power bussing shall be braced to withstand a fault current of 42,000 RMS symmetrical amperes unless otherwise noted on the Plans. 2. Bus supports shall be fabricated from high strength, glass-filled polyester resin. 3. The horizontal bus shall be tin plated copper with a conductivity rating of 100 percent AICS. The horizontal bus bars shall be fully sized to carry 100 percent of the rated current the entire length of the MCC. The entire horizontal bus assembly shall be located behind the top horizontal wireway. Horizontal bus bars located behind usable unit space are not acceptable. 4. The horizontal bus shall be isolated from the top horizontal wireway by a clear, flexible, polycarbonate barrier allowing visual inspection of the horizontal bus without removing any hardware. 5. The vertical bussing shall be rated 300 amperes respectively. Vertical bus bars shall be fabricated of tin plated solid copper bars with a conductivity rating of 100 percent AICS. The vertical bus barrier support shall be designed as to effectively enclose each vertical bus bar. Provisions shall be made to close off unused unit stab openings in the vertical bus barrier with removable covers. 6. All bus ratings are to be based on a maximum temperature rise of 50 degrees Celsius over a 40 degree Celsius ambient temperature. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-23 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Unit Disconnect Operator Mechanism 1. A door-mounted operator mechanism shall be provided for operating all feeder breakers provided with the MCC. The operator shall extend through an opening in the unit door and shall clearly indicate whether the disconnect is ‘on’, ‘off” or ‘tripped’. 2. With the disconnect in the ‘ON’ position, a mechanical interlock shall prevent opening of the unit door. This interlock shall be provided with a defeater so that authorized personnel may gain access to the compartment without interrupting service. 3. The operator mechanism design shall allow padlocking the disconnect in the ‘OFF’ position with up to four padlocks. Wireways 1. Horizontal wireways of standard sections, both top and bottom, shall be not less than 6 inches high. To prevent damage to cable insulation, the wireway opening between sections shall have rounded corners and the edges shall be rolled back. 2. A full height, vertical wireway and hinged door shall be provided in each standard vertical section. A permanent vertical wireway wall shall separate the units from the vertical wireway, and remain intact even when the units are removed. Operator Interface Devices And Control Relays 1. This section covers all components required in a motor control center that require operator interface devices and control relays. Nameplates shall be provided for each control component. The nameplate shall be phenolic, black background with white lettering. 2. See Division 16.30 Basic Equipment and Devices. Units 1. After insertion, each plug-in unit shall be held in place by a latch that is located at the front of the unit. 2. Plug-in stabs shall be mounted in a polyester molding at the rear of the unit. Wiring from the unit disconnecting means to the plug-in stables shall be routed into this molding such that the wiring is not being exposed at the rear of the unit. 3. Size 1 through Size 5 non-reversing starters shall be plug-in units. 4. The unit door shall be fastened to the stationary structure (not the unit itself), so that the door can be closed when the unit has been removed. The door shall be hinged on the left-hand side so that it opens away from the vertical wireway. 5. The operator handle of all units shall be interlocked with the MCC frame, so that a unit insert cannot be withdrawn or inserted when the operator is in the ON position. Position of operating handle shall indicate ON, OFF, or tripped condition. Handle shall provide provisions for padlocking in the OFF position. Interlock provision shall City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-24 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. prevent unauthorized opening or closing of the door with the disconnect in the ON position. 6. Circuit breaker type starter units shall have a short circuit rating greater than the available fault current listed in the General Section, and shall be motor circuit protectors (MCP) with magnetic only trip. Feeder breakers shall be molded case breakers with thermal magnetic trip and have a short circuit rating greater than the available fault current listed in the General Section. 7. An auxiliary contact shall be provided on the disconnect for purposes of isolating the external source of control voltage. One control circuit fuse shall be provided. 8. Control circuit transformer (CCT) shall be mounted within the unit. CCT shall be individually protected, and provide the following excess capacity, in addition to that required by the starter coil: Size 1 – extra 40VA, Size 2 – extra 40VA, Size 3 – extra 125VA, Size 4 – extra 180VA, Size 5 – extra 200 VA. Power Monitoring 1. See Division 16.31.1. Surge Protection Device (SPD) 1. See Division 16.36.1 Transformers 1. Lighting transformers to be installed in this equipment shall be Class H insulation type for 80 degree C rise. Provide transformer with ratings as shown on the Plans. Transformer shall be compatible with the environment in which it will be located and provided with properly-rated taps. Load Center Panels 1. Load Center panels shall be provided with a rating at the proper voltage and current for intended use with tin-plated copper bus bars. Panels shall have 100 percent neutral, with equipment ground bar unless noted otherwise. Panels shall be deadfront. 2. The panelboard shall have the number of available single pole breaker spaces as shown on the Plans or a minimum of 18 spaces when a number is not indicated on the Plans. Where noted in the panel schedule on the Plans provide spare breakers, complete for future connection of wiring circuits. Where “Space Only” is indicated for breakers, provide all bussing and breaker mounting hardware. 3. The following interrupting capacity shall be considered minimum for the circuit breakers provided. Other ratings shall be as specified on the Plans. a) 240V and 208Y/120V Panelboards - 22,000 AIC symmetrical b) 480Y/277V Panelboards - 42,000 AIC symmetrical City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-25 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 4. Provide GFI breakers when indicated on the Plans. Integration With Telemetry 1. The Manufacturer of the MCC shall determine all requirements for transmitting data to the telemetry system and shall include in the panel all required devices and equipment for interfacing contact closures. Wiring Diagrams 1. Wiring diagrams shall be provided at a centralized location in the MCC. The diagram shall show the exact devices inside the unit and shall not be a generic diagram. The supplier of the equipment shall have the capability to provide revisions to electronic files of wiring diagrams at a local office. The wiring diagrams must be provided with product submittals in order to be considered for review. Supplier shall provide a disk copy of all plans in AutoCAD format. 2. Before the MCC can be shipped to the jobsite, the final wiring diagrams must be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval. The final wiring diagrams must reflect all changes made at the factory or integrator’s shop before the diagrams will be approved. Wire And Control Relay Identification 1. All control wire in MCC shall be marked with shrink type wire markers on both ends of wire. All control relays provided in the MCC panel shall be permanently labeled. The label for the control relays and wiring shall match the wiring diagrams. 2. All wire and control relay identification must be correct before the MCC can be shipped to the jobsite. Part 3 - Execution Testing This equipment shall be tested, and placed into operation by a qualified factory representative trained in start-up and troubleshooting procedures for equipment being installed. All Motor Control Center components shall be factory tested both at the manufacturer’s facility and the Control System Integrator’s shop. Factory testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer. 16.45 Variable Frequency Drive Part 1 - General Related Sections Signage Division 10.14.8 Basic Panel Equipment and Devices 16.30 City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-26 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Motor Control Center 16.41 Division 17 – Automatic Control Design Requirements Drive(s) shall be of the size, capacity and quantity as shown on the Plans. VFD supplier shall confirm motor HP, amperage, service factor and operating requirements with pump supplier. The variable frequency drive (VFD) motor controller shall convert 460 Volt, three-phase, 60 Hertz utility power to adjustable voltage (0 - 460V) and frequency (0 - 60 Hz.) three-phase, AC power for stepless motor speed control with a capability of 10:1 speed range. All general options and modifications shall mount within the standard adjustable frequency controller enclosure. The controller(s) shall be suitable for use with any standard NEMA-B squirrel-cage induction motor(s) having a 1.15 Service factor. At any time in the future, it shall be possible to substitute any standard motor (equivalent horsepower, voltage, and current) in the field. The variable frequency control shall operate satisfactorily when connected to a bus supplying other solid state power conversion equipment which may be causing up to 10% total harmonic voltage distortion and commutation notches up to 36,500 volt microseconds, or when other VFD's are operated from the same bus. Manufacturers shall certify at submittal time that their equipment will function satisfactorily under these circumstances. Individual or simultaneous operation of the VFD's shall not add more than 5% total harmonic voltage distortion to the normal bus, nor more than 10% while operating from standby generator per IEEE 519, 1992. Prior to project completion, the Contractor shall provide verification through both measurement and calculations that the system is compliant with IEEE 519, 1992. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers The VFD shall be an Allen-Bradley Powerflex 753 model VFD with EtherNet/IP communication interface or pre-approved equal. Approved manufacturers and models are as follows: 1. Allen-Bradley – Powerflex 753 2. Schneider Electric – Altivar 61/71 3. Eaton – SVX9000 All drives shall be supplied by one manufacturer. The VFD equipment shall be of the same manufacturer and supplier as the MCC as required for interface with the master control system to provide a totally integrated and operable system. Manufactured Units The variable frequency control shall include transient voltage suppression to allow reliable operation on a typical industrial or commercial power distribution system. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-27 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Basic Description: 1. The controller shall produce an adjustable AC voltage/frequency output. It shall have an output voltage regulator to maintain correct output V/Hz. despite incoming voltage variations. 2. VFD’s shown with line reactors shall be supplied with an input AC line harmonic compensated reactor with minimum 5% impedance unless noted otherwise on the one-line diagram. Line reactor shall be designed to address performance issues of NEMA MG1-20.55 and to provide proper transient protection of the VFD input power devices. Line reactor is to be factory mounted and wired within the VFD enclosure. Line reactors shall be an MTE Line Reactor or equal. 3. The VFD shall be supplied with a harmonic compensated load reactor with minimum 5% impedance unless noted otherwise on the one-line diagram. Load reactor is to be factory mounted and wired within the VFD enclosure. Load reactors shall be an MTE Load Reactor or equal. 4. The controller shall have a continuous output current rating of 100% of motor nameplate current. 5. All Inverter sections shall be of the Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) type and consist of IGBT inverter bridge through entire power range (GTO or BJT devices not acceptable). Space vector modulation shall be utilized. IGBT carrier frequency shall be adjustable for fixed frequency, and have the possibility for random sweep. 6. The VFD shall not induce excessive power losses in the motor. The worst ca se RMS motor line current measured at rated speed, torque and voltage shall not exceed 1.05 times the rated RMS motor current for pure sine wave operation. Basic Features 1. The keypad of each power unit shall include a "POWER ON light, a VFD fault light, a VFD run light, manual stop push-button, manual start push-button, a fault reset push-button, an "AUTOMATIC" push-button and increase/decrease pushbuttons. 2. The VFD shall be software programmable to provide automatic restart after any individual trip condition resulting from either overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, or over temperature. For safety, the drive shall shut down and require manual reset and restart if the automatic reset/restart function is not successful within a maximum of three attempts within a short time period. 3. A speed droop feature shall be included which reduces the speed of the drive on transient overloads. The drive is to return to set speed after transient is removed. If the acceleration or deceleration rates are too rapid for the moment of inertia of the load, the drive is to automatically compensate to prevent drive trip. 4. Automatic restart after drive trip or utility failure. Software selectable if not desired. 5. Speed profile: Individual adjustable settings for start, stop, entry, slope, and minimum and maximum speed points. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-28 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 6. Microprocessor based adjustable frequency drive with sinusoidal PWM current control. 7. A critical speed avoidance circuit will be included for selection of two critical speeds with a rejection band centered on that speed. The drive will ignore any speed signals requiring drive operation within the rejection band. 8. .001 Hz setpoint resolution. 9. Pick up a spinning load. The VFD shall be able to determine the motor speed and resume control of a motor that is spinning in either direction without tripping. 10. A door-mounted membrane keypad with integral 2-line, 24-character LCD display shall be furnished, capable of controlling the VFD and setting drive parameters, and shall include the following features: a) The digital display must present all diagnostic message and parameter values in English engineering units when accessed, without the use of codes. b) The digital keypad shall allow the operator to enter exact numerical settings in English engineering units. A plain English user menu shall be provided in software as a guide to parameter setting, (rather than codes). Drive parameters shall be factory set in EEPROM and resettable in the field through the keypad. Six (6) levels of password security shall be available to protect drive parameters from unauthorized personnel. The EEPROM stored drive variables must be able to be transferred to new boards to reprogram spare boards. c) Normally the digital display shall simultaneously display the following: i. Speed demand in percent ii. Output current in amperes iii. Output frequency iv. Speed difference v. Output current vi. Output power vii. Drive operating Hours viii. Frequency in Hertz or RPM ix. Control Mode: Manual/Automatic x. Total three-phase kW or output volts xi. Service Conditions d) The controller shall be designed and constructed to operate within the following service conditions: i. Elevation to 3300 feet ii. Ambient temperature range: -10°C to 50°C City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-29 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. iii. Atmosphere: Non-Condensing relative humidity to 95% iv. AC Line voltage variation: -5% to +10% v. AC Line frequency variation: ±6 Hertz Protective Features and Circuits A. The controller shall have the following protective features: 1. Protection from single phase fault or 3-phase short circuit on VFD output terminals without damage to any power component. 2. DC link undervoltage protection. 3. DC link overvoltage protection. 4. Heat sink over temperature protection. 5. Inverter overload protection. 6. Inverter overcurrent protection. 7. Ground fault protection 8. Motor pullout protection 9. Ground fault check during start-up. 10. DC link limiter 11. Responsive action to motor winding temperature detectors or thermostatic switches. 12. Isolated operator controls. 13. Input line fuses. 14. Be insensitive to incoming power phase sequence. 15. Have desaturation circuit to drive inverter section transistor base current to zero in event of controller fault. 16. Input line noise suppression with line reactor. Parameter Settings A. The following system configuring settings shall be provided, without exception, field adjustable through the keypad/display unit or via the Ethernet communication port only. 1. Motor Nameplate Data: a) Motor frequency b) Number of poles c) Full load speed d) Motor volts e) Motor full load amps City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-30 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. f) Motor Hp g) Current min h) Current Max 2. VFD Limits: a) Independent accel/decel rates b) No load boost c) Vmin, Vmax, V/Hz d) Full load boost e) Overload trip curve select (Inverse or Constant) f) Min/Max speed (frequency) g) Auto reset for load or voltage trip select h) Slip compensation i) Catch-a spinning-load select j) Overload trip time set 3. VFD Parameters: a) Voltage loop gain b) Voltage loop stability c) Current loop stability 4. Controller Adjustments: a) PID control enable/disable b) Setpoint select c) Proportional band select d) Reset time select e) Rate time select f) Input signal scaling g) Input signal select (4-20mA/0-5 Volts) h) Auto start functions: On/Off, Delay On/Off, Level Select On/Off i) Speed profile: Entry, Exit, Point Select j) Min, Max speed select k) Inverse profile select (allows VFD speed to vary directly or inversely with input signal) City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-31 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Diagnostic Features and Fault Handling 1. The VFD shall include a comprehensive microprocessor based digital diagnostic system which monitors its own control functions and displays faults and operating conditions. Microprocessor systems must be products of the same manufacturer as the VFD (to assure single source responsibility, availability of service and access to spare parts). Drive Options: 1. Provide the following options/modifications to the VFD. All special features shall be factory mounted and wired within the VFD enclosure unless otherwise specified. a) Input circuit breaker, interlocked with the enclosure door, with through-the-door handle to provide positive disconnect of incoming AC power. The circuit breaker shall be rated for 42,000 AIC. b) Door-mounted devices as follows: a. Start counter b. 5-digit elapsed time meter c) Panel Lights d) Run light e) Fail light f) Emergency Stop Light g) System Operation h) With the manual start push-button selected, the VFD shall be controlled by the increase/decrease pushbuttons on the VFD keypad. i) With the automatic push-button selected, the VFD unit shall start when called from the telemetry system and its speed shall be controlled by the connection to the master control system. 16.55 SWITCHES AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16.55.1 Common Work for Switches and Protective Devices Part 1 - General Design Requirements Overcurrent devices shall be NEMA rated. Extra Materials Provide one fuse for each ungrounded conductor and a minimum of one spare fuse per phase of each ampacity and voltage used on the project. Deliver fuses to Owner at the completion of the project. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-32 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 3 – Execution Installation Overcurrent protection devices and safety switches shall be centered 60 inches above the finished floor unless noted otherwise on the Plans. 16.55.13 Fuses Part 1 - General Design Requirements Fuses shall be of the type and amperage indicated on the Plans. The voltage rating shall be appropriate for the application indicated. The fuse types indicated on the Plans imply a certain set of fuse characteristics. No substitutions of fuse types will be allowed without Engineer approval. Part 2 - Products Manufacturers Fuses shall be Bussman, Gould Shawmut, Littlefuse, Reliance, or equal. Materials Fuses in motor circuits which are indicated but not sized, shall be provided with Manufacturer’s recommended size based on the actual motor installed. In-line or integrally- mounted fuse clips shall be provided on all control power or low-voltage transformers. 16.55.16 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Part 1 - General Design Requirements Breakers shall have the interrupting rating and trip rating indicated on the Plans. All breakers shall be calibrated for operation in an ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius. Part 2 - Products Manufactured Units Molded case circuit breakers shall be quick-make and quick-break type with wiping type contacts. Each breaker shall be provided with arc chutes and individual trip mechanisms on each pole consisting of both thermal and magnetic trip elements. Two and three pole breakers shall be common trip. Molded case circuit breakers shall be trip-free. Each breaker shall have trip indication independent of the “ON” or “OFF” positions. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-33 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 16.55.17 Instantaneous Magnetic Trip Breakers Part 1 - General Design Requirements The magnetic trips shall be adjustable and accessible from the front of all these breakers. Part 2 - Products Manufactured Units Breakers in motor circuits which are indicated but not sized, shall be provided with Manufacturer’s recommended size based on the actual motor installed. Where indicated on the Plans and in the combination motor starter/motor control center schedule, furnish instantaneous magnetic trip only circuit breakers for motor short circuit protection. 16.55.18 Disconnect Switches Part 1 - General Design Requirements Furnish and install disconnect switches conforming to NEMA KS 1, type HD, sized for the ampere and voltage as shown on the plans and as required by the National Electrical Code and nameplate requirements of the equipment served. Part 2 - Products Manufactured Units The switches shall be 600 volt type and horsepower rated. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided as indicated on the Plans. Part 3 – Execution Installation Provide additional disconnects if required by Code. 16.60 CONDUCTORS 16.61 Low Voltage Wire and Cable Part 1 - General Design Requirements This section is for power and control conductors for 600 volts or less. All conductors shall be copper. Wire or cable not shown on the Plans or specified, but required, shall be of the type and size required for the application and in conformance with the applicable code. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-34 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 2 - Products Materials Conductors 1. Solid and stranded copper wire shall be 600 volt Type THW, THWN, or THHW, Class B stranding, sizes #14 AWG, #12 AWG, and #10 AWG only. Use of THHN insulation shall not be allowed. Aluminum conductors shall not be allowed. 2. Stranded copper wire shall be 600 volt Type XHHW, Class B stranding, sizes #8 AWG and larger. Aluminum conductors shall not be allowed. Splices 1. For Lighting Systems and Power Outlets: Wire nuts shall be twist-on type insulated connectors utilizing an outer insulating cover and a means for connecting and holding the conductors firmly. 2. All Equipment: Crimp type connectors shall be insulated type, suitable for the size and material of the wires and the number of wires to be spliced and for use with either solid or stranded conductors. 3. Division 16 Equipment and Power Conductors: Bolted pressure connectors shall be suitable for the size and material of the conductors to be spliced. 4. All Equipment: Epoxy splice kits shall include epoxy resin, hardener, mold, and shall be suitable for use in wet and hazardous locations. Terminations 1. Crimp type terminals shall be self-insulating sleeve type, with ring or rectangular type tongue, suitable for the size and material of the wire to be terminated, and for use with either solid or stranded conductors. 2. Terminal lugs shall be split bolt or bolted split sleeve type in which the bolt or set screw does not bear directly on the conductor. 3. Wire Markers shall be plastic sleeve type. Wire numbers shall be permanently imprinted on the markers. Finishes Color Coding: Provide color coding for all circuit conductors. Insulation color shall be white for neutrals and green for grounding conductors. An isolated ground conductor shall be identified with an orange tracer in the green body. Ungrounded conductor colors shall be as follows: 1. 120/208 Volt, 3 Phase: Red, black and blue. 2. 277/480 Volt, 3 Phase: Yellow, brown and orange. 3. 120/240 Volt, 1 Phase: Red and black. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-35 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 3 – Execution Location (Installment) Schedule Provide the following conductors for the following applications 1. Use stranded copper conductors for all power and control circuits unless noted otherwise on plans or below. Size as noted on the plans. 2. Contractor may use solid copper conductors for lighting and receptacle circuits using screw-type terminals. Size as noted on the plans. 3. Size #14 AWG wire or smaller shall not be allowed on power circuits. Installation Conductor Splices 1. Splices: Install all conductors without splices unless necessary for installation, as determined by the Engineer. Splices when permitted shall be completed using an approved splice kit intended for the type o conductor and the application. The splice shall be in accordance with the splice kit manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Underground Splices: All underground outdoor splices when approved by Engineer shall be completed in an accessible pullbox or handhole using an approved watertight epoxy resin splice kit rated for the application up to 600 volts. Splices will not be allowed to be direct buried. Conductor Identification 1. Except for interior lighting and receptacle circuits, identify each wire or cable at each termination and in each pullbox, junction box, handhole, and manhole using numbered and lettered wire markers. All electrically common conductors shall have the same number. Each electrically different conductor shall be uniquely numbered. Identify panelboard circuits using the panelboard identification and circuit number. Identify motor control circuits using the equipment identification number assigned to the control unit by the motor control center manufacturer and the motor control unit terminal number. Identify other circuits as shown in the circuit schedule as favorably by the Engineer. 2. Conductors between terminals of different numbers shall have both terminal numbers shown at each conductor end. The terminal number closest to the end of the wire shall be the same as the terminal number. Testing Insulation Resistance Tests: For all circuits 150 volts to ground or more and for all motors circuits over ½ horsepower, test cables per NETA Paragraph 7.3.1. The insulation resistance shall be 20 megohms or more. Submit results to Engineer for review. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-36 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 16.63 Signal Cable Part 2 - Products Materials Twisted Shielded Pairs (TSP) 1. Cable shall conform to IEEE 383, UL 13, and UL 83 and shall be type PLTC cable suitable for direct burial. Each TSP shall consist of two #16 AWG, 7-strand copper conductors per ASTM B8 with 15 Mils PVC insulation and individual conductor jacket of nylon. Conductors shall be twisted with 2-inch or shorter lay, with 100 percent foil shielding and tinned copper drain wires. The cable shall have an overall PVC jacket with a thickness of 35 mils. The insulation system shall be rated at 90 degrees Celsius and for operation at 600 volts. Cat 5E Ethernet Cable 1. The Ethernet cable shall be shielded 600V UL rated. The use of a 300V rated cable is not acceptable. All Ethernet cable terminating outside of a telemetry panel shall be grounded at the telemetry panel only. 2. Ethernet cables shall be industrial type Ethernet cable and UL listed for installation in the Motor Control Center. Ethernet cables shall be Siemens Fast Connect Industrial Ethernet Cable with metal IE FastConnect RJ45 plug or Allen-Bradley Ethernet Cable with metal In-cabinet RJ45 Connectors, no substitutions. Part 3 - Execution Installation Cable Installation 1. Cables shall be continuous from initiation to termination without splices. 2. Cable shielding shall be grounded at one end of the cable only. Bonding shall be to a single ground point only. Bonding from cable to cable in multiple run installations shall not be permitted. 3. Install instrumentation cables in separate raceway systems with voltages not to exceed 30 volts DC. Conductor Identification 1. Except for interior lighting and receptacle circuits, identify each wire or cable at each termination and in each pullbox, junction box, handhole, and manhole using numbered and lettered wire markers. All electrically common conductors shall have the same number. Each electrically different conductor shall be uniquely numbered. Identify panelboard circuits using the panelboard identification and circuit number. Identify motor control circuits using the equipment identification number assigned to the control unit by the motor control center manufacturer and the motor control unit terminal number. Identify other circuits as shown in the circuit schedule as determined by the Engineer. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-37 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 2. Conductors between terminals of different numbers shall have both terminal numbers shown at each conductor end. The terminal number closest to the end of the wire shall be the same as the terminal number. Testing Insulation Resistance Tests: Perform insulation resistance on all circuits. Make these tests before any equipment has been connected. Test the insulation with a 500 Vdc insulation resistance tester with a scale reading 100 mega ohms. The insulation resistance shall be 20 mega ohms or more. Submit results to Engineer for review. 16.70 RACEWAYS , BOXES AND FITTINGS 16.71 Raceways Part 1 – General Design Requirements Conduit sizes not noted on Plans shall be in accordance with NEC requirements for the quantities and sizes of wire installed therein. Part 2 – Products Components Conduit and Fittings 1. Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS): Rigid conduit shall be steel, hot dipped galvanized inside and out. The GRS must meet USA Standards Institute C80-1 Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL6, and carry a UL label. Use cast threaded hub fittings and junction boxes for all rigid conduit except in locations not permitted by the NEC. 2. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-GRS): PVC coated conduit shall meet the GRS standard above plus have a 40 Mil PVC factory applied PVC coating. 3. Nonmetallic Conduit: Nonmetallic Conduit shall be rigid PVC, Schedule 40 (PVC-40) or 80 (PVC-80). PVC conduit installed above grade shall be Schedule 80 extra heavy wall 90 degree C. UL listed for aboveground use and UV resistant. Conduit shall be gray in color. Fittings shall be of the same material as the raceway and installed with solvent per the Manufacturer’s instructions. Conduit, fittings and solvent shall all be manufactured by the same Manufacturer. 4. Flexible Metal Conduit (Flex-LT): Flexible conduit shall be interlocking single strip, hot dipped galvanized and shall have a polyvinyl chloride jacket extruded over the outside to form a flexible watertight raceway. Flexible conduit shall be American Brass Company Sealtite Type VA, General Electric Type UA or equal. 5. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): EMT shall be UL 797 and ANSI C80.3; steel tubing, hot dipped galvanized. EMT fittings shall be ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel, rain tight, insulated throat, compression type. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-38 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Conduit & Cable Supports 1. Conduit Supports: Hot dipped galvanized framing channel shall be used to support groups of conduit. Individual conduit supports shall be one-hole galvanized malleable iron pipe straps used with galvanized clamp backs and nesting backs where required. Conduit support for PVC or PVC coated rigid steel shall be one hole PVC or epoxy coated clamps or PVC conduit wall hangers. 2. Ceiling Hangers: Ceiling hangers shall be adjustable galvanized carbon steel rod hangers. Unless otherwise specified, hanger rods shall be ½-inch all-thread rod and shall meet ASTM A193. Hanger rods in corrosive areas and those exposed to weather or moisture shall be stainless steel. Conduit Sealants 1. Moisture Barrier Types: Sealant shall be a non-toxic, non-shrink, non-hardening, putty type hand applied material providing an effective barrier under submerged conditions. 2. Fire Retardant Types: Fire stop material shall be a reusable, non-toxic, asbestos-free, expanding, putty type material with a 3-hour rating in accordance with UL 1479. Provide products indicated by the manufacturer to be suitable for the type and size of penetration. Part 3 - Installation Raceway Applications Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS) conduit shall be used in all locations unless noted otherwise below or on the Plans. ABOVE GRADE CONDUITS (non-corrosive areas) shall be: 1. GRS for power and control wiring. 2. GRS for instrumentation and telecommunications wiring. 3. GRS for motor leads from VFDs. 4. EMT for above-grade lighting circuits. ABOVE GRADE CONDUITS (wet or corrosive areas, NFPA 70 hazardous areas) shall be: 1. PVC-GRS for power and control wiring. 2. PVC-GRS for instrumentation and telecommunications wiring. 3. PVC-GRS for motor leads from VFD’s. CONCEALED ABOVE GRADE CONDUITS shall be: 1. GRS for all wire and cable types in wood stud frame walls. 2. PVC-40 for power and control wiring in concrete block or brick walls. 3. PVC-40 for instrumentation and telecommunications wiring in CMU or brick walls. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-39 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 4. GRS for motor leads from VFD’s in CMU or brick walls. BELOW GRADE CONDUITS IN DIRECT EARTH (not under slabs-on-grade) shall be: 1. PVC-40 for power and control wiring. a) Sweeps and risers for transition of PVC from below grade to above grade shall be PVC-GRS. 2. PVC-GRS for instrumentation and telecommunications wiring. 3. PVC-GRS for motor leads from VFD’s. UNDER SLABS-ON-GRADE CONDUIT shall be: 1. PVC-40 for power and control wiring a) Sweeps and risers for transition of PVC from below grade to above grade shall be PVC-GRS. 2. PVC-GRS for instrumentation and telecommunications wiring. 3. PVC-GRS for motor leads from VFD’s. CONCRETE-ENCASED CONDUITS shall be: 1. PVC-40 for power and control wiring a) Sweeps and risers for transition of PVC from below grade to above grade shall be PVC-GRS. 2. PVC-40 for instrumentation and telecommunications wiring. a) Sweeps and risers for transition of PVC from concrete-encasement to above grade shall be PVC-GRS. 3. PVC-GRS for motor leads from VFD’s. ALL CONNECTIONS TO VIBRATING EQUIPMENT OR MOTORS shall be: 1. Liquidtight flexible metallic conduit for indoor, non-corrosive areas and all motor leads from VFD’s. 2. Connection to equipment outdoors or in corrosive areas shall be with non-metallic liquidtight flexible conduit (except for motor leads from VFD’s shall be flexible metallic.) Installation All conduits shall be concealed in the floor, walls, ceiling slab or beneath the floor slab. Surface mounted conduit will not be accepted unless noted otherwise on the construction plans. Size of Raceways: 1. Raceway sizes as shown on the Plans, if not shown on the Plan s, then size in accordance with NFPA 70. All raceways shall contain a separate grounding conductor. Spare conduits shall contain one 3/16-inch diameter nylon pull rope. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-40 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Conduit routing is shown diagrammatic on the Plans. Contractor is responsible for routing the conduits in a neat manner, parallel and perpendicular to walls and ceilings. Location of conduit ends are shown approximately. Contractor is responsible for ending conduits in location that will not conflict with electrical equipment. Route condu it ends to facilitate ease of equipment maintenance. Conduits extending from the floor to a device shall be located as close as possible to avoid creating a hazard. Conduit shall not be routed on exterior of structures except as specifically indicated on the plans. Where water cannot drain to openings, provide drain fittings in the low spots of the conduit run. Securely fasten raceways at intervals and locations required by NEC, or the type of raceway employed. Provide all required openings in walls, floors and ceilings for conduit penetration. 1. Do not install one (1) inch and larger raceways in or through structural members (beams, slabs, etc.) unless approved by Engineer. 2. New Construction: Avoid cutting openings, where possible, by setting sleeves or frames in masonry and concrete, and by requesting openings in advance. 3. Existing Construction: Core drill openings in masonry and concrete. Avoid structural members and rebar. Conduit Encasement or Embedment in the earth shall be separated from the earth by at least 3-inches of concrete unless otherwise shown on the Plans. Plastic conduit spacers shall be located five feet on centers. The spacers shall be secured to the conduits by wire ties. The conduits shall be watertight. Analog signal conduits shall be separated from power or control conduits. The separation shall be a minimum of 12-inches for metallic conduits and 24-inches for nonmetallic conduits. Install explosion-proof seal-offs in hazardous areas shown on the Plans and as required by the N.E.C. Plastic raceway joints shall be solvent cemented in accordance with recommendations of raceway manufacturer. All conduit openings not encased in a panel shall be sealed with duct seal. Wireway Installation: 1. Straight sections and fittings shall be solidly bolted together to be mechanically rigid and electrically continuous. Dead ends shall be closed. Unused conduit openings shall be plugged. 2. Wireways shall be supported every 5 feet minimum. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-41 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 16.72 BOXES AND ENCLOSURES 16.72.2 Outlet and Junction Boxes Part 1 – General Design Requirements In corrosive areas, all junction boxes shall be NEMA 4X. Outlet boxes and switch boxes shall be designed for mounting flush wiring devices. Outlet boxes shall not be less than 4-inch square and 1 ½-inch deep. Ceiling boxes shall withstand a vertical force of 200 pounds for five minutes. Wall boxes shall withstand a vertical downward force of 50 pounds for five minutes. Part 2 – Products Materials Use cast boxes with threaded hubs for all rigid and intermediate conduits. Steel boxes may be used with rigid and intermediate conduits where cast boxes are not allowed by the N.E.C. All boxes shall be of proper size to accommodate devices, connectors, and number of wires present in the box. Boxes shall be readily accessible. Cast box bodies and cover shall be cast or malleable iron with a minimum wall thickness of ⅛-inch at every point, and not less than ¼-inch at tapped holes for rigid conduit. Bosses are not acceptable. Mounting lugs shall be provided at the back or bottom corners of the body. Covers shall be secured to the box body with No. 6 or larger brass or bronze flathead screws. Boxes shall be provided with neoprene cover gaskets. Outlet boxes shall be of the FS types. Boxes shall conform to FS W-C-586C and UL 514. Sheet metal boxes shall conform to UL 50, with a hot-dipped galvanized finish conforming to ASTM A123. Boxes and box extension rings shall be provided with knockouts. Boxes shall be formed in one piece from carbon-steel sheets. Non-metallic boxes shall be hot-compressed fiberglass, one-piece, molded with reinforcing of polyester material, with a minimum wall thickness of ⅛-inch. Finishes Where only cast aluminum is available for certain types of fixture boxes, an epoxy finish shall be provided. 16.72.3 Watertight Enclosures Part 2 – Products Manufacturers The watertight enclosure shall be equal to Hoffman. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-42 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Materials Watertight enclosures for vault electrical outlets shall be molded from fiberglass reinforced polyester material. A hinged cover shall be gasketed and opened with quick release latches. The conduit penetrations shall be sealed watertight. Part 3 – Execution Installation An epoxy plug shall be installed in the conduit to prevent the migration of water into the conduit. The enclosure shall be NEMA rated and installed per all applicable codes. 16.75 WIRING DEVICES 16.75.1 Common Work for Wiring Devices Part 3 - Execution Installation Wiring Devices 1. Position of Outlets: All outlets shall be centered with regard to building lines, furring and trim, symmetrically arranged in the room or outside the structure. Device outlets shall be set plumb and shall extend flush to the finished surface of the wall, ceiling or floor without projecting beyond the same. 2. Unless otherwise noted, wall mounted outlet devices shall generally be 24-inches above the floor, 18 inches in architecturally treated areas, above process piping near process valve boards. Switches shall be 48 inches above the finished floor unless otherwise noted. Installation of Wall Plates 1. Interior Dry Locations: Install plates so that all four edges are in continuous contact with the finished wall surfaces. Plaster filled will not be permitted. Do not use oversize plates or sectional plates. 2. Exterior and/or Wet Locations: Install plates with gaskets on wiring devices in such a manner as to provide a rain tight weatherproof installation. For receptacle devices, these plates shall maintain the weatherproof rating with an attachment plug inserted and be rated extra-duty. Cover type shall match box type. Testing After installation of receptacles, circuits shall be energized and each receptacle tested for proper ground continuity, reversed polarity, and/or open neutral condition. GFI receptacles shall be tested with the circuits energized. Devices shall be tested with a portable GFI receptacle tester capable of circulating 7.5 milliamperes of current, when plugged in, between the “hot” line and “ground” to produce tripping of the receptacle. Resetting and tripping shall be checked at least twice at each GFI receptacle. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-43 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Submit results of all field testing to the Engineer for review. 16.75.2 Receptacles Part 1 – General Design Requirements Receptacles shall be heavy duty, high abuse, grounding type conforming to NEMA configurations, NEMA WD1 and UL 514 Standards. Part 2 – Products Materials Single and Duplex Receptacles: 1. Indoor Clean Areas: Receptacles shall be duplex, 20 amp, NEMA 5-20R, and shall accept NEMA 5-15P and 5-15P plug caps. Receptacles shall be Hubbel 5362, General Electric 4108-2, or equal. Color shall be brown in industrial areas and ivory or white in office and laboratory areas. 2. Outdoor, Process or Corrosive Areas: Receptacles shall be duplex, 20 amp, NEMA 5-20R, and shall accept NEMA 5-15P and 5-20P plug caps. Receptacle and plug caps shall be corrosion resistant, marine duty with yellow polycarbonate weatherproof lift covers. Receptacles shall be Hubbell 53CM62/53CM21 or equal. GFI Receptacles: 1. Device shall be rated 20 amp, 2-pole, 3-wire, 120 volt, conforming to NEMA WD1.10 configuration. Device shall have a test and reset push buttons. GFI device shall be Hubbell 5362 or equal. Surface Multiple Outlet Assemblies: 1. Units shall have outlets on center-to-center spacing as shown on the Plans. Assembly shall conform to Article 353 of the N.E.C. 16.75.3 Line Voltage Switches Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Sierra Electric, Monumental Grade, Catalog No. 5721; Daniel Woodhead 1900 series; or equal. Materials Line Voltage Types: Switches shall be rated 20 amps at 120 or 277 volts AC only. Units shall be flush mounted, self-grounding, quiet operating toggle devices. Handle color shall be brown in industrial areas and white or ivory in office or laboratory areas. Units shall conform to Federal Specifications W-S-896 D and E, UL 20, and NEMA WD1 standards. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-44 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 16.75.4 HOA (Hand-Off-Auto) Lighting Switches Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Bryant No. 4925 or equal. Materials HOA Switch (Lighting): Switches shall be rated 20 amps at 120 volts AC, three-position toggle, positive action with “center-off” maintained contact, double pole. 16.75.5 Plates Part 1 – General Design Requirements Plates shall be of the style and color to match the wiring devices, and of the required number of gangs. Plates shall conform to NEMA WD1, UL 514, and ANSI C73. In noncorrosive indoor areas, device plates shall be made of sheet steel, zinc electroplated with chrome finish. Device plates in corrosive or outdoor areas shall be corrosion-resistant/marine-duty type with weather protective double doors. Device plates for explosion-proof equipment shall be factory provided with the equipment. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers As manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or equal. Components Device plates shall be provided with engraved laminated phenolic nameplates with 1/8-inch white characters on black background. Nameplates for switches shall identify panel and circuit number and area served. Nameplates for receptacles shall identify circuit and voltage if other than 120 volts, single phase. 16.85 LIGHTING 16.85.1 Common Work for Lighting Fixtures Part 1 - General Design Requirements Fixtures shall be a standard, cataloged item general description as called for on the Plans. All fixtures shall be UL approved and so labeled. Provide suitable supports and mountings. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-45 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers As shown on Plans. Equals will be accepted. 16.85.2 Lamps Part 1 - General Design Requirements Fixtures shall be LED. Warranty Lamps that fail within 90 days after acceptance by the Owner shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Approved manufacturers are Westinghouse, Sylvania, and G.E. 16.85.3 Fixtures Part 1 - General Design Requirements Fixtures shall be of the types, wattages and voltages shown on the Plans, comply with UL 57, and shall be UL classified and labeled for intended use. Fixtures for use in hazardous locations shall be UL listed per UL Standard 844. 16.90 POWER GENERATION 16.91 Engine Generator 16.91.2 Diesel Engine Generator Set Part 1 - General Definitions Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over a range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter. Standby Rating: Power output rating equal to the power the generator set delivers continuously under normally varying load factors for the duration of the power outage. Local Availability: A manufacturer’s authorized dealer with a service department that is within 100 miles of the project installation site. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-46 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Design Criteria Provide one self-contained, exterior rated standby engine generator system to automatically operate the load criteria listed in the rating section of these specifications during prime power failure conditions. Insulate, enclose, or guard exposed parts subject to high-operating temperatures or energized electrically, and moving parts which are of such nature or so located as to be a hazard to operating personnel. Safety devices and safety measures shall not impair the proper functioning of any part of the set. Parts which require adjustment or servicing (not repair or replacement) to permit operation of the sets shall be arranged to provide optimum ease of servicing. Adjustment, repair, and replacement of parts, assemblies, and accessories shall be possible with minimum drainage and minimum disturbance of set. Maintenance shall be possible by use of common tools. Design, construct, and install complete engine generator set to be free from objectionable vibration in any mode. Freedom from torsional vibration shall be demonstrated during factory test performed on the set provided, and proof of torsional acceptability shall be provided by the manufacturer. Performance Criteria The engine generator set provided shall not have a standby rating less than 40 kW at 0.8 PF with fan. Rating of diesel engine-generator set shall be based on operation of set when equipped with all necessary operating accessories such as radiator, fan, air cleaners, lubricating oil pump, fuel injection pump, jacket water pump, and governor charging generator. Generator shall meet the following requirements: 1. Standby rating – 40 Kilowatt 2. Voltage – 277/480 volts 3. Phase – 3 phase 4. Frequency – 60 Hertz 5. Insulation – Class H 6. Wiring – 12 lead reconnectable 7. Ambient Temperature – 115 degrees Fahrenheit (max), -20 degrees Fahrenheit (min) Allowable temperature rise in the generator shall not exceed 257 degrees Fahrenheit over 115 degrees Fahrenheit ambient temperature. The alternator shall produce a clean AC voltage waveform, with not more than 5 percent total harmonic distortion at full linear load, when measured from line to neutral, and with not more than three percent in any single harmonic, and no 3rd order harmonics or their multiples. Telephone influence factor shall be less than 40. The generator set shall accept a single step load of 100 percent of rated load at 0.8 power factor and recover to rated speed and voltage as required in NFPA 110. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-47 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Voltage regulation shall be plus or minus 0.5 percent for any constant load between no load and rated load. Random voltage variation with any steady load from no load to full load shall not exceed plus or minus 0.5 percent. Frequency regulation shall be isochronous from steady state no load to steady state rated load. Random frequency variation with any steady load from no load to full load shall not exceed plus or minus 0.5 percent. The generator set shall be certified by the engine manufacturer to be suitable for use at the installed location and rating, and shall meet all applicable exhaust emission requirements at the time of commissioning. The generator specified for this project was sized using Cummins PowerSuite software. Due to variations by generator manufacturers and the software used by manufacturers for determining the size of a generator, it is the Contractor’s and generator supplier’s responsibility to verify the size of the generator to ensure that the generator will perform as specified. All sizing reports shall be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Owner prior to equipment order. If the supplier/Contractor prepared sizing report requires a larger generator than was is specified, the larger generator shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Refer to the table below for load step information and the Plans for electrical load details. Load Step Load Description 1 10 kVA Single Phase Lighting Transformer 2 11 HP Submersible Pump 3 11 HP Submersible Pump Submittals The following information shall be furnished: 1. Evaluation of engine generator size based in starting requirements. Provide calculations verifying transient voltage dip will not exceed 15 percent with sudden application of rated load. 2. Plan of diesel generator set offered showing interconnecting wiring diagrams; all wiring in unit and on Plans shall be number coded. 3. Literature describing the diesel engine generator set. 4. Literature describing auxiliary equipment to be furnished. The following shall be furnished in tabular form: 1. Engine make 2. Number of cylinders 3. Bore (in inches) City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-48 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 4. Stroke (in inches) 5. Generator make and type 6. Generator electrical rating, kVA 7. Cubic inch displacement Fuel oil consumption 8. Exciter and type 9. Horsepower at rated load 10. Enclosure size, exterior dimensions Provide factory test results. See Source Quality Control below. 1. Provide field test results. See Site Test requirements under Part 3 of this specification. 2. Provide five (5) copies of manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment. Information shall be complete and in suitable form for ready use by Owner's operations staff. Catalog cuts and information regarding spare parts shall be included. Operating manuals and instructions shall be assembled in hardback binders. Project Conditions Interruption of existing electrical service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by the Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than two working days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner’s written permission. 3. Engine generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability: 4. Minimum Temperature: 0 degrees Fahrenheit 5. Maximum Temperature: 115 degrees Fahrenheit. 6. Relative Hudmidity: 0-95 percent 7. Altitude: Sea level to 1200 feet Coordination Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generator set and fuel tanks. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, roof penetrations and wall penetrations for exhaust systems. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-49 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Quality Assurance The engine generator set shall be supplied by a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the production of engine-generators sets and associated controls for a minimum of twenty years, thereby identifying one source of supply and responsibility. The packaged engine generator set and auxiliary components shall be provided through one source from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer shall provide factory-trained service and parts support through a factory authorized dealer/supplier that is regularly doing business in the area of installation. The factory authorized dealer/supplier shall maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency services within 50 miles of the project site. Warranty The electrical standby system, including the engine generator set, exerciser and transfer switch, shall be guaranteed for two years or 1,500 hours operation from date of start-up service and acceptance, whichever occurs first. Extra Materials A set of specialty tools necessary for routine maintenance of the equipment shall be furnished. The following spare parts shall be furnished: 3 - Sets of fuel filter elements and gaskets 3 - Lubricating oil filter elements and gaskets 3 - Air cleaner filter elements 2 - Complete sets of V-belts including fan and alternator drive belts Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Subject to compliance with these specifications, the following manufacturers are approved for bidding: 1. Cummins 2. Caterpillar 3. MTU Ensure engine generator and accessories are provided by the above named manufacturer and its authorized dealer. Ensure local availability of service and replacement parts. Manufactured Units The general design of the engine generator furnished shall be manufacturer's standard, except where it differs from the requirements of these specifications. Engine shall, as a minimum, be in accordance with requirements of this specification and may be manufacturer's standard commercial product with added features needed to comply with these requirements. Additional or better features which are not specifically prohibited by this specification, but City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-50 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. which are a part of the manufacturer's standard commercial products, shall be included in the engine generator being furnished. A standard commercial product is a product which has been or will be sold on the commercial market through advertisements or manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures, and represents the latest production model. Components Generator 1. Generator shall be a revolving field, 4-pole brushless connection to the alternator. Generator rotor shall have been dynamically balanced and aligned with the engine, and connected to the engine using a flexible disc coupling. Voltage Regulator 1. Engine-generator unit shall have a steady state voltage regulator. Generator set shall be capable of recovering to a minimum of 90 percent of rated no load voltage following the application of the specified kVA load at near zero power factor applied to the generator set. Maximum voltage dip on application of this load, considering both alternator performance and engine speed changes shall not exceed 15 percent. 2. Supply generator with a voltage level control to provide an adjustable output voltage of plus/minus five percent. Mount voltage control device on engine control panel. Electric Starting System 1. Engine shall be equipped with electric starting system of sufficient capacity to crank engine at a speed which will allow for full diesel start of the engine. Arrange starting pinion to disengage automatically when diesel engine starts. 2. Furnish storage batteries with rack having sufficient capacity for cranking engine for at least 30 seconds at firing speed in ambient temperatures specified and with capacity for starting diesel engine a minimum of three times in immediate succession. Batteries and rack shall be easily removable without disassembly of engine components. Cooling System 1. Cooling system shall consist of frame-mounted radiator with engine water pump fan assembly and fan guard. Radiator capacity shall be adequate using engine fan cooling to maintain safe operation at 115 degree Fahrenheit ambient temperature. 2. Provide an engine thermostat to regulate engine water temperature as recommended by the manufacturer. Included in the cooling loop shall be a high-coolant temperature device to shut down engine through the engine control panel when engine temperature is excessive. 3. Provide cooling system water heaters suitable for operation on a 120 -volt, 60 Hz current to maintain engine water temperature at 120 degrees F at an ambient temperature of 50 degrees F. Heaters shall be Kim jacket heaters or approved equal. Provide thermostatically controlled heaters. The coolant heater shall be UL 499 listed City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-51 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. and labeled. Fill engine cooling system with a mixture of water, anti-freeze, and corrosion inhibitor to provide freezing protection at an ambient temperature of -20 degrees F. Air Cleaners 1. Engine shall be provided with one or more dry-type air cleaners of sufficient capacity to effectively protect working parts of the engine from dust, grit, and ash. Governor System 1. An electronic governor system shall provide automatic isochronous frequency regulation. The control system shall actively control the fuel rate and excitation as appropriate to the state of the generator set. Fuel rate shall be regulated as a function of starting, accelerating to start disconnect speed, accelerating to rated speed. The governing system shall include a programmable warm up at idle and cool down at idle function. Lubrication 1. Engine shall have gear-type lubricating oil pump for supplying oil under pressure to main bearings, crank pin bearings, pistons, piston pins, timing gears, camshaft bearings, and valve rocker mechanism. 2. Provide effective lubricating oil filter, and locate and connect it so that lubricating oil is continuously filtered and cleaned. Filters shall be accessible, easily removed and cleaned, and equipped with spring-loaded bypass valve as insurance against stoppage of lubricating oil circulation in event the filters become clogged. 3. Engine shall have suitable lubricating oil cooler, either air-cooled or water-cooled, and provisions for draining oil by piping or other means to the outside of engine housing. Frame 1. Engine shall be factory-assembled and aligned on a heavy-duty steel base with integral fuel tank. Batteries shall be housed in an acid-resistant box, which shall be mounted on engine frame and adjacent to the engine. Location of battery housing shall not interfere with maintenance and inspection of the engine. Construct the frame to insure proper alignment of all rotating parts and to prevent vibration build-up. Base shall permit skidding in any direction during installation and shall be provided with suitable holes for foundation bolts and vibration isolators. Provide vibration isolators, spring/pad type, quantity as recommended by the generator set manufacturer. Isolators shall include seismic restraints if required by the site location. 2. Set shall have provision for conveniently attaching hoisting slings as well as for fork lift pick-up. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-52 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Sound-Attenuated Enclosure 1. The engine/generator system shall be provided with an exterior rated, sound- attenuated enclosure to reduce noise emissions, protect the system from excessive dirt, dust, ash, weather and vandalism. All access doors shall be lockable. The housing shall be factory installed and allow easy access to the engine-generator and the control panel. The control panel shall be mounted on the end of the enclosure, opposite the radiator end. Enclosure doors shall not be wider than 36-inch each to allow for convenient access to the enclosure interior. 2. The enclosure shall provide a sound level at full load no greater than 75 dB(A). This sound level shall represent the average measurement taken at eight points located equidistant, 23 feet from the center of the engine generator at full load. 3. The enclosure shall comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code for all wiring materials and component spacing. The total assembly of generator set, enclosure, and sub-base fuel tank (when used) shall be designed to be lifted into place using spreader bars. Housing shall provide ample airflow for generator set operation at rated load in an ambient temperature of 100º F. The housing shall have hinged access doors as required to maintain easy access for all operating and service functions. Enclosure roof shall be cambered to prevent rainwater accumulation. Openings shall be screened to limit access of rodents into the enclosure. All electrical power and control interconnections shall be made within the perimeter of the enclosure. 4. Enclosure shall be constructed of minimum 12 gauge steel for framework and 14 gauge steel for panels. All hardware and hinges shall be stainless steel. 5. A factory-mounted exhaust silencer shall be installed inside the enclosure. The exhaust shall exit the enclosure through a rain collar and terminate with a rain cap. Exhaust connections to the generator set shall be through seamless flexible connections. 6. The enclosure shall include the following maintenance provisions: a) Flexible coolant and lubricating oil drain lines, that extend to the exterior of the enclosure, with internal drain valves b) External radiator fill provision. Exhaust System 1. Muffler shall be rated as necessary to comply with City of Renton noise emission standards, and shall be furnished with the engine. The muffler and engine combination shall be sized to meet the power supply rating. 2. All exhaust piping and fittings shall be stainless steel. Provide stainless steel supports as necessary for a secure rigid pipe system. 3. Exhaust system for the diesel engine shall conform to codes set forth in the National Fire Protection Association, Volume 4, Section 211, and shall comply with recommendations for exhaust systems as specified by the diesel engine manufacturer. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-53 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 4. Pitch horizontal runs of exhaust pipe downward, away from engine. Completely support the exhaust system so no weight or stress is applied to engine exhaust manifold or turbocharger. 5. Provide a condensate drain for the muffler through a petcock. 6. The entire exhaust system shall be wrapped in an insulation blanket rated to withstand a minimum temperature of 1200°F. The exterior blanket shall be protected with a 0.016 aluminum jacket with weatherproof end cap. Fuel System 1. Engine shall operate on automotive diesel fuel complying with the limiting requirements of ASTM grade low sulfur Diesel Fuel #2 and the requirements of the engine manufacturer. Diesel engines requiring a premium fuel will not be considered. 2. Injection pumps and injection valves shall be a type not requiring adjustment in service and shall be capable of quick replacement by ordinary mechanics without special diesel experience. 3. Fuel injection pumps shall be positive action, constant-stroke pumps, actuated by cam- driven gears from engine camshaft. 4. Fuel lines between injection pumps and valves shall be of heavy seamless tubing and, to eliminate irregularity of fuel injection shall be the same length for all cylinders. 5. Equip fuel system with racor-type, water-removing fuel filter, having replaceable elements which may be easily removed from their housing for replacing, without breaking any fuel line connections or disturbing fuel pumps or any other part of engine. Locate all fuel filters in one accessible housing, ahead of injection pumps so that fuel will have been thoroughly filtered before it reaches the pump. No screen or filter requiring cleaning or replacement will be used in the injection pump or injection valve assemblies. 6. Provide integral fuel tank mounted between the structural steel skids for engine fuel supply. The tank, as installed shall meet all local and regional requirements for above ground tanks. The tank shall be sized to allow 24 hours of continuous full load operation using the following criteria: a) 12 hours of exercising supply before low fuel alarm b) 12 hours of operation after a low-low fuel alarm 7. Tank shall be especially constructed for mounting in this location by the engine generator manufacturer. Provide tank with the following: a) Fuel level gauge b) Drain c) Fill pipe and vent City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-54 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. d) Leak detection provisions, wired to the generator set control for local and remote alarm indication. e) High and low level float switches to indicate fuel level. Wire switches to generator control for local and remote indication of fuel level. f) Integral lifting provisions. g) Slope tanks to the engine pick-up tube 5 percent minimum. Provide a panel mounted fuel level gauge. 8. Provide fuel feed line valve at engine. Provide fuel return line that is not valved. Mount return line in the top of the tank to prevent fuel siphon into the engine. All fuel lines shall have flexible sections between tank and engine to absorb vibration. 9. Install fuel storage system according to diesel engine manufacturer's recommendations and conform to the National Fire Protection Code and Uniform Building Code. Fuel 1. Fill fuel tank completely full at completion of construction. Control Panel and Alarm System 1. The Engine control panel shall be integrally mounted to the engine generator assembly on the generator at the opposite end of the radiator. It shall be enclosed in a NEMA 4 enclosure. 2. The control shall have automatic remote start capability from a panel-mounted three- position (Stop, Run and Remote) switch. 3. The generator set shall be provided with alarm and status indicating lamps to indicate non-automatic generator status, and existing alarm and shutdown conditions. The lamps shall be high-intensity LED type. 4. Alarm panel shall have a reset push button for acknowledging alarm conditions and latching indicating lights for each alarm point to display to operation personnel the reason for engine shutdown. Label lights as shown below. 5. The generator set control shall indicate the existence of the following alarm and shutdown conditions on a digital display panel: a. Alarms i. Low oil pressure warning ii. Oil pressure sender failure iii. Low coolant temperature iv. High coolant temperature warning v. Low coolant level vi. Engine temperature sender failure City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-55 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. vii. Low DC voltage viii. High DC voltage ix. Weak battery x. Low fuel warning xi. Overload xii. Battery Charger Malfunction xiii. Overcurrent xiv. Under Frequency b. Shutdown Alarms i. Low oil pressure ii. Low-Low Fuel iii. High coolant temperature iv. Fail to crank v. Overcrank vi. Overspeed vii. High AC voltage viii. Low AC voltage ix. Under frequency x. Over current xi. Short circuit xii. Emergency stop c. Engine control panel shall include the following: i. Oil pressure gauge (psi) ii. Emergency Stop Pushbutton iii. Coolant temperature gauge (F) iv. Operating hour meter (hrs) v. Hand-off Auto Selector switch (H-O-A) vi. AC Frequency meter (hertz) vii. AC Volt meter (0-600v) City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-56 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. viii. AC Current Meter (Amps) ix. Load Meter (kW) d. Alarm Contacts to Telemetry Provide auxiliary dry contacts for activating remote alarms to the telemetry panel on activation of any of the following conditions: i. Generator Warning ii. Generator Failure iii. Generator Running iv. Generator Low Fuel Generator failure alarm shall be activated when any shutdown conditions exists. Generator trouble shall be activated when any alarm conditions exists. Switch Gear 1. Provide generator switch gear with exciter circuit breaker with manual reset and a line circuit breaker with manual reset. Circuit breaker shall be set mounted and wired, UL listed, molded case thermal-magnetic type, rated as shown on plans. Mount breakers in engine control panel. Field circuit breakers shall not be acceptable for generator overcurrent protection. Generator instrumentation shall include a panel-type ammeter with phase selector switch, a panel-type voltmeter with selector switch, and frequency meter mounted on engine control panel. Battery Charger Provide a battery charger inside the generator enclosure. The battery charger shall be current- limited, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. The unit shall comply with UL508 and include the following features: 1. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 5A is initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit then automatically switches to a lower float-charging mode and continues operating is that mode until battery is discharged again. 2. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjusts floats and equalizes voltages for variations in ambient temperature to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures. 3. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintains output voltage constant regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent. 4. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door of battery charger. Meters shall indicate charging rates. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-57 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 5. Safety Features: Include sensing of abnormally low battery voltages arranged to close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Also include sensing of high battery voltage and loss of AC input or dc output of battery charger. Either of these conditions closes contacts that provide a battery charger malfunction indication at the monitoring panel. Finishes Prime and paint diesel engine set and accessories in conformity with manufacturer's standard practice. Color of diesel engine set enclosure shall be of manufacturer’s standard color, unless noted otherwise on Plans. Manufacturer shall ship with the unit a quart of touch-up paint for each of the finishes. All sheet metal exposed to the exterior (generator enclosure) shall be primed for corrosion protection and finish painted with the manufacturer’s standard color using a two-step electrocoating paint process, or equal meeting the performance requirements specified below. All surfaces of all metal parts shall be primed and painted. The painting process shall result in a coating that meets the following requirements: 1. Primer thickness, 0.5-2.0 mils. Top coat thickness, 0.8-1.2 mils. 2. Gloss, per ASTM D523-89, 80-percent plus or minus 5-percent. Gloss retention after one year shall exceed 50 percent. 3. Crosshatch adhesion, per ASTM D3359-93, 4B-5B. 4. Impact resistance, per ASTM D2794-93, 120-160 inch-pounds. 5. Salt Spray, per ASTM B117-90, 1000+ hours. 6. Humidity, per ASTM D2247-92, 1000+ hours. 7. Water Soak, per ASTM D2247-92, 1000+ hours. Painting of hoses, clamps, wiring harnesses, and other non-metallic service parts shall not be acceptable. Fasteners used shall be corrosion resistant, and designed to minimize marring of the painted surface when removed for normal installation or service work. Source Quality Control Engine generator unit shall be tested at manufacturer's plant at full load before shipment. Test shall consist of a steady load run of at least 4 hours duration at 100 percent full rated load. Complete test reports shall be made which show the engine fuel consumption, kilowatt output, voltage, frequency, amperage, engine temperature, lube oil pressure, and load transfer results. Five (5) copies of the certified test reports shall be supplied to Owner prior to shipment. Owner and/or their representative shall be given opportunity to witness the tests by the manufacturer. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-58 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 3 - Execution Installation Install engine in conformity with the plans and manufacturer's instructions and under manufacturer's direct supervision. Install ancillary circuits for battery charger, engine heaters, etc. in conformance with the plans. Site Test Contractor shall provide sufficient fuel for engine generator on-site testing; following completion of testing Contractor shall fill engine generator fuel tank full prior to project acceptance. Supplier shall be responsible for calibration, startup, and initial performance to meet the specifications herein. Supplier shall provide a trained, qualified representative to check installation and connection, perform field tests as indicated, and certify to Owner its performance does meet the specifications. Upon completion of unit installation, carry out running tests. Operate engine for a period of not less than 2 hours at full rated load. A load bank shall be provided by the Contractor for performing the 2 hour load test. Following load testing, five loss-of-power tests must be performed to verify proper operation of ATS and generator with power being supplied to motor(s) and pump(s). Engine generator shall be tested to verify that the transient voltage dip will not exceed 15 percent of rated voltage when the largest single step of the rated load is applied. Test shall demonstrate the ability of the engine generator to carry the specified loads. Upon completion of the tests, final adjustments shall be made to equipment by a qualified representative of the engine manufacturer. Fuel and oil filters shall be replaced, belt drive tensions checked, and the proper operation of all equipment demonstrated to Owner's representative. Owner's representative shall be instructed in the maintenance and operation of equipment. Five (5) copies of these test results shall be provided to Owner and included with the operation and instruction manual. 16.92 Transfer Switches 16.92.2 Automatic Transfer Switch Part 1 - General Design Criteria The transfer switch shall be shall be NEMA 1 rated and equipped with three poles for normal and emergency service of 480 Volts, 60 Hertz, 3-phase. The transfer switch shall be mechanically and electrically held and rated to 480 volts for all classes of load and continuous inductive duty. The transfer switch shall conform to UL 1008 provisions for Withstand Current Ratings and Closing Ratings. The transfer switch shall be rated at a minimum Withstand Rating of 42,000 Amps. The switch shall be capable of enduring 6000 cycles of complete opening and closing at rated current and voltage at a rate of 6 cycles per minute without failure. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-59 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. The switch shall be double throw inherently interlocked mechanically and electrically to prevent supplying the load from both sources simultaneously. The operating current shall be obtained from the source to which the load is to be transferred. The transfer mechanism shall be of the double break design with solid silver cadmium surface contacts and individual heat resistant arc chambers. Arc barriers and magnetic blowout coils will also be acceptable if single break contacts are used. The contacts shall be capable of carrying 20 times the continuous rating for interrupting current. All contacts, coils, etc. shall be readily accessible for replacement from front of panel without major disassembly of associated parts. Part 2 – Products Manufactured Units The automatic transfer switch shall be supplied by the Manufacturer of Engine generator system. Components The transfer switch shall include the following accessories: A. Undervoltage Sensor: Adjustable solid state low voltage sensing relays (pick up 85 to 98 percent of normal voltage set at 98 percent; drop out 75 to 100 percent set of 90 percent of pickup setting). Provide for each phase on both utility and backup power sources. B. Time Delay Start and Stop on Drop Out: Solid state adjustable time delay on start (0 to 15 seconds). Set start delay for 15 seconds. Timer will send start signal to gen set CP, where louver timer will allow 15 second delay for louvers to open prior to starting gen set. C. Time Delay Stop: Solid state adjustable time delay (0 to 10 minutes) to allow generator cooldown after normal power is restored and retransfer occurs. Set at five minutes. D. Time Delay Transfer and Retransfer: Solid state time delay relay adjustable 2 to 120 seconds for transfer to emergency and 0 to 30 minutes for retransfer to normal. Set at five minutes for retransfer to normal. Set at three seconds for transfer to emergency. E. With or Without Load Selector Switch: Switch to select exercise with or without station load. F. Normal-Test Switch: Switch such that in the “Normal” mode the transfer switch will operate automatically and in the “Test” mode the generator will start for test purposes. This switch shall work in conjunction with the “With” or “Without” load switch. G. Exerciser Clock: Provide solid state exerciser clock to set the day, time, and duration of generator set exercise/test period. Provide with/without load selector switch for the exercise period. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-60 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. H. Programmed Transition: The load transfer control shall be capable of remaining in the neutral position for an adjustable time of 0.5 to 60 seconds when transferring from on-line power source to the other to allow residual voltages to decay before application of the source. Set at 60 seconds. I. Position lights for normal and emergency potions indication and for normal and emergency power available. J. Switch position indication limit switches for normal and generator positions. K. Provide dry contacts wired to terminal strip for 1) ATS Power Offline. L. Power Meters: Provide an AC Voltmeter, an Ammeter, and a Frequency meter; 2.5 inch, analog, 2-percent accuracy. Provide a phase selector switch to read L-L voltage and current of both power sources. M. Operator Interface Display: Provide operator interface display that allows operators to adjust all settings and see all values. N. Control Board: Provide current generation hardware and firmware for the control board. Provide manual override switch to bypass the control system and transfer load from source to source when control is disabled. 16.95 TESTING 16.95.1 Common Work for Testing Part 1 - General Submittals Test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to final acceptance in accordance with Division 1.33 of these specifications. Scheduling and Coordination The Contractor shall inform the Engineer in advance of testing in accordance with the requirements listed in Division 1 of these specifications. Prior to scheduling the testing, the Contractor shall have satisfied himself that the project area is properly cleaned up; all patching and painting deemed necessary properly completed; and all systems, equipment and controls are functioning as intended. Part 2 - Products Source Quality Control Submit reports of factory tests and adjustments performed by equipment manufacturers to the Engineer prior to field testing and adjustment of equipment. These reports shall identify the equipment and show dates, results of test, measured values and final adjustment settings. Provide factory tests and adjustments for equipment where factory tests are specified in the equipment specifications. The Engineer may inspect the fabricated equipment at the factory City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-61 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. before shipment to job site. Provide the Engineer with sufficient prior notice so that an inspection can be arranged at the factory. Part 3 – Execution Site Testing Test all circuits for continuity, freedom from g round, and proper operation during progress of the work. Insulation Resistance, Continuity, and Rotation: Perform routine insulation resistance, continuity and rotation tests for all distribution and utilization equipment prior and in addition to tests performed by the testing laboratory specified herein. Electric Motors: Perform voltage, current and resistance tests on all motors ½ horsepower and larger installed this project. Insulation resistance readings shall be taken with a 500 volt megger for 30 seconds with the circuit conductors connected to the motor. Verify that an overload condition does not exist. Conduct special test as required for service and/or system ground. Field Quality Control General: Conduct final test in the presence of Owner and/or their authorized representative. Contractor shall provide all testing instrumentation and labor required to demonstrate satisfactory operation of systems, equipment and controls. Operational Tests: Operational test all circuits to demonstrate that the circuits and equipment have been properly installed, adjusted and are ready for full-time service. Demonstrate the proper functioning of circuits in all modes of operation, and including alarm conditions, and demonstrate satisfactory interfacing with the data acquisition and alarm systems. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-62 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 16.95.3 Conductor Test Report Conductor Test Report Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: OWNER: Contractor Co. Name: Tested by: Phone Number: Test Date: Race- way V C Operating Load Voltage Insulation Resistance - OHMS Label (1) (2) (3) VAB VCB VCA VAN VBN VCN A-B B-C C-A A-G B-G C-G A B C D E F G 1. Refer to raceway and wire schedule and one-line diagram for description of feeder identified by label shown on this report 2. Visual Inspection – Check when completed 3. Continuity Test – Check when completed City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 16 - Electrical FM Improvements 16-63 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\16 Electrical.docx 7/2/2018 11:42 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 16.95.4 Ground Electrode Resistance Test Report Ground Electrode Resistance Test Report PROJECT: OWNER: Contractor Co. Name: Tested by: Phone Number: Test Date: Test Meter Type: Test Distance-D: Soil Conditions: Measured Resistance: DESCRIPTION OF TEST PROCEDURE, CONDITIONS, RESULTS: 17-1 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 17 Automatic Control 17.00 GENERAL This division covers all work necessary for furnishing, installing, adjusting, testing, documenting, and starting-up the Instrumentation and Control (I&C) and Telemetry System. Programmable logic controller (PLC) shall provide local, automatic control of on-site pumps. Sections in these specifications titled “Common Work for . . .” shall apply to all following related subsections whether directly referenced or not. These specifications are an integral part of the contract documents for the I&C and Telemetry portion of this contract. The written descriptions of system performance contained herein are given to assist the Contractor in interpreting the contract plans but are not intended to be all-inclusive. The Contractor shall be aware that all automatic control systems do not require the same components and accessories for complete system operation. Therefore, these specifications do not include all accessories and appurtenances required for a complete system. The Contractor shall, however, provide all accessories and appurtenances to result in a completely operational system as required to meet the functional requirements of these documents. Where specific equipment specifications are given, they are used to represent the level of quality required by these documents. 17.05 Common Work for Automatic Control Part 1 – General Summary The work under this division covers construction specifically described in these specifications. Project Plans will be provided for this project. All work incidental and necessary to the completion of the project described herein shall be completed under the bid item listed in the bid proposal, and no other compensation will be allowed. The work generally consists of the following: • Detailed system layout and design for the particular equipment bid in accordance with these functional specifications. • Furnishing of I&C equipment including delivery, storage, software, programming, installation, testing, startup, and documentation. • Providing operator maintenance manuals for all equipment and devices provided by this Contract. • Providing system training to the operators of the proposed equipment. Related Sections • Division 16 Electrical References The project Plans are based on Instrument Society of America (ISA) standards numbers S5.1, S5.2, S5.3, and S5.4. The Contractor is encouraged to be familiar with these standards since City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-2 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. the project plans do not contain wiring or ladder diagrams, but are based on the functional requirements of the ISA format. All equipment and materials shall conform to the latest revised editions of applicable standards published by the following organizations: • American National Standards Institute (ANSI). • Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). • National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). • Underwriters' Laboratories (U/L). • Instrument Society of America (ISA) All equipment and materials, and the design, construction, installation, and application thereof shall comply with all applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code (NEC), the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), and any applicable Federal, State, and local ordinances, rules and regulations. All materials and equipment specified herein shall be within the scope of Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) examination services, be approved by the UL for the purpose for which they are used and shall bear the UL label. All control panels shall bear a label by UL or by an approved testing authority for the completed assembled panel. Definitions Contractor: The Contractor, as distinct from the Control System Integrator, shall install panels and other materials furnished by the Control System Integrator and provide all materials and work necessary and thereby, satisfy all requirements that are within the scope of this section. Control System Integrator: A single company subcontracted by the Contractor, who shall design and furnish the system, provide the instrument panels; provide the PLCs, RTU, Motor Control Center, startup, training services, and other instrument components. Control System Programmer: A single firm, pre-selected and contracted by the owner, who shall furnish all programming, startup and training services related to programming. The Control System Programmer shall be RH2 Engineering, Inc. Submittals All submittals shall be complete, neat, orderly and indexed. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Submittal information shall be provided to the Owner for the following items: • Telemetry Panel • Motor Control Center • Junction Box Enclosure • Liquid Level Switch • Level Transmitter City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-3 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. • Level Floats • Wall Mounted Heating Thermostat • Wall Mounted Cooling Thermostat • Photoelectric Smoke Detector • Intrusion Alarm Switch • Keyed Switch Box • Operation and Maintenance Manuals per Division 1.79.2 and Division 17.94 • Full size nameplate wording schedules, in lettering style proposed for use. In addition to the requirements of Division 1.33, the Contractor shall develop and submit the following information provided by the Control System Integrator. Hardware Submittals Before any components are fabricated, and/or integrated into assemblies, or shipped to the site, the Contractor shall prepare a complete hardware submittal. The Engineer shall require five (5) sets, including fully detailed shop drawing, catalog cuts, wiring connections, and such other descriptive matter and documentation as may be required to fully describe the equipment and to demonstrate its conformity to these Specifications. The decision of the Engineer, upon the acceptability of any submittal, shall be final. Catalog information shall be submitted for all components and equipment, regardless of whether or not it is of the same manufacture as that listed in the Specifications. System Plan Submittals Following approval of the hardware submittal, the Control System Integrator shall prepare complete system interconnect wiring diagrams and panel layout plans for approval. Plans The Control System Integrator shall develop all shop drawings required for design, fabrication, assembly and installation of the control system. Shop drawings shall include all plans required in manufacture of specialized components and for assembly and installation of them. Plans shall be prepared utilizing AutoCAD and printed on 11-inch by 17-inch media. Plans shall have borders and title blocks identifying the project system, revisions to the plans, and type of plan. Each revision of a plan shall carry a date and brief description of the revisions. Diagrams shall carry a date and brief description of the revisions. Diagrams shall carry a uniform and coordinated set of wire numbers and terminal block numbers in compliance with panel work wiring. Additionally, one set of electronic dwg files shall be provided to the Owner. Elementary Diagrams The Contractor shall provide elementary diagrams for all discrete loops. Loop diagrams shall be prepared in compliance with ISA S5.4 and shall be provided for all analog loops. Elementary diagrams and loop diagrams shall show circuits and devices of a system. These City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-4 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. diagrams shall be arranged to emphasize device elements and their functions as an aid to understanding the operation of a system and maintaining or troubleshooting that system. Elementary and loop diagrams shall also show wire numbers, wire color codes, signal polarities, and terminal block numbers. Panel Fabrication and Arrangements Plans The Contractor shall provide arrangement plans of all panel front- and internal-mounted instruments, switches, devices, and equipment indicated. All panel mounting details shall be shown. Outer dimensions of all panels shall be included on the plan. Deviations from approved arrangements require approval prior to installation. Arrangement plans shall be drawn to scale using standard Architectural or Engineering scales. Site Conditions Specified instrumentation and control equipment shall be modified, if necessary, to make it suitable for operation in the ambient conditions specified in Division 16. Warranty In addition to any other warranties required by the specifications, the entire PLC system will be warranted against defects in materials, workmanship, and software functions for a period of one (1) calendar year following the successful completion of the Functional Acceptance Test (FAT). The Contractor or designated service organization will be available on 24-hour notice to correct any system problems without charge to the Owner during the warranty period. In addition, the Contractor will provide four 2-day site visits during the warranty period to perform inspection and calibration of the equipment or other work at the request of the Owner. Extra Materials The Contractor shall supply sufficient spare parts, components, and assemblies to replace any defective or malfunctioning control component provided in this system. Control components are considered any device or combination of devices without which normal automatic control as outlined in this specification cannot be accomplished, and includes: 1. Two (2) spares of each part, component, or assembly, if more than ten (10) of those components are normally in use in the system. 2. One (1) box of each fuse type provided on this project. If ten (10) or more of a fuse type is provided for the project, then two (2) spare boxes shall be provided. 3. One (1) spare circuit breaker of each rating type provided on this project. 4. One (1) spare relay of each rating type provided on this project. Spare part components shall be packaged for at ease of field installation by non-trained personnel, so that no soldering or special skills are required for installation. All spare parts shall be delivered in a hinged plastic box that is purposefully made for this contract. The box shall have a parts list permanently attached to the inside lid which lists all parts and refers to them by numbered code visible on the outside of the package. Fragile components shall be adequately protected with cut foam. Electronic components shall be wrapped in ultra-violet City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-5 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. inhibiting file. The exterior of the box shall be labeled “Telemetry Spare Parts – Wastewater Department.” Provide the box with lifting handles. Part 2 – Products Components These Specifications list major instruments required to provide the process instrumentation system. All instrument functions specified on this list shall be provided by the Control System Integrator. Any additional instruments required to complete the instrument loops because of certain characteristics of the particular equipment selected by the Control System Integrator shall be provided. Such additional instruments shall be provided and included in the original contract price even though not specified in the instrument index or on the Plans. The following systems utilize automatic control: • Pump controls • Engine generator set controls Accessories Provide all accessories required to furnish a complete control system that meets the requirements of the Plans and Specifications. Source Quality Control Material shall be new, free from defects, and of the quality specified. All equipment and materials utilized in the system shall be the products of Manufacturers with at least five (5) years of experience in the manufacture of similar equipment. Similar items in the system shall be the products of the same Manufacturer. All equipment shall be of industrial grade and of standard construction, shall be capable of long, reliable, trouble -free service, and shall be specifically intended for control and monitoring of operation of motor -driven pumps and equipment. All equipment shall be of modular design to facilitate interchangeability of parts and to assure ease of servicing. Part 3 – Execution Installers Installation shall be performed by the workers who are skilled and experienced in the installation of I&C and Telemetry systems. Installation Installation and testing procedures shall be as specified in these and subsequent sections of this division. The control system shall be installed in accordance with the installation plans and instructions prepared by the Control System Integrator. Installation shall include all elements and components of control system and all conduit and interconnecting wiring between all elements, components, sensors, and valve operators. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-6 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Equipment shall be located so that it is readily accessible for operation and maintenance. Field Equipment Equipment shall be provided as specified on the Plans such that ports and adjustments are accessible for in-place testing and calibration. Where possible, equipment shall be located between 48 inches and 60 inches, unless specified otherwise on the Plans, above the floor or a permanent work platform. Instrumentation equipment shall be mounted for unobstructed access, but mounting shall not obstruct walkways. Equipment shall be mounted where shock or vibration will not impair its operation. Support systems shall not be attached to handrails, process piping or mechanical equipment except for measuring elements and valve positioners. Instruments and cabinets supported directly by concrete or concrete block walls shall be spaced out not less than ⅝-inch by framing channel between instrument and wall. Steel used for support of equipment shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Support systems including panels shall be designed in accordance with the Seismic Restraint and Anchorage section of Division 1.81 of these specifications and to prevent deformation greater than ⅛-inch under the attached equipment load and an external load of 200 pounds in any direction. Electrical Power Connection Electric power wiring and equipment shall be in compliance with Division 16 . Power disconnect switches shall be provided within sight of equipment and shall be labeled to indicate opened and closed positions and specific equipment served. “Within sight of” is defined as having a clear unobstructed view from the equipment served and within 50 feet of the equipment served. Disconnect switches shall be mounted between 36 inches and 72 inches above the floor or permanent work platform. Where equipment location is such that the above requirements cannot be met by a single disconnect switch, two switches, one at the equipment and one at the work platform, shall be provided. Signal Connection Electrical signal connections to equipment shall be made on terminal blocks or by locking plug and receptacle assemblies. Jacketed flexible conduit shall be used between equipment and rigid raceway systems except that flexible cable assemblies may be used where plug and r eceptacle assemblies are provided and the installation is not subject to mechanical damage in normal use. The length of flexible conduit or cord assemblies shall not exceed 2 feet. Flexible cable, receptacle and plug assemblies shall be used only where specified. 17.06 Control System Integrator Part 1 – General Division of Responsibility All instrumentation and industrial electronic systems shall be provided under the supervision of a single Control System Integrator, chosen by the Contractor, which is regularly engaged in the design and installation of such systems of similar scope and complexity. The Control Systems Integrator shall be enjoined by the Contractor as a Subcontractor. The assignment of specific responsibilities herein to the Control System Integrator shall not, in any way and under City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-7 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. any conditions, diminish the Contractor's full and complete responsibility for all work performed and all materials installed under the contract. The contract between the Contractor and the Control System Integrator shall specifically require that the Control System Integrator conform to and meet all requirements specified in the contract documents. The assignment of a Control System Integrator that is an equipment supplier shall not be acceptable. Control System Integrator’s Responsibility The Control System Integrator shall be solely and completely responsible for the final design and assembly of the entire control system. Responsibilities include: • Provision of, and the detailed design of, custom control panels and the motor control center. The plans show general layout of the control panels. The Integrator shall provide detailed scaled design of all components on and in the control panels and determine specific requirements. • The design of all interconnecting wiring of control equipment including remote control panels, packaged equipment panels, mechanical equipment with control components, etc. • Testing of the control panels in the Control System Integrator’s shop. • Coordinate with the Contractor for specific requirements and locations of raceway penetrations and field wiring in control panels. • The Control System Integrator shall supply the Contractor with all necessary detailed installation plans and/or written instruction for installation of all control components and sensing devices for proper system operation. • Coordinate with the Control System Programmer who has been selected by the Owner and are under separate contract with the Owner, to allow in-shop testing of the programming of all control devices and to execute the functions listed in the control strategies. • Develop an assembly and testing schedule, with the Control System Programmer to allow for testing of all new programs in the Control System Integrator’s shop. • Provide installation assistance. • Provide Startup and Training Services. General and Electrical Contractor’s Responsibilities The General and Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the following equipment and services: • Review of the Control System Integrator’s submittals and wiring diagrams for coordination with space requirements, raceway requirements of field wiring, etc. • Supply the Integrator with submittals of equipment related to the control system that the Integrator must include in their submittals and integrate. Such as motors, packaged control panels that the Integrator does not build, etc. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-8 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. • Installation of the control panels provided by the Control System Integrator. • Installation of the interconnecting wiring in accordance with these documents and the Control System Integrators wiring diagrams. • Installation of I&C and Telemetry System components in accordance with these documents and plans or instructions of the Control System Integrator. Part 3 – Execution Installers The Control System shall be designed, constructed, programmed and commissioned by full time employees with a minimum of 5 years of experience (minimum of 1 year with Integrator). Integrators List The Control System Integrator shall be selected by the Contractor from the following acceptable companies (Alphabetical Listing): • L2 Systems LLC – Everett, Washington • Quality Control Corporation (QCC) – Lynnwood, Washington • S&B Inc. (Stead & Associates) – Bellevue, Washington • Systems Interface Inc. – Mukilteo, Washington • Taurus Power and Controls, Inc. – Kent, Washington • Technical Systems, Inc. – Lynnwood, Washington Alternative Integrators Alternate Control System Integrators not listed above shall be considered for acceptability by the Owner based on following qualifications: 1. The Control System Integrator shall be an instrument and control system manufacturing company. 2. The Control System Integrator’s manufacturing and assembly facility shall be located within a 100-mile drive from Renton, WA. 3. The Control System Integrator shall be specialized in the design, assembly, testing, installation and service of municipal water and wastewater control and communication systems in the Pacific Northwest for at least five years. 4. The Control System Integrator shall employ technicians and engineers with documented experience in the design, assembly, testing, installation, operation, calibration, trouble-shooting, service and repair of control, and communication systems for municipal water and wastewater utilities. 5. The Control System Integrator shall have completed the design, assembly, testing and installation of control systems that include the instruments and devices cited on the Plans by specific manufacturer's name. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-9 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. An alternate Control System Integrator selected by the Contractor shall be subject to the approval by the Owner. Prior to placement of purchase orders for services and equipment, the Contractor shall provide the following information about the selected alternate Control System Integrator for review by the Owner: 1. Description of ownership and organization of Integrator. 2. Resumes of principals and/or key employees who will be working directly in the engineering, assembly, testing and commissioning of the system for this project. 3. Description of expertise in design, assembly, testing and installation of control systems for municipal utility facilities. 4. Description of municipal control systems designed, assembled and installed in the last 5 years. Description shall include: • Names of employees involved in each system. • Detailed description and plans of each system. • Cost of each system. • Names and telephone numbers of persons involved in operation and maintenance of each system. • Description of the service capabilities normally provided by the company including resumes of employees assigned to field service and listing of service equipment. • Additional information that may assist the Owner in ascertaining the company's general ability to perform the work. The acceptability of the Integrator will be determined solely by the Owner. Approval of Personnel and Alternatives The Contractor and the selected Control System Integrator shall anticipate that the Owner may withhold approval of the selected Integrator or employee if, in the opinion of the Owner, the Control System Integrator or employee does not have the experience, capability or an acceptable performance and execution record of similar projects in the past. Neither the Contractor or Control System Integrator or employee not approved by the Owner, shall be entitled to an extension of time or to any claim for damages because of e xtra and unanticipated costs, hindrances, delays or complications caused by or resulting from the Owner not approving any Control System Integrator or employee for whatever reason. 17.07 Control System Programmer (Control System Programmer Contracted Directly by Owner) Part 1 – General Division of Responsibility The Control System Programmer shall be selected and Contracted for the control system programming by the Owner. The Control System Programmer Contracted by the Owner is City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-10 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. RH2 Engineering, Inc., who may be contacted at (425) 951-5386. It is the responsibility of the Control System Programmer to provide PLC programming that will accomplish control of the proposed and modified systems as described in the Specifications and Plans. Control System Programmer’s Responsibility: The Control System Programmer Responsibilities include: • Develop a testing schedule to allow for testing of all new telemetry panel programs. • Notify the Control System Integrator of all components needed to test equipment panels. • Software testing of the control panels in the Control System Integrator’s shop. • Programming of the PLC, operator interface, and HMI Computer System. • Provide required software startup, troubleshooting, and commissioning services needed to complete implementation of programs. 17.08 System Description Part 1 – General Summary The I&C and Telemetry system functions required are specified on the Plans and in subsequent sections of this Division. Design and Performance Requirements The system shall be designed to provide the control capabilities and functions indicated and implied by the Plans and these Specifications and to provide trouble-free operation with minimum maintenance. The system shall readily enable manual operation of any and all functions in the event of failure of any one component. The control system shall be designed and assembled by the Control System Integrator to provide: • Control of motor driven pumps, equipment, and processes. • Monitoring of operation of motor driven pumps, equipment, and processes. • Indication of operating status of motor driven pumps, equipment, and processes. • Monitoring and indication of pressures, temperatures, levels, and flows, as indicated and implied by the Plans and Specifications. • The capabilities indicated and implied by the Plans and Specifications. The I&C and Telemetry System shall be designed and assembled by the Control System Integrator to be an integrated system composed completely of components which are specifically designed and used for and in conjunction with control and operation of motor-driven pumps and process control equipment. The Control System Integrator shall City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-11 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. supply all interfacing equipment, appurtenances and accessories and all such devices that may be required for proper interfacing as part of the control system. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers The telemetry components of the RTU shall be manufactured by Allen-Bradley to be consistent with the Owner’s existing system. Components The I&C and Telemetry System shall include the instruments, control devices, Remote Telemetry Unit, Human Machine Interface, input and output devices, sensors, interfacing devices, cabinets, enclosures and other components indicated and implied by the Plans and Specifications. The following is a list of the RTUs, Control Panels, Pressure and Level Assemblies, and Motor Control Centers to be provided by the Control System Integrator: • Telemetry Panel • Motor Control Center • Junction Box Enclosure • Level Transmitter • Level Floats Part 3 – Execution Preparation The Control System Integrator shall be responsible for the coordination and integration of control system with the motor control and other related equipment. The Control System Integrator shall communicate directly with the Manufacturer(s) and Supplier(s) of all related equipment to determine all details of the equipment, which may influence or affect the control system. The Control System Integrator shall determine all requirements for and shall cause integration of the control system into a unified operating system. The Control System Integrator shall define all requirements for all interfacing equipment and shall supply all appurtenances, accessories and all such devices, which may be required for proper interfacing as part of the control system. The Control System Integrator shall be responsible to obtain submittal information on equipment supplied by other disciplines and to integrate them into the control system to form a complete working package as outlined by the contract documents. Installation The system shall be completely assembled in the shop by the Control System Integrator. All components and equipment shall be prewired to the maximum extent possible. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-12 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. All Process Control shall be done within the control panels unless specifically listed on the Plans as other. 17.10 PANELS 17.11 Panel Certifications Part 1 – General Design Requirements Panels provided for this project shall meet the requirements of UL-508 for water system and UL-913 for sewer system. All panels shall bear the appropriate label. The provider of the panels shall be a UL-508A certified facility. All field modifications shall be in conformance with UL-508 or UL-913. 17.12 Equipment Panels Part 1 – General References Division 10.14.8 Electrical and control signs and labels. All panels shall be labeled. Design Requirements Control equipment panels shall be enclosures conforming to the requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and shall be NEMA 12 for indoor use and NEMA 4X for outdoor use. Part 2 – Products Components • Enclosure shall be constructed of steel. • Minimal metal thickness shall be 14-gauge. • All doors shall be rubber-gasketed with continuous hinge and key locking latch mechanism. • Wherever practical, enclosures shall be a manufactured item. • All doors shall be provided with quick-release latches to secure cover. • Panels shall be sized to adequately dissipate heat generated by equipment mounted in or on the panel. • Enclosure shall include a backpan. • Enclosure shall be finished in ANSI 61 gray polyester powder coating inside and out over phosphatized surfaces. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-13 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. • The enclosure shall be oversized to accommodate future racks and auxiliary devices as required. • All outdoor enclosures shall be provided with a control panel heater and ventilation fan and filter with built-in thermostat to provide adequate climate control. Fabrication Panels should be completely fabricated, and instruments installed and wired in the manufacturer's factory (where possible). All wiring shall be completed and tested prior to shipment. All external connections shall be by way of numbered terminal blocks. Panel cutouts for instruments and devices shall be cut, punched or drilled and smoothly finished with rounded edges. 17.20 PANEL COMPONENTS Part 1 – General Design Requirements All components shall be suitable for installation inside the I&C and Telemetry system panel enclosure. Part 2 – Products Components 17.20.3 Terminal Blocks Part 1 – General Design Requirements Terminal blocks shall be one-piece molded plastic blocks with screw-type terminals and barriers rated for 600 volts. Terminals shall be double-sided and supplied with removable covers to prevent accidental contact with live circuits. Terminals shall have permanent, legible identification, and be clearly visible with the protective cover removed. Fusible terminal blocks shall be provided with a LED blown fuse indicator for each terminal. Part 3 – Execution Installation All wires between panel-mounted equipment and other equipment shall be terminated at terminal blocks. Switches shall be terminated at the terminal blocks with crimp-type, pre-insulated, ring-tongue lugs. Lugs shall be of the appropriate size for their terminal block screws and for the number and size of the wires terminated. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-14 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 17.21 Power Supply and Protection 17.21.2 Normal Power Supply Part 1 – General Design Requirements All equipment panels shall be provided with 120-volt, 60-Hz power. Make provisions for conduit entry and provide a terminal block for termination of the circuit wires. All electronic control panel components shall require a 120 VAC-24 VDC power supply. DC power supply shall be sized to provide at least 50 percent more current than the peak current demands of the control panel. DC power supply shall have UPS backup power capabilities as identified in Section 17.21.3. Protection equipment shall consist of circuit breakers and fuses to protect electrical circuits from short circuits and overloads. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers DC power supplies shall be Puls Inc., Sola Inc., Allen-Bradley, or approved equal. Fuses shall be Bussmann Manufacturing Model ABC or MDA rated for Branch circuit, or approved equal. Circuit Breakers shall be Allen-Bradley rated for Branch circuit, or approved equal Part 3 – Execution Construction Branch circuits shall be individually fused with an indication of fuse opening. All fuse holders for the panel shall be grouped on a single sub-panel. They shall be so situated that when the panel door is opened there is a clear view of the indicators and clear access for replacement of the fuses. Provide DC power supplies as required to power instruments requiring external DC power of the appropriate voltages, with sufficient voltage regulation and ripple control to assure that the instruments being supplied can operate within their required tolerances. The power supplies at all RTUs shall include batteries for a backup power supply and charging equipment. 17.21.3 Backup Power Supply Part 1 – General Design Requirements All equipment panels shall have an Uninterruptable DC Power Module that interfaces with the Normal DC Power Supply. The Uninterruptable DC Power Module shall be capable of powering the control panel equipment for a period of not less than 24 hours after normal power failure. Transfer shall be a non-mechanical, non-interruptible, smooth transfer to battery backup. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-15 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Remote equipment batteries shall be sealed lead-acid batteries of sufficient ampere hour capacity to meet the above requirements. Performance Requirements The master console shall display power failure, and also a low battery condition alarm for the new equipment. A power failure alarm shall occur in the format currently used by the system. A low battery condition alarm shall cause the alarm indicator to flash but will not sound the audible alarm. The indicating light shall go off when the alarm condition is clear. Part 3 – Execution Installation Batteries, battery chargers, and necessary wiring shall be installed to meet the above specifications. 17.21.5 Line Protection Units – Low Current Part 1 – General Design Requirements The line protection unit shall isolate and protect the I&C electronics from current and voltage surges in the transmission lines. Each protection unit shall have: • An isolation transformer with a minimum of 1,500 volts AC isolation, primary to secondary, and a minimum saturation current of 100 milliamps (ma) S.C. or as required to protect the I&C equipment from damage. • Separate line-side and equipment-side terminal blocks. • Two clip-mounted, replaceable gas discharge tubes rated at 90 volts striking voltage and 5,000 ampere peak pulse current capacity and suitable ground strap. Part 2 – Products Manufactured Units The line protection unit shall be a complete unit, mounted on a separate chassis, and be field replaceable without soldering. The chassis shall be a ¼-inch thick plate. 17.21.6 Line Protection Units – High Current Part 1 – General Design Requirements The line protection unit shall isolate and protect the I&C electronics from current and voltage surges in the transmission lines. Each protection unit shall have: • A minimum continuous operating current rating of 30 amps or larger as required to protect the telemetry equipment from damage. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-16 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. • A minimum peak surge current rating of 80 KA. • Separate line-side and equipment-side terminal blocks. • LED indicator for circuit diagnostics. • A response time less than or equal to 1 nanosecond. The line protection unit shall be a complete unit available as a surface mount or DIN rail. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers The line protector shall be an Allen-Bradley Model 4983-DC120-20 or equal. 17.22 Wire and Cable 17.22.2 Wiring Part 1 – General References All electrical wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC. Design Requirements Wires shall be 600-volt class, PVC insulated, stranded copper and shall be the sizes required for the current to be carried but not less than No. 14 AWG conductor size. Wires for signal circuits shall be twisted shielded pairs not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Part 3 – Execution Installation All power wiring shall be supported on a sheet metal raceway or enclosed in a plastic wiring duct. Wiring for signal circuits shall be separated at least 6-inch from any power wiring. 17.22.3 Cables Part 1 – General Design Requirements Cables and connectors shall be industry standard, shielded, and shall be provided to connect all peripherals and equipment. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-17 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 17.24 Switches and Relays 17.24.2 Selector Switch Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Heavy-Duty, Watertight, and Corrosion-Resistant Type: Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, Type E34; Square D Co., Type SK; Allen Bradley, Type 800H; General Electric Co., Type CR 104P. Manufactured Units Selector switches shall be NEMA type 4/4X/13, corrosion-resistant/watertight/oil-tight, type selector switches with contacts rated for 10 amperes continuous at proper operating voltage. Operators shall be black knob type. Units shall have the number of positions and contact arrangements and spring return function (if any) as shown on Plans. Units shall be single-hole mounting, accommodating panel thicknesses from 1/16-inch minimums to ¼-inch maximum. 17.24.3 Pushbuttons Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Heavy-Duty, Watertight, and Corrosion-Resistant Type: Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, Type E34; Square D Co., Type SK; Allen Bradley, Type 800H; General Electric Co., Type CR 104P. Manufactured Units Pushbuttons shall be NEMA type 4/4X/13, corrosion-resistant/watertight/oil-tight, type push buttons with momentary contacts rated for 10-ampere continuous at proper operating voltage. Button color shall be as specified in control panels and shall have a full guard. Pushbutton contact arrangements shall be as shown on Plans. Size of pushbuttons shall be 30mm. Special Functions Pushbutton for “Emergency Help” applications shall have maintained contacts and red mushroom head operators. 17.24.4 Panel Relays Part 1 – General Design Criteria Relays shall be provided as necessary to perform switching functions required of control panels and other control circuits as shown on the Plans and described in the technical specifications. Appropriate relay type and associated contacts shall be selected based on the application from the control wiring diagrams or the functional description. Where timing relays and control relays require additional contacts, provide auxiliary control relays properly sized for the application. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-18 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. All contacts and relays shall be NEMA rated and UL recognized. The electrical life expectancy for the relay shall be over 500,000 operations at 120V AC, 10 amps; (over 200,000 operations at 120V AC, 10 amp for SPDT, 3PDT, and 4PDT). The mechanical life expectancy for the relay shall be over 50,000,000 operations. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Control Relays Square D Class 8501, Type K or R; Allen Bradley 700 Type HA or HB; IDEC RH Series; or equal. Time Delay and Timing Relays Allen Bradley 700 Type HR; IDEC GE1, RTE or GT3 Series; or equal. Manufactured Units Control Relays Relays for general purpose use shall be DPDT or 3PDT, 10 amp contacts with the appropriate coil voltage for the application. Relays shall be plug-in type with matching socket. All relays shall have LED indicators to signal when the coil is energized. Relay coils shall be rated for continuous duty. Time Delay Relays Time delay relays shall be multi-function, multi-range with plug-in base, pin style terminations timing and timed out LED indicators, and calibrated scales. Relays shall have minimum 0.5 seconds to 60 minutes, 8 selectable timing ranges, 5 amp contacts. Select coil voltage for the application. Units shall be sealed to prevent entry of contamination in the form of dust, dirt, or moisture. Appropriate relay shall be selected based on application from the control wiring diagrams. Minimum accuracy (plus or minus) shall be as follows: 1. Repeat accuracy – ½ percent. 2. Timing change over full voltage range – ½ percent change over full temperature range. 3. Scale tolerance – 5-percent. Part 3 – Execution Installation Provide adjustable time relays on all alarm and shut down circuits to prevent nuisance tripping of other alarm points. Time delay relays for these functions may not be shown on the Plans; however, provide as required on all circuits. Provide additional form C contacts over and above the number indicated on the Plans for all relays provided. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-19 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 120 VAC relays shall not be interchangeable with other voltages to prevent a hazardous interchange of relay voltages. Provide DIN mounted or panel mounted type depending on application. 17.25 Indicating Lights and Readouts 17.25.2 Pilot Lights Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Heavy-Duty, Watertight, and Corrosion-Resistant Type: Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, Type E34; Square D Co., Type SK; Allen Bradley, Type 800H; General Electric Co., Type CR 104P. Manufactured Units Indicating lights shall be NEMA type 4/4X/13, corrosion resistant, water-tight, oil-tight, full voltage, push-to-test, high visibility 28 chips LED type. Pilot lights shall be rated for the proper operating voltage. Appropriate lens caps shall be provided as shown on Plans. 17.30 INTELLIGENT CONTROL UNITS 17.31 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) 17.31.2 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) System Part 1 – General Summary Work involved in this contract includes providing new PLC equipment and programming to provide the functions shown on the Plans and described herein. Performance and Design Requirements • The PLC system modifications shall accomplish the control requirements of the loop descriptions, Plans, and Specifications. • The design application and installation of the PLCs shall conform to NEMA ICS 1.1. • PLC programming shall be documented. • All PLC control system components shall be capable of meeting or exceeding electromagnetic interference tests per ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers PLC components added to this Contract shall be Allen-Bradley. No substitutions. Refer to project Telemetry Panel plans for specific Allen-Bradley component numbers and quantities. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-20 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Components Input/Output (I/O) Modules a) Provide plug-in modular-type I/O racks with cables to connect to all other required PLC system components. b) Provide I/O system with: 1. I/O solid state boards with status lights indicating I/O status and board failure. 2. Electric isolation between logic and field device. 3. Interchangeable boards for similar I/O type to allow substitution of operating boards for failed units by the operator. 4. Capability of withstanding low energy common mode transient to 1500 V without failure. 5. Incorporate noise suppression design. 6. Capable of meeting or exceeding surge-withstand capability tests, per ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1. 7. Capable of meeting or exceeding electrical noise tests, NEMA ICS1 -109.60- 109.66. c) Discrete I/O modules: 1. Interface to ON/OFF devices. 2. I/O status indicator on module front. 3. Voltage rating to match circuit voltage. 4. Output module current rating: a. Match maximum circuit current draw. b. Minimum 1.5 A/point for 120 V AC applications. 5. Isolated modules for applications where one module interfaces with devices utilizing different sources of power. 6. Individually fused outputs with blown fuse indication. d) Analog I/O modules: 1. Input modules to accept signals indicated on Plans or Specifications. 2. 12-bit minimum resolution. 3. I/O chassis supplied power for powering connected field devices. 4. Isolated (differential) inputs and outputs. 5. User configurable for desired fault-response state. 6. Provide output signals as indicated on Plans and Specifications. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-21 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 7. Individual D/A converter for each output module. 8. Individual A/D converter for each input module. Data Highway Communications 1. All PLC controllers shall be capable of EtherNet/IP communications. Any additional industrial protocols shall be provided through protocol converters. PLC Peripheral Devices 1. PLC Peripheral Devices Graphical Operator Interface a. The data entry and display module shall consist of a 6.5-inch color screen display. b. The unit shall be capable of reading PLC data table register values and pre-defined messages and writing into PLC memory to modify register values. c. The readout module will be used as a local operator interface device for entering operational parameters and reading out process data including display of all alarms by tag number. d. A complete index of parameters and corresponding memory locations and a complete cross reference of alarms will be permanently attached to each PLC enclosure. e. The unit will be self-contained, 24 VDC powered and rated minimum NEMA 12 suitable for panel mounting. f. Communications will be direct with the Ethernet Switch via shielded CAT 5E Ethernet Cable. g. The touch screen panel shall be an Allen-Bradley PanelView Plus 7 Standard Terminal, 6.5-inch Color Display, Part Number 2711P-T7C21D8S, No Substitutions. Part 3 – Execution Installers Control System Integrator and programmers shall have had experience in design, installation, and start-up of at least three similar installations using the proposed hardware and software. Installation Provide a completely integrated distributed programmable controller system capable of analog and sequential control, data acquisition and display, alarm annunciation and communications using the PLC system. I/O cards and memory shall be added as necessary to complete work shown on the Plans and described in the specifications. The system shall provide true distributed control wherein each PLC is an intelligent stand-alone controller programmed for the specific functions required at its respective City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-22 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. location. Certain information in the form of control commands, interlocks and data will be passed directly between the PLCs for use in executing the local control programs. Input/Output Connection Requirements 1. Make connections to I/O subsystem by terminating all field wiring on terminal blocks within the I/O enclosure. 2. Prewire I/O modules to terminal blocks. 3. Provide terminal blocks with continuous marking strip. 4. Size terminals to accommodate all active data base points and spares. 5. Provide terminals for individual termination of each signal shield. 6. Field wiring shall not be disturbed when removing or replacing an I/O module. PLC Installment 1. Component placement: a. Mount all components according to manufacturer's instructions. b. Locate incoming line devices (isolation or constant voltage transformers, local power disconnects, surge suppressors, etc.) so as to keep power wire runs within an enclosure as short as possible. c. If items such as magnetic starters, contactors, relays and other electromagnetic devices are located within the same enclosure as the PLC system components, provide at least 6 inches of separation between the magnetic area and the control area. d. Oversize enclosure to accommodate future racks and auxiliary devices as required. 2. Provide enclosure with a single quick disconnect of incoming power. Mount disconnect switch or breaker on enclosure exterior and label. 3. Enclosures shall comply with these specifications. 4. Enclosures shall be equipped with H2S inhibitor(s) suitable for the enclosed volume. 17.33 Network Equipment and Computers 17.33.1 Industrial Network Equipment Part 1 – General Design Requirements All specified “industrial network equipment” shall comply with the following minimum specifications: 1. Rated for a 5-30VDC power supply. 2. UL listed. 3. Designed for an industrial environment. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-23 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 4. Operating temperature of -40 degrees Fahrenheit to 176 degrees Fahrenheit. 5. IP66 rated water and dust resistant. 6. Control network device shall be capable of remote monitoring using OPC protocol. 7. All devices on fiber backbone shall have a minimum of two sets of transmit/receive ports. 8. Twisted pair network speed shall be a minimum of 100Base-TX. 9. Fiber optic network speed shall be a minimum of 100Base-FX. These requirements do not apply to non-industrial network equipment. Part 2 – Products Control Network Equipment Data highway communications shall be accomplished on a control network consisting of nodes, one at each PLC or computer workstation and a physical link layer consisting of cables and all interfacing hardware. Control Network equipment shall consist of the following devices. Unmanaged Ethernet Switch One (1) N-Tron 308TX Ethernet Switch. No Substitutions. Part 3 – Execution Installation All network equipment in Control Panels shall be installed as per Plans, specifications and product installation instructions. All components shall be suitable for installation in the environment where installed. All devices shall be installed as specified by the manufacturer. All devices shall be installed to be field serviceable without taking the facility out of service. Device displays shall be positioned to be easily read when viewing directly into control panels. 17.40 REMOTE COMMUNICATION DEVICES 17.41 Radio Systems Part 1 – General Performance Requirements All components shall be suitable for installation in the environment where installed. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Radio Communication Equipment 1. CalAmp Viper SC 450-512 MHz (140-5048-502) 12.5 KHz bandwidth. No Substitutions. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-24 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 2. CalAmp VHF50HN 100MHz-512MHz frequencies PolyPhaser. 3. 18-inch Pigtail cable between the CalAmp VIPER SC radio and the PolyPhaser P/N 250-0697-103. This is an RG400 TNC to N-Male cables. 4. CalAmp 250-5099-005 DIN rail mounting kit, Viper-SC. 5. LMR 400 Coaxial Antenna Cable 6. The antenna shall be a Yagi 450-470 MHz, 10 dB gain, Dataradio antenna kit, model no. 250-0241-510 or equal. Part 3 – Execution Installation All radio equipment shall be installed as per plans, specifications and product installation instructions. All radio equipment will be configured by the Control System Programmer. All devices shall be installed as specified by the manufacturer. 17.41.27 Radio-Frequency Identification Part 1 – General Summary This section describes a subsurface utility marker using Radio-Frequency Identification (RFID) tags equipped with a magnet that will be placed along the Falcon Ridge existing forcemain pipe. Submittals Manufacturer’s literature, illustrations, and specification sheets. A complete installation, operation, and maintenance manual. Delivery, Storage and Handling Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: Any broken units will be replaced at no expense to the Owner. Extra Materials Provide one (1) TSL 1128 RFID Reader/Writer with Bluetooth capability to the Owner for future installation and/or reading of RFID tags. Part 2 – Products Materials Radio Frequency Identification System shall be Berntsen InfraMarker RFID System with IM483B RFID tags or approved equal. RFID Tag Performance Requirements Assets shall be marked with RFID markers with the following characteristics: City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-25 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. a. Passive, ultra-high frequency (UHF), Class 1 Gen 2 RFID chips b. IP Code Rating: 68 c. Reading depth: Up to 30 inches d. An alternate means to locate marker (e.g. in the event the RFID chip fails or cannot be read) Data Storage Performance Requirements The software for data storage of the information on the RFID tags shall include the following. a. Administration tools to create and manage field users. b. Field user permissions that supports read-only and editing of RFID markers and asset records. c. Map interface that supports multiple base maps (e.g. satellite or ortho imagery, street maps, topography, etc.) and user defined vector layers (e.g. utility networks, structures, road edges, etc.). d. User defined database schemas. e. Data collection form builder with domain value picklists. f. Configurable symbology and color schemas to differentiate asset types. g. Log and track field user activities. h. Ability to read and input barcodes into data collection form. i. Ability to group asset records into user-defined datasets (e.g. geographic areas or projects). j. Ability to operate in a disconnect mode (when internet connectivity is poor or not available). k. Ability to attach multiple images, videos, and documents (e.g. PDF files) to asset records. l. Ability to export RFID marker locations, asset records and attachments as shapefiles, geodatabase records, or other formats compatible with Esri ArcGIS software. Mobile Application Performance Requirements The mobile application software for input of asset record information on the RFID tags shall include the following. a. Secured user login with proper authentication. b. Map interface and means to identify RFID marker and asset locations. c. Ability to input, edit, and delete asset records. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-26 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 3 – Execution Installation for Existing Assets The existing assets shall be potholed at the proposed locations of the RFID markers, as identified in the plans. The depth of the existing assets to the crown of the pipe shall be measured at the potholed locations. If the pothole does not reveal the existing asset, additional potholing may be necessary to identify the location and depth of the existing asset. The RFID marker will be installed in the pothole directly above the existing asset. All potholes shall be repaired to the Owner’s standards. Coordinate with the Owner on asset record information requirements, including depth of the existing assets, shall be written to the RFID markers. While backfilling the potholes, RFID markers shall be installed in the potholes above the existing assets. The RFID markers shall be installed level at a maximum depth of 12 inches from the proposed final grading with the top pointing in the direction of the surface. These utility markers will be placed at a maximum interval spacing as identified on the plans. Installation for All Utilities Placement of RFID marker and input of asset record information shall be performed through a mobile application with the capability of operating on both Android and iOS mobile and smartphone devices. The RFID markers shall be identified and read via a hand-held UHF RFID reader certified for use in North America. Provide the recorded asset record information to the Owner in a format that can be used in the Owner’s GIS system. Field Quality Control Contractor shall confirm all installed RFID tags have been written to with the proper asset record information and can be located and read as described in the Manufacturer’s literature. Contractor shall replace any RFID tags that are not operating properly prior to final project acceptance by the Owner. 17.50 SENSORS AND CONTROLS 17.50.1 Common Work for Sensors and Controls Part 1 – General Design Requirements Provide sensors and controls scaled and rated for their intended application. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-27 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 3 – Execution Installation All devices shall be installed to be field serviceable without taking the facility out of service. Readouts shall be positioned to be easily read from a standing position, central to the room unless allowed otherwise by the Engineer. 17.51 Emergency Sensors and Controls 17.51.2 Smoke Detectors Part 1 – General Design Requirements Provide all components suitable for installation in the environment where installed. Detector shall be provided complete with sensing head and mounting base. The photoelectric smoke detector shall be 24-volt powered with a local audible alarm and Form C contacts for remote annunciation through two-wire connection to telemetry panel. The voltage requirement is dependent of the power source available at the telemetry panel. The detector shall detect both smoke particles and heat. The detectors shall have a latching alarm feature that resets only by a momentary power interruption. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers The smoke detector shall be a System Sensor 4WTAR-B, or equal. Part 3 – Execution Examination The Contractor shall verify power supply before selecting the appropriate model. Site Testing Test each smoke detector with artificial smoke in a can per manufacturer’s instructions. Test the thermal sensing units with a heat gun or blow dryer per manufacturer’s instructions. Other testing methods will only be acceptable if approved by the manufacturer. Each failed smoke detector shall be replaced. 17.51.4 Intrusion Alarm Switch Part 1 – General Design Requirements The switch shall be two-pole side plunger type switch with one normally open and one normally closed set of contacts. The switch shall be a Type C and NEMA rated. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-28 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Intrusion switches shall be as specified on the Plans, or equal. Components Provide with a standard box plug-in and connecting cable of significant length to reach a junction box located near the switch. Part 3 – Execution Installation The Contractor shall install intrusion alarm switches on all entrance doors and access hatches as shown on the Plans. All components shall be suitable for installation in the environment where installed. Mount the switch as shown on the Plans to detect the opening of each entrance door and access hatch identified on the Plans. Connect to the normally open contacts so that the switch is closed when the door is closed and open when the door is open. A factory provided cord shall be of significant length to reach from the device to a junction box. 17.51.6 Keyed Switch Box Part 1 – General Part 2 – Products Manufacturers The keyed switch shall be a Best Model No. 1W7B2INT with Construction Core. The key shall be removable from the open or closed position. No substitutions. Materials The key switch shall have a minimum contact rating of 15 amps at 30 VDC. The switch type shall be single pole-double throw (SPDT). The switch shall be provided in a junction box provided from the Manufacturer. All keyed switches shall be provided with construction cores. Part 3 – Execution Installation The contractor shall install keyed switch box at the location shown on the Plans for providing an input into the telemetry system. Mount the keyed switch box outdoors as shown on the Plans. Unless otherwise noted, mount top of box at 40 inches above finished grade. The keyed switch shall be wired to the terminal block in the telemetry panel. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-29 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 17.52 Pressure and Level Sensors and Controls 17.52.2 Flood Liquid Level Switches Design Requirements The switch shall be SPST rated for 20VA. The float shall be constructed on Buna-N material and the stem shall be constructed from brass. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Switches shall be Omega, LVN-20 or equal. Part 3 – Execution Installation The contractor shall install a liquid level switch as shown on the Plans. Mount the switch to the end of ½-inch PVC Coated GRS or galvanized pipe, depending on the area classification. Provide threaded busing as necessary to provide a complete assembly. Secure pipe to wall with a minimum of two galvanized conduit hangers. Mount the liquid level assembly ½-inch above the finished floor. 17.52.3 Wastewater Level Float Switches Part 2 – Products Manufacturers Switches shall be Anchor Scientific, Inc., Roto-Float Type S, or equal. Manufactured Units Float switch shall be mercury tube switch-type enclosed in a sealed polyurethane float. A weight shall be on the cord near the float switch. 2/C # 16 flexible type SJO oil-proof, 300-volt cord shall be integral with the float switch and shall be of sufficient length to reach the splice handhole with an additional five feet of slack cord. Part 3 – Execution Installation Level switches shall be provided for the following: • High Level Pump Start Float • Low Level Pump Stop Float • Emergency Pump Stop Float The float switch shall indicate to the control system that the liquid level, at which the switch has been positioned, has been reached. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-30 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 17.52.13 Submersible Level Transmitter (Wastewater) Part 1 – General Design Requirements The complete level transmitter assembly shall be completely rated for the environment for which it will be installed and shall be a totally submersible device with molded integral cable. Part 2 – Products Manufacturers The submersible level transmitter shall be a KPSI level transmitter 705 series, Endress-Hauser Waterpilot FMX121 (wastewater application), or equal with cable hanger and either aneroid bellows or terminal box with filter. Manufactured Units The transduction principle shall be an integrated silicon strain gauge bridge with a two -wire 4-20 mA output signal. The operating range of the device shall be up to 30 feet with an overpressure acceptance of two times the rated pressure. Total error band shall not exceed 0.25 percent of full scale over a temperature range of 30 degrees to 86 degrees Fahrenheit. The accuracy shall be 0.25 percent of full scale for 1 psi to 900 psi range. Voltage input shall be 9 to 30 VDC. The electronics shall have built-in protection against AC line transients and lightning spikes and an RFI filter to reject internal electrical and internal noise. The transmitter shall have a maximum OD of 1.65 inch and a maximum length of 9 inches. The transmitter shall be provided with enough submergence-proof cable to allow for an unspliced run from the transmitter mounting depth to the control electronics plus 10 percent. The submergence-proof cable shall be constructed of polyurethane sheathed cable with integral vent tube and Kevlar strain cord. Part 3 – Execution Installation The transmitter shall be installed in location as described on the Plans. A weighted stainless 3/16-inch aircraft cable shall be provided for attachment of level transmitter. The aircraft cable with weight system shall be the length of the wet well depth. 17.53 Environmental Sensors and Controls 17.53.2 Wall-Mounted Cooling Thermostat Part 1 – General Related Sections • Division 11.95.34 Fans City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-31 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Design Requirements All components shall be suitable for installation in the environment where installed. The thermostat shall be a snap action, SPDT line voltage air switch controller rated for a 16-amp inductive load at 120 VAC. Part 2 – Products Manufacturer The Wall-Mounted Cooling Thermostat shall be a Honeywell Model No. T775A2009 or equal with a -30 to 100-degree Fahrenheit range. Part 3 – Execution Installation Furnish and install wall-mounted cooling thermostat as shown on the Plans. Mount thermostat 4 feet above finished floor in location shown on the Plans. Contractor shall set thermostat at 75 degrees Fahrenheit. 17.53.3 Wall-Mounted Heating Thermostat Part 1 – General Related Sections • Division 11.95.83.33 Radiant Space Heater Design Requirements Provide a 24 volt, SPST wall mounted heating thermostat. All components shall be suitable for installation in the environment where installed. Thermostat shall be as recommended by the space heater manufacturer. Thermostat shall have an adjustable range from 40 to 100 degrees Fahrenheit. Set thermostat at 60 degrees Fahrenheit unless specified otherwise on the plans. Part 2 – Products Manufacturer The wall-mounted heating thermostat shall be a Honeywell TH6110D1005, or equal. Part 3 – Execution Installation Furnish and install wall-mounted thermostat as shown on the Plans. Mount thermostat 4 feet above finished floor in location shown on the Plans. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-32 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 17.90 TESTING, STARTUP, AND TRAINING 17.90.1 Common Work for Testing, Startup, and Training Part 1 – General Summary Total system hardware start-up is the responsibility of the Control System Integrator. Maintenance The Control System Integrator shall be solely and completely responsible for all hardware maintenance of the system from time of start-up to the date of acceptance, by formal action of the Owner, of all work under the contract. The Control System Integrator shall perform all such work required or considered to be required by the Owner to cause and maintain proper operation of the system and to properly maintain the system. Warranty The Contractor shall cause the Control System Integrator to make any and all repairs, replacements, modifications and adjustments required to eliminate any and all d efects in design, materials and workmanship which are disclosed within the one year guarantee period. The Control System Integrator shall begin all repairs, replacements, modifications and adjustments within twenty-four (24) hours of notification by telephone by the Owner and shall complete such repairs, replacements, modifications and adjustments within forty-eight (48) hours of notification. Should the Control System Integrator fail to begin the work within twenty-four (24) hours or complete the work within forty-eight (48) hours, the Owner may proceed to undertake or complete the work. In such event, the Contractor and his surety shall be liable for all costs incurred by the Owner. Part 3 – Execution Field Quality Control Equipment Manufacturer’s Support 1. The Control System Integrator shall pay for services of equipment manufacturer's field service representative(s) to: a. Inspect equipment covered by these Specifications. b. Supervise adjustments and installation checks. c. Conduct start-up of equipment and perform operational checks. d. Provide Owner with a written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been installed properly, started up and is ready for operation by Owner's personnel. Repairs The Control System Integrator shall correct all deficiencies and defects and make any and all repairs, replacements, modifications, and adjustments as malfunctions or failures occur. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-33 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. The Contractor and the Control System Integrator shall anticipate that the Owner may delay acceptance of all work under the contract if, in the judgment of the Owner, malfunctions or failures in operation of the control system repeatedly occur after start-up. Both the Contractor and the Control System Integrator shall not be entitled to an extension of time or to any claim for damages because of hindrances, delays or complications caused by or resulting from delay by the Owner in accepting the work because of malfunctions or failures in operation of the control system. 17.91 Tests and Inspections Part 1 – General Summary Materials, equipment, and construction included under this specification shall be inspected in accordance with the specifications. Testing shall be performed by the Control System Integrator in accordance with Division 16, and this and subsequent sections of this divisio n. Testing shall be required to determine if installed equipment and system(s) will operate in the manner in which they are intended to operate. The decision of the Owner upon the acceptability of the test procedures and conformance shall be final. The work will not be accepted until all testing has been satisfactorily performed. Scheduling The Contractor shall prepare factory and field test procedures to demonstrate conformance of the complete system to this specification. The Contractor shall submit the detailed test procedures within four weeks after the notice to proceed for the Engineer’s review and approval. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, instruments and services necessary to perform all specific functional testing of all installed equipment and systems at no additional cost. The Control System Integrator and Contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer (Control System Programmer) of the factory testing date 30 days before testing. The Contractor and Control System Integrator shall include in the schedule 10 consecutive working days as part of the factory testing for the Control System Programmer to test the control system software with the hardware supplied by the Control System Integrator at the Control System Integrator’s shop. The Control System Integrator and Contractor shall submit to the Engineer (Control System Programmer) a detailed field testing schedule identifying each day that both the Control System Integrator and Control System Programmer will need to be on site for field testing of equipment. A preliminary schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer for review 60 days before testing. A final schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer for review 30 days before testing. The Contractor and Control System Integrator shall include in the construction schedule 10 consecutive working days between the completion of field testing and the startup phase for City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-34 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. the Control System Programmer to perform field software testing. Startup shall not proceed until the software field testing is complete. Part 2 – Products Factory Testing All factory testing of control panels and computer systems shall be performed at the Control System Integrator’s shop. The completed control system shall be tested in the shop by the Control System Integrator and the Control System Programmer. All motor control centers and VFD’s supplied by the Control System Integrator shall be interconnected with the control system and powered with rated incoming voltage. Testing shall be conducted in two phases. The initial hardware testing shall include, but not be limited to, operation of all input and output (I/O) points, control devices and motor controllers. The subsequent testing shall include, but not be limited to, testing of RTU programming and Operator Interface provided by the Control System Programmer. The initial hardware testing of the control system shall include the following: 1. The entire assembled panels shall be meggered and tested to be free from grounds and shorts. 2. Energize each discrete input and output and simulating each analog input and output using a loop simulator and calibrator. Circuits not energized shall be tested for continuity. Discrete input signals shall be tested in both the “on” and “off” state. Analog signals shall be tested at a minimum of three values (4 mA, 12 mA, and 20 mA). The test results shall be documented by the Control System Integrator in checklist format. The final test results shall be signed by both the Engineer and Control System Integrator prior to shipment of equipment to the job site. 3. Provide signal generators, multimeters, and other test equipment as required to verify proper operation of the assembled panels. 4. The Control System Integrator shall interconnect the control panels with the motor control centers and VFD’s for both hardware and software testing phases. Control panels shall initially be hardware tested in one group. Similarly, the motor control centers and VFD’s shall be hardware tested in another group. After both groups of hardware are confirmed to be operating correctly, the Control System Integrator shall interconnect the equipment with Ethernet cables and analog and discrete wiring as shown on the Plans. The equipment shall remain connected for the remainder of the factory testing period. 5. Correct, replace, or repair control panel and motor control center wiring, and/or components until testing demonstrates proper operation. Control panels and motor control centers shall not be shipped to the job site until testing has demonstrated complete operation of the panels. 6. Provide updated and complete as-built drawings for the control panels and motor control centers at the time of final factory testing. The Engineer shall review the City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-35 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. drawings against the panel construction at the time of final factory testing. Drawings which do not reflect the actual construction of the panel shall be revised and reviewed again by the Engineer. As-built drawings that require revisions shall be submitted to the Engineer for review prior to shipment of equipment to the job site. This review process shall be repeated as necessary so that as-built drawings reflect the actual construction of the panels and motor control centers at the time of shipment. Panels and motor control centers shall not be shipped to the job site until the as-built drawings are updated, complete, and reflect the actual as-shipped status of the equipment. Upon completion of the initial hardware testing, Control System Programmer shall conduct software testing for final inspection by the Owner. The Control System Integrator shall provide for time, equipment and support in their shop for Control System Programmer to completely demonstrate the functions of the entire control system. All control functions and all status and alarm monitoring and indication shall be demonstrated under simulated operating conditions. Simulating equipment shall be provided and wired into the control system for this testing. Testing shall be continued for the time period required by the Owner to observe and verify any revisions and as described above in the scheduling portion of this specification. Part 3 – Execution Field Quality Control Following installation by the Contractor, the Control System Integrator will verify the correctness of the interconnecting wiring and energize all control equipment in the field. Each point at the controller(s) shall be checked for proper functional operation through communication with the central computer. Field Tests The Control System Integrator in conjunction with the Contractor shall conduct field tests of all panels, motor control centers, VFD’s, and instrumentation in the presence of the Engineer after installation of the equipment at the site. Testing shall be conducted by physically actuating signaling devices, installing temporary jumpers, or artificially imposing signals on the field wiring. This shall be done to establish proper operation of the field devices, the integrity of the field wiring, and the proper connection of field devices to the panels. The Contractor and Control System Integrator shall coordinate with the Engineer to provide for as complete testing of the control system as is practical prior to placing the equipment on line for actual control and monitoring. The Contractor and Control System Integrator shall make corrections or repairs to the wiring and/or devices as necessary to provide proper operation of the system. After the initial testing is complete, commissioning shall be accomplished by the Control Systems Integrator, Control System Programmer, and Contractor, with the Owner and Engineer present. Commissioning shall include operation and verification of all control components and features of the entire control system. Each function shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Owner. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-36 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Repairs Should any part of the system fail during the test, the test shall be rescheduled and repeated to the satisfaction of the Owner after repairs. 17.92 Startup Part 1 – General Summary All testing, startup and operation shall not be cause for claims for delay by the Contractor, and all expenses accruing therefrom shall be deemed to be incidental to this contract. The Contractor shall make arrangement for all materials, supplies and labor necessary to efficiently complete the testing, startup and operation. Startup shall consist of testing, by a simulated operation, all operational equipment and controls. The purpose of these tests shall be to check that all equipment will function under operating conditions, that all interlocking controls and sequences are properly set, and that the facility will function as an operating unit. Scheduling Factory representatives of all major units shall be present for the startup phase. The test shall continue until it is demonstrated that all functions of controls and machinery are correct. Part 3 – Execution Field Quality Control When the installation of the Control System is substantially complete, the Contractor shall commence with calibration and field testing. Testing shall determine that all system components connect up correctly to each other so that the system works as designed. Refer to section 17.91 for field testing requirements. All components of the control system shall be calibrated by the Control System Integrator after completion of installation. Each component shall be adjusted to be within the Manufacturer's required range and for the specific application. Components that cannot be properly calibrated or that are found to exceed the Manufacturer's specified range or accuracy shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. The control system shall be placed into operation by the Control Systems Integrator and Control System Programmer. The Control System Integrator shall calibrate all instruments, indicators, recorders, loops, etc. and shall provide a five-point calibration test results sheet for each calibrated instrument supplied by the Control System Integrator. The five-point calibration shall include one point at: Minimum input range value, Maximum input range value, Midrange input value, no other point less than 25 percent of span to any other point. Test forms shall identify each instrument tested, input conditions vs. output signal results in tabulated form, and shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to final commissioning. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-37 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Repairs All deficiencies observed during the start-up will be corrected by the Contractor. 17.93 Training Part 1 – General Submittals Submit index of all training offered by PLC system equipment manufacturers including operation and maintenance. The Control System Integrator shall prepare and assemble specific instruction materials for each training session and shall supply such materials to the Owner at least 2 weeks prior to the time of the training. The Control System Programmer will provide additional training that is separate from this contract. Part 3 – Execution Hands-On Training The Control System Integrator shall conduct specifically organized training sessions in operation and maintenance of the control system for personnel employed by the Owner. The training sessions shall be conducted to educate and train the personnel in maintenance and operation of all components of the control system. Training shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Preventative maintenance procedures 2. Trouble-shooting 3. Calibration 4. Testing 5. Replacement of components At least one training session, at least 4 hours in duration, shall be conducted at the facility after start-up of the system. 17.94 Documentation 17.94.2 Operations and Maintenance Manuals Part 1 – General Summary Two types of operation and maintenance manuals (O&M) will be required for the contract: 1. General manuals for use by the Water Department staff for daily operation, maintenance and troubleshooting. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-38 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 2. Technical manuals for use by trained electronics technicians for technical and “board level” maintenance and repair. Submittals Prior to the receipt of payment for more than 50 percent of the work, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner five sets of acceptable manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions covering each piece of mechanical and electrical equipment, or equipment assembly, furnished under this contract. Each set of instructions shall be bound into multiple volumes; each volume to be complete with and index and bound in a suitable hard-cover binder. Manuals shall be assembled and indexed so that information on each piece of equipment can be readily found. Any additional operating and maintenance instructions from the Control Systems Programmer will be submitted separately. Quality Assurance Manuals shall be purposefully made for this installation, and general manuals which are vague or have limited applicability will not be accepted. The manuals shall be written in a non- technical format suitable for reading by water system operators with no previous automatic control equipment experience. The decision of the Owner on the acceptability of the manual shall be final. Part 2 – Products Materials The Control System Integrator shall prepare and assemble detailed operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the project general requirements. The manuals shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Name, location and phone number of nearest supplier and spare part warehouse. 2. Step by step operating procedures. 3. Narrative of overall system performance and operation. 4. Listing of all equipment setpoints. 5. Preventative maintenance procedures 6. Trouble-shooting of master and remote equipment. 7. Calibration 8. Testing 9. Replacement of components 10. System schematics / shop drawings 11. As-built elementary and one-line diagrams 12. Catalog data and complete parts list for all equipment and control devices 13. Listing of recommended spare parts. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 17 – Automatic Control FM Improvements 17-39 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\17 Automatic Control.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. 14. Listing of recommended maintenance tools and equipment. 15. Warranties. 16. Disassembly and reassembly instructions. All plans shall be provided on hard copy and in electronic form on disk. Electronic drawing files shall be provided in Auto CAD .dwg format with all “xrefs” bound. If “xrefs” are not bound, all “xref”.dwg files shall be provided unlinked with instructions to reestablish the links. Files shall be in Auto CAD 2010 or later format. 18-1 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\18 Measurement and Payment.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Division 18 Measurement and Payment 18.0 GENERAL It is the intention of these specifications that performance of work under bid items shall result in complete construction, in proper operating condition, of improvements identified in these written specifications and accompanying plans. Work and material not specifically listed in the proposal, but required according to the plans and specifications and general practice, shall be included in Contractor’s bid price. Bid Item 1 – Mobilization, Demobilization, Site Preparation, and Cleanup Lump sum price covers complete cost of furnishing, installing and testing, complete and in-place, all work and materials necessary to: move and organize equipment and personnel onto the job site; secure job site; provide and maintain necessary support facilities; obtain all necessary permits and licenses; prepare site for construction operations; maintain site and surrounding areas during construction, move all personnel and equipment off site after contract completion, cleanup site prior to final acceptance; strip parking lot lines disturbed during construction; and accomplish all other items of work not specifically listed in other divisions. Payment shall be lump sum. No more than 50 percent of bid amount for this item will be paid before final payment request, and this bid amount may not be more than 10 percent of value of total contract. Bid Item 2 – Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all temporary erosion and sedimentation control relating to construction of improvements as shown on the Plans and specified herein. Work includes, but is not limited to: silt fence, temporary trenching, temporary mulching, plastic sheeting, hydroseeding of all disturbed areas following construction, construction sedimentation control ponds and/or tanks; control of water; silt-filtration bags (Dirtbags) for dewatering water, temporary perforated-pipe flow dispersion pipelines, restoration of damage caused by storm events and all other work necessary for a complete installation of all temporary sedimentation and erosion control facilities. Payment shall be lump sum based on percentage of completion. Bid Item 3 – Site and Utility Work Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all site work and utilities relating to construction of improvements as shown on the Plans and specified herein. Work includes, but is not limited to: pot holing in street; structure excavation; trenching; backfill and compaction; site grading; temporary construction fencing; temporary stormwater control including treatment and disposal; removal and disposal of unsuitable materials; select backfill, bedding; monument restoration; appurtenances and all other work necessary for a complete installation of all facilities including the wet well, the valve vault, the sewer manholes, asphalt restoration, asphalt paving, overlay the cul-de-sac, parking lot striping, electrical building foundation, landscaping restoration and other site utilities. Site utilities include, but are not limited to: collection sewer, pressure sewer, storm piping, and underground utilities that may not be covered in another bid item. Other work involved City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 18 – Measurement and Payment FM Improvements 18-2 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\18 Measurement and Payment.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. includes the protection or relocation of existing utilities located within the area of construction that may include, but not limited to: telephone, street lighting, electrical, cable television, water and stormwater. Payment shall be lump sum based on percentage of completion. Bid Item 4 – Unscheduled Excavation This bid item will be used at the discretion of the Owner. In the event the Owner determines that the subgrade is unsatisfactory due to reasons beyond the control of the Contractor, the Owner may opt to have the Contractor over excavate the unsuitable material. The work associated with this bid item shall not be performed without written authorization of the Owner. No compensation will be paid for this item if it is not needed to complete the project. The price per cubic yard shall cover the complete cost of providing all materials, equipment and labor necessary for over-excavation of unsuitable native material found at the bottom of the excavation as shown on the plans and/or detailed in the contract specifications. This bid item is applicable for the wet well and valve vault pad and any other over-excavation deemed required by the Owner during construction. Work includes excavation of unsuitable material to a firm and unyielding subgrade, hauling, and disposal of unsuitable material. The Contractor must keep up to date and accurate records of removing all unsuitable material on-site and demonstrate it has exceeded the quantity shown on the plans for stripping. Payment shall be per cubic yard of material as measured in place. To receive payment for this bid item, the Owner must approve and measure all over-excavation. Failure to obtain approval of the Owner and/or failure to permit the Owner to measure over-excavation will result in no payment of the over-excavation Bid Item 5 – Unscheduled Structural Backfill This bid item will be used at the discretion of the Owner and the work associated with this bid item shall not be performed without written authorization of the Owner. No compensation will be paid for this item if it is not needed to complete the project. To receive payment for this bid item, the Owner must approve and measure all areas to be backfilled. Failure to obtain approval of the Owner and/or failure to permit the Owner to measure areas to be backfilled will result in no payment of the unscheduled structural backfill. The unit price per ton shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing structural backfill for backfilling potential unscheduled excavation and wet well and valve vault, subgrade stabilization in lieu of crushed surfacing base course at the discretion of the Owner, including all equipment and work for hauling, placing, compacting, handling, and stockpiling material. Payment shall be per ton of unscheduled import backfill permanently installed in place based on truck weight tickets. Bid Item 6 – Traffic Control Measurement for traffic control work will be based on the percentage of total work complete, by dollar value, at the time of measurement. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 18 – Measurement and Payment FM Improvements 18-3 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\18 Measurement and Payment.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. The lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all labor (e.g. flaggers), materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, for providing WSDOT certified Traffic Control Supervisor (TCS), certified flaggers, off-duty police officer(s) when working within 50 feet of any signalized intersection, furnishing, installing, maintaining, removing traffic control signs, VMS information boards, construction warning and detour signs, sequential arrow boards, traffic cones, barrels, barricades and the like, steel plating, pins, shims, temporary pavement markers and striping, removing, relocating, re-installing existing roadway signs, preparing, revising, and implementing any traffic control/detour plans required by the Contract Documents and right-of-way use permit, and conforming to the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and as directed by the Engineer and by the City’s Transportation Department. Also, included in the contract price is the cost to furnish traffic control services and equipment for construction surveying, staking, and as-building. This bid item shall also include complete costs for preparing Traffic Control Plans as necessary for approval by the permitting agency. Payment for traffic control will be made at the measured percentage amount for the pay period times the lump sum amount Bid. Bid Item 7 – Trench Safety and Shoring Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of trench safety and shoring including: all labor, materials, and equipment for the installation of the shoring work as detailed in the contract specifications; as required by applicable codes and standards, whether shown on the Plans or not. Payment shall be lump sum based on percentage of completion. Bid Item 8 – Air Vacuum Release Assembly Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all work, materials, and equipment necessary for the installation of the air-vacuum release assembly near the entrance to the gated community on Lake Youngs Way SE as shown on the plans and detailed in the specifications. The traffic control cost associated with this work is paid under Bid Item No. 6. Payment shall be lump sum. Bid Item 9 – Forcemain Access Manhole The unit price per each shall cover the complete cost of providing all work, materials, and equipment necessary for the installation of the forcemain access manhole as shown on the plans and detailed in the specifications. The traffic control cost associated with this work is paid under Bid Item No. 6. Payment shall be per each forcemain access manhole installed. Bid Item 10 – Radio Frequency Identification Device (RFID) Installation The unit price per each shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing the RFID devices along the existing forcemain as shown on the plans and detailed in the specifications. The work associated with this bid item includes but is not limited to the following: locating City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 18 – Measurement and Payment FM Improvements 18-4 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\18 Measurement and Payment.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. and potholing the existing forcemain using a vactor truck; providing and installing the RFID device; recording the RFID information; backfill and repair the potholes. The traffic control cost associated with this work is paid under Bid Item No. 6. Payment shall be per each of the RFID device installed. Bid Item 11 – Radio Frequency Identification Device (RFID) Data Processing and Delivery Lump sum price shall cover the complete cost of providing all work, materials, and equipment necessary to process all the recorded data from the installed RFID devices along the existing forcemain and prepare the data for the City use in their GIS system. Payment shall be lump sum. Bid Item 12 – Road Repair This bid item will be used at the discretion of the Owner. In the event the Owner determines that the existing road is damaged due to reasons beyond the control of the Contractor, the Owner may opt to have the Contractor saw cut and repair the existing road as directed in the field. The work associated with this bid item shall not be performed without written authorization of the Owner. No compensation will be paid for this item if it is not needed to complete the project. The unit price per square feet shall cover the complete cost of providing all work, materials, and equipment necessary for the road repair as directed by the City. The work includes but is not limited to the following: saw cut, remove and dispose the damaged roadway, compact the existing subgrade, and place and compact HMA as shown on the plans and detailed in the specifications. The traffic control cost associated with this work is paid under Bid Item No. 6. Payment shall be per square feet of road repair as directed by the City. Bid Item 13 – Seal Coat Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all work, materials, and equipment necessary for placing the full seal coat from the intersection between Cedar Ridge Drive SE (shown as Lake Youngs Way SE in Google Maps) and SE 8th Drive, east northeast along SE 8th Drive, and east along SE 8th Place to edge of the overlay limit at the cul-de-sac as shown on the plans and detailed in the specifications. The traffic control cost associated with this work is paid under Bid Item No. 6. Payment shall be lump sum. Bid Item 14 – Dewatering Lump sum price shown shall cover the cost for furnishing all plans, material, labor and equipment necessary to install a dewatering system to facilitate excavations necessary to install lift station dry vault, wet well, and gravity sewer system. The dewatering system includes water treatment facilities, to reduce turbidity, dissipate energy at the point of City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 18 – Measurement and Payment FM Improvements 18-5 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\18 Measurement and Payment.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. discharge, and aerate water. The cost shall cover all pumps, piping, power, and any other items necessary to provide this system. Payment shall be lump sump based on percentage of completion. Bid Item 15 – Lift Station Structural Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all materials, equipment and labor necessary for constructing the wet well, valve vault, and flowmeter manhole, complete as shown on the Plans and detailed in the contract specifications including: pre - cast concrete, and supports, miscellaneous metal work, access hatches, waterproofing, patching, repairing, and testing. Cost for installing the wet well, valve and flow meter vault is covered under Bid Item No. 3. Payment shall be lump sum based on percentage of completion. Bid Item 16 – Electrical Building Structural Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all materials, equipment and labor necessary for constructing the electrical building structure completes as shown on the Plans and detailed in the contract specifications including: concrete foundation, masonry, miscellaneous metal work, doors, ceilings, insulation, carpentry, roof, waterproofing, rain gutters, electrical building HVAC, patching, and repairing. Payment shall be lump sum based on percentage of completion. Bid Item 17 – Lift Station Pumps and Motors Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the duplex submersible pump and electric motor system as shown on the Plans and detailed in the contract specifications. Price shall include cost of materials and installation of rail system, cabling, testing, and startup. Payment shall be lump sum based on percentage of completion. Bid Item 18 – Mechanical Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the mechanical work shown on the Plans and detailed in the contract specifications, including all mechanical work and equipment not listed in the other bid items. Payment shall be lump sum based on percentage complete. Bid Item 19 – Electrical The lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the electrical work shown on the Plans, and detailed in the contract specifications. Payment shall be lump sum based on percentage complete. City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 18 – Measurement and Payment FM Improvements 18-6 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\18 Measurement and Payment.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. Bid Item 20 – Automatic Control Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the installation of the automatic control system as shown on the Plans, and detailed in Division 17 of the contract specifications. Payment shall be lump sum based on percentage complete. Bid Item 21 – Finishes Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for painting and coating all surfaces of the improvements as shown on the Plans and detailed in the technical specifications. Payment shall be lump sum based on percentage complete. Bid Item 22 – Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals and On-site Owner Training Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all labor and materials necessary to provide 3 copies of the Operations and Maintenance Manuals as described in the specifications and train the Owner’s personnel on site with manufacturer certified representatives for the following items: Pumps and Motors, Power and Telemetry equipment, and Mag Meters as shown on the Plans and detailed in the contract specifications. Payment shall be lump sum. Partial payment of up to 20 percent ($500) of the total bid item cost is allowed prior to initial owner training. Final 80 percent ($2,000) of payment shall not be paid until O&M Manuals are determined complete by the Owner and Engineer and the Owner are satisfied that all training has been accomplished to operate the improvements. Cost for this bid item shall be $2,500. Bid Item 23 – Construction Records Lump sum price shown shall cover the complete cost of providing all mark-up plans necessary for the Owner to create accurate construction records as detailed in the specifications. The work includes surveying all structures and utilities to determine their constructed locations and elevations, records of all mechanical and electrical equipment for maintenance purposes. Failure to comply with the as-built requirements and furnish acceptable construction records will result in non-payment of this bid item. Payment for this work will not be made prior to the final payment. Cost for this bid item shall be $5,000. Bid Item 24 – Minor Change Payments or credits for changes amounting to $10,000 or less may be made under the Bid item “Minor Change”. At the discretion of the City, this procedure for Minor Changes may be used in lieu of the more formal procedure as outlined in Section 1-04.4, Changes, in the Washington State Department of Standards and Specifications Manual. The Contractor will be provided a copy of the completed order for Minor Change. The agreement for the Minor Change will be documented by signature of the Contractor, or notation of verbal agreement. If the Contractor is in disagreement with anything required by City of Renton Summer 2018 Falcon Ridge LS Replacement and Division 18 – Measurement and Payment FM Improvements 18-7 Z:\Bothell\Data\REN\117-038\Specs\18 Measurement and Payment.docx 7/5/2018 10:01 AM © 2018 RH2 Engineering, Inc. the order for Minor Change, the Contractor may protest the order as provided in Section 1-04.5, Procedure and Protest by the Contractor, in the Washington State Department of Standards and Specifications Manual. Payments or credits will be determined in accordance with Section 1-09.4, Equitable Adjustment, in the Washington State Department of Standards and Specifications Manual. For the purpose of providing a common Proposal for all Bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered an amount for “Minor Change” in the Proposal to become a part of the Bid by the Contractor. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APPENDICES APPENDIX A CITY OF RENTON STANDARD DETAILS PATCHED AREA i A q COVER COVER PER STD PLAN 401 SEE NOTE 9) SEAL WITH AR 4000 OR APPROVED EQUAL AND DRY SAND AFTER P L A N PATCHING NTS OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF SEE NOTE 9) ADJUSTMENT RING AND x SEE NOTE 2 X gOTTOM OF FRAME t---- MORTAR JOINT(S) (3/8" MIN.-2" MAX.) ADJUSTMENT RING (1" MIN.). SEE SEE NOTE 3 AND SPECIAL PROVISION NOTE 6. 7-05.3(1). SECTION A-A NOTES 1. REMOVE PAVEMENT AND BASE MATERIALS FOR A DISTANCE 5. CONSTRUCTION AND ADJUSTMENT SHALL BE PERFORMED WHICH IS EQUAL TO THE DIAMETER OF THE FRAME PLUS ONE ONLY BY A JOURNEYMAN MASON. FOOT(MIN.). ADJUST CASTING FRAME TO PAVEMENT SURFACE USING RISER RINGS AND MORTAR. 6. ADJUSTMENT OF THE FRAME TO GRADE SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED WITH ADJUSTMENT RINGS AND MORTAR ONLY. 2. REPLACE EXCAVATED MATERIAL WITH A MINIMUM OF 8"OF THE USE OF SHIMS IS PROHIBITED. HMA CLASS"PG 64-22(OR TO A DEPTH THAT S 2"BELOW THE BOTTOM OF THE UPPER ADJUSTMENT RING WHICHEVER 7• FRAME SHALL BE ADJUSTED TO PAVEMENT GRADE BY IS GREATER)OR AS APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. TAPPING UNTIL FRAME IS FLUSH WITH PAVEMENT AS DETERMINED WITH A STRAIGHT EDGE OF SUFFICIENT LENGTH. 3. ADJUSTMENT RINGS AND FRAME SHALL BE FULLY BEDDED IN MORTAR.MORTAR SHALL BE ASTM C270 FOR TYPE S. 8. ALL MORTAR JOINTS SHALL BE TRIMMED FLUSH AND REMAIN VISIBLE UPON COMPLETION. 4. MORTAR SHALL BE MIXED AND APPLIED PER MANUFACTURERS DIRECTIONS. 9. X=1'-0"MIN.TO 2'-6"MAX.-PER ENGINEER'S INSTRUCTION STD. PLAN - 106 j PUBLIC WORKS TY'CAL CONSTRUCTION A ROVED: al' DEPARTMENT AND ADJUSTMENT OF flMANNOLERISER3 e o r>tor DA E APPENDIX B EXISTING STATION AND FORCE MAIN RECORD DRAWINGS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK j EXISTING 12 t WATER MAI 1 0m CONNECT FORCE MAIN TO EXISTING MANHOLE SEE DETAIL BELOW NOTE.' OLYMPIC PIPE LINE WILL VERIFY LOCATION OF HIGH PRESSURE PETROLEUM LINE NOTE.' CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY LOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITY CROSSINGS. ZACK- i.-6-737 _A_HFAD NW J/_4 Sl_-C I Vhrrl Cki F,?v E DATA L,O i PC S R T 5T "SS87,,ST 4700 2!_ AS—BUILT per Section 7-4 Construction Manual for- Municipal Public Works Construction 1973 , B Date ti ti G STORMco -EXISTIN So, 69' STA 5 05 EXWNN6 W` CULV-PT z7ZZ7,:7 GLNERAI. NOTES Z*, EXISTING ST6R_ 9'.0 SEWER PIPE ------ S_U, 0 2 SEX. VALVE i 1 1 J. SA OF COVER MINIMU1,1, SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAIK TO HAVE 3.5' P IVEMENT EDGE STA 2 20 a 2 0 cmlp CmVEH, SPOULDER EDGE 2. HIGH POTNr TO BE FIELD LOCATED FOR LOCATTOj OF AIR RELIE: ExmnNG rw-vERTS NEW Id"O CULVERT STA 9+65 CENTERLINE VALVE. EXISTING 1 1. INSTALL (1) 4"0 45' BENI) WATER MAIN CONCRETE BLOCKING 3, PLACE 1 FOOT CUNCRE 'ECAP OVER SANITARY FORCE MAIN AT it I H14, ALL WATER MAIN CROSSINGS. f"' EXLSTWS ASPHALT EXISTING RIM= 36777 ix 4"FLXMJXMJ TEE PLAN w _,4r'-DUCT111-F IRON PIPE EXISTING STEPS . > X TRANSITION COUP APPROVED BY EXISTING MANHOLE 0 COUPT'FVC FORCE MAIN $e_ALE Sd ro BLIND LFLANGE CITY OF RENTON,- DIRECTOR OF PUBLIC WORKS 357. A[ i I I 11 1 I A L J- NE /, SEC, 20, TWP 23 N, R 5 E, W.M. STA 13 +90 W LT N 22 R.O.W 1 INSTALL (04° 22 1/2° BEND P - 0X 34-44 i CONCRETE BLOCKING 1 -61 111 ;7 STA 4 4 J INSTALL AIR RELIEF ASSEMBLY i I T 3 13 +97.42 43 °00'00` 162.57' 137"02` 71.92' a 4 15 +34.44 43°0003 212.57' 159.51 83. 5 16 "53.97 56 °0 €`30 130,16 a A PLAN SCALE: 1'° $ 503 h., 4"0 PVC N SEC. 20, TW 3 ft, R 5 FE, VV N1 T- Ir I III I10 Q i 114 I 113 «* s J'g'41Z4 ss q i /6' iol X109 See Sheet a` \ Sta /zfeO • O - Stec /4t/ 14 '° G los 107 / \ 4'r 80 6' 105 a* f 104 16 r 77 20 iO I. SANITARY SEWER PUMP STATION SHALL BE SMITH A i3 •.2 ... \/+ N LOVELESS WET WELL MOUNTED LIFT STATION WITH DUPLEX SEWAGE PUMPS. 3 OS 11,11 ; t t/ STA I a 43 /$ 4/ C 42 45 V. 370.3 32 71z1i PUMP STATION NOTES 107 / \ 4'r 80 6' 105 a* f 104 16 r 77 20 iO BUILT per Section 7 -4 Construction Manual 4o`r Municipal Public Works Construction 1973 t By -V Bate New Side Sewers To Be Laid In d Common Trenches - _ ' 24" Separation Wherever .%`_~_ .it43 It s 0, Possible (Typical) —4- 7 See Sheet /6 / 97 / + `' _ - ADDED V PVC SIDE SEWERS Pt , Slat Leng'M1 (Lt. lRt.l 5 IS L' i d $ e ' 3 +Y 35 Rt 93 ; / 2/ +/O 61 , _ 14 a1 25 u. 5191 ' 9 Lt r O s5 1 Et. j \/7\ 1 4 Lt. 4. \,. /• \ 99 - / '. p / MH 15 S\a .ZOf 90 63 / 1s•os 15 L'. J" K: / 15 Rt 5 \ 100 - 46' 5./ PJ ` 2 *8s.. \ t,3s 15 R' O- 60 64 11ss at0- ` 19 -55 11v651915 Rt. ry/ 3a Lt t' 101 / 1<• f / „' / 19+55 L ' l I'll 30' Rt. 103 102 5 .? l \ 59 1 3z L1 yt . 4 \ 9 \ ... 20:4U1HYk 15 12, Lt. L 17 DAV, RVE MN 14 55 Sta /7 +/5 Cr O 38, /6" 2'.et ?* 2%i 2 r a i :3. .e4 glg... '._ ,„., -.- _,„„ 54 50 r 51 52 \ 53 Yv These Plans Were Revised By Barghausen Consulting Engineers, Inc., o Meters o D/vv--m/ YS //Y In August Of 1984 To Reflect The DETE/2M //ED 8Y d U /GOE.E / i ` i Addition r Side Sewers And Water O +• eters For Servicing The proposed N f R e r <« 1 s i ry r I Af A I A I I I I I t r r,® . 'm ® r- 17, 0 n 1n 11 10 11) 1 /. 1 r 1r- 17 10 I. SANITARY SEWER PUMP STATION SHALL BE SMITH LOVELESS WET WELL MOUNTED LIFT STATION WITH DUPLEX SEWAGE PUMPS. 2'•0 SEWER MANHOLE 2. PUMPS SHALL BE SMITH LOVELESS 10 HP 4626 32 SEWAGE PUMPS, 1760 RPM WITH 10 1/811 S4122 48 t 359.no HL ON $ALARM ON IF NO PUMP ON 958.so LL oN MPELLER OR APPROVED EQUAL. 11 3, AUXILIARY POWER CONNECTION REQUIRED ON LIFT - 49 ,1 357.2s LL OFF STATION. TYPE OF HOOKUP SHALL MATCH CITY OF 356.75 HL OFF $ALARM ON IF No PUMP OFF RENTON EMERGENCY GENERATOR CONNECTION. SLOPED SIDES 11 ANGLE 11,11. New Side Sewers To Be Laid In Common'Trenches 24 Separation r Wherever t, yv /G2 BUILT per Section 7 -4 Construction Manual 4o`r Municipal Public Works Construction 1973 t By -V Bate New Side Sewers To Be Laid In d Common Trenches - _ ' 24" Separation Wherever .%`_~_ .it43 It s 0, Possible (Typical) —4- 7 See Sheet /6 / 97 / + `' _ - ADDED V PVC SIDE SEWERS Pt , Slat Leng'M1 (Lt. lRt.l 5 IS L' i d $ e ' 3 +Y 35 Rt 93 ; / 2/ +/O 61 , _ 14 a1 25 u. 5191 ' 9 Lt r O s5 1 Et. j \/7\ 1 4 Lt. 4. \,. /• \ 99 - / '. p / MH 15 S\a .ZOf 90 63 / 1s•os 15 L'. J" K: / 15 Rt 5 \ 100 - 46' 5./ PJ ` 2 *8s.. \ t,3s 15 R' O- 60 64 11ss at0- ` 19 -55 11v651915 Rt. ry/ 3a Lt t' 101 / 1<• f / „' / 19+55 L ' l I'll 30' Rt. 103 102 5 .? l \ 59 1 3z L1 yt . 4 \ 9 \ ... 20:4U1HYk 15 12, Lt. L 17 DAV, RVE MN 14 55 Sta /7 +/5 Cr O 38, /6" 2'.et ?* 2%i 2 r a i :3. .e4 glg... '._ ,„., -.- _,„„ 54 50 r 51 52 \ 53 Yv These Plans Were Revised By Barghausen Consulting Engineers, Inc., o Meters o D/vv--m/ YS //Y In August Of 1984 To Reflect The DETE/2M //ED 8Y d U /GOE.E / i ` i Addition r Side Sewers And Water O +• eters For Servicing The proposed N f R e r <« 1 s i ry r I Af A I A I I I I I t r r,® . 'm ® r- 17, 0 n 1n 11 10 11) 1 /. 1 r 1r- 17 10 J J- it STAO *10 2dLT PUMP STATION New Side Sewers SEE DETAIL BELOW STA 5+46 20' LT ` BEND To Be Laid In Common Trenches - 24" Separation Wherever CAT -` N\ 28 LF 8° PVC INSTALL (I)4° 45 I) 4° II TE BEND 7 CONCRETE BLOCK a e DRAINAGE POND MHI OVERFLOW _ 10 6 NTROL STRUCTURE is CO #42STA 7, 20 LT. W RIM= 371.00 In V I.E. = 366.93(8 'OUT) cv 4 Q 20" SM /TH•LGVEL S W t We// M°urt see z"e-z' Wde Gatc 0 I z Fv a v vy v h see meet '6 AS —BUILT per Section 7 -4 Construction Manual ref pr for Municipal Public Works Construction 1973 By Date 11r/V/8, 127 NOTE: ASPHALT OVERLAY ON ROADS TO BE 1 -1/2', CLASS -B °- INSTALLATION TO BE COMPLETED ONCE ALL UTILITY SERVICE C',= `»NECTIONS ARE MADE AND ROAD BASE CUTS ARE RESTORED. 12t 1• STA 0+15 5 ' LT ".. g; M H 3 INSTALL (I)4 90° BEND '°`s=R I a,n ' _.. — '31` ]O' /125 CONCRETE BLIO CKI ri t MH 124 m....... e I zl `r zz 23 24i' 12320 25 8 22/ Br M11 IA 17 I / I e 26 /¢ 1 S t'¢'Bf6 / Lt ADDED V PVC SIDE SEIYERS 7174 - \ Station ° Ln tn cu IRt.I a4 MH9 1 +50 15 Lt 1+850 35 Rt. 127 L. F. PVC- e° pl Tree i =•\ 't / ', 6O 3.25 33 Rt s, Qgrge I / 30 Tiee _ IDVCeui Ei J,n/e'' ' /8 ^Cf1 V t'__" - ___.. -- \ \ . £., 5 +30 32 Rt. 6 / 2Y MH' /A ew Side SewersDESEWE y" Y, C_ Z-, - 4 "r rl rni• Tjra i, ° - r ck , witny'M °h%s °t '{ To Be Laid In / •\\ q / s.fio :s a cti F, / /cd if 1 ; +os Is Ll. c° / °/ = `• M. — Common Trenches - - h\ - - . o e Lt. RE = 371.50 , •o % * pO 24" Separation Wherever 31 \ •. ; 11 +Ya 3o Rt pv ^9 .Possible (Typical) /' '17 r` ,.YS :o LG, >.d P '- • li - u i r e. FF =371.5 116 115 s 30 RI. 32 31' LIS 90 0 t. a 9+ 7 i 'St¢ I /r /5 g - to -os us Rt 40' 14 WA YSFin/AG LGCAT /^x/ of W /GL $E DET£QMN O 8u/ pEe /\- /2 O -.e 1H SL10 3o RI. 33 x rllrw { • .- z'Cencrc%e cha.- n F / Y '` _' ` - 5e, SI]P2 Rt. >.., MHIO ydr,ta _ — — LIFT STATION AND TURNAROUND DETAIL 34 \ --- These Plans Were Revised By SCALE I1'= 20 rn / Barghausen Consulting Engineers Inc., REVI S ED PLAN' 6 °Of ,q,- ,;,'q y S.d S wer qo• 7• ' In August Of 1984 To Reflect The I `- Of4s SEaE %on o /ong 'Pd 35 \ //t3 - Addition Of Side Sewers And Water z6'® Len th Lie th aE Meters For Servicing The Proposed9PP r 'PE61STE E Loc eide Ser viC As Lots. All Other Improvements, Necey To Mai gin Except Where Noted On Sheet 1 of 17, 10 Sation B 4ween 36 / 37 I 38 i 39 Reflect Design And As -Built Information ((( Water Main, And Sida Service By Landmark Engineering Corporation. LIFT STATION AND TURNAROUND DETAIL SCALE 1 "- 20' ORIGINAL DESIGN SEE MODIFICATION AT RIGHT CO #427,20STA. 1 +27,20 LT. R IM =37 1 .00 I.E.= 366.93 (8" OUT) 4;7 -5> 0r 7 wry" I I I ! & I1 , I 1 a' :: :a' DATE: AUG 80 a SHT 14 of 17 m......_.._ _. ,..._..,_.,., ,. _,...„.. ,._ _.. ..,.._.....,_ ._ ,_...._.......,.,,.. ._......._ . ............,.,,......, .... ...., a„.„ ............._.. .",,.._._,,,..,,. m..._....,,,,,. n.,... ,.,__,.,,,.... e..._,..,., _...,, .,,,,..,..,,..,m..„...,...... ,,.......,,,mow w..,,._,_m, _,__.,.,.._e_ev,„__,n,,.__,W, ...._ 1 I I 1 1. 1 1 x i n n 4n '111 4n 4n at 4r r, 'In 4n NOTE': S 5/ New Side Sewers ON 2.41l 3 E ><ASC FO? UT /L /TY LOCATlO/S /A/ STA 5+46 20' LT ` BEND To Be Laid In Common Trenches - 24" Separation Wherever 5TIVFET. c /- z7 -sv } INSTALL (I)4° 45 I) 4° II TE BEND 7 CONCRETE BLOCK Possible (Typical) II \ 10 6 is CO #42STA 7, 20 LT. W RIM= 371.00 In V I.E. = 366.93(8 'OUT) cv 4 Q 20" SM /TH•LGVEL S W t We// M°urt see z"e-z' Wde Gatc 0 I z Fv a v vy v h see meet '6 AS —BUILT per Section 7 -4 Construction Manual ref pr for Municipal Public Works Construction 1973 By Date 11r/V/8, 127 NOTE: ASPHALT OVERLAY ON ROADS TO BE 1 -1/2', CLASS -B °- INSTALLATION TO BE COMPLETED ONCE ALL UTILITY SERVICE C',= `»NECTIONS ARE MADE AND ROAD BASE CUTS ARE RESTORED. 12t 1• STA 0+15 5 ' LT ".. g; M H 3 INSTALL (I)4 90° BEND '°`s=R I a,n ' _.. — '31` ]O' /125 CONCRETE BLIO CKI ri t MH 124 m....... e I zl `r zz 23 24i' 12320 25 8 22/ Br M11 IA 17 I / I e 26 /¢ 1 S t'¢'Bf6 / Lt ADDED V PVC SIDE SEIYERS 7174 - \ Station ° Ln tn cu IRt.I a4 MH9 1 +50 15 Lt 1+850 35 Rt. 127 L. F. PVC- e° pl Tree i =•\ 't / ', 6O 3.25 33 Rt s, Qgrge I / 30 Tiee _ IDVCeui Ei J,n/e'' ' /8 ^Cf1 V t'__" - ___.. -- \ \ . £., 5 +30 32 Rt. 6 / 2Y MH' /A ew Side SewersDESEWE y" Y, C_ Z-, - 4 "r rl rni• Tjra i, ° - r ck , witny'M °h%s °t '{ To Be Laid In / •\\ q / s.fio :s a cti F, / /cd if 1 ; +os Is Ll. c° / °/ = `• M. — Common Trenches - - h\ - - . o e Lt. RE = 371.50 , •o % * pO 24" Separation Wherever 31 \ •. ; 11 +Ya 3o Rt pv ^9 .Possible (Typical) /' '17 r` ,.YS :o LG, >.d P '- • li - u i r e. FF =371.5 116 115 s 30 RI. 32 31' LIS 90 0 t. a 9+ 7 i 'St¢ I /r /5 g - to -os us Rt 40' 14 WA YSFin/AG LGCAT /^x/ of W /GL $E DET£QMN O 8u/ pEe /\- /2 O -.e 1H SL10 3o RI. 33 x rllrw { • .- z'Cencrc%e cha.- n F / Y '` _' ` - 5e, SI]P2 Rt. >.., MHIO ydr,ta _ — — LIFT STATION AND TURNAROUND DETAIL 34 \ --- These Plans Were Revised By SCALE I1'= 20 rn / Barghausen Consulting Engineers Inc., REVI S ED PLAN' 6 °Of ,q,- ,;,'q y S.d S wer qo• 7• ' In August Of 1984 To Reflect The I `- Of4s SEaE %on o /ong 'Pd 35 \ //t3 - Addition Of Side Sewers And Water z6'® Len th Lie th aE Meters For Servicing The Proposed9PP r 'PE61STE E Loc eide Ser viC As Lots. All Other Improvements, Necey To Mai gin Except Where Noted On Sheet 1 of 17, 10 Sation B 4ween 36 / 37 I 38 i 39 Reflect Design And As -Built Information ((( Water Main, And Sida Service By Landmark Engineering Corporation. LIFT STATION AND TURNAROUND DETAIL SCALE 1 "- 20' ORIGINAL DESIGN SEE MODIFICATION AT RIGHT CO #427,20STA. 1 +27,20 LT. R IM =37 1 .00 I.E.= 366.93 (8" OUT) 4;7 -5> 0r 7 wry" I I I ! & I1 , I 1 a' :: :a' DATE: AUG 80 a SHT 14 of 17 m......_.._ _. ,..._..,_.,., ,. _,...„.. ,._ _.. ..,.._.....,_ ._ ,_...._.......,.,,.. ._......._ . ............,.,,......, .... ...., a„.„ ............._.. .",,.._._,,,..,,. m..._....,,,,,. n.,... ,.,__,.,,,.... e..._,..,., _...,, .,,,,..,..,,..,m..„...,...... ,,.......,,,mow w..,,._,_m, _,__.,.,.._e_ev,„__,n,,.__,W, ...._ 1 I I 1 1. 1 1 x i n n 4n '111 4n 4n at 4r r, 'In 4n